B-1722(22)FC6A SERIES
User’s ManualS AFETY P R ECAUTI ON S
 Read the "FC6A Series MICROSmart User’s Manual" to ensure correct operation before starting installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, andinspection of the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

 All FC6A Series MICROSmart modules are manufactured under IDEC’s rigorous quality control system, but users must add a backup or failsafe

provision to the control system when using the FC6A Series MICROSmart in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may becaused, in case the FC6A Series MICROSmart should fail.

 Care should be taken such that unauthorized access to the FC6A Series MICROSmart does not come from outside network connections. Please

note that the Company shall not be liable for any loss, damage or other expenses incurred directly or indirectly by unauthorized access, etc.

 In this manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance:

Warning

Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death.

 The FC6A Series MICROSmart is not designed for use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety. The FC6A Series

MICROSmart should not be used for such applications.

 When using the FC6A Series MICROSmart in applications (not described above) that require a high degree of reliability in terms of functionality

and precision, appropriate measures such as failsafe mechanisms and redundant mechanisms must be taken for the system containing the
FC6A Series MICROSmart. The following are specific examples.
 Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

 If relays or transistors in the FC6A Series MICROSmart output circuits should fail, outputs may remain at on or off state. For output signals

which may cause serious accidents, configure monitor circuits outside the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

 The FC6A Series MICROSmart self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors, stop programs, and turn outputs off.

Configure circuits so that the system containing the FC6A Series MICROSmart is not jeopardized when outputs turn off.

 Turn off power to the FC6A Series MICROSmart before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the FC6A Series

MICROSmart. Failure to turn power off may cause damage, electrical shocks or fire hazard. If such a circuit is configured inside the FC6A Series
MICROSmart, Failure of the FC6A Series MICROSmart may cause disorder of the control system, damage, or accidents.

 Special expertise is required to install, wire, program, and operate the FC6A Series MICROSmart. People without such expertise must not use

the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

 Install the FC6A Series MICROSmart according to the instructions described in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart User’s Manual". Improper

installation will result in falling, failure, or malfunction of the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

CautionCaution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to equipment.

 The FC6A Series MICROSmart is designed for installation in a cabinet. Do not install the FC6A Series MICROSmart outside a cabinet.
 Install the FC6A Series MICROSmart in environments described in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart User’s Manual". If the FC6A Series

MICROSmart is used in places where the FC6A Series MICROSmart is subjected to high-temperature, high-humidity, condensation, corrosive
gases, excessive vibrations, or excessive shocks, then electrical shocks, fire hazard, or malfunction will result.

 The environment for using the FC6A Series MICROSmart is "Pollution degree 2." Use the FC6A Series MICROSmart in environments of pollution

degree 2 (according to IEC 60664-1).

 Prevent the FC6A Series MICROSmart from falling while moving or transporting the FC6A Series MICROSmart, otherwise damage or malfunctionof the FC6A Series MICROSmart will result.

 Wiring must use lead sizes that are appropriate for the applied voltage and current. Terminal screws must be tightened with the prescribedtightening torque.

 Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the FC6A Series MICROSmart housing. Put a cover on the FC6A Series

MICROSmart modules during installation and wiring. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, or malfunction.

 Use a power supply of the rated value. Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the power line outside the FC6A Series MICROSmart. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A

Series MICROSmart is destined for Europe.

 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the output circuit. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MICROSmart is destined forEurope.

 Use an EU-approved circuit breaker. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MICROSmart is destined for Europe.
 Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the FC6A Series MICROSmart or when operating the FC6A Series MICROSmart to force outputs

on or off. Incorrect operation of the FC6A Series MICROSmart may cause machine damage or accidents.

 Do not connect the ground wire directly to the FC6A Series MICROSmart. Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing the FC6A Series

MICROSmart using an M4 or larger screw. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MICROSmart is destined for Europe.

 Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the FC6A Series MICROSmart modules.

 The FC6A Series MICROSmart contains electronic parts and batteries. When disposing of the FC6A Series MICROSmart, do so in accordancewith national and local regulations.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-1

A BOUT THI S M AN UALThis manual describes functions, specifications, installation, and operation basics of the FC6A Series MICROSmart. Also included isinformation on the powerful communications tools of the FC6A Series MICROSmart, as well as troubleshooting procedures.

Chapter 1: General I nform ation

General information about the FC6A Series MICROSmart functions and system configuration examples.

Chapter 2: P roduct Specifications

Specifications of the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

Chapter 3: I nstallation and W iring

Methods and precautions for installing and wiring the FC6A Series MICROSmart.

Chapter 4: Operation Basics

General information about setting up the basic FC6A Series MICROSmart system for programming, starting and stopping the FC6A
Series MICROSmart operation, and simple operating procedures. Everything from creating a user program using WindLDR on acomputer to monitoring the FC6A Series MICROSmart operation.

Chapter 5: Functions and Settings

Functions of the FC6A Series MICROSmart and convenient functions that you should know about in using the WindLDR (Windows
compatible) programming software.

Chapter 6: Devices

Descriptions of the allocations of devices such as inputs, outputs, internal relays, registers, timers, and counters that are used in
the basic and advanced instructions, as well as details about the allocations of special internal relays and special data registers.

Chapter 7: HM I Function

Functions that can be used with the HMI module connected to the CPU module and their operating procedures.

Chapter 8: I nstructions R eference

List of basic and advanced instructions to program the FC6A Series MICROSmart and descriptions of their functions.

Chapter 9: Analog I / O M odules

Overview of each analog module and their specifications. Module parameters and configuration methods are also described.

Chapter 10: I / O Cartridges

Overview of the cartridges and their specifications. Cartridge parameters and configuration methods are also described.

Chapter 11: SD M em ory Card

Functions that can be used with SD memory card connected to the CPU module and their specifications.

Chapter 12: M odule Configuration Editor

Description of the module configuration editor that can be used to configure parameters for the modules and cartridges.

Chapter 13: Troubleshooting

Procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the FC6A Series
MICROSmart.

Appendix

Additional information about type numbers, system software upgrade, and USB driver installation.

I ndexAlphabetical listing of key words.

Related Manuals
Refer to the following manuals according to your purpose.
Manual Name

Description

FC6A Series MICROSmart
User’s Manual (this manual)

Describes product specifications, installation and wiring instructions, instructions for basic programming
operations and special functions, device and instruction lists, and troubleshooting procedures for the
FC6A MICROSmart.

FC6A Series MICROSmart
Communication Manual

Describes specifications related to FC6A MICROSmart communication, descriptions of functions,configuration methods, and usage examples.

FC6A Series MICROSmart
PID Module User's Manual

Describes PID module specifications and functions.

Ladder Programming Manual

Describes basic operations for programming with ladders, monitoring methods, device and instruction
lists, and details of each instruction.

Network User's Manual

Describes how to configure and use specific communication protocols (BACnet/IP communication,
EtherNet/IP communication, MQTT communication).

IDEC Corporation makes the latest product manual PDFs available on our website at no additional cost.
Please download the latest product manual PDFs from our website.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-2

Publication history
December 2015
February 2016
April 2016
March 2017
August 2017
December 2017
March 2018
November 2018
May 2019
August 2019
December 2019
February 2020
April 2020
July 2020
October 2020
December 2020
July 2021
November 2021
February 2022
September 2022
November 2023
July 2024

First Edition
Second Edition
Third Edition
Fourth Edition
Fifth Edition
Sixth Edition
Seventh Edition
Eighth Edition
Ninth Edition
Tenth Edition
Eleventh Edition
Twelfth Edition
Thirteenth Edition
Fourteenth Edition
Fifteenth Edition
Sixteenth Edition
Seventeenth Edition
Eighteenth Edition
Nineteenth Edition
Twentieth Edition
Twenty-first Edition
Twenty-second Edition

Caution All rights in this document belong to IDEC Corporation. It may not be reproduced, reprinted, sold, transferred or rented without our permission.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 Every effort has been made to ensure the content of the product, but if you find any suspicious points or mistakes, please contact the store

where you purchased the product or our sales office or branch office.

Trademarks

WindLDR and MICROSmart are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners.

Preface-3

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Regarding laws and compatible standards

This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved, as shown below.
European laws and standards
This product complies with the following EU directives.


Low Voltage Directive
EMC Directive
RoHS Directive
RE Directive (FC6A-PC4 only)

To comply with these directives, this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the following international andEuropean standard.
 IEC/EN 61131-2: 2007
 EN IEC 63000
 EN301 489-1 V2.1.1& EN301 489-17 V2.1.1 (FC6A-PC4 only)

For details on the compatible standards and EU Directives, contact the distributor from which you purchased this product or visit our web site.
North America laws and standards
This product complies with the following standards.

UL508*1
UL61010-1*1
UL61010-2-201*1
CSA C22.2 No.142*1
CSA C22.2 No.61010-1*1
CSA C22.2 No.61010-2-201*1
ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.213*1 Certain FC6A Series MICROSmart models are not compatible. For details about applicable standards, please contact IDEC Corporation.









Marine standards
This product has been certified by the following classification societies.
(FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16P1DE and FC6A-C16K1DE are not certified.)ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
LR (Lloyd's Register)NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)* This product has not been certified for use on the bridge or deck.
For details on applicable standards and EU directives, please contact the dealer where purchased or check the IDEC website.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting fromthe use of or the application of IDEC PLC components, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit theirapplication and for choosing an application appropriate for the component, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. In no way does including these diagrams andexamples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application. To test and approve all
programs, prior to installation, is the responsibility of the end user.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-4

N AM ES AN D A BBR EVI ATI ON S U SED I N THI S M AN UAL
Item
FC6A

Generic term used to refer to All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module,
Plus CPU module.

CPU module
All-in-One CPU module
16-I/O type24-I/O type

Generic term used to refer to FC6A-C*****E CPU modules.
Generic term used to refer to All-in-One CPU modules with a total number of 16 inputs/
outputs.
(FC6A-C16****)
Generic term used to refer to All-in-One CPU modules with a total number of 24 inputs/
outputs.
(FC6A-C24****)CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

Generic term used to refer to FC6A-C40***EJ CPU modules.

Plus CPU module

Generic term used to refer to FC6A-D****CEE CPU modules.

Plus 16-I/O type

Generic term used to refer to Plus CPU modules with a total number of 16 inputs/outputs.
(FC6A-D16*****)

Plus 32-I/O type

Generic term used to refer to Plus CPU modules with a total number of 32 inputs/outputs.
(FC6A-D32*****)

40-I/O type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with a total number of 40 inputs/outputs.
(FC6A-C40****)

AC power type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with AC power supply.
(FC6A-C****AE, FC6A-C****AEJ)

DC power type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with 24VDC power supply or 12VDC power
supply.

24V DC power type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with 24VDC power supply.
(FC6A-C****CE, FC6A-C****CEJ, FC6A-D****CEE)

12V DC power type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with 12VDC power supply.
(FC6A-C****DE, FC6A-C****DEJ)

Relay output type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with relay outputs.
(FC6A-C**R**E, FC6A-C**R**E*)

Transistor output type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with transistor sink outputs or transistor
protection source outputs.

Transistor sink output type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with transistor sink outputs.
(FC6A-C**K**E, FC6A-C**K**E*, FC6A-D**K*CEE)Transistor protection source output
type

Generic term used to refer to CPU modules with transistor protection source outputs.
(FC6A-C**P**E, FC6A-C**P**E*, FC6A-D**P*CEE)

Expansion module
I/O module
Digital I/O module

Generic term used to refer to I/O module, communication module, PID module.
Generic term used to refer to digital I/O module, analog I/O module.
Generic term used to refer to digital input module, digital output module, digital mixed I/O
module.

Digital input module

Generic term used to refer to digital I/O modules with input terminals.
(FC6A-N****)

Digital output module

Generic term used to refer to digital I/O modules with output terminals.
(FC6A-R***, FC6A-T****)

Digital mixed I/O module

Generic term used to refer to digital I/O modules with input and output terminals.
(FC6A-M*****)

Analog I/O module

Generic term used to refer to analog input module, analog output module, analog mixed I/
O module.

Analog input module

Generic term used to refer to analog I/O modules with input terminals.
(FC6A-J***, FC6A-J4CN*, FC6A-J4CH**, FC6A-J8CU*)

Analog output module

Generic term used to refer to analog I/O modules with output terminals.
(FC6A-K***)

Analog mixed I/O module

Generic term used to refer to analog I/O modules with input and output terminals.
(FC6A-L03CN*, FC6A-L06A*)

Communication module
Serial communication module
PID module

Preface-5

Description
Generic term used to refer to CPU module, expansion module, expansion interface module,
HMI module, cartridge base module, cartridge.

Generic term used to refer to serial communication modules.
Generic term used to refer to FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524.
Generic term used to refer to FC6A-F2M*, FC6A-F2MR*.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUALItem

Description
Generic term used to refer to expansion interface module (Expander), expansion interface
module (remote master), expansion interface module (remote slave).

Expansion interface module
Expansion interface module (Expander)
Expansion interface module (remotemaster)

Generic term used to refer to FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24.

Expansion interface module (remote slave)

Generic term used to refer to FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4.

HMI module

FC6A-EXM1M
FC6A-PH1

Cartridge base module

FC6A-HPH1

Cartridge
I/O cartridge

Generic term used to refer to I/O cartridge, communication cartridge.
Generic term used to refer to digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge

Digital I/O cartridge

Generic term used to refer to I/O cartridges that extend digital inputs or outputs.
(FC6A-PN4, FC6A-PT*4)

Analog I/O cartridge

Generic term used to refer to I/O cartridges that extend analog inputs or outputs.
(FC6A-PJ2A, FC6A-P*2**)

Communication cartridge

Generic term used to refer to RS232C communication cartridge, RS485 communication
cartridge, Bluetooth communication cartridge.

RS232C communication cartridge

FC6A-PC1

RS485 communication cartridge

FC6A-PC3

Bluetooth communication cartridge

FC6A-PC4

WindLDR

This software is used to create ladder programs for the FC6A.

USB cable

Generic term used to refer to USB maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42), USB Mini-B
extension cable (HG9Z-XCE21).

User program

It refers to the data that combines function area settings and ladder programs configuredby the ladder programming software WindLDR.

Function area settings

These are various settings for FC6A.
These are the settings to be configured in the Settings tab and the module configuration
editor.

Ladder program

Generic term used to refer to main program, subroutine program, user-defined macros.

Main programThis is a program whose first row is the entry point of the ladder program. The entry pointis the starting point where the ladder program is executed. It is created in the Main
Program tab of the ladder program editor.
It refers to one of the following programs.
 Programs from the LABEL instruction to the LRET instruction

Subroutine program Programs created using WindLDR subroutine function(In the ladder program editor tab, it is indicated by [# Subroutine](#: subroutine number).)
User-defined macros

It is a program created using WindLDR user-defined macro function.
(In the ladder program editor tab, it is indicated by [# User-defined macro name] (#: userdefined macro number).

Source device

It is a device (the place where data is stored to execute an advanced instruction) on which
the operation is performed.

Destination device

It is a device that stores the operation result.

Timer instruction

Generic term used to refer to TML, TIM, TMH, TMS instruction.

Off-delay timer instruction

Generic term used to refer to TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO instruction.

Counter instruction

Generic term used to refer to CNT, CDP, CUD instruction.

Double-word counter instruction

Generic term used to refer to CNTD, CDPD, CUDD instruction.

Shift register instruction

Generic term used to refer to SFR, SFRN instruction.

Shot instruction

Generic term used to refer to SOTU, SOTD instruction.

Counter compare instruction

Generic term used to refer to CC=, CC>= instruction.

Compare instruction

Generic term used to refer to CMP=, CMP<>, CMP<, CMP>, CMP<=, CMP>= instruction.

Pulse output instruction

Generic term used to refer to PULS, PWM, RAMP, RAMPL, ARAMP, ABS, JOG instruction.

Dual/teaching timer instruction

Generic term used to refer to DTIM, DTML, DTMH, DTMS, TTIM instruction.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-6

Name of WindLDRName Used in this Manual

WindLDR Operating Procedure

Function area settings

Configuration tab > Function Area Settings group

Monitors

Select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor.

PLC status

Select Online > PLC > Status.

Communication settings

Select Online > Communication > Set Up.

Modbus master request table

On the Configuration tab, in Function Area Settings, click Communication Ports, and in thedisplayed Function Area Settings dialog box, for Communication Mode under Communication
Ports, select Modbus RTU Master or Modbus TCP Client

Application button

The button displayed on the left side of the menu bar. Click to display the menu with New, Save, andSave As, recent projects, WindLDR Options, and Exit WindLDR.

Preface-7

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUALTABLE OF C ON TEN TS
C HAP TER 1:C HAP TER 2:

C HAP TER 3:

C HAP TER 4:

Safety Precautions............................................................................................................................. Preface-1
About This Manual............................................................................................................................. Preface-2
Names and Abbreviations Used in this Manual ..................................................................................... Preface-5

General I nform ation

About the FC6A ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Features ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Special Functions......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Communication Functions .......................................................................................................................... 1-12
Maintenance Communication...................................................................................................................... 1-14
User Communication.................................................................................................................................. 1-15
Modbus Communication............................................................................................................................. 1-15
Data Link Communication .......................................................................................................................... 1-16
MC Protocol Communication....................................................................................................................... 1-16
Ethernet Communication............................................................................................................................ 1-17
Operator Interface Connectivity .................................................................................................................. 1-18
BACnet/IP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 1-19
EtherNet/IP Communication ....................................................................................................................... 1-20
MQTT Communication ............................................................................................................................... 1-21
Using J1939 Communication ...................................................................................................................... 1-21

Product Specifications

Normal Operating Conditions........................................................................................................................ 2-1
CPU Module ................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Digital I/O Modules.................................................................................................................................... 2-69
Analog I/O Modules ................................................................................................................................. 2-105
PID Module ............................................................................................................................................. 2-127
Communication Modules .......................................................................................................................... 2-137
Expansion Interface Modules.................................................................................................................... 2-143
HMI Module ............................................................................................................................................ 2-160
Cartridge Base Module ............................................................................................................................. 2-162
Cartridges ............................................................................................................................................... 2-164
Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................. 2-177
Rating at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C/65°C ......................................................................... 2-186

I nstallation and W iring

Installation Location .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Assembly Methods....................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Mounting on DIN Rail ................................................................................................................................ 3-10
Input/Output Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Power Supply and Power Supply Wiring ...................................................................................................... 3-20
Using the Ports ......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Using an SD Memory Card ......................................................................................................................... 3-30
Replacing the Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................... 3-34
Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC ........................................................................................ 3-37
Terminal Connection.................................................................................................................................. 3-45
Wiring the CAN J1939 Bus ......................................................................................................................... 3-55

Operation Basics

Start WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
PLC Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Create Program ........................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Protect Project ............................................................................................................................................ 4-8
Save Project................................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Simulate Operation.................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Download Program .................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Monitor Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 4-13
Exit WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 4-13
Windows Displayed in the Workspace ......................................................................................................... 4-14
Checking the WindLDR Version Number ...................................................................................................... 4-17
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-8

TABLE OF C ON TEN TS

C HAP TER 5:

C HAP TER 6:
C HAP TER 7:

C HAP TER 8:

Preface-9

Ladder Program Operation..........................................................................................................................4-18
Start/Stop Operation ..................................................................................................................................4-19

Functions and Settings

Function List............................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Function Area Settings ................................................................................................................................ 5-3
Stop Input and Reset Input ......................................................................................................................... 5-5
Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error ......................................................................................................... 5-8
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up................................................................................................................... 5-9
Function Switch Configuration.....................................................................................................................5-10
Memory Backup .........................................................................................................................................5-12
High-Speed Counter ...................................................................................................................................5-14
Catch Input ...............................................................................................................................................5-34
Interrupt Input ..........................................................................................................................................5-36
Frequency Measurement ............................................................................................................................5-39
Input Filter ................................................................................................................................................5-41
Analog Voltage Input .................................................................................................................................5-43
Analog Potentiometer.................................................................................................................................5-45
Timer Interrupt..........................................................................................................................................5-47
Forced I/O Function ...................................................................................................................................5-49
External Memory Devices............................................................................................................................5-53
Log Data File Size ......................................................................................................................................5-54
32-bit Data Storage Setting ........................................................................................................................5-55
User Program Protection.............................................................................................................................5-57
Watchdog Timer Setting .............................................................................................................................5-60
Constant Scan Time ...................................................................................................................................5-61
Time Zone.................................................................................................................................................5-62
Daylight Savings Time ................................................................................................................................5-63
Clock Function ...........................................................................................................................................5-64
Battery Monitor..........................................................................................................................................5-67
USB Boot...................................................................................................................................................5-69
User Program Capacity ...............................................................................................................................5-71
Online Edit ................................................................................................................................................5-72

Devices

Device Addresses........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
Special Internal Relay.................................................................................................................................. 6-4
Special Data Register .................................................................................................................................6-17

HM I Function

HMI Function Overview ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
LCD Settings............................................................................................................................................... 7-3
About the Menu Screen ............................................................................................................................... 7-5
Basic Operations ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Switching Run/Stop..................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Editing Programs .......................................................................................................................................7-10
FC6A Environment Settings.........................................................................................................................7-12
Monitoring the FC6A...................................................................................................................................7-32
Checking/Clearing Error Information............................................................................................................7-38
Displaying Arbitrary Messages.....................................................................................................................7-40
SD Memory Card Maintenance ....................................................................................................................7-41
Reading and Writing Recipe Files ................................................................................................................7-43
Uploading/Downloading the User Program ...................................................................................................7-45
System Menu Hierarchy Diagram ................................................................................................................7-47
Communication Functions...........................................................................................................................7-48

I nstructions R eference

Basic Instruction List ................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Advanced Instruction List ............................................................................................................................ 8-3
Structure of an Advanced Instruction ........................................................................................................... 8-6
FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUALTABLE OF C ON TEN TS

C HAP TER 9:
C HAP TER 10:
C HAP TER 11:

C HAP TER 12:
C HAP TER 13:

A P P ENDI X

Input Condition for Advanced Instructions..................................................................................................... 8-6
Source and Destination Devices.................................................................................................................... 8-6
Using Timer or Counter as Source Device...................................................................................................... 8-6
Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device ............................................................................................... 8-6
Data Types for Advanced Instructions ........................................................................................................... 8-7
Discontinuity of Device Areas ..................................................................................................................... 8-11
NOP (No Operation) .................................................................................................................................. 8-11
Device Addressing for Instruction Execution ................................................................................................ 8-12

Analog I / O M odules

Analog I/O Module Overview ........................................................................................................................ 9-1
Analog I/O Module Parameter Settings.......................................................................................................... 9-4
Device Allocation ....................................................................................................................................... 9-16

I / O Cartridges

Digital I/O Cartridge .................................................................................................................................. 10-1
Analog I/O Cartridge ................................................................................................................................. 10-7

SD M em ory Card

SD Memory Card Overview......................................................................................................................... 11-1
Save Log Data........................................................................................................................................... 11-7
Recipe Function......................................................................................................................................... 11-8
SD Memory Card Configuration Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 11-23
Download from SD Memory Card.............................................................................................................. 11-27
autoexec.ini File Format ..................................................................................................................... 11-36
Upload to SD Memory Card ...................................................................................................................... 11-43
Used Special Devices ............................................................................................................................... 11-45
SD Memory Card Maintenance with Data File Manager ............................................................................... 11-49

M odule Configuration Editor

Module Configuration Editor Overview......................................................................................................... 12-1
Basic Module Configuration Editor Operations.............................................................................................. 12-3

Troubleshooting

Reading Error Data.................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Special Data Registers for Error Information ................................................................................................ 13-3
General Error Codes .................................................................................................................................. 13-3
FC6A Operating Status, Output, and ERR LED during Errors ......................................................................... 13-4
Error Causes and Actions ........................................................................................................................... 13-4
Troubleshooting Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 13-6

Type List.....................................................................................................................................................A-1
System Software .........................................................................................................................................A-9
Fonts........................................................................................................................................................ A-12
Cables ...................................................................................................................................................... A-14
HMI Screen Transition Diagram .................................................................................................................. A-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Preface-10

TABLE OF C ON TEN TS

Preface-11

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
I ntroduction
This chapter describes FC6A functions and system configuration examples.

About the FC6A
The FC6A is a small, All-in-One CPU module or Plus CPU module programmable PLC with excellent expandability and a variety ofcommunication functions. The CPU modules are equipped with 16-, 24-, 32-, or 40-I/Os and support either 100 to 240V AC, 24V
DC, or 12V DC power supplies.
Expansion modules, cartridges, HMI modules, and other modules can be connected to the CPU module. Inputs, outputs, andcommunication ports can be expanded according to application.
The FC6A can also be linked to various types of external devices with communication functions that include maintenancecommunication, user communication, and Modbus communication. The FC6A is also equipped with functions for high-speed
counters, pulses, flow calculation, and data logging functions.
Programs used on the FC6A are created with WindLDR, easy-to-use, Windows-compatible ladder programming software. Thisladder programming software also supports the FC4A Series and the FC5A Series, so you can use your existing ladder program
resources.

Type Numbers
The notation for FC6A part numbers is as follows.
For details on the product specifications, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.

CPU module

FC6A - C 40 R 1 A E J
CAN J1939 function
J: CAN J1939 function
None: No CAN J1939 function
Ethernet port
E: Ethernet port ("EE" for two Ethernet ports)
None: No Ethernet port
Power supply
A: AC power type
C: 24V DC power type
D: 12V DC power type
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
3: MIL connector*1
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Output type
R: Relay output
K: Transistor sink output
P: Transistor protection source output
I/O points
16: 16 I/O points
24: 24 I/O points
32: 32 I/O points
40: 40 I/O points
Module type
C: All-in-One CPU module
D: Plus CPU module*1 The power supply terminals are a removable terminal block (screw fastened type).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-1

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
HMI module

FC6A - PH 1
Interface specification
1: Communication connector
Module type
PH: HMI module

Cartridge base module

FC6A - HPH1
Module type
HPH1: Cartridge base module

Digital I/O modules

FC6A - M 0 8 B R 1
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
3: MIL connector
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Output type
R: Relay output (Mixed I/O module only)
K: Transistor sink output
P: Transistor protection source output
None: No output
Input type
A1: 120V AC
B: 12/24V DC*1
None: No input
I/O points
08: 8 I/O points
16: 16 I/O points
24: 24 I/O points
32: 32 I/O points
Module type
N: Digital input module
R: Digital output module (Relay output)
T: Digital output module (Transistor output)
M: Digital mixed I/O module*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

1-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Analog I/O module

FC6A - J 4 C N 1

Isolation
Y: Isolated between channels
None: No isolation
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Input type
None: Voltage/current input
N: Voltage/current/resistance thermometer input
U: Thermistor/thermocouple input
H: Thermocouple input
Maximum resolution
A: 12 bits
C: 16 bits
I/O points
2: 2 I/O points
4: 4 I/O points
8: 8 I/O points
03: 3 I/O points
06: 6 I/O points
Module type
J: Analog input module
K: Analog output module
L: Mixed analog I/O module

PID module

FC6A - F 2 M R 1
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Output type
None: Voltage/current output
R: Relay output
Input type
M: Multi input
Control loop points
2: 2 points
Module type
F: PID module

Communication module

FC6A - SIF 5 2
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Number of ports
2: 2 ports
Communication specification
5: RS-232C or RS-485 selectable
Module type
SIF: Serial communication module

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-3

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Expansion interface module

FC6A - EXM 2
Terminal specification
1: Removable terminal block (Screw)
4: Removable terminal block (Push-in)
Module configuration
1M: Remote master
1S: Remote slave
2: Expander
Module type
EXM: Expansion interface module

Digital I/O cartridge

FC6A - P N 4
I/O points
4: 4 I/O points
Module type
PN : Digital input cartridge
PTS : Transistor source output cartridge
PTK : Transistor sink output cartridge

Analog I/O cartridge

FC6A - P K 2 A

V
Output type
V: Voltage output
W: Current output
None: No outputs
Input type
None: Voltage/current input
P: Resistance thermometer/thermocouple input
Maximum resolution
A: 12 bits
C: 16 bits
I/O points
2: 2 I/O points
Module type
PJ: Analog input cartridge
PK : Analog output cartridge

Communication cartridge

FC6A - P C 1
Communication/terminal specifications
1: RS232C communication/terminal block
3: RS485 communication/terminal block
4: Bluetooth communication
Module type
PC : Communication cartridge

1-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Connector

FC6A - P M T C K 1 1 P N 0 2
Quantity per pack
02: 2 items
Sale configuration
PN: 1 packNumber of pins
03: 3 pins
05: 5 pins
08: 8 pins
09: 9 pins
10: 10 pins
11: 11 pins
12: 12 pins
13: 13 pins
17: 17 pins
20: 20 pins
Silk-screen printing
S: Silk-screen printing for source outputs
K: Silk-screen printing for sink outputs
A: Silk-screen printing for AC input
C: Silk-screen printing for 24-V DC input
D: Silk-screen printing for 12-V DC input
None: No silk-screen printing
Terminal specification
A: 5.08 mm pitch, side connection
B: 5.08 mm pitch, front connection
C: 3.81 mm pitch, front connection
D: 5.08 mm pitch, side connection(dedicated for use with the CPU module
power supply terminal)
E: Front connection with screw flange(dedicated for use with CAN communication)
None: MIL connector*1
Wiring connection configuration
T: Screw fastened type
S: Push-in type
C: MIL connector*1
Product classification
PM: Connector*1 The type number for the MIL connector starts with "FC4A-" instead of "FC6A-".

Cable

FC9Z - H 0 5 0 A 2 0
Number of pins
20: 20 pins
Input type
A: Shielded straight cable
B: Non-shielded straight cable
Cable length
050: 0.5 m
100: 1 m
200: 2 m
300: 3 m
Cable classification
H: Flat cable

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-5

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Battery holder

FC6A - B H 1 P N 0 2
Quantity per pack
02: 2 items
Sale configuration
PN: 1 pack
Type 2
1: Standard productProduct classification
BH: Battery holder

1-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
CPU Module Type Numbers and Functions List
Type numbers and functions
Type
Number*1

Power Supply

Inputs and
Outputs*2

FC6A-C**R*AE

100 to 240V AC

24 (508)

FC6A-C16**CE

24V DCFC6A-C16**DE

12V DCUSB
Port

Ethernet Ethernet
Port 1
Port 216 (404)

FC6A-C40**CE

24V DCFC6A-C40**DE

12V DCFC6A-C40**AEJ

100 to 240V AC

FC6A-C40**CEJ

24V DCFC6A-C40**DEJ

12V DCFC6A-D****CEE

24V DC

1 (2)
Yes

Yes

32 (2,060)

—

Yes

—

40 (528)

16 (2,044)

SerialPort 1SD
MemoryCard Slot

AnalogInput/
Volume2 (3)

16 (404)
24 (508)

CAN
Port

1 (2)

40 (528)

FC6A-C24**CE

Number of
Cartridge
Slots

Yes (1 each)
Yes

2 (3)

Yes

Yes

Yes

0 (3)

Yes

—

—

—

—

Yes

Yes (1 each)*1 For CPU module type numbers, see "CPU module" on page 1-1.
*2 The value in parentheses ( ) is the number of inputs and outputs when using the expansion interface module and the maximum number of
expansion modules are connected.

Options
USB Maintenance Cable

Panel Mount USB Extension Cable

HG9Z-XCM42

HG9Z-XCE21

External Device/O/I Communication Cable

O/I Communication Cable

FC6A-KC1CFC6A-KC2C

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-7

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
FeaturesThis section describes the features of the FC6A.

High-speed Instruction Processing

The FC6A is capable of high-speed arithmetic processing of basic instructions (LOD) in 0.042 μs and advanced instructions (MOV)
in 0.120 μs. This improves real time performance during program execution.

Abundant Program Capacity

The FC6A has large program capacity.
Program Capacity

CPU Module

Standard

When Online Edit Is Used

All-in-One CPU module

384,000 bytes maximum(48,000 steps equivalent)

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

640,000 bytes maximum(80,000 steps equivalent)

Plus CPU module

800,000 bytes maximum (100,000 steps equivalent)

72,000 bytes maximum(9,000 steps equivalent)

Note: "Step" is the unit to calculate the program size. One step is 8 bytes, which is the instruction size of contacts or coils.

Online Edit

User programs can be overwritten (run-time programming) and tests can be written while the ladder program is being executed.

Various Communication Functions

The FC6A supports the following communications: Maintenance communication
 User communication
 Modbus communication
 Datalink communication
 Bluetooth communication
 BACnet/IP communication
 MC protocol communication
 EtherNet/IP communication
 MQTT communication
 J1939 communication (CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module only)

The following functions using Ethernet are also supported so that a variety of requirements can be achieved, such as remotemonitoring or maintenance.
 SNTP FTP server/client PING Send e-mail Web server

The FC6A can be connected to a variety of devices such as computer, operator interface, and printer.

SD Memory Card

The FC6A is equipped with an SD memory card slot. The log data of device values, configuration data, user programs, and system
software can be saved to a commercially available SD memory card (32 GB maximum).

Powerful HMI Functions

Device values can be checked and modified on the HMI module's LCD. The LCD can also display the current time, bar charts,
messages, and text. The HMI module is equipped with fonts in the following nine languages and can display messages and text inthose languages. The HMI module can be operated using the operation buttons. Operations such as switching what is shown on
the LCD can be performed using the operation buttons.
Setting Name

Character Set

Supported Languages

European

ISO 8859-1 (Latin-1)

English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch (Note), French (Note)

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese (level 1)

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI 1251

RussianNote: Some of the characters cannot be input.

1-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Special Functions
This section describes the functions of the FC6A.

I/O Related Functions
Catch Input

The catch input function is used to receive shot pulses (minimum pulse width: 5 μs) that is shorter than the user program scantime. A maximum of 6 catch inputs can be used.
Note: The scan time is the time duration for executing one cycle of the user program that is cyclically executed.

Input Filter

The input filter is the function to reduce the influence from the bounce or noise on input contacts by adjusting the filter width
according to the input signal width. The input filter of 0 ms (no filter) or 3 to 15 ms (1 ms increments) can be configured forindividual input.

Interrupt Input

The interrupt input can be used to call an interrupt program to respond to an external input that requires a response faster thanthe ladder program scan time. A maximum of six interrupt inputs can be used.

Stop and Reset Inputs

The stop input is a function to stop ladder program execution. The reset input is a function to stop ladder program operation andclear device values. Any input terminal on the FC6A can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the FC6A operation.

Built-in Analog Input Function

This function acquires 0 to 10V DC analog input as a digital value in a special data register. There is one built-in analog input.

Analog Potentiometer Function

This function acquires volume input as a 0 to 1,000 digital value in a special data register according to the position of the volume.
There is one analog potentiometer.

Forced I/O

The inputs and outputs of the FC6A can be forced on or off. This function can be used to check the I/O wiring or the user program
operation.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-9

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
High-speed I/O Functions
High-speed Counter

This function counts high-speed pulse inputs that cannot be measured in normal user program processing.
Use this function for applications such as positioning control with a rotary encoder or motor control. The FC6A can use singlephase high-speed counters and two-phase high-speed counters. A maximum of six single-phase high-speed counters and amaximum of two two-phase high-speed counters (three maximum for Plus CPU module only) can be used simultaneously.
Single-phase Highspeed Counter

CPU Module

Two-phase High-speed
Counter

16-I/O typeAll-in-One CPU module/
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

24-I/O type40-I/O type2 maximum
6 maximum

Plus 16-I/O type

Plus CPU module

Plus 32-I/O type

3 maximum

Example: Controlling a motor by counting two-phase pulse input with a high-speed counter

Pulse Motor
RotaryEncoder

High-speed Pulse Input

Two-phase Pulses

FC6A

Positioning Control

The FC6A can perform positioning control with pulse outputs. The FC6A features the PULS instructions that can generate pulse
outputs with configured frequency at the fixed pulse width ratio, JOG instructions, pulse-width modulation (PWM) instructions thatcan generate pulse outputs with configured pulse width ratio at a fixed frequency, RAMP instructions for trapezoidal control, ZRN
instructions for zero return operation, and ARAMP instructions that can generate pulse outputs according to a table in which thechanges of the frequency are configured.
The FC6A also manages coordinates internally and can increment or decrement coordinates according to the number of pulses thatwere output and the direction.
After confirming the origin using the ZRN instruction, the target position can also be specified by absolute position.
Example: Pulse output by the RAMP instruction
Steady pulse frequency

Initial pulse frequency

Frequency Measurement

This function measures the frequency of pulses input to an input terminal. The frequencies of a maximum of six inputs can bemeasured.

1-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Convenient Functions
Calendar/Clock

The FC6A features a real-time clock on-board. Using the calendar and clock function, the FC6A can operate according to thecurrent date and time. These functions can be used to control a time schedule for lighting or air conditioning equipments.
The FC6A also supports daylight savings time and the date and time of the switch can be freely set to allow for use in any region.

User Program Read/Write Protection

The user program in the FC6A can be protected against reading and/or writing by including a password in the user program. Thisfunction is effective for security of user programs.

“Keep” or “Clear” Designation of FC6A Data

This function specifies whether or not to keep FC6A device values when there is a power interruption.
Devices that can be specified as kept are internal relays, shift registers, counter current values, and data registers.

RUN/STOP Selection at Startup when “Keep” Data is Lost

When the backup battery is dead, all data to be kept are lost. The user can select whether the FC6A starts to run or not to prevent
undesirable operation at the startup.

Log Data

Device values of the FC6A can be saved as CSV files on the SD memory card. The DLOG instruction saves device values to the SD
memory card. The TRACE instruction accumulates device values at each scan and saves them to the SD memory card at thedesired timing.

Constant Scan TimeThe variations in scan time that occur when the user program is running can be made constant.

Timer Interrupt

The timer interrupt can be used to call an interrupt program at a predetermined interval of time without being affected by the scantime.

Script Function

This function allows programming complicated processing with conditional branching, logical operations, arithmetic operations,and functions as text. Devices can also be read and written. Execute scripts using the SCRPT instruction.

Recipe Function

This function allows the values of device settings to be written to a CSV file to create a recipe file. The values of device settings canbe read from a recipe file and reflected in the FC6A devices.
Applicable devices are word devices such as timers, counters, and data registers.

SNTP Function

The current time can be acquired from an SNTP server.

USB Boot Function

This function starts the FC6A with power supplied from the USB cable.
This allows the user program and system software to be updated.
During USB boot, USB communication and the SD memory card can be used.

PID Control Function

PID control performs temperature control and other types of control using a PID (proportional-integral-derivative) calculation
algorithm. The FC6A can perform PID control by automatically calculating the optimal PID value using the auto tuning function.

Function Switch

The FC6A is equipped with a function switch which can be used to run or stop the user program. The button can be used for any
desired purpose by using the on/off status of the function switch stored in the special internal relay.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-11

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Communication Functions
The FC6A can perform RS232C and RS485 communication using serial port 1. The communication ports can be expanded by using
communication cartridges to allow for multiple instances of RS-232C, RS-485, and Bluetooth communication. The Ethernet port isstandard equipment to enable communication using Ethernet. The CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module is equipped with a CAN port
to enable J1939 communication.

Communication Functions
Maintenance Communication

Maintenance communication enables you to check the operating status and I/O status of the FC6A, todisplay and change device values, and download and upload user programs using a computer or operator
interface.

User Communication

Data can be sent and received by creating commands for external devices (computers, printers, barcode
readers, and other devices).

Modbus Communication

Data can be sent and received between communication device that conforms to the Modbus protocol andthe FC6A.

Data Link Communication

Data can be sent and received between a master station and slave stations by connecting a maximum of
31 FC6As (slave station) to a FC6A (master station).

MC Protocol Communication

The Plus CPU module supports MC protocol communication Client.

BACnet/IP Communication

The Plus CPU module supports BACnet communication using the Internet protocol (IP).

EtherNet/IP communication

The Plus CPU module supports EtherNet/IP (scanner) communication.

MQTT Communication

The Plus CPU module supports MQTT communication.

J1939 Communication

The CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module can send and receive data with communication device that
conforms to the SAE-J1939 standard.

For details on communication functions, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

Communication Ports
USB Port

Maintenance communication can be performed by connecting the FC6A to a computer using this port.

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

The FC6A can communicate with Ethernet communication-compatible external devices such as computersand operator interfaces using this port. Maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus TCP
communication, and MC protocol communication are possible. The Plus CPU module can communicate
with external devices compatible with BACnet/IP communication and MQTT communication using
Ethernet port 1.
The Plus CPU module can also communicate with EtherNet/IP-compatible external devices using Ethernet
port 2.

HMI-Ethernet PortThis port connects the HMI module to the CPU module and allows the HMI module to be used. The FC6A
can communicate with Ethernet communication-compatible external devices such as computers andoperator interfaces using this port. Maintenance communication is possible.

Serial Port 1

The FC6A can communicate with RS232C/RS485 communication-compatible external devices such as
computers, operator interfaces, and printers using this port. Maintenance communication, user
communication, Modbus RTU communication, and data link communication are possible.

RS232C Communication
Cartridge, RS485
Communication Cartridge(option)The FC6A is capable of maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus RTU communication,and data link communication using this port.

Bluetooth Communication
Cartridge (option)

The FC6A is capable of maintenance communication and user communication using this port.

CAN port

The CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module is capable of J1939 communication using this port.

Communication Module(option)The FC6A is capable of maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus RTU communication,and data link communication using this port.

1-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Allocations of the Communication Port Numbers

All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, and Plus CPU module support serial communication with the target
device. Serial communication is possible with built-in interface or expanded interface of each CPU module. Interfaces supporting
the serial communication are as follows:
All-in-One CPU module: Serial port 1, cartridge slots 1 and 2, communication module ports

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module: Cartridge slots 1 and 2, communication module ports

Plus CPU module: Cartridge slots 1 to 3, communication module ports

In order to use each interface as communication port, the communication parameters must be configured according to thecommunication parameters of the target device. Configure the communication parameters in Communiction Ports tab in the
Function Area Settings dialog box. The allocation between each interface and communication port is described below.
For details on each setting, refer to chapter 3 "Communication Port Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".
■ Ports and Cartridge Slots 1 to 3 on the CPU Module and HMI Module— : Not equipped with the CPU module.
No : Cannot be used as the serial communication ports.
Port
CPU Module

SerialPort 1

USB
Port

Cartridge Slot

HMIEthernet Ethernet
Ehternet
Port 1
Port 2
Port

CAN
Port

1

16-I/O typeAll-in-One CPU module 24-I/O type—Port 1—40-I/O type
CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

40-I/O type
Plus 16-I/O type

Plus CPU module

No

No

Plus 32-I/O type

—

—

—

Port 3
*2*5

No

—

3

Port 2
*2*5

No*1

No

2

Port 1*3*5

Port 2

Port 3*3*5*4*5

When the HMI module is connected to the CPU module and HMI-Ethernet port is added.
When a communication cartridge is installed on the cartridge slot.
When the cartridge base module is connected to the CPU module and a communication cartridge is installed on the cartridge slot.
When the HMI module is connected to the CPU module and a communication cartridge is installed on the cartridge slot.
The combination of "Data Bits: 7" and "Parity: None" is not possible.

Notes:
 For the locations of each port and cartridge slot, see "Part Names and Functions" on page 2-4.
 For serial port 1 wiring, see "Other Inputs and Ports" on page 2-47. For communication cartridge wiring, see "Terminal Arrangement and
Wiring Examples" on page 2-175.

■ Ports on Communication Modules
CPU Module

Communication Module
1st

2nd

3rd

Port 4, 5

Port 6, 7

Port 8, 9

4th

···

15th

*1

*1

*1

Port 10, 11···

Port 32, 33

16-I/O typeAll-in-One CPU module

24-I/O type40-I/O type

CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module
Plus CPU module

40-I/O type
Plus 16-I/O type
Plus 32-I/O type*1 Four or more communication modules cannot be connected to the All-in-One CPU module and CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-13

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Maintenance Communication
The maintenance communication of the FC6A enables you to check the operating status and I/O status of the FC6A, monitor andchange device values, and download and upload user programs with the PLC programming software WindLDR installed on acomputer. For details on maintenance communication, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports*1
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1, 2 and
HMI-Ethernet Port*2

Communication Cartridge
and Communication Module

CAN Port

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

*1 Depending on the port that will be used, there are differences in maintenance communication functionalities that can be used. For details on the
restrictions, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
*2 Only maintenance communication can be used with the HMI-Ethernet port.

■ 1:1 Maintenance Communication System
This example shows a 1:1 maintenance communication system in which a FC6A and a computer are connected with USB. The USB
maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42) is used.
FC6A
Windows Computer

HG9Z-XCM42 USB Maintenance Cable

USB Port

Type A PlugMini-B PlugUSB Port(USB 2.0 Mini-B Connector)■ 1:N Maintenance Communication System
This example shows a 1:N maintenance communication system in which three FC6A and a computer are connected over Ethernet.
The Ethernet cables are connected to the Ethernet port 1 of three FC6A, and those FC6A are connected to the computer via an
Ethernet hub.
Windows Computer

Ethernet Hub

FC6A

Ethernet Port 1

1-14

FC6A

Ethernet Port 1

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A

Ethernet Port 1

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
User Communication
The user communication of the FC6A enables you to control external devices such as computers, printers, and barcode readers.
For details on user communication, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

Communication Cartridge
and Communication Module

CAN Port

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

■ User Communication Using Serial Port 1
This example shows a system in which a FC6A receives the data read by a barcode reader. A barcode reader is connected to port
1 of the FC6A.
FC6A

Serial Port 1(Port 1)
Barcode Reader

Modbus Communication
The FC6A is compliant with Modbus RTU protocol and can be used as either a Modbus communication master or slave. With
Modbus communication, the FC6A can monitor and modify the data of inverters and temperature controllers.
Ethernet ports 1 and 2 also support the Modbus TCP communication protocol.
For details on Modbus communication, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

Communication Cartridge*1
and Communication Module

CAN Port

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

*1 Only the RS-232C communication cartridge and RS-485 communication cartridge are supported.

■ Modbus RTU Communication Using Serial Port 1
This example shows a system in which a FC6A is communicating with a temperature controller and an inverter that support
Modbus RTU. The A temperature controller is connected to port 1 of the FC6A.
FC6A
Temperature Controller

INVERTER

Inverter

RUN
RVS
ALM
COM

Serial Port 1(Port 1)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-15

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Data Link Communication
The FC6A supports data link communication, and it can share data between CPU modules using serial port 1 and cartridge slots.
The FC6A can also share data with FC5A Series and FC4A Series CPU modules. Configure the settings in WindLDR to enabledistributed control of a maximum of 31 CPU modules.
For details about the data link communication, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

Communication Cartridge*1
and Communication Module

CAN Port

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

*1 Only the RS-232C communication cartridge and RS-485 communication cartridge are supported.

■ Data Link Communication Using Serial Port 1
This example shows communication between multiple CPU modules with the FC6A as the master station. A slave station CPU
module is connected to Serial Port 1 of the FC6A.
FC6A(Master Station)

FC6A(Slave Station 1)

FC6A(Slave Station 31)

Serial Port 1(Port 1)MC Protocol Communication
The Plus CPU module can read and write device values of MC protocol compatible device as client in MC Protocol Communication using
Ethernet port 1 or 2. For details, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1

Ethernet Port 2

Communication Cartridge andCommunication Module

CAN Port

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

■ MC protocol Communication Example with Ethernet Port 1
MC protocol compatible devices

Connection
stationConnection
stationConnection
stationEthernet communication (TCP / IP)

Plus CPU Module

1-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Ethernet Communication
The FC6A can be connected to the Ethernet network using Ethernet port 1 and communicate with network devices over Ethernet.
The All-in-One CPU module and CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module have eight TCP/IP connections and the Plus CPU module has 16
TCP/IP connections that can be used for Ethernet communication. Different communication protocols can be simultaneously usedon these connections. Each connection can be configured for maintenance communication server, user communication server/
client, Modbus TCP server/client communication, or MC protocol client communication.
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

Communication
Cartridge

CAN Port

No

No

Yes

No

No

■ Ethernet Communication Example
This example shows Ethernet communication between the FC6A equipped with Ethernet port 1, an operator interface, and acomputer. Among the three connections the FC6A has, Connection 1 is configured as maintenance communication server for thecomputer to communicate with the FC6A. Connection 2 is configured as Modbus TCP server for the operator interface tocommunicate with the FC6A. Connection 3 communicates with the barcode reader with the user communication. Connection 4 toconnection 8 are not used.
Ethernet
Ethernet Hub

Ethernet Hub

Barcode Reader

Ethernet Port 1
FC6A

Windows Computer

Operator Interface

Notes:
 When accessing the FC6A over the Internet, adequate security measures for the network to prevent unauthorized access are required. Be
sure to consult your network administrator or Internet service provider. IDEC bears no responsibility for damages or problems caused due tosecurity in Ethernet communication.
 Restrict the access to FC6A with IP addresses and ports by using appropriate measures such as the firewall.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-17

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
Operator Interface Connectivity
The FC6A can perform maintenance communication with IDEC operator interfaces using Ethernet port 1, serial port 1, andcommunication cartridge. FC6A device values can be monitored and modified by the connected operator interface. An Ethernet
cable or an O/I communication cable*1 is used to connect the FC6A and the operator interface.For details on the communication
settings, see the "WindO/I-NV2 User's Manual", the "WindO/I-NV3 User's Manual", and the "WindO/I-NV4 User's Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

No

Yes

Yes

Communication Cartridge*1
and Communication Module
Yes

CAN Port
No*1 Only the RS-232C communication cartridge and RS-485 communication cartridge are supported.

■ 1:1 Maintenance Communication Example with an IDEC Operator Interface Using Serial Port 1
This example shows maintenance communication between the FC6A and an operator interface, as well as monitoring andchanging FC6A device values using the operator interface. An IDEC operator interface is connected to serial port 1 of the FC6A.
FC6A

Serial Communication Port
(RS232C)

Operator Interface
O/I Communication Cable: FC6A-KC2C(D-sub 9-pin connector style, cable length: 5 m)

*1 For details on O/I communication cables, see "Cables" on page A-14.

1-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Serial Port 1(Port 1)

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
BACnet/IP Communication
The Plus CPU module can be connected to a BACnet/IP network using Ethernet port 1 and communicate with other BACnet
communication-compatible external devices. For details on BACnet/IP communications, see the "Network User’s Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1

Ethernet Port 2

Communication Cartridge andCommunication Module

CAN Port

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

■ BACnet Communication Using Ethernet Port 1
This example shows the Plus CPU module aggregating information from Modbus RTU communication-compatible devices, communicatingwith a BACnet communication-compatible device connected to a BACnet/IP network, and making that information publicly available.
Monitoring PC

BACnet/IP Network

Plus CPU Module

Modbus RTU
communication-compatible device

Lighting Device

Ethernet Port 1

Air Conditioning
Device

BACnet/IP
communication-compatible device

Modbus RTU Communication

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-19

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
EtherNet/IP Communication
The Plus CPU module can be connected to an Ethernet network using Ethernet port 2 and communicate with other EtherNet/IP
communication-compatible external devices. EtherNet/IP communication uses standard Ethernet technologies, which allows
networks to be built that include various Ethernet-compatible devices. For details on EtherNet/IP communications, see the"Network User’s Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1

Ethernet Port 2

Communication Cartridge andCommunication Module

CAN Port

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

■ EtherNet/IP Communication Using Ethernet Port 2This example shows the Plus CPU module communicating with EtherNet/IP communication-compatible devices and controlling thosedevices.
Ethernet communication

Plus CPU module(scanner)

Ethernet Port 2

EtherNet/IP communication

Ethernet hub

EtherNet/IP devices manufactured by other companies(adapter)

1-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON
MQTT Communication
The Plus CPU module can communicate with a broker as a client (publisher and subscriber) in MQTT communication using
Ethernet port 1. For details on MQTT communications, see the "Network User’s Manual".

Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1

Ethernet Port 2

Communication
Cartridge andCommunication
Module

No

No

Yes

No

No

CAN Port
No■ MQTT Communication Using Ethernet Port 1
Plus CPU module

MQTT
communication

Ethernet port 1

MQTT broker

Using J1939 Communication
The CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module can be connected to a J1939 communication network using the CAN port and it can communicate
with other J1939 communication-compatible devices. Messages that conform to the SAE J1939 standard can be sent and received.
For details on J1939 communication, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Supported ports
USB Port

Serial Port 1

Ethernet Port 1 and 2

No

No

No

Communication
Cartridge
No

CAN Port
Yes■ CAN Port Usage Example
This example shows the FC6A communicating with a J1939-compatible engine. The CAN port of the CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU
module is connected to the engine.
CAN

CAN Port
FC6A(CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU Module)

EngineFC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

1-21

1: G EN ER AL I N FOR M ATI ON

1-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
This chapter describes the part names and specifications of the modules that make up the FC6A.
Various types of modules are available for the FC6A. These include the CPU modules (All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-inOne CPU module, and Plus CPU module), digital I/O modules (digital input modules, digital output modules, and digital mixed I/O
modules), analog I/O modules (analog input modules, analog output modules, and analog mixed I/O modules), PID modules,
communication modules, expansion interface modules (expander and remote master/slave), HMI modules, cartridge basemodules, and cartridges (digital I/O cartridges, analog I/O cartridges, and communication cartridges).

Normal Operating Conditions
The normal operating conditions common to the modules are as follows.
Ambient Operating Temperature-10 to +55°C *1 (no freezing)

Expanded Ambient Operating Temperature-25 to -10°C, +55 to +65°C*2 (no freezing)Ambient Storage Temperature-25 to +70°C (no freezing)

Relative Humidity

10 to 95%, no condensation

Storage Humidity

10 to 95%, no condensation

Pollution Degree

2 (IEC60664-1)

Degree of Protection

IP20 (IEC60529)

Atmosphere

No corrosive gas
1,013 to 795 hPa (0 to 2,000 m) during operation

Altitude or Air Pressure

1,013 to 701 hPa (0 to 3,000 m) during transport

Installation Location

Inside cabinet

Device Class

Open equipment

Overvoltage Category
Vibration ResistanceII
DIN Rail Mounted
Panel Mounted

5 to 8.4 Hz half amplitude 3.5 mm, 8.4 to 150 Hz, acceleration 9.8 m/s2 (1 G), eachdirection XYZ, 2 hours (IEC/EN 61131-2)

Shock Resistance

147 m/s2 (15 G), 11 ms, XYZ, 3 axes, 6 directions, 3 times each (IEC 61131-2)

EMC Immunity

IEC/EN61131-2, Zone B compatibility*1 The HMI module (FC6A-PH1) is 0 to 55°C.
*2 For the status of support for expanded ambient operating temperatures in each product, see "Status of Support for Expanded Ambient
Operating Temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C)" on page 2-2. Certain products are also unable to support expanded ambient operating
temperatures, depending on the product version. Check the product version number before using the product in expanded ambient operating
temperatures.
The product ratings and usage conditions of certain models will also change if used in expanded ambient operating temperatures. For details,
see the following sections.
 "Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio" (Pages 2-30, 2-63, 2-71, 2-73, 2-83, 2-85, 2-87, 2-99, 2100)
 "Ambient Temperature and Analog Input/Output Restrictions" (Page 2-115)
 "Rating at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C/65°C" (Page 2-186)
 "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" (Page 3-37)

Checking the Version Number

The version number of each module is listed on the side of the module. The performance and functionality of the analog I/O
module will differ by its version, so check the version number before use.
S/N:XXXXX-XXXXX

V100

Version Number

The version number on a CPU module is HV*** and the version number on other modules is V***.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-1

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Status of Support for Expanded Ambient Operating Temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C)
Type No.*1

NameAll-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C*****E

Applicability of Expanded Ambient
Operating Temperature
StatusVersionApplicable

HV200 or later

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C40***EJ

Applicable

HV200 or later

Plus CPU module

FC6A-D****CEE

Applicable

HV200 or later

Applicable

V300 or laterFC6A-N08B1/FC6A-N08B4
FC6A-N16B1/FC6A-N16B4
FC6A-N16B3
FC6A-N32B3
FC6A-N08A11/FC6A-N08A14
FC6A-R081/FC6A-R084
FC6A-R161/FC6A-R164
FC6A-T08P1/FC6A-T08P4
Digital I/O module

FC6A-T16P1/FC6A-T16P4
FC6A-T16P3
FC6A-T32P3
FC6A-T08K1/FC6A-T08K4
FC6A-T16K1/FC6A-T16K4
FC6A-T16K3
FC6A-T32K3
FC6A-M08BR1/FC6A-M08BR4
FC6A-M24BR1/FC6A-M24BR4
FC6A-J2C1/FC6A-J2C4
FC6A-J4A1/FC6A-J4A4
FC6A-J8A1/FC6A-J8A4
FC6A-L03CN1/FC6A-L03CN4
FC6A-J4CN1/FC6A-J4CN4

Analog I/O module

V300 or later
Applicable

FC6A-K2A1/FC6A-K2A4
FC6A-J8CU1/FC6A-J8CU4

V200 or laterFC6A-J4CH1Y/FC6A-J4CH4Y
FC6A-K4A1/FC6A-K4A4
FC6A-L06A1/FC6A-L06A4
FC6A-F2M1/FC6A-F2M4—
Not applicable

FC6A-F2MR1/FC6A-F2MR4———

FC6A-EXM1M
Expansion interface module

FC6A-EXM1S/FC6A-EXM1S4Applicable

V200 or laterFC6A-EXM2/FC6A-EXM24
HMI module

FC6A-PH1

Not applicable—

Cartridge base module

FC6A-HPH1

Not applicable—Communication module

FC6A-SIF52/FC6A-SIF524

Applicable

V200 or later

Digital I/O cartridge

FC6A-PTS4

FC6A-PTK4

Analog I/O cartridge—

FC6A-PN4—

FC6A-PJ2A—

FC6A-PJ2CP
FC6A-PK2AV
FC6A-PK2AW

2-2—
Not applicable

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Not applicable———2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

Type No.*1

Name

Applicability of Expanded Ambient
Operating Temperature
Status

FC6A-PC1
Communication cartridge

FC6A-PC3

Version—Not applicable

FC6A-PC4——

FC6B-C16R1A/FC6B-C16R4A
FC6B-C16R1C/FC6B-C16R4C
FC6B-C16K1C/FC6B-C16K4C
FC6B-C16P1C/FC6B-C16P4C
FC6B-C24R1A/FC6B-C24R4A
FC6B-C24R1C/FC6B-C24R4C
FC6B-C24K1C/FC6B-C24K4C
FC6B-C24P1C/FC6B-C24P4C
FC6B series

FC6B-C40R1A/FC6B-C40R4A

Applicable

HV200 or later

FC6B-C40R1C/FC6B-C40R4C
FC6B-C40K1C/FC6B-C40K4C
FC6B-C40P1C/FC6B-C40P4C
FC6B-D16R1C/FC6B-D16R4C
FC6B-D16K1C/FC6B-D16K4C
FC6B-D16P1C/FC6B-D16P4C
FC6B-D32K3C/FC6B-D32K4C
FC6B-D32P3C/FC6B-D32P4C*1 For CPU module type numbers, see "CPU module" on page 1-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-3

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
CPU Module
All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
The All-in-One CPU module is equipped with analog input and serial ports (RS-232C/RS-485). CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module isequipped with a CAN port.

Part Names and Functions■ All-in-One CPU module
Example: FC6A-C40R1AE(2) Cartridge Slot 1(5) Battery Holder(3) Cartridge Slot 2(26) Analog Potentiometer(1) Sensor Power Terminals(Not used with DC power
supply types.)(25) Analog Input(24) Function Switch(4) Input Terminals
Top(23) Communication Connector(6) Expansion Connector

Left Side

Right Side(7) Input LEDs [IN](8) Output LEDs [OUT](17) Ethernet Port 1(15) Output Terminals (9) Power LED [PWR](10) Run LED [RUN](18) LINK LED(21) USB Port
(11) Error LED [ERR](19) ACT LED(12) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD](20) Power Supply Terminals(13) Battery Status LED [BAT](14) Status LED [STAT](27) SD Memory Card Cover(28) Analog Port Cover (29) Dummy Cartridges(16) Serial Port1(22) SD Memory Card Slot(35) Communication
Connector Protection Sticker(30) Expansion Connector
Protection Sticker

Left Side(31) Serial Port 1 CoverRight Side(34) USB Port Cover(32) Ethernet Port 1 Cover(33) Power Supply Terminals CoverThe content in brackets is the LED indicator name on the FC6A.
LED Indicators

16-I/O Type

24-I/O Type

(7)

(7)

IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15

IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

OUT(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

(8)

OUT

(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)

(8)

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

OUT

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

(8)

2-4

40-I/O Type(7)IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(1) Sensor power terminals (AC power type only)
These terminals supply DC power (24V DC, 250 mA) for a sensor (can also be used as a power supply for inputs).
The DC power type does not use these terminals.
(2) Cartridge Slot 1
This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(3) Cartridge Slot 2 (40-I/O type only)This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
The 16-I/O and 24-I/O types do not have this slot.
(4) Input Terminals
These terminals connect input devices such as push buttons and limit switches. DC inputs are both sinks and sources.
(5) Battery Holder
This holder is for installing the backup battery.
(6) Expansion Connector
This connector is used to connect expansion modules.
(7) Input LEDs [IN]
These LEDs turn on when an input is on. The LED with the corresponding number turns on.
(8) Output LEDs [OUT]
These LEDs turn on when an output is on. The LED with the corresponding number turns on.
(9) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the CPU module.
(10) Run LED [RUN]
This LED turns on while the CPU module is running the user program.
This LED flashes when using certain functions while the user program is running.
LED

StatusON• While the CPU module is running the user program

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is running

Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)• While the CPU module is in USB boot.
• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is stopped(11) Error LED [ERR]This LED turns on when an error occurs in the CPU module.
(12) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD]This LED turns on or flashes when the SD memory card is being read or written.
LED

StatusOFF• When the SD memory card is not inserted• When an unsupported or unformatted SD memory card was inserted• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is on, so the SD memory card has been unmounted• When the FC6A power is off

ON• The standby state where the SD memory card can be written or read

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)• When the FC6A is recognizing the SD memory card
• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is turned on and the FC6A is unmounting the SD memory card
(slow flashing, then off)

Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)• Reading or writing the SD memory card(13) Battery Status LED [BAT]This LED turns on or flashes when the backup battery level is low.
LED

Condition

Battery Status

Off

Battery voltage (D8056) > 2,300

NormalSufficient battery level.

Flashing (1 s cycle)

2,300 ≥ battery voltage (D8056) > 2,000

Warning

Low battery level. Replace the battery.

On

2,000 ≥ battery voltage (D8056)

Dead battery

The battery is almost dead. Or no battery.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-5

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(14) Status LED [STAT]This LED can be turned on or off in the user program.
(15) Output Terminals
These terminals connect output devices such as electromagnetic switches and solenoid valves. The CPU module is available
in the relay output type (240V AC: 2 A, 30V DC: 2 A), the transistor sink output type (0.5 A), and the transistor protection
source output type (0.5 A).
(16) Serial Port 1
This port allows serial communication with connected devices that are equipped with a serial interface (RS-232C or RS-485).
(17) Ethernet Port 1
This port allows Ethernet communication with connected devices that are equipped with an Ethernet interface.
(18) LINK LED
This LED is on when a network-compatible device is connected to Ethernet Port 1.
(19) ACT LED
This LED flashes when sending or receiving data while the LINK LED is on.
(20) Power Supply Terminals
These terminals are used to supply power to the CPU module.
The AC power type uses an AC power supply (100 to 240 V).
The DC power type is available as the 24V DC power type and the 12V DC power type.
(21) USB Port
A mini-B type USB 2.0 connector. A USB cable can be attached to the FC6A and connected to a PC to download and upload
user programs using WindLDR.
(22) SD Memory Card Slot
This slot is for inserting the SD memory card. The SD memory card allows for data logs using the DLOG/TRACE instructions,reading and writing device data, downloads from the SD memory card (user program, system software, web page), anduploads to the SD memory card.
(23) Communication Connector
This connector is used to connect the HMI module.
(24) Function Switch
This switch turns M8073 on or off (default setting: 0 (off)).
You can run or stop the CPU module with this switch by enabling Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch in WindLDR (default
setting: enabled).
For details on the function switch, see "Function Switch Configuration" on page 5-10.
(25) Analog Input
The connector for the analog input.
(26) Analog Potentiometer
A volume for setting a timer or other device. This allows an analog value used in the user program to be set without the useof an external device.
(27) SD Memory Card CoverAn openable cover that protects the SD memory card and function switch. Open the SD memory card cover when insertingor ejecting the SD memory card and when using the function switch.
(28) Analog Port Cover
A removable cover that protects the analog input and analog potentiometer. When using these, remove the analog port cover.
(29) Dummy Cartridges
Removable dummy cartridges that protect the cartridge slots. Remove the dummy cartridge when connecting a digital I/O
cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(30) Expansion Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the expansion connector. Remove the expansion connector protection sticker when connecting an
expansion module.

2-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(31) Serial Port 1 Cover
A removable cover that protects Serial Port 1. When using the serial port, remove the Serial Port 1 cover.
(32) Ethernet Port 1 Cover
A removable cover that protects Ethernet Port 1. When using the Ethernet port, remove the Ethernet Port 1 cover.
(33) Power Supply Terminals CoverAn openable cover that protects the power supply terminals. Open the power supply terminals cover when removing andattaching the power supply terminals.
Note:
The push-in type does not have the power supply terminals cover. The type numbers of the push-in type of All-in-One CPU module are as
follows.
FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE, FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE, FC6A-C24R4AE,
FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE, FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40R4DE,
FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE(34) USB Port CoverAn openable cover that protects the USB port. When using the USB port, open the USB port cover.
(35) Communication Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the communication connector. Remove the communication connector protection sticker whenconnecting the HMI module.
■ CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Example: FC6A-C40R1AEJ

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-7

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

(2) Cartridge Slot 1(5) Battery Holder(3) Cartridge Slot 2(24) Function Switch(1) Sensor Power Terminals(Not used with DC power
supply types.)(4) Input Terminals
Top(6) Expansion Connector(23) Communication Connector

Left Side

Right Side(7) Input LEDs [IN](8) Output LEDs [OUT](17) Ethernet Port 1(15) Output Terminals (9) Power LED [PWR](10) Run LED [RUN](18) LINK LED(21) USB Port
(11) Error LED [ERR](19) ACT LED(12) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD](20) Power Supply Terminals(13) Battery Status LED [BAT](14) Status LED [STAT](25) SD Memory Card Cover(26) Dummy Cartridges(16) CAN Port(22) SD Memory Card Slot(31) Communication
Connector Protection Sticker(27) Expansion Connector
Protection Sticker

Left Side

Right Side(30) USB Port Cover(28) Ethernet Port 1 Cover(29) Power Supply Terminals CoverThe content in brackets is the LED indicator name on the FC6A.
LED Indicators(7)IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
OUT(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

(8)

(1) Sensor power terminals (AC power type only)
These terminals supply DC power (24V DC, 250 mA) for a sensor (can also be used as a power supply for inputs).
The DC power type does not use these terminals.
(2) Cartridge Slot 1
This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(3) Cartridge Slot 2
This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
2-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(4) Input Terminals
These terminals connect input devices such as push buttons and limit switches. DC inputs are both sinks and sources.
(5) Battery Holder
This holder is for installing the backup battery.
(6) Expansion Connector
This connector is used to connect expansion modules.
(7) Input LEDs [IN]
These LEDs turn on when an input is on. The LED with the corresponding number turns on.
(8) Output LEDs [OUT]
These LEDs turn on when an output is on. The LED with the corresponding number turns on.
(9) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the CPU module.
(10) Run LED [RUN]
This LED turns on while the CPU module is running the user program.
This LED flashes when using certain functions while the user program is running.
LED
ON
Slow flashing (1 s cycle)
Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)

Status• While the CPU module is running the user program• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is running• While the CPU module is in USB boot.
• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is stopped(11) Error LED [ERR]This LED turns on when an error occurs in the CPU module.
(12) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD]This LED turns on or flashes when the SD memory card is being read or written.
LED
OFF
ON
Slow flashing (1 s cycle)
Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)

Status• When the SD memory card is not inserted• When an unsupported or unformatted SD memory card was inserted• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is on, so the SD memory card has been unmounted• When the FC6A power is off• The standby state where the SD memory card can be written or read
• When the FC6A is recognizing the SD memory card
• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is turned on and the FC6A is unmounting the SD memory card
(slow flashing, then off)
• Reading or writing the SD memory card(13) Battery Status LED [BAT]This LED turns on or flashes when the remaining voltage in the backup battery is low.
LED

Condition

Battery Status

Off

Battery voltage (D8056) > 2,300

NormalSufficient battery level.

Flashing (1 s cycle)

2,300 ≥ battery voltage (D8056) > 2,000

Warning

Low battery level. Replace the battery.

On

2,000 ≥ battery voltage (D8056)

Dead battery

The battery is almost dead. Or no battery.

(14) Status LED [STAT]This LED can be turned on or off in the user program.
(15) Output Terminals
These terminals connect output devices such as electromagnetic switches and solenoid valves. The CPU module is available
in the relay output type (240V AC: 2 A, 30V DC: 2 A), the transistor sink output type (0.5 A), and the transistor protection
source output type (0.5 A).
(16) CAN PortThis port allows J1939 communication.
(17) Ethernet Port 1
This port allows Ethernet communication with connected devices that are equipped with an Ethernet interface.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-9

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(18) LINK LED
This LED is on when a network-compatible device is connected to Ethernet Port 1.
(19) ACT LED
This LED flashes when sending or receiving data while the LINK LED is on.
(20) Power Supply Terminals
These terminals are used to supply power to the CPU module.
The AC power type uses an AC power supply (100 to 240 V).
The DC power type is available as the 24V DC power type and the 12V DC power type.
(21) USB Port
A mini-B type USB 2.0 connector. A USB cable can be attached to the FC6A and connected to a PC to download and upload
user programs using WindLDR.
(22) SD Memory Card Slot
This slot is for inserting the SD memory card. This slot is for inserting the SD memory card. The SD memory card allows fordata logs using the DLOG/TRACE instructions, reading and writing device data, downloads from the SD memory card (userprogram, system software, web page), and uploads to the SD memory card.
(23) Communication connector
This connector is used to connect the HMI module.
(24) Function Switch
This switch turns M8073 on or off (default setting: 0 (off)).
You can run or stop the CPU module with this switch by enabling Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch in WindLDR (default
setting: enabled).
For details on the function switch, see "Function Switch Configuration" on page 5-10.
(25) SD Memory Card CoverAn openable cover that protects the SD memory card and function switch. Open the SD memory card cover when insertingor ejecting the SD memory card and when using the function switch.
(26) Dummy Cartridges
Removable dummy cartridges that protect the cartridge slots. Remove the dummy cartridge when connecting a digital I/O
cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(27) Expansion Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the expansion connector. Remove the expansion connector protection sticker when connecting an
expansion module.
(28) Ethernet Port 1 Cover
A removable cover that protects Ethernet Port 1. When using the Ethernet port, remove the Ethernet Port 1 cover.
(29) Power Supply Terminals CoverAn openable cover that protects the power supply terminals. Remove the dummy cartridge when connecting a digital I/O
cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
Note:
The push-in type does not have the power supply terminals cover. The type numbers of the push-in type of CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
are as follows.
FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ(30) USB Port CoverAn openable cover that protects the USB port. When using the USB port, open the USB port cover.
(31) Communication Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the communication connector. Remove the communication connector protection sticker whenconnecting the HMI module.

2-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Specifications■ AC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C24R1AE,FC6A-C24R4AE, FC6A-C40R1AE,
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R4AEJ

Rated Operating Voltage

100 to 240V AC

Voltage Fluctuation Range

85 to 264V AC

Rated Power Frequency

50/60 Hz (47 to 63 Hz)

Maximum Power Consumption
FC6A-C16R1AE

Standalone
33 VA

When Maximum Load is Connected
54 VA

FC6A-C16R4AE

33 VA

54 VA

FC6A-C24R1AE

35 VA

61 VA

FC6A-C24R4AE

35 VA

61 VA

FC6A-C40R1AE

41 VA

74 VA

FC6A-C40R4AE

41 VA

74 VA

FC6A-C40R1AEJ

37 VA

74 VA

FC6A-C40R4AEJ

37 VA

74 VA

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)
Between power and PE terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and PE terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteWithstand Voltage

Between relay output and PE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and input terminals: 1,500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and PE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and PE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Insulation Resistance

Between relay output and PE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between power and input terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between power and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current

40 A maximum

Isolation

Between power terminal and internal circuit: Transformer isolated

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Power Supply Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection

Weight(approx.)

Reverse polarity: Normal operation
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused

FC6A-C16R1AE

370 g

FC6A-C16R4AE

370 g

FC6A-C24R1AE

420 g

FC6A-C24R4AE

420 g

FC6A-C40R1AE

560 g

FC6A-C40R4AE

565 g

FC6A-C40R1AEJ

560 g

FC6A-C40R4AEJ

555 g

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-11

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P1CE,
FC6A-C16P4CE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24K4CE,
FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C24P4CE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K1CE,
FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ,
FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ

Rated Power Voltage

24V DC

Voltage Fluctuation Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC (including ripple)

Maximum Power Consumption
FC6A-C16R1CE

Standalone
3.36 W (24V DC)

When Maximum Load is Connected
13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C16R4CE

3.36 W (24V DC)

13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C16K1CE

4.56 W (24V DC)

13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C16K4CE

4.56 W (24V DC)

13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C16P1CE

4.56 W (24V DC)

13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C16P4CE

4.56 W (24V DC)

13.44 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24R1CE

3.72 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24R4CE

3.72 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24K1CE

4.8 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24K4CE

4.8 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24P1CE

4.8 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C24P4CE

4.8 W (24V DC)

16.32 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40R1CE

4.68 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40R4CE

4.68 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40K1CE

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40K4CE

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40P1CE

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40P4CE

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40R1CEJ

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40R4CEJ

4.92 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40K1CEJ

4.2 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40K4CEJ

4.2 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40P1CEJ

4.2 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

FC6A-C40P4CEJ

4.2 W (24V DC)

21.84 W (24V DC)

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)
Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween transistor output and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween relay output and FE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteWithstand Voltage

Between power and input terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between transistor output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between relay output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Insulation Resistance

Between power and input terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between power and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between power and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between input and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current

35 A maximum

Isolation

Between power terminal and internal circuit: Transformer isolated

2-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Power Supply Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection

Weight(approx.)

Reverse polarity: Normal operation
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused

FC6A-C16R1CE

360 g

FC6A-C16R4CE

360 g

FC6A-C16K1CE

340 g

FC6A-C16K4CE

340 g

FC6A-C16P1CE

340 g

FC6A-C16P4CE

340 g

FC6A-C24R1CE

400 g

FC6A-C24R4CE

400 g

FC6A-C24K1CE

380 g

FC6A-C24K4CE

380 g

FC6A-C24P1CE

380 g

FC6A-C24P4CE

380 g

FC6A-C40R1CE

530 g

FC6A-C40R4CE

535 g

FC6A-C40K1CE

480 g

FC6A-C40K4CE

485 g

FC6A-C40P1CE

480 g

FC6A-C40P4CE

485 g

FC6A-C40R1CEJ

530 g

FC6A-C40R4CEJ

525 g

FC6A-C40K1CEJ

480 g

FC6A-C40K4CEJ

475 g

FC6A-C40P1CEJ

480 g

FC6A-C40P4CEJ

475 g

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-13

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 12V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P1DE,
FC6A-C16P4DE, FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40K4DE,
FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40P4DE, FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ,
FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ

Rated Power Voltage

12V DC

Voltage Fluctuation Range

10.2 to 18V DC (including ripple)

Maximum Power Consumption
FC6A-C16R1DE

Standalone
3.24 W (12V DC)

When Maximum Load is Connected12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C16R4DE

3.24 W (12V DC)

12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C16K1DE

3.00 W (12V DC)

12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C16K4DE

3.00 W (12V DC)

12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C16P1DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C16P4DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

12.00 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40R1DE

4.14 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40R4DE

4.14 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40K1DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40K4DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40P1DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40P4DE

3.12 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40R1DEJ

4.08 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40R4DEJ

4.08 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40K1DEJ

3.84 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40K4DEJ

3.84 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40P1DEJ

3.84 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

FC6A-C40P4DEJ

3.84 W (12V DC)

23.28 W (12V DC)

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)
Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween transistor output and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween relay output and FE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteWithstand Voltage

Between power and input terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between transistor output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between relay output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Insulation Resistance

Between power and input terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between power and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between power and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between input and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current

35 A maximum

Isolation

Between power terminal and internal circuit: Transformer isolated

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Power Supply Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection

2-14

Reverse polarity: Normal operation
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

Weight(approx.)

FC6A-C16R1DE

350 g

FC6A-C16R4DE

350 g

FC6A-C16K1DE

340 g

FC6A-C16K4DE

340 g

FC6A-C16P1DE

340 g

FC6A-C16P4DE

340 g

FC6A-C40R1DE

560 g

FC6A-C40R4DE

565 g

FC6A-C40K1DE

530 g

FC6A-C40K4DE

535 g

FC6A-C40P1DE

530 g

FC6A-C40P4DE

535 g

FC6A-C40R1DEJ

560 g

FC6A-C40R4DEJ

555 g

FC6A-C40K1DEJ

530 g

FC6A-C40K4DEJ

525 g

FC6A-C40P1DEJ

530 g

FC6A-C40P4DEJ

525 g

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-15

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ CPU Module Performance
FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE
FC6A-C16R1DE
FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

Type No.

Program Data

ProgramCapacity*1

I/O Expansion

72,000 bytes(9,000 steps)* Writable during run-time
640,000 bytes(80,000 steps)* Not writable during
run-time

384,000 bytes(48,000 steps)* Not writable during run-timeComment Data

256,000 bytes
4

7

7

Expansion Interface

8

8

8

8

Cartridges*2 *3

2

2

3

3

Input

9

14

24

24

Output

7

10

16

16

128

224

224

224

Expansion Interface *5 256

256

256

256

Cartridges*2 *3

8

12

12

Basic Expansion *4

User Program Download

8

256,000 bytes
7

1,000 times

Stored program system

Control System
Basic Instructions

Instructions

FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE

FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ

Basic Expansion

Basic
I/O Points

FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

42 types

Advanced Instructions 129 types

Processing Speed

Basic Instruction

0.042 ms/1,000 steps

END Processing

1 msInternal Relay

12,400Shift Register

256

Data Register

54,000Counter (adding, reversible)

512

Timer (1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s)

1,024

*1 1 step is equivalent to 8 bytes.
*2 As given below, certain digital I/O cartridges cannot be used in cartridge slot 3 depending on the configuration of expansion modules.
Limitations on Using Digital I/O Cartridges
Configuration of Expansion Modules

Digital I/O Cartridges That Cannot Be Used in Cartridge Slot 3

FC6A-N32B3×15

FC6A-PN4

FC6A-T32K3 and FC6A-T32P3×15

FC6A-PTK4, FC6A-PTS4*3 A maximum of two or three cartridges can be used by connecting the HMI module.
*4 There are limitations on the maximum number of outputs that can be simultaneously turned on.
For details, see "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37.
*5 The maximum number of expansion modules that can be connected can be increased by using the expansion interface module. For details, see"Expansion Interface Modules" on page 2-143.

2-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Backup Function
Backup Data

RAM (internal relays, shift registers, counters, data registers)*1, clock

Backup Battery

Lithium ion primary cell (A battery is included with the product. The model of battery to be included
with the product cannot be specified.)
Panasonic: BR2032/CR2032A/CR2032B, Murata: CR2032X/CR2032W

Battery Life

Guaranteed 1 year, replacement recommended every 4 years (+25°C)*2

Replaceability

Replace within 1 minute after power off (recommended)*3*1 To prepare for when the battery dies, the contents of RAM (internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers) can be saved to nonvolatile memory. For how to save the contents of RAM, see "SD Memory Card" on page 11-1.
*2 The battery is primarily consumed by backup current while unpowered. However, the ambient environment (temperature and humidity) while
unpowered and powered also affects consumption. In particular, battery life is greatly reduced in a high-temperature and high-humidity
environment, so replacement is recommended every year when the effect of the ambient environment (temperature and humidity) while
unpowered and powered is included.
*3 Replacement while powered and replacement while power is supplied from the USB bus are also possible. For the replacement method, see"Replacing the Backup Battery" on page 3-34.

Clock Function
Accuracy±30 seconds/month at 25°C

Self-diagnostic Functions
 Keep data Power failure detection

 User program (ROM) CRC check Clock error Timer/counter preset value change check Data link connection check User program syntax check Expansion bus initialization check User program execution check System check Watchdog timer check SD memory card transfer check User program download check SD memory card access check

Input Filter
0 ms (no filter), 3 to 15 ms selectable (in 1 ms increments)
Catch Input/Interrupt Input
High-speed 4 Points (I0, I1, I6, I7)
Medium-speed 2 Points (I3, I4)

Minimum turn on pulse width:

5 μs

Minimum turn off pulse width:

5 μs

Minimum turn on pulse width:

35 μs

Minimum turn off pulse width:

35 μs

High-speed CounterMaximum Counter
Frequency and Points
Count Range
Operation Mode

Single-phase, two-phase common:

100 kHz (single-phase 4 points max, two-phase 2 points max)Single-phase dedicated:

5 kHz (2 points)

Single-phase, two-phase common:

0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits)

Single-phase dedicated:

0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits)

Rotary encoder mode, adding counter mode, frequency measurement mode

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-17

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Pulse Output (Transistor Output Type Only)

Part No.

FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

Points4

Maximum output
pulse frequency

Q0,Q1: 100kHz
Q2,Q3: 5kHz

Q0,Q2,Q4,Q6: 100kHz

Reversible control

Single-pulse output mode: 2axis (Q0-Q3)
Dual-pulse output mode: 1axis (Q0-Q1)

Single-pulse output mode: 4axis (Q0-Q7)
Dual-pulse output mode: 4axis (Q0-Q7)

PWM output

Duty cycle: 0.1 to 100.0 (increments of 0.1%)
Output pulse frequency: 15 to 5,000 (increments of 1Hz)
: 4 points(Q0-Q3)*Q0,Q1:Adjust min. 5μs as ON time, and min. 15μs as OFF time.
*Q2,Q3:Adjust min. 100μs as ON/OFF time .

Duty cycle: 0.1 to 100.0 (increments of 0.1%)
Output pulse frequency: 15 to 5,000(increments of 1Hz)
: 4 points(Q0,Q2,Q4,Q6)*Adjust min. 5μs as ON time, and min. 15μs
as OFF time.

FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE

FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ

Function Switch
Points1 (2 position slide switch)
Program run/stop

Function

The function can be set in the function area settings (default setting: enabled).

Run/Stop Methods
 Power on/off Special internal relay (M8000) operation

 WindLDR RUN/STOP command Operation of stop input and reset input

 Function switch operation

Sensor External Output Power (AC Power Type Only)*1
Type No.

FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R4AE, FC6A-C40R1AE,
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R4AEJ

Output Voltage/Current

24 V (+10%, -15%)/250 mA (however, capacitive load is 2,500 μF or lower)

Overload Detection

Not possible (an overcurrent protection circuit is built in, but there is a risk of damage from along term short circuit.)

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Isolated*1 When the FC6A is used in expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C), sensor external output power cannot beused.

USB Port
Points1

Communication TypeUSB2.0 Full speed, CDC class

Communication Functions

Capable of maintenance communication with a PC

Connector

USB mini-B

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Not isolated

Available Function when FC6A is Poweredby USB

Downloading/uploading user programs, downloading system software, data file manager

2-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ethernet Port 1
Points1(When the HMI module is connected, this can be expanded by 1 point with the Ethernet portthat has the web server function.)

Communication TypeIEEE 802.3 compliant

Communication Speed

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Number of Connections

8

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus TCP server/client, MC protocol
clientConnector

RJ45 (Auto MDI/MDI-X compatible)

Cable

CAT 5 or higher, STP

Maximum Cable Length

100 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Pulse transformer isolated

SD Memory Card Slot
Points1

Supported SD Card

SD memory cards (max 2 GB), SDHC memory cards (max 32 GB)

File System

FAT16, FAT32

Function

Downloading/uploading user programs

Insertion/Removal Durability

2,000 times

Cartridge Slots
FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE
FC6A-C16R1DE
FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

Type No.

Cartridge Connections*1

Slots

1

FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE

1

2

FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ
2When the HMI module is connected, the analog I/O cartridge or the digital I/O cartridge can be expanded.
*1 All devices that are connectable to the cartridge slots cannot be used in expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to65°C). Do not connect these devices when the product is used in expanded ambient operating temperatures.

Communication Connector
HMI Module Connection*1

Slots

1

*1 All devices that are connectable to the communication connector cannot be used in expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C
and 55 to 65°C). Do not connect these devices when the product is used in expanded ambient operating temperatures.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-19

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ All-in-One CPU Module Only
Analog Potentiometer
Points1

Data Resolution

0 to 1,000

Analog Input
Points1

Input Range

0 to 10 V

Data Resolution

0 to 1,000

Input ImpedanceApprox. 100 kΩ

Error±1% of full scale (±5% of full scale when noise is applied)

Input Delay Time

12 ms (including the software filter)

Maximum Allowed Steady Load

13 V

Isolation

Not isolated

Cable

Unshielded cable 1 m (included with the product)

Serial Port 1
Points1 (ports can be added that are capable of using RS-232C or RS-485 communication by using
cartridges.)

Communication TypeEIA RS-232C or RS-485 software selectable

Maximum Communication Speed

115,200 bps

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication, user communication, Modbus communication, data linkcommunication

Connector

RJ45

Cable

RS232C: Shielded multicore
RS485: Shielded twisted-pair

Maximum Cable LengthRS-232C: 5 m
RS-485 : 200 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Not isolated■ CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU Module Only
CAN Port
Points1

Communication TypeCAN bus communication

Communication Speed

250 kbps

Communication Functions

J1939 communication

Connector
Cable
Maximum Cable Length
Terminating Resistance
Isolation between Internal Circuit

2-20

Push-in type

: FC6A-PMSE05PN02

Screw fastened type

: FC6A-PMTE05PN02

SAE-J1939-11: Shielded twisted-pair

SAE-J1939-15: Unshielded twisted-pair

SAE-J1939-11: 40 m, stub 1 m maximum

SAE-J1939-15: 40 m, stub 3 m maximum

120 Ω (0.5 W or higher)
Power supply:

Transformer isolated

Signal:Galvanic isolation, photocoupler isolated

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
DC Input Specifications■ AC Power Type, 24V DC Power Type

FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE

Type No.

Rated Input Voltage

24V DC shared sink/source

Input Voltage Range
Rated Input Current

0.0 to 28.8V DC
I0, I1, I6, I7

5 mA/point (at 24V DC)

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

7 mA/point (at 24V DC)

Terminal Arrangement
Input Impedance

Input Delay
Time

Turn ONTime
Turn OFFTime

See "AC Power Type" on page 2-34, "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37
I0, I1, I6, I7

4.9 kΩ

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

3.4 kΩ

I0, I1, I6, I7

5 μs + software filter setting

I2 to I5

35 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I27

35 μs + software filter setting

I0, I1, I6, I7

5 μs + software filter setting

I2 to I5

35 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I27

100 μs + software filter setting
9 points in 1 common
line

Input Points
Isolation

FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE

FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ

Between Input
Terminals

Not isolatedInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

14 points in 1 common
line

24 points in 1 common
line

Input TypeType 1 (IEC61131-2)

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages arecaused.
However, if high voltage is applied that exceeds the input voltage range, there
is a risk of permanent damage.

Cable Length3m

I/O Terminal
Connector

Type

See "AC Power Type" on page 2-34, "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37

Insertion/Removal Durability

100 times minimum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-21

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Operating Ranges
The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input modules is as follows.

Input Voltage (V DC)

I0, I1, I6, I7

Input Voltage (V DC)

28.8 V

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

28.8 VON Area

ON Area

24 V

24 V

15 V

15 V

Transition
Area

Transition
Area

5V

5V

OFF Area

OFF Area
Input Current (mA)

0.6 mA

2.6 mA

5 mA

6 mA

Input Current (mA)
1.3 mA

Input Internal CircuitCOM

I2 to I5, I10 to I27 3.3 KΩ
Input

COM

2-22

Internal Circuit

4.7 kΩ

Internal Circuit

I0, I1, I6, I7
Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4.2 mA7 mA

8.4 mA2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 12V DC Power Type
FC6A-C16R1DE
FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

Type No.

Rated Input Voltage

0.0 to 18.0V DC
I0, I1, I6, I7

5 mA/point (at 12V DC)

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

6 mA/point (at 12V DC)

Terminal Arrangement
Input Impedance

Input Delay
Time

Turn ONTime
Turn OFFTime

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43
I0, I1, I6, I7

2.0 kΩ

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

2.0 kΩ

I0, I1, I6, I7

5 μs + software filter setting

I2 to I5

35 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I27

35 μs + software filter setting

I0, I1, I6, I7

5 μs + software filter setting

I2 to I5

35 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I27

100 μs + software filter setting
9 points in 1 common
line

Input Points
Isolation

FC6A-C40R1DEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ

12V DC shared sink/source

Input Voltage Range
Rated Input Current

FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

Between Input
Terminals

Not isolatedInternal circuit

Photocoupler isolated

24 points in 1 common line

Input TypeType 1 (IEC61131-2)

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages arecaused.
However, if high voltage is applied that exceeds the input voltage range, there
is a risk of permanent damage.

Cable Length3m

I/O Terminal
Connector

Type

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Insertion/Removal Durability

100 times minimum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-23

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Operating Ranges
The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input modules is as follows.

Input Voltage (V DC)

I0, I1, I6, I7

Input Voltage (V DC)

18 V

I2 to I5, I10 to I27

18 V

ON Area

ON Area

12 V

12 V

5.6 V

5.6 V

Transition
Area

Transition
Area

2.4 V

2.4 V

OFF Area

OFF Area
Input Current (mA)

0.2 mA

1.5 mA

5 mA

8 mA

Input Current (mA)
0.6 mA

Input Internal CircuitCOM

I2 to I5, I10 to I27 2.0 kΩ
Input

COM

2-24

Internal Circuit

2.0 kΩ

Internal Circuit

I0, I1, I6, I7
Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2.3 mA6 mA

8.5 mA2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Relay Output Specifications■ AC Power Type, 24V DC Power Type, 12V DC Power Type

FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16R1DE
FC6A-C16R4DE

Type No.

No. of Outputs

Output Points per Common Line

FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ

FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24R4CE

7

10

16

COM0

4

4

4

COM1

3

COM2

―

COM3

4

4

2

4

―

―

4

See "AC Power Type" on page 2-34, "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37, "12V
DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Terminal Arrangement
Output Type1a contact

Maximum Load Current *1

1

2 A maximum

1 Common7 A maximum

Minimum Switching Load

1.0 mA/5.0V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

30 mΩ or lower

Electrical Life

100,000 operations minimum (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)

Rated Load *1
Withstand
Voltage

I/O Terminal
Connector

240V AC 2 A, 30V DC 2 A
Between Output Terminal and FE

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output Terminal andInternal Circuit

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output Terminals (COMs)

2,300V AC 1 minuteType

See "AC Power Type" on page 2-34, "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37, "12V
DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Insertion/Removal Durability

100 times minimum*1 Values for resistive/inductive load.

Output Delay
ON

Input to Relay
OFF
ON

Output Relay StatusOFF

OFF Bounce:
OFF Delay:
ON Bounce:
ON Delay:

6 ms maximum
10 ms maximum
6 ms maximum
6 ms maximum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-25

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Transistor Sink Output Specifications■ 24V DC power type
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE

Type No.
No. of Outputs
Output Points
per Common
Line

COM0

FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE

7

10

16

7

10

8

COM1

―

―

Rated Load Voltage

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37

Maximum Load
Current

FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE

1

0.5 A maximum

1 Common

3.5 A maximum

5 A maximum

8

4 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

Isolation

I/O Terminal
Connector

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (+V terminal supply power)

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

Type

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37

Insertion/
RemovalDurability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or
lessTurn OFF Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or
less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit
V(+)

Internal Circuit

OutputT2
T1

COM(-)

2-26

FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 12V DC Power Type
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE

Type No.
No. of Outputs
Output Points
per Common
Line

FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE

7

16

COM0

7

8

COM1

―

8

Rated Load Voltage

12V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

10.2 to 18.0V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Maximum Load
Current

1
1 Common10.2 to 16.0V DC

0.5 A maximum
3.5 A maximum

4 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (18.0V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 12V DC (+V terminal supply power)

Isolation

I/O Terminal
Connector

FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

27 V±1 V
L/R = 10 ms (16.0V DC, 1 Hz)

Type

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Insertion/
RemovalDurability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Turn OFF Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit
V(+)

Internal Circuit

OutputT2
T1

COM(-)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-27

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Transistor Protection Source Output Specifications■ 24V DC power type
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE

Type No.
No. of Outputs
Output Points
per Common
Line

COM0

FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE

7

10

16

7

10

8

COM1

―

―

Rated Load Voltage

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37

Maximum Load
Current

FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE

1

0.5 A maximum

1 Common

3.5 A maximum

5 A maximum

FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ

8

4 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (-V terminal supply power)

Output Protection Functions

Overcurrent protection function (not a thermal shutdown function).
Overcurrent detected with 4 outputs as 1 group. (Group 1: Q0 to Q3, Group 2: Q4 to Q7, Group 3:
Q10 to Q13, Group 4: Q14 to Q17)
When overcurrent is detected, the 4 outputs in the corresponding group are turned off for a fixed
period (1 s). When overcurrent is detected, a special internal relay turns on (M8172 to M8175) andthe error LED [ERR] turns on.

Output Current Limit Value

1.0 to 2.0 A

Isolation

I/O Terminal
Connector

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

Type

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-37

Insertion/
RemovalDurability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or
lessTurn OFF Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or
less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit (The overcurrent detection circuit has been omitted.)
COM (+)

Internal Circuit

Output

V (-)

2-28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 12V DC Power Type
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

Type No.
No. of Outputs
Output Points
per Common
Line

FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

7

16

COM0

7

8

COM1

―

8

Rated Load Voltage

12V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

10.2 to 18.0V DC

Terminal Arrangement

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Maximum Load
Current

FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ

1
1 Common10.2 to 16.0V DC

0.5 A maximum
3.5 A maximum

4 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

27 V±1 V

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 12V DC (-V terminal supply power)

Output Protection Functions

Overcurrent protection function (not a thermal shutdown function).
Overcurrent detected with 4 outputs as 1 group.
When overcurrent is detected, the 4 corresponding outputs are turned off for a fixed period (1 s).
When overcurrent is detected, a special internal relay turns on (M8172) and the error LED [ERR]
turns on.

Output Current Limit Value

1.0 to 2.0 A

Isolation

I/O Terminal
Connector

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

L/R = 10 ms (16.0V DC 1 Hz)

Type

See "12V DC Power Type" on page 2-43

Insertion/
RemovalDurability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Turn OFF Time

Q0 to Q1: 5 μs or lessQ2 to Q3: 30 μs or lessQ4 to Q7, Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit (The overcurrent detection circuit has been omitted.)
COM (+)

Internal Circuit

OutputV (-)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-29

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio

When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the input voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous ON
ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the FC6A
is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

■ Relay output type
24V DC Power Type
Input I/O

Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

28.8 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

240V AC

26.4 V
24.0 V

100V AC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0%

25%

50%

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0V

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0%

50%

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

30V DC

24V DC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

5V DC
0V

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0%

50%

Output Voltage

Output I/O

12V DC Power Type
Input I/O

Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

18 V

264V AC

12 V

100V AC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0%

25%

50%

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0V

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0%

50%

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

30V DC

24V DC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

5V DC
0V
0%

2-30

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

50%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Transistor sink output type

 There are no usage restrictions for input and output I/O when the ambient temperature is 55°C or lower and no cartridges are connected.
 When a cartridge is connected or the ambient temperature is greater than 55°C, reduce the input voltage, output voltage, and I/Osimultaneous ON ratio as shown in the following diagrams. *1

24V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

Output Voltage

28.8 V28.8 V

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
24.0 V
55°C

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature
55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0% 15% 30%

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

70% 80%I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%

20%

40%
(30%*3 )70% 80%I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

12V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

18.0 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

18.0 V(16.0 V*2)

Ambient
Temperature
12.0 V
55°C

12.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0% 15% 30%

70% 80%I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%

20%

40%
(30%*3 )70% 80%I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)*1 Cartridges cannot be used in environments with expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C).
*2 The values in parentheses are for the CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.
*3 The values in parentheses are for the 16-I/O type All-in-One CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-31

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Transistor protection source output type

 When the ambient temperature is 55°C or lower and no cartridges are connected, reduce the input voltage, output voltage, and I/Osimultaneous ON ratio as shown in the following diagrams.

24V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

Output Voltage

28.8 V28.8 V

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
24.0 V
55°C

0V
0%

60%

80%

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C
Ambient
Temperature 55°C

I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%

60%

80%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

12V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

18.0 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

18.0 V(16.0 V *1)

Ambient
Temperature
12.0 V
55°C

12.0 V

0V
0%

60%

80%

I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%*1 The values in parentheses are for the CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.

2-32

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Ambient
Temperature
55°C

60%

80%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
 When a cartridge is connected or the ambient temperature is greater than 55°C, reduce the input voltage, output voltage, and I/Osimultaneous ON ratio as shown in the following diagrams. *1

24V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

28.8 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

28.8 V
Ambient
Temperature 55°C

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature 55°C
24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%0% 15% 30%40% 50%

20%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

40% 50%(30%*3 )12V DC Power Type
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

18.0 V
Ambient
Temperature 55°C
12.0 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

18.0 V(16.0 V*2)

Ambient
Temperature 45°C

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

12.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0% 15% 30%40% 50%

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0%20%

40% 50%(30%*3 )I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)*1 Cartridges cannot be used in environments with expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C).
*2 The values in parentheses are for the CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.
*3 The values in parentheses are for the 16-I/O type All-in-One CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-33

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ AC Power Type
16-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C16R1AE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C16R4AE
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (AC)FC6A-PMSDA03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA12PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA12PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Push-in type(2)

(1) Power supply terminals(2)

AC Power Input

L

N: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring+
2-wireSensor-+24V 0V COM I0

I1

I2

Power Output

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10

I5

I6

I7 I10

24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring
2-wireSensor++24V 0V COM I0

I1

I2

Power Output

I3

I4

24V DC Input(3) Output terminals
Relay Output

Relay Output
COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6

L

L

L

L

+
-

2-34

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUALPE

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
24-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C24R1AE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C24R4AE
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (AC)FC6A-PMSDA03PN02
FC6A-PMTA08PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals

FC6A-PMSA08PN02

Push-in type(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA13PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA13PN02

Push-in type(2)

(1) Power supply terminals(2)

AC Power Input

L

N

PE

: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring+
2-wireSensor-+24V 0V COM I0
Power Output

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

24V DC Input

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15
24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring
2-wireSensor++24V 0V COM I0
Power Output

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

24V DC Input

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15
24V DC Input(3) Output terminals
Relay Output

Relay Output
COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM2 Q10 Q11

L

L

L

L

+
-

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-35

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
40-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1AEJ
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4AEJ
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (AC)FC6A-PMSDA03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA10PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA10PN02

Screw fastened typePush-in type(1) Power supply
terminals

(2)

(2)

AC Power Input

L

N

PE

: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring+
2-wireSensor-+24V 0V COM I0

I1

I2

I3

Power Output

24V DC Input

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
24V DC Input

24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring
2-wireSensor++24V 0V COM I0

I1

I2

I3

Power Output

24V DC Input

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
24V DC Input

24V DC Input(3) Output terminals
Relay Output

Relay Output

Relay Output

COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM2 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 COM3 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17

L

2-36

L

L

L

L

+

+

-

-

L

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

L

L

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 24V DC Power Type
16-I/O type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (24 VDC)

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA12PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA12PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Push-in type(2)

(1) Power supply terminals(2)

24V DC Power Input+24V -+FE-

External Power
24V DC: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring++

2-wireSensorExternal Power
24V DC-

NC. NC. COM I0

I1

I2

–

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10

I5

I6

I7 I10

24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring--

2-wireSensorExternal Power+
24V DC+

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

I3

I4

24V DC Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-37

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals

Relay Output: FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16R4CE
Relay Output
COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6

L

L

L

L

+
-

Transistor Sink Output: FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16K4CE
Transistor Sink Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 COM0(-) V0(+)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

Transistor Protection Source Output: FC6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C16P4CE
Transistor Protection Source Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 COM0(+) V0(-)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L
+
-

2-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
24-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (24 VDC)

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02
FC6A-PMTA08PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals

FC6A-PMSA08PN02

Push-in type(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA13PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA13PN02

Push-in type(1) Power supply terminals
(2)

(2)

24V DC Power Input+24V -+FE-

External Power
24V DC: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring++

2-wireSensorExternal Power
24V DC-

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

24V DC Input

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15
24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring--

2-wireSensorExternal Power+
24V DC+

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

24V DC Input

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15
24V DC Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-39

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals

Relay Output: FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24R4CE
Relay Output
COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM2 Q10 Q11

L

L

L

L

+
-

Transistor Sink Output: FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24K4CE
Transistor Sink Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q10 Q11 COM0(-) COM0(-) V0(+)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

Transistor Protection Source Output: FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C24P4CE
Transistor Protection Source Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q10 Q11 COM0(+) COM0(+) V0(-)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L
+
-

2-40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
40-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40R1CEJ,
FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40R4CEJ,
FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ
Applicable connector(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (24 VDC)

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA10PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA10PN02

Screw fastened typePush-in type(2)

(1) Power supply
terminals(2)

24V DC Power Input+24V -+FE-

External Power
24V DC: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(1)

(3)

(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring++

2-wireSensorExternal Power
24V DC-

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

24V DC Input

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
24V DC Input

24V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring--

2-wireSensorExternal Power+
24V DC+

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

24V DC Input

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
24V DC Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

24V DC Input

2-41

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals

Relay Output: FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ
Relay Output

Relay Output

COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM2 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 COM3 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17

L

L

L

L

L

+

+

-

-

L

L

L

Transistor Sink Output: FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ
Transistor Sink Output (24 V)

Transistor Sink Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM0(-) V0(+) Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 COM1(-) V1(+)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

Transistor Protection Source Output: FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ
Transistor Protection Source Output (24 V)

Transistor Protection Source Output (24 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM0(+) V0(-) Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 COM1(+) V1(-)
L

2-42

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+
-

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+
-

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ 12V DC Power Type
16-I/O type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16P1DE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE
Applicable connector
Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (12 VDC)

FC6A-PMSDD03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA12PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA12PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Push-in type(2)

(1) Power supply terminals(2)

12V DC Power Input+12V -+FE-

External Power
12V DC: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(3)

(1)

(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input++

2-wireSensorExternal Power
12V DC-

NC. NC. COM I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10

I5

I6

I7 I10

12V DC Input−

DC Source Input--

2-wireSensorExternal Power+
12V DC+

NC. NC. COM I0
−

I1

I2

I3

I4

12V DC Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-43

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals

Relay Output: FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16R4DE
Relay Output
COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6

L

L

L

L

+
-

Transistor Sink Output: FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16K4DE
Transistor Sink Output (12 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 COM0(-) V0(+)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

Transistor Protection Source Output: FC6A-C16P1DE, FC6A-C16P4DE
Transistor Protection Source Output (12 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 COM0(+) V0(-)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L
+
-

2-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
40-I/O Type: Screw fastened type: FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40R1DEJ,
FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE, FC6A-C40R4DEJ,
FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
Applicable connector(1) Power supply terminals(2) Sensor power terminals, input terminals(3) Output terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type (12 VDC)

FC6A-PMSDD03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA09PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTA10PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSA10PN02

Screw fastened typePush-in type(2)

(1) Power supply
terminals(2)

12V DC Power Input+12V -+FE-

External Power
12V DC: FuseL : Load

(3)
(1)

(1)

(3)

(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring++

2-wireSensorExternal Power
12V DC-

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

12V DC Input

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
12V DC Input

12V DC Input

DC Source Input Wiring--

2-wireSensorExternal Power+
12V DC+

NC. NC. COM I0
–

I1

I2

I3

12V DC Input

I4

I5

I6

I7 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16 I17 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27
12V DC Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12V DC Input

2-45

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals

Relay Output: FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ
Relay Output

Relay Output

COM0 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 COM1 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM2 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 COM3 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17

L

L

L

L

L

+

+

-

-

L

L

L

Transistor Sink Output: FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ
Transistor Sink Output (12 V)

Transistor Sink Output (12 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM0(-) V0(+) Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 COM1(-) V1(+)
L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+

Transistor Protection Source Output: FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40P4DE, FC6A-C40P1DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
Transistor Protection Source Output (12 V)

Transistor Protection Source Output (12 V)

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 COM0(+) V0(-) Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 COM1(+) V1(-)
L

2-46

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+
-

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+
-

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Other Inputs and Ports■ All-in-One CPU module

(1)
(2)

(3)

(1) Analog input

1

No.

Signal Wire

1

AN(+)

Cable Color
Red

2

AN(-)

Black

No.

Signal Wire
(RS-232C)

Signal Wire
(RS-485)―2(2) Serial Port 1

876 5 432 1

1

RD

2

SD

―

3

ER

―

4

―

A

5

―

B

6

DR

―

7

―

―

8

SG

SG

Shell*1

ShieldShield*1 Shell is connected to PE or FE on the power supply terminals.
Note: The recommended cable to connect to this port is the FC6A-KC1C or the FC6A-KC2C. For details, see "Cables" on page A-14.

(3) Ethernet Port 1

123 45678

No.

Signal Wire

1

TPO+

2

TPO-

3

TPI+

4

―

5

―

6

TPI-

7

―

8

―

Shell*1

Shield*1 Shell is connected to PE or FE on the power supply terminals.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-47

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

(1)

(2)

(1) CAN port
No.

Signal Wire1SG

CAN external power supply (-)

Description
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)

1

2

CAN_L

2
3
4
5

3

CAN_SHLD4

CAN_H

CAN_H bus line (dominant high)(V+)

CAN external power supply (+).
(This port is not used with the FC6A.)

5

CAN cable shield*1*1 Internally connected to the SG via a resistor and capacitor connected in a series. (R = 1 Ω, 0.68 μF)

Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTE05PN02 (screw fastened type), FC6A-PMSE05PN02 (push-in type)(2) Ethernet Port 1

123 45678

No.

Signal Wire

1

TPO+

2

TPO-

3

TPI+

4

―

5

―

6

TPI-

7

―

8

―

Shell*1

Shield*1 Shell is connected to PE or FE on the power supply terminals.

2-48

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Plus CPU module
Part Names and Functions
Example:FC6A-D16*1CEE(2) SD Memory Card Slot

(1) Battery Holder

Top(25) Communication
Connector(3) Power LED [PWR](4) Run LED [RUN](5) Error LED [ERR](6) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD](7) Battery Status LED [BAT](8) Status LED [STAT](9) Input LEDs [IN](10) Output LEDs [OUT](11) Expansion Connector(24) Analog Potentiometer(23) Analog Input

Left Side(22) Ethernet Port 1(21) LINK LED(20) ACT LED(19) Ethernet Port 2(18) LINK LED(17) ACT LED(16) Power Supply Terminals(15) Function Switch

Right Side

(12) Output Terminals(13) Input Terminals(14) USB Port(26) Analog Port Cover (27) SD Memory Card Cover(33) Communication
Connector Protection
Sticker(28) Expansion Connector
Protection Sticker(32) Ethernet Port 1
Cover

Left Side(31) Ethernet Port 2
Cover(30) Power Supply
Terminals CoverRight Side(29) USB Port CoverThe content in brackets is the LED indicator name on the FC6A.
LED Indicators

Plus 16-I/O TypeIN
(3) PWR
0
RUN
1
(4)
ERR
2
(5)
SD
3
(6)
BAT
4
(7)
5
(8) STAT
6
7

OUT
0
1
2
3
(9)
4
5
6
7

(10)

Plus 32-I/O Type
OUT
IN
0
0
(3) PWR
RUN
1
1
(4)
ERR
2
2
(5)
SD
3
3
(6)
BAT
4
4
(7)
5
5
(8) STAT
6
6
7
7
(9)
(10)
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-49

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(1) Battery Holder
This holder is for installing the backup battery.
(2) SD Memory Card Slot
This slot is used to insert the SD memory card.
(3) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the CPU module.
(4) Run LED [RUN]
This LED turns on while the CPU module is running the user program.
This LED flashes when using certain functions while the user program is running.
LED

StatusON• While the CPU module is running the user program

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is running

Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)• While the CPU module is in USB boot• When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is stopped(5) Error LED [ERR]This LED turns on when an error occurs in the CPU module.
(6) SD Memory Card Status LED [SD]This LED turns on or flashes when the SD memory card is being read or written.
LED

StatusOFF• When the SD memory card is not inserted• When an unsupported or unformatted SD memory card was inserted• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is on, so the SD memory card has been unmounted• When the FC6A power is off

ON• The standby state where the SD memory card can be written or read

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)• When the FC6A is recognizing the SD memory card
• Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is turned on and the FC6A is unmounting the SD memory
card

Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)• Reading or writing the SD memory card

(7) Battery Status LED [BAT]This LED turns on or flashes when the backup battery level is low.
LED

Condition

Battery Status

OFF

Battery voltage (D8056) > 2,300

NormalSufficient battery level.

Flashing (1 s cycle)

2,300 ≥ battery voltage (D8056) > 2,000

Warning

Low battery level. Replace the battery.

ON

2,000 ≥ battery voltage (D8056)

Dead battery

The battery is almost dead. Or no battery.

(8) Status LED [STAT]This LED can be turned on or off in the user program.
(9) Input LEDs [IN]
These LEDs turn on when the corresponding input is on.
(10) Output LEDs [OUT]
These LEDs turn on when the corresponding output is on.
(11) Expansion Connector
This connector is used to connect an expansion module.
(12) Output Terminals
These terminals connect output devices such as electromagnetic switches and solenoid valves. The CPU module is available
in the relay output type (240V AC: 2 A, 30V DC: 2 A), the transistor sink output type (0.5 A), and the transistor protection
source output type (0.5 A).

2-50

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(13) Input Terminals
These terminals connect input devices such as push buttons and limit switches. DC inputs are both sinks and sources.
(14) USB Port
A mini-B type USB 2.0 connector. A USB cable can be attached to the FC6A and connected to a PC to download and upload
user programs using WindLDR.
(15) Function Switch
This switch turns M8073 on or off (default setting: 0 (off)).
You can run or stop the CPU module with this switch by enabling Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch in WindLDR (default
setting: enabled).
For details about the function switch, see "Function Switch Configuration" on page 5-10.
(16) Power Supply Terminals
These terminals are used to supply 24V DC power to the CPU module.
(17) ACT LED
This LED flashes when sending or receiving data while the LINK LED (18) is on.
(18) LINK LED
This LED is on when a network-compatible device is connected to Ethernet port 2.
(19) Ethernet Port 2This port allows Ethernet communication with connected devices that are equipped with an Ethernet interface.
(20) ACT LED
This LED flashes when sending or receiving data while the LINK LED (21) is on.
(21) LINK LED
This LED is on when a network-compatible device is connected to Ethernet port 1.
(22) Ethernet Port 1
This port allows Ethernet communication with connected devices that are equipped with an Ethernet interface.
(23) Analog Input
The connector for the analog input.
(24) Analog Potentiometer
A potentiometer for setting a timer or other device. This allows an analog value used in the user program to be set without
the use of an external device.
(25) Communication Connector
This connector is used to connect the HMI module and cartridge base module.
(26) Analog Port Cover
A removable cover that protects the analog input and analog potentiometer. When using these, remove the analog port
cover.
(27) SD Memory Card CoverAn openable cover that protects the SD memory card and function switch. Open the SD memory card cover when insertingor ejecting the SD memory card or when using the function switch.
(28) Expansion Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the expansion connector. Remove the expansion connector protection sticker when connecting an
expansion module.
(29) USB Port CoverAn openable cover that protects the USB port. When using the USB port, open the USB port cover.
(30) Power Supply Terminals CoverAn openable cover that protects the power supply terminals. Open the power supply terminals cover when removing andattaching the power supply terminals.
Note: The FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, and FC6A-D32P4CEE do not have a power supply terminal cover.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-51

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(31) Ethernet Port 2 Cover
A removable cover that protects Ethernet Port 2. When using the Ethernet port, remove the Ethernet Port 2 cover.
(32) Ethernet Port 1 Cover
A removable cover that protects Ethernet Port 1. When using the Ethernet port, remove the Ethernet Port 1 cover.
(33) Communication Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the communication connector. Remove the communication connector protection sticker whenconnecting the HMI module or cartridge base module.

2-52

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Specifications■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE,
FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

Rated Power Voltage

24V DC

Voltage Fluctuation Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC (including ripple)

Maximum Power Consumption

Standalone

When Maximum Load is Connected

FC6A-D16R1CEE/
2.88 W (24V DC)
FC6A-D16R4CEE

18.24 W (24V DC)

FC6A-D16K1CEE/
2.88 W (24V DC)
FC6A-D16K4CEE

18.24 W (24V DC)

FC6A-D16P1CEE/
FC6A-D16P4CEE

2.88 W (24V DC)

18.24 W (24V DC)

FC6A-D32K3CEE/
3.36 W (24V DC)
FC6A-D32K4CEE

18.72 W (24V DC)

FC6A-D32P3CEE/
FC6A-D32P4CEE

18.72 W (24V DC)

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

3.36 W (24V DC)

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)
Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween transistor output and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween relay output and FE terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteWithstand Voltage

Between power and input terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and transistor output terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteBetween input and relay output terminals: 2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween power and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between transistor output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between relay output and FE terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Insulation Resistance

Between power and input terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between power and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between power and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)
Between input and transistor output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistancetester)
Between input and relay output terminals: 100 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current

35 A maximum

Isolation

Between power terminal and internal circuit: Transformer isolated

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Grounding Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

Power Supply Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection

Reverse polarity: Normal operation
Improper voltage or frequency: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may be caused

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-53

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

Weight(approx.)

2-54

FC6A-D16R1CEE

290 g

FC6A-D16R4CEE

280 g

FC6A-D16K1CEE

275 g

FC6A-D16K4CEE

265 g

FC6A-D16P1CEE

275 g

FC6A-D16P4CEE

265 g

FC6A-D32K3CEE

255 g

FC6A-D32K4CEE

255 g

FC6A-D32P3CEE

255 g

FC6A-D32P4CEE

255 g

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ CPU Module Performance
FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

Type No.

ProgramCapacity*1

I/O Expansion

Program Data

800,000 bytes(100,000 steps)

Comment Data

384,000 bytes

Basic Expansion

7

Expansion Interface

8

Cartridges*3

3

Basic
I/O Points

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

Input

8

16

Output8

16

Basic Expansion*2

224

Expansion Interface*4

256

Cartridges*3

12

Expanded I/O with Expansion Interface
Remote Master/Slave Modules

I/O in the system can be expanded up to a maximum of 63 modules using expansion
interface modules (remote master/slave) (I/O points: maximum 2,016 points). For details,
see "Expansion Interface Modules (Remote Master/Slave)" on page 2-146.

User Program Download

1,000 times

Control System

Stored program system

Instructions
Processing
Speed

Basic Instructions

42 types

Advanced Instructions 130 types
Basic Instruction

0.021 ms/1,000 steps

END Processing

1 msInternal Relay

15,400Shift Register

256

Data Register

60,000Counter (adding, reversible)

512

Timer (1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s)

2,000

*1 1 step is equivalent to 8 bytes.
*2 There are limitations on the maximum number of outputs that can be simultaneously turned on.
For details, see "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37.
*3 A maximum of three cartridges can be used by connecting the cartridge base module and HMI module.
*4 The maximum number of expansion modules that can be connected can be increased by using the expansion interface module. For details, see"Expansion Interface Modules" on page 2-143.

Backup Function
Backup Data

RAM (internal relays, shift registers, counters, data registers*1)*2, clock

Backup Battery

Lithium ion primary cell (A battery is included with the product. The model of battery to be
included with the product cannot be specified.)
Panasonic: BR2032/CR2032A/CR2032B, Murata: CR2032X/CR2032W

Battery Life

Guaranteed 1 year, replacement recommended every 4 years (+25°C)*3

Replaceability

Replace within 1 minute after power off (recommended)*4*1 D70000 to D269999 cannot be designated as "Keep." Data register values are kept when you switch the PLC from Stop to Run, but those values
are cleared at power up.
*2 To prepare for when the battery dies, the contents of RAM (internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers) can be saved to nonvolatile memory. For how to save the contents of RAM, see "SD Memory Card" on page 11-1.
*3 The battery is primarily consumed by backup current while unpowered. However, the ambient environment (temperature and humidity) while
unpowered and powered also affects consumption. In particular, battery life is greatly reduced in a high-temperature and high-humidity
environment, so replacement is recommended every year when the effect of the ambient environment (temperature and humidity) while
unpowered and powered is included.
*4 Replacement while powered and replacement while power is supplied from the USB bus are also possible. For the replacement method, see"Replacing the Backup Battery" on page 3-34.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-55

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Clock Function
Accuracy±30 seconds/month at 25°C

Self-diagnostic Functions








Keep data
User program (ROM) CRC check
Timer/counter preset value change check
User program syntax check
User program execution check
Watchdog timer check
User program download check









Power failure detection
Clock error
Data link connection check
Expansion bus initialization check
System check
SD memory card transfer check
SD memory card access check

Input Filter
0 ms (no filter), 3 to 15 ms (selectable in increments of 1 ms)
FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

Type No.
I0 to I7

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

0 ms (no filter), 3 to 15 ms (selectable in increments of 1 ms)

I10 to I13—

0 ms (no filter),
3 to 15 ms selectable (in 1 ms increments)

I14 to I17—

3 ms fixed

Catch Input/Interrupt Input
FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

Type No.
High-speed 6 Points (I0, I1, I3, I4, I6,
I7)

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

Minimum turn on pulse width: 5 μs
Minimum turn off pulse width: 5 μs

Medium-speed 3 Points (I11, I12, I13)—

Minimum turn on pulse width: 35 μs
Minimum turn off pulse width: 35 μs

High-speed CounterMaximum Counter Frequency and Points

Single-phase, two-phase common: 100 kHz (single-phase 6 points max, two-phase 3 points max)

Count Range

Single-phase, two-phase common: 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits)

Operation Mode

Rotary encoder mode, adding counter mode, frequency measurement mode

Pulse Output (Transistor Output Type Only)
PointsHigh-speed Output(100 kHz)

4

Function Switch
PointsFunction

1 (2 position slide switch)
Program run/stop
The function can be set in the function area settings (default setting: enabled).

Analog Potentiometer
Points1

Data Resolution

0 to 1,000

Analog Input
Points1

Input Range

0 to 10 V

Data Resolution

0 to 4,095

Input ImpedanceApprox. 100 kΩ

Error±1% of full scale (±5% of full scale when noise is applied)

2-56

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Delay Time

12 ms (including the software filter)

Maximum Allowed Steady Load

13 V

Isolation

Not isolated

Cable

Unshielded cable 1 m (included with the product)

Run/Stop Methods
 Power on/off
 WindLDR RUN/STOP command Function switch operation

 Special internal relay (M8000) operation
 Operation of stop input and reset input

USB Port
Points1

Communication TypeUSB2.0 Full speed, CDC class

Communication Functions

Capable of maintenance communication with a PC

Connector

USB mini-B

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Not isolated

Available Function when FC6A isPowered by USB

Downloading/uploading user programs, downloading system software, data file manager

Ethernet Port
Points2(When the HMI module is connected, this can be expanded by 1 point with the Ethernet
port that has the web server function.)

Communication TypeIEEE 802.3 compliant

Communication Speed

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Port 1

Maintenance communication server,
User communication server/client (TCP/UDP),
Modbus TCP server/client,
MC protocol client,
PING, SNTP, e-mail, web server, FTP server/client, BACnet/IP

Port 2

Maintenance communication server,
User communication server/client (TCP/UDP),
Modbus TCP server/client,
MC protocol client,
PING, EtherNet/IP communication

Communication
Functions

Connector

RJ45 (Auto MDI/MDI-X compatible)

Cable

CAT 5 or higher, STP

Maximum Cable Length

100 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Pulse transformer isolated

SD Memory Card Slot
Points1

Supported SD Card

SD memory cards (max 2 GB), SDHC memory cards (max 32 GB)

File System

FAT16, FAT32

Function

Downloading/uploading user programs, saving log data,
recipes, downloading system software, saving web pages

Insertion/Removal Durability

2,000 times

Communication Connector
Cartridge Base Module
Connection*1

No. ofModules1(Two cartridges can be connected to the cartridge base module when it is connected to thePlus CPU module.)

HMI Module Connection*1

No. ofModules

1(One cartridge can be connected to the HMI module when it is connected to the Plus CPU
module.)FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-57

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
*1 All devices that are connectable to the communication connector cannot be used in expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C
and 55 to 65°C). Do not connect these devices when the product is used in expanded ambient operating temperatures.

DC Input Specifications■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

Rated Input Voltage

24V DC shared sink/source

Input Voltage Range
Rated Input Current

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

20.4 to 28.8V DC
I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7 5 mA/point (at 24V DC)
I2, I5, I10 to I17

Terminal Arrangement

7 mA/point (at 24V DC)
See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7 4.9 kΩ

Input Impedance

I2, I5, I10 to I17

3.4 kΩ

I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7 5 μs + software filter setting
Turn ONTime
Input Delay Time

I2, I535 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I13—

35 μs + software filter setting

I14 to I17—

4.1 msI0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7 5 μs + software filter setting
Turn OFFTime

I2, I535 μs + software filter setting

I10 to I13—

35 μs + software filter setting

I14 to I17—

4.1 msQuantity of Inputs

8 points in 1 common line

Isolation

Between Input
Terminals

Not isolatedInternal circuit

Photocoupler isolated

16 points in 1 common line

Input TypeType1 (IEC61131-2)

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages are caused.
However, if high voltage is applied that exceeds the input voltage range, there is arisk of permanent damage.

Cable Length3m

I/O Terminal
Connector

2-58

Type

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

Insertion/Removal Durability

100 times minimum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Operating Ranges
The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input is as follows.

Input Voltage (V DC)

I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7

Input Voltage (V DC)

28.8 V

I2, I5, I10 to I17

28.8 VON Area

ON Area
24 V

24 V

15 V

15 V

Transition
Area

Transition
Area
5V

5V

OFF Area

OFF Area
0.6 mA

2.6 mA

5 mA

6 mA

Input Current(mA)

1.3 mA

4.2 mA7 mA

8.4 mA

Input Current(mA)

Input Internal Circuit

Internal Circuit

I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7 4.7 kΩ
Input

COM

COM

3.3 KΩ

Internal Circuit

I2, I5, I10 to I17
Input

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-59

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Relay Output Specifications■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE

No. of Outputs

8Output Points per
Common Line

COM1

4

COM2

4

Terminal Arrangement

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

Output Type1a contact

Maximum Load Current *1

1

2 A maximum

1 Common7 A maximum

Minimum Switching Load

1.0 mA/5.0V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

30 mΩ or lower

Electrical Life

100,000 operations minimum (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)

Rated Load

*1

240V AC 2 A, 30V DC 2 A

Withstand Voltage

I/O Terminal Connector

Between Output
Terminal and FE

2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

2,300V AC, 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminals (COMs)

2,300V AC, 1 minuteType

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum*1 Values for resistive/inductive load.

Output Delay
ON

Input to Relay
OFF
ON

Output Relay StatusOFF

OFF Bounce:
OFF Delay:
ON Bounce:
ON Delay:2-60

6 ms maximum
10 ms maximum
6 ms maximum
6 ms maximum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Transistor Sink Output Specifications■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE

Output Points

816

Output Points per Common Line

8

16

Rated Load Voltage

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement
Maximum Load Current

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.
1

0.5 A maximum

0.1 A maximum

1 Common

4 A maximum

1.6 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (+V terminal supply power)

Isolation

I/O Terminal Connector

0.2 A

2.4 W

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

Type

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Turn OFF Time

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit
V(+)

Internal Circuit

OutputT2
T1

COM(-)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-61

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Transistor Protection Source Output Specifications■ 24V DC Power TypeType No.

FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

Output Points

816

Output Points per Common Line

8

16

Rated Load Voltage

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement
Maximum Load Current

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.
1

0.5 A maximum

0.1 A maximum

1 Common

4 A maximum

1.6 A maximum

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

1 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

39 V±1 V

Maximum Lamp Load

12 W

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (-V terminal supply power)

Output Protection Functions

Overcurrent protection function (not a thermal shutdown function).
Overcurrent detected with 4 outputs as 1 group. (Group 1: Q0 to Q3, Group 2: Q4 to
Q7, Group 3: Q10 to Q13, Group 4: Q14 to Q17)
When overcurrent is detected, the 4 outputs in the corresponding group are turned
off for a fixed period (1 s). When overcurrent is detected, a special internal relay
turns on (M8172 to M8175) and the error LED [ERR] turns on.

Output Current Limit Value

1.0 to 2.0 A

Isolation

I/O Terminal Connector

2.4 W

0.2 to 0.3 A

Between Output
Terminal andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

Type

See "24V DC Power Type" on page 2-64.

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

Turn ON Time

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Turn OFF Time

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less

Q0 to Q7: 5 μs or less
Q10 to Q17: 300 μs or less

Output Delay

Output Internal Circuit
COM (+)

Internal Circuit

OutputV (-)(The overcurrent detection circuit has been omitted.)

2-62

0.2 A

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio

When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the input voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous ON
ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the FC6A
is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

■ Relay Output Type(FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE)
Reduce the input voltage, output voltage, and I/O simultaneous ON ratio as shown in the following diagrams.
Input I/O

Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

28.8 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

240V AC

26.4 V
24.0 V

100V AC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0%

25%

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

50%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0%

50%

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

30V DC

24V DC
Ambient
Temperature
65°C

5V DC
0V
0%

50%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)■ Transistor Output Type(FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D32K1CEE, FC6A-D32P1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE,
FC6A-D32P4CEE)
Reduce the input voltage, output voltage, and I/O simultaneous ON ratio as shown in the following diagrams.
Input Voltage

Input I/O

Ambient
Temperature 30°C

28.8 V

Output Voltage

Output I/O

Ambient
Temperature 30°C

28.8 V
Ambient
Temperature
55°C

24.0 V

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

0V
0%12.5%20%

40%

Ambient
Temperature
55°C

60%

I/O Simultaneous 0 V
100% ON Ratio (%)
0% 12.5% 25%

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

60%

80%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

2-63

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ 24V DC Power Type
Plus 16-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-C16R1CEE, FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE
Push-in type:
FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

Applicable connector(1) Power supply terminals(2) Input terminals
Relay output
Transistor sink output(3) Output terminals

Transistor protection source output

Screw fastened type

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTCN10PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSCN10PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTCR11PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSCR11PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTCK11PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSCK11PN02

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTCP11PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSCP11PN02(1) Power supply terminals

Push-in type

24V DC Power Input+24V -+FE-

External Power
24V DC: Fuse

(1)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(2)

(3)

L : Load(2) Input terminals
DC Sink Input Wiring
PNP+ 2-wire Sensor+ External Power
24V DC

I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM

24V DC
Input

I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM

24V DCInput

DC Source Input WiringNPN- 2-wire +Sensor- +External Power
24V DC

2-64

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals
Relay Output:
FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE

Relay
Output

L

Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
COM0
NC
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
COM1

L
L
L
+ -

L
L
L
L
+ -

Transistor Sink Output:
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Transistor
Sink
Q5
OutputQ6(24 V)Q7
COM (-)COM (-)
+V

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

24V DC- +Transistor Protection Source Output:
FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Transistor
Q4
Protection
SourceQ5
OutputQ6(24 V)Q7
COM (+)COM (+)
-V

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

24V DC+ -FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-65

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Plus 32-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32P3CEE
Push-in type:
FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

Applicable connector(1) Power supply terminals

Screw fastened type

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

Push-in type

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02(2) Input terminals

FC4A-PMC20PN02(3) Output terminals

FC4A-PMC20PN02

Screw fastened type(1) Power supply terminals

Push-in type

24V DC Power Input+24V -+FE-

External Power
24V DC: FuseL : Load(1)(2) (3)(1)(2) (3)(2) Input terminals
The two COM lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18. For the connector cable, see "Cables" on page A-14.
DC Sink Input Wiring+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP
+
-

24V DC

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
NC

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
NC

- 2-wire +SensorPNP
24V DC+-DC Source Input Wiring- 2-wire +Sensor

NPN
+

2-66

24V DC

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

+ 2-wire Sensor

NPN
24V DC+FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Output terminals
The two COM(+) and COM(-) lines are each connected in the module.
The two +V and -V lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
For the connector cable, see "Cables" on page A-14.
Transistor sink output type: FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

24V DC

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM(-)
COM(-)
3
4
+V
+V
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

24V DC

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
Transistor Protection Source Output Type: FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

24V DC

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM(+)
COM(+)
3
4
-V
-V
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

24V DC

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-67

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Other Inputs and Ports

(1)
(2)
(3)

(1) Analog input
No.

Signal Wire

2

Cable Color

1

AN(+)

Red

1

2

AN(-)

Black

No.

Signal Wire

1

TPO+

2

TPO-

3

TPI+

4

―

5

―

6

TPI-

7

―

(2) Ethernet Port 1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

8

―

Shell*1

Shield*1 Shell is connected to FE on the power supply terminals.

(3) Ethernet Port 2

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

No.

Signal Wire

1

TPO+

2

TPO-

3

TPI+

4

―

5

―

6

TPI-

7

―

8

―

Shell*1

Shield*1 Shell is connected to FE on the power supply terminals.

2-68

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital I/O Modules
Digital I/O modules are available as three types of modules: digital input modules equipped with input terminals, digital output
modules equipped with output terminals, and digital mixed I/O modules equipped with both input and output terminals.

Digital Input Module
Parts Description
Example: FC6A-N08B1

Example: FC6A-N32B3(2) Input LEDs

(5) Expansion Connector(2) Input LEDs
(5) Expansion Connector(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label(3) Terminal Name Labels(3) Terminal Name Label(4) Cable Terminals(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label
Indicates the digital input module type number and specifications.
(2) Input LEDs
These LEDs turn on when an input is on.
(3) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(4) Cable Terminal
Three types of terminals are separately available: the terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch), the terminal block type (5.08 mm
pitch), and the connector type.
(5) Expansion Connector
Connects the expansion modules and the CPU module.

Model List
■ DC Input Modules
Cable Terminal TypeTerminal block type (5.08 mm pitch)
Terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch)

DC Input 8 Points

Screw fastened type

FC6A-N08B1

Push-in type

FC6A-N08B4

Screw fastened typePush-in type

Connector type――

DC Input 16 Points

DC Input 32 Points――

FC6A-N16B1
FC6A-B16B4
FC6A-N16B3―
FC6A-N32B3■ AC Input Modules
Cable Terminal TypeTerminal block type (5.08 mm pitch)

AC Input 8 Points

Screw fastened type

FC6A-N08A11

Push-in type

FC6A-N08A14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-69

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ DC Input Module Specifications
FC6A-N08B1
FC6A-N08B4

Type No.

FC6A-N16B1
FC6A-N16B4

Rated Input Voltage

12/24V DC*1 shared sink/source

Operating Load Voltage Range

0.0 to 28.8V DC

FC6A-N16B3

FC6A-N32B3

Rated Input Current

3.5 mA/point (at 12V DC), 7 mA/point (at 24V DC)

Input Points

8 (8 points in 1
common line)

16 (16 points in 1 common line)

32 (16 points in 1
common line)

Terminal Arrangement

See 2-74

See 2-75

See 2-78

Input Impedance

3.4 kΩ

Input Delay
Time (24V DC)
Isolation

Turn ON Time

4.1 msTurn OFF Time

4.1 ms

BetweenChannels

Not isolatedInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

2.5 mA/point (at 12V DC), 5 mA/point (at 24V DC)

See 2-77
4.4 kΩ

External Load for I/OInterconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input
Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages are caused.
If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.

Cable Length3m

Connector

Internal
Current Draw

Insertion/
RemovalDurability

100 times minimum

All Points ON

30 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

All Points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-N08B1: 110 g
FC6A-N08B4: 95 g

Weight (approx.)

40 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

65 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-N16B1: 105 g
FC6A-N16B4: 95 g

75 g

110 g

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

Operating Ranges

The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input modules is as follows.
FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08B4, FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B4
Input Voltage (V DC)

FC6A-N16B3, FC6A-N32B3
Input Voltage (V DC)

28.8 V28.8 VON Area

ON Area

24 V

24 V

10.2 V*2

10.2 V*2

Transition
Area

Transition
Area

5V

5V

OFF Area
1.2 mA

2.8 mA*3

OFF Area
7.0 mA

Input Current
8.4 mA (mA)

0.9 mA

2.2 mA*4

5.3 mA

Input Current
6.4 mA (mA)

*2 15 V for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number" on
page 2-1.
*3 4.2 mA for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.
*4 3.2 mA for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-70

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Internal Circuit
FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08B4, FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B4
3.3 KΩ

Internal Circuit

Input

COM
FC6A-N16B3, FC6A-N32B3
4.3 KΩ

Internal Circuit

Input

COM

Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 30°C or higher, reduce the input voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous ON
ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the FC6A
is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08B4
Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B4
Input Voltage

28.8 V28.8 V

26.4 V

26.4 V

24.0 V

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature 45°C
Ambient
Temperature
55°C

I/O
Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

50%

Input Voltage

26.4 V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

Ambient
Temperature 30°C

28.8 V
Ambient
Temperature
55°C

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

FC6A-N16B3, FC6A-N32B3

35% 50%70%

I/O
Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

I/O
Simultaneous
25% 35% 45% 50% 70% 90% 100% ON Ratio (%)

I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio (a%)
FC6A-N08B1,
FC6A-N08B4

I0 to I7

There are no usage restrictions for input and output I/O.

FC6A-N16B1,
FC6A-N16B4

I0 to I7
I10 to I17

Set the usage ratio of the inputs (ON status) to a% or lower according to the conditions in theabove graph.

FC6A-N16B3

I0 to I7
I10 to I17

Set the usage ratio of the inputs (ON status) to a% or lower according to the conditions in theabove graph.

CN1

I0 to I7
I10 to I17

Set the usage ratio of the inputs (ON status) to a% or lower according to the conditions in theabove graph.*1

CN2

I20 to I27
I30 to I37

Set the usage ratio of the inputs (ON status) to a% or lower according to the conditions in theabove graph.*1

FC6A-N32B3*1 For the usage ratio of connector CN1 and CN2 inputs, set each to a% or lower.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-71

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ AC Input Module Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14

Rated Input Voltage

100 to 120V AC

Operating Load Voltage Range

0 to 132V AC

Rated Power Frequency

50/60 Hz

Rated Input Current

15 mA/1 point (at 120V AC, 50/60 Hz)

Input Points

8 points in 2 common lines

Terminal Arrangement

See 2-79

Input TypeAC input
Type 1, 2 (IEC 61131-2)

Input Impedance
Input Delay
Time

Isolation

8.0 kΩ (at 60 Hz)
Turn ON Time

25 ms

Turn OFF Time

30 ms

In the Same Common
ChannelNot isolated

In Different Common
Channels

Isolated

Between Input andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

If high voltage is applied that exceeds the input voltage range, there is a risk of permanent
damage.

Connector
Internal
Current Draw
Weight(approx.)Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

All Points ON

40 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

All Points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-N08A11

110 g

FC6A-N08A14

95 g

Operating Ranges
The operating range of Type 1 and 2 (IEC 61131-2) AC input modules is as follows.
FC6-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14
Input Voltage (V AC)
132 V(17 mA, 132 V)

ON Area
100 V(13 mA, 100 V)

79 V
74 V

Transition Area
31 V
20 V

OFF Area
0V
0 mA

2-72

Input Current
4 mA 5 mA

9.5 mA

13 mA

17 mA (mA)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Internal Circuit
FC6-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14
470 kΩ

150 nF2.21 kΩCOM

Internal Circuit

220 Ω

Input

Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
 At conditions where the ambient temperature is 55°C and the input voltage is 132 V, the inputs can be 100% used.
 When the is used in an ambient temperature of 55°C or higher, reduce the input voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous ON
ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the
FC6A is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14
Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

132 V
120 V
102 V
Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

50%

I/O
100% Usage Limits

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-73

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08B4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-N08B1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-N08B4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02

DC.IN

DC.IN

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

COM COM COM

COM COM COM

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-N08B1

FC6A-N08B4

The 3 COM lines are connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
DC Sink Input Wiring Example+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP
12/24V DC*1+-

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
COM
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM
COM

DC Source Input Wiring Example- 2-wire +Sensor

NPN
12/24V DC*1+

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
COM
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM
COM

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-74

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B4
Push-in type: FC6A-N16B4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
DC.IN

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

DC.IN

12
13
14
16
COM COM 17

15

16
COM COM 17

15

14

13

12

11

11

10

10

COM COM

COM COM

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Screw fastened type: FC6A-N16B1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-N16B1

FC6A-N16B4

The 4 COM lines are connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
DC Sink Input Wiring Example+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP*1

12/24V DC+-

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
COM
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COM
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
COM

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-75

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
DC Source Input Wiring Example- 2-wire +SensorNPN- 2-wire +Sensor

NPN
12/24V DC*1+

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
COM
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COM
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
COM
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
COM

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-76

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-N16B3
Connector type

Applicable connector: FC4A-PMC20PNO2
The two COM lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18. For the connector cable, see"Cables" on page A-14.
DC Sink Input Wiring Example

DC.IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP
+

20
19

-

12/24V DC*1

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM
NC

- 2-wire +Sensor

PNP
12/24V DC*1+-

DC Source Input Wiring Example- 2-wire +2
1

SensorNPN
FC6A-N16B3+

12/24V DC*1

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM
NC

+ 2-wire Sensor

NPN
12/24V DC*1+

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-77

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-N32B3
Connector type

Applicable connector: FC4A-PMC20PNO2
The two COM0 and COM1 lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for COM0 and COM1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18. For the connector cable, see"Cables" on page A-14.

DC.IN
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

CN1

CN2

2
1

20
19

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

FC6A-N32B3

DC Sink Input Wiring Example
CN1

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
PNP
10
8
*1
12/24V DC
642+ 2-wire Sensor

+
-

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM0
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

CN2

I/O
- 2-wire +I10
Sensor
I11
I12
I13
I14
PNP
I15
+
I16
12/24V DC*1
I17
COM0
NC

Sensor+-DC Source Input Wiring Example
CN1

Terminal No.
20
Sensor
18
16
14
12
NPN
10
8
*1
12/24V DC
642- 2-wire +

+

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM0
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

Terminal No.
20
18
16
14
12
PNP
10
8
*1
12/24V DC
642+ 2-wire -

I/O
I20
I21
I22
I23
I24
I25
I26
I27
COM1
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
- 2-wire +I30
Sensor
I31
I32
I33
I34
PNP
I35
+
I36
12/24V DC*1
I37
COM1
NC

I/O
I20
I21
I22
I23
I24
I25
I26
I27
COM1
NC

Terminal No.
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

I/O
+ 2-wire I30
Sensor
I31
I32
I33
I34
NPN
I35
I36
12/24V DC*1
+
I37
COM1
NC

CN2

I/O
+ 2-wire I10
Sensor
I11
I12
I13
I14
NPN
I15
I16
12/24V DC*1
+
I17
COM0
NC

Terminal No.
20
Sensor
18
16
14
12
NPN
10
8
*1
12/24V DC
642- 2-wire ++*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-78

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14
Screw fastened type: FC6A-N08A11
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-N08A14
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
AC.IN

Ry.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

COM1

COM1

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

NC COM0

NC COM0

3

3

2

2

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-N08A14

FC6A-R081

Each of the terminals for COM0 and COM1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
AC input wiring example

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
COM0
NC
4
5
6
7
COM1

Caution

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
COM0
NC
I4
I5
I6
I7
COM1

Do not connect an external load.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-79

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital Output Module
Parts Description
Example: FC6A-R081

Example: FC6A-T32K3(2) Output LEDs

(5) Expansion Connector(2) Output LEDs
(5) Expansion Connector(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label(3) Terminal Name Labels(3) Terminal Name Label(4) Cable Terminals(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label
Indicates the digital output module type number and specifications.
(2) Output LEDs
These LEDs turn on when an output is on.
(3) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(4) Cable Terminal
Three types of terminals are separately available: the terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch), the terminal block type (5.08 mm
pitch), and the connector type.
(5) Expansion Connector
Connects the expansion modules and the CPU module.

2-80

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model List
■ Relay Output Modules
Cable Terminal TypeTerminal block type(5.08 mm pitch)

Relay Output 8 Points

Screw fastened type

FC6A-R081

Push-in type

FC6A-R084

Screw fastened type

Terminal block type(3.81 mm pitch)

Relay Output 16 Points―
FC6A-R161―

Push-in type

FC6A-R164■ Transistor Sink Output Modules
Cable Terminal TypeTr Sink Output 8 Points

Terminal block type(5.08 mm pitch)

Screw fastened type

FC6A-T08K1

Push-in type

FC6A-T08K4

Terminal block type(3.81 mm pitch)

Screw fastened typePush-in type

Connector type―

Tr Sink Output 16 Points

Tr Sink Output 32 Points――

FC6A-T16K1
FC6A-T16K4――

FC6A-T16K3

FC6A-T32K3

Tr Source Output 8
PointsTr Source Output 16
PointsTr Source Output 32
Points――■ Transistor Source Output Modules
Cable Terminal TypeTerminal block type(5.08 mm pitch)
Terminal block type(3.81 mm pitch)
Connector type

Screw fastened type

FC6A-T08P1

Push-in type

FC6A-T08P4

Screw fastened typePush-in type――

FC6A-T16P1
FC6A-T16P4
FC6A-T16P3

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL―
FC6A-T32P3

2-81

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ Relay Output Module Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-R081, FC6A-R084

No. of Outputs

8 (4 points in 1 common line)

Output Type1a contact

Terminal Arrangement
Load Current

1
1 Common

FC6A-R161, FC6A-R164
16 (8 points in 1 common line)

See 2-88

See 2-89

2 A maximum
7 A maximum

8 A maximum

Minimum Switching Load

1.0 mA/5.0V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

30 mΩ or lower

Electrical Life

100,000 operations minimum (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)
240V AC 2 A (resistive load, cosφ=0.4 inductive load)Rated Load

Withstand
Voltage

Connector
ModuleInternal
Current Draw

30V DC 2 A (resistive load, L/R=7 ms inductive load)
Between Output
Terminal and FE

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminal and Internal
Circuit

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminals (COMs)

2,300V AC 1 minuteInsertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

100 times minimum

All Points ON

35 mA (5V DC)
50 mA (24V DC)

50 mA (5V DC)
100 mA (24V DC)

All Points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-R081: 130 g
FC6A-R084: 115 g

FC6A-R161: 140 g
FC6A-R164: 130 g

Weight (approx.)

Note: When expanding the CPU module with relay output modules, there are limitations on the number of relays that can be simultaneously on. For
details, see "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37.
If the maximum number of relays is exceeded, it may not be possible to turn on output relays.

Output Delay
ON

Input to Relay
OFF
ON

Output Relay StatusOFF

OFF Bounce:
OFF Delay:
ON Bounce:
ON Delay:2-82

6 ms maximum
10 ms maximum
6 ms maximum
6 ms maximum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 55°C or higher, reduce the output voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous
ON ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the
FC6A is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-R081, FC6A-R084, FC6A-R161, FC6A-R164
Output Voltage

Output Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

240V AC

30V DC

100V AC

24V DC

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

50%

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultan
100% ON Ratio (%

5V DC
0V
0%

50%

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

I/O Simultane
100% ON Ratio (%)

2-83

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Transistor Sink Output Module Specifications
FC6A-T08K1
FC6A-T08K4

Type No.
Output Signal

FC6A-T16K1
FC6A-T16K4

FC6A-T16K3

Transistor sink output

Rated Load Voltage

12/24V DC*1

Operating Load Voltage Range

10.2 to 28.8V DC

No. of Outputs

8(8 points in 1
common line)

Rated Load

0.5 A 1 point

Terminal Arrangement

See 2-90

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

0.4 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Allowed Inrush Current

1 A maximum

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

50 V

Lamp Load

12 W maximum

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw
Isolation

Between Output Terminals

Not isolatedConnector

Insertion/Removal Durability

100 times minimum

All Points ON

25 mA (5V DC)
15 mA (24V DC)

All Points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

Turn ON Time450 μs or lower

Turn OFF Time450 μs or lower

Output Delay
Weight (approx.)16(16 points in 1 common line)32(16 points in 1
common line)

0.1 A 1 point
See 2-92

See 2-94

See 2-95

2.4 W maximum

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (+V terminal supply power)

Between Output Terminal
and Internal Circuit

Internal
Current Draw

FC6A-T32K3

Photocoupler isolated

FC6A-T08K1: 110 g
FC6A-T08K4: 95 g

30 mA (5V DC)
25 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-T16K1: 105 g
FC6A-T16K4: 95 g

45 mA (5V DC)
50 mA (24V DC)

70 g

115 g

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

Output Internal Circuit
V (+)

Internal Circuit

OutputCOM (-)

2-84

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 55°C or higher, reduce the output voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous
ON ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the
FC6A is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T08K4, FC6A-T16K1, FC6A-T16K4, FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-T32K3
Output Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

28.8 V
26.4 V
24.0 V
Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

50%

I/O Simultaneo
100% ON Ratio (%)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-85

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Transistor Protection Source Output Module Specifications
FC6A-T08P1
FC6A-T08P4

Type No.

FC6A-T16P1
FC6A-T16P4

FC6A-T16P3

Output Signal

Transistor protection source output

Rated Load Voltage

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

No. of Outputs

8(8 points in 1
common line)

Rated Load

0.5 A 1 point

Terminal Arrangement

See 2-91

Output Current Limit Range

1.01 to 2.6 A

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

0.4 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Allowed Inrush Current

1 A maximum

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

41 to 52 V

Lamp Load

12 W maximum

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

Protection Operation

Temporarily protected by element heat generation, automatic recovery.
(There is no function that detects the protection error.)

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (-V terminal supply power)

Isolation

Connector
ModuleInternal
Current Draw
Output DelaySee 2-96

Between Output
Terminals

Not isolated

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

All points ON

25 mA (5V DC)
15 mA (24V DC)

All points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)

Turn ON Time450 μs or lower

Turn OFF Time450 μs or lower
FC6A-T08P1: 110 g
FC6A-T08P4: 95 g

9.6 W maximum

30 mA (5V DC)
25 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-T16P1: 105 g
FC6A-T16P4: 95 g

Output Internal Circuit
Internal Circuit
COM (+)

OutputV (-)
Output Protection Element(The overcurrent detection circuit has been omitted.)

2-86

See 2-94
0.7 to 1.7 A

Photocoupler isolated

Logic

32
(16 points in 1
common line)

0.1 A 1 point
See 2-93

Between Output
Terminal and Internal
Circuit

Weight (approx.)16(16 points in 1 common line)

FC6A-T32P3

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

45 mA (5V DC)
50 mA (24V DC)

75 g

115 g

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, Output Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 55°C or higher, reduce the output voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous
ON ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the
FC6A is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-T08P1, FC6A-T08P4, FC6A-T16P1, FC6A-T16P4, FC6A-T16P3, FC6A-T32P3
Output Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

28.8 V
26.4 V
24.0 V
Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

50%

I/O Simultaneo
100% ON Ratio (%)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-87

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-R081, FC6A-R084

Screw fastened type: FC6A-R081
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-R084
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
Ry.OUTRy.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

COM1

COM1

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

NC COM0

NC COM0

3

3

2

2

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-R084

FC6A-R081

Each of the terminals for COM0 and COM1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse

+
+

+
-

2-88

L
L
L
L

-

+

L : Load

L
L
L
L

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
COM0
NC
4
5
6
7
COM1

I/O
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
COM0
NC
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
COM1

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-R161, FC6A-R164
Push-in type: FC6A-R164
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
Ry.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Ry.OUT

16

16

COM1 COM1 17

COM1 COM1 17

15

15

14

14

13

13

12

12

11

11

10

10

COM0 COM0

COM0 COM0

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Screw fastened type: FC6A-R161
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-R161

FC6A-R164

The two COM0 and COM1 lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for COM0 and COM1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

L : Load
Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM0
COM0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COM1
COM1

I/O
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
COM0
COM0
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16
Q17
COM1
COM1

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-89

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T08K4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-T08K1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-T08K4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02

Tr.OUT

Tr.OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

+V

+V

COM(-) COM(-)

COM(-) COM(-)

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-T08K1

FC6A-T08K4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

12/24V DC*1

L : Load

Terminal No. I/O
0
Q0
1
Q1
2
Q2
Q3
3
Q4
4
Q5
5
6
Q6
Q7
7
COM(-) COM(-)
COM(-) COM(-)+V+V

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-90

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T08P1, FC6A-T08P4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-T08P1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-T08P4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
Tr.OUT

Tr.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

-V

-V

COM(+) COM(+)

COM(+) COM(+)

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-T08P4

FC6A-T08P1

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

24V DC

L : Load

Terminal No. I/O
0
Q0
1
Q1
2
Q2
Q3
3
Q4
4
Q5
5
6
Q6
Q7
7
COM(+) COM(+)
COM(+) COM(+)-V-V

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-91

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T16K1, FC6A-T16K4
Push-in type: FC6A-T16K4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
Tr.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Tr.OUT

16

16+V COM(-) 17+V COM(-) 17

15

15

14

14

13

13

12

12

11

11

10

10

+V COM(-)+V COM(-)

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Screw fastened type: FC6A-T16K1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-T16K1

FC6A-T16K4

The two COM(-) lines are each connected in the module.
The two +V lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ 12/24V DC*1

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ 12/24V DC*1

L : Load
Terminal No. I/O
0
Q0
1
Q1
2
Q2
Q3
3
Q4
4
Q5
5
6
Q6
Q7
7
COM(-) COM(-)
+V
+V
10
Q10
11
Q11
12
Q12
Q13
13
Q14
14
Q15
15
16
Q16
Q17
17
COM(-) COM(-)+V+V

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-92

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T16P1, FC6A-T16P4
Push-in type: FC6A-T16P4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
Tr.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Tr.OUT

16

16-V COM(+) 17-V COM(+) 17

15

15

14

14

13

13

12

12

11

11

10

10

-V COM(+)-V COM(+)

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Screw fastened type: FC6A-T16P1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-T16P1

FC6A-T16P4

The two COM(+) lines are each connected in the module.
The two -V lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: FuseL : Load

Terminal No. I/O
0
Q0
L
1
Q1
L
2
Q2
L
Q3
3
L
Q4
4
L
Q5
5
L
6
Q6
L
Q7
7
COM(+) COM(+)
24V DC
-V
-V
L
10
Q10
L
11
Q11
L
12
Q12
L
Q13
13
L
Q14
14
L
Q15
15
L
16
Q16
L
Q17
17
COM(+) COM(+)
24V DC
-V
-V
L

- +

- +

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-93

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-T16P3
Terminal block types

Applicable connector: FC4A-PMC20PN02
The two COM(+) and COM(-) lines are each connected in the module.
The two +V and -V lines are each connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
For the connector cable, see "Cables" on page A-14.
: FuseL : Load

FC6A-T16K3
Tr.OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

12/24V DC*1

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM(-)
COM(-)
3
4
+V
+V
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

12/24V DC *1

20
19

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

2
1*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number ofmodules, see "Checking the Version Number" on page 2-1.

FC6A-T16K3

FC6A-T16P3
Tr.OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

2
1

20
19

24V DC

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM(+)
COM(+)
3
4
-V
-V
1
2

FC6A-T16P3

2-94

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

24V DC2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T32K3
Terminal block type
Tr.OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

CN1

CN2

Applicable connector: FC4A-PMC20PN02
The two COM0(-) and COM1(-) lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for COM0(-) and COM1(-) are independent.
The two +V0 and +V1 lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for +V0 and +V1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
For the connector cable, see "Cables" on page A-14.
: Fuse

CN1

L
20
19

L
L
L
L
L
L
L

2
1

+ 12/24V DC*1

FC6A-T32K3

L : Load

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM0(-)
COM0(-)
3
4
+V0
+V0
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +
12/24V DC*1

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
CN2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ 12/24V DC*1

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q30
20
Q20
17
Q31
18
Q21
15
Q32
16
Q22
Q33
13
Q23
14
Q34
11
Q24
12
Q35
Q25
9
10
7
8
Q36
Q26
Q37
Q27
5
6
COM1(-)
COM1(-)
3
4
+V1
+V1
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +
12/24V DC*1

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number ofmodules, see "Checking the Version Number" on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-95

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-T32P3
Terminal block type
Tr.OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

CN1

CN2

Applicable connector: FC4A-PMC20PN02
The two COM0(+) and COM1(+) lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for COM0(+) and COM1(+) are independent.
The two -V0 and -V1 lines are each connected in the module.
Each of the terminals for -V0 and -V1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
For the connector cable, see "Cables" on page A-14.
: FuseL : Load

CN1

L
20
19

L
L
L
L
L
L
L

2
1

- +

24V DC

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q10
20
Q0
17
Q11
18
Q1
15
Q12
16
Q2
Q13
13
Q3
14
Q14
11
Q4
12
Q15
Q5
9
10
7
8
Q16
Q6
Q17
Q7
5
6
COM0(+)
COM0(+)
3
4
-V0
-V0
1
2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

24V DC

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.
FC6A-T32P3

CN2

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
- +

24V DC

Terminal No. I/O Terminal No. I/O
19
Q30
20
Q20
17
Q31
18
Q21
15
Q32
16
Q22
Q33
13
Q23
14
Q34
11
Q24
12
Q35
Q25
9
10
7
8
Q36
Q26
Q37
Q27
5
6
COM1(+)
COM1(+)
3
4
-V1
-V1
1
2

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

2-96

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+ -

24V DC2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital Mixed I/O Module
Parts Description
Example: FC6A-M08BR1

Example: FC6A-M24BR1(2) Input LEDs
Output LEDs

(5) Expansion Connector(5) Expansion Connector(2) Input LEDs
Output LEDs

(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label(3) Terminal Name Labels(3) Terminal Name Label(4) Cable Terminals(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label
Indicates the digital mixed I/O module type number and specifications.
(2) Input LEDs
These LEDs turn on when an input is on.
Output LEDs
These LEDs turn on when an output is on.
(3) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(4) Cable Terminal
Two types of terminals are separately available: the terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch) and the terminal block type (5.08mm pitch).
(5) Expansion Connector
Connects the expansion modules and the CPU module.

Model List
DC Input 4 Points/
Relay Output 4 Points

Cable Terminal TypeTerminal block type (5.08 mm pitch)
Terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch)

Screw fastened type

FC6A-M08BR1

Push-in type

FC6A-M08BR4

Screw fastened typePush-in type―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUALDC Input 16 Points/
Relay Output 8 Points―
FC6A-M24BR1
FC6A-M24BR4

2-97

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ Power Supply Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4
Input Points

Points4 (4 points in 1 common line)

No. of Outputs

Terminal Arrangement
Connector
Internal
Current Draw

4 (4 points in 1 common line)

8 (4 points in 1 common line)

See 2-101

See 2-103

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

All Points ON

30 mA (5V DC)
25 mA (24V DC)

All Points OFF

17 mA (5V DC)
0 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-M08BR1: 120 g
FC6A-M08BR4: 100 g

Weight (approx.)

FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
16 (16 points in 1 common line)

55 mA (5V DC)
50 mA (24V DC)

FC6A-M24BR1: 165 g
FC6A-M24BR4: 155 g■ Input Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4

Rated Input Voltage

12/24V DC*1 shared sink/source

Operating Load Voltage Range

0.0 to 28.8V DC

Rated Input Current

3.5 mA/point (at 12V DC), 7 mA/point (at 24V DC)

Input Impedance

3.4 kΩ

Input Delay
Time (24V DC)
Isolation

Turn ON Time

4.1 msTurn OFF Time

4.1 ms

Between Channels

Not isolatedInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages are caused.
If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.

Cable Length

3m*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

Operating Ranges
The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input modules is as follows.
FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4, FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
Input Voltage (V DC)
28.8 VON Area
24 V

10.2 V*2

Transition
Area
5V

OFF Area
Input Current (mA)
1.2 mA

2.8 mA*3

7.0 mA

8.4 mA*2 15 V for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number" on
page 2-1.
*3 4.2 mA for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-98

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Internal Circuit
FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4, FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
3.3 KΩ

Internal Circuit

Input

COM

Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the input voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous ON
ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the FC6A
is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4

FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4

Input Voltage

Input Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

28.8 V28.8 V

26.4 V

26.4 V

24.0 V

24.0 V

Ambient
Temperature 45°C
Ambient
Temperature 55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

50%

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

0V
0%35% 50%70%

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

2-99

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Output Specifications
Type No.
Output Points
per Common
Line

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4
COM1

4

COM2

―

Output Type
Load Current

FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
4
4

1a contact
1

2 A maximum

1 Common7 A maximum

Minimum Switching Load

1.0 mA/5.0V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

30 mΩ or lower

Electrical Life

100,000 operations minimum (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations minimum (no load 18,000 operations/hour)
240V AC 2 A (resistive load, cosφ=0.4 inductive load)Rated Load

Withstand
Voltage

30V DC 2 A (resistive load, L/R=7 ms inductive load)
Between Output
Terminal and FE

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminal and Internal
Circuit

2,300V AC 1 minuteBetween Output
Terminals (COMs)

2,300V AC 1 minuteOutput Delay
ON

Input to Relay
OFF
ON

Output Relay StatusOFF

OFF Bounce:
OFF Delay:
ON Bounce:
ON Delay:

6 ms maximum
10 ms maximum
6 ms maximum
6 ms maximum

Ambient Temperature, Input Voltage, I/O Simultaneous ON Ratio
When the FC6A is used in an ambient temperature of 55°C or higher, reduce the output voltage and I/O utilization (simultaneous
ON ratio: a%) according to the following diagrams. However, the following diagrams show the temperature conditions when the
FC6A is normally installed.
Note: Normally installed means the state in the diagram in "Normal Installation State" on page 3-1.
The usage conditions will also change according to the installation state. For details, see "Installation Location" on page 3-1.

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4, FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
Output Voltage

Output Voltage

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

240V AC

30V DC

100V AC

24V DC

Ambient
Temperature 55°C

Ambient
Temperature
65°C
0V
0%

2-100

50%

Ambient
Temperature
65°C

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

5V DC
0V
0%

50%

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

I/O Simultaneous
100% ON Ratio (%)

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-M08BR1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-M08BR4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02

DC.IN

DC.IN

Ry.OUTRy.OUT

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

3

3

COM1

COM1

2
1
Ry OUT

2
1
Ry OUT

00

NC COM0

NC COM0

3

3

2
DC IN

2
DC IN

1

1

0

0

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

FC6A-M08BR1

FC6A-M08BR4

Each of the terminals for COM0 and COM1 are independent.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: FuseL : Load

DC Sink Input Wiring Example+ 2-wire Sensor

12/24V DC*1

+

PNP

-

+
+
-

L
L
L
L

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
COM0
NC
0
1
2
3
COM1

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
COM0
NC
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
COM1

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-101

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
DC Source Input Wiring Example- 2-wire +Sensor

12/24V DC*1

-

NPN

+

+
+
-

L
L
L
L

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
COM0
NC
0
1
2
3
COM1

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
COM0
NC
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
COM1

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-102

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-M24BR1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC17PN02
FC6A-PMTC11PN02
DC.IN

Ry.OUT

DC.IN

Ry.OUT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

3

2

1

0

TB1

4

4

3

2

1

0

TB1

Push-in type: FC6A-M24BR4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC17PN02
FC6A-PMSC11PN02

TB2
0
1
2
NC COM1 3
4

6

16

6

COM2 7

COM0 17

COM2 7

5

6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15

16
COM0 17

5

15

4

14

13

12

NC COM1 3

11

2

10

7

1

6

0

5

5

TB2

FC6A-M24BR1

FC6A-M24BR4

The 3 COM lines are connected in the module.
For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
DC Sink Input Wiring Example+ 2-wire Sensor

PNP

12/24V DC*1+-

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-103

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
DC Source Input Wiring Example- 2-wire +Sensor

NPN

12/24V DC*1+

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
COM

I/O
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
COM

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

Relay Output Wiring Example

+
+

+
-

L
L
L

-

+

L

L
L
L
L

Terminal No.
0
1
2
3
COM1
NC
4
5
6
7
COM2

I/O
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
COM1
NC
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
COM2

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

2-104

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Analog I/O Modules
Three type of analog I/O modules are available: analog input modules equipped with input terminals, analog output modules
equipped with output terminals, and analog mixed I/O modules equipped with both input and output terminals.

Parts Description
Example: FC6A-J2C1

Example: FC6A-L06A1(2) Power LED [PWR](5) Expansion Connector(2) Power LED [PWR](5) Expansion Connector(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label(3) Terminal Name Label(3) Terminal Name Label(4) Cable Terminal(4) Cable Terminal(1) Type Label
Indicates the analog I/O module type no. and specifications.
(2) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the analog I/O module.
(3) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(4) Cable Terminal
Two types of terminals are separately available: the terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch) and the terminal block type (5.08mm pitch).
(5) Expansion Connector
Connects the expansion modules and the CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-105

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model List
Module Type

Analog input
moduleAnalog output
moduleI/O Points

Input

Cable Terminal
Type 2Type No.

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(5.08 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-J2C1

4

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(3.81 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-J4A1

8

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(3.81 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-J8A1

Screw fastened type

FC6A-J4CN1

4

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)
Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C)
Resistance thermometer (Pt100, Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni1000)

Terminal block type(3.81 mm pitch)

Push-in type

FC6A-J4CN4

4

Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(3.81 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-J4CH1Y

8

Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C)
Thermistor (PTC, NTC)
Resistance (100 to 32,000 Ω)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(3.81 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-J8CU1

2

Voltage output (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current output (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(5.08 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-K2A1

4

Voltage output (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current output (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

Terminal block type Screw fastened type(5.08 mm pitch)
Push-in type

FC6A-K4A1

2 (Input)

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)
Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C)
Resistance thermometer (Pt100, Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni1000)

1 (Output)

Voltage output (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current output (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

4 (Input)

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

2 (Output)

Voltage output (0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V)
Current output (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)

I/O

I/O

2-106

Cable Terminal
Type 1

2

OutputMixed analog
I/O module

I/O Signal

FC6A-J2C4
FC6A-J4A4
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CH4Y

FC6A-J8CU4
FC6A-K2A4
FC6A-K4A4

Screw fastened type

FC6A-L03CN1

Push-in type

FC6A-L03CN4

Screw fastened type

FC6A-L06A1

Push-in type

FC6A-L06A4

Terminal block type(5.08 mm pitch)

Terminal block type(3.81 mm pitch)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4Power Supply
12/24V DC*2
VoltageAllowed10.2 to 28.8V DC
Fluctuation Range
Terminal Arrangement
2-116
Connector Insertion/Removal
100 times minimum
ModuleDurability
Internal
5V DC
40 mA
Current
24V DC
0 mA
Draw
Module External Power Supply 50 mA (12V DC)
Current Draw*1
25 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J2C1: 115 g
Weight (approx.)
FC6A-J2C4: 100 g

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

External
Power

2-117

2-118

2-119

2-120

45 mA

40 mA

50 mA

50 mA

0 mA

0 mA

0 mA

0 mA

60 mA (12V DC)
30 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J4A1: 110 g
FC6A-J4A4: 100 g

80 mA (12V DC)
40 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J8A1: 110 g
FC6A-J8A4: 100 g

80 mA (12V DC)
40 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J4CN1: 110 g
FC6A-J4CN4: 100 g

80 mA (12V DC)
40 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J4CH1Y: 110 g
FC6A-J4CH4Y: 100 g*1 The value when the input is not open and the output is 100% output.
*2 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.
Type No.
Power Supply
VoltageAllowedFluctuation Range
Terminal Arrangement
Connector Insertion/Removal
ModuleDurability
Internal
5V DC
Current
24V DC
Draw
Module External Power Supply
Current Draw*1
External
Power

Weight (approx.)

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

12/24V DC*2

24V DC

12/24V DC*2

24V DC

10.2 to 28.8V DC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

10.2 to 28.8V DC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

2-122

2-123

2-124

2-125

40 mA

50 mA

60 mA

55 mA

0 mA

0 mA

0 mA

0 mA

0 mA

60 mA (12V DC)
30 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-J8CU1: 110 g
FC6A-J8CU4: 100 g

140 mA (12V DC)
70 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-K2A1: 115 g
FC6A-K2A4: 100 g

2-121
100 times minimum
45 mA

125 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-K4A1: 115 g
FC6A-K4A4: 100 g

160 mA (12V DC)
100 mA (24V DC)
80 mA (24V DC)
FC6A-L03CN1: 115 g FC6A-L06A1: 110 g
FC6A-L03CN4: 100 g FC6A-L06A4: 100 g*1 The value when the input is not open and the output is 100% output.
*2 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-107

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications■ Analog Input Specifications
Analog Input Module
FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4Type No.

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

Voltage0 to 10 V-10 to 10 V―

Current

4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA―

Thermocouple―(K) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(J) -200 to 1,000°C (-328 to 1,832°F)(R) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(S) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(B) 0 to 1,820°C (32 to 3,308°F)(E) -200 to 800°C (-328 to 1,472°F)(T) -200 to 400°C (-328 to 752°F)(N) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(C) 0 to 2,315°C (32 to 4,199°F)―

Pt100:-200 to 850°C(-328 to1,562°F)
Pt1000:-200 to +600°C(-328 to1,112°F)
Ni100:-60 to +180°C(-76 to 356°F)
Ni1000:-60 to +180°C(-76 to 356°F)

Input Typeand Input
Range
Resistance
Thermometer*1

Thermistor
Resistor
Voltage

1 MΩ or higher

Current

50 Ω or lower

Thermocouple
Input
Impedance Resistance Thermometer

1 MΩ or higher

Thermistor

1 MΩ or higher

Resistor

1 MΩ or higher

Sampling Time

1 ms

―

―

NTC
(-90 to 150°C)
PTC(100 to 10,000 Ω)―

100 to 32,000 Ω

1 MΩ or higher

1 ms or 10 ms

10 ms, 100 ms
or 104 ms

120 ms or 30
ms

104 msDifferential
input

Single-ended

Sampling Repetition Time Sampling time × Number of enabled input channels
Total Input Delay Time*2
AD
Conversion
Type of Input

Input Error

2-108

Sampling time + Sampling repetition time + 1 scan timeSingle-ended

Operation Mode

Self-scan

Conversion Method

ΣΔ type ADC

Maximum Error at 25°C

±0.1% of full
±0.2% of full scale
scale

Temperature Coefficient

0.006%/°C±0.2% of full scale
Cold junction compensation accuracy: ±4.0°C or
lower
Exceptions
R, S: ±6°C (0 to 200°C)
B: Not possible to guarantee accuracy (0 to 300°C)
K, J, E, T, N:±0.4% of full scale (0°C or lower)

0.01%/°C

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

Voltage

65,536(16 bits)

4,096(12 bits)

65,536(16 bits)*3

65,536 (16 bits) ―Current

65,536(16 bits)

4,096(12 bits)

65,536(16 bits)*3

65,536 (16 bits)

Type No.

Thermocouple

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

Data―

Pt100:
10,500 (14 bits)
Pt1000:8,000 (13 bits)
Ni100:
2,400 (12 bits)
Ni1000:2,400 (12 bits)

Resistor

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4――

Thermistor

Input
Value per
Step

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

K: 15,000 (14 bits)
J: 12,000 (14 bits)
R: 17,600 (15 bits)
S: 17,600 (15 bits)
B: 18,200 (15 bits)
E: 10,000 (14 bits)
T: 6,000 (13 bits)
N: 15,000 (14 bits)
C: 23,150 (15 bits)

DigitalResolution

Resistance
Thermometer

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4――

NTC: 2,400 (12 bit)
PTC: 9,900 (14 bit)―

31,900 (15 bit)

Voltage

0.15 mV(0 to 10 V)
0.30 mV(-10 to +10 V)

0.15 mV
2.44 mV
0.15 mV(0 to 10 V)(0 to 10 V)*3 (0 to 10 V)
0.30 mV
0.30 mV
4.88 mV(-10 to +10 V) (-10 to +10 V)*3 (-10 to +10 V)

Current

0.30 μA(0 to 20 mA)
0.244 μA
(4 to 20 mA)

4.88 μA(0 to 20 mA)
3.91 μA(4 to 20 mA)―

0.30 μA
0.30 μA(0 to 20 mA)*3 (0 to 20 mA)
0.244 μA
0.244 μA
(4 to 20 mA)*3 (4 to 20 mA)―

Thermocouple
Resistance
Thermometer―

0.1°C or 0.18°F

Thermistor(NTC)
Thermistor
(PTC)

―

1Ω

Data Type in Application
Program

Can be arbitrarily set for each CH in a range between -32,768 to 32,767*4

Monotonicity

Yes

Input Data Out of Range

Detectable*5

Maximum Temporary
Deviation during
Electrical Noise Tests±4.0% or lower

Noise
Input Filter
Resistance
Recommended Cable
for Noise Immunity
CrosstalkYes
Current/voltage: Pair shielded cable
Other: Pair cable
1 LSB or lower

Between Input and Power
Isolated power supply
Circuit
Isolation

Between Input andInternal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Inputs
Effect of Improper Input Connection―

Photocoupler
isolated―

No damage

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-109

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

Maximum Permanent Allowed
Overload(No Damage)

30V DC, 160mA or lowe*6

Selection of Input Type and Input
Range

Using programming software

Calibration or Verification to Maintain
Rated Accuracy

Not possible

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4*1 The resistance (allowable conductor resistance) of the electrical leads to connect to the resistance thermometer is 10 Ω or less per wire.
*2 The total input delay time increases in proportion to the number of channels used. Input channels that have been set to unused are notincluded in the number of enabled input channels.
*3 FC6A-J8A1 and FC6A-J8A4 (Version lower than 200) supports 4096 (12 bits) digital resolution.
The input values per step are as follows:
Voltage: 2.44 mV (0 to 10 V), 4.88 mV (-10 to +10 V)
Current: 4.88 μA (0 to 20 mA), 3.91 μA (4 to 20 mA)
When using FC6A-J8A1/FC6A-J8A4 (Version 200 or later), the digital resolution can be selected from 12 bits or 16 bits in Analog I/O Module
Configuration dialog box in WindLDR.
*4 The arbitrary setting is a function that uses the digital resolution data by scaling it to arbitrary data (that arbitrarily sets the lower limit value andthe upper limit value). The range setting (-32,768 to 32,767) is specified with data registers.
Example: When -5 V is input, 1,024 is displayed as long as the arbitrary setting is not configured, but -500 is displayed when the arbitrary
setting is configured as upper limit value = 1,000 and lower limit value = -1,000, and this makes it easier to intuitively read the input
voltage value.

When the digital resolution data is 12 bits and the input range is -10 to +10 V
Lower Limit Value=-1,000 -500

Raw Input Value0
Input Voltage Value -10 V

Upper Limit Value=1,000

1,024
-5 V

4,095
10 V

*5 Input data out of range is reflected in the status of the analog I/O module.
*6 For products with a version lower than 200, the maximum permanent allowed overload is 13V DC (when the voltage input is set) and 40mA DC(when the current input is set). If a current of 160mA or higher (at an ambient temperature of 25°C) flows through the circuit, the protection
function for the input circuit starts operating and works to reduce the applied current. However, the circuit will be damaged if the appliedcurrent is due to voltage applied at 30V DC or higher. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number" on
page 2-1.

Mixed Analog I/O Module
Type No.
Voltage
Current

Thermocouple
Input Typeand
Input Range

Resistance Thermometer*1

FC6A-L06A1, FC6A-L06A4
0 to 10 V-10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA――

Thermistor
Resistor

2-110

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L03CN4(K) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(J) -200 to 1,000°C (-328 to 1,832°F)(R) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(S) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(B) 0 to 1,820°C (32 to 3,308°F)(E) -200 to 800°C (-328 to 1,472°F)(T) -200 to 400°C (-328 to 752°F)(N) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(C) 0 to 2,315°C (32 to 4,199°F)
Pt100: -200 to +850°C (-328 to 1,562°F)
Pt1000: -200 to +600°C (-328 to 1,112°F)
Ni100: -60 to +180°C (-76 to 356°F)
Ni1000: -60 to +180°C (-76 to 356°F)――

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

Input
Impedance

AD
Conversion

Input Error

FC6A-L06A1, FC6A-L06A4
FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L03CN4
1 MΩ or higher
50 Ω or lower
1 MΩ or higher
1 MΩ or higher
1 MΩ or higher
1 MΩ or higher
1 ms or 10 ms
10 ms, 100 ms, or 104 ms
Sampling time × Number of enabled input channels

Voltage
Current
Thermocouple
Resistance Thermometer
Thermistor
Resistor
Sampling Time
Sampling Repetition Time
Total Input Delay Time*2
Type of Input
Operation Mode
Conversion Method
Maximum Error at 25°C
Temperature Coefficient
Voltage
Current

Sampling time + Sampling repetition time + 1 scan timeSingle-ended
Self-scanΣΔ type ADC±0.2% of full scale
0.01% of full scale/°C
4,096 (12 bits)
4,096 (12 bits)

Thermocouple―

Resistance
Thermometer―

Digital Resolution

Thermistor
Resistor

Data

Voltage
Current

2.44 mV (0 to 10 V)
4.88 mV (-10 to +10 V)
4.88 μA (0 to 20 mA)
3.91 μA (4 to 20 mA)

Thermocouple
Resistance
Thermometer
Thermistor(NTC)
Thermistor(PTC)
Data Type in Application
ProgramMonotonicity

Yes

Input Data Out of Range

Detectable*4

Input Value per
Step

Noise
Resistance

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests
Input Filter
Recommended Cable
for Noise Immunity

Crosstalk
Between Input and Power Circuit
Isolation
Between Input and Internal
Circuit
Effect of Improper Input Connection
Maximum Permanent Allowed Overload (NoDamage)Selection of Input Type and Input Range
Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated
Accuracy―±0.1% of full scale
0.006% of full scale/°C
65,536 (16 bits)
65,536 (16 bits)
K: 15,000 (14 bits)
J: 12,000 (14 bits)
R: 17,600 (15 bits)
S: 17,600 (15 bits)
B: 18,200 (15 bits)
E: 10,000 (14 bits)
T: 6,000 (13 bits)
N: 15,000 (14 bits)
C: 23,150 (15 bits)
Pt100: 10,500 (14 bits)
Pt1000: 8,000 (13 bits)
Ni100: 2,400 (12 bits)
Ni1000: 2,400 (12 bits)――
0.15 mV (0 to 10 V)-0.30 mV (-10 to +10 V)
0.30 μA (0 to 20 mA)
0.244 μA (4 to 20 mA)

0.1°C or 0.18°F―
Can be arbitrarily set for each CH in a range between -32,768 to 32,767*3±4% or less of full scale
Yes
Current/voltage: Pair shielded cable Wire length: 30 m or shorter
Other: Pair cable Wire length: 30 m or shorter
1 LSB or lower
Transformer isolated
Photocoupler isolated
No damage
30V DC, 160mA or lower*5
Using programming software
Not possible*1 The resistance (allowable conductor resistance) of the electrical leads to connect to the resistance thermometer is 10 Ω or less per wire.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-111

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
*2 The total input delay time increases in proportion to the number of channels used. Input channels that have been set to unused are notincluded in the number of enabled input channels.
*3 The arbitrary setting is a function that uses the digital resolution data by scaling it to arbitrary data (that arbitrarily sets the lower limit value andthe upper limit value). The range setting (-32,768 to 32,767) is specified with data registers.
*4 Input data out of range is reflected in the status of the analog I/O module.
*5 For products with a version lower than 200, the maximum permanent allowed overload is 13V DC (when the voltage input is set) and 40mA DC(when the current input is set). If a current of 160mA or higher (at an ambient temperature of 25°C) flows through the circuit, the protection
function for the input circuit starts operating and works to reduce the applied current. However, the circuit will be damaged if the appliedcurrent is due to voltage applied at 30V DC or higher. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number" on
page 2-1.

2-112

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Input Internal Circuit

+
2 MΩ

10 Ω

Multiplexer

FC6A-J2C1, FC6A-J2C4, FC6A-J4A1, FC6A-J4A4, FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-J8A4, FC6A-L06A1, FC6A-L06A4

Input Circuit

39 kΩ
Switching Signal–
FC6A-J4CN1, FC6A-J4CN4, FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L03CN4

Multiplexer

Voltage Supply

A +
10 Ω

2 MΩ

B –

39 kΩ

Switching Signal

B’

Voltage Supply
FC6A-J8CU1, FC6A-J8CU4

Multiplexer

Voltage Supply+

Input Circuit–

FC6A-J4CH1Y, FC6A-J4CH4Y

Isolation+

Input Circuit

Voltage Supply˗

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-113

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Analog Output Specifications
Voltage
Output Type and Output Range
Load
DA
Conversion

Current

0 to 10 V-10 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA

Impedance

1 kΩ or higher

300 Ω or lower

Load Type

Resistive load

DA Conversion Time

1 ms

Output Update Interval

1 ms

Total Output System Transfer Time

DA conversion time + Output Update Interval + 1 scan time

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4±0.1% of full scale

FC6A-L06A1
Maximum Error
at 25°C

FC6A-L06A4
FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4±0.2% of full scale

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4
FC6A-L03CN1

Output Error

FC6A-L03CN4

0.006% of full scale/°C

FC6A-L06A1
Temperature
Coefficient

FC6A-L06A4
FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

0.01% of full scale/°C

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4
Output Ripple

1 LSB or lower

Overshoot0%

Digital Resolution

4,096 steps (12 bits)

Input Value per Step

2.44 mV (0 to 10 V)
4.88 mV (-10 to +10 V)
4.88 μA (0 to 20 mA)
3.91 μA (4 to 20 mA)

Application

Can be arbitrarily set for each CH in a range between -32,768 to 32,767*1

Monotonicity

Yes

Current Loop OpenNot detectable

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests±4% or less of full scale

Recommended Cable for Noise
Immunity

Current/voltage: Pair shielded cable
Other: Pair cable

Crosstalk

1 LSB

Between Output and Power Circuit

Transformer isolated

Between Output and Internal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Data

Noise
Resistance

Isolation

Effect of Improper Output Connection

No damage

Selection of Analog Output Signal Type

Using programming software

Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible*1 The arbitrary setting is a function that uses the digital resolution data by scaling it to arbitrary data (that arbitrarily sets the lower limit value andthe upper limit value). The range setting (-32,768 to 32,767) is specified with data registers.

2-114

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Internal Circuit+

Analog Signal
Analog Output
Element–

Switching Signal

Ambient Temperature and Analog Input/Output Restrictions

 Certain models of the analog module do not support expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C). Do not use

unsupported models in an environment with expanded ambient operating temperatures.
 For the status of support for expanded ambient operating temperatures, see "Status of Support for Expanded Ambient Operating Temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C)" on page 2-2.
 When using the product in high temperatures that exceed 55°C, do not use analog current output from the FC6A-L03CN1 or FC6A-L03CN4.

For other models, there are no restrictions on analog input/output.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-115

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples
 When connecting the terminal, insert an IEC 60127-approved fuse suitable for the applied voltage and current draw at

Cautionthe position shown in the following diagram.
(Applicable when equipment containing the FC6A is destined for Europe) Do not connect a thermocouple to a part with hazardous voltage (60V DC or peak 42.4V DC or higher part).
 Before turning on the power, always check the wiring. If wiring is incorrect, the analog I/O module may be damaged.

■ FC6A-J2C1, FC6A-J2C4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-J2C1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-J2C4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

NC

NC

I1-

I1-

I1+

I1+

NC

NC

I0-

I0-

I0+

I0+

NC

NC

NC

NC

0V

0V

24V

24V

ANALOG

FC6A-J2C1

FC6A-J2C4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Output Device -- +2-wire Analog Output Sensor

Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
NC
NC
NC
NC
I0+
IN0
I0NC
NC
I1+
IN1
I1NC
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-116

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-J4A1, FC6A-J4A4
Push-in type: FC6A-J4A4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

0V 24VANALOG

I3-

I3-

NC

NC

I3+

I3+

NC

NC

I2-

I2-

I2+

I2+

NC

NC

I1-

I1-

I1+

I1+

NC

NC

NC

NC

I0-

I0-

I0+

I0+

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-J4A1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-J4A1

FC6A-J4A4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -- +2-wire Analog Output Sensor

Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
I0+
IN0
I0NC
NC
NC
NC
I1+
IN1
I1NC
NC
I2+
IN2
I2NC
NC
I3+
IN3
I3NC
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-117

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-J8A4
Push-in type: FC6A-J8A4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

I0+
I0I1+
I1I2+
I2I3+
I3I5+
I5I6+
I7+
I7-

I6-

I7+
I7-

I6-

I6+

I5-

I5+

I4-

I4-

I4+

I4+

I3-

I3+

I2-

I2+

I1-

I1+

I0-

I0+

NC

0V 24VANALOGNC

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-J8A1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-J8A1

FC6A-J8A4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -

- +
- +

2-wire Analog Output Sensor

2-wire Analog Output Sensor

Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
NC
NC
I0+
IN0
I0I1+
IN1
I1I2+
IN2
I2I3+
IN3
I3I4+
IN4
I4I5+
IN5
I5I6+
IN6
I6I7+
IN7
I7-

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-118

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-J4CN1, FC6A-J4CN4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-J4CN1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-J4CN4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02

PWR

A
B’ B

I0NC

FC6A-J4CN1

A
B
B’
A
B
B’
A
B
B’

I3NC

FC6A-J4CN4

RTD

I1+
I1NC
I2+
I2NC
I3+

B
B’
RTD

NC

I3-

A

I3+

B’

NC

B

I2-

A

I2+

B’

NC

B

I1-

A

I1+

NC

NC

NC

B’ B

I0-

A

I0+

I0+

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

0V 24VANALOG

PWR

0V 24VANALOGFor wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -A
Resistance
Thermometer
Thermocouple

B
B’

Terminal No.
24V
0V
FE
NC
NC
NC
NC
I0+
I0NC
NC
I1+
I1NC
I2+
I2NC
I3+
I3NC

I/O
12/24V DC*1
NC
NC
NC
NC
A
B
B’
NC
A
B
B’
A
B
B’
A
B
B’

IN0
NC
NC
IN1
NC
IN2
NC
IN3
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-119

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-J4CH1Y, FC6A-J4CH4Y
Push-in type: FC6A-J4CH4Y
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

NC
NC
NC
I0+
I0NC
NC
I1+
I1NC
I2+
I2NC
I3NC

I3+

I3NC

I3+

NC

I2-

I2+

NC

I1-

I1+

NC

NC

I0-

I0+

NC

NC

NC

NC

0V 24VANALOGNC

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-J4CH1Y
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-J4CH1Y

FC6A-J4CH4Y

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-Thermocouple

Thermocouple

Thermocouple

Thermocouple+

Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
I0+
IN0
I0NC
NC
NC
NC
I1+
IN1
I1NC
NC
I2+
IN2
I2NC
NC
I3+
IN3
I3NC
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-120

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-J8CU1, FC6A-J8CU4
Push-in type: FC6A-J8CU4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

0V 24VANALOG

I7+

I7+

I7-

I7-

I6-

I6-

I6+

I6+

I5-

I5-

I5+

I5+

I4-

I4-

I4+

I4+

I3-

I3-

I3+

I3+

I2-

I2-

I2+

I2+

I1-

I1-

I1+

I1+

I0-

I0-

I0+

I0+

NC

NC

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-J8CU1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-J8CU1

FC6A-J8CU4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-+

NTC/PTC
Thermistor
NTC/PTC
Thermistor
NTC/PTC
Thermistor
NTC/PTC
Thermistor
NTC/PTC
Thermistor
NTC/PTC
Thermistor
Resistor

Thermocouple

+
+
+
+
+
+
-

Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
NC
NC
I0+
IN0
I0I1+
IN1
I1I2+
IN2
I2I3+
IN3
I3I4+
IN4
I4I5+
IN5
I5I6+
IN6
I6I7+
IN7
I7-

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-121

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-K2A1, FC6A-K2A4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-K2A1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-K2A4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02

PWR

0V
Q0+
Q0NC
NC
Q1+
Q1NC
NC

NC

NC

Q1-

Q1+

NC

NC

Q0-

Q0+

0V

24V

ANALOG

PWR

24V

ANALOG

FC6A-K2A1

FC6A-K2A4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Input Device -Terminal No. I/O
24V
12/24V
0V
DC*1
FE
Q0+
OUT0
Q0NC
NC
NC
NC
Q1+
OUT1
Q1NC
NC
NC
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-122

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-K4A1, FC6A-K4A4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-K4A1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-K4A4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

Q3-

Q3-

Q3+

Q3+

Q2-

Q2-

Q2+

Q2+

Q1-

Q1-

Q1+

Q1+

Q0-

Q0-

Q0+

Q0+

0V

0V

24V

24V

ANALOG

FC6A-K4A4

FC6A-K4A1

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Input Device -Terminal No. I/O
24V
0V
24V DC
FE
Q0+
OUT0
Q0Q1+
OUT1
Q1Q2+
OUT2
Q2Q3+
OUT3
Q3-

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-123

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L03CN4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-L03CN1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB11PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-L03CN4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB11PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

B
I1-

B
I1-

B’
NC

B’
NC

A
I1+

A
I1+

B’
NC

B’
NC

B
I0-

B
I0-

A
I0+

A
I0+

RTD
Q-

RTD
Q-

Q+

Q+

0V

0V

24V

24V

ANALOG

FC6A-L03CN1

FC6A-L03CN4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Input Device -A
Resistance
Thermometer
Thermocouple

B
B’

Terminal No.
24V
0V
FE
Q+
QI0+
I0NC
I1+
I1NC

I/O
12/24V DC*1
OUT+
OUTA
B
B’
A
B
B’

IN0
NC
IN1
NC

*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

2-124

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ FC6A-L06A1, FC6A-L06A4
Push-in type: FC6A-L06A4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
ANALOG

PWR

PWR

0V 24VANALOG

I3-

I3-

NC

NC

I3+

I3+

NC

NC

I2-

I2-

I2+

I2+

NC

NC

I1-

I1-

I1+

I1+

NC

NC

NC

NC

I0-

I0-

I0+

I0+

Q1- Q1+ Q0- Q0+

Q1- Q1+ Q0- Q0+

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-L06A1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

FC6A-L06A1

FC6A-L06A4

For wiring precautions, see "Input/Output Wiring" on page 3-18.
: Fuse-++Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Input Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -+Analog Voltage/current Output Device -- +2-wire Analog Output Sensor

Terminal No. I/O
24V
0V
24V DC
FE
Q0+
OUT0
Q0Q1+
OUT1
Q1I0+
IN0
I0NC
NC
NC
NC
I1+
IN1
I1NC
NC
I2+
IN2
I2NC
NC
I3+
IN3
I3NC
NC

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-125

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Precautions when Supplying Power to the Analog I/O Module

Separate analog I/O lines (resistance thermometers in particular) from power lines as much as possible to reduce the effect ofnoise.
-

Separate power lines andI/O lines as much as possible.
+

Analog Voltage/current Input Device -A
Resistance
Thermometer

B
B’

+

Terminal No.
24V
0V
FE
Q+
QI0+
I0NC
I1+
I1NC

I/O
24V DC
OUT+
OUTA
B
B’
A
B
B’

+

Analog Voltage/current Output Device -2-126

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

IN0
NC
IN1
NC

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
PID Module
The PID module performs control actions to eliminate the deviation between the set point (SP) and process variable (PV). The PID
module, which is an expansion module, is required to connect to the CPU module for use. Depending on the difference of output
specifications, the PID modules are categorized into two types.
The input channel can accept voltage, current, thermocouple or resistance thermometer signals. The output channel generates
relay output, non-contact voltage (for SSR drive), or current signals.
To configure the PID modules, the Expansion Modules Configuration dialog box in WindLDR is used. For detailed configuration
methods, see "Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1. For details on the PID module parameter settings, see the "FC6A PID
Module User's Manual".

Parts Description
Example: FC6A-F2M1(2) Power LED [PWR](3) Control Output LEDs [OUT0, OUT1](4) Event Output LEDs [EVT0, EVT1](5) Auto Tuning/auto Reset LEDs [AT0, AT1]
(6) Manual Mode LEDs [MT0, MT1]
(7) Fixed Value Control Mode/program Control Mode LEDs [F/P0, F/P1](8) Program Control Execution/hold LEDs [R/H0, R/H1](9) External SP Enabled/disabled LEDs [R/L](12) Expansion Connector(12) Expansion Connector(11) Cable Terminals(1) Type Label(10) Terminal Name Labels(11) Cable Terminals

The content in brackets is the LED indicator name on the PID module.
LED Indicators
PWR
OUT0
EVT0
AT0
MT0
F/P0
R/H0
R/L
OUT1
EVT1
AT1
MT1
F/P1
R/H1

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

(1) Type Label
Indicates the PID module type no. and specifications.
(2) Power LED [PWR]
On: Power normally supplied
Flashing: When there is an external power supply (24V DC) fault
Off: Power is not supplied

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-127

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(3) Control Output LEDs [OUT0, OUT1]
On: Control output is on
Off: Control output is off
Flashing: For current output only, flashes at the duty cycle that corresponds to the output manipulated variable in a 100 ms
cycle.
For an output manipulated variable of 20%, the LED is on for 20 ms and off for 80 ms.
(4) Event Output LEDs [EVT0, EVT1]
On: When alarm 1 to alarm 8 or a loop error alarm has occurred
Off: When no alarms have occurred(5) Auto Tuning/auto Reset LEDs [AT0, AT1]
Flashing: When executing auto tuning or auto reset
Off: When auto tuning or auto reset is stopped(6) Manual Mode LEDs [MT0, MT1]
On: When program control mode is selected
Off: When auto mode is selected(7) Fixed Value Control Mode/program Control Mode LEDs [F/P0, F/P1]
On: During program control mode
Off: During fixed value control mode
(8) Program Control Execution/hold LEDs [R/H0, R/H1]
On: During program control execution or while control is allowed in fixed value control
Flashing: When there is a power interruption during program control hold or during program control execution
Off: During program control stopped or while control prohibited in fixed value control(9) External SP Enabled/disabled LEDs [R/L]
On: External SP input is enabled
Off: External SP input is disabled(10) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(11) Cable terminals
These terminals are for connecting cables. Terminal block type (3.81 mm pitch).
(12) Expansion connector
Connects the expansion modules and the CPU module.

Model List
Module typeNon-contact
voltage output(to drive SSRs)/
current
output type

Relay contact
output typeI/O Points

2 (Input)

2 (Output)

Voltage output (12V DC digital output)
Current output (4 to 20 mA)

2 (Input)

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
0 to 1 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)
Terminal block type
Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, PL(3.81 mm pitch)
II, C)
Resistance thermometer (Pt100, jPt100)

2 (Output)

2-128

Cable Terminal
Type 1

Voltage input (0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
0 to 1 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA)
Thermocouple (K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, PL- Terminal block type
II, C)(3.81 mm pitch)
Resistance thermometer (Pt100, jPt100)

I/O

I/O

I/O Signal

Relay output

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Cable Terminal
Type 2Type No.

Screw fastened type

FC6A-F2M1

Push-in type

FC6A-F2M4

Screw fastened type

FC6A-F2MR1

Push-in type

FC6A-F2MR4

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Quantity of Applicable PID Modules

The maximum number of PID modules that can be connected depends on the CPU module type. The maximum number of PID
modules that can be connected to the CPU modules is as follows.
Module TypeType No.
FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C16P4CE
FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE, FC6A-C16P4DE

FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40P4DE

All-in-One CPU module

CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module

Plus CPU module

4 modules + 8 modules*1

FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C24P4CE

All-in-One CPU
modulePlus CPU module

Quantity of Applicable PID Modules

7 modules + 8 modules*1

FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
FC6A-D16R1CEE
FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE
FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE
FC6A-D16P4CEE

63 modules*2

FC6A-D32K3CEE
FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE
FC6A-D32P4CEE*1 When the expansion interface module (expander) is used, an additional eight PID modules can be connected to the expansion interface side(right side) of the expansion interface module (expander). The maximum number of modules that can be connected does not include theexpansion interface module (expander).
*2 The number of modules that can be connected does not include the expansion interface modules (expander and remote master/slave).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-129

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Specifications
Type No.
External Power

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4
Power Supply Voltage

24V DC

Allowed Fluctuation
Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Terminal Arrangement

FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

See "Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples" on page 2-135

Connector

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

Module

5V DC

65 mA

65 mA

Internal
Current Draw

24V DC

0 mA

0 mA

Module External Power Supply Current
Draw

150 mA (24V DC)

150 mA (24V DC)

Weight (approx.)

FC6A-F2M1: 140 g
FC6A-F2M4: 130 g

FC6A-F2MR1: 140 g
FC6A-F2MR4: 130 g

Function Specifications■ Input Specifications
Type No.

Input Typeand
Input Range

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4
Voltage0 to 10 V
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 1 V

Current

4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA

Thermocouple*1

Resistance Thermometer

K-200 to 1,370°C-328 to 2,498°F

K (with decimal point)-200.0 to 400.0°C-328.0 to 752.0°F

J-200 to 1,000°C-328 to 1,832°F

R

0 to 1,760°C

32 to 3,200°F

S

0 to 1,760°C

32 to 3.200°F

B

0 to 1,820°C

32 to 3,308°F

E-200 to 800°C-328 to 1,472°F

T-200.0 to 400.0°C-328.0 to 752.0°F

N-200 to 1,300°C-328 to 2,372°F

PL-II

0 to 1,390°C

32 to 2,534°F

C (W/Re5-26)

0 to 2,315°C

32 to 4,199°F

Pt100-200 to 850°C-328 to 1,562°F-200.0 to 850.0°C-328.0 to 1,562.0°F-200 to 500°C-328 to 932°F-200.0 to 500.0°C-328.0 to 932.0°F

Pt100 (with decimal
point)
JPt100JPt100 (with decimal
point)

Input
Impedance

AD Conversion

2-130

Voltage

1 MΩ or higher (0 to 1 V range)
100 kΩ or higher (other range)

Current

50 Ω or lower

Thermocouple

1 MΩ or higher

Resistance Thermometer

1 MΩ or higher

Sampling Time

100 msSampling Repetition Time

100 msTotal Input Delay Time*2

Sampling time + Sampling repetition time + 1 scan time

Type of Input

Differential input

Operation Mode

Self-scan

Conversion Method

ΣΔ type ADC

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

Input Error

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

Thermocouple

Within ±0.2% of full scale or ±2°C (4°F), whichever is larger
Cold junction compensation accuracy: ±1.0°C or lower
However, R, S input 0 to 200°C (0 to 400°F) is within ±6°C (12°F)
B input 0 to 300°C (0 to 600°F) is outside the guaranteed range ofaccuracy
K, J, E, T, N input less than 0°C (32°F) is within ±0.4% of full scale

Resistance
Thermometer

Within ±0.1% of full scale or ±1°C (2°F), whichever is larger

Voltage/
Current

Within ±0.2% of full scale

Maximum Error at
25°C

Temperature Coefficient±0.005% of full scale/°C

Voltage

12,000 (14 bits)

Current

12,000 (14 bits)
Celsius (°C)

Thermocouple
Digital Resolution

Resistance
Thermometer*1
Data

1,570

2,826

K (with decimal point)

6,000

10,800

J

1,200

2,160

R

1,760

3,169

S

1,760

3,169

B

1,820

3,277

E

1,000

1,800

T

6,000

10,800

N

1,500

2,700

PL-II

1,390

2,503

C (W/Re5-26)

2,315

4,168

Celsius (°C)

Fahrenheit (°F)

Pt100

1,050

1,890

Pt100 (with decimal
point)

10,50018,900JPt100700

1,260

JPt100 (with decimal
point)

7,000

12,600

Voltage0 to +10V DC: 0.83 mV
0 to +5V DC: 0.416 mV
1 to +5V DC: 0.333 mV
0 to +1V DC: 0.083 mV

Current

4 to 20mA DC: 1.333 μA
0 to 20mA DC: 1.666 μA
Type

Input Value per
Step
Thermocouple

Fahrenheit (°F)

K

Input Value per Step

K

1°C (°F)

K (with decimal point)

0.1°C (°F)

J

1°C (°F)

R

1°C (°F)

S

1°C (°F)

B

1°C (°F)

E

1°C (°F)

T

0.1°C (°F)

N

1°C (°F)

PL-II

1°C (°F)

C (W/Re5-26)

1°C (°F)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-131

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

Input Value per
Step

Resistance
Thermometer

Data

Noise Resistance

Isolation

Type

Input Value per Step

Pt100

1°C (°F)

Pt100 (with decimal
point)

0.1°C (°F)

JPt1001°C (°F)

JPt100 (with decimal
point)

0.1°C (°F)

Data Type in Application Program

Can be arbitrarily set for each CH in a range between -32,768 to 32,767*2

Monotonicity

Yes

Input Data Out of Range

Detectable*3

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests±4% or less of full scale

Input Filter

Yes

Recommended Cable for Noise
Immunity

Current/voltage: Pair shielded cable
Other: Pair cable

CrosstalkNone

Between Input and Power Circuit

Transformer isolated

Between I/O and Internal Circuit

Photocoupler isolated

Between Inputs

Photocoupler isolated

Effect of Improper Input Connection

No damage

Maximum Permanent Allowed Overload (No Damage)

15V DC or lower (0 to 1 V range is 5V DC or lower), 50 mA or lower

Selection of Input Type and Input Range

Using programming software

Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible*1 The resistance (allowable conductor resistance) of the electrical leads to connect to the resistance thermometer is 10 Ω or less per wire.
*2 The arbitrary setting is a function that uses the digital resolution data by scaling it to arbitrary data (that arbitrarily sets the lower limit value andthe upper limit value). The range setting (-32,768 to 32,767) is specified with data registers.
Example: When -5 V is input, 1,024 is displayed as long as the arbitrary setting is not configured, but -500 is displayed when the arbitrary
setting is configured as upper limit value = 1,000 and lower limit value = -1,000, and this makes it easier to intuitively read the input
voltage value.

When the digital resolution data is 12 bits and the input range is -10 to +10 V
Lower Limit Value=-1,000 -500

Raw Input Value0
Input Voltage Value -10 V

Upper Limit Value=1,000

1,024
-5 V

4,095
10 V

*3 Input data out of range is reflected in the status of the analog I/O module.

Input Internal Circuit

Switching Signal
2 MΩ
Multiplexer

5V≤
mA
+(A)
– (B)

Input

(B)
39 kΩ

2-132

10 Ω

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Output Specifications
Type No.
OutputType andOutputRange

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4

FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

Digital Output

Transistor protection source output(12V DC output)

Analog Output

4 to 20 mA―

Digital Output

Max 40 mA (12V DC)―

Analog Output

550 Ω or higher

Relay output―
5 A 250V AC (resistive load)

Load

Relay Output

5 A 30V DC (resistive load)―

3 A 250V AC (inductive load cosφ=0.4)
3 A 30V DC (inductive load L/R=7 ms)

DA
Conversion

Output
Error

Data

Noise
Resistance

Isolation

Load Type

Resistive load

Analog Output Settling Time

80 ms

―

Digital Output Delay Time

Turn OFF time: 10 ms
Turn ON time: 5 ms―

Total Output System Transfer Time

Analog output: Settling time + input sampling time (100 ms)
Digital output/relay output: Output delay time + proportional cycle (1 to 120 s)

Maximum Error at 25°C

±0.5% of full scale

Temperature Coefficient±0.01% of full scale/°C

Output Ripple±0.2% or less of full scale

Overshoot0%

Digital Resolution

1,000 steps (10 bits)

Input Type and Input Range

0.0016 mA (4 to 20 mA)

Monotonicity

Yes

Current Loop OpenNot detectable

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests±4% or less of full scale

Recommended Cable for Noise
Immunity

Current/voltage: Pair shielded cable

Crosstalk

1 LSB

Between Output and Power Circuit

Transformer isolated

Between Output and Internal
CircuitPhotocoupler isolated

Resistive load/inductive load

Effect of Improper Output Connection

No damage

Selection of Analog Output Signal Type

Using programming software

Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated
Accuracy

Not possible

Output Internal Circuit
FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4(current output)+–

Current Detection
Output Circuit

Output Circuit

Short Circuit Protection Circuit

FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL+

Output Circuit

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4(non-contact voltage output (to drive SSRs))

+
–

–

2-133

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Delay
ON

Input to Relay
OFF
ON

Output Relay StatusOFF

OFF Bounce:
OFF Delay:
ON Bounce:
ON Delay:

6 ms maximum
15 ms maximum
6 ms maximum
10 ms maximum■ Program Performance
Item

Specifications

Time setting accuracy

Within ±0.5% of the set time

Progression time error after power interruption

6 minutes maximum

2-134

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples
 When connecting the terminal, insert an IEC 60127-approved fuse suitable for the applied voltage and current draw at

Cautionthe position shown in the following diagram.
This is required when equipment containing the FC6A is destined for Europe.

 Do not connect a thermocouple to a part with hazardous voltage (60V DC or peak 42.4V DC or higher part).
 Before turning on the power, always check the wiring. If the wiring is incorrect, the PID module may be damaged.
 When connecting stranded wire or multiple wires to a terminal block, always use a ferrule for the terminal block.

For details, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

■ FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4
Push-in type: FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR4
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC11PN02
FC6A-PMSC17PN02
PID
PWR
OUT0
EVT0
AT0
MT0
F/P0
R/H0
R/L
OUT1
EVT1
AT1
MT1
F/P1
R/H1

0V 24V

PID
PWR
OUT0
EVT0
AT0
MT0
F/P0
R/H0
R/L
OUT1
EVT1
AT1
MT1
F/P1
R/H1

RTD
NC NC
A
NC
B
NC
B’
Q0+
NC
RTD
NC Q0A
Q1+
B
NC

I1NC

FC6A-F2M1

B’
Q1-

I0+’ I0+’’
I0+
I0NC
NC
I1+’ I1+’’

B
NC
B’
Q1-

I1+

I1NC

I1+

A
Q1+

RTD
NC Q0-

I1+’ I1+’’

NC

NC

NC

B’
Q0+

I0-

B
NC

A
NC

I0+

RTD
NC NC

I0+’ I0+’’

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

0V 24V

Screw fastened type: FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2MR1
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC11PN02
FC6A-PMTC17PN02

FC6A-F2M4: Fuse– ++0 to 5 V+

1 to 5 V

0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V

+

–

–

–

DC

DC

DC

A

+

B
B’
RTD

–

TC

+

0 to 5 V+

1 to 5 V

0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V

+

–

–

–

DC

DC

DC

A

+

B
B’
RTD

–

TC

Terminal No.
24V
0V
FE
NC
NC
NC
I0+”
I0+’
I0+
I0–
NC
NC
I1+”
I1+’
I1+
I1–
NC

DC : Voltage/current
RTD : Resistance Thermometer
TC : Thermocouple

I/O
24V DCNC
NC
NC

L: Load: Analog Current Input Device: Fuse

IN 0
A
B
B’

IN 0
NC

L

NC
IN 1
A
B
B’

+

IN 1
NC

L
–

Terminal No. I/O
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Q0+
NC
OUT 0
*1
Q0–
NC
NC
Q1+
OUT 1
NC
*1
Q1–

*1 OUT0: Relay output and OUT1: Non-contact voltage/current output connection examples are shown. There are no models with both types of
specifications.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-135

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Precautions when Supplying Power to the PID Module

When the PID module and the CPU module are set to the same power supply, the PID module will be initialized for a maximum of
approximately 5 seconds after the power is turned on and the CPU module is set to run, so the parameters will not be stable.
Always enable control after the module status flag changes to "0001H" (operating normally).
Wiring PID Module Power and I/O Lines
Separate I/O lines (resistance thermometers in particular) from power lines as much as possible to reduce the effect of noise.
: Fuse (50 V-1.2 A)– +Separate power lines andI/O lines as much as possible.
+

0 to V+

1 to 5 V

0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V

+

–

–

–

DC

DC

DC

A

+

B
B’
RTD

–

TC

+

2-136

0 to 5 V+

1 to 5 V

0 to 20 mA

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V

+

–

–

–

DC

DC

DC

A

+

B
B’
RTD

–

TC

Terminal No.
24V
0V
FE
NC
NC
NC
I0+”
I0+’
I0+
I0–
NC
NC
I1+”
I1+’
I1+
I1–
NC

DC : Voltage/current
RTD : Resistance Thermometer
TC : Thermocouple

I/OL

24V DC
NC
NC
NC

Separate power lines andI/O lines as much as possible.

IN 0
A
B
B’

: Load: Analog Current Input Device: Fuse

IN 0
NC

L

NC
IN 1
+

A
B
B’

IN 1
NC

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

L–

Terminal No. I/O
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Q0+
NC
OUT 0
Q0–
NC
NC
Q1+
OUT 1
NC
Q1–

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Communication Modules
The communication modules include the serial communications module that communicate with peripheral devices using RS-232C
or RS-485 communications.
The communication modules are equipped with two serial ports, and RS-232C or RS-485 can be selected and used for each port.
These modules support the maintenance communication function, user communication function, data link communication, andModbus communication function.
Use the communication modules by connecting them to the CPU module. For details on the maximum number of communication
modules that can be connected and slots to install those modules, see "Maximum Number of Modules and Slots to Install" on page2-139. To use a communication module, it must be configured in the Module Configuration Editor. For detailed configuration
methods, see "Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1. For details on communication settings, see Chapter 3 "Communication
Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Note: Communication modules cannot be connected to the expansion interface remote slave module.

Part Names and Functions
FC6A-SIF52(2) Power LED (PWR)(3) Transmit LEDs (S1, S2)(4) Receive LEDs (R1, R2)(7) Expansion Connector(7) Expansion Connector(6) Cable Terminals(1) Type Label (5) Terminal Name
Label(6) Cable Terminals(1) Type Label
Indicates the communication module type number and specifications.
(2) Power LED (PWR)
This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the communication module.
(3) Transmit LEDs (S1, S2)
These LEDs turn on when data is being transmitted from the communication module.
(4) Receive LEDs (R1, R2)
These LEDs turn on when the communication module is receiving data.
(5) Terminal Name Label
Indicates terminal numbers.
(6) Cable Terminals
Wires for RS232C or RS485 communication are connected to these terminals.
(7) Expansion Connector
This connector is used to connect expansion modules and the CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-137

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model List
Module Type

PointsCommunication module

Type

2

Cable Terminal Type

Serial communication interface (RS-232C/RS-485)

Type No.

Screw fastened type

FC6A-SIF52

Push-in type

FC6A-SIF524

Note: A single port cannot be used as both RS-232C and RS-485 simultaneously.

Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524

Terminal Arrangement
Connector
Internal Current
Draw
Weight (approx.)

See "Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples" on page 2-141.

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

5V DC

35 mA

24V DC

35 mA

FC6A-SIF52

110 g

FC6A-SIF524

100 g■ Communication Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524

Points2

Electrical Characteristics

EIA RS-232C/EIA RS-485*1

Maximum Communication Speed

115,200 bps

Maintenance Communication

Yes

User Communication

Yes

Data Link Communication

Yes

Modbus Master

Yes

Modbus SlaveYes

Maximum Cable Length

15 m (RS232C)/1,200 m (RS485)

Isolation between
Internal Circuit

Cable

BetweenCommunication Portand Internal Circuit

Photocoupler isolation

Between Ports

Transformer isolation

Recommended Cable

RS-232C: 24 AWG shielded multicore cable
RS-485: 24 AWG twisted-pair shielded cable*1 Specify RS232C or RS485 in the WindLDR Function Area Settings. The combination of "Data Bits: 7 bits" and "Parity: None" cannot be set.

Communication Port Assignments

The communication ports are assigned to port 4, port 5, and so on in order from the ports closest to the CPU module.
Communication Modules(FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524)

CPU Module

Port 4
Port 52-138

Port 6
Port 7

Port 8Port 9

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Maximum Number of Modules and Slots to Install

The maximum number of communication modules that can be connected to the CPU module depends on the CPU module. The
following table gives the maximum number of communication modules that can be connected to each CPU module and slots to
install those modules.
Location
Module TypeType No.

Maximum
Number ofModules

CPU Module

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module

Basic
Expansion
Side

Expansion
Interface
Side

Basic
Expansion
Side

Expansion
InterfaceSide

3 modules*1

Yes

Yes

―*3

―*3

3 modules*1

Yes

Yes

―*3

―*3

FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE
FC6A-C16R1DE
FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16P4DE

All-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R4AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24P4CE
FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40R4CE
FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40P4DE

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40P4DEJ

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-139

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Location
Module Type

Plus CPU module

Type No.

FC6A-D16R1CEE
FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE
FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE
FC6A-D16P4CEE

Maximum
Number ofModules

7 modules +8 modules*2

CPU Module

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module

Basic
Expansion
Side

Expansion
Interface
Side

Basic
Expansion
Side

Expansion
Interface
Side

Yes

Yes

―

―

FC6A-D32K3CEE
FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE
FC6A-D32P4CEE*1 When the expansion interface module (expander) is used, communication modules can also be connnected to the expansion interface side(right side).
*2 When the expansion interface module (expander) is used, a total of 15 communication modules, seven communication modules on the basic
expansion side (left side) and additional eight communication modules on the expansion interface side (right side), can be connected to the CPU
module. Communication modules cannot be connected to the expansion interface remote slave module.
*3 The expansion interface remote master/slave module cannot be connected to All-in-One CPU module or CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.

2-140

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524
Screw fastened type: FC6A-SIF52
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTC10PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-SIF524
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSC10PN02
RS232C/RS485

B2

B2
SG2

A2

NC

SG2 DR2 RD2 SD2 ER2 RS2

SG1

B1

A1

NC

SG1 DR1 RD1 SD1 ER1 RS1

PW
S1
R1
S2
R2

SG2

A2

NC

SG2 DR2 RD2 SD2 ER2 RS2

SG1

B1

A1

NC

SG1 DR1 RD1 SD1 ER1 RS1

RS232C/RS485

PW
S1
R1
S2
R2

FC6A-SIF52

FC6A-SIF524

RS232C
Upper Side Port

RS485

RS232C
Lower Side Port

RS485

Terminal No.
I/O
RS1(RTS)
OutputER1(DTR)
OutputSD1(TxD)
OutputInput
RD1(RxD)
Input
DR1(DSR)
SG1――
NC
Input/output
A1
B1
Input/output―
SG1

Signal Name
Request to send
Data terminal readyTransmitted data
Received data
Data set ready
Signal ground―
Data A
Data B
Signal groundTerminal No.
I/O
RS2(RTS)
OutputER2(DTR)
OutputSD2(TxD)
OutputInput
RD2(RxD)
Input
DR2(DSR)
SG2――
NC
Input/output
A2
B2
Input/output―
SG2

Signal Name
Request to send
Data terminal readyTransmitted data
Received data
Data set ready
Signal ground―
Data A
Data B
Signal ground

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-141

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Wiring Example When Using Both Ports

Upper Side Port

RS232CInterface
DeviceFE

ShieldTerminal No.
RS1(RTS)ER1(DTR)
SD1(TxD)
RD1(RxD)
DR1(DSR)
SG1
NC
A1
B1
Terminating
Resistance
SG1

Lower Side Port
Terminal No.
RS2(RTS)ER2(DTR)SD2(TxD)
RD2(RxD)
DR2(DSR)
SG2
NC
A2
B2
SG2

RS485
Interface
DeviceShieldTerminating
Resistance
FE

RS485
Interface
DeviceThe serial communication module is equipped with two serial ports, and serial communication can be performed using both serial
ports simultaneously. RS-232C or RS-485 can be selected and used for each port.
Above wiring example shows RS-232C communication with the upper side port and RS-485 communication with the lower side
port.
Notes:
 A single port cannot be used as RS-232C and RS-485 simultaneously.
 When communication conditions are unstable, add terminating resistance matched to the characteristic impedance to both ends of the cable.

Use resistance with a rating of 1/2 W or higher.

2-142

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Expansion Interface Modules
The expansion interface modules are available as an expander that is added in between expansion modules to expand the number ofconnected modules and as remote modules (remote master and remote slave) that are daisy chained by Ethernet cables and allow
expansion modules to be positioned away from the CPU module. Remote master/slave modules can be connected only to the Plus
CPU module.

Expansion Interface Module (Expander)
The number of expansion modules that can be connected to the CPU module (basic expansion side) is seven modules, but
additional eight expansion modules (expansion interface side, maximum 256 I/O points) can be connected by installing the
expansion interface module (expander).
CPU Module

Expansion Interface Module (Expander)
Expansion Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) Expansion Modules

7 maximum

Basic Expansion Side

8 maximum

Expansion Interface Side

Notes:
 Only one expansion interface module (expander) can be connected to one CPU module.
 When using the expansion interface module (expander) together with expansion interface modules (remote master/slave) on the Plus CPU

module, one expansion interface module (expander) can be connected per remote slave that is daisy chained to the remote master. For
details, see "Expansion Interface Modules (Remote Master/Slave)" on page 2-146.
 The maximum number of modules that can be connected depends on the modules. For detailed restrictions when using the expansion

interface module and connection examples, see "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37.

Parts Description
FC6A-EXM2(1) Power LED [PWR](2) Expansion Connector 1(3) Expansion Connector 2(4) Power Terminal Block(1) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the expansion interface module (expander).
(2) Expansion Connector 1
This connector is used to connect the expansion module on the basic expansion side.
(3) Expansion Connector 2This connector is used to connect the expansion module on the expansion interface side.
(4) Power Terminal Block
These terminals supply 24V DC power to the expansion interface module (expander).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-143

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24

Rated Operating Voltage

24V DC (supplied from external power)

Voltage Fluctuation Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC (including ripple)

Current Draw

Internal PowerCPU module side supply 20 mA (5V DC), 0 mA (24V DC)

External Power

When maximum number of modules is connected*1 0.77 A (28.8V DC)

Maximum Power Consumption
I/O
Expansion*1

Basic Expansion
Side
Expansion
Interface Side

19 W (28.8V DC)
Connectable CPU modules:

All CPU modules

Connectable expansion modules:

Maximum of 7 modules*2

Connectable expansion modules:

Maximum of 8 modules

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Not isolated

Withstand Voltage

Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteInsulation Resistance

Between power and FE terminals: 10 MΩ or higher (500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current

35 A maximum

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Ground Wire

See "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37

Power Supply Wire

See "Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37

Power Supply
Connector

100 times minimum

Insertion/Removal
Durability

Effect of Improper Power Supply
Connection
WeightReverse polarity:

No operation, no damage

Improper voltage:

Permanent damage may be caused

Improper lead connection:

Permanent damage may be caused

150 g*1 The value when the expansion interface module (expander) + 8 expansion modules (expansion interface side) are used.
*2 The maximum is five modules when the expansion interface remote master module is connected to the Plus CPU module.

Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24
Screw fastened type: FC6A-EXM2
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB03PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-EXM24
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB03PN02

(1)

(1)

(1) Power supply terminals
External Power +24V DC-+
24V DCPower Input
FE: FuseFor wiring precautions, see "Power Supply and Power Supply Wiring" on page 3-20.

2-144

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Precautions

 When supplying the power to the CPU module and to the expansion interface module (expander) with different power supplies, turn the modules

on and off in the order in the following table. An error may occur on the CPU module if the power on order or the power off order is mistaken.
Power Supply

Order

Power onTurn on the expansion interface module (expander) and the CPU module at the same time, or in expansion interface
module (expander)  CPU module orderPower off

Turn off the expansion interface module (expander) and the CPU module at the same time, or in CPU module 
expansion interface module (expander) order

Expansion interface module (expander)
main power
CPU module main power

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0 s or longer

0 s or longer

 When the CPU has suffered a power interruption and restarts, RUN/STOP follows the function area settings.

When the expansion interface module (expander) has suffered a power interruption, the CPU maintains its RUN/STOP status regardless of thatpower interruption.
The other cartridges and the HMI module operate regardless of whether or not the expansion interface module is powered.
This section describes items that are particular affected by a power interruption of the expansion interface module.

Expansion interface module (expander)
main power
CPU module main power

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Expansion module I/O(Basic Expansion Side)OFF

Expansion module I/O(Expansion Interface Side)

OFF

ON

ON

I/O for all expansion modules is off
when the expansion interface
module (expander) main power is off.
 If the expansion interface module (expander) main power supply is on and the CPU module main power supply is off, the expansion modules on

the expansion interface side are set to the reset status. Please note that during the reset status, the analog I/O module and PID module LED
indicators are on. This is not a malfunction.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-145

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Expansion Interface Modules (Remote Master/Slave)
The Plus CPU module can be expanded with up to a maximum of 63 modules (I/O points: maximum 2,016 points) using expansion
interface modules (remote master/slave). The expansion interface modules (remote master/slave) are the remote master whichconnects to the expansion connector of the Plus CPU module and the remote slave which connects to expansion modules that are
positioned away from the CPU module.
The expansion interface remote master module can be connected only to the basic expansion side of the Plus CPU module. At thistime, the maximum number of expansion modules (basic expansion side) that can be connected to the remote master is fivemodules, but additional eight expansion modules (expansion interface side) can be connected by installing the expansion interface
module (expander).
Expansion interface remote slave modules are daisy chained to the remote master using Ethernet cables.
The group of expansion modules that are connected to the expansion connectors and communication connectors of the Plus CPU
module and expansion interface remote slave modules are called as nodes. As illustrated below, the first node that includes thePlus CPU module is called node 0, and the nodes containing remote slaves are called node 1, node 2, and up to node 10 in orderfrom those closest to node 0. The maximum number of nodes is 11, from node 0 to node 10.
The maximum number of expansion modules (basic expansion side) that can be connected to the remote slaves is seven modules,
but additional eight expansion modules (expansion interface side) can be connected by installing the expansion interface module(expander).
Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module
Plus CPU Module (FC6A-EXM1M)

Expansion Interface
Expansion
Expansion
Module (Expander)
Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) Modules

Node 0
5 maximum

Expansion Port [Exp. port M](1)

Basic Expansion Side

8 maximum

Expansion Interface Side

Expansion Interface
Module (Expander)
Expansion
Expansion
Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) Modules

Ethernet Cable(Length Between Nodes: 100 m max.)
Expansion Port 1 [Exp. port S1]

Node 1

Daisy Chain
Connection

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2]

7 maximum

Basic Expansion Side

(2)

Expansion Port 1 [Exp. port S1]

8 maximum

Expansion Interface Side

Expansion Interface
Module (Expander)
Expansion
Expansion
Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) Modules

Node 2
Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2]

7 maximum(3)

Basic Expansion Side

8 maximum

Expansion Interface Side

Expansion Interface
Module (Expander)
Expansion
Expansion
Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) Modules

Expansion Port 1 [Exp. port S1]

Node 10
Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)

2-146

7 maximum(4)

Basic Expansion Side

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

8 maximum

Expansion Interface Side

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(1) For the remote master, connect expansion port [Exp. port M] to expansion port 1 [Exp. port S1] on the remote slave
installed as node 1 using an Ethernet cable.
(2) To install node 2, connect expansion port 2 [Exp. port S2] on the remote slave of node 1 to expansion port 1 [Exp. port
S1] on the remote slave installed as node 2 using an Ethernet cable.
(3) To add more nodes, follow the same procedure and connect expansion port 2 [Exp. port S2] on the remote slave of
upstream node n to expansion port 1 [Exp. port S1] on the remote slave of downstream node n+1 using an Ethernet
cable. (n = 3 to 9)(4) A maximum of 10 nodes can be used.
Do not connect an Ethernet cable to expansion port 2 [Exp. port S2] of the remote slave installed as the last node.
Notes:
 The expansion interface remote master module can be connected only to the Plus CPU module and used on the basic expansion side.
 A maximum of 10 expansion interface remote slave modules can be used within a single daisy chain connection setup.
 Only one expansion interface module (expander) can be connected to each node.
 The only connection that is supported between the remote master and remote slaves is a daisy chain connection. Star connections and tree
connections are not supported.
 The maximum number of expansion modules that can be connected is 63 modules, but the maximum number of modules that can beconnected depends on the connected module. For details on restrictions when using expansion interface modules (remote master/slave), see"Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC" on page 3-37.
 Any devices other than the expansion interface remote master/slave modules do not operate even if they are connected to the expansion
port [Exp. port M] on the expansion interface remote master module or the expansion port 1 [Exp. port S1] or the expansion port 2 [Exp.
port S2] on the expansion interface remote slave module. If connected with an Ethernet cable, the expansion interface remote mastermodule does not recognize the expansion interface remote slave modules.

Part Names and Functions■ Expansion Interface Remote Master Module
FC6A-EXM1M(1) Power LED [PWR](2) Error LED [ERR](3) LINK LED [LNK](4) ACT LED [ACT](5) Expansion Connector 1(6) Expansion Connector 2(7) Expansion Port [Exp. port M](8) Ground Terminal(1) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the expansion interface remote master module from the internal power
supply of the Plus CPU module.
(2) Error LED [ERR]This LED turns on when the following errors occur in the expansion interface remote master module.
 When the cable breaks or the power supply to the expansion interface remote slave modules is turned off (LINK not established statecontinues for 10 seconds or longer) When there is an Ethernet communication error (when LINK is established and data is not normally received for a fixed amount of time or

longer even when one expansion interface remote slave module is connected)
 When there is an internal circuit error When there is a CPU module error(3) LINK LED [LNK]This LED turns on when an expansion interface remote slave module is connected using an Ethernet cable.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-147

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(4) ACT LED [ACT]This LED flashes when the module is communicating with the expansion interface remote slave module connected using an
Ethernet cable.
(5) Expansion Connector 1
This connector is used to connect the Plus CPU module or an expansion module.
(6) Expansion Connector 2This connector is used to connect an expansion module.
(7) Expansion Port [Exp. port M]
This port is used to connect an expansion interface remote slave module using an Ethernet cable.
(8) Ground Terminal
The functional ground terminal.
■ Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module
FC6A-EXM1S(1) Power LED [PWR](2) Run LED [RUN](3) Error LED [ERR](4) LINK1 LED [LNK](5) ACT1 LED [ACT](6) LINK2 LED [LNK](7) ACT2 LED [ACT](8) Expansion Connector(9) Expansion Port 1 [Exp. port S1](10) Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2](11) Power Supply Terminals(12) Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2] Cover(1) Power LED [PWR]This LED turns on when the power is supplied to the expansion interface remote slave module.
(2) Run LED [RUN]
This LED turns on when the expansion interface remote slave module is operating.
(3) Error LED [ERR]This LED turns on when the following errors occur in the expansion interface remote slave module.
 When the cable breaks (data is not normally received for 10 seconds or longer on expansion port 1 [Exp. port S1])
 When the following occur for a connected expansion module: An unsupported module was connected.
 Exceeded 15 modules.
 Exceeded seven modules on the basic expansion side.
 Exceeded eight modules on the expansion interface side.
 Initialization error(4) LINK1 LED [LNK]This LED turns on when the expansion interface remote master module or upstream expansion interface remote slave
module is connected to expansion port 1 [Exp. port S1] using an Ethernet cable.
2-148

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(5) ACT1 LED [ACT]When the LINK1 LED is on, this LED flashes when the module is communicating with the expansion interface remote mastermodule or upstream expansion interface remote slave module.
(6) LINK2 LED [LNK]This LED turns on when the downstream expansion interface remote slave module is connected to expansion port 2 [Exp.
port S2] using an Ethernet cable.
(7) ACT2 LED [ACT]When the LINK2 LED is on, this LED flashes when the module is communicating with the downstream expansion interface
remote slave module.
(8) Expansion Connector
This connector is used to connect an expansion module.
(9) Expansion Port 1 [Exp. port S1]
This port is used to connect the expansion interface remote master module or upstream expansion interface remote slave
module to the module using an Ethernet cable.
(10) Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2]This port is used to connect the downstream expansion interface remote slave module to the module using an Ethernet cable.
(11) Power Supply Terminals
These terminals supply 24V DC power to the expansion interface remote slave module.
(12) Expansion Port 2 [Exp. port S2] Cover
A removable cover that protects expansion port 2 [Exp. port S2]. When using expansion port 2 [Exp. port S2], remove theexpansion port 2 [Exp. port S2] cover.

Expansion Modules That Can Be Connected to an Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module
Module Type

Connectable to Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module

Digital I/O module

Yes

Analog I/O module

Yes

PID module

Yes

Communication module—

Expansion interface module (expander)

Yes

Expansion interface remote master module—

Function Specifications
FC6A-EXM1M(Expansion interface remote master module)Type No.

FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4(Expansion interface remote slave module)

Rated Operating Voltage Internal power: 5V DC (supplied from CPU module)

External power: 24V DC

Voltage Fluctuation
Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC (including ripple)

Current Draw

Internal
Power—
75 mA supplied from CPU module (5V DC)

External
Power

Allowable Momentary
Power Interruption
Isolation between
Internal Circuit——

When maximum number of modules is connected:
0.85 A (28.8V DC)—

10 ms or longer (when rated power supply voltage)

Not isolated

Not isolated

Withstand Voltage—

Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 1 minuteInsulation Resistance—

Between power and FE terminals: 10 MΩ or higher(500V DC insulation resistance tester)

Inrush Current—

35 A maximum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-149

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

FC6A-EXM1M(Expansion interface remote master module)

GroundD-type ground (Class 3 ground)

Ground Wire

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4(Expansion interface remote slave module)

Power Supply Wire—

See "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

Insertion
Power Supply/Removal
Connector
Durability—

100 times minimum—

Reverse polarity: No operation, no damage
Improper voltage: Permanent damage may be caused
Improper lead connection: Permanent damage may becausedEffect of Improper Power
Supply Connection——

Weight (approx.)

80 g

165 g

Communication Port Specifications (Exp. port M, Exp. port S1, Exp. port S2)
Communication TypeIEEE 802.3-compliant 100BASE-TX (Auto MDI/MDI-X supported)

Communication Protocol

Dedicated communications (the modules cannot be connected to other Ethernet network)

Connector

RJ45

Cable

CAT 5 or higher, STP

Maximum Cable Length

100 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Pulse transformer isolated

Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples■ FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4 (Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module)
Screw fastened type: FC6A-EXM1S
Applicable connector: FC6A-PMTB03PN02

Push-in type: FC6A-EXM1S4Applicable connector: FC6A-PMSB03PN02

(1)

(1)

(1) Power supply terminals
External Power +24V DC-+
24V DCPower Input
FE: FuseFor wiring precautions, see "Power Supply and Power Supply Wiring" on page 3-20.

2-150

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Power Supply Precautions

When supplying the power to the CPU module, expansion interface remote slave modules, and expansion interface modules(expander) with separate power supplies, turn the modules on and off in the order given in the following table. An error will occur
on the CPU module if the order to turn the power supply on and off is wrong.
Power Supply

Order

ON

Expansion interface module (expander) -> Expansion interface remote slave module -> CPU module orderOFF

CPU module -> Expansion interface remote slave module -> Expansion interface module (expander) order

Expansion interface module (expander) ON
OFFmain power
Expansion interface remote slave module
main power
CPU module main power

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0s 0s
or longer or longer0s 0s
or longer or longer

If the order to turn on the power supply is wrong, the expansion interface modules (remote master/slave) along with the connected
expansion modules can be initialized by turning on M8320 (Initialize Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules).
Programming Example
The following program shows how to recover the operation of the system using three expansion interface remote slave modules
when the power supply to those modules are turned on in a wrong order.
Obtain the number of connected expansion interface remote slave modules.
Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module
Slot Info
Initialize Pulse

ANDW(W)

M8120

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module
Quantity of Modules

S1 -

S2 -

D1 -

D8597

$0F00

D0000

S1

S2

N_B

Bis

D0000

0

16

8

Obtain the number of connected expansion
interface remote slave modules from D8597(Expansion Interface Remote Master Module
Slot Info) and store it in D0000.

REP

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module
Quantity of Modules

SFTR

Shift the value in D0000 to the right foreight bits to obtain the number of connected
expansion interface remote slave modules.

If the number of connected expansion interface remote slave modules is not three,initialize the expansion interface remote master/slave modules.
Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module
Quantity of Modules
Initialize Pulse

M8120

Initialize Expansion
Interface Remote
Master/Slave
Modules

LC<>(W)
D0000

3

S
M8320

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

If D0000 (the number of connected
expansion interface remote slave modules)
does not match with the actual system,
three in this example, turn on M8320(Initialize Expansion Interface Remote
Master/Slave Modules)

2-151

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Maximum I/O Points When Using Expansion Interface Modules (Remote Master/Slave)

The following table gives the number of digital I/O points and analog I/O points when expansion interface modules (remotemaster/slave) are connected to the Plus CPU module and the maximum number of expansion modules and cartridges areconnected to the system.
I/O

Maximum No. of I/O Points

Input

Digital I/O
Analog I/O

2,044

Output

2,044

Input

511

Output258

Cartridge Base Module
HMI Module

Expansion Modules (13 maximum)

Plus CPU Module

Node 0Cartridges(3 maximum)

Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module(FC6A-EXM1M)

Expansion Modules(63 maximum)

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4)

Expansion Modules (15 maximum)

Node 1

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)(10 maximum)

Expansion Modules (15 maximum)
Node 10

Maximum number of expansion modules:

63

Maximum number of expansion cartridges: 3
Notes:
 I/O refresh time of the expansion interface remote master/slave modules is stored in D8618 (Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote
Master/Slave Modules Current Value) and D8619 (Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules Maximum Value).
When the outputs status are changed in a shorter time than the I/O refresh time of the expansion interface remote master/slave modules,
the outputs status may be reflected to the actual outputs. Make sure that the outputs are controlled in a longer time than the I/O refreshtime of the expansion interface remote master/slave modules.
 The expansion interface master/slave modules cannot be connected over the Ethernet switch.

2-152

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Calculation Method of I/O Data Refresh Time

When expansion modules are used with the CPU module, an approximate value for the I/O data refresh time can be calculatedwith the following equations.
Use the I/O data refresh time obtained with the following equations as a rough estimate.
■ When Not Using an Expansion Interface Module (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24, FC6A-EXM1M, FC6A-EXM1S, or
FC6A-EXM1S4)
I/O data refresh time =() module(s)× 0.04 ms+

Digital I/O module

Example:() module(s)× 0.17 ms+ () module(s) + ( ) module(s) + scan time× 0.34 ms
× 1.09 ms

Analog I/O module

Plus CPU Module

PID module

Communication
moduleAnalog I/O Modules

PID Module

Digital I/O Modules

I/O data refresh time = 4 × 0.04 ms + 2 × 0.17 ms + 1 × 0.34 ms + 0 × 1.09 ms + scan time
= 0.84 ms + scan time

■ When Using an Expansion Interface Module (Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)
I/O data refresh time =() module(s)× 0.08 ms

Digital I/O module+() module(s)× 0.29 ms

Analog I/O module+ () module(s) + ( ) module(s) +× 0.58 ms
× 1.09 ms
PID module

scan time

Communication
moduleExample:Expansion Interface Module(Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)

Plus CPU Module

Digital I/O Modules

PID Module

Analog I/O Modules

Communication
Modules

I/O data refresh time = 7 × 0.08 ms + 5 × 0.29 ms + 1 × 0.58 ms + 2 × 1.09 ms + scan time= 4.77 ms + scan time

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-153

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ When Using an Expansion Interface Module (Remote Master/Slave) (FC6A-EXM1M, FC6A-EXM1S, or
FC6A-EXM1S4)
1. I/O data refresh time of node 0
I/O data refresh time = () module(s) +× 0.34 ms() module(s)× 0.04 ms+

Digital I/O module

FC6A-EXM1M
FC6A-EXM1S
FC6A-EXM1S4() module(s)× 0.17 ms+ (Analog I/O module) module(s) + ( ) module(s)× 0.34 ms
× 1.09 ms
PID module

Communication
moduleExpansion modules of node 0+() module(s)× 0.04 ms+

Digital I/O module() module(s)× 0.17 ms+ (Analog I/O module) module(s) +× 0.34 ms

scan time

PID module

Expansion modules of node 1 and subsequent nodes

2. I/O data refresh time of node 1 and subsequent nodes
I/O data refresh time = I/O data refresh time of node 0 (1.) + { () module(s) +× 1.2 ms(

FC6A-EXM1S
FC6A-EXM1S4) module(s)× 0.3 ms

Analog I/O module
PID module
Expansion modules of node 1 andsubsequent nodes+() module(s)× 0.04 ms

Digital I/O module+() module(s)× 0.17 ms

Analog I/O module+ () module(s) + 5 ms } ÷ 2 + scan time× 0.34 ms
PID module

Expansion modules of node 1 and subsequent nodes

2-154

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Examples:Plus CPU Module

Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module(FC6A-EXM1M)
Analog I/O Module

Node 0Communication
ModuleDigital I/O Modules

PID Module

Node 1

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)Digital I/O Modules
Digital I/O
ModulePID Modules

Node 2

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)

Analog I/O Module
Digital I/O Modules

Node 3

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Analog I/O Modules
Analog I/O Modules
Node 4

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)Digital I/O Module

PID Modules

Node 5

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Analog I/O Modules

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-155

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
1. I/O data refresh time of node 0
I/O data refresh time = 6 × 0.34 ms + 2 × 0.04 ms + 1 × 0.17 ms + 1 × 0.34 ms + 1 × 1.09 ms+ 11 × 0.04 ms + 13 × 0.17 ms + 6 × 0.34 ms + scan time= 8.41 ms + scan time

2. I/O data refresh time of node 1 and subsequent nodes
I/O data refresh time = 8.41 ms + { 5 × 1.2 ms + 19 × 0.3 ms + 11 × 0.04 ms + 13 × 0.17 ms + 6 × 0.34 ms + 5 ms } ÷ 2+ scan time= 19.11 ms + scan time

2-156

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ When Using an Expansion Interface Module (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24, FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4, or
FC6A-EXM1)
1. I/O data refresh time of node 0
I/O data refresh time = () module(s) +× 0.68 ms(

FC6A-EXM1M
FC6A-EXM1S
FC6A-EXM1S4) module(s)× 0.08 ms+

Digital I/O module() module(s)× 0.29 ms+ (Analog I/O module) module(s) + ( ) module(s)× 0.58 ms
× 1.09 ms
PID module

Communication
moduleExpansion modules of node 0+() module(s)× 0.08 ms+

Digital I/O module() module(s)× 0.29 ms+ (Analog I/O module) module(s) +× 0.58 ms

scan time

PID module

Expansion modules of node 1 and subsequent nodes

2. I/O data refresh time of node 1 and subsequent nodes
I/O data refresh time = I/O data refresh time of node 0 (1.) + { () module(s) +× 1.2 ms(

FC6A-EXM1S
FC6A-EXM1S4) module(s)× 0.3 ms

Analog I/O module
PID module
Expansion modules of node 1 andsubsequent nodes+() module(s)× 0.04 ms+

Digital I/O module() module(s)× 0.17 ms+ (Analog I/O module) module(s)× 0.34 ms
PID module

Expansion modules of node 1 and subsequent nodes that are not using
the FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24+() module(s)× 0.08 ms

Digital I/O module+() module(s)× 0.29 ms

Analog I/O module+ () module(s) + 5 ms } ÷ 2 + scan time× 0.58 ms
PID module

Expansion modules of node 1 and subsequent nodes that are using
the FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-157

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Examples:Plus CPU Module

Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module(FC6A-EXM1M)

Expansion Interface Module(Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)

PID Modules

Node 0Digital I/O Modules

Analog I/O Modules

Communication Modules

Digital I/O Modules
Node 1

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Analog I/O Modules

Digital I/O Modules
Node 2

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)Digital I/O Modules

Expansion Interface Module(Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)

Node 3

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Analog I/O Modules
Analog I/O Modules
Node 4

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)
Analog I/O Modules

PID Modules

Node 5

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)Digital I/O Module
Digital I/O Module
Node 6

Analog I/O Module

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)

Expansion Interface Module(Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)
Analog I/O Modules

Node 7

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)

2-158

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Analog I/O Modules

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
1. I/O data refresh time of node 0
I/O data refresh time = 8 × 0.68 ms + 5 × 0.08 ms + 4 × 0.29 ms + 2 × 0.58 ms + 2 × 1.09 ms + 18 × 0.08 ms + 28 × 0.29 ms+ 4 × 0.58 ms + scan time= 22.22 ms + scan time

2. I/O data refresh time of node 1 and subsequent nodes
I/O data refresh time = 22.22 ms + { 7 × 1.2 ms + 32 × 0.3 ms + 11 × 0.04 ms + 9 × 0.17 ms + 4 × 0.34 ms+ 7 × 0.08 ms + 19 × 0.29 ms + 0 × 0.58 ms + 5 ms } ÷ 2 + scan time
= 38.42 ms + scan time

Notes:
 The scan time is the time duration for executing one cycle of the user program that is cyclically executed.
 The scan time can be checked with special data register D8023 (Scan Time Current Value (ms)).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-159

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
HMI Module
The HMI module is connected to the CPU module's communication connector.
You can run and stop the user program, monitor device values, and modify settings using the LCD and operation buttons on the
HMI module. The HMI module also features the maintenance communication function, web server function, and send e-mailfunction using Ethernet communication.
For details on the HMI module functions, the menu screen, and the operation methods, see "HMI Function" on page 7-1.

Parts Description
FC6A-PH1(4) Communication
Connector(1) Front Cover(2) LCD(3) Cartridge Slot 3(5) Operation Buttons(10) HMI-Ethernet Port
(6) LINK LED(7) ACT LED(8) Ground Terminal

Bottom(9) Dummy Cartridge(1) Front CoverThis cover prevents the mistaken operation of the operation buttons. Open the front cover when using the operation buttons
and when installing or ejecting the cartridge.
(2) LCD
Displays the menus to control the FC6A and display the status and settings for the FC6A.
(3) Cartridge Slot 3
This slot is used for installing a cartridge. However, a communication cartridge cannot be used in cartridge slot 3 of the Allin-One CPU module. A communication cartridge can be used in cartridge slot 3 of the Plus CPU module.
(4) Communication Connector
Connects the HMI module and the CPU module.
(5) Operation Buttons
Selects the display menu on the LCD and other functions. There are six buttons:(ESC),
(OK).

(Up),

(Down),(Left),(6) LINK LED
This LED is on when a network-compatible device is connected to the HMI-Ethernet port with an Ethernet cable.
(7) ACT LED
This LED flashes when sending or receiving data while the LINK LED is on.
(8) Ground Terminal
The functional ground terminal.
2-160

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(Right),2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
(9) Dummy Cartridge
A removable dummy cartridge that protects the cartridge slot. Remove the dummy cartridge when connecting a cartridge.
(10) HMI-Ethernet PortThis port allows Ethernet communication with connected devices that are equipped with an Ethernet interface.

Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PH1

Rated Power Voltage (Supplied from
Module)

5V DC
24V DC

HMI-Ethernet Port

RJ45

Insertion/Removal
Durability

100 times minimum

Module

5V DC

300 mA

Internal Current
Draw

24V DC

15 mA

Connector

GroundD-type ground (Type 3 ground)

Ground Wire

UL1007 AWG18

Weight

170 g■ HMI-Ethernet Port Specifications
Points1

Communication TypeIEEE 802.3 compliant

Communication Speed

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Communication Functions

Maintenance communication

Connector

RJ45 (Auto MDI/MDI-X compatible)

Cable

CAT 5 or higher, STP

Maximum Cable Length

100 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Pulse transformer isolated■ Ethernet Communication Specifications
Number of Connections

8 maximum

Communication Mode

Maintenance Communication

Web Server FunctionYes

Web Data Storage

FROM

Web Data Capacity

5 Mbyte (Total size of the system web page and user web page)

Send E-mail Function

Yes■ LCD Specifications
Type

STN monochrome LCD

Resolution

64 x 192 pixels

Number of Characters

24 digits x 8 lines (8 x 8 pixel font)
12 digits x 8 lines (16 x 8 pixel font)
12 digits x 4 lines (16 x 16 pixel font)

Display Content

System menus, messages, operation status monitor

Contrast Adjustment

Not possible

Backlight

Yes (can be turned on and off)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-161

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Cartridge Base Module
The cartridge base module can be connected to the communication connector on the Plus CPU module to allow the use of
cartridges. The cartridge base module is equipped with cartridge slots 1 and 2. One cartridge base module can be connected to
the Plus CPU module.

Part Names and Functions
FC6A-HPH1(3) Communication Connector 1(4) Communication Connector 2(1) Cartridge Slot 1(2) Cartridge Slot 2(6) Communication Connector
Protection Sticker(5) Dummy Cartridges(1) Cartridge Slot 1
This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(2) Cartridge Slot 2
This slot is used to connect a digital I/O cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(3) Communication Connector 1
This connector is used to connect an HMI module.
(4) Communication Connector 2This connector is used to connect the module to the Plus CPU module.
Note: The cartridge base module cannot be connected to the All-in-One CPU module or CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.

(5) Dummy Cartridges
Removable dummy cartridges that protect the cartridge slots. Remove the dummy cartridge when connecting a digital I/O
cartridge, analog I/O cartridge, or communication cartridge.
(6) Communication Connector Protection Sticker
This sticker protects the communication connector. Remove the communication connector protection sticker whenconnecting the HMI module.

2-162

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-HPH1

Number of connected cartridges

2 maximum

Weight90 g

Notes:
 Do not install the cartridge base module in the Plus CPU module or remove it from the Plus CPU module when the Plus CPU module ispowered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.
 Do not touch the connectors on the back of the cartridge when installing or removing it. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the connectors

and making poor contact with module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-163

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Cartridges
Three types of cartridges are available for the FC6A: digital I/O cartridges that expand the number of digital inputs or outputs,
analog I/O cartridges that expand the number of analog inputs or outputs, and communication cartridges that expand RS-232C
communication ports, RS-485 communication ports, or Bluetooth communication ports.

Digital I/O Cartridges
Digital I/O cartridges expand the system with four digital inputs or outputs. Those cartridges can be connected to cartridge slotson the All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, the cartridge base module, or the HMI module. For details on
digital cartridges, see "Digital I/O Cartridge" on page 10-1.

Digital I/O Cartridge Specifications
Part Names and Functions

(2)

(1)

(1)

(1) Terminals
These terminals connect the cartridge to the power supply and to input or output devices. The devices that can be connecteddiffer by the type of digital I/O cartridge.
(2) Connector
This connector connects the cartridge to Cartridge Slot 1 or 2 of the All-in-One CPU module or the cartridge base module.

Model List
Cartridge TypeI/O Points

Digital input cartridge

Input

4

Digital output cartridge

Output4

I/O Signal

Type No.

DC input (shared sink/source): 12/24V DC

FC6A-PN4Transistor sink output: 12/24V DC

FC6A-PTK4

Transistor source output: 12/24V DC

FC6A-PTS4

Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PN4

Rated Power Voltage

5.0 V, 3.3 V (supplied from CPU module)

Current Draw

5.0 V: 0 mA
3.3 V: 35 mA

Weight

15 g

2-164

FC6A-PTK4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A-PTS4

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital Input Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PN4

Rated Input Voltage

12/24V DC (shared sink/source)

Operating Load Voltage Range

0 to 28.8V DC

Rated Input Current

5 mA/1 point (when 24V DC)
2.5 mA/1 point (when 12V DC)

Terminal Arrangement

See "Wiring Arrangement and Wiring Examples" on page 2-167.

Input Impedance
Input Delay Time
(24V DC)

4.4 kΩ
Turn ON Time

0.5 msTurn OFF Time

0.5 msExternal Load for I/OInterconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticEffect of Improper Input Connection

Even if wiring for sink or source connection is incorrect, no damages are caused.
If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.

Cable Length

3m

Input Operating Range
The operating range of Type 1 (IEC 61131-2) DC input modules is as follows.
Input Voltage (V DC)
28.8 V

24 V

ON Area

8.5 V

Transition Area
5V

OFF Area
Input Current (mA)
5.3 mA 6.4 mA

0.9 mA 1.7 mA

Input Internal Circuit

COM

Internal Circuit

4.3 kΩInput

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-165

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital Output Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PTK4

FC6A-PTS4

Output Signal

Transistor sink output

Rated Load Voltage

12/24V DC

Operating Load Voltage Range

10.2 to 28.8V DC

Output Points

4 (4 points in 1 common line)

Rated Load

0.1 A/1 point

Terminal Arrangement

See "Wiring Arrangement and Wiring Examples" on page 2-167.

Voltage Drop (ON Voltage)

0.4 V or less, voltage between COM and output terminal when ON

Allowed Inrush Current

1 A maximum

Leakage Current

0.1 mA maximum

Clamping Voltage

50 V

Lamp Load

2.4 W maximum

Inductive Load

L/R = 10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

Protection Operation

None

External Current Draw

100 mA maximum, 24V DC (+V terminal supply power)

Output Delay
Time(24V DC)

Turn ON Time450 μs maximum

Turn OFF Time450 μs maximum

Output Internal Circuit
FC6A-PTK4V (+)

Internal
CircuitOutputCOM (-)

FC6A-PTS4
COM (+)

Internal
CircuitOutput

V (-)

2-166

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Transistor source output

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Wiring Arrangement and Wiring Examples
FC6A-PN4
FC6A-PN4
DC. IN

10.2 to 28.8V DC

NPN
PNP

2-wireSensor3

COM 2

10.2 to 28.8V DC

1 COM

2-wireSensor

0

:Load

:Fuse

FC6A-PTK4

FC6A-PTS4

FC6A-PTK4

FC6A-PTS4

Tr.OUT SINK

1 COM(-)

V+ 2

3

0

1 COM(+)

V-2

3

10.2 to 28.8V DC

10.2 to 28.8V DC

0

Tr.OUT SOURCE

Rated Load: 12 to 24V DC/0.1 A

Insert a fuse that corresponds to the load.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-167

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Analog I/O Cartridges
Analog I/O cartridges can be connected to cartridge slots on the All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module,
cartridge base module, or HMI module. These cartridges expand the system with a maximum of six analog inputs or outputs. For
details on analog I/O cartridges, see "Analog I/O Cartridge" on page 10-7.

Parts Description

(3)

(1)

(2)

(1) Channel 0 terminals
The terminals connect an input device or an output device. The devices that can be connected differ by the type of analog
I/O cartridge.
(2) Channel 1 terminals
The terminals connect an input device or an output device. The devices that can be connected differ by the type of analog
I/O cartridge.
(3) Connector
Connects the cartridge to cartridge slot 1 or 2 on the All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, or cartridgebase module or cartridge slot 3 on the HMI module.

Model List
Cartridge Type
Analog output cartridge

I/O Points

I/O Signal

Type No.

Output2

Voltage output: 0 to 10V DC

FC6A-PK2AV

Output2

Current output: 4 to 20mA DC

FC6A-PK2AW

Input

2

Voltage input: 0 to 10V DC
Current input: 0 to 20mA DC, 4 to 20mA DC

FC6A-PJ2A

Input

2

Thermocouple input: K, J, R, S, B, E, T, N, C
Resistance thermometer input: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000

FC6A-PJ2CP

Analog input cartridge

Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PK2AV

FC6A-PK2AW

FC6A-PJ2A

FC6A-PJ2CP

Rated Power Voltage

5.0 V, 3.3 V (supplied from module)

Current Draw

5.0 V: 70 mA
3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: 185 mA
3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: ―3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: ―3.3 V: 30 mA

Weight

15 g

15 g

15 g

15 g

2-168

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
■ Analog Output Specifications
Type No.
OutputType andOutput
Range
Load
DA
Conversion

OutputError

Data

FC6A-PK2AV
Voltage
Current――

4 to 20mA DC

Impedance

2 kΩ or higher

Load Type

Resistive load

DA Conversion TimeMax 40 ms

Max 20 ms

Output Update Interval

20 ms

20 ms

Total Output System Transfer Time

DA conversion time + Output Update Interval + 1 scan time

Maximum Error at 25°C

±0.3% of full scale±0.3% of full scale

Temperature Coefficient±0.02% of full scale/°C±0.02% of full scale/°C

Output Ripple

Max 30 mV

Max 30 mV

Overshoot0%0%

Digital Resolution

4,096 steps (12 bits)

4,096 steps (12 bits)

Input Value per Step

2.44 mV (0 to 10 V)

3.91 µA (4 to 20 mA)

Data Type in Application Program

0 to 4,095 (0 to 10 V)

0 to 4,095 (4 to 20 mA)

Monotonicity

Yes

Yes

Current Loop Open
Noise
ResistanceFC6A-PK2AW

0 to 10V DC

500 Ω or lower―

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests

Max ±4.0% of full scale

Recommended Cable

Pair shielded cable

CrosstalkNot detectable
Max ±4.0% of full scale

MAX 1 LSB

MAX 1 LSB

Isolation

None

None

Effect of Improper Output Connection

No damage

No damageCalibration or Verification to Maintain Rated
Accuracy

Not possible

Not possible■ Analog Input Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PJ2A

Input Type

Voltage

FC6A-PJ2CP

Current

Input Type and Input Range

0 to 10V DC

4 to 20mA DC
0 to 20mA DC

Input Impedance

Resistance Thermometer
Pt100:-200 to 850°C(-328 to 1,562°F)
Pt1000:-200 to +600°C(-328 to 1,112°F)
Ni100:-60 to +180°C(-76 to 356°F)
Ni1000:-60 to +180°C(-76 to 356°F)

Thermocouple(K) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(J) -200 to 1,000°C (-328 to 1,832°F)(R) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(S) 0 to 1,760°C (32 to 3,200°F)(B) 0 to 1,820°C (32 to 3,308°F)(E) -200 to 800°C (-328 to 1,472°F)(T) -200 to 400°C (-328 to 752°F)(N) -200 to 1,300°C (-328 to 2,372°F)(C) 0 to 2,315°C (32 to 4,199°F)

Min 1 MΩMax 250 Ω

Min 1 MΩ

Allowed Conductor Resistance――Max 10 Ω―

Detected Input Current――

TYP: 0.2 mA Max 1.0 mA―

Sampling Time
Sampling RepetitionTime
Total Input Delay
AD*1
Conversion TimeType of Input

10 ms

10 ms

20 ms

250 ms

250 ms

500 msSampling time + Sampling repetition time + 1 scan timeSingle-ended

Operation Mode

Self-scan

Conversion Method

SAR

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-169

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Type No.

FC6A-PJ2A

Input Type

Voltage

FC6A-PJ2CP

Current

Resistance Thermometer

Thermocouple±0.1% of full scale
Cold junction compensation
accuracy ±4.0°C or lower

Input Error

Maximum Error at
25°C±0.1% of full scale±0.1% of full scale

Temperature
Coefficient±0.02% of full scale/°C±0.02% of full scale/°C

Digital Resolution

4,096 steps (12 bits)

Pt100: Approx. 10,500(equivalent to 14 bits)
Pt1000: Approx. 8,000(equivalent to 13 bits)
Ni100: Approx. 2,400(equivalent to 12 bits)
Ni1000: Approx. 2,400(equivalent to 12 bits)

K: 15,000 (14 bits)
J: 12,000 (14 bits)
R: 17,600 (15 bits)
S: 17,600 (15 bits)
B: 18,200 (15 bits)
E: 10,000 (14 bits)
T: 6,000 (13 bits)
N: 15,000 (14 bits)
C: 23,150 (15 bits)

Input Value per Step

2.44 mV(0 to 10V DC)

0.1°C
0.18°F

0.1°C
0.18°F

Application Data TypeCan be arbitrarily set for each channel in a range between -32,768 to 32,767*2

Monotonicity

Yes

Data

Noise
Resistance

Exceptions
R, S thermocouple error:±6.0°C(0 to 200°C range only)
B thermocouple error:
Not guaranteed(0 to 300°C range only)
K, J, E, T, N thermocouple error:±0.4% of full scale(0°C or lower range only)

Input Data Out of
Range
Maximum Temporary
Deviation
during Electrical
Noise Tests

4.88 µA(0 to 20mA DC)
3.91 µA(4 to 20mA DC)

Detectable*3

Max ±4.0% of full scale

Recommended Cable

Pair shielded cable

CrosstalkMax 1 LSB

Isolation

Pair cable

None

Effect of Improper Input Connection No damage
Maximum Permanent Allowed
Overload*4 (No Damage)
Selection of Input Type and Input
Range
Calibration or Verification to
Maintain Rated Accuracy

13 V

40 mA

13 V

Using programming software
Not possible*1 Total input delay time indicates the total value of the sampling repetition time plus the internal processing time. The total input delay timeincreases in proportion to the number of channels used.
*2 The arbitrary setting is a function that uses the digital resolution data by scaling it to arbitrary data (that arbitrarily sets the lower limit value andthe upper limit value). The range setting (-32,768 to 32,767) is specified with data registers.
Example: When -5 V is input, 1,024 is displayed as long as the arbitrary setting is not configured, but -500 is displayed when the arbitrary setting is
configured as upper limit value = 1,000 and lower limit value = -1,000, and this makes it easier to intuitively read the input voltage value.

When the digital resolution data is 12 bits and the input range is -10 to +10 V
Lower Limit Value=-1,000 -500

Raw Input Value0
Input Voltage Value -10 V

Upper Limit Value=1,000

1,024
-5 V

4,095
10 V

*3 Input data out of range is reflected in the status of the analog I/O module.
*4 The maximum voltage/current value that can be input without damage.

2-170

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Output Internal Circuit
FC6A-PK2AV, FC6A-PK2AW+

Analog Signal
Analog Output
Element–

Switching Signal

Multiplexer

Input Internal Circuit
FC6A-PJ2A＋
Voltage Input

Input Circuit

−
GND

GND

Current Input＋

FC6A-PJ2CP

Multiplexer

Voltage Supply

A ＋

Input Circuit

B −
GND

GND

B’

Voltage Supply

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-171

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Wiring Arrangement and Wiring Examples
 Do not connect a thermocouple to a part with hazardous voltage (60V DC or peak 42.4V DC or higher part).

Caution Before turning on the power, please check that the wiring is correct. If the wiring is incorrect, the analog I/O cartridge

may be damaged. When the analog I/O cartridge may malfunction due to noise, wire it with a shielded cable andconnect both ends to the FE.
 When connecting cables to the analog I/O cartridges, the tightening torque is 0.22 to 0.25 Nm.

FC6A-PK2AV

FC6A-PK2AW

OUT0
+

–

+

–

OUT1
NC

0 to 10 V

+

–

+

–

OUT0
NC

Analog Voltage Input Device

FC6A-PJ2A

–

+

–

+

NC

–

+

–

+

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Analog Current Input Device

Analog Current Input Device

0 to 10 V

Analog Voltage Input Device

FC6A-PJ2CP
IN0

+

–

+

–

IN0

IN1
+

0 to 10 V
Analog Voltage Output Device

2-172

NC

OUT1

+

–

+

–

+

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Analog Current Output Device

IN1

A

B

B’

A

B

B’

+

–

NC

+

–

NC

A

B
B’
Pt / Ni+–

Resistance Thermometer

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Thermocouple

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Communication Cartridges
Communication cartridges can be connected to cartridge slots on the All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, thecartridge base module, or HMI module connected to the Plus CPU module. These cartridges expand the system with RS-232C, RS485, or Bluetooth communication ports.
Note: The cartridge slot on the HMI module connected to the All-in-One CPU module or CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module cannot be used.

RS-232C and RS-485 Communication Cartridges
The RS-232C and RS-485 communication cartridges support the maintenance communication, user communication, and Modbus
communication. The RS-485 communication cartridge also supports the data link communication.

Parts Description

(2)

(1)

(1)

(1) Terminals
These terminals connect a device equipped with a serial interface (RS-232C or RS-485). The devices that can be connecteddiffer by the type of communication cartridge.
(2) Connector
The connector used to connect the cartridge to cartridge slot 1 or 2 on the All-in-One CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module, or cartridge base module or cartridge slot 3 on the HMI module connected to the Plus CPU module.

Model List
Cartridge Type
RS-232C communication cartridge
RS-485 communication cartridge

PointsTypeType No.

1

Serial interface (RS-232C)

FC6A-PC1

1

Serial interface (RS-485)

FC6A-PC3

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-173

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PC1

FC6A-PC3

Rated Power Voltage

5.0 V, 3.3 V (supplied from module)

5.0 V, 3.3 V (supplied from module)

Current Draw

5.0 V: Max 23 mA
3.3 V: Max 6 mA

5.0 V: Max 23 mA
3.3 V: Max 6 mA

Weight15 g

15 g■ Communication Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PC1

Electrical Characteristics

EIA RS232C

FC6A-PC3
EIA RS485

Maximum Communication Speed

115,200 bps

115,200 bps

Maintenance Communication

Yes

Yes

User Communication

Yes

Yes

Data Link Communication

Yes

Yes

Modbus Master

Yes

Yes

Modbus Slave

Yes

Yes

Maximum Cable Length

5m

200 m

Isolation between Internal Circuit

Not isolated

Not isolated

Cable

Shielded multicore cable: 24 AWG

Shielded twisted-pair cable: 24 AWG

Recommended Cable

Caution2-174

When connecting cables to the communication cartridges, the tightening torque is 0.22 to 0.25 Nm.
Recommended screwdriver: SZS 0.4×2.5 (Phoenix Contact) and SDS 0.4×2.5×75 (Weidmüller)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Examples
Notes:
 For the cables to use for wiring, fabricate and use the recommended cable or an equivalent type of shielded cable.
 When there is a risk of malfunction due to noise, ground the shielded cables.
 Fully read and understand the manual for the device that will be connected to and communicate with the communication cartridge before

wiring it.

FC6A-PC1
Terminal NameI/O Direction

RS (RTS)*1

Signal Name, etc.

OutputRequest to send
Data terminal readyER (DTR)

OutputSD (TxD)

OutputTransmitted data

RD (RxD)

Input

Received data

DR (DSR)

Input

Data set ready

SG (SG)―

Signal ground*1 The RS terminal is a constant output terminal.
FC6A-PC1RS232

RS ER SD

RD DR SGRS232CInterface Device

FE
ShieldFC6A-PC3
Terminal NameI/O Direction

A

I/O

B

I/O

SG

―

Data A*1

Signal Name, etc.

Data B*1

Signal ground*1*1 The terminals are shorted inside the cartridge.
FC6A-PC3

FC6A-PC3

RS485

A B SGRS485

A B SGA B SGA B SG

Terminating ResistanceTerminating
Resistance

RS485
Interface Device
ShieldFE

Note: When communication quality is unstable, add terminating resistance matched to the characteristic impedance to both ends of the cable. Use
resistance with a rating of 1/2 W or higher.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-175

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Bluetooth Communication Cartridge

The Bluetooth communication cartridge supports the maintenance communication and user communication.
■ Part Names and Functions(1)(1) Connector
The connector used to connect the cartridge to cartridge slot 1 or 2 or cartridge slot 3 on the HMI module connected to thePlus CPU module.
■ Function Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PC4

Rated Power Voltage

5.0 V, 3.3 V (supplied from module)

Current Draw

5.0 V: 120 mA maximum
3.3 V: 30 mA maximum

Weight15 g

Wireless Communication Specifications
Type No.

FC6A-PC4

Bluetooth Standard

Bluetooth ver.2.1 + EDR

ProfileSPP (Serial Port Profile)iAP (iPod Accessory Protocol)

Frequency Range

2,402 MHz to 2,480 MHz

Wireless Transmission Distance*1

10 m (Class 2)

Multi-point Function

8 units

Communication Protocol

Maintenance communication protocol, user communication protocol

Bluetooth Wireless Approved Regions*2

Japan, China, USA, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, Europe*1 Connection effective range is affected by obstacles (human, metal, wall) and wave signal condition. Make sure to confirm the connection status
before actual operation.
*2 Depending on countries or regions, evaluations on the device equipped with FC6A may be necessary.
Note: Communication performance (required time) in maintenance communication is as follows.
 User program upload equivalent to 10,000 steps: 40 seconds approx.
 User program download equivalent to 10,000 steps: 50 seconds approx.
 User program upload equivalent to 20,000 steps: 1 minute 20 seconds approx.
 User program download equivalent to 20,000 steps: 1 minute 40 seconds approx.
 100 KB CSV file retrieval: 30 seconds approx.
 200 KB CSV file retrieval: 1 minute approx.

2-176

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Dimensions
CPU Modules
All-in-One CPU module
16-I/O Type: Screw fastened type:FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE,
FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16P1DE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE,
FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE
130.9

45.4

95.0

2.9 [8.1] *1

114.3

*1

[3.3]
2.7

73.0

13.6
[12.6] *1

15.4

2.9 [8.1] *1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

24-I/O Type: Screw fastened type:FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C24R4AE, FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE
130.9

[3.3]
2.7

*1

73.0

45.4

110.0

2.9 [8.1]

*1

114.3

15.4

13.6
[12.6] *1

2.9 [8.1] *1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-177

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
40-I/O Type: Screw fastened type:FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE,
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE,
FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE

163.0

[3.3]
2.7

45.4

2.9 [8.1]

*1

130.9
114.3

*1

73.0

13.6
[12.6] *1

15.4

2.9 [8.1] *1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
40-I/O Type: Screw fastened type:FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ,
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ,
FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
130.9

163.0

[9.85]
11.3*1

2.7 [3.3]

73.0

45.4

2.9 [8.1]*1

114.3

*1

15.4

13.6
[12.6] *1

2.9 [8.1] *1 90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.
*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

2-178

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Plus CPU module
Plus 16-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE
Push-in type: FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE
130.9[12.7]*1
12.6

70.0

45.4

114.3

73.0

15.4

13.3
[12.4]*1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.
*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

Plus 32-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32P3CEE
Push-in type: FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE
130.9

45.4

114.3

70.0

8.2

73.0

15.4

13.3
[12.4]*1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.
*1 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-179

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Expansion Modules
Digital input modules:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08A11
Push-in type: FC6A-N08B4, FC6A-N08A14
Digital output modules:
Screw fastened type: FC6A-R081, FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T08P1
Push-in type: FC6A-R084, FC6A-T08K4, FC6A-T08P4
Digital mixed I/O modules: Screw fastened type: FC6A-M08BR1
Push-in type: FC6A-M08BR4
Analog I/O modules:
Screw fastened type: FC6A-J2C1, FC6A-K2A1, FC6A-K4A1, FC6A-J4CN1
Push-in type: FC6A-J2C4, FC6A-K2A4, FC6A-K4A4, FC6A-J4CN4
3.8[14.0]*2
15.8

23.6

73.0

5.0

*1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

Digital input modules:
Digital output modules:
Analog I/O modules:

Communication modules:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-N16B1
Push-in type: FC6A-N16B4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-R161, FC6A-T16K1, FC6A-T16P1
Push-in type: FC6A-R164, FC6A-T16K4, FC6A-T16P4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-J4A1, FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-J4CN1, FC6A-J4CH1Y,
FC6A-J8CU1, FC6A-L06A1
Push-in type: FC6A-J4A4, FC6A-J8A4, FC6A-J4CN4, FC6A-J4CH4Y, FC6A-J8CU4,
FC6A-L06A4
Screw fastened type: FC6A-SIF52
Push-in type: FC6A-SIF524
3.8[11.8]*2
11.7

23.6

73.0

5.0 *190.0

4.0*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

2-180

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital input modules:
Digital output modules:

FC6A-N16B3
FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-T16P3
3.8

10.1

17.6

73.0

*1

90.0

4.0

5.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.

Digital input modules:
Digital output modules:

FC6A-N32B3
FC6A-T32K3, FC6A-T32P3
3.8

10.1

30.2

73.0

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.

5.0

*1

90.0

4.0

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

2-181

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Digital mixed I/O modules: Screw fastened type: FC6A-M24BR1
Push-in type: FC6A-M24BR4
PID modules:
Screw fastened type: FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2MR1
Push-in type: FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR4
3.8[11.5]*2
11.4

39.2

73.0

*1

90.0

4.0

5.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

Expansion Interface Module
Expander:Screw fastened type: FC6A-EXM2
Push-in type: FC6A-EXM24
3.8[13.4]*2
15.2

39.2

73.0

5.0

*1

90.0

4.0

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

2-182

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Remote Master:FC6A-EXM1M
3.8

23.6

73.0

*1

90.0

4.0

5.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.

Remote Slave:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-EXM1S
Push-in type: FC6A-EXM1S4[13.4]*2
15.2

47.2

73.0

5.0 *1

90.0

4.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 The above drawing is for the screw fastened type. Dimensions for the push-in type are given in [ ].

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-183

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
HMI Module
FC6A-PH1
148.7

74.5

3.9*2

66.5

119.5

7.3

73.0

*1

90.0

4.0

5.0

All dimensions in mm.

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.
*2 This dimension is 0 mm when the eject button is locked.

Cartridge Base Module
FC6A-HPH1
43.5

7.3

73.0

5.0

*1

90.0
93.0

4.0

*1 9.3 mm when the hook is pulled out.

2-184

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Cartridges
Digital I/O cartridges:
Analog I/O cartridges:
Communication cartridges:

FC6A-PN4, FC6A-PTK4, FC6A-PTS4
FC6A-PK2AV, FC6A-PK2AW, FC6A-PJ2A, FC6A-PJ2CP
FC6A-PC1, FC6A-PC3
34.8

44.6

17.8
12.5

All dimensions in mm.
FC6A-PC4
15.2

34.8

12.5

44.6

Communication cartridges:

All dimensions in mm.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-185

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Rating at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C/65°C
The input/output ratings at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C/65°C are as follows.
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28 mA, 4 PTs

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 6 A, 3 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28 mA, 4 PTs

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 6 A, 3 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 17 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 17 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 24 mA, 4 PTs

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 6 A, 3 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

7 transistor source outputs:
12 V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Limited energy

65°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 18 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor source outputs:
12 V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1A, 2 PTs
Limited energy

55°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

7 transistor sink outputs:
12 V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Limited energy

65°C

9 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 18 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor sink outputs:
12 V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1A, 2 PTs
Limited energy

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 45 mA, 7 PTs

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 10 A, 5 PTs

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 45 mA, 7 PTs

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 10 A, 5 PTs

FC6A-C16R1CE

FC6A-C16P1CE

FC6A-C16K1CE

FC6A-C16R1DE

FC6A-C16P1DE

FC6A-C16K1DE

FC6A-C24R1AE

FC6A-C24R1CE

2-186

Outputs

55°C
FC6A-C16R1AE

All-in-One CPU
moduleInputs
9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

Outputs

55°C

10 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 27 mA, 5 PTs

10 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 27 mA, 5 PTs

10 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 70 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 transistor source outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 42 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 transistor sink outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 42 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

FC6A-C24P1CE

FC6A-C24K1CE

FC6A-C40R1AE

FC6A-C40R1CE

All-in-One CPU
moduleInputs14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

FC6A-C40P1CE

FC6A-C40K1CE

FC6A-C40R1DE

FC6A-C40P1DE

FC6A-C40K1DE

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-187

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 70 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 transistor source outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 42 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT

16 transistor sink outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT

65°C

24 inputs: 12V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 6 mA/PT
Total Max. 42 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
12V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

8 relay outputs:
240V AC /30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common);D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 22 mA, 4 PTs

8 relay outputs:
240V AC /30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common);D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

8 relay outputs:
240V AC /30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common);D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 22 mA, 4 PTs

8 relay outputs:
240V AC /30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common);D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

FC6A-C40R1CEJ

FC6A-C40P1CEJ

FC6A-C40K1CEJ

FC6A-C40R1DEJ

FC6A-C40P1DEJ

FC6A-C40K1DEJ

FC6A-D16R1CEE

Plus CPU module

FC6A-D16R4CEE

2-188

Outputs

55°C
FC6A-C40R1AEJCAN J1939 Allin-One CPU
moduleInputs24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

Inputs

Outputs

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 26.4 mA

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 26.4 mA

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 26.4 mA

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 26.4 mA

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 60.0 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 60.0 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 60.0 mA

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 60.0 mA

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A

FC6A-D16P1CEE

FC6A-D16P4CEE

FC6A-D16K1CEE

FC6A-D16K4CEE

Plus CPU module

FC6A-D32P3CEE

FC6A-D32P4CEE

FC6A-D32K3CEE

FC6A-D32K4CEE

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-189

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type
FC6A-N08B1/
FC6A-N08B4

FC6A-N16B1/
FC6A-N16B4

Air Temp-

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28 mA, 4 PTs

-

55°C

16 inputs, 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total max. 123.2 mA

-

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total Max. 56 mA 8 PTs

-

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
5 mA/PT
Total Max. 72 mA

-

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
5 mA/PT
Total Max. 35 mA, 7 PTs

-

55°C

32 inputs: 24V DC,
5 mA/PT
Total Max. 144 mA

-

65°C

32 inputs: 24V DC,
5 mA/PT
Total Max. 70 mA, 14 PTs

-

55°C

8 inputs: 120V AC,
50/60 Hz, 15 mA/PT

-

65°C

8 inputs: 120V AC,
50/60 Hz, 15 mA/PT
Total Max. 60 mA, 4 PTs-

FC6A-N32B3

FC6A-R081/
FC6A-R084
Digital I/O
moduleFC6A-R161/
FC6A-R164

FC6A-T08P1/
FC6A-T08P4

FC6A-T16P1/
FC6A-T16P4

55°C

-

8 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common

65°C

-

8 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

55°C

-

16 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 8 A/Common

65°C

-

16 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 8 A/Common
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

-

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C-

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

-

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C-

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 4 A, 8 PTs

55°C

-

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 265°C-

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 0.8 A, 8 PTs

55°C

-

32 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2-32 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 1.6 A, 16 PTs

FC6A-T16P3

FC6A-T32P3
65°C

2-190

Outputs

55°C

FC6A-N16B3

FC6A-N08A11/
FC6A-N08A14

Inputs
8 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

FC6A-T08K1/
FC6A-T08K4

FC6A-T16K1/
FC6A-T16K4

Air Temp

Inputs

55°C

-

65°C

-

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

-

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C-

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 4 A, 8 PTs

55°C

-

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 265°C-

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 0.8 A, 8 PTs

55°C

-

32 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2-32 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 1.6 A, 16 PTs

FC6A-T16K3
Digital I/O
moduleFC6A-T32K3
65°C

55°C

4 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT

4 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common

65°C

4 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total Max. 14 mA, 2 PTs

4 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common
Total Max. 4 A, 2 PTs

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total Max. 123.2 mA

8 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
7 mA/PT
Total Max. 56 mA, 8 PTs

8 relay outputs:
240V AC/30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A/Common
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

FC6A-J2C1/
FC6A-J2C455°C

2 analog inputs

-

65°C

2 analog inputs-

FC6A-J4A1/
FC6A-J4A455°C

4 analog inputs

-

65°C

4 analog inputs-

FC6A-J8A1/
FC6A-J8A4

55°C

8 analog inputs

-

65°C

8 analog inputs

FC6A-L03CN1/
FC6A-L03CN4

55°C

2 analog inputs

1 analog output, Class 265°C

2 analog inputs

1 analog voltage output only, Class 2

FC6A-J4CN1/
FC6A-J4CN455°C

4 analog inputs

-

65°C

4 analog inputs

FC6A-K2A1/
FC6A-K2A4

55°C-

2 analog outputs, Class 2

65°C

-

2 analog outputs, Class 2

FC6A-J8CU1/
FC6A-J8CU4

55°C

8 analog inputs

-

65°C

8 analog inputs-

FC6A-J4CH1Y/
FC6A-J4CH4Y

55°C

4 analog inputs

-

65°C

4 analog inputs-

FC6A-M08BR1/
FC6A-M08BR4

FC6A-M24BR1/
FC6A-M24BR4

Analog I/O
moduleOutputs
8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2--

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-191

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type
FC6A-EXM1M
FC6A-EXM1S

Expansioninterface module

FC6A-EXM1S4
FC6A-EXM2
FC6A-EXM24

Communication
moduleFC6A-SIF52
FC6A-SIF524

Air Temp

Inputs

Outputs

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

65°C

-

-

55°C

-

-

-

-

65°C
55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28.8 mA

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28.8 mA

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28.8 mA

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28.8 mA

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 3.2 A, Limited energy

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 10 mA, 2 PTs

8 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT

8 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES), 7 A (Common)
D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 24 mA, 4 PTs

8 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES), 7 A (Common)
D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

55°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT

8 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES), 7 A (Common)
D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty

65°C

8 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others : 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 24 mA, 4 PTs

8 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES), 7 A (Common)
D300, 2 A 30V AC, 180 VA 120/240V AC, R300, 1 A
30V DC, 28 VA 125/250V DC pilot duty
Total Max. 8 A, 4 PTs

FC6B-D16K1C

FC6B-D16K4C

FC6B-D16P1C

FC6B series
FC6B-D16P4C

FC6B-D16R1C

FC6B-D16R4C

2-192

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

Outputs

55°C

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA, 3 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, 4 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 62.4 mA

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA, 3 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, 4 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 62.4 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA, 3 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, 4 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 62.4 mA

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 1.28 A, Limited energy

65°C

16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 21 mA, 3 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Total Max. 0.4 A, 4 PTs, Limited energy

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28 mA, 4 PTs

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 6 A, 3 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 28 mA, 4 PTs

7 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 6 A, 3 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 17 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs

55°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

7 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

9 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 17 mA, 3 PTs

7 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 1 A, 2 PTs

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 45 mA, 7 PTs

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 10 A, 5 PTs

FC6B-D32K3C

FC6B-D32K4C

FC6B-D32P3C

FC6B-D32P4C

FC6B series

Inputs16 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 62.4 mA

FC6B-C16R1A

FC6B-C16R1C

FC6B-C16P1C

FC6B-C16K1C

FC6B-C24R1A

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2-193

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 45 mA, 7 PTs

10 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 10 A, 5 PTs

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 27 mA, 5 PTs

10 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

10 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 27 mA, 5 PTs

10 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 2 A, 4 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)

65°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 80 mA, 12 PTs

16 relay outputs:
240V AC / 30V DC, 2 A (GEN/RES) 7 A (Common)
Total Max. 16 A, 8 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

55°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 265°C

24 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT
Total Max. 48 mA, 8 PTs

16 transistor sink outputs:
24V DC, 0.5 A/PT
Class 2
Total Max. 3 A, 6 PTs

FC6B-C24P1C

FC6B-C24K1C

FC6B-C40R1A

FC6B-C40R1C

FC6B-C40P1C

FC6B-C40K1C

2-194

Outputs

55°C
FC6B-C24R1C

FC6B series

Inputs14 inputs: 24V DC,
Input 0, 1, 6, 7: 5 mA/PT
Others: 7 mA/PT

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S
The following products can be used at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C only.
The input/output ratings of the following products at Max Surrounding Air Temperature of 55°C are as follows.
Model Names

Type

Air Temp

Inputs

FC6A-K4A1/
FC6A-K4A4

55°C-

4 analog outputs, Class 2

FC6A-L06A1/
FC6A-L06A4

55°C

-

2 analog outputs, Class 2

FC6A-F2M1/
FC6A-F2M4

55°C

2 analog inputs

2 analog outputs or digital output, Class 2

FC6A-F2MR1/
FC6A-F2MR4

55°C

2 analog inputs

2 relay outputs:
250V AC/30V DC, 5 A (RES), 3 A (GEN)HMI module

FC6A-PH1

55°C

-

-

Cartridge basemoduleFC6A-HPH1

55°C

-

-

Analog I/O
moduleAnalog I/O
cartridge

Communication
cartridge

Digital I/O
cartridge

Outputs

FC6A-PJ2A

55°C

2 analog inputs

FC6A-PJ2CP

55°C

2 analog inputs-

FC6A-PK2AV

55°C

-

2 analog outputs

FC6A-PK2AW

55°C

-

2 analog outputs

FC6A-PC1

55°C

-

-

FC6A-PC3

55°C

-

-

FC6A-PC4

55°C

-

-

FC6A-PTK4

55°C-

4 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
12V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Limited energy

FC6A-PTS4

55°C-

4 transistor source outputs:
24V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
12V DC, 0.1 A/PT resistive
Limited energy

FC6A-PN4

55°C-

4 inputs:
24V DC, 5 mA/PT
12V DC, 2.5 mA/PT

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

-

2-195

2: P R ODUCT S P ECI FI CATI ON S

2-196

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the methods and precautions for installing and wiring FC6A modules.
Before starting installation and wiring, be sure to read "Safety Precautions" in the beginning of this manual and understandprecautions described under Warning and Caution.
This section describes the precautions when installing and wiring the FC6A.

Warning Turn off the power to the FC6A before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the FC6A.

Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard.
 Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the FC6A. If such a circuit is configured inside theFC6A, failure of the FC6A may cause disorder of the control system, damage, or accidents.
 Special expertise is required to install, wire, program, and operate the FC6A. People without such expertise must not use

the FC6A.

Caution Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the FC6A housing. Put a cover on the FC6A modules

during installation and wiring. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, or malfunction.
 Do not touch the connector pins with your hand. Electrostatic discharge may damage the internal elements.
 When handling the FC6A, take measures to discharge static electricity.
 Keep the FC6A wiring away from motor lines.
 Wire the connectors and terminal blocks so that no force is applied to them.

Installation Location
The FC6A is designed to be installed in control panels and similar locations.
Install the FC6A within product specifications.
Avoid use in the environments below, as doing so may cause electric shock, fire, or malfunction:
Places where there is a lot of dust, salt, iron powder, or soot.
Places exposed to direct sunlight.
Places where the FC6A may be exposed to vibration or shock, either directly or indirectly.
Atmospheres of corrosive or flammable gases.
Places where condensation may form.
Places where the FC6A may be directly exposed to water.
Around high-voltage lines, high-voltage equipment, motor lines, or motor equipment.
Places near where a large switching surge may occur.
Places subject to a strong magnetic or electrical field.
Mount the FC6A as follows. To provide ample ventilation, ensure that there is sufficient space between the FC6A and otherdevices, heat sources, and panel surfaces.
Normal Installation State

FC6A

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-1

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
The FC6A can be mounted with the following orientation when the operating temperature is 35°C or lower.
Side Orientation (Use this orientation with an operating temperature of 35°C or lower.)

The FC6A cannot be mounted with the following orientations.

3-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GMounting SpaceTo allow for heat dissipation and facilitate replacement, ensure that there are at least 20 to 40 mm between the FC6A andsurrounding equipment and ducts.

40 mm minimum

DIN Rail

40 mm
20 mm minimum minimum

20 mm minimum

Mounting Two or More Units

40 mm minimum

20 mm minimum

DIN Rail

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-3

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GAssembly Methods
This section describes how to assemble the FC6A.

CautionAssemble the FC6A before mounting it to a DIN rail or directly mounting it. When mounting the FC6A to a DIN rail, if it isassembled after being mounted to the DIN rail, there is a risk of damage.

Assembling the CPU Module and Expansion and Expansion Interface Modules
The following procedure describes the assembly of the CPU module and an expansion module.
1. Peel off the protection sticker applied to the expansion connector on the CPU module.

Expansion Connector Protection Sticker

2. Line up the expansion module alongside the CPU module.
Note: The CPU module and the expansion module are easier to line up if you use the position of the expansion connector as a guide.

3. Confirm that the expansion module eject button is depressed and push the expansion module until it clicks while taking carewith the position of the expansion connector. If the eject button is not depressed, push in the eject button until it clicks after
the expansion module has been pushed onto the CPU module.
The expansion module is now locked on the CPU module.

Expansion Connector

Eject Button

Caution

Do not perform this work when the FC6A is powered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.

Note: The assembly of an expansion module and the expansion interface module is the same, first peel off the expansion connector protection
sticker on the expansion module and then mount it.

3-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GAssembling the CPU Module and the HMI Module
The following procedure describes the assembly of the CPU module and the HMI module.
1. Peel off the protection sticker applied to the communication connector on the CPU module.

Communication Connector Protection Sticker

2. Line up the HMI module alongside the CPU module.
Note: The CPU module and the HMI module are easier to line up if you use the position of the communication connector as a guide.

3. Confirm that the HMI module eject button is depressed and push the HMI module until it clicks while taking care with theposition of the communication connector. If the eject button is not depressed, push in the eject button until it clicks after the
HMI module has been pushed onto the CPU module.
The HMI module is now locked on the CPU module.

Communication Connector

Eject Button

Caution

Do not perform this work when the FC6A is powered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-5

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GAssembling the CPU Module and a Cartridge
The following procedure describes the assembly of the CPU module (cartridge slot 1) and an analog I/O cartridge.
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into each of the screwdriver slots (two locations) on the CPU module (cartridge slot 1) andremove the dummy cartridge straight off the CPU module by pushing down the dummy cartridge tabs.

Screwdriver Slot

Dummy Cartridge

2. Take care with the vertical orientation of the analog I/O cartridge and firmly push the analog I/O cartridge connector onto

cartridge slot 1 on the CPU module.

Cartridge Slot 1

CautionAnalog I/O Cartridge

 Do not perform this work when the FC6A is powered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.
 Attach and remove the cartridge straight in relation to the CPU module. If you attach or remove the cartridge at an angle,

there is a risk of damage or communication failure.
Note: Cartridges cannot be attached to the Plus CPU module.

3-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GAssembling the HMI Module and a Cartridge
The following procedure describes the assembly of the HMI module (cartridge slot 3) and an analog I/O cartridge.
1. Unlock and open the front cover of the HMI module.

For details, see "Opening the Front Cover" on page 3-9.

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into each of the screwdriver slots (two locations) on the HMI module and remove the dummy

cartridge straight off the HMI module by pushing in the dummy cartridge tabs.

Dummy Cartridge

Screwdriver Slot

3. Take care with the vertical orientation of the cartridge and firmly push the cartridge connector onto cartridge slot 3 on the HMI

module.

Cartridge Slot 3

Caution

Cartridge

 Do not perform this work when the FC6A is powered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.
 Attach and remove the cartridge straight in relation to the HMI module. If you attach or remove the cartridge at an angle,

there is a risk of damage or communication failure.
Note: A communication cartridge cannot be attached to cartridge slot 3 of an HMI module added to the All-in-One CPU module.

4. Close and lock the front cover of the HMI module.

For details, see "Closing the Front Cover" on page 3-9.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-7

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GAssembling the Cartridge Base Module and a Cartridge
The following procedure describes the assembly of the cartridge base module (cartridge slot 1) and an analog I/O cartridge.
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into each of the screwdriver slots (two locations) on the cartridge base module (cartridge slot 1)

and remove the dummy cartridge straight off the cartridge base module by pushing down the dummy cartridge tabs.

Dummy Cartridge
Dummy Cartridge

Screwdriver Slot
2. Take care with the vertical orientation of the analog I/O cartridge and firmly push the analog I/O cartridge connector onto

cartridge slot 1 on the cartridge base module.

Cartridge Slot 1

Analog I/O Cartridge

Caution Do not perform this work when the FC6A is powered. Otherwise there is a risk of damage.
 Attach and remove the cartridge straight in relation to the cartridge base module. If you attach or remove the cartridge at

an angle, there is a risk of damage or communication failure.
Note: The cartridge base module cannot be attached to the All-in-One CPU module.

3-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GOpening and Closing the Front Cover of the HMI Module
The following procedure describes how to open and close the front cover of the HMI module.

Opening the Front Cover

Caution

Always unlock the front cover before opening it with the following procedure. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the
HMI module.

1. Push the access symbol until it clicks to unlock the front cover.
2. The front cover will open.
Front Cover

Front Cover
Access Symbol

Closing the Front Cover

Caution

Always lock the front cover with the following procedure.

1. Close the front cover.
2. Push the access symbol until it clicks to lock the front cover.
Front Cover

Front Cover
Access Symbol

CautionApplying too much force to the front cover may cause it to fall off.
If this happens, make the front cover vertical with the HMI module as shown in the following figure, and then slowly pushon the part indicated by the arrow.

Front Cover

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-9

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GMounting on DIN Rail
Caution Install the FC6A modules according to instructions described in this manual. Improper installation will result in falling,

failure, or malfunction of the FC6A.
 Do not install the FC6A when it is powered up. Doing so may result in electric shock and may damage the product.

This section describes how to mount the FC6A.
The FC6A can be mounted on a DIN rail or directly to a panel inside a cabinet.

DIN Rail Mounting and Removal
The following procedure describes how to mount and remove the FC6A to and from a DIN rail.
1. Firmly fasten the DIN rail to a panel using screws.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, lower the DIN rail hook (1) and hang the FC6A on the DIN rail (2).

(2) Hook FC6A Series MICROSmart over DIN Rail.

DIN Rail(1) Lower DIN Rail Hook.
3. Align the FC6A with the DIN rail (1) and raise the DIN rail hook (2).

DIN Rail(1) Align with DIN Rail.

(2) Raise DIN Rail Hook.

4. Secure both ends of the FC6A using the DIN rail brackets.

DIN Rail Bracket (BNL6)DIN Rail

Notes:
 The FC6A supports 35 mm wide DIN rails.
Supported rails: IDEC BAA1000 (Length: 1,000 mm)
Rail bracket: BNL6PN10
 The FC6A can also be mounted by hooking it onto the DIN rail when the DIN rail hook is raised and pushing it on until it clicks.

3-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Removing from DIN Rail
1. Lower the FC6A's DIN rail hook with a flathead screwdriver (1) and lift it up while pulling forward (2).

DIN Rail(2) Pull outward and upward.
(1) Lower DIN Rail Hook.

Direct Mounting on Panel Surface
This section describes how to mount the FC6A directly onto a mounting plate for installation in a control panel. The direct
mounting method differs according to the FC6A. To mount the FC6A directly, it may be necessary to make holes in the mounting
plate depending on the FC6A model.

Direct Mounting Methods■ 16- and 24-I/O types
Mount using the screw holes on the back of the module.

Screw HoleDIN Rail Hook

■ 40-I/O type and the HMI module
Pull out the DIN rail hook on the back of the module, attach the direct mounting hook (maintenance part: FC6A-PSP1PN05), andthen mount the module to the mounting plate using the screw holes.
Direct Mounting Hook
(FC6A-PSP1PN05)

Screw HoleDIN Rail Hook

Screw Hole■ Expansion and expansion interface modules
Pull out the DIN rail hook on the back of the module, attach the direct mounting hook (maintenance part: FC6A-PSP2PN05), andthen mount the module to the mounting plate using the screw holes.
Direct Mounting Hook
(FC6A-PSP2PN05)

Screw HoleDIN Rail Hook
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-11

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GMounting Hole Layout for Direct Mounting on Panel Surface

As shown in the following diagram, mount the FC6A to the mounting plate with M4 pan head screws.
Always give sufficient consideration to operability, ease-of-maintenance, and environmental resistance when deciding on themounting position.

CautionWhen directly mounting the FC6A, tighten mounting screws with torque of 1 N·m (kgf·cm).

■ CPU Modules
 16-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE,
FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-D16P1DE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE,
FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-D16P4DE
95.0
83.0±0.2

50.0±0.2

90.0
83.0±0.2

2-Ø
4.3

All dimensions in mm.

.5

Ø4

 24-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE
Push-in type:
FC6A-C24R4AE, FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE
110.0
98.0±0.2

50.0

±0.2

90.0
83.0±0.2

2-Ø
4.3

.5

Ø4

3-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
 40-I/O type:

Screw fastened type: FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE,
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE,
FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ,
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
Push-in type:
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE,
FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE,
FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ,
FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
163.0
151.0±0.2

90.0
83.0±0.2

100.0±0.2

2-Ø
4.3

4.5
2-Ø

All dimensions in mm.

 Plus CPU module: FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE,

FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

90.0

100.0 ±0.2

70.0

4.5
2-Ø

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

3-13

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Expansion Modules, Expansion Interface Modules, HMI Module, and Cartridge Base Module
Screw fastened type:Push-in type:
Screw fastened type:

Digital output modules:

Push-in type:
Digital mixed I/O modules:
Analog I/O modules:

Screw fastened type:Push-in type:
Screw fastened type:Push-in type:Communication modules:

Screw fastened type:Push-in type:
Expansion interface remote master module:

4.5

2-Ø

90.0

23.6
8.8±0.2

FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N08A11
FC6A-N08B4, FC6A-N16B4, FC6A-N08A14
FC6A-R081, FC6A-R161, FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T16K1,
FC6A-T08P1, FC6A-T16P1
FC6A-R084, FC6A-R164, FC6A-T08K4, FC6A-T16K4,
FC6A-T08P4, FC6A-T16P4
FC6A-M08BR1
FC6A-M08BR4
FC6A-J2C1, FC6A-J4A1, FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-K2A1,
FC6A-K4A1, FC6A-J4CN1, FC6A-J4CH1Y, FC6A-J8CU1,
FC6A-K2A1, FC6A-K4A1, FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-J2C4, FC6A-J4A4, FC6A-J8A4, FC6A-K2A4,
FC6A-K4A4, FC6A-J4CN4, FC6A-J4CH4Y, FC6A-J8CU4,
FC6A-K2A4, FC6A-K4A4, FC6A-L03CN4, FC6A-L06A4
FC6A-SIF52
FC6A-SIF524
FC6A-EXM1M

100.0±0.2

Digital input modules:

All dimensions in mm.
Digital input modules:
Digital output modules:

FC6A-N16B3
FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-T16P3

100.0±0.2

90.0

17.6
4.5
-Ø
8.8±0.2 2

All dimensions in mm.

3-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GDigital input modules:
Digital output modules:

FC6A-N32B3
FC6A-T32K3, FC6A-T32P3
30.2

4.5
2-Ø

90.0
100.0±0.2

20.1±0.2

All dimensions in mm.
Digital mixed I/O modules:

Screw fastened type:Push-in type:
PID modules:
Screw fastened type:Push-in type:
Expansion interface module (expander): Screw fastened type:Push-in type:100.0±0.2

4.5
2-Ø

90.0

39.2
19.7±0.2

FC6A-M24BR1
FC6A-M24BR4
FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2MR1
FC6A-F2M4, FC6A-F2MR4
FC6A-EXM2
FC6A-EXM24

All dimensions in mm.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-15

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Expansion interface remote slave module: FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4

90.0

100.0±0.2

47.2
19.55±0.2

4.52-ØHMI module:

All dimensions in mm.

FC6A-PH1
74.5

90.0

100.0±0.2

39.3±0.2

4.5

All dimensions in mm.

2-ØCartridge base module:

FC6A-HPH1

100.0

90.0

93.0

±0.2

43.5
27.0±0.2

4.5
2-Ø

3-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

All dimensions in mm.

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Example:
Mounting hole layout for FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-N32B3, FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-F2MR1, and C6A-L06A1
151.0

26.1±0.2 18.9±0.275.5

28.5±0.2

28.3±0.2

4.5
8-Ø

2-Ø

83.0

100.0

4.3

4.5
2-Ø

All dimensions in mm.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-17

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Input/Output Wiring
This section describes FC6A input/output device wiring.

Precautions for I/O Device Wiring
Input Terminal Wiring

When wiring input devices, separate wiring from power, output, and motor lines.
For the wires to use with the CPU modules, expansion modules, and cartridges, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.
DC Sink Input Wiring Example

DC Source Input Wiring Example
DC.IN

DC.IN

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Sensor

1
2

2

3

3

4

4

-

12/24V DC*1

NPN

+

5

-

COM COM COM

COM COM COM

7

6

5

PNP

7

12/24V DC

+

6

*1

0

- 2-wire +1

Sensor0+ 2-wire -

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FC6A-N08B1

FC6A-N08B1*1 24V DC for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 2-1.

Output Terminal Wiring

Caution If output relays or transistors in the FC6A or output modules should fail, outputs may remain on or off. For output signals

which may cause heavy accidents, provide a monitor circuit outside the FC6A.
 Connect a fuse to the output module, selecting a fuse appropriate for the load.
 When equipment containing the FC6A is intended for use in European countries, insert an IEC 60127-approved fuse toeach output of every module for protection against overload or short-circuit. This is required when equipment containing
the FC6A is destined for Europe.
 When driving an inductive load that emits noise like a magnet or a valve, to reduce noise and protect circuits, use a diodefor the output on DC power type models and a surge absorber for the output on AC power type models.
 For the wires to use with the CPU modules, expansion modules, and cartridges, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page

3-46.

3-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Output Protection Circuit

When a motor, solenoid, or similar inductive load is connected, the life of the contact is shortened due to the inrush current andcounter-electromotive force acting on the load. In order to prevent this, set up an output protection circuit outside the FC6A.
Choose a protection circuit from (1) through (4) shown below, according to the power supply, and connect the protection circuit tothe outside of the FC6A.
For protection of the transistor output of the FC6A modules, connect protection circuit (3) shown below to the transistor output
circuit.

Protection Circuit (1)Inductive Load

Output Q
C

This protection circuit can be used when the load impedance is smaller
than the RC impedance in an AC load power circuit.
R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance value as the load
C: 0.1 to 1 µF

RCOM

Protection Circuit (2)Surge Killer
Output Q

Inductive Load

R
COM

or

–

C

This protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power
circuits.
R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance value as the load
C: 0.1 to 1 µF+

Protection Circuit (3)This protection circuit can be used for DC load power circuits.
Output Q

Inductive Load

Diode

Use a diode with the following ratings.
Reverse withstand voltage:

Power voltage of the load circuit  10

Forward current:More than the load current

– +

COM

Protection Circuit (4)Output Q

Inductive Load

This protection circuit can be used for both AC and DC load power
circuits.

Varistor
COM

– +
or

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-19

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GPower Supply and Power Supply Wiring
Power Supply
This section describes how to connect a power supply to the FC6A.

Caution Use a power supply of the rated value. Use of the wrong power supply may cause fire or malfunction.
 Ensure that the power voltage to the FC6A does not exceed the allowable power voltage range described in the power

supply specifications. The FC6A may run and stop repeatedly within this voltage range, particularly if the power voltage
turns on or off very slowly.
 Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the power line outside the FC6A. This is required when equipment containing the

FC6A is destined for Europe.

CPU Module

There are three power supply specifications for the All-in-One CPU module: the AC power type, the 24V DC power type, and the
12V DC power supply type.
All-in-One CPU Module
AC Power Type

24V DC Power TypeAC Power Input

24V DC Power Input

12V DC Power Input+24 V -

+12 V -

L

N

PE

+

12V DC Power Type

FE

-

+

External Power Supply
24V DCFE-

External Power Supply
12V DCThe power supply specification of the Plus CPU module is the 24V DC power type only.
24V DC Power Type

Plus CPU Module

24V DC Power Input
+24V

-

+

-

FE

External Power Supply
24V DC■ Power Supply Voltage
 The power supply voltages that can be used with the All-in-One CPU module are as follows.
AC power type: 85 to 264V AC
24V DC power type: 20.4 to 28.8V DC
12V DC power type: 10.2 to 18.0V DC
The power supply voltage that can be used with the Plus CPU module is as follows.
24V DC power type: 20.4 to 28.8V DC

WarningDo not use the FC6A outside of the power supply voltages listed above.
When an external device that carries the risk of causing a serious accident is connected to the inputs and outputs of theFC6A, implement measures in the external circuit (such as voltage monitoring) so that the device will function safely when
there is a failure.

The power failure detection voltage varies depending on the usage conditions of the inputs and outputs, but a power failure isnormally detected when the power supply voltage is the following values.
AC power type: Less than 85V AC
24V DC power type: Less than 20.4V DC
12V DC power type: Less than 10.2V DC

For all power supply types, a momentary power interruption of 10 ms or less is not recognized as a power failure when the
power voltage is at the rated voltage.

3-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Inrush Current at Powerup
The following inrush current flows through the FC6A when powered up. Use a power supply with sufficient capacity.
AC power type: 40 A or lower
24V DC power type: 35 A or lower
12V DC power type: 35 A or lower

Expansion interface module

The power supply specification of the expansion interface module (expander) and expansion interface remote slave module is the
24V DC power type.
Expansion Interface Module (Expander)+
24V DCPower Input
FE+
External
Power Supply 24V DC■ Power Supply Voltage
 The power supply voltage that can be used with the expansion interface module (expander) and expansion interface remoteslave module is 20.4 to 28.8V DC.

Warning

Do not use the FC6A outside of the power supply voltages listed above.
When using the expansion interface module and an external device that carries the risk of causing a serious accident has
been connected, implement measures in the external circuit (such as voltage monitoring) so that the device will function
safely when there is a failure.

The power failure detection voltage varies depending on the usage conditions of the inputs and outputs, but a power failure isnormally detected when the power supply voltage is less than 20.4V DC.
 A momentary power interruption of 10 ms or less is not recognized as a power failure when the power voltage is at the rated voltage.
■ Inrush Current at Powerup
An inrush current of 35 A or lower flows through the expansion interface module (expander) and expansion interface remote slave
module when powered on. Use a power supply with sufficient capacity.

CautionWhen using the CPU module, expansion interface module (expander), and expansion interface remote slave module withseparate power supplies, turn the power on and off in the following order.
Power-up: Expansion interface module (expander) -> Expansion interface remote slave module (Downstream -> Upstream)-> CPU module
Power-down: CPU module -> Expansion interface remote slave module (Upstream -> Downstream) -> Expansion interface
module (expander)
If the power supply is not shut off with the above sequence, the I/O for all expansion modules will not be updated.

About the sequence to turn on and off the I/O power supply

When automatically running and stopping the FC6A in conjunction with turning the power supply to the FC6A on and off, use thefollowing sequence to turn on and off the I/O power supply and CPU module main power supply. If the sequence is wrong, inputs
and outputs may be mistakenly activated.
Power on: I/O power supply → CPU module main power
Power off: CPU module main power → I/O power supplyON

I/O power supply

OFFON

CPU module main power

OFF

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-21

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GPower Supply WiringMake the power line as short as possible. For details, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.
Run the power line as far away as possible from motor lines.

Note:

Review the following items when there is a risk of malfunction due to electric shock and noise.
 Ground the PE and FE terminals with D-type ground (type 3: ground resistance of 100 Ω or lower).
 Do not use a shared ground wire for the FC6A and motor equipment.
 For ground wire details, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.

Power Supply Terminal Wiring Method

When wiring the power supply to the CPU module, the power supply terminals are removed from the CPU module, wired, and thenonce again attached to the CPU module.
The following procedure describes how to remove and attach the power supply terminals.
■ Removing the Power Supply Terminals
1. Slowly rotate the power supply terminals cover in the direction of the arrow.

Power Supply Terminals

CPU Module

Power Supply Terminals Cover
2. Rotate the power supply terminals cover until it touches the CPU module to unlock it, and then remove the power supply

terminals.

Power Supply Terminals

Rotate the power supply
terminals cover until it
touches the CPU module

Notes:
 Rotate the power supply terminals cover in the direction of the arrow printed on the side.
 The power supply terminals move together with the power supply terminals cover when it is rotated.
 The following push-in types of CPU modules do not have the power supply terminals cover.
 All-in-One CPU module:

FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE, FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE, FC6A-C24R4AE,
FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE, FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40R4DE,
FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE
 CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module:
FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
 Plus CPU module:
FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

3-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Attaching the Power Supply Terminals
1. With the power supply terminals cover touching the CPU module, slowly push the power supply terminals with the attached

power line straight into their original position.

Power supply terminals cover
touching the CPU module

Power Supply Terminals

CautionPush the power supply terminals straight in relation to the CPU module. If you push them in at an angle, there is a risk ofdamage or poor contact.

2. When the power supply terminals cover is rotated 45° or more from the CPU module, slowly rotate it in the direction of thearrow until it stops.
The power supply terminals cover and the power supply terminal block are locked.

45° or more

Rotate until it stops

Notes:
 Rotate the power supply terminals cover in the direction of the arrow printed on the side.
 The power supply terminals move together with the power supply terminals cover when it is rotated.
 The following push-in types of CPU modules do not have the power supply terminals cover.
 All-in-One CPU module:

FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, FC6A-C16P4CE, FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE, FC6A-C24R4AE,
FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE, FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40R4DE,
FC6A-C40K4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE
 CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module:
FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
 Plus CPU module:
FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

CautionPush the power supply terminals straight in relation to the CPU module. If you push them in at an angle, there is a risk ofdamage or poor contact.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-23

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Using the Ports
This section describes how to use the analog input and analog potentiometer, serial port 1, Ethernet port 1, and the USB port.

Removing and Attaching the Analog Port Cover
The following procedure describes how to remove and attach the analog port cover.

Removing the Analog Port Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the screwdriver slot on the analog port cover and slowly move the screwdriver in the

direction of the arrow to unlock the bottom lock.

Analog Port CoverScrewdriver Slot

2. Lift up the analog port cover in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

Attaching the Analog Port CoverAttach the analog port cover after wiring the port.
1. Insert the tabs at the top of the analog port cover into the analog port cover slots, then push the bottom of the analog port

cover in the direction of the arrow to attach it.

Insert the tabs at the topof the analog port cover

Screwdriver Slot Groove

Note: Take care with the orientation of the analog port cover. The groove to insert the screwdriver goes on the bottom.

3-24

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Removing and Attaching the Serial Port 1 Cover
The following procedure describes how to remove and attach the serial port 1 cover.

Removing the Serial Port 1 Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the screwdriver slot on the serial port 1 cover and slowly move the screwdriver in the

direction of the arrow to unlock the bottom lock.

Serial Port 1 CoverScrewdriver Slot
2. Lift the serial port 1 cover straight up in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

Attaching the Serial Port 1 CoverWhen not using serial port 1, attach the serial port 1 cover.
1. Insert the serial port 1 cover tabs into the grooves on the left and right sides of serial port 1 and push the cover straight in to

attach it.

TabScrewdriver Slot Groove

Serial Port 1 Groove
Note: Take care with the orientation of the serial port 1 cover. The groove to insert the screwdriver goes on the bottom.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-25

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Removing and Attaching the Ethernet Port 1 Cover
The following procedure describes how to remove and attach the Ethernet port 1 cover. The procedure is the same for Ethernet
port 1 cover and Ethernet port 2 cover on the Plus CPU module.

Removing the Ethernet Port 1 Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the screwdriver slot on the Ethernet port 1 cover and slowly move the screwdriver in the

direction of the arrow to unlock the top lock.

Screwdriver Slot

Ethernet Port 1 Cover
2. Lift the Ethernet port 1 cover straight up in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

Attaching the Ethernet Port 1 CoverWhen not using Ethernet port 1, attach the Ethernet port 1 cover.
1. Insert the Ethernet port 1 cover tabs into the grooves on the left and right sides of Ethernet port 1 and push the cover straightin to attach it.

TabScrewdriver Slot Groove

Ethernet Port 1 Groove
Note: Take care with the orientation of the Ethernet port 1 cover. The groove to insert the screwdriver goes on the bottom.

3-26

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GOpening and Closing the USB Port Cover
The following procedure describes how to open and close the USB port cover.

Opening the USB Port Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the screwdriver slot on the USB port cover and slowly move the screwdriver in the directionof the arrow to unlock the top lock.

Screwdriver Slot

USB Port Cover

2. Open the USB port cover in the direction of the arrow.

Note: To remove the USB cover, first open the cover in step 2, and then apply force in that same direction to remove the cover.

To communicate with a computer, use the USB cable (model: HG9Z-XCM42).
If you use the USB extension cable (model: HG9Z-XCE21), you can perform maintenance on an FC6A installed in a control panel
from the face of the control panel. We recommend securing the USB extension cable to the USB port cover with a cable tie(HellermannTyton cable tie: T18R) so that the USB extension cable is not disconnected from the FC6A.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-27

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module(1) Open the USB port cover and plug the USB cable into the USB port.
(2) Lock the USB port cover and USB cable with a cable tie.
USB Cable

USB Cable
Hole
USB Port Cover

Cable Tie

Plus CPU module(1) Open the SD memory card cover and remove the USB port cover.
Carefully store the removed USB port cover in a safe location.
(2) Insert the USB cable retention pin into the top hole, and then insert it into the bottom hole.
(3) Plug the USB cable into the USB port, and then lock the USB cable to the USB cable retention pin with a cable tie.
USB Port Cover

USB Cable Retention Pin
USB Cable

Hole

USB Cable Retention Pin
Type No.: HG9Z-XU1PN05

3-28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Cable Tie

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G

CautionApplying too much force to the USB port cover may cause it to fall off.
If this happens, make the USB port cover parallel with the CPU module as shown in the following figure, and then slowly
push on the part indicated by the arrow.

Closing the USB Port Cover
1. Close the USB port cover and push it until it clicks.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-29

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Using an SD Memory Card
This section describes how to use an SD memory card.

Opening and Closing the SD Memory Card Cover
The following procedure describes how to open and close the SD memory card cover.

Opening the SD Memory Card Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the screwdriver slot on the SD memory card cover and slowly move the screwdriver in the

direction of the arrow to unlock the bottom lock.

SD Memory Card CoverScrewdriver Slot

2. Open the SD memory card cover in the direction of the arrow.

Caution

3-30

Applying too much force to the SD memory card cover may cause it to fall off.
If this happens, make the SD memory card cover parallel with the CPU module as shown in the following figure, and thenslowly push on the part indicated by the arrow.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Closing the SD Memory Card Cover
1. Close the SD memory card cover and push it until it clicks.

Inserting and Removing the SD Memory Card
The following procedure describes how to insert and remove the SD memory card.

Inserting the SD Memory Card
1. Unlock and open the SD memory card cover.

For details, see "Opening the SD Memory Card Cover" on page 3-30.

2. With the missing corner of the SD memory card facing the function switch side, push the SD memory card straight in until itclicks.

All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

Plus CPU module

Notes:
 Use caution as the direction to insert the SD memory card depends on the model.
 Turn off the write protect switch on the SD memory card that will be inserted into the FC6A.

3. Close the SD memory card cover and push it until it clicks.

For details, see "Closing the SD Memory Card Cover" on page 3-31.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-31

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Removing the SD Memory Card
1. Unlock and open the SD memory card cover.

For details, see "Opening the SD Memory Card Cover" on page 3-30.

2. Push the SD memory card inserted into the FC6A until it clicks to unlock it.

3. Slowly pull out the SD memory card.
All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

Plus CPU module

4. Close the SD memory card cover and push it until it clicks.

For details, see "Closing the SD Memory Card Cover" on page 3-31.

3-32

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G

CautionThe data on the SD memory card may be corrupted by doing the following during access to the SD memory card.
 Turning the FC6A power OFF.
 Removing the SD memory card.
Do not turn OFF the FC6A power during access to the SD memory card (while the SD card status LED "SD" is flashing). First
confirm that the SD card status LED "SD" is not flashing, then remove the SD memory card from FC6A. For details on the SD
card status LED "SD", see "SD Memory Card" on page 11-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-33

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Replacing the Backup Battery
This section explains how to replace the backup battery.

Warning

Performing the work to attach and replace the backup battery in the unpowered state is recommended to avoid electric
shock by touching the product and wired parts with the body or tools and to avoid damage to the product and malfunction.
The backup battery can also be attached and replaced while powered and while power is supplied from the USB bus.
However, first discharge any static electricity built up in the body by touching grounded metal before performing the work.
Use caution so that electric shock from touching the product and wired parts with the body or tools, damage to the product,
and malfunction do not occur.

Replacing the Backup Battery While Unpowered (Recommended)

To replace the backup battery, first turn off the power, and then perform the following steps 1 to 4 within 1 minute.
(The position of the battery holder is located on the right side of the top of the All-in-One CPU module and CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module, and it is located on the left side of the top of the Plus CPU module.)
1. Grip both ends of the battery holder, and then pull it out.

The battery holder pulls out to a length of 36 mm.

All-in-One CPU Module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU Module

Plus CPU Module
Battery Holder

2. Remove the dead backup battery from the battery holder.

Orient the battery holder with the
below (2).

side facing up. While pulling on the outside hook (1), press the backup battery fromSide of the Battery Holder
Backup Battery

(1)

(1)
(2)

3-34

(2)

Outside Hook

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
3. Insert a new backup battery into the battery holder.

Orient the battery holder with theside facing up. Orient the new backup battery with theside facing up. Press the
backup battery into the inside hook of the battery holder (1), and then press down on the battery until you hear a click fromthe outside hook (2).
Side of the Battery Holder(1)(1) (2)(2)
Outside Hook
Inside Hook

Backup Battery

Note: Exercise caution regarding the orientation of the backup battery when you insert it.

4. Insert the battery holder into its original position, and then press it firmly as far as it will go.

Side of the Battery Holder
Side of the Battery Holder

Note: Exercise caution regarding the orientation of the battery holder when you insert it.

5. After installing the battery, promptly turn on the power and confirm that the battery status LED [BAT] turns off (within one

hour as a general rule).

Caution To replace the backup battery while unpowered, complete the work within 1 minute after the power is turned off. If it

takes a long time to replace the battery, the device values will be reset to the initial values.
 After the battery is installed, relatively large amount of current may flow in the battery until the CPU module is powered.

For this reason, immediately turn on the power or the USB bus power after installing the battery (within about an hour).

Replacing the Backup Battery While Power Is Supplied from the USB Bus

The backup battery can be replaced by supplying power from the USB bus. Use the following procedure to replace the backup
battery by supplying power from the USB bus.
1. Turn on the power to supply to the product.
2. Connect a USB cable. (Start supplying USB bus power.)
Note: To supply power from the USB bus, use a computer or a power bank compatible with USB 2.0.

3. Turn off the power supplied to the product.
4. Replace the backup battery by following steps 1 to 4 in the replacement procedure in "Replacing the Backup Battery While

Unpowered (Recommended)" on page 3-34. There is no time limit.

5. Disconnect the USB cable.
6. Turn on the power to supply to the product, and confirm that the battery status LED [BAT] turns off.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-35

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Replacing the Backup Battery While Powered

The backup battery can be replaced while the product is powered without turning off the power.
Perform steps 1 to 4 in "Replacing the Backup Battery While Unpowered (Recommended)" on page 3-34 while the product is
powered. There is no time limit on the replacement work.

Warning When the backup battery is attached and replaced while powered or while power is supplied from the USB bus, firstdischarge any static electricity built up in the body by touching grounded metal before performing the work. Use caution
so that electric shock from touching the product and wired parts with the body or tools, damage to the product, andmalfunction do not occur.
 Performing the work in the unpowered state is recommended to avoid electric shock by touching the product and wired

parts with the body or tools and to avoid damage to the product and malfunction.

Caution If the battery dies, device values are reset to their initial values when the power is turned off. Replace the backup battery

before it dies.
Recommended Backup Batteries
Panasonic: BR2032, CR2032A, CR2032B
Murata: CR2032X, CR2032W

This symbol mark means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of life, should be disposed of separately from yourhousehold waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above,this chemical symbol means that thebattery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows:
Hg : Mercury (0.0005%)
Cd : Cadmium (0.002%)
Pb : Lead (0.004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly in accordance with each country or local regulation.

3-36

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GConnection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC
Connection Restrictions When Expanding the PLC
Expansion modules, the HMI module, the cartridge base module, and cartridges on the basic expansion side operate with the internal
power supply that is supplied from the CPU module or the expansion interface remote slave module. Expansion modules on the
expansion interface side operate with the internal power supply that is supplied from the expansion interface module (expander).
Cartridges

Expansion Interface
Module (Expander)
Expansion Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)

CPU Module

HMI Module

Internal 5 V LineInternal 5 V LineInternal 24 V LineInternal 24 V LinePower
SupplyPower
SupplyBasic Expansion
Side

Cartridges

Main Power
SupplyCartridge Base Module
Expansion Interface
Remote Master Module(FC6A-EXM1M)

Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Module(FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-EXM1S4)

Expansion Modules

Main Power
SupplyExpansion Interface
Module (Expander)
Expansion Modules (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)

Expansion Modules

Internal 5 V LineInternal 5 V LineInternal 24 V LineInternal 24 V LinePower
SupplyMain
PowerSupplyExpansion Interface
Side

Power
SupplyBasic Expansion
Side

Main
Power
SupplyExpansion Interface
Side

The internal power supply current that can be supplied to the expansion modules on the basic expansion side, HMI module,
cartridge base module, and cartridges depends on the module supplying the power. Ensure that the total amount of current for the
expansion modules on the basic expansion side, HMI module, cartridge base module, and cartridges does not exceed the limit of
the internal power supply that can be supplied.
Notes:
 A maximum of eight expansion modules can be connected on the expansion interface side, regardless of the internal power supply current
that can be supplied from the CPU module or the expansion interface remote slave module.
 Expansion modules require an I/O external power supply.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-37

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GConnecting Modules to the CPU Module
The internal power supply current that can be supplied from the CPU module to the expansion modules on the basic expansionside, HMI module, cartridge base module, and cartridges is as follows.
Maximum Number of Modules That Can Be Connected to the CPU Module
CPU Module

All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU
moduleCartridge Base
ModuleHMI Module
Cartridges

CPU Module Unit

Cartridges

Cartridges

16-I/O type

4*2

1

1*3

―

―

―

1

24-I/O type

7*2

1

1*3

―

―

―

1

40-I/O type

7*2

1

1*3

―

―

―

2

40-I/O type

7*2

1

1*3

―

―

―

2

7*2*4

1

1

1

2

―

―

Plus 16-I/O type

Plus CPU module

Expansion
Modules(basic expansionside)*1

Plus 32-I/O typeInternal Power Supply Current That Can Be Supplied from the CPU Module
Internal 5 V Line Total*5
CPU Module

All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module

Ambient
OperatingTemperature(-10 to 55°C)

Expanded Ambient
Operating Temperature(-25 to 10°C, 55 to 65°C)

Expanded Ambient
Operating Temperature(-25 to 10°C, 55 to 65°C)

16-I/O type

≤ 695 mA

≤ 347 mA

≤ 126 mA

≤ 63 mA

24-I/O type

≤ 890 mA

≤ 445 mA

≤ 167 mA

≤ 83 mA

40-I/O type

≤ 1,070 mA≤ 535 mA

≤ 270 mA

≤ 135 mA

40-I/O type

≤ 960 mA

≤ 480 mA

≤ 270 mA

≤ 135 mA

≤ 1,070 mA≤ 535 mA

≤ 350 mA

≤ 175 mA

Plus 16-I/O type

Plus CPU module

Ambient
OperatingTemperature(-10 to 55°C)

Internal 24 V Line Total*6

Plus 32-I/O type*1 The number of modules that can be connected on the basic expansion side does not include the expansion interface module (expander). Whenusing the expansion interface module (expander), add the following current.
Module Type
Expansion interface module (expander)

ModelInternal 5 V Line Current

FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24

20 mA*2 Only the following number of communication modules can be connected to the CPU module, regardless of the internal power supply current
that can be supplied from the CPU module.
Module TypeMaximum No. of Modules (Total on Basic Expansion and Expansion Interface Sides)

All-in-One CPU module

3

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

3

Plus CPU module

15*3 Only an analog I/O cartridge can be connected.
*4 When an expansion interface remote master module (FC6A-EXM1M) is connected to the basic expansion side, a maximum of five modules canbe connected on the basic expansion side.
*5 The internal power supply for the internal 5 V line is used to run the expansion modules (basic expansion side), the HMI module, and the
cartridges. Calculate the total current that is used by the modules and ensure that the limit is not exceeded. Use caution because the upper
limits differ with expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C). For details, see "Internal Power Supply Current of
the Modules and Cartridges" on page 3-39.
*6 The internal power supply for the internal 24 V line is used to drive the output module relays and transistors. Calculate the total current when
the outputs are simultaneously ON with the following values as the current per output and ensure that the limit is not exceeded. Use caution
because the upper limits differ with expanded ambient operating temperatures (-25 to -10°C and 55 to 65°C).

• Relay output: 6 mA/point• Transistor output: 1.5 mA/point

Connecting Modules to the Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module
A maximum of seven expansion modules can be connected on the basic expansion side, regardless of the internal power supply
current that can be supplied from the expansion interface remote slave module.

3-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
The CPU module cannot detect the internal power supply current that the expansion modules are using. Observe therestrictions in this section because malfunction or failure may result if the FC6A is continuously used when the current
exceeds the limit.

CautionInternal Power Supply Current of the Modules and Cartridges
Module Type

Model

Digital input module

Digital I/O module
Digital output module

Digital mixed I/O module

Analog input module
Analog I/O module
Analog output module
Analog mixed I/O module
PID module
Serial communication module

Internal 3.3 V
Line Current*1

Internal 5 VLine Current

Internal 24 VLine Current

FC6A-N08B1/FC6A-N08B4

―

30 mA

―

FC6A-N16B1/FC6A-N16B4

―

40 mA

―

FC6A-N16B3

―

40 mA

―

FC6A-N32B3

―

65 mA

―

FC6A-N08A11/FC6A-N08A14

―

40 mA

FC6A-R081/FC6A-R084

―

35 mA

6 mA/point

FC6A-R161/FC6A-R164

―

50 mA

6 mA/point

FC6A-T08P1/FC6A-T08P4

―

25 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T16P1/FC6A-T16P4

―

30 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T16P3

―

30 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T32P3

―

45 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T08K1/FC6A-T08K4

―

25 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T16K1/FC6A-T16K4

―

30 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T16K3

―

30 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-T32K3

―

45 mA

1.5 mA/point

FC6A-M08BR1/FC6A-M08BR4

―

30 mA

6 mA/point

FC6A-M24BR1/FC6A-M24BR4

―

55 mA

6 mA/point

FC6A-J2C1/FC6A-J2C4

―

40 mA

―

FC6A-J4A1/FC6A-J4A4

―

45 mA

―

FC6A-J8A1/FC6A-J8A4

―

40 mA

―

FC6A-J4CN1/FC6A-J4CN4

―

50 mA

―

FC6A-J4CH1Y/FC6A-J4CH4Y

―

50 mA

―

FC6A-J8CU1/FC6A-J8CU4

―

45 mA

―

FC6A-K2A1/FC6A-K2A4

―

40 mA

―

FC6A-K4A1/FC6A-K4A4

―

50 mA

―

FC6A-L03CN1/FC6A-L03CN4

―

55 mA

―

FC6A-L06A1/FC6A-L06A4

―

60 mA

―

FC6A-F2M1/FC6A-F2M4

―

65 mA

―

FC6A-F2MR1/FC6A-F2MR4

―

65 mA

FC6A-SIF52/FC6A-SIF524

―

35 mA

―

―
35 mA

FC6A-PN4

35mA

―

―

FC6A-PTK4

35mA

―

―

FC6A-PTS4

35mA

―

―

FC6A-PJ2A

35mA

―

―

FC6A-PJ2CP

35mA

―

―

FC6A-PK2AV

35mA

80 mA

―

FC6A-PK2AW

35mA

190 mA―

FC6A-PC1

35mA

10 mA

―

FC6A-PC3

35mA

60 mA

―

FC6A-PC435mA

120 mA―

Cartridge base module (no installed cartridges)*2

FC6A-HPH1―――

HMI module (no installed cartridges)

FC6A-PH1―

150 mA

Digital I/O cartridge

Cartridges

Analog I/O cartridge

Communication cartridge

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

15 mA*33-39

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Module TypeInternal 3.3 V
Line Current*1

Model

HMI module + cartridge

Internal 5 VLine Current

Internal 24 VLine Current

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PJ2A―

170 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PJ2CP―

170 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PK2AV―

250 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PK2AW―

360 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PC1―

180 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PC3―

230 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PC4―

290 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PN4―

175 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PTK4―

175 mA

15 mA*3

FC6A-PH1+FC6A-PTS4―

175 mA

15 mA*3*1 Not included in the calculation of the connection restriction.
*2 There is no change in the current of the internal power supply for the cartridge base module, even if cartridges are connected.
*3 Current for the backlight. This is not included in the calculation of the connection restriction.

■ Connection Example 1
This example describes the number of connected modules, the internal 5 V line current, and the internal 24 V line current whenthe expansion modules, HMI module, and cartridges in the below diagram are connected to the 16-I/O type.
FC6A-T32P3
FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-N32B3
FC6A-J4A1
FC6A
FC6A-PH1 -C16P1CE

(2)
(3)

(1)

(4) (5) (6)FC6A-PC3
No.

Internal 5 V Line Current

Internal 24 V Line Current(1)

HMI Module (no installed cartridges)

Module Type

FC6A-PH1

Model

150 mA―(2)

Communication Cartridge

FC6A-PC3

60 mA

―

(3)

Digital Output Module

FC6A-T32P3

45 mA

48 mA (= 1.5 mA × 32 points)(4)

Digital Input Module

FC6A-N32B3

65 mA

―

(5)

Analog Input Module

FC6A-J4CN1

50 mA

―

(6)

Analog Input Module

FC6A-J4A1

45 mA

―

415 mA (695 mA or lower)

48 mA (126 mA or lower) Number of connected modules

For the 16-I/O type, the number of modules that can be connected must be four expansion modules (basic expansion side),
one HMI module, and two cartridges or lower. There are four expansion modules (basic expansion side), one HMI module,
and one cartridge, so there is no problem because the maximum number of modules was not exceeded.
 Internal 5 V line current

The current must be 695 mA or lower. The total current is 415 mA, so there is no problem because it is not exceeded 695 mA.
 Internal 24 V line current

The current must be 126 mA or lower. The total current is 48 mA, so there is no problem because it is not exceeded 126 mA.

3-40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Connection Example 2This example describes the number of connected modules, the internal 5 V Line Current, and the internal 24 V line current whenthe expansion modules, HMI module, and cartridges in the below diagram are connected to the 40-I/O type.
FC6A-PH1

(2)
(1)
FC6A
-PK2AW
No.

FC6A
-R161

FC6A-C40R1AE

FC6A
FC6A
-N16B1 -M24BR1(3)(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)FC6A
-PK2AW

FC6A-PK2AW
Internal 5 V Line Current

Internal 24 V Line Current(1)

HMI Module + Cartridge

Module Type

FC6A-PH1 + FC6A-PK2AW

Model

360 mA―(2)

Analog I/O Cartridge

FC6A-PK2AW

190 mA―(3)

Analog I/O Cartridge

FC6A-PK2AW

190 mA―(4)

Digital Output Module

FC6A-R161

50 mA

96 mA (= 6 mA × 16 points)(5)

Digital Output Module

FC6A-R161

50 mA

96 mA (= 6 mA × 16 points)(6)

Digital Output Module

FC6A-R161

50 mA

96 mA (= 6 mA × 16 points)(7)

Digital Input Module

FC6A-N16B1

40 mA

―

(8)

Digital Input Module

FC6A-N16B1

40 mA

―

(9)

Digital Input Module

FC6A-N16B1

40 mA

―

(10) Digital Mixed I/O Module

FC6A-M24BR1

55 mA

48 mA (= 6 mA × 8 points)

1,065 mA (1,070 mA or lower)

336 mA (270 mA or lower) Number of connected modules

For the 40-I/O type, the number of modules that can be connected must be seven expansion modules (basic expansionside), one HMI module, and three cartridges or lower. There are seven expansion modules (basic expansion side), one HMI
module, and two cartridges, so there is no problem because the maximum number of modules was not exceeded.

 Internal 5 V line current

The current must be 1,070 mA or lower. The total current is 1,065 mA, so there is no problem because it does not exceed
1,070 mA.

 Internal 24 V line current

The current must be 270 mA or lower. The total current is 336 mA, which exceeds 270 mA.
Program the PLC so that 45 or fewer relay outputs turn ON simultaneously (270 mA or lower = 6 mA × 45 points) or use theexpansion interface module (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24) and connect the digital output modules with an insufficient amountof current to the expansion interface side.
FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24
FC6A-PH1

FC6A-PK2AW

FC6A-C40R1AE

FC6A-PK2AW

FC6A-PK2AW

FC6A
-R161

FC6A
FC6A
-N16B1 -M24BR1

Basic Expansion Side

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A
-R161

Expansion Interface Side

3-41

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Calculating the Power Consumed by the Main Power Supply

Calculate the power by referring to the values of the modules given in the table in "Internal Power Supply Current of the Modules
and Cartridges" on page 3-39.
■ Examples of Calculating the Power Consumed by Expansion Modules
When the FC6A-R081 is connected to the All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Calculate the voltage conversion in the CPU module with the following efficiencies.
Pin [VA]
70%

24 V (Service Power Supply)
24 V (Internal)

AC Universal
Voltage [VA]

5 V (Internal)
3.3 V (Internal)
90%
Pin [W]
70%

24 V (Internal)

24V DC
5 V (Internal)
3.3 V (Internal)
90%
Pin [W]
70%

24 V (Internal)

12V DC
5 V (Internal)
3.3 V (Internal)
90%

For the FC6A-R081
5V

24 V

( Iout × Vout ) + ( Iout × Vout )0.7
0 A × 3.3 V+ (0.035 A × 5 V) + (0.006 A × 8 points × 24 V)
0.9 × 5 V=
0.7
≈ 1.9 [W]PR081 =

(

3-42

)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GWhen the FC6A-R081 or FC6A-PC4 is connected to the Plus CPU module or an expansion interface module
Calculate the voltage conversion in the CPU module and expansion interface module with the following efficiencies.
Plus CPU module

Expansion interface module (Expander) (FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24)
Expansion interface module (remote master/slave) (FC6A-EXM1M,
FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4)
Pin [W]

Pin [W]
24V DC

24V DC

24 V (Internal)

24 V (Internal)
5 V (Internal)

5 V (Internal)

75%

75%
3.3 V (Internal)
90%

For the FC6A-R081
5V

24 V

( Iout × Vout )+ ( Iout × 24 V )0.75
0 A × 3.3 V+ ( 0.035 A × 5 V )0.9 × 5 V
+ ( 0.006 A × 8 points × 24 V )=0.75≈ 1.39 [W]

PR081 =()

For the FC6A-PC4*1
× 3.3 VI
+ I }× 5 V{(
0.9 × 5 V )
=
out

PPC4

out

0.75
0.035 A × 3.3 V+ 0.12 A × 5 V
0.9 × 5 V=
0.75
≈ 0.97 [W]

{(

)

}

*1 Cartridges cannot be connected to expansion interface modules.

■ Example 1 of Calculating the Power Consumed by the Main Power Supply
This example shows how to calculate the power consumed by the main power supply when the expansion module, HMI module,
and cartridge in the below diagram are connected to the 16-I/O type.
Example:FC6A-PH1 FC6A-C16R1AE

FC6A-PJ2A

FC6A-R081

FC6A-PC4
Pin [VA]

FC6A-C16R1AE:

33 [VA] when alone*1

FC6A-PC4:

A × 3.3 V{ ( 0.035) + 0.12 A}× 5 V ≈ 1.04 [VA]
0.9 × 5 V
0.7

FC6A-R081:

FC6A-PH1 + FC6A-PJ2A :( 0.035 A × 5 V ) + ( 0.006 × 8 points × 24 V )≈ 1.9 [VA]0.7
( 0.17 A × 5 V ) + ( 0.015 A × 24 V )≈ 1.73 [VA]
0.7

Pin≈ 33 + 1.04 + 1.9 + 1.73
≈ 37.67 [VA]

*1 For the power consumption of each CPU module alone, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-43

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
The power consumed by the main power supply will differ if the CPU module is different, even if the system
configuration is the same.
FC6A-R081

FC6A-PH1 FC6A-C16R1CE

FC6A-PJ2A

FC6A-PC4
24V DC Pin [W]FC6A-C16R1CE:

3.36 [W] when alone*1

FC6A-PC4:≈ 1.04 [W]FC6A-R081:≈ 1.9 [W]FC6A-PH1 + FC6A-PJ2A :≈ 1.73 [W]Pin≈ 3.36 + 1.04 + 1.9 + 1.73
≈ 8.03 [W]*1 For the power consumption of each CPU module alone, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.

■ Example 2 of Calculating the Power Consumed by the Main Power Supply
This example shows how to calculate the power consumed by the main power supply when the expansion modules and cartridgein the below diagram are connected to the Plus 16-I/O type.
Example:FC6A-PJ2A FC6A-D16R1CEE

FC6A-R161

FC6A-PK2AV
24V DC Pin [W]FC6A-D16R1CEE:

2.88 [W] when alone*1

FC6A-PJ2A:

0.035 A × 3.3 V() × 5 V ≈ 0.17 [W]
0.9 × 5 V=
0.75

FC6A-PK2AV:

A × 3.3 V{ ( 0.035) + 0.08 A}× 5 V ≈ 0.7 [W]
0.9 × 5 V
0.75

FC6A-R161:

0.05 A × 5 V+ ( 0.006 A × 16 points × 24 V ) ≈ 2.64 [W]
0.75

Pin≈ 2.88 + 0.17 + 0.7 + 2.64
≈ 6.39 [W]*1 For the power consumption of each CPU module alone, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.

3-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Terminal Connection
This section describes types of terminals and how to use them.
 When connecting stranded wire or multiple solid wires to a terminal block, use appropriate ferrule for the terminal block.

For details, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.
 1-wire and 2-wire ferrules can be used with the FC6A.

2-wire connection

1-wire connection

Cable

Cable

Terminals for Terminal Blocks

Crimp ferrules using an appropriate tool according to the size of ferrules. Cut the end of the wire to the same length or about
0.5 mm longer than the ferrule.
Ensure that the core wire does not protrude at the end of the shield and there are no whiskers.

Length of stripped wire

Correct

0 to 0.5 mm
WhiskerCore wire is visible

DamageStripped wire is too short The thickness and stripping length of stranded wire and single wire differs according to the connectors that will be used.

For wire thickness, see "Recommended Ferrule List" on page 3-46.
 Single wire assumes the use of one wire. Do not attach two or more wires to the one connector hole.
 When using single wires, you do not need to use ferrules.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-45

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Recommended Ferrule List

The following ferrules can be used with the FC6A.
The recommended ferrules are manufactured by IDEC (top), Weidmüller (middle) or Phoenix Contact (bottom).
■ All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Power Supply
Terminals

CPU Module Terminals

Input Terminals
Output Terminals

CAN Port(CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module only)

UL1007
UL1007
UL1007
UL1015
UL1015
UL1015
UL2464
UL2464
UL2464Equivalent*1
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent*1

Wire Type
Stripping length (mm)

7

7

10

Wire thickness (mm2)0.2 to 2.5

0.2 to 2.5

0.2 to 2.5

AWG 24AWG22

1-wireusage

1-wire
usage

Wire
gauge

1-wire
usage

AWG20

2-wireusage

3-46

S3TL-H025-10WJ (S3TL-H02510WJ)
H0.25/10 HBL (9025740000)
AI 0,25- 6 (3203040)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H025-12WJ (S3TL-H02512WJ)
H0.25/12T GE (9021020000)
AI 0,25- 8 (3203037)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,25-10 (3241128)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H034-10WT (S3TL-H03410WT)
H0.34/10 TK (9025750000)
AI 0,34- 6 (3203053)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H034-12WT (S3TL-H03412WT)
H0.34/12 TK (9025770000)
AI 0,34- 8 (3203066)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,34-10 (3241129)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H05-12WA (S3TL-H05-12WA)
H0.5/12D W (9019000000)
H0.5/12 OR (040950000)
AI 0,5- 6 (3200687)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H05-14WA (S3TL-H05-14WA)
H0.5/14D W (9019010000)
H0.5/14 OR (0690700000)
AI 0,5- 8 (3200014)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,5- 8 GB (1208966)

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H05-16WA (S3TL-H05-16WA)
H0.5/16D W (9019020000)
H0.5/16 OR (9025870000)
AI 0,5-10 (3201275)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―
H0.5/16 DS W (9202910000)
AI 0,5-10 GB (3203150)

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

S3TL-J05-14WA (S3TL-J05-14WA)
H0.5/14D ZH W (9037380000)
H0.5/14 ZH OR (9037200000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-8 (3200933)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J05-16WA (S3TL-J05-16WA)
H0.5/16D ZH W (9037390000)
H0.5/16 ZH OR (9037210000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-10 (3203309)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GPower Supply
Terminals

CPU Module Terminals

Input Terminals
Output Terminals

CAN Port(CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module only)

UL1007
UL1007
UL1007
UL1015
UL1015
UL1015
UL2464
UL2464
UL2464*1
Equivalent
Equivalent*1 Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent

Wire Type

1-wire
usage

AWG18

Wire
gauge
2-wireusage

1-wireusage
AWG16

2-wireusage

Screwdriver

Tightening torque (N·m)

S3TL-H075-12WW (S3TL-H07512WW)
H0.75/12D GR (9019030000)
H0.75/12 W (0409600000)
AI 0,75- 6 (3200690)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-14WW (S3TL-H07514WW)
H0.75/14D GR (9019040000)
H0.75/14 W (0462900000)
AI 0,75- 8 (3200519)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-16WW (S3TL-H07516WW)
H0.75/16D GR (9019050000)
H0.75/16 W (9025860000)
AI 0,75-10 (3201288)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H10-14WY (S3TL-H10-14WY)
H1.0/14D R (9019080000)
H1.0/14 GE (0463000000)
AI 1-8 (3200030)

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H10-16WY (S3TL-H10-16WY)
H1.0/16D R (9019100000)
H1.0/16 GE (9025950000)
AI 1-10 (3200182)

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

S3TL-J075-14WW (S3TL-J07514WW)
H0.75/14D ZH GR (9037410000)
H0.75/14 ZH W (9037230000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-8 (3200807)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J075-16WW (S3TL-J07516WW)
H0.75/16D ZH GR (9037420000)
H0.75/16 ZH W (9037240000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10 (3200975)

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―
―
AI 1,5- 6 (3200755)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-14WR (S3TL-H15-14WR)
H1.5/14D SW (9019120000)
H1.5/14 R (0463100000)
AI 1,5- 8 (3200043)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-16WR (S3TL-H15-16WR)
H1.5/16D SW (9019130000)
H1.5/16 R (0635100000)
AI 1,5-10 (3200195)

―

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

S3TL-J15-16WR (S3TL-J15-16WR)
H1.5/16D ZH SW (9037470000)
H1.5/16 ZH R (9037290000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 1,5-8 (3200823)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-D04-25-75 (S3TL-D04-25-75)
SDIS 0.4×2.5×75 (2749790000)
SZS 0.4×2.5 (1205037)

―

―

―

S3TL-D06-35-100 (S3TL-D06-35100)
SDIS 0.6×3.5×100 (2749810000)
SZS 0.6×3.5 (1205053)

Yes

Yes

Yes

0.51

0.51

0.49 (Terminal)
0.2 to 0.3 (Flange)*1 For the wires that can be used, see "Wiring the CAN J1939 Bus" on page 3-55.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-47

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Plus CPU module

CPU Module Terminals

Power Supply Terminals

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

Wire TypeUL1015Equivalent

Input Terminals/Output
Terminals (FC6A-D16R1CEE,
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6AD16P1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE,
FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6AD16P4CEE only)
UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

Stripping length (mm)79Wire thickness (mm2)0.2 to 2.5

0.14 to 1.50

AWG 24AWG22

1-wireusage

1-wire
usage

Wire
gauge

1-wire
usage

AWG20

2-wireusage

3-48

S3TL-H025-10WJ (S3TL-H02510WJ)
H0.25/10 HBL (9025740000)
AI 0,25- 6 (3203040)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H025-12WJ (S3TL-H02512WJ)
H0.25/12T GE (9021020000)
AI 0,25- 8 (3203037)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―
―
AI 0,25-10 (3241128)

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H034-10WT (S3TL-H03410WT)
H0.34/10 TK (9025750000)
AI 0,34- 6 (3203053)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H034-12WT (S3TL-H03412WT)
H0.34/12 TK (9025770000)
AI 0,34- 8 (3203066)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―
―
AI 0,34-10 (3241129)

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H05-12WA (S3TL-H05-12WA)
H0.5/12D W (9019000000)
H0.5/12 OR (040950000)
AI 0,5- 6 (3200687)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H05-14WA (S3TL-H05-14WA)
H0.5/14D W (9019010000)
H0.5/14 OR (0690700000)
AI 0,5- 8 (3200014)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―
―
AI 0,5- 8 GB (1208966)

―

Yes

―

Yes

S3TL-H05-16WA (S3TL-H05-16WA)
H0.5/16D W (9019020000)
H0.5/16 OR (9025870000)
AI 0,5-10 (3201275)

―

―

Yes

―

―
H0.5/16 DS W (9202910000)
AI 0,5-10 GB (3203150)

―

―

―

Yes

S3TL-J05-14WA (S3TL-J05-14WA)
H0.5/14D ZH W (9037380000)
H0.5/14 ZH OR (9037200000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-8 (3200933)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J05-16WA (S3TL-J05-16WA)
H0.5/16D ZH W (9037390000)
H0.5/16 ZH OR (9037210000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-10 (3203309)

―

―

Yes

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G

CPU Module Terminals

Power Supply Terminals

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

S3TL-H075-12WW (S3TL-H07512WW)
H0.75/12D GR (9019030000)
H0.75/12 W (0409600000)
AI 0,75- 6 (3200690)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-14WW (S3TL-H07514WW)
H0.75/14D GR (9019040000)
H0.75/14 W (0462900000)
AI 0,75- 8 (3200519)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-16WW (S3TL-H07516WW)
H0.75/16D GR (9019050000)
H0.75/16 W (9025860000)
AI 0,75-10 (3201288)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H10-14WY (S3TL-H10-14WY)
H1.0/14D R (9019080000)
H1.0/14 GE (0463000000)
AI 1-8 (3200030)

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H10-16WY (S3TL-H10-16WY)
H1.0/16D R (9019100000)
H1.0/16 GE (9025950000)
AI 1-10 (3200182)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J075-14WW (S3TL-J07514WW)
H0.75/14D ZH GR (9037410000)
H0.75/14 ZH W (9037230000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-8 (3200807)

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J075-16WW (S3TL-J07516WW)
H0.75/16D ZH GR (9037420000)
H0.75/16 ZH W (9037240000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10 (3200975)

―

―

―

―

―
―
AI 1,5- 6 (3200755)

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-14WR (S3TL-H15-14WR)
H1.5/14D SW (9019120000)
H1.5/14 R (0463100000)
AI 1,5- 8 (3200043)

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-16WR (S3TL-H15-16WR)
H1.5/16D SW (9019130000)
H1.5/16 R (0635100000)
AI 1,5-10 (3200195)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J15-16WR (S3TL-J15-16WR)
H1.5/16D ZH SW (9037470000)
H1.5/16 ZH R (9037290000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 1,5-8 (3200823)

Yes

Yes

―

―

Wire Type

1-wire
usage

AWG18

Wire
gauge
2-wireusage

1-wireusage
AWG16

2-wireusage

Screwdriver

Tightening torque (N·m)

Input Terminals/Output
Terminals (FC6A-D16R1CEE,
FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6AD16P1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE,
FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6AD16P4CEE only)

S3TL-D04-25-75 (S3TL-D04-25-75)
SDIS 0.4×2.5×75 (2749790000)
SZS 0.4×2.5 (1205037)―

Yes

S3TL-D06-35-100 (S3TL-D06-35100)
SDIS 0.6×3.5×100 (2749810000)
SZS 0.6×3.5 (1205053)

Yes

―

0.51

0.28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-49

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G■ Expansion Modules, Expansion Interface Module (Expander), and Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module
Expansion Modules, Expansion Interface Module(Expander), and Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module Terminal Block Types

Model

Wire Type3.81 mm Pitch

5.08 mm Pitch

FC6A-N16B1,
FC6A-R161,
FC6A-T16K1,
FC6A-T16P1,
FC6A-M24BR1,
FC6A-J4A1,
FC6A-J8A1,
FC6A-L06A1,
FC6A-J4CN1,
FC6A-J4CH1Y,
FC6A-J8CU1,
FC6A-F2M1,
FC6A-F2MR1,
FC6A-SIF52,

FC6A-N16B4,
FC6A-R164,
FC6A-T16K4,
FC6A-T16P4,
FC6A-M24BR4,
FC6A-J4A4,
FC6A-J8A4,
FC6A-L06A4,
FC6A-J4CN4,
FC6A-J4CH4Y,
FC6A-J8CU4,
FC6A-F2M4,
FC6A-F2MR4
FC6A-SIF524

FC6A-N08B1,
FC6A-N08A11,
FC6A-R081,
FC6A-T08K1,
FC6A-T08P1,
FC6A-M08BR1,
FC6A-J2C1,
FC6A-K2A1,
FC6A-K4A1,
FC6A-L03CN1,
FC6A-EXM2,
FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-N08B4,
FC6A-N08A14,
FC6A-R084,
FC6A-T08K4,
FC6A-T08P4,
FC6A-M08BR4,
FC6A-J2C4,
FC6A-K2A4,
FC6A-K4A4,
FC6A-L03CN4,
FC6A-EXM24,
FC6A-EXM1S4UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

Stripping length (mm)910Wire thickness (mm2)0.14 to 1.50

0.2 to 2.5

AWG 24AWG22

1-wireusage

1-wire
usage

Wire
gauge

AWG20

3-50

1-wireusage

S3TL-H025-10WJ (S3TL-H02510WJ)
H0.25/10 HBL (9025740000)
AI 0,25- 6 (3203040)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H025-12WJ (S3TL-H02512WJ)
H0.25/12T GE (9021020000)
AI 0,25- 8 (3203037)

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,25-10 (3241128)

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H034-10WT (S3TL-H03410WT)
H0.34/10 TK (9025750000)
AI 0,34- 6 (3203053)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H034-12WT (S3TL-H03412WT)
H0.34/12 TK (9025770000)
AI 0,34- 8 (3203066)

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,34-10 (3241129)

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H05-12WA (S3TL-H05-12WA)
H0.5/12D W (9019000000)
H0.5/12 OR (0409500000)
AI 0,5- 6 (3200687)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H05-14WA (S3TL-H05-14WA)
H0.5/14D W (9019010000)
H0.5/14 OR (0690700000)
AI 0,5- 8 (3200014)

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,5- 8 GB (1208966)

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H05-16WA (S3TL-H05-16WA)
H0.5/16D W (9019020000)
H0.5/16 OR (9025870000)
AI 0,5-10 (3201275)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―
H0.5/16 DS W (9202910000)
AI 0,5-10 GB (3203150)

―

Yes

―

Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Expansion Modules, Expansion Interface Module(Expander), and Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module Terminal Block Types

FC6A-N16B4,
FC6A-R164,
FC6A-T16K4,
FC6A-T16P4,
FC6A-M24BR4,
FC6A-J4A4,
FC6A-J8A4,
FC6A-L06A4,
FC6A-J4CN4,
FC6A-J4CH4Y,
FC6A-J8CU4,
FC6A-F2M4,
FC6A-F2MR4
FC6A-SIF524

FC6A-N08B1,
FC6A-N08A11,
FC6A-R081,
FC6A-T08K1,
FC6A-T08P1,
FC6A-M08BR1,
FC6A-J2C1,
FC6A-K2A1,
FC6A-K4A1,
FC6A-L03CN1,
FC6A-EXM2,
FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-N08B4,
FC6A-N08A14,
FC6A-R084,
FC6A-T08K4,
FC6A-T08P4,
FC6A-M08BR4,
FC6A-J2C4,
FC6A-K2A4,
FC6A-K4A4,
FC6A-L03CN4,
FC6A-EXM24,
FC6A-EXM1S4UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

S3TL-J05-14WA (S3TL-J05-14WA)
H0.5/14D ZH W (9037380000)
H0.5/14 ZH OR (9037200000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-8 (3200933)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J05-16WA (S3TL-J05-16WA)
H0.5/16D ZH W (9037390000)
H0.5/16 ZH OR (9037210000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-10 (3203309)

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H075-12WW (S3TL-H07512WW)
H0.75/12D GR (9019030000)
H0.75/12 W (0409600000)
AI 0,75- 6 (3200690)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-14WW (S3TL-H07514WW)
H0.75/14D GR (9019040000)
H0.75/14 W (0462900000)
AI 0,75- 8 (3200519)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-16WW (S3TL-H07516WW)
H0.75/16D GR (9019050000)
H0.75/16 W (9025860000)
AI 0,75-10 (3201288)

―

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H10-14WY (S3TL-H10-14WY)
H1.0/14D R (9019080000)
H1.0/14 GE (0463000000)
AI 1-8 (3200030)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H10-16WY (S3TL-H10-16WY)
H1.0/16D R (9019100000)
H1.0/16 GE (9025950000)
AI 1-10 (3200182)

―

―

―

Yes

S3TL-J075-14WW (S3TL-J07514WW)
H0.75/14D ZH GR (9037410000)
H0.75/14 ZH W (9037230000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-8 (3200807)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J075-16WW (S3TL-J07516WW)
H0.75/16D ZH GR (9037420000)
H0.75/16 ZH W (9037240000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10 (3200975)

―

―

Yes

―

Wire Type2-wireusage

1-wire
usage

Wire
gauge

AWG18

2-wireusage

5.08 mm Pitch

FC6A-N16B1,
FC6A-R161,
FC6A-T16K1,
FC6A-T16P1,
FC6A-M24BR1,
FC6A-J4A1,
FC6A-J8A1,
FC6A-L06A1,
FC6A-J4CN1,
FC6A-J4CH1Y,
FC6A-J8CU1,
FC6A-F2M1,
FC6A-F2MR1,
FC6A-SIF52,

Model

AWG20

3.81 mm Pitch

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-51

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Expansion Modules, Expansion Interface Module(Expander), and Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module Terminal Block Types

FC6A-N16B4,
FC6A-R164,
FC6A-T16K4,
FC6A-T16P4,
FC6A-M24BR4,
FC6A-J4A4,
FC6A-J8A4,
FC6A-L06A4,
FC6A-J4CN4,
FC6A-J4CH4Y,
FC6A-J8CU4,
FC6A-F2M4,
FC6A-F2MR4
FC6A-SIF524

FC6A-N08B1,
FC6A-N08A11,
FC6A-R081,
FC6A-T08K1,
FC6A-T08P1,
FC6A-M08BR1,
FC6A-J2C1,
FC6A-K2A1,
FC6A-K4A1,
FC6A-L03CN1,
FC6A-EXM2,
FC6A-EXM1S,FC6A-N08B4,
FC6A-N08A14,
FC6A-R084,
FC6A-T08K4,
FC6A-T08P4,
FC6A-M08BR4,
FC6A-J2C4,
FC6A-K2A4,
FC6A-K4A4,
FC6A-L03CN4,
FC6A-EXM24,
FC6A-EXM1S4UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent

UL1007
UL2464Equivalent

UL1015Equivalent――AI 1,5- 6 (3200755)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H15-14WR (S3TL-H15-14WR)
H1.5/14D SW (9019120000)
H1.5/14 R (0463100000)
AI 1,5- 8 (3200043)

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H15-16WR (S3TL-H15-16WR)
H1.5/16D SW (9019130000)
H1.5/16 R (0635100000)
AI 1,5-10 (3200195)

―

―

Yes

Yes

S3TL-J15-16WR (S3TL-J15-16WR)
H1.5/16D ZH SW (9037470000)
H1.5/16 ZH R (9037290000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 1,5-8 (3200823)

―

―

―

―

Wire Type

Wire
gauge

AWG16

2-wireusage

Screwdriver

5.08 mm Pitch

FC6A-N16B1,
FC6A-R161,
FC6A-T16K1,
FC6A-T16P1,
FC6A-M24BR1,
FC6A-J4A1,
FC6A-J8A1,
FC6A-L06A1,
FC6A-J4CN1,
FC6A-J4CH1Y,
FC6A-J8CU1,
FC6A-F2M1,
FC6A-F2MR1,
FC6A-SIF52,

Model

1-wireusage

3.81 mm Pitch

S3TL-D04-25-75 (S3TL-D04-25-75)
SDIS 0.4×2.5×75 (2749790000)
SZS 0.4×2.5 (1205037)

Yes―

S3TL-D06-35-100 (S3TL-D06-35100)
SDIS 0.6×3.5×100 (2749810000)
SZS 0.6×3.5 (1205053)

―

Yes

0.28

0.49

Tightening torque (N·m)■ Expansion Interface Remote Master Module, HMI Module, and Cartridge
Module Type

Expansion Interface
Remote Master
ModuleWire TypeUL1007
UL1007
UL1007
UL1015
UL1015
UL1015
UL2464
UL2464
UL2464Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent

HMI Module

Cartridges

Stripping length (mm)

7

7

5

Wire thickness (mm2)0.14 to 2.5

0.14 to 2.5

0.14 to 1.50

Wire
gauge

3-52

AWG 24

1-wireusage

S3TL-H025-10WJ (S3TL-H025-10WJ)
H0.25/10 HBL (9025740000)
AI 0,25- 6 (3203040)

―

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H025-12WJ (S3TL-H025-12WJ)
H0.25/12T GE (9021020000)
AI 0,25- 8 (3203037)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,25-10 (3241128)

―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G

Module Type

Expansion Interface
Remote Master
ModuleWire TypeUL1007
UL1007
UL1007
UL1015
UL1015
UL1015
UL2464
UL2464
UL2464Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent

AWG22

1-wireusage

1-wire
usage

AWG20

Wire
gauge
2-wire
usage

AWG18

1-wireusage

HMI Module

Cartridges

S3TL-H034-10WT (S3TL-H034-10WT)
H0.34/10 TK (9025750000)
AI 0,34- 6 (3203053)

―

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H034-12WT (S3TL-H034-12WT)
H0.34/12 TK (9025770000)
AI 0,34- 8 (3203066)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,34-10 (3241129)

―

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H05-12WA (S3TL-H05-12WA)
H0.5/12D W (9019000000)
H0.5/12 OR (0409500000)
AI 0,5- 6 (3200687)

―

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

S3TL-H05-14WA (S3TL-H05-14WA)
H0.5/14D W (9019010000)
H0.5/14 OR (0690700000)
AI 0,5- 8 (3200014)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

―
―
AI 0,5- 8 GB (1208966)

―

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H05-16WA (S3TL-H05-16WA)
H0.5/16D W (9019020000)
H0.5/16 OR (9025870000)
AI 0,5-10 (3201275)

―

―

―

―

―

―

―
H0.5/16 DS W (9202910000)
AI 0,5-10 GB (3203150)

―

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J05-14WA (S3TL-J05-14WA)
H0.5/14D ZH W (9037380000)
H0.5/14 ZH OR (9037200000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-8 (3200933)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J05-16WA (S3TL-J05-16WA)
H0.5/16D ZH W (9037390000)
H0.5/16 ZH OR (9037210000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,5-10 (3203309)

―

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-12WW (S3TL-H07512WW)
H0.75/12D GR (9019030000)
H0.75/12 W (0409600000)
AI 0,75- 6 (3200690)

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-14WW (S3TL-H07514WW)
H0.75/14D GR (9019040000)
H0.75/14 W (0462900000)
AI 0,75- 8 (3200519)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-H075-16WW (S3TL-H07516WW)
H0.75/16D GR (9019050000)
H0.75/16 W (9025860000)
AI 0,75-10 (3201288)

―

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-H10-14WY (S3TL-H10-14WY)
H1.0/14D R (9019080000)
H1.0/14 GE (0463000000)
AI 1-8 (3200030)

Yes

―

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H10-16WY (S3TL-H10-16WY)
H1.0/16D R (9019100000)
H1.0/16 GE (9025950000)
AI 1-10 (3200182)

―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3-53

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G

Module Type

Expansion Interface
Remote Master
ModuleWire TypeUL1007
UL1007
UL1007
UL1015
UL1015
UL1015
UL2464
UL2464
UL2464Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent
Equivalent

AWG18

Wire
gauge

2-wireusage

1-wireusage
AWG16

2-wireusage

Screwdriver

HMI Module

Cartridges

S3TL-J075-14WW (S3TL-J075-14WW)
H0.75/14D ZH GR (9037410000)
H0.75/14 ZH W (9037230000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-8 (3200807)

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

―

S3TL-J075-16WW (S3TL-J075-16WW)
H0.75/16D ZH GR (9037420000)
H0.75/16 ZH W (9037240000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10 (3200975)

―

―

―

―

―

―

―
―
AI 1,5- 6 (3200755)

―

―

Yes

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-14WR (S3TL-H15-14WR)
H1.5/14D SW (9019120000)
H1.5/14 R (0463100000)
AI 1,5- 8 (3200043)

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

―

―

S3TL-H15-16WR (S3TL-H15-16WR)
H1.5/16D SW (9019130000)
H1.5/16 R (0635100000)
AI 1,5-10 (3200195)

―

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-J15-16WR (S3TL-J15-16WR)
H1.5/16D ZH SW (9037470000)
H1.5/16 ZH R (9037290000)
AI-TWIN 2 x 1,5-8 (3200823)

Yes

―

―

―

―

―

S3TL-D04-25-75 (S3TL-D04-25-75)
SDIS 0.4×2.5×75 (2749790000)
SZS 0.4×2.5 (1205037)

―

―

Yes

S3TL-D06-35-100 (S3TL-D06-35-100)
SDIS 0.6×3.5×100 (2749810000)
SZS 0.6×3.5 (1205053)

―

Yes

―

S3TL-D06-35-100 (S3TL-D06-35-100)
SDIS 0.6×3.5×100 (2749810000)
SZF 1-0,6×3,5 (1204517)

Yes*1

―

―

―*2

0.5 to 0.6

0.2

Tightening torque (N·m)*1 Used when removing the wires.
*2 Push-in type.

Crimping Tool

The following crimping tool can be used with FC6A.
Model Number (Order Number)

Tool Name
Crimping tool

CautionIDEC
S3TL-CR06D (S3TL-CR06D)
S3TL-CR04T (S3TL-CR04T)

Weidmüller
PZ 6 Roto L (1444050000)

Phoenix Contact
CRIMPFOX 6 (1212034)

 Do not touch live terminals. There is a risk of electric shock.
 When powered, the terminals that are connected to external devices may become hot. Do not touch the terminals

immediately after turning the power off.
 Do not touch the power supply terminals immediately after turning the power off. There is a risk of electric shock.
 Insert the wire all the way to the tip of the ferrule and crimp it.
 When connecting stranded wire or multiple wires to a terminal block, use a ferrule. Otherwise there is a risk of wires

becoming disconnected.
 When using single wires, you do not need to use ferrules.
 Single wire assumes the use of one wire. Do not attach two or more wires to the one connector hole.

3-54

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N G
Wiring the CAN J1939 Bus
This section describes the CAN port terminal arrangement, internal equivalent circuit, and specifications.

CAN Port Terminal Arrangement

CAN Port

No.

1
2
3
4
5

Signal Wire

Details

1

SG

CAN external power supply (-)

2

CAN_L

CAN_L bus line (dominant low)3

CAN_SHLD4

CAN_H

CAN_H bus line (dominant high)

5

(V+)

CAN external power supply (+). (N.C. Not connected internally.)

CAN cable shield*1*1 Internally connected to the SG via a resistor and capacitor connected in a series. (R = 1 Ω, 0.68 μF)

Internal Equivalent Circuit
VCC1

VCC2
Internally connected to
power supply terminal PE (FE)

Isolated Circuit

VCC2

SG
SG2

TXD

RXD

CAN_L
CAN
Transceiver

CAN_SHLD
CAN_H
IC

SG2

SG1

(V+)

1Ω

0.68 μF Terminal Block(Port 2)

SG2

SG2

SG2

SG2

CAN J1939 Wiring

The specifications and wiring examples differ according to CAN protocol standard J1939-11 and J1939-15. Connect terminating
resistance (120 Ω, 0.5 W or higher) between CAN_H and CAN_L at both ends of the main line when wiring the CAN port.
CAN Protocol Standard

J1939-11

J1939-15

Communication Speed
Nodes

250 kbps
30

10
Twisted pair

Wire Configuration
Cable

Shielded

Unshielded
0.3 mm2 to 0.82 mm2 (AWG 22 to 18)

Applicable Standards

ISO 11898/1993

Characteristic ImpedanceCable Length

120 Ω
40 m maximum, stub 1 m maximum

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

40 m maximum, stub 3 m maximum

3-55

3: I N STALLATI ON AN D W I R I N GJ1939-11
Terminating Resistance120 Ω
No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)

Stub: 1 m maximum
No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)

Bus: 40 m maximum

Node: 30 maximum

No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)
Terminating Resistance120 ΩJ1939-15
Terminating Resistance120 Ω
No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)

Stub: 3 m maximum
No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)

Bus: 40 m maximum

Node: 10 maximum

No. Signal Name
1 SG
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_SHLD
4 CAN_H
5 (V+)
Terminating Resistance
120 Ω

3-56

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
I ntroduction
The following version of WindLDR is required for FC6A programming and maintenance:• When you use All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module: WindLDR version 8.0.0 or later• When you use Plus CPU module: WindLDR version 8.6.0 or laterFor details on how to check the version, see "Checking the WindLDR Version Number" on page 4-17.
This chapter describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR, programming and maintenance software for the FC6A.

Start WindLDR■ Windows 11/10
Click Start and then All Apps > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.
■ Windows 8
Click WindLDR in the tiles on the Start screen.
■ Windows 7
Click Start and then Programs > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-1

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
PLC Selection
Before programming a user program on WindLDR, select a PLC type.
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, then select PLC Type.

The PLC Selection dialog box appears.

2. Select a PLC type in the selection box and the programming language to use.
3. Click OK.

Select the PLC type from the list and click Use as
Default to set the selected PLC type as the default
type when WindLDR starts.
In WindLDR, the FC6A is categorized by the number of inputs and outputs and the PLC type names are displayed as follows.
PLC Selection Option

Type No.

FC6A-C16X1XE

FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, F6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16P1DE
FC6A-C16R4AE, FC6A-C16R4CE, FC6A-C16K4CE, F6A-C16P4CE, FC6A-C16R4DE, FC6A-C16K4DE, FC6A-C16P4DE

FC6A-C24X1XE

FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C24R4AE, FC6A-C24R4CE, FC6A-C24P4CE, FC6A-C24K4CE

FC6A-C40X1XE

FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40R4AE, FC6A-C40R4CE, FC6A-C40P4CE, FC6A-C40K4CE, FC6A-C40R4DE, FC6A-C40P4DE, FC6A-C40K4DE

FC6A-C40X1XEJ

FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ,
FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40R4AEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ,
FC6A-C40P4DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ

FC6A-D16X1CEE

FC6A-D16R1CEE, FC6A-D16R4CEE, FC6A-D16K1CEE, FC6A-D16K4CEE, FC6A-D16P1CEE, FC6A-D16P4CEE

FC6A-D32X3CEE

FC6A-D32K3CEE, FC6A-D32K4CEE, FC6A-D32P3CEE, FC6A-D32P4CEE

PLC selection is now complete. Next, create a ladder program.

4-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Create Program
Create Ladder ProgramThis section describes the operating procedure to create a ladder program in WindLDR.
Note: For details about devices, see "Devices" on page 6-1. See the "Ladder Programming Manual" for details on basic and advanced instructions.

Sample User Program
Create a simple program using WindLDR. The sample program performs the following operation:
When only input I0 is turned on, output Q0 is turned on.
When only input I1 is turned on, output Q1 is turned on.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on, output Q2 flashes in 1-s increments.
Rung No.

Input I0

Input I1

1

ON

OFF

Output Q0 is turned ON.

Output Operation

2

OFF

ON

Output Q1 is turned ON.

3

ON

ON

Output Q2 flashes in 1-s increments.

Note: One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung. WindLDR manages programs in rungunits. Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments for individual rungs.

Start WindLDR
From the Start menu of Windows, select Programs > IDEC Automation Organizer > WindLDR.
WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-3

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Edit User Program Rung by Rung
Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input I0.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > A (Normally Open).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact, and click the left mousebutton.

3. Double-click Normally Open.

The A (Normally Open) dialog box is displayed.

4-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
4. Enter I0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

Note:• To enter an NO contact from the right-click menu, right-click at the location to insert the NO contact, and on the right-click menu, click Basic
Instructions (B), then A (Normally Open).
• To enter an NO contact from the keyboard, press A to display the Coil Selection dialog box. Select A (Normally Open), and then press
Enter (Enter).

A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.
Next, program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input I1.
5. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > B (Normally Closed).
6. Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact, and click the left

mouse button.

7. Double-click Normally Closed.

The B (Normally Closed) dialog box is displayed.

8. Enter I1 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

An NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line.
At the end of the first ladder line, program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output Q0.
9. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > OUT (Output).
10. Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil, and click the left

mouse button.

Note: Another method to insert an instruction (either basic or advanced) is to type the instruction symbol, OUT, where you want to insert the
instruction.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-5

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
11. Double-click Output.

The Out (Output) dialog box is displayed.

12. Enter Q0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

A NO output coil of output Q0 is programmed in the right-most column of the first ladder line. This completes programming forrung 1.

Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating similar procedures.
A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung. A new rung can also be inserted
by selecting Home > Append > Append a Rung.
When completed, the ladder program looks like below.

To insert a new ladder line
without creating a new rung,press the down arrow key when
the cursor is on the last line orpress the right arrow key when
the cursor is at the right-mostcolumn of the last line.

4-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Convert Program
The program can be checked whether it contains any user program syntax error.
From the menu bar, select Home > Convert (Program group).
When the instruction/FB symbols are connected correctly, the program conversion is completed successfully. If any error is found,the errors are listed on the Info Window. Then, make corrections as necessary.

Info Window

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-7

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Protect Project
The ladder program created in WindLDR is managed as a project file.
You can set a password for your project and save it to protect the project file from being viewed or edited by a third party. Thissection describes the operating procedure to set a password to a project.
(application) button > Property.

1. Click

The Property Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click the Password tab, and in the Project Password group, select the Configure password to the project check box.

3. Set a password.
Note:• The length of the password is 4 to 15 characters.
• Use the Show Passwords check box to show or hide the password. When the Show Passwords check box is selected, the set password
is displayed.
• Manage the password appropriately so that third parties do not know it. If you forget the password of a project, you can no longer open thatproject file.
• A project with a password can only be downloaded to the CPU module with the following system software versions.
CPU module
All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Plus CPU module

System Software
Version 2.40 or later
Version 2.00 or later

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

4-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Save ProjectThis section describes the operating procedure to save the created ladder program as a project file.
1. Save the current project with a new name.

Click(application) button > Save As > WindLDR Project.

2. Enter the file name in File name, specify the folder to save to, and click Save.

This completes the procedure to save a project to a file.
Note: The saved file is called a project file. The extension is ".pjw".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-9

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Simulate Operation
This section describes the operating procedure to check the operation of the user program before transferring it to the FC6A.
From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation. The Simulation screen appears.

Select and right-click the input contact you want to change, and on the right-click menu, click Set or Reset.
To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation.
Notes:• You can also change the status of an input contact by double-clicking it.
• To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, once more select Online > Simulation > Simulation.

4-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Download Program
While WindLDR is running on a PLC, you can download the user program to the FC6A.
User programs can be downloaded to the FC6A from WindLDR using USB or Ethernet.
This section describes the operating procedure from configuring communication settings to downloading the user program using a
USB connection as an example.
FC6A
Windows Computer

USB Port

USB Cable
HG9Z-XCM42 USB Maintenance Cable

Type A PlugMini-B PlugUSB Port(USB 2.0 Mini-B Connector)

Notes:• In order for WindLDR to communicate with the FC6A via USB, a dedicated USB driver must be installed on the computer.
For details, see “How to install USB driver”. Click ▼ to the right of the icon
at the top right corner of the WindLDR window and click How
to install USB driver to display How to install USB driver.
• A user program is a combination of a ladder program and the setting details (Function Area Settings).

Details programmed with a ladder diagram

Ladder Program
User Program
Function Area Settings

Details of the FC6A Series MICROSmart settings
The majority of these items are those set on the Configuration tab.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Set Up.

The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the USB tab and then click OK.

The communication method is now set to USB. Next, download a user program.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-11

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
3. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download. The Download dialog box appears, then click OK. The user

program is downloaded to the FC6A.

Note: The Download dialog box can also be opened by
selecting Home > Download.

Note: When downloading a user program, all values andselections in the Function Area Settings are also downloaded
to the FC6A. For details on function settings, see "Functions
and Settings" on page 5-1.

When the following message appears, the download has completed successfully. Click OK.

Notes:• The PLC will not run if the function switch is 0 when Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch is enabled in WindLDR and a program isdownloaded with Automatic start after download enabled.
To run the PLC, the function switch must be set to 1.
• Enabled is the default setting for Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch in WindLDR.

4-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Monitor Operation
Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the computer. The input and output statuses of thesample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram.
From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows:

Rung 1:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q0 is turned off.
Rung 2:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q1 is turned off.
Rung 3:
When both input I0 and I1 are on,internal relay M10 is turned on.
M8121 is the 1-s clock special
internal relay.
While M10 is on, output Q2 flashes
in 1-s increments.

Exit WindLDRThis section describes the operating procedure to exit WindLDR.
When you have completed monitoring, you can exit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen. In
both cases, from the WindLDR application button, click Exit WindLDR.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-13

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Windows Displayed in the Workspace
This section describes how to change the position and display method of windows.

Changing the position of windows
You can change the display position of the window by dragging and dropping the title bar of the window or its tab to disable
docking. Windows that are not docked are called floating windows.

Disabling docking

This section describes how to disable the docking of a title bar or tab of a window.
• If you drag the title bar of the workspace window, you can move all the docked windows together.
Title bar

Drag and drop

• If you drag the tab of a workspace window, you can move just the selected window.

Drag and drop

Tabs

Docking windows
This section describes how to dock a floating window to another window or the frame at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of
WindLDR.
1. Drag the window’s title bar or tab.

The

4-14

(Docking) icon is displayed.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Note: When the mouse cursor gets close to a

(Docking) icon while dragging the title bar or tab, the location to dock the window is displayed.

Window docking
location

2. Drop the title bar or tab on theseparate window.

(Docking) icon to dock that window to WinidLDR’s left, right, top, or bottom frame or a

• If the workspace window is dropped on the• If a floating window is dropped on thedocked window.

(Docking) icon, it is docked to WindLDR’s left, right, top, or bottom frame.

(Docking) icon, it is docked to WindLDR’s left, right, top, or bottom frame or a

• If you put the mouse cursor on another window while dragging a floating windows title bar, the(Docking) icon isdisplayed. Drop the title bar on the(Docking) icon to dock the floating window to that window. Change the displayed
window with the tabs.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-15

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Changing the display method of windows
If the workspace window is docked, you can change the widow to automatically hide and show only its tabs.
• Click the(Auto Hide) icon to change the window to show only its tabs.

Auto Hide icon

Tabs

• The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs.
Mouse cursor

Notes:• Click• Click

4-16(Auto Hide) to secure the window in place.
(Close) to close the window.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Checking the WindLDR Version NumberThis section describes how to check the WindLDR version.
1. Click(application) button > WindLDR Options.

The WindLDR Options dialog box appears.

2. Click the Resources tab, and then click About.

The About WindLDR dialog box appears.

You can check the WindLDR version. When finished, click OK.

Note: When using the FC6A, use the following versions of WindLDR.
• All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module: WindLDR version 8.0.0 or later• Plus CPU module: WindLDR version 8.6.0 or later

If you are using a version of WindLDR that does not meet this condition, click Check for Updates on the Resources tab toobtain the latest version of WindLDR.
This concludes the procedure for checking the WindLDR version.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-17

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Ladder Program Operation
The FC6A performs the following operations to process ladder programs.

Input Device
I0: ON
I1: OFFI2: ONThe ON/OFF status of the input terminal(external input) is applied to the input
circuit. The input refresh loads the external
input status into the input devices (I) by
way of the input circuit.
A delay occurs until the ON/OFF status of
the input circuit is applied to the input
devices (I). The delay time is equal to filter
time + 1 scan time.

Input Refresh

Input Terminals
Input Circuit

The input device values are applied to theladder program.

0: ON
1: OFF
2: ON

Repeat operations
Processing other than the ladderprocessing is called the END
processing.

One sequence of operations is set as one
scan, and the time required is set as thescan time.

Output Terminals

Ladder Processing

0: ON
1: OFF
2: ON

Output Refresh

Output Device
The output devices are updated
according to the ladder program.

The output refresh applies the status of theoutput devices (Q) to the output circuit, andthen the ON/OFF status of the output
terminals (external input) is updated.
A delay occurs until the values of the output
devices (Q) are applied to the output circuit.
The delay time is at maximum 1 scan time.

Output Circuit

Q0: ON
Q1: OFF
Q2: ON

Other Processing

Notes:• The delay time of the hardware is added to the actual input and output delay times.
For details on the hardware input/output delay times, see "Product Specifications" on page 2-1.
• The filter time differs depending on the input used.
• When the input is a CPU module input (I0 to I27)
See the input filter time configured in the WindLDR Function Area Settings. The initial value is 3 ms.
• When the input is an expansion input (I30 or greater)
There is no filter time.

4-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Start/Stop Operation
This section describes how to run and stop the FC6A.

CautionMake sure of safety before starting and stopping the FC6A. Incorrect operation of the FC6A may cause machine damage or
accidents.

You can start and stop FC6A operations by using WindLDR operations, FC6A operations, function switch operations, menu
operations using an HMI module, by turning the FC6A on or off, or by using the stop/reset input function by way of external input.
• For operations using WindLDR, see "Start/Stop Operation Using WindLDR" on page 4-19.
• For operations using the FC6A power supply, see "Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply" on page 4-20.
• For operations using the function switch, see "Function Switch Configuration" on page 5-10.
• For operations using an HMI module, see "HMI Function" on page 7-1.
• For the stop input settings, see "Stop Input" on page 5-5.
• For the reset input settings, see "Reset Input" on page 5-5.
The switch from start to stop is performed during the END processing of the user program, and the following functions are also
stopped when the user program is stopped. For details on END processing, see the appendix "Breakdown of END Processing Time"in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
High-speed counter/frequency measurement/user interrupt/catch input/timer interrupt/user communication/pulse output• You can use M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Stopped) to select whether to maintain or clear the outputs while the CPU is
stopped.
For details on M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Stopped), see "M8025: Maintain Outputs While Stopped" on page 6-10.
• The current value of the timer instruction is reset.
For details on timer instructions, see Chapter 4 "TML (1-s Timer)" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
Also, when you switch from stop to start, the device status is cleared or kept depending on Memory Backup in the Function
Area Settings. For details, see "Memory Backup" on page 5-12.

Start/Stop Operation Using WindLDRThe FC6A can be started and stopped using WindLDR run on a Windows computer connected to the FC6A. When the Start button
is pressed in the menu bar shown below, start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on to start the FC6A. When the Stop
button is pressed, M8000 is turned off to stop the FC6A.
1. Connect the computer to the FC6A, start WindLDR, and power up the FC6A.
2. Check that a stop input is not designated using Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Stop and Reset Inputs. See "Stop

Input and Reset Input" on page 5-5.

Note: When a stop input is designated, the FC6A cannot be started or stopped by turning start control special internal relay M8000 on or off.

3. Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar.

The Online tab appears.

4. Click the Start button to start operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on.

5. Click the Stop button to stop operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned off.

The PLC operation can also be started and stopped while WindLDR is in the monitor mode. Select Online > Monitor >Monitor and click the Start or Stop button.

Note: Special internal relay M8000 is a keep type internal relay and stores the status when the power is turned off. M8000 retains its previous statuswhen the power is turned on again. However, when the backup battery is dead, M8000 loses the stored status, and can be turned on or off asprogrammed when the FC6A is powered up. The selection is made in Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop Selection at Memory

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4-19

4: O P ER ATI ON B ASI CS
Backup Error. See "Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error" on page 5-8.

Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply
The FC6A can be started and stopped by turning power on and off.
1. Power up the FC6A to start operation.
2. Turn power on and off to start and stop operation.

4-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the FC6A's special functions and convenient functions that you should know about in using the WindLDR(Windows compatible) PLC programming software.

Function List
The FC6A supports many functions in addition to instructions.
For functions that require advanced setup including the high-speed counters, user program protection functions, and Ethernet
communication functions, first configure those settings in the Function Area Settings dialog box, and then download the user
program to the FC6A.
Function Name
Stop input
Reset input
Run/stop selection at keep
data error
Run/stop selection at
power upFunction switch
configuration
Memory backup
High-speed counter
Catch inputInterrupt input
Frequency measurement
Input filter
Analog voltage input
Analog potentiometer
Timer interrupt
Forced I/O function
External memory devices
Log data file size
32-bit data storage setting
User program protection
Watchdog timer settings
Constant scan time
Time Zone
Daylight savings time
Clock function
Battery monitor

Overview
The FC6A can be started/stopped with a specified input.
The device values of the FC6A can be cleared with a specified input.
This function specifies the user program operating state (run/stop) when the
FC6A power is turned on when the backup battery has died.
Whether to start or stop the FC6A regardless of the M8000 status when the
FC6A is powered up can be specified.

Reference
5-6
5-6

This function configures the operation when the FC6A function switch is used.

5-10

Whether to clear or keep the device values, such as counter current values,
when the FC6A starts running can be specified.
The high-speed counters can be used to count input pulses from rotary
encoders or proximity switches regardless of the scan time.
The catch input can be used to receive short pulses from sensors regardlessof the scan time.
When a quick response to an external input is required, such as in positioning
control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to execute an interrupt
program.
The pulse frequency of input signals to input terminals can be counted
regardless of the scan time.
The input filter rejects short input pulses when the FC6A is used with input
signals containing noises.
Analog voltage input, such as input from pressure sensor, can be read andstored in special data register as digital value.
This function changes the analog value used in a user program with the
FC6A's analog potentiometer.
When executing the same program repeatedly regardless of the scan time isrequired, the timer interrupt can call a subroutine at specified time interval.
The inputs or outputs of the FC6A can forcibly be turned on or off regardlessof the actual inputs and outputs status.
Configure the CSV file format of the log data to save to the SD memory card.
The maximum file size of the log data that is saved to the SD memory card
can be configured.
The order of upper and lower words for 32-bit data can be specified.
The user program in the FC6A can be protected with a password against theuser program upload or download.
The watchdog timer monitors the FC6A operation and the watchdog timepreset value can be changed.
The scan time of the FC6A can be made constant by specifying the constantscan time.
This function sets the time zone as the difference between the FC6A internal
clock and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
The internal clock of the FC6A can automatically be adjusted according to theconfigured daylight saving time period.
The FC6A can operate according to the current date and time and be used inapplications, such as lighting or air conditioning.
This function monitors the voltage of the backup battery.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Setup Location

5-8
5-9

5-12
5-14
5-34

Function area
settings

5-36
5-39
5-41
5-43
5-45
5-47
5-49

Monitor

5-53
5-54
5-55
5-57
5-60

Function area
settings

5-61
5-62
5-63
5-64

Instructions

5-67

—

5-1

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Function Name
USB boot

Overview
This function starts the FC6A with only USB bus power (5 V).

User program capacity

This function selects the FC6A user program capacity.

Online Edit
Communication port
Network settings
Ethernet Port 1
Ethernet Port 2
Network management

This function rewrites the user program without stopping FC6A operation.
Configures the communication methods and ports for the connected devices.
Configures information for connecting the FC6A to a network.
Configures Ethernet port 1 and the functions that use Ethernet port 1.
Configures Ethernet port 2 and the functions that use Ethernet port 2.
Configures SNTP settings and the PING instruction timeout time.
Communication mode and parameters for the Ethernet communication can be
configured for each connection so that the FC6A can communicate with othernetwork devices over the Ethernet.

Connection settings

Reference
5-69
5-71
5-72
Communication
ManualSetup Location—
Function area
settings—*1

Function area
settings*2

Communication
Manual

*1 For BACnet/IP communication, EtherNet/IP communication, and MQTT communication, see the "Network User’s Manual". For other functions
and settings, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
*2 Settings for BACnet/IP communication, EtherNet/IP communication, and MQTT communication are made in the dialog box for each
communication function. Each dialog box is displayed in the following steps.
Communication

5-2

Steps

BACnet/IP
communication

1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Ethernet Port 1.
2. The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed. Under BACnet/IP settings, select the Enable BACnet/
IP check box and click Configure.

EtherNet/IP
communication

1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Ethernet Port 2.
2. The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed. Under EtherNet/IP settings, select the Enable
EtherNet/IP check box and click Configure.

MQTT communication

1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Ethernet Port 1.
2. The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed. Under MQTT settings, click Configure.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Function Area Settings
This section describes the function area settings that configure the environment settings for using the FC6A, such as the operation
when starting the FC6A and the communication ports.
The function area settings are configured on the Function Area Settings dialog box in the WindLDR PLC programming software(Windows compatible).

Displaying the Dialog Box

To display the Function Area Settings dialog box, on the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click a
configuration item.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed with the selected configuration item.

Configuration Items and Functions

The function area settings configuration items and functions are as follows.
Run/Stop Control

Configure the following run/stop control settings.
 Stop input
 Reset input
 Run/stop selection at memory backup error
 Run/stop selection at power up
 Function switch configuration

Memory Backup

These functions keep or clear devices (the contents of memory) when a user program starts operation(RUN).
The following devices can be configured to be kept or cleared.
 Internal relays
 Shift registers
 Counters Data registers

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-3

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Input Configuration

These settings configure special input functions such as the external input filter values and high-speed counters.
 High-speed counter Catch input
 Interrupt input
 Frequency measurement
 Input filter
 Analog voltage input
 Analog input
 Timer interrupt

Communication Ports

These settings configure the FC6A communication ports that communicate with external devices.
 Maintenance communication
 User communication
 Modbus RTU master/slave Data link master/slave station
 J1939 (CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module only)

External Memory
Devices

These settings configure the CSV file format and the maximum file size of the log data that is saved to
the SD memory card.
 CSV file format

 Data log and trace*1

Device Settings

Configure the order to store the upper and lower words for 32-bit data.

Program Protection

Applies the protection to the user program by configuring a password so unauthorized users cannot
inadvertently upload or download it.

Self Diagnostic

Configure the watchdog timer monitoring the operating status of the FC6A.

Calendar & Clock

The FC6A is equipped with an internal clock and its calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week)
and clock data (hour, minute, second) can be used in user programs. Daylight savings time can also be
configured for the internal clock.

Network Settings*2
Network
Management*2

These settings configure information for connecting the All-in-One CPU module to a network using Ethernet
port 1.
These settings configure the FC6A's internal clock and the ping timeout time for the PING instruction
and when the auto ping function is being executed.
 SNTP settings
 Ping settings

Ethernet Port 1*1

These settings configure information for connecting the Plus CPU module to a network using Ethernet
port 1. These settings are also used to configure SNTP settings for getting the time, the ping timeout
duration when using the PING instruction or auto ping, the send e-mail settings, web server settings,
and FTP client/server settings.
 IP settings
 DNS settings
 SNTP settings
 Ping settings
 E-mail settings
 Web server settings
 FTP client settings
 FTP server settings

Ethernet Port 2*1

These settings configure information for connecting the Plus CPU module to a network using Ethernet
port 2. These settings are also used to configure the ping timeout duration when using the PING
instruction or auto ping.
 IP settings
 DNS settings
 Ping settings

Connection Settings

These settings configure server/client communication used in FC6A Ethernet communication.
 Maintenance communication server User communication server/client User communication (UDP)*1

 Modbus TCP communication server/client MC protocol client*1 Can be used only with the Plus CPU module.
*2 Can be used only with the All-in-One CPU module.

5-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Stop Input and Reset Input
As described on "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19, the FC6A can be started and stopped using a stop input or reset input,
which can be designated from the Function Area Settings menu. When the designated stop or reset input is turned on, theFC6A stops operation.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings.

Stop Input

This section describes the stop input that stops execution of the FC6A user program with an external input.

Function Description

This function stops execution of the FC6A user program with an external input, such as a switch on a control panel.
Specify an FC6A normal external input for the stop input.
When the stop input is turned on, the user program that is being executed will stop. When the stop input is turned off, the user
program will be executed from the beginning.
RUN

RUN/STOP status
Start control(M8000)Stop input

STOP
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*1

Function switch(When RUN/STOP control setting disabled)

*2

1
0
*3

*4

*3

*1 Even when M8000 (start control) is turned off, if the stop input is off, the FC6A maintains the RUN status.
*2 Even when the stop input is off, M8000 (start control) is off, so the FC6A does not change to the RUN status.
*3 When the function switch is set to the function to control FC6A RUN/STOP, the status changes to that corresponding to the stop input andM8000 when the function switch is 1.
*4 When the function switch is set to the function to control FC6A RUN/STOP, the status will not change to the RUN status if M8000 is turned onwhen the function switch is 0.

The external inputs that can be specified as the stop input are as follows.
All-in-One CPU module
Type
External Input

16-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10

24-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10 to I15

40-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10 to I17, I20 to I27

Plus CPU module
Type
Plus 16-I/O type
Plus 32-I/O type
External Input
I0 to I7
I0 to I7, I10 to I17
Notes:
 The stop input operation has priority over the WindLDR RUN/STOP operation (M8000 ON/OFF).
 In addition to the FC6A stopping the user program with an external input, RUN/STOP operations can also be performed by operating thefunction switch and by changing the start control (M8000) value with WindLDR.
 While the reset input is on, user program execution stops. For details on the reset input, see "Reset Input" on page 5-5.

Reset Input

This section describes the reset input that clears FC6A device values with an external input.

Function Description

This function clears FC6A device values with an external input, such as a switch on a control panel. Specify an FC6A normal
external input for the reset input.
When the reset input is turned on, the user program that is being executed will stop, and all devices and general errors will becleared except the special internal relays and special data registers. When the reset input is turned off, the user program will be
executed from the beginning.
To turn off the reset input and execute the user program again, the following conditions must be met.
 M8000 is on
 The stop input is off (when the stop input has been configured) The function switch is 1 (when the function to control FC6A RUN/STOP has been configured)If these conditions are not met, the user program will not be executed and the FC6A will remain stopped even if the reset input isturned off.
The external inputs that can be specified as the reset input are as follows.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-5

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
All-in-One CPU module
Type
External Input

16-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10

24-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10 to I15

Plus 16-I/O type
I0 to I7

Plus 32-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10 to I17

40-I/O type
I0 to I7, I10 to I17, I20 to I27

Plus CPU module
Type
External Input

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Run/Stop Control appears.

2. Click the check box under the Stop and Reset Inputs.
Stop Input:

Click the check box on the left of Use Stop Input and type a desired input number available on the FC6A in the Stop
Input field.

Reset Input:

Click the check box on the left of Use Reset Input and type a desired reset number available on the FC6A in the Reset
Input field.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.
Default:

No stop and reset inputs are designated.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.
After you download the user program, you can stop it by turning on I0.

5-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
When I1 is specified as the reset input and I1 is turned on, the user program is stopped and device values are cleared.
Device values of FC6A at each status is as follows:
During Run

StoppedStop to Run

During Reset

Power Off

Programoperation

OFF

Maintained

OFF

OFF

Range Specified as"Keep"*1

Programoperation

Maintained

Maintained

ClearedMaintained

Range Specified as"Clear"*1

Programoperation

Maintained

ClearedClearedMaintainedSpecial Internal Relays

Programoperation*2

Maintained

Maintained*2

Special Data Registers

Programoperation

Maintained

Maintained

Maintained

Maintained

Non-retentive Data Registers

Programoperation

Maintained

Maintained

ClearedClearedTimer Current Values

Programoperation

Maintained

Initialized

ClearedClearedOutputs
Internal
Relays, Shift
Registers,
Counters, Data
Registers*1 Keep and clear designations for internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers can be configured in the Function Area Settings
dialog box in WindLDR. For details, see "Memory Backup" on page 5-12.
*2 See "Special Internal Relay" on page 6-4.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-7

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error
This section describes the function for specifying the run/stop status of the user program when the FC6A "keep" data is lost.
The keep data (data that is maintained by the FC6A), such as the device values and the current time, is lost when the FC6A poweris turned off and left this way for a long time such that the backup battery dies. When the FC6A has lost its keep data and is turned
on, a keep data error occurs. You can specify the run/stop status of the user program when this keep data error occurs.
Specify Stop when unexpected operation may result due to running the FC6A when the keep data has been lost. Specify Run
when you want to run the FC6A at all times regardless of whether a keep data error has occurred.
Notes:
 The FC6A uses the backup battery to maintain the run/stop status (status of M8000) immediately before the power is turned off. When the
power is turned on, operation starts according to the maintained run/stop status.
 If you turn on the FC6A with its maintained data deleted, a keep data error will occur and the value of the special internal relay M8000 (start

control) will be lost.
 If a keep data error occurs, the data kept by the FC6A will be lost.
 If you specify Stop for Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error, the FC6A will stop if a keep data error occurs. To run the FC6A, performthe appropriate operations from WindLDR, an HMI module, or the main unit's function switch. For details, see "Start/Stop Operation" on page4-19.
 When a keep data error occurs, the error code is written to special data register D8005 (general error code). For details, see "General Error

Codes" on page 13-3.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Click RUN or STOP under Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up
Start control special internal relay M8000 maintains its status when the FC6A is powered down. When powered up, the FC6A is
started or stopped according to the M8000 status. The Run/Stop Selection at Power Up is used to select whether to start or stop
the FC6A regardless of the M8000 status when the FC6A is powered up.
Stop and reset inputs and function switch have priority over Run/Stop Selection at Power Up. When the memory backup error
occurs, the FC6A is started or stopped according to Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error regardless of Run/Stop Selection
at Power Up. For start/stop operation, see "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19.
Since this settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing this settings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Run/Stop Control appears.

2. Click the button under Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
Keep Run/Stop State at Power Down (Default):
Click this button to keep the run/stop status at power down when the FC6A is powered up.
Run (M8000 is turned on):Click this button to always start the FC6A when the FC6A is powered up. However, when the function to control running and stopping the FC6A
is set for the function switch, the function switch must be set to 1.
Stop (M8000 is turned off):
Click this button to always stop the FC6A when the FC6A is powered up.

This example designates
Keep Run/Stop Status atPower Down.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-9

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Function Switch Configuration
This section describes the function of the function switch on the front of the FC6A.

Function Description

When Function switch is 0, special internal relay M8073 (Function switch status) turns off. When Function switch is 1, M8073 turns
on. The function switch can be used as an external switch by using M8073.
When special internal relay M8000 (start control) is on, running and stopping the FC6A can be controlled with the function switch.
Notes:
 Stop input and reset input have priority over the status of M8000.
 Enabled is the default setting for Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch and Turn on M8000 when function switch is changed from"0" to "1". in WindLDR.

When RUN/STOP PLC by Function Switch is disabled
(1)

(1)

RUN

RUN/STOP status
Start control(M8000)

STOP
ON
OFF

Function switch(When RUN/STOP control setting disabled)1

Function switch status(M8073)

ON

0

OFF

(1) The FC6A run/stop status is controlled by the status of M8000, regardless of the function switch.
* M8073 turns on and off according to the status of the function switch.
When RUN/STOP PLC by Function Switch is enabled and Turn on M8000 when function switch is changed from "0" to"1". is disabled
(1)

(2)

(3)

(2)

(3)

(2)

(4)

RUN

RUN/STOP status
Start control(M8000)

STOP
ON
OFF

Function switch(When RUN/STOP control setting disabled)1

Function switch status(M8073)

ON

0

OFF

(1) When the function switch is 0, the FC6A remains in the stopped state, even when M8000 is turned on.
(2) When the function switch is changed from 0 to 1, the FC6A runs or stops according to the status of M8000.
(3) When the function switch is 1, the FC6A stops when M8000 is turned off.
(4) When the function switch is changed from 1 to 0, the FC6A stops.
* M8073 turns on and off according to the status of the function switch.

5-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
When Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch and Turn on M8000 when function switch is changed from "0" to "1". areenabled (For the default setting)
(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

RUN

RUN/STOP status

STOP

Start control(M8000)ON
OFFFunction switch(When RUN/STOP control setting disabled)1

Function switch status(M8073)

ON

0

OFF

(1) When the function switch is 0, the FC6A remains in the stopped state, even when M8000 is turned on.
(2) When the function switch is changed from 0 to 1, and when M8000 is off, it is turned on (remains on when on) and the FC6A
runs.
(3) When the function switch is 1, the FC6A stops when M8000 is turned off.
(4) When the function switch is changed from 1 to 0, the FC6A stops.
* M8073 turns on and off according to the status of the function switch.

WindLDR Settings

When assigning the function to control FC6A running and stopping to the function switch, you must configure Run/Stop Control
under Function Switch in the WindLDR Function Area Settings.
Operation procedure

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Run/Stop Control.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Run/Stop PLC by Function Switch check box.

Select the Turn on M8000 when function switch is changed from "0" to "1". check box.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-11

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Memory Backup
The statuses of internal relays and shift register bits are usually cleared at startup. It is also possible to designate all or a block ofconsecutive internal relays or shift register bits as “keep” types. Counter current values and data register values are usually
maintained at powerup. It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive counters and data registers as “clear” types.
When the FC6A is stopped, these statuses and values are maintained. When the FC6A is reset by turning on a designated reset
input, these statues and values are cleared despite the settings in the Configure Keep/Clear Settings dialog box shown below. The
keep/clear settings in this dialog box are not maintained when restarting the FC6A.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings. Device addresses that can be kept or cleared are as follows.
DeviceInternal Relay

SettingAll-in-One CPU module
Type

Shift Register

Counter

Specify device address to keep
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU
modulePlus CPU module

Data Register

Specify device address to clear

M0000-M7997,
M10000-M17497

R000-R255

C000-C511

D0000-D7999,
D10000-D55999

M0000 to M7997,
M10000 to M21247

R000 to R255

C000 to C511

D0000 to D7999,
D10000 to D61999*1*1 Memory backup for the non-retentive data registers (D70000 to D269999) is not supported.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Memory Backup.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Configure Keep/Clear Settings appears.

2. Click the buttons under Internal Relay, Shift Register, Counter, and Data Register to clear all, keep all, or keep/clear specified

range as required.

Resets all Function Area Settingsvalues to defaults.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Internal Relay ‘Keep’ Designation (M0000 to M7997)
Clear All:
Keep All:
Keep Specified Range:

Clears the internal relays (M0000 to M7997) when the FC6A starts operation.
Keeps the status of the internal relays (M0000 to M7997) while the FC6A power is off.
Keeps the status of the internal relays in the specified range while the FC6A power is off.

Start Keep Number

End Keep Number ( Start Keep Number)

When a range of M50 through M100 is designated as shown in the example above, M50 through M100 are keeptypes, M0 through M47 and M101 through M7997 are clear types.

Internal Relay ‘Keep’ Designation (All-in-One CPU module: M10000 to M17497, Plus CPU module: M10000
to M21247)
Clear All:
Keep All:
Keep Specified Range:

Clears the internal relays (All-in-One CPU module: M10000 to M17497, Plus CPU module: M10000 to M21247)
when the FC6A starts operation.
Keeps the status of the internal relays (All-in-One CPU module: M10000 to M17497, Plus CPU module: M10000 to
M21247) while the FC6A power is off.
Keeps the status of the internal relays in the specified range while the FC6A power is off.

Shift Register ‘Keep’ Designation
Clear All:
Keep All:
Keep Specified Range:

All shift register bit statuses are cleared at startup (default).
All shift register bit statuses are maintained at startup.
A specified range of shift register bits are maintained at startup. Enter the start “keep” number in the left field
and the end “keep” number in the right field. The start “keep” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“keep” number.

Counter ‘Clear’ Designation
Clear All:
Keep All:
Clear Specified Range:

All counter current values are cleared at startup.
Keeps all counter current values while the FC6A power is off.
A specified range of counter current values are cleared at startup. Enter the start “clear” number in the left field
and the end “clear” number in the right field. The start “clear” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“clear” number.

Data Register ‘Clear’ Designation (D0000 to D7999)
Clear All:
Keep All:
Clear Specified Range:

Clears the values of the data registers (D0000 to D7999) when the FC6A starts operation.
Keeps the values of the data registers (D0000 to D7999) while the FC6A power is off.
A specified range of data register values are cleared at startup. Enter the start “clear” number in the left field andthe end “clear” number in the right field. The start “clear” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“clear” number.

Data Register ‘Clear’ Designation (All-in-One CPU module: D10000 to D55999, Plus CPU module: D10000 to
D61999)Clear All:
Keep All:
Clear Specified Range:

Clears the values of the data registers (All-in-One CPU module: D10000 to D55999, Plus CPU module: D10000 to
D61999) when the FC6A starts operation.
Keeps the values of the data registers (All-in-One CPU module: D10000 to D55999, Plus CPU module: D10000 to
D61999) while the FC6A power is off.
A specified range of data register values are cleared at startup. Enter the start “clear” number in the left field andthe end “clear” number in the right field. The start “clear” number must be smaller than or equal to the end“clear” number.

Notes:
 When the FC6A has lost its keep data, the Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error setting has priority over the Run/Stop
Selection at Power Up setting.
 Relays and registers specified as Clear All or Clear Specified Range are cleared when the FC6A starts operation. The values while thepower is off are retained until the power is turned on and operation is started.
 Keep/clear settings cannot be configured for special data registers. They operate the same as Keep All.
 Keep/clear settings cannot be configured for special internal relays. For operation when the power is shut off and when stopped, see"Devices" - "Special Internal Relay" on page 6-4.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-13

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
High-Speed Counter
This section describes the high-speed counter for counting high-speed pulses from devices such as rotary encoders and proximity
switches. The high-speed counter is a function that counts high-speed pulses with the FC6A hardware that cannot be read in theexecution of a normal user program. The high-speed counter has a comparator function to compare the current value and a preset
value (target value). When the current value and the preset value match, an external output is turned on or an interrupt programis executed.
The high-speed counter has a single-phase high-speed counter and a two-phase high-speed counter.
To use high-speed counters, WindLDR function area settings are required.
■ Application example
This application example punches holes into a roll of paper at a regular interval. The two pulses (A-phase, B-phase) that carry
the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by the FC6A two-phase high-speed counter.
When the current value reaches the preset value, the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches a hole in theroll of paper.
Paper Roll

Paper Feed Roller

Perforator
Pulse Motor
RotaryEncoder

FC6A Series MICROSmart

High-speed counter operation modes

The high-speed counter has the following two operation modes:
 Single-phase high-speed counter Two-phase high-speed counter

High-speed counting modes

The high-speed counter has the following five counting modes:
 Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter) Up/down selection reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter) Dual-pulse reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter) 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter) 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)

Example: The input allocation when external input group 1 is specified as a two-phase high-speed counter
External input
High-speed counter

5-14

I0

I1





I2


A-phaseB-phaseExternal reset input (Z-phase)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
High-speed Counter External Inputs
The maximum points of the single-phase high-speed counter and two-phase high speed counter are as follows.
Type

16-I/O type24-I/O type40-I/O type

Plus 16-I/O type

Plus 32-I/O type

Single-phase High-speed
Counter Points (maximum)

6

6

6

6

6

Two-phase High-speed
Counter Points (maximum)

2

2

2

3

3

Single-phase high-speed counterAll-in-One CPU module
Group

2

3

4

External Input

I2

1
I0

I1

I3

I4

I5

5
I6

I7

6

Adding Counter

Reset input*1

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Reset input*1

Pulse input

Pulse input

Up/Down
SelectionReversible
Counter

Reset input*1

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input*2——

Reset input*1

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input*2

Dual-pulse
Reversible
Counter

Reset input*1

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)*3——

Reset input*1

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)*3*1 If I2 or I5 is not used as reset inputs, they can be used as normal inputs.
*2 If Group 1 and Group 5 are used as Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter, use I1 as the Group 1 input (up/down selection input) and use
I7 as the Group 5 input (up/down selection input).
*3 If Group 1 and Group 5 are used as Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter, use I1 as the Group 1 input (pulse input) and I7 as Group 5 input (pulse
input).

Plus CPU module
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

External Input

I2

I0

I1

I13*1

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

Adding CounterReset
input*2

Pulse input

Pulse input

Reset
input*2

Pulse input

Pulse input

Reset
input*2

Pulse input

Pulse input

Up/Down
SelectionReversible
Counter

Reset input

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input*3

Reset input

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input*3

Reset input

Pulse input

Up/down
selection
input*3

Dual-pulse
Reversible
Counter

Reset input

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)*4

Reset input

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)*4

Reset input

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)*4*1 Can be used only with the Plus 32-I/O type.
*2 If I2, I5 or I13 is not used as reset inputs, they can be used as normal inputs.
*3 If Group 1, Group 3, or Group 5 is used as Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter, I1 is used as the up/down selection input of Group 1,
I4 is used as the up/down selection input of Group 3, and I7 is used as the up/down selection input of Group 5, respectively.
*4 If Group 1, Group 3, or Group 5 is used as Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter, I1 is used as the pulse input of Group 1, I4 is used as the pulse
input of Group 3, and I7 is used as the pulse input of Group 5, respectively.

Two-phase high-speed counterAll-in-One CPU module

External inputs I0/I1 (Group 1-2) and I6/I7 (Group 5-6) can be used as two-phase high-speed counters.
External inputs I2 and I5 can be used as reset inputs for Group 1-2 and Group 5-6.
Group
External Input
Two-phase
High-speed
Counter

2

3

4

I2

1
I0

I1

I3

I4

I5

5
I6

I7

6

Reset input(Z-phase)*1

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)——

Reset input(Z-phase)*1

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)*1 If I2 or I5 is not used as reset inputs, they can be used as normal inputs.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-15

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Plus CPU module

External inputs I0/I1 (Group 1-2), external inputs I3/I4 (Group 3-4), and external inputs I6/I7 (Group 5-6) can be used as twophase high-speed counters.
External inputs I2, I13 (Plus 32-I/O type only), and I5 can be used as reset inputs for Group 1-2, Group 3-4, and Group 5-6
respectively.
Group
External Input
Two-phase
High-speed
Counter

2

3

I2

1
I0

I1

I13*1

I3

I4

4
I5

5
I6

I7

Reset input(Z-phase)*2

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

Reset input(Z-phase)*2

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

Reset input(Z-phase)*2

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)*1 Can be used only with the Plus 32-I/O type.
*2 If I2, I13 (Plus 32-I/O type only), or I5 is not used as reset inputs (Z-phase), they can be used as normal inputs.

5-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
High-Speed Counter Operation
The high-speed counter turns on an external output or executes an interrupt program when the current value matches the preset
value (target value).
For how to configure the function to turn on an external output, see "Comparison Actions" on page 5-20.

All-in-One CPU module■ Single-phase high-speed counter
Group 1, group 2, group 5, group 6 single-phase high-speed counter The high-speed counter has three operation modes, the adding counter, the up/down selection reversible counter, and the dual-pulse

reversible counter.
 The up/down selection reversible counter and the dual-pulse reversible counter which can count in both directions are supported.
 These groups support 100 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, a comparison output turns on or an interrupt

program is executed.
 These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external reset input. When the reset is executed, thecurrent value returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers. For the reset input details, see "Reset input" on page 5-27.
Counting Mode

Frequency

Reset Input

Group 2, 6: 100 kHz—

Adding counter

Group 1: 100 kHz

I2Group 5: 100 kHz

I5

Up/down selection
reversible counter

Group 1-2: 100 kHz

I2Group 5-6: 100 kHz

I5

Dual-pulse reversible
counterGroup 1-2: 100 kHz

I2Group 5-6: 100 kHz

I5Group 3, group 4 single-phase high-speed counter These groups only support the adding counter.
 These groups support 5 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns on or an interrupt programis executed.
 These groups only support the reset input via a special internal relay. When the reset is executed, the current value returns to the reset value

specified by the special data registers.
Counting Mode
Adding counter

Frequency

Reset Input

Group 3, 4: 5 kHz—■ Two-phase high-speed counter
Group 1-2, group 5-6 two-phase high-speed counter The two-phase high-speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input.
 These groups support 50 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
 When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns on or an interrupt programis executed.
 These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external reset input (Z-phase). When the reset is

executed, the current value returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers.
Counting Mode
2-edge count4-edge countFrequency

Reset Input (Z-phase)Group 1-2: 50 kHz

I2Group 5-6: 50 kHz

I5Group 1-2: 25 kHz

I2Group 5-6: 25 kHz

I5

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-17

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Plus CPU module■ Single-phase high-speed counter The single-phase high-speed counter has three operation modes, the adding counter, the up/down selection reversible counter, and the dual-

pulse reversible counter.
 The up/down selection reversible counter and the dual-pulse reversible counter which can count in both directions are supported.
 This counter support 100 kHz (pulse width ≥ 5 μs) maximum pulse input and is capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 When the current value and preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, a comparison output turns on or an interrupt program is

executed.
 This counter support resetting the current value by special internal relay reset input and reset input. When the reset input is turned on orwhen the current value reset is executed, the current value becomes the reset value specified by special data registers. For details on thereset input, see "Reset input" on page 5-27.
Counting Mode

Adding counter

Up/down selection
reversible counter

Dual-pulse reversible
counterFrequency

Reset Input

Group 2, 4, 6: 100 kHz—

Group 1: 100 kHz

I2Group 3: 100 kHz*1Group 5: 100 kHz

I5Group 1 to 2: 100 kHz

I2Group 3 to 4: 100 kHz*1Group 5 to 6: 100 kHz

I5Group 1 to 2: 100 kHz

I2Group 3 to 4: 100 kHz*1Group 5 to 6: 100 kHz

I5*1 The Plus 16-I/O type supports only reset input by special internal relay.
The Plus 32-I/O type can use I13 as an external reset input.

■ Two-phase high-speed counter
Group 1 to 2, group 3 to 4, group 5 to 6 two-phase high-speed counter The two-phase high-speed counter counts with the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse inputs.
 These groups support 50 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
 Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
 When the current value and preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, a comparison output turns on or an interrupt program is

executed.
 These groups support resetting the current value by special internal relay reset input and external reset input (Z-phase). When the reset

input is turned on or the current value reset is executed, the current value becomes the reset value specified by special data registers.
Counting Mode
2-edge count4-edge countFrequency

Reset Input (Z-phase)Group 1 to 2: 50 kHz

I2Group 3 to 4: 50 kHz*1Group 5 to 6: 50 kHz

I5Group 1 to 2: 25 kHz

I2Group 3 to 4: 25 kHz*1Group 5 to 6: 25 kHz

I5*1 The Plus 16-I/O type supports only reset input by special internal relay.
The Plus 32-I/O type can use I13 as an external reset input.

5-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Counting mode
The high-speed counter as the following five counting modes.
■ Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input

10

Current value

11

12

13

14

■ Up/down selection reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
Up/down selection reversible counter can switch between addition and subtraction by pulse input with the up/down selection
input. When the up/down selection input is on, the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When the up/down selection
input is off, the counter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Up/down selection
input

Pulse input

Current value

10

11

12

11

10

■ Dual-pulse reversible counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
This counter switches between the up count and the down count with pulse input (up) and pulse input (down). When a pulse is
input to pulse input (up), the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When a pulse is input to pulse input (down), thecounter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input (down)
Input

Pulse input (up)Current value

10

11

12

11

10

■ 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of the B-phase.
A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

0

1

2

3

4

3

2

1

0

■ 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase,the counter counts down with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase.
A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

5

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

4

3

2

1

0

5-19

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Comparison Actions
The operating condition when comparing values is configured in the WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings, underComparison Action.
The action when comparing values is Comparison Output or Interrupt Program, so specify an external output number orlabel number when comparing.

Operation

When the preset value and the current value are compared and the values match, the specified output is turned on or the interrupt
program is executed.
A maximum of six high-speed counter preset values can be configured. For one preset value, the current value is compared withthe same preset value each time.
When multiple preset values are configured, the preset value is changed each time the current value and preset value match.
For example, if four preset values are configured, when preset value 1 matches the current value, the comparison subject changes
to preset value 2  3  4 in order.
When the final preset value 4 matches the current value, the preset value returns to preset value 1 and the values are compared.
■ Preset value storage locations
The preset values during high-speed counter operation are stored as 2 words in special data registers.
Single-phase high-speed counter (Adding counter)
Group
Preset Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Upper Word

D8212

D8194

D8220

D8224

D8228

D8200

Lower Word

D8213

D8195

D8221

D8225

D8229

D8201

Read/WriteR

Single-phase high-speed counter (Up/down selection reversible counter, dual-pulse reversible counter),
two-phase high-speed counterAll-in-One CPU moduleGroup
Preset Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Upper Word

D8212

—

D8228

Lower Word

D8213

—

D8229

Read/WriteR

Plus CPU moduleGroup
Preset Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Upper Word

D8212

D8220

D8228

Lower Word

D8213

D8221

D8229

Read/WriteR

Note: In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, when 32-bit Data Storage Setting is set to From Lower Word, the lower word is stored in
the first device.

Specify the data registers to store the preset values in WindLDR and store those preset values in the user program. Specify thestart address of the data registers to allocate the data registers to the individual settings in the comparison settings. When thehigh-speed counter is executed, the preset value with the number stored in Current Comparison Number is active. The active
preset value number for each comparison is stored in Current Comparison Number and the next active preset value number is
automatically stored in Next Comparison Number. By changing the value of Next Comparison Number in the user program,the next active preset value number can be changed. The active preset value is stored for each group in the special data registers
shown in the table above.

5-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example: Group 1, number of comparisons is 3, set to device address D0

When the current value matches preset value 1, Current Comparison Number becomes 2 and 3 is stored in Next Comparison
Number.
When the device address is configured as D0, Current Comparison Number is stored in D1 and Next Comparison Number isstored in D2.
For the group 1 preset value, the value of the data registers (D4, D5) allocated to preset value number 1 is stored in D8212 andD8213 as shown in the table above and it is compared to the current value.
Current value
and preset
value 1
matchedCurrent value
and preset
value 3matchedCounting State

Current
Comparison
Number (D1)

0

→

1

→

2

→

3

→

1

Next
Comparison
Number (D2)

1

→

2

→

3

→

1

→

2

Before the count action, set Current
Comparison Number to 0, and set
Next Comparison Number and preset
values 1 to 3 to the count values with theinitialize pulse in the user program.

Count
Action start

Current value
and preset
value 2
matchedCount
Before action

Preset value 1 is set toCurrent Comparison
NumberPreset value 2
is set.

Preset value 3
is set.

RepeatOnce again, preset
value 1 is set.

Note: When the Next Comparison Number preset value becomes active, the high-speed counter preset value during execution does not change,even when the preset value for that preset value number is changed. When the current value and the current preset value match, the preset value
with the number stored in Next Comparison Number becomes active. Changes to the Next Comparison Number data register must be
performed before the preset value becomes active.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-21

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Comparison operation flow

The comparison operation flow is as follows.
1. Start (run) the FC6A.

For the first scan, Current Comparison Number is set to 0, and Next Comparison Number is set to the number for preset
value 1 with the initialize pulse.
For the second scan, an I/O refresh is performed in END processing and the value of Next Comparison Number is transferred
to Current Comparison Number.
The content of Next Comparison Number becomes the preset value n + 1 ("2" in this example).
When Number of Comparisons is 1, Next Comparison Number is always "1".

The data register that stores the preset value (target value).
Specify the starting address.
The outputs (external outputs) when the values match.
Transfer

The preset value with the number that became active is thecomparison subject with the current value and is stored in the special
data registers.
Example: For group 1
Storage destination for the preset value that became active.
Stored by group.
Group

1

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8212

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8213

Read/Write

R/W

2. Start the high-speed counter count operation.

Turn on the gate input to start the count operation.

3. Compare the Current Comparison Number preset value and the current value. When the current value and the preset value

match, the next number for the preset value becomes active and the high-speed counter continues counting.
Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program. (Comparison Output in this example)

 Turn on the comparison (special internal relay) for only one scan.

 Overwrite Current Comparison Number with Next Comparison Number and start the count with the preset value for Current

Comparison Number.

 Add 1 to Next Comparison Number.

4. When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6, repeat again from the beginning with preset value 1.
Note: The Current Comparison Number data register cannot be written to during the count action. It is read-only. Next Comparison Number
and Comparison 1 to Comparison 6 can be read and written to.

5-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR

To use the high-speed counter, a normal external input must be specified as Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter in the
WindLDR Function Area Settings. The function for external input groups on the FC6A can be selected as normal input, highspeed counter, catch input, interrupt input, and frequency measurement.
When using normal input, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurement, the high-speed counter cannot be used.
However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for the group to use the high-speed counter.

The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

3. Configure the operation mode and the counting mode.

To use comparison actions, configure the comparison settings.

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-23

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Settings■ Operation mode
For group 1 and group 5, you can select Single-phase High-speed Counter or Two-phase High-speed Counter.
Only Single-phase High-speed Counter can be selected for Group 2, Group 4, and Group 6.
The operation mode that can be selected for Group 3 depends on the type of FC6A.
Only Single-phase High-speed Counter can be selected for the All-in-One CPU module. Single-phase High-speed
Counter and Two-phase High-speed Counter can be selected for the Plus CPU module.
■ Counting mode (single-phase high-speed counter)
When the Single-phase High-speed Counter is specified for Operation Mode of Group 1 or Group 5, Counting Mode canbe selected as Adding Counter, Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter, or Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter.
Only Adding Counter can be selected for Group 2, Group 4, and Group 6 high-speed counters.
The counting mode that can be selected for Group 3 depends on the type of FC6A.
Only Adding Counter can be selected for the All-in-One CPU module. Adding Counter, Up/Down Selection Reversible
Counter, and Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter can be selected for the Plus CPU module.
Adding counter

The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Up/down selection reversible counter

Up/down selection reversible counter can switch between addition and subtraction with the up/down selection input. When theup/down selection input is on, the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When the up/down selection input is off, thecounter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Dual-pulse reversible counter

This counter switches between the up count and the down count with pulse input (up) and pulse input (down) pulses. When apulse is input to pulse input (up), the counter counts up with the rise in the pulse. When a pulse is input to pulse input (down),
the counter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Note: When Group 1, Group 3 (Plus CPU module), or Group 5 is set to Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter, Dual-Pulse Reversible
Counter, or Two-phase High-speed Counter, Group 2, Group 4, or Group 6 has the same setting.

■ Counting mode (two-phase high-speed counter)
When the two-phase high-speed counter is specified for Operation mode for group 1, group 3 (Plus CPU module), or group 5, thecounting mode can be selected as 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
2-edge countThis counter counts at double the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of the B-phase.
4-edge countThis counter counts at quadruple the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase precedes the Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the A-phase,the counter counts down with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase.
■ Comparison action
The comparison action is a function that compares the high-speed counter's current value with a preset value (target value).
It can use either the comparison output or an interrupt program. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladderprogram is selected as the programming language.
 When Comparison Output is selected, the specified external output is turned on when the current value and the preset value match.

 When Interrupt Program is selected, the subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as the interrupt program when

the current value and the preset value match.

Overflow and underflow can also be used for the comparison conditions.
For details on the comparison actions, see "Comparison Actions" on page 5-20.

5-24

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
■ Comparison settings
When using the comparison output or the interrupt program as the comparison action for the high-speed counter, configure theexternal output number or the label number when there is a match. A maximum of six preset values can be specified for
Number of Comparisons (preset value number 1 to 6).
Tag name

This setting specifies the starting address of the data register region to store the preset values.
Device addressThis item shows the address of the data register specified by the tag name.
Number of Comparisons

You can configure a maximum of six preset values (target values) for the comparison action.
Notes:
 The preset value becomes active by the END processing in the second scan after the FC6A starts operation. Store Preset Value in the dataregisters with initialize pulse M8120 input.
 When the preset value (special data register) is changed before the comparison, the preset value currently being used for the comparison is
discarded in the program's END processing, and the comparison is performed with the newly configured preset value.
 Configure the settings so that an interval of 1 ms or more is present between instances of the preset value and the current value matching.
If this interval is less than 1 ms in length, the next Comparison ON status may be missed.

OutputWhen a comparison action is selected, these are the external outputs specified for preset value 1 to 6.
The external outputs that can be used as comparison outputs are listed by model as follows. Remote outputs cannot be configured.
Model Number

Comparison Output

16-I/O type

Q0 to Q6

24-I/O type

Q0 to Q11

40-I/O type

Q0 to Q17

Plus 16-I/O type

Q0 to Q7

Plus 32-I/O type

Q0 to Q17

Overflow

Select this check box to use overflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295).
Underflow

Select this check box to use underflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value falls below 0).
Note: When the comparison action is Comparison Output and either a preset value, overflow, or underflow has been enabled as a comparison
condition, the text box to enter the comparison output is enabled. The comparison output can be specified for each of these match conditions.

■ KeepAfter the current value matches the preset value, select to reset the current value to a reset value or to keep the value. Selectthis check box to keep the current value.
■ Use HSC Reset Input
Select this check box to reset the current value to the reset value with an external input (high-speed counter reset input).
High-speed counter reset input can only be specified for group 1, group 3 (Plus 32-I/O type), and group 5.
Group

External Input

Group 1

I2

Group 3

*1

Group 5I5

*1 The All-in-One CPU module and Plus 16-I/O type support only reset input by special internal relay.
The Plus 32-I/O type can use I13 as an external reset input.

When the high-speed counter reset input is turned on, the current value is reset to the reset value.
If the high-speed counter reset input is not used, I2, I13, and I5 are normal inputs.
■ Keep current values at power on
Select this check box to maintain the current values that have been kept with the backup battery at power on.
If this check box is cleared, the current values are initialized to 0.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-25

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
High-speed counter devices

The high-speed counter operates according to special internal relay and special data register settings. While the high-speed
counter is operating, the current value, control output, and operating status value are reflected in the special internal relays andspecial data registers with each scan.
The high-speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value, preset values, and reset values are allocated to thespecial internal relays and special data registers.

Device allocation table

The devices used by the high-speed counter are as follows.
Special internal relay list

Group
Comparison Output Reset

1

2

3

4

5

6

M8030

M8051

M8034

M8040

M8044

M8057

Gate Input

M8031

M8052

M8035

M8041

M8045

M8060

Reset Input

M8032

M8053

M8036

M8042

M8046

M8061

Reset Status

M8130

—

M8600

—

M8135

—

Comparison ON Status

M8131

M8054

M8133

M8134

M8136

M8062

Overflow

M8161

M8055

M8165

M8166

M8163

M8063

Underflow

M8162

—

M8601

—

M8164

—

Count Direction Flag

M8027

—

M8602

—

M8043

—

Read/Write
R/W

R

Special data register list
Group
Current Value (Upper word)

1

2

3

4

5

6

D8210

D8192

D8218

D8222

D8226

D8198

Current Value (Lower word)

D8211

D8193

D8219

D8223

D8227

D8199

Preset Value (Upper word)

D8212

D8194

D8220

D8224

D8228

D8200

Preset Value (Lower word)

D8213

D8195

D8221

D8225

D8229

D8201

Reset Value (Upper word)

D8216

D8196

D8234

D8236

D8232

D8202

Reset Value (Lower word)

D8217

D8197

D8235

D8237

D8233

D8203

Read/Write

R

R/W

When using the devices above with instructions where the data type unit can be specified, specify the data type as double word
(D). In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, when 32-bit Data Storage Setting is set to From Lower Word, the lower
word is stored in the first device.
■ Start/stop high-speed counter
The high-speed counter can be started and stopped per group by turning the gate input on or off.
Group
Gate Input

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8031

M8052

M8035

M8041

M8045

M8060

R/W

■ Current value storage locations
The current value for the single-phase high-speed counter is stored in special data registers as 2 words per group.
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

Current Value (Upper word)

D8210

D8192

D8218

D8222

D8226

D8198

Current Value (Lower word)

D8211

D8193

D8219

D8223

D8227

D8199

Read/WriteR

In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, when 32-bit Data Storage Setting is set to From Lower Word, the lower word
is stored in the first device.
■ Comparison ON status
When the current value and the preset value match, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan.
Group
Comparison ON Status

5-26

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8131

M8054

M8133

M8134

M8136

M8062

R

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
■ Overflow
When Overflow is enabled, if the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan.
When the current value overflows, it becomes 0.
GroupOverflow

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8161

M8055

M8165

M8166

M8163

M8063

R

■ Underflow
When Underflow is enabled, if the current value falls below 0, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When thecurrent value underflows, it becomes 4,294,967,295.
Group
Underflow

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8162

—

M8601

—

M8164

—

R

■ Comparison output reset
When the special internal relay turns on, the comparison output selected on High-speed Counter Settings turns off.
Group
Comparison Output Reset

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8030

M8051

M8034

M8040

M8044

M8057

R/W

■ Reset input
When reset input is turned on, the current value returns to the reset value.
Reset input
Current value

N-1

N

N+1

Group
Reset Input

Reset value (initial value)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8032

M8053

M8036

M8042

M8046

M8061

R/W

■ Preset value, reset value storage locations
The preset value and the reset value for the high-speed counter are stored in special data registers as 2 words.
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

Preset Value (Upper word)

D8212

D8194

D8220

D8224

D8228

D8200

Preset Value (Lower word)

D8213

D8195

D8221

D8225

D8229

D8201

Reset Value (Upper word)

D8216

D8196

D8234

D8236

D8232

D8202

Reset Value (Lower word)

D8217

D8197

D8235

D8237

D8233

D8203

Read/WriteR
R/W

In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, when 32-bit Data Storage Setting is set to From Lower Word, the lower word
is stored in the first device.
■ HSC reset input and reset status
When the HSC reset input is enabled in group 1, group 3 (Plus 32-I/O type), or group 5, turn on HSC reset input I2, I13, or I5 toreturn the current value to the reset value.
In this situation, reset status turns on for only one scan.
HSC reset input

Reset status

Current value

One scan

N-1

N

N+1

Reset value (initial value)

Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

HSC Reset Input

I2

—

I13

—

I5

—

—

M8130

—

M8600

—

M8135

—

R

Reset Status

To use the reset input with the group 1, group 3, or group 5 single-phase high-speed counter, use I2, I13, or I5. When not using
I2, I13, or I5 as an external reset input, they can be used as normal input.
■ Count direction flag
These special internal relays maintain whether the Group 1, Group 3, or Group 5 current value is being added or subtracted.
When these special internal relays are on, they indicate addition. When they are off, they indicate subtraction.
Group
Count Direction flag

1

2

3

4

5

6

Read/Write

M8027

—

M8602

—

M8043

—

—

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-27

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Timing chart 1
Single-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions

The counting mode is set to Up/down selection reversible counter and reset input (I2) is used.
One preset value is used, and when the values match, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value

Reset value=2(D8216, D8217)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Pulse input

I0

Up/down selection
input

I1

Reset input

I2

Reset status

M8130

Gate input

M8031

Preset value
Comparison ON status M8131
Preset value 1
Comparison output

Q1

Comparison output
reset

M8030

Preset value 1=6

Down count

Up count

One scanOne scanReset

1. When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8216, D8217) is stored in the current value (D8210, D8211).

In this situation, reset status (M8130) turns on for only one scan.

2. When gate input (M8031) turns on, the counting begins.
3. The counting direction (count up/count down) is determined by the on/off state of the up/down selection input (I1), and thepulse input (I0) is counted. The current value is updated with each scan.

4. When the current value and preset value 1 (D8212, D8213) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) and Comparison

ON status (M8131) turn on. When the Keep check box is selected in the settings in the WindLDR High-speed Counter
Settings, the current value is kept.

5. Q1 maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on. M8131 turns on for only one scan.
6. When the gate output turns off, counting stops.
Note: High-speed counter usage precautions
The high-speed counter starts the count operation with the following two conditions: The FC6A starts operation
 The gate input is turned on
To start the count operation, turn the gate input on from off while the FC6A is running. When the gate input is already on and the FC6A is stopped,
the count operation starts when the FC6A is switched from stop to run.
If run-time download is performed on the program when the gate input is on, the count operation stops.
When the PLC is in the RUN state (the PLC must be operating in RUN for three or more scans), the count operation is possible by turning the gate
input off and then on or by stopping and then running the PLC. When performing run-time download on the program, we recommend doing so withthe gate inputs off.

5-28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Timing chart 2
Two-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions

The counting mode is set to 2-edge count and reset input (I2) is used.
Two preset values are used, and when preset value 1 matches, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
When preset value 2 matches, output Q2 turns on and the current value is cleared.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value

Preset value 2=14

Preset value 1=8

Reset value=4(D8216, D8217)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

A-phaseI0

B-phase

I1

Reset input

I2

Reset status

M8130

Gate input

M8031

1

1
1

0

UP

DOWN

One scanPreset value
Comparison ON status M8131
Preset value 1
Comparison output

Q1

Preset value 2
Comparison output

Q2

Comparison output
reset

M8030

One scanOne scan

Reset
Reset

1. When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8216, D8217) is stored in the current value (D8210, D8211).

In this situation, reset status (M8130) turns on for only one scan.

2. When gate input (M8031) turns on, the counting begins.
3. When the A-phase pulse (I0) precedes the B-phase pulse (I1), the count goes up. When the B-phase pulse (I1) precedes theA-phase pulse (I0), the count goes down.

4. When the current value and preset value 1 (D8212, D8213) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) and setting

value match (M8131) turn on.

5. When preset value 1 matches, preset value 2 is stored in the preset value (D8212, D8213) as the new preset value andcounting continues.

6. The preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on. M8131

turns on for only one scan.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-29

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example program 1
Using the single-phase high-speed counter on the ladder program, this example program turns on external output Q2 when
1,000 pulses are counted.
Application description

When pulses are input to external input I0 and the count reaches 1,000, external output Q2 is turned on.
In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.

In the High-speed Counter Settings dialog box, configure the settings as follows.
External Input: Group 1

Operation Mode

: Single-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: Adding Counter

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag Name/Device Address : D0000 (data register)

5-30

Number of Comparisons:1Comparison Output: Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D0004): 0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D0005): 1,000 (lower word)

Keep: Cleared

Reset value (D8216): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8217): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: Cleared

Underflow: Cleared

Use HSC Reset Input: Cleared

Keep the current value
when PLC is powered up: Cleared

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Program

M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on when the FC6A runs.
MOV(D)

S11000

D1D0004

REP

S10

D1D8216REP

MOV(W) S11

D1D0002

REP

M8120
MOV(D)

1st scanStore 1,000 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)

Store the reset value in D8216, D8217

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031
Turn off M0000
M0000

M0000

M8031

3rd scanDetect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)
Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing
after the 3rd scan is executed

2nd scan
M8120

M0000

M8032

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the preset
value (D8216, D8217) in the current value (D8210, D8211).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-31

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example program 2
Using the two-phase high-speed counter, the pulses from a rotary encoder are input to the FC6A and a continuous workpiece ismarked at a regular interval.
Application description• The rotary encoder pulses are input to external input
I0. A continuous sheet of paper is marked (holes arepunched) at a regular interval (every 2,700 pulses).

Paper Roll

Paper Feed Roller• The rotary encoder is directly connected to the paper
feed roller, and output pulses are counted by thehigh-speed counter and controlled.

Perforator
Pulse Motor• The cycle time is the time to count 2,700 pulses.
RotaryEncoder

When the hole punch time is 0.5 seconds, theoperation condition is 2,700 pulse count time > 0.5
seconds.

FC6A Series MICROSmart

In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.

In the High-speed Counter Settings dialog box, configure the settings as follows.
External Input: Group 1

Operation Mode

: Two-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: 4-edge Count

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag Name/Device Address : D0000 (data register)

5-32

Number of Comparisons:1Comparison Output: Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D0004): 0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D0005): 2,700 (lower word)

Keep

: OFF

Reset value (D8216): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8217): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: OFF

Underflow: OFF

Use HSC Reset Input: OFF

Keep the current value
when PLC is powered up: Checked

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Program

M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on when the FC6A runs.
MOV(D)

S12700

D1D0004

REP

S10

D1D8216REP

MOV(W) S11

D1D0002

REP

M8120
MOV(D)

1st scanStore 2,700 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)

Store 0 in the reset value (D8216, D8217)

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031

Turn off M0000
M0000

3rd scan

SOTU
M0000

M8031

Detect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)

2nd scan
SOTD
M8120

M0000

M8032

TIM T000
5
M8030

Q2

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the reset
value (D8216, D8217) in the current value (D8210, D8211).
When the current value becomes 2,700 pulses, comparison
output Q2 turns on
The timer starts and comparison output reset (M8030) turns on after
5 seconds

Current value
Preset value 1=2,700
2,700 pulses
Reset value 0

Comparison output Q2
Perforation time: 0.5 seconds

Note: In this example, Z-phase reset input is not used.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-33

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Catch Input
The catch input function is used to receive short pulses from sensor outputs regardless of the scan time. Input pulses shorter than one scan time
can be received. When using catch input, the on/off status according to the status of the external inputs during one scan is stored in the special
internal relays (M8153 to M8157, M8160) that correspond to each external input group, and those signals can be used as input conditions.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to designate inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6 and I7 as a catch input.
Normal input signals to input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings.

Catch Input Specifications
Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width
Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width

5 µs
5 µs

Note: Input filter settings have no effect on the catch inputs. For the input filter function, see "Input Filter" on page 5-41.

External Inputs

External inputs on the FC6A can be switched between and used as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch inputs, interrupt
inputs, and frequency measurements. To use catch inputs, specify the corresponding group as Catch Input in the Function
Area Settings of WindLDR.
The status of external inputs that are assigned to catch inputs are stored in the following special internal relays by group (read-only).
All-in-One CPU module
Group
External Input
I2
Catch Input—*1
Special Internal Relay*2—*1 Can be used as a normal input.
*2 Read-only.

1

I0
Yes
M8153

2
I1
Yes
M8154

3
I3
Yes
M8155

4
I4
Yes
M8156

5

I5
—*1
—

I6
Yes
M8157

6
I7
Yes
M8160

Plus CPU moduleGroup
1
External Input
I2
I0
Catch Input—*1
Yes
Special Internal Relay*3—
M8153*1 Can be used as a normal input.
*2 Can be used only with the Plus 32-I/O type.
*3 Read-only.

2
I1
Yes
M8154

I13*2
—*1
—

3

I3
Yes
M8155

4
I4
Yes
M8156

I5
—*1
—

5

I6
Yes
M8157

6
I7
Yes
M8160

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

Catch Input Rising/Falling
Edge Selection
Catch Input Rising Edge
Catch Input Falling Edge

5-34

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
2. Select Catch Input in the Groups 1 through 4 pull-down list boxes. The Catch Input dialog box appears.
3. Select Catch Input Rising Edge or Catch Input Falling Edge in the pull-down list.

Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse
Note
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8153-M8157, M8160)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

1 scan time

END
Processed

Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse
Note
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8153-M8157, M8160)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

1 scan time

END
Processed

Note: When two or more pulses enter within one scan, subsequent pulses are ignored.

Example: Maintaining Catch Input
When a catch input is received, the catch input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan. This example
demonstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan.
Input I1 is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings.

M8154

M0000

M0001

M0000

When input I1 is turned on, special internal relay M8154 is turned on, andM0000 is maintained in the self-holding circuit.
When NC input M0001 is turned off, the self-holding circuit is unlatched, andM0000 is turned off.
M0000 is used as an input condition for the subsequent program instructions.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-35

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Interrupt Input
When a quick response to an external input is required, such as positioning control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to
execute an interrupt program.
Six inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, and I7 can be designated to execute interrupt at a rising and/or falling edge of input pulses. When aninterrupt is initiated by inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6 and I7, program execution immediately jumps to a predetermined label number
stored in special data registers D8215, D8032 through D8035, and D8214 respectively. The Function Area Settings dialog box isused to designate inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6 and I7 as an interrupt input, normal input, high-speed counter input, or catch input.
Normal input signals to input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings.

Interrupt Input Terminals, Special Data Registers, and Special Internal Relays for Interrupt Inputs
All-in-One CPU module
Group

2

3

4

External Input

I2

1
I0

I1

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

Interrupt Input

—*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

Special Data Register(Jump Destination
Label No.)

—

D8215

D8032

D8033

D8034

—

D8035

D8214

Special Internal Relay(Interrupt Input
Status)

—

M8137

M8140

M8141

M8142

—

M8143

M8167

M8192

M8197

M8193

M8194

—

M8195

M8196

Special Internal Relay(Interrupt Input Edge)

5

6*1 Can be used as a normal input.

Plus CPU module
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

External Input

I2

I0

I1

I13*2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

Interrupt Input

—*1

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

Special Data Register(Jump Destination
Label No.)

—

D8215

D8032

—

D8033

D8034

—

D8035

D8214

Special Internal Relay(Interrupt Input
Status)

—

M8137

M8140

—

M8141

M8142

—

M8143

M8167

Special Internal Relay(Interrupt Input Edge)

—

M8192

M8197

—

M8193

M8194

—

M8195

M8196

*1 Can be used as a normal input.
*2 Can be used only with the Plus 32-I/O type.

5-36

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

Interrupt Input Rising/
Falling Edge Selection
Interrupt at Rising Edge
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns on.
Interrupt at Falling Edge
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns off.
Interrupt at Both Edges
Interrupt occurs when theinterrupt input turns on or off.

2. Select Interrupt Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes. the Interrupt Input dialog box appears.
3. Select an interrupt edge in the pull-down list for each group.

Disable and Enable Interrupts

The interrupt inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, and I7 and timer interrupt are normally enabled while the FC6A is running, and can also be
individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When interrupt inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, and I7 areenabled, special internal relay M8137 through M8143, and M8167 are turned on, respectively. See Chapter 14 "Refresh
Instructions" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-37

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example: Interrupt Input
The following example demonstrates a program using the interrupt input function, with input I1 designated as an interrupt input.
When the interrupt input is turned on, the input I0 status is immediately transferred to output Q0 using the IOREF (I/O refresh)
instruction before the END instruction is executed. For the IOREF instruction, See Chapter 14 "Refresh Instructions" in the "Ladder
Programming Manual".
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
0

D1 –
D8032

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8032 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for interrupt input I1.

Main Program
END
LABEL
0
IOREF
M8125

S1
I0000

M0300

Q0000

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction.
When input I1 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay M0300.
M0300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory.

IOREF
M8125

S1
Q0000
LRET

Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal memory status to actual
output Q0.
Program execution returns to the main program.
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main program.

Notes for Using Interrupt Inputs and Timer Interrupt:

 When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the END instruction at the endof the main program.
 When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than 3 calls are nested, a user

program execution error occurs, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED.
 When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed when an interrupt occurs.

The label numbers stored in data registers D8214, D8215, and D8032 through D8035 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I0,
I1, I3, I4, I6, and I7 and timer interrupt, respectively.
 When more than one interrupt input is turned on at the same time, interrupt program execution is given priority to inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6,

and I7, in that order. If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is executed
after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
 Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
 Interrupt programs cannot use the following instructions: SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD,

CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, WKTIM, WJTBL, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, DISP, DGRD, COMRF, DI, EI, XYFS, CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM,
RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, ABS, JOG, PID, PIDA, DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRC, HOUR, SCALE, FLWA, FLWP, PING, EMAIL, TXD,
RXD, ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, and TRACE.

5-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Frequency Measurement
This section describes frequency measurement, which measures the frequency of pulses input to an external input. Frequency
measurement is a function that measures the frequency of pulses input to an external input.
These input pulses are processed with dedicated hardware device in FC6A, so frequencies can be measured with no relation to thescan time. The measurement results are stored in special data registers and they are updated with each scan.

Function Specification

The FC6A external inputs are used by switching between normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, andfrequency measurement. To use frequency measurement, specify the relevant group as Frequency Measurement in the
WindLDR Function Area Settings.
Frequency measurement can be used with the following external inputs.
The frequency measurement results are stored in the following special data registers for each external input group.
All-in-One CPU module
Group

2

3

4

External Input

I2

1
I0

I1

I3

I4

I5

5
I6

I7

6

Frequency Measurement
Value

—*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

Frequency Measurement
Range

4 Hz to 100 kHz

Measurement Error

Less than ±10% (4 Hz or higher and less than 4 kHz), less than ±0.1% (4 kHz or higher)

Calculation Cycle

Within 1 s (less than 4 kHz), within 250 ms (4 kHz or higher)

Upper
Frequency
Measurement Word
Value
Lower
(32 bits)
Word

4 Hz to 5 kHz

4 Hz to 100 kHz

—

D8210

D8192

D8218

D8222

—

D8226

D8198

—

D8211

D8193

D8219

D8223

—

D8227

D8199

*1 Can be used as a normal input.

Plus CPU module
Group

1

2

3

4

5

6

External Input

I2

I0

I1

I13*2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

Frequency Measurement
Value

—*1

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

—*1

Yes

Yes

Frequency Measurement
Range

4 Hz to 100 kHz

Measurement Error

Less than ±10% (4 Hz or higher and less than 4 kHz), less than ±0.1% (4 kHz or higher)

Calculation Cycle

Within 1 s (less than 4 kHz), within 250 ms (4 kHz or higher)

Frequency
Measurement
Value(32 bits)

Upper
Word

—

D8210

D8192

—

D8218

D8222

—

D8226

D8198

Lower
Word

—

D8211

D8193

—

D8219

D8223

—

D8227

D8199

*1 Can be used as a normal input.
*2 Can be used only with the Plus 32-I/O type.
Notes:
 To reflect the measurement results in the special data registers, a maximum of calculation cycle + scan time is required. However, when the
FRQRF instruction is used during ladder processing, the frequency value of the special data registers can be updated to the latest value. The
latest calculation result can be read within 250 ms regardless of the input frequency.
 The data registers for the upper word and the lower word of the measurement value change according to the 32-bit data storage method

specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage Setting" on page 5-55.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-39

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR
To use frequency measurement, you must configure the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the user program to
the FC6A. Frequency measurements will start when you download the user program and set the FC6A to run.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Specify Frequency Measurement for the group to use frequency measurement.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Input Filter
The input filter function is used to reject input noises. The catch input function described in the preceding section is used to readshort input pulses to special internal relays. To the contrary, the input filter rejects short input pulses when the FC6A is used with
input signals containing noises.
Different input filter values can be selected for inputs I0 through I27 in four groups using the Function Area Settings. Selectable
input filter values to pass input signals are 0 ms, and 3 through 15 ms in 1 ms increments. Default value is 3 ms for all inputs I0
through I27. Input I30 and above on all expansion input modules have a fixed filter of 3 ms. The input filter rejects inputs shorter
than the selected input filter value minus 2 ms.
Normal inputs require a pulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals. When using the input filter
function, select Normal Input under Special Inputs on the Input Configuration dialog box in the Function Area Settings.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

The columns displayed next to I0
indicate I0 to I7.

2. Select an input filter value for each group of inputs.

Input Filter Values and Input Operation

Depending on the selected values, the input filter has three response areas to reject or pass input signals.
Reject area:
Indefinite area:
Pass area:

Input signals do not pass the filter (selected filter value minus 2 ms).
Input signals may be rejected or passed.
Input signals pass the filter (selected filter value).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-41

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example: Input Filter 8 ms
To reject input pulses of 6 ms or less, select input filter value of
8 ms. Then input pulses of 8 ms plus one scan time are
accepted correctly at the END processing.

8 ms (Preset Value)
0 ms

6 ms
(Rejected)

8 ms(Accepted)(Indefinite Area)

When there is a change in the input, the input filter starts measuring the time.
Once the measured time exceeds the preset value, the change in the input is acquired internally.
Input to I0
6 ms

8 ms

8 ms

Input Filter

I0

Notes:
 Signals that pass through the input filter cannot always be acquired as input. To acquire a signal as normal input, a maximum pulse width of
input filter value + 1 scan time is required.
 When an external input (I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7) is set to a high-speed counter, catch input, interrupt input, frequency measurement, or theinterrupt input for an ARAMP instruction or a ZRN instruction, the input filter is disabled.
 The filter for I/O module external inputs (starting from I30) are fixed at 3 ms. This filter value cannot be changed.

5-42

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Analog Voltage Input
The section describes the analog input built into the FC6A.

Function Description

The FC6A is equipped with a built-in analog voltage input function. This function acquires 0 to 10V DC voltage analog input by
converting it to a digital value. The converted analog signal is stored in a special data register. Only one analog input can be used.

Analog Input+ (Red)External Device(Voltage Input)– (Black)

Analog input value storage location
The converted analog signal is stored in a special data register (D8058: read-only) as a digital value. This digital value is updated witheach scan. The range of the value that is stored in the special data register (D8058: read-only) can be specified with the data type.
Analog input status (D8060)
The analog input status code is stored in special data register D8060 (analog input status).
Status code
01
2
5
3, 4, 6 to 65,535

Details
Normal operation
Converting data
(occurs only once during the initial conversion when the power is turned on)
Initializing
Wiring fault (out of maximum range)
When the analog input value exceeds 11 V
Reserved

Analog Input Value
Current analog input value
Undefined0Upper limit value—

Analog Input Filter

The analog input data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in analog input.
The larger this value is set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog input becomes.
Count
1 to 255

Details
The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog input data. (n: Count)

When filtering, the input value is calculated with the equation below.
Analog input value after filtering =Total analog input values for filter count (n) worth of scans
Filter count n

Analog input data types

The range of analog values that can be handled with the specified data types are as follows.
Details
Data type
Binary data
Optional range

All-in-One CPU Module
0 to 1,000
Minimum to maximum(The minimum and maximum in a range between 0 to
1,000 where minimum ≤ maximum)

Plus CPU Module
0 to 4,000
Minimum to maximum(The minimum and maximum in a range between -32,768
to 32,767 where minimum ≤ maximum)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-43

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR

To use analog input, you must configure the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the user program to the FC6A.
1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. For AI1, configure the filter count and data type for the analog input.

The AI1 signal type is fixed as "0 to 10V DC".

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Analog Potentiometer
This section describes the analog potentiometer that changes the analog value used in the user program without the use of an
external device.

Function Description

The analog potentiometer has a minimum value of 0 and a maximum value of 1,000. An analog value of 0 to 1,000 is acquired
according to the position of the analog potentiometer and without the use of any special external devices, and that value is stored
in a special data register.

Analog Potentiometer

Analog potentiometer value storage location
The analog potentiometer value is stored in a special data register (D8057: read-only) as a value between 0 and 1,000. This value
is updated with each scan.
Analog potentiometer status (D8059)
The analog potentiometer status code is stored in special data register D8059 (analog potentiometer status).
Status code

Details

Analog Potentiometer Value0

Normal operation

Current analog potentiometer value

1

Converting data (occurs only once during the initial conversion when the power isturned on)

Undefined

2

Initializing0

3 to 65,535

Reserved—

Analog Potentiometer Filter

The analog potentiometer data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in the analog
potentiometer.
The larger this value is set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog potentiometer becomes.
Count

Details0

No filtering

1 to 255

The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog potentiometer data. (n: Count)

When filtering, the input value is calculated with the equation below.
Analog potentiometer value after filtering =Total analog potentiometer values for filter count (n) worth of scans
Filter count n

Analog potentiometer data types

The range of analog potentiometer values that can be handled with the specified data types are as follows.
Data type

Details

Binary data

0 to 1,000

Optional range

Minimum to maximum(The minimum and maximum in a range between 0 to 1,000 where minimum ≤ maximum)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-45

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR

To use the analog potentiometer, you must configure the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the user program to
the FC6A.
1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. For AI0, configure the filter count and data type for the analog Potentiometer.

The AI0 signal type is fixed as "Analog Potentiometer".

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

Example programThis program uses the analog potentiometer value for the counter preset value.
When reset input M0000 turns on, the current value is reset to "0".
Reset Input

M0000
Up clock input

M0001

5-46

CNT C000
D8057

While reset input M0000 is off, the counter can count.
While the counter is in the state where it can count, it increments +1
with each rise in up clock input M0001.
When the current value reaches analog potentiometer value D8057,
counting ends, and the counter output is maintained until reset input
M0000 is turned on.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Timer Interrupt
In addition to the interrupt input as described in the preceding section, all FC6A have a timer interrupt function. When a repetitive
operation is required, the timer interrupt can be used to call a subroutine repeatedly at predetermined intervals of 1 through1,000 ms.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to enable the timer interrupt and to specify the interval, from 1 to 140 ms, toexecute the timer interrupt. When the timer interrupt is enabled, the program execution repeatedly jumps to the jump destination
label number stored in special data register D8036, while the FC6A is running. When the interrupt program is completed, theprogram execution returns to the main program at the address where the interrupt occurred.
Since these settings relate to the user program, the user program must be downloaded to the FC6A after changing any of thesesettings.

Special Data Register and Special Internal Relay for Timer Interrupt
Interrupt

Special Data Register for Timer Interrupt Jump
Destination Label No.

Special Internal Relay forTimer Interrupt Status

Timer Interrupt

D8036

M8144

Note: A label is the starting address of the program branch to jump to, and it is specified by the LABEL instruction.

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Input Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Input Configuration appears.

2. Under the Timer Interrupt, click the check box to use the timer interrupt function.
3. Select an interval to execute the timer interrupt, from 1 to 140 ms.
4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-47

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Disable and Enable Interrupts

The timer interrupt and interrupt inputs I0, I1, I3, I4, I6 and I7 are normally enabled while the FC6A is running, and can also be
individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When timer interrupt is enabled, M8144 is turned
on. When disabled, M8144 is turned off. See Chapter 15 "Interrupt Control Instructions" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".

Example: Timer Interrupt
The following example demonstrates a program of using the timer interrupt function. The Function Area Settings must also becompleted to use the timer interrupt function as described on the preceding page.
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
0

D1 –
D8036

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer interrupt.

Main Program
END

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction.

LABEL
0

While the FC6A is running, program execution jumps to label 0 repeatedly at intervals
selected in the Function Area Settings.
Each time the interrupt program is completed, program execution returns to the main
program at the address where timer interrupt occurred.

Interrupt Program
LRET

Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main program.

Notes for Using Timer Interrupt and Interrupt Inputs:

 When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the END instruction at the endof the main program.
 When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than 3 calls are nested, a user

program execution error occurs, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED.
 When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed when an interrupt occurs.

The label numbers stored in data registers D8214, D8215, D8032 through D8035 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I0, I1, I3,
I4, I6 and I7 and timer interrupt, respectively.
 If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt

is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
 Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
 Interrupt programs cannot use the following instructions: SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD,

CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, WKTIM, WKTBL, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, DISP, DGRD, COMRF, DI, EI, XYFS, CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM,
RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, ABS, JOG, PID, PIDA, DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRC, HOUR, SCALE, FLWA, FLWP, PING, EMAIL, TXD,
RXD, ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, TRACE, and SCRPT.

5-48

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Forced I/O Function
Inputs can be forced on/off regardless of the status of physical inputs, and outputs can be forced on/off regardless of the ladderlogic using the forced I/O function in WindLDR. The force input function can be used to monitor or online edit mode to test theladder logic without the need of wiring the input terminals or turning on the actual inputs. The force output function can be used
to turn on/off the outputs to the external devices.

CautionThe forced I/O may cause unexpected operation of the FC6A. Make sure of safety before forcing inputs or outputs.

Devices

All the inputs and outputs of the FC6A can be forced on/off individually.
All-in-One CPU module
Device Range

Type

Inputs

Outputs

16-I/O type

I0 to I10, I30 to I627, I630 to I633

Q0 to Q6, Q30 to Q627, Q630 to Q633

24-I/O type

I0 to I15, I30 to I627, I630 to I633

Q0 to Q11, Q30 to Q627, Q630 to Q633

40-I/O type

I0 to I27, I30 to I627, I630 to I637

Q0 to Q617, Q30 to Q627, Q630 to Q637

Plus CPU module
Device Range

Type

Inputs

Outputs

Plus 16-I/O type

I0 to I7, I30 to I627, I630 to I643,
I1000 to I1597, I2000 to I2597, I3000 to I3597,
I4000 to I4597, I5000 to I5597, I6000 to I6597,
I7000 to I7597, I8000 to I8597, I9000 to I9597,
I10000 to I10597

Q0 to Q7, Q30 to Q627, Q630 to Q643,
Q1000 to Q1597, Q2000 to Q2597, Q3000 to Q3597,
Q4000 to Q4597, Q5000 to Q5597, Q6000 to Q6597,
Q7000 to Q7597, Q8000 to Q8597, Q9000 to Q9597,
Q10000 to Q10597

Plus 32-I/O type

I0 to I17, I30 to I627, I630 to I643,
I1000 to I1597, I2000 to I2597, I3000 to I3597,
I4000 to I4597, I5000 to I5597, I6000 to I6597,
I7000 to I7597, I8000 to I8597, I9000 to I9597,
I10000 to I10597

Q0 to Q17, Q30 to Q627, Q630 to Q643,
Q1000 to Q1597, Q2000 to Q2597, Q3000 to Q3597,
Q4000 to Q4597, Q5000 to Q5597, Q6000 to Q6597,
Q7000 to Q7597, Q8000 to Q8597, Q9000 to Q9597,
Q10000 to Q10597

Forced I/O Status

Events of the FC6A and effects on the forced I/O settings are shown below.
EventsForced I/O Status
The force settings are retained. The forced inputs and outputs are kept on/off
even after the FC6A is stopped, regardless of the status of M8025 (maintain
outputs while FC6A is stopped).

When the FC6A starts running
When the FC6A is stopped.
When the FC6A is powered up

The force settings are retained, but the force is suspended. If the battery isdead, the force settings are cleared.

When user program download is executed

The force settings are retained, and whether the force will be suspended or
not can be selected in the Download Program dialog box.

When Reset Input is turned on
When Clear All Devices is executed in the PLC Status dialog
box of WindLDR

The force settings are cleared.

When the system software download is executed
Note: Force function has no effect on high-speed counters, catch inputs, or interrupt inputs. The stop or reset input can be initiated using the force
function, but the force settings will be cleared as soon as the reset input is turned on.

Checking Forced I/O Function Execution StateThe forced I/O function status (running or stopped) can be checked with WindLDR or with the FC6A run LED [RUN].
Details on the run LED [RUN] that shows the forced I/O function status are as follows.
LED

StatusON

When the forced I/O function is stopped while the CPU module is running the user program

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)

When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is running

Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)

When executing the forced I/O function while the user program is stopped

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-49

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Forced I/O List
The forced I/O function is controlled with the Force I/O List in WindLDR.
Force Release
Force OFF

RefreshForce ON

Start/Suspend Force

New(1) New
Register an I/O device to the list that will be set for forced I/O.
(2) Force On
Switches the status to on.
(3) Force Off
Switches the status to off.
(4) Force Release
Cancels the status of the I/O device set for forced I/O.
(5) Refresh
Updates the list.
(6) Start/Suspend Force
Starts and stops the forced I/O function.

5-50

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

Online mode is activated.

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Forced I/O.

The Forced I/O List dialog box appears and shows a list of forced inputs and outputs. I/O numbers and force I/O statuses canbe specified in this dialog box.
Force Release
Force OFF

RefreshForce ON

Start/Suspend ForceNew

3. Click the New button

Click the Force On button

and type an input or output number under Device in the list.
or Force Off button
to force on or off the designated input or output.

4. To start the forced I/O function, click the Start/Suspend Force button.

A signis displayed toshow input I0 is forced.

The forced I/O can be suspended temporarily by clicking the Start/Suspend Force button

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

again.

5-51

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
5. To suspend the forced I/O, click the Start/Suspend Force button.

Even though I0 is designated,
forced I/O is suspended andactual input status is read to the
FC6A.

The forced inputs or outputs remain designated until the forced I/O designation is released.
6. To release the forced I/O designation, click the Force Release button.

Input I0 is released from theforced I/O designation. Even
when forced I/O is enabled, actual
input status is read to the FC6A.

Now input I0 works as a normal input.
Note: Make sure that all the forced inputs and outputs are released when the test using the forced I/O function is finished. Select Delete All fromthe right click menu in the Forced I/O List dialog box to release all the forced inputs and outputs at once.

5-52

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
External Memory Devices
This section describes the CSV file format of log data that is saved to the SD memory card.

Function Description
Specify the CSV file format when saving specific device values as log data (CSV file) using the DLOG (data log) instruction and the
TRACE (data trace) instruction.
For Decimal Symbol, select either Period (.) or Comma (,).
Separating Character is determined by the symbol that is selected for Decimal Symbol.
Decimal Symbol

Separating Character

Period (.)

Comma (,)

Comma (,)

Semicolon (:)

Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > External Memory Devices.

The Function Area Settings dialog box appears.

2. Under CSV File Format, select the symbols for Decimal Symbol.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-53

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Log Data File Size
This section provides an explanation of the maximum file size for log data that is saved to the SD memory card.

Function Description

Set the maximum file size for when saving specific device values to the SD memory card as log data (CSV file) using the DLOG
(data log) instruction and the TRACE (data trace) instruction.
This value can be selected from 10 KB, 20 KB, 50 KB, 100 KB, 200 KB, 500 KB, 1 MB to 10 MB (in increments of 1 MB), or 256 MB.
The default is 5 MB.
Notes:
 If the file size exceeds the maximum when saving the log data in basic mode of the DLOG instruction or with the TRACE instruction, the fileis saved with "_" + "2 digit number (01 to 99)" appended to the file name.
Example: 20170401_01.csv
 The file size is not checked while the log data is being saved, so log data will be saved to the same file, even if it exceeds the log data filesize. The maximum file size is the log data file size + 1,024 bytes (maximum value of one entry of log data).

Programming WindLDR
1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click External Memory Devices.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Under Data Log and Trace, select the maximum file size (10 KB, 20 KB, 50 KB, 100 KB, 200 KB, 500 KB, 1 MB to 10 MB,

256 MB).

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-54

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
32-bit Data Storage SettingThis section describes the methods of storing 32-bit data in data registers.

Function Specification

When the double-word, long, or float data type is selected for the source or destination device, the data is loaded from or stored
to two consecutive data registers. The order of the two devices can be selected from the following two settings in the Function
Area Settings.
Setting

Description

From Upper Word (Default)

When a data register, timer, or counter is used as a double-word device, the high-word data is loaded fromor stored to the first device selected. The low-word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent
device.
This is identical with the 32-bit data storage of OpenNet Controller and FC4A/FC5A.

From Lower Word

When a data register, timer, or counter is used as a double-word device, the low-word data is loaded fromor stored to the first device selected. The high-word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent
device.

Devices

When the devices listed below are used as a double-word device, two consecutive devices are processed according to the 32-bit
data storage settings.
DeviceDevice Address

Data Register

D0 - D7999, D10000 - D61999

Special Data Register

D8000 - D8899

Non-retentive Data Register

D70000 - D269999

Counter

C0 - C511

Data: The following data composed of 32 bits is subject to this setting.
 Device values of advanced instructions with the data processing units D (double word), L (long), F (float)
 Pulse output preset values and current values
 High-speed counter function current values, preset values, and reset values
 Frequency measurement values in frequency measurement
 Double word counter instruction preset values

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-55

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Device Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Device Settings appears.

2. Under 32-bit Data Storage Setting, select From Upper Word or From Lower Word in the pull-down list.

Example: 32-bit Data Storage Setting
When data register D10 is designated as a double-word source device and data register D20 is designated as a double word
destination device, the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive devices according the 32-bit data storage setting as
illustrated below.

Source Device

Destination Device
From Upper Word

From Upper WordHigh Word D10

4660(1234h)Low Word D11

22136(5678h)From Lower Word

5-56

Double-word Data
305419896(12345678h)

4660(1234h)High Word D20

22136(5678h)Low Word D21

From Lower Word

Low Word D10

22136(5678h)22136(5678h)Low Word D20

High Word D11

4660(1234h)4660(1234h)High Word D21

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
User Program Protection
This function protects the FC6A user program from being modified, erased, or stolen by a third party.
You can configure the protection individually for uploading and downloading the user program in User Program Protection
under Program Protection. You can also configure the protection level for user programs in Security Mode under Program
Protection.
Mode

Description

Unprotected

The user program is unprotected.

Password Protected

A password must be entered when downloading or uploading the user program.
The password is six to eight single-width alphanumeric characters, and it must include a minimum of one
number and one character.
One password can be set for one user program.
When applying password protection to both user program uploads and downloads, the same password is used.

Prohibited

The user program cannot be uploaded. Prohibited protection can only be configured for user program
uploads. User program downloads cannot be prohibited.

For enhanced security, if the entered password does not match the user program password in the FC6A, the FC6A will not verify a
new password for one second. Therefore, even if the correct password is entered within one second after a mismatch, that is amismatch. If the password does not match, wait one second or longer and then enter the password again.
Note: When the user program is password protected, there are restrictions on uploading and downloading the user program using the SD memory
card. For details, see "Download from SD Memory Card" on page 11-27.

Security Mode
Enhanced protection mode SV2 *1
Enhanced protection mode SV1 *1

Description
This mode generates a user program with higher protection level.
It is recommended to select a mode with a high SV value.
This mode generates a user program that can operate in the system software that
does not support Enhanced protection mode.

Compatibility mode

*1 SV stands for security version. The higher the SV number, the stronger the security.
Note: User program with Enhanced protection mode can only be downloaded to a CPU module with the following system software versions.
CPU module
All-in-One CPU module
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Plus CPU module

Security Mode

System Software

Enhanced protection mode SV2

Version 2.70 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV1

Version 2.40 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV2

Version 2.70 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV1

Version 2.40 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV2

Version 2.50 or later

Enhanced protection mode SV1

Version 2.00 or later

Configure Compatibility mode when you use a CPU module with a system software version lower than the one listed above.
Notes:
 Before proceeding with the following steps, make sure to note the protect code, which is needed to disable the user program protection. If theuser program in the FC6A is write- or read/write-protected, the user program cannot be changed without the protect code.
 If the user program is read-protected without using a password, the read protection cannot be temporarily disabled using the password, thus
the user program cannot be read out by any means. To disable the read protection, download another user program without user programprotection.
 When the user program is protected, even if you enter the correct password and download the program, if protection is set for the
downloaded user program, the protection will be once again enabled.
 If you do not download or upload the user program within 10 seconds of unlocking the protection, the protection will once again be enabled.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-57

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Programming WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Program Protection.

The Function Area Settings dialog box for Program Protection appears.

2. Under User Program Protection, select required protect modes for Read Program and Write Program in the pull-down list.
Unprotected:

The user program in the FC6A can be read and written without a password.

Password Protected:

Prevents unauthorized copying or inadvertent replacement of the user program.
This protection can be temporarily disabled using a predetermined password.

Prohibited:

Prevents copying of the user program completely.
This option is available for read protection only and can not be temporarily disabled using a password.

3. After selecting a required protect mode, enter a password of 6 through 8 ASCII characters from the key board in the New

Password field, and enter the same password in the Confirm Password field.

4. Configure Security Mode.

5. Click OK and download the user program to the FC6A after changing any of these settings.

5-58

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Disabling Protection

When the user program is password-protected against read and/or write, the protection can be temporarily disabled using
WindLDR.
If the user program is read-prohibited, the read protection cannot be disabled, thus the user program cannot be read by anymeans. To disable the read protection, download another user program without user program protection.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download or Upload.

When the user program in the FC6A is read and/or write protected, the Protect Error dialog box appears. When program
verification or online edit is attempted, the Protect Error dialog box appears.

2. Enter the password and click OK.

The user program protection is disabled only temporarily. When the FC6A is powered up again, the protection designated in
the user program takes effect again.
To disable or change the protection permanently, change the protection settings and download the user program.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-59

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Watchdog Timer SettingThis section describes watchdog timer setting.
A watchdog error occurs when the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time while the user program is running.
If a watchdog error occurs, the system is reset with the purpose of returning the system to normal operation.
If the watchdog error occurs frequently, you can assume that there is a hardware problem and that the FC6A requires
replacement.
Some of the reasons why a watchdog timer will occur are problems with the FC6A hardware and length of the processing time in
the program. If the processing time for one scan of the ladder program exceeds the time configured for the watchdog timer on theladder program, place an NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. The watchdog timer is reset when the NOP
instruction is executed.
Watchdog timer setting time
The watchdog timer setting time can be changed in the Function Area Settings. Decide on the watchdog timer setting time ineither of the following two ways.


Decide by user system specification
Determine the maximum on time (milliseconds) so the output signals do not stay on if the FC6A loses control and set that value
as the watchdog timer setting time. However, if the ladder program processing time takes longer than the design specification,
use an NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. For example, when the watchdog timer is set to 100 ms and the
maximum value for one scan is 120 ms on the ladder program, insert an NOP instruction in the ladder program to ensure thatthe error does not occur.

Match the program processing time
Check the maximum value for one scan (D8024) and set the watchdog timer value as a value with a safety margin added to the
maximum value.

Note: When changing the watchdog timer setting value, select an appropriate value that fully takes into consideration the safety of the system.
The maximum value of one scan while the FC6A is running can be checked with special data register D8024.

Programming WindLDR
1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, and then click Self Diagnostic.

The Function Area settings dialog box appears.

2. Select the watchdog timer setting value.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

Watchdog Timer Settings

Select the watch dog timer setting between 100 ms and 4,000 ms. The default time is 400 ms.
5-60

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Constant Scan Time
The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions are executed or not depending on input conditions to these
instructions. The scan time can be made constant by entering a required scan time preset value into special data register D8022
reserved for constant scan time. When performing accurate repetitive control, make the scan time constant using this function.
The constant scan time preset value can be between 1 to 1,000 ms.
The scan time error is ±1 ms of the preset value normally. When the data link or other communication functions are used, the scantime error may be increased to several milliseconds.
When the actual scan time is longer than the scan time preset value, the scan time cannot be reduced to the constant value.
Special Data Registers for Scan TimeIn addition to D8022, three more special data registers are reserved to indicate current, maximum, and minimum scan timevalues.
Note: R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read. When W, it can only be written.
D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset Value (1 to 1,000 ms)

D8023

Scan Time Current Value (ms)D8024

Scan Time Maximum Value (ms)D8025

Scan Time Minimum Value (ms)

R/W
R

Example: Constant Scan Time
This example sets the scan time to a constant value of 500 ms.
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
MOV(W)
M8120

S1
500

D1
D8022

REP

When the FC6A starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction stores 500 to special dataregister D8022.
The scan time is set to a constant value of 500 ms.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-61

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Time Zone
This section describes the time zone function on the FC6A.
This function enables you to set the time zone as the difference between the FC6A internal clock and Universal Coordinated Time
(UTC). The time zone can be set from UTC-12:00 to UTC+14:00.
Note: The time zone can be adjusted in 15 minute increments using special data register D8413. For example, when UTC+09:00 is selected, storing+1 in D8413 advances the time by 15 minutes to make the time zone "UTC+09:15". Storing -2 in D8413 sets the time back by -30 minutes to makethe time zone "UTC+08:30".

Programming WindLDR

Configure time zone on the FC6A.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Calendar & Clock.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Specify Time Zone check box and set the time zone.

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

5-62

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Daylight Savings Time
This section describes the function that automatically adjusts the FC6A time according to daylight savings time settings.
For regions where the FC6A is used that implement daylight savings time, this function can automatically adjust the FC6A clockusing the daylight savings time settings. When the time reaches the daylight savings start time, the clock is set an hour forward.
When the time reaches the the daylight savings time end, the clock is set an hour back.
The FC6A adjusts the clock for daylight savings time on the start day and the end day. However, the clock is also adjusted fordaylight savings time under the following conditions.
 When a user program was downloaded to the FC6A.
 When the FC6A power was turned on.

When the current time of the FC6A' internal clock is set using WindLDR or the operator interface, the time is not adjusted fordaylight savings time, even if the time after it was set is within the daylight savings time period. Set the time to the time adjusted
for daylight savings time. The set date and time becomes the date and time after being adjusted for daylight savings time.

Programming WindLDR

Configure daylight savings time on the FC6A.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Calendar & Clock.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Enable Daylight Savings Time check box.

3. Configure the start time and the end time. Specify the region using the Region list box.

If you select Custom, you are able to select any desired start time and end time.
RegionStart Time

End Time

CustomUser specified

User specified

USA or Canada

March, 2nd Sunday, 2:00 AM

November, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

EuropeMarch, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

October, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

Australia

October, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

April, 1st Sunday, 3:00 AM

4. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-63

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Clock Function
This section describes the internal clock function on the FC6A.
This function enables you to control the time schedule for lighting or air conditioning equipment using the current time data stored
in special data registers. The internal clock data is backed up by a backup battery. The current time is reset when the backup data
is lost, so the current time will need to be set again.
Function

Description

Read clock

The current time (calendar, clock) is updated every 500 ms and automatically stored in the special data registers.

Set clockSets the current time (calendar, clock). Set the current time with WindLDR or a user program that uses the special
data registers.

Adjust function

When clock data adjust flag M8021 is turned on from off, the seconds for the current time are rounded up or
rounded down based on 30 seconds to correct the seconds data for the internal clock.
If the current seconds are between 0 and 29 seconds, the seconds are set to 0 when M8021 is turned on from off.
If the current seconds are between 30 and 59 seconds, the minutes are set to + 1 and the seconds are set to 0
when M8021 is turned on from off.

Calendar/clock error

M8013: This relay turns on if clock write processing or a clock adjust processing could not be executed normally.
M8014: This relay turns on if an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal clock to thespecial data registers (D8008 to D8014).

Setting the Clock with WindLDR

Set the current time on the FC6A with WindLDR.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.

WindLDR enters monitor mode.

2. Select Online > PLC > Status.

The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Change for Calendar.

The Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed. The current time on the computer is displayed in the dialog box as the initialvalue. The settings can also be changed as necessary.

4. Click OK.

The date and time configured in the dialog box is written to the FC6A.

Setting the Clock with a User Program

A user program can write the clock data from an operator interface without using WindLDR by using special data registers D8015
to D8021. Undefined values are stored in special data registers D8015 to D8021. Always store an appropriate value before turning
on M8016, M8017, or M8020.
Calendar Data Write Flag (M8016)
After writing data to the write calendar special data registers (D8015 to D8018), turn M8016 off to on to set the internal clock withthe data in D8015 to D8018 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week). If the day of the week is wrong, the correct
day of the week is automatically written according to the date.
Clock Data Write Flag (M8017)
After writing data to the write clock special data registers (D8019 to D8021), turn M8017 off to on to set the internal clock with thedata in D8019 to D8021 as the clock data (hour, minute, second).
Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag (M8020)
After writing data to the write calendar/clock special data registers (D8015 to D8021), turn M8020 off to on to set the internal
clock with the data in D8015 to D8021 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hour, minute,second). If the day of the week is wrong, the correct day of the week is automatically written according to the date.
5-64

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Calendar and clock data storage locations
The calendar/clock data is stored in the following special data registers.
Special Data Register

Description

Range

D8008

Year

D8009

Month

1 to 12

D8010

Day

1 to 31

Calendar/Clock
Current Data
(Read only)

D8011
D8012

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23
0 to 59

D8013

Minute

D8014

Second0 to 59

D8015

Year

0 to 99

D8016

Month

1 to 12

D8017

Day

1 to 31

Calendar/ClockNew Data(Write only)

D8018

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23

D8020

Minute0 to 59

D8021

Second0 to 59

D8019

Setting Timing

0 to 99

Every 500 ms*1—

*1 If the scan time is 500 ms or longer, D8008 to D8014 are updated with each scan.

For the day of the week data, the values below are stored in the special data registers.
Day of the week

SundayMondayTuesday

WednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

Value

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-65

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Example ladder program 1

This example sets the calendar and clock in a user program.
If you turn on M8020 with the new calendar/clock data set in the write-only data registers D8015 to D8021, the internal clock on
the FC6A is updated with the current time (calendar, clock). In this example, the FC6A internal clock is set to 9:35:00 on Tuesday
February 21, 2012.
MOV(W)

S1 R
D8008

D1 R
D8015

REP
7

MOV(W)

S1 12

D1 D0000REP

MOV(W)

S1 2

D1 D0001

REP

MOV(W)

S1 21

D1 D0002

REP

MOV(W)

S1 2

D1 D0003

REP

MOV(W)

S1 9

D1 D0004

REP

MOV(W)

S1 35

D1 D0005

REP

MOV(W)S1 0

D1 D0006

REP

MOV(W)

S1 R
D8000

D1 R
D8015

REP
4

M8120

SOTU
I0000

M8120 is the initial pulse that turns on for only one scan at the start ofoperation.
When the FC6A Series MICROSmart starts operating, the current calendar/
clock data is stored in D8015 to D8021 and the new calendar/clock data isstored in D0 to D6 with the MOV (move) instruction.

When external input I0 turns on, the new calendar data is stored in special
data registers D8015 to D8018.
Internal relay M0 turns on for one scan only.

M0000
SOTU

MOV(W)

I0001

S1 R
D0004

D1 R
D8019

REP
3

When external input I1 turns on, the new clock data is stored in special dataregisters D8019 to D8021.
Internal relay M1 turns on for one scan only.

M0001

M0000

M8020

When external input M0 or M1 turns on, M8020 turns on and the calendar/
clock data is written to the internal clock.
(M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag)

REP
7

M8125 is a special internal relay that is always on during operation.
While the FC6A Series MICROSmart is running, the current time (calendar,
clock) is stored in D10 to D16 with the MOV instruction.

M0001
MOV(W)
M8125

S1 R
D8008

D1 R
D0010

Example ladder program 2
When I1 turns off to on, the seconds on the internal clock are corrected to 0 seconds.

SOTU
I0001

M8021

When input I1 turns on, clock data adjust flag M8021 turns on to correct the seconds on the internal clock.
Note: The internal clock backup time is guaranteed for one year. If the backup time is exceeded, the retained clock data is lost and the current timeis initialized as 00:00:00 on January 1, 2000. For details on the battery, see "Battery Monitor" on page 5-67.

5-66

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Battery Monitor
This section describes the battery monitor function that monitors the voltage of the FC6A backup battery.

Function Description

You can know when to change the backup battery before it dies by monitoring its voltage. The battery voltage in mV as measured
after the FC6A power is turned on is stored in a special data register (D8056), and the battery level status is displayed on thebattery status LED [BAT]. The battery voltage can also be measured at any time.
If the battery dies, device values are reset to their initial values when the power is turned off. Replace the backup battery before it
dies.
Battery voltage (D8056)
Stores the measured battery voltage in mV. The range of the value is 0 to 3,000. If the value is greater than 3,000, this value is
3,000. The battery voltage fluctuates according to the usage environment.
When the power is turned on, this value is 65,535 until the initial battery voltage measurement has completed.
This value is 0 when there is a measurement error or when there is no battery.
Battery voltage measurement (M8074)
Shows the battery voltage measurement status.
0: Battery voltage measurement completed
1: Battery voltage being measured
The battery voltage can also be measured by writing 1. The measured value in mV is stored in D8056. The value is reset to 0
when the measurement has completed. The battery voltage is automatically measured once when the power is turned on andstored in D8056. For this reason, Battery Voltage Measurement Flag (M8074) does not normally need to be used.

CautionWhen Battery Voltage Measurement Flag (M8074) is used to measure the battery voltage, current will temporarily flow
through the battery for A/D conversion processing inside the PLC. This consumes the battery, so minimize the use of Battery
Voltage Measurement Flag (M8074). In particular, do not use Battery Voltage Measurement Flag (M8074) in ladderprograms that perform constant measurements while running.

Battery level indicator
The status of the battery level is displayed on the battery status LED [BAT] according to the battery voltage value.
Replacing the battery on a regular schedule is recommended, regardless of whether the battery status LED is blinking or on. For
details on the battery life, see "Backup Function" on page 2-17 and "Backup Function" on page 2-55.

All-in-One CPU module

Plus CPU module

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

Replace the battery immediately when the battery status LED is blinking (1-s cycle).

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

Battery Status LED [BAT]OffCondition
Battery voltage (D8056) > 2,300

Battery Status
NormalSufficient battery level.

Blinking (1 s cycle)

2,300 ≥ battery voltage (D8056) > 2,000

Warning

Low battery level. Replace the battery.

On

2,000 ≥ battery voltage (D8056)

Dead battery

The battery is almost dead. Or no battery.

Caution When the main power supply is off and the product is started with USB bus power, the monitoring of Battery Voltage(D8056) is performed in the same manner as in the above table.
 A general guide for the time it takes Battery Voltage (D8056) to decrease from 2300 to 2000 is approximately 10 days

including the effect of the ambient environment (temperature and humidity) while unpowered and powered. Replace thebattery immediately when the battery status LED is blinking (1-s cycle).
 The final voltage of the coin cell is 2000. If a battery that has reached its final voltage (battery status LED is on) is left in

the product for a long period of time, the product may be damaged or malfunction.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-67

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
General Errors Related to the Battery

When the power is turned on with a battery that is almost dead or without a battery, a keep data error and a clock error will occur.
Keep Data Error
When the power is turned off with a battery that is almost dead or without a battery, the data that is supposed to be backed up in
RAM (keep data) cannot be backed up. A keep data error will occur and the keep data will be cleared in the following case: The status of keep data when the power supply was turned on has changed from when the power supply was previously turned off

Clock Error
When the power is turned off with a battery that is almost dead or without a battery, the clock data cannot be backed up. A clock
error will occur and the clock data will be initialized in either of the following cases: Battery Voltage (D8056) measured when the power supply is turned ON is less than 2000*1
 A keep data error occurs*2*1 Applicable to the following versions. For versions before the following versions, the clock error will occur when Battery Voltage (D8056) is lessthan 2300.
All-in-One CPU module:
Version 2.10 and higher
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module: Version 2.10 and higher
Plus CPU module:
Version 1.00 and higher*2 Applicable to the following versions. For versions before the following versions, a clock error caused by a keep data error will not occur.
All-in-One CPU module:
Version 2.10 and higher
CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module: Version 2.10 and higher
Plus CPU module:
Version 1.50 and higher

5-68

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
USB Boot
This section describes USB boot startup that starts the FC6A using only USB bus power (5 V).

What USB boot can do
The function that starts the FC6A using only USB bus power (5 V) is called USB boot. USB boot enables the following.
■ Communicate with the FC6A using WindLDR and a USB connection to update the user program and system
softwareUser Program

System Software

Computer(WindLDR)FC6A Series MICROSmart
Download, Update
USB Communication
UploadUser Program■ Overwrite the user program or system software on the FC6A with a user program and system software saved toan SD memory card
Computer(WindLDR)FC6A Series MICROSmart
USB Communication
SD Memory Card

Download, Update

User Program

System Software■ Read and write files on the SD memory card using WindLDR's Data File Manager
Computer(Data File Manager)

FC6A Series MICROSmart
Read and Write

SD Memory Card

USB communication■ Other operations

 Set the time and calendar
 Change the content of keep devices (D, M, R, C) Update data by recipe

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-69

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Starting and stopping USB bootStarting USB boot1. Connect a USB cable to the USB port of a computer.
2. When the FC6A's power is not supplied, plug the USB cable (5 V) into the USB port of the FC6A.

FC6A Series MICROSmart
Computer

To USB Port

USB Maintenance Cable(HG9Z-XCM42)A PlugTo USB Port
Mini-B Plug

All-in-One CPU module

Plus CPU module

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

When the FC6A is started by the USB bus, the power indicator LED [PWR] is off and the operation indicator LED [RUN] is blinking.

PWR
RUN
ERR
SD
BAT
STAT

The operation indicator LED [RUN] blinks at an interval of 100 ms.
Note: The FC6A operating status can be checked with the PLC Status dialog box. During USB boot, USB boot is displayed for Run/Stop Status.

Stopping USB bootUSB boot can be stopped by unplugging the USB cable from the FC6A. USB boot also stops when power (24V DC, 12V DC, 100240V AC) is supplied during USB boot, and operation switches to that power (24V DC, 12V DC, 100-240V AC).

Restrictions

During USB boot, peripheral functions other than the USB port and SD memory card do not operate.

5-70

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
User Program Capacity
This section describes the function to select the user program capacity on the FC6A.

Function Description

If the default FC6A user program capacity is insufficient, you can secure a larger user program capacity. However, Online Edit canno longer be used.
User Program Capacity

CPU Module Type
All-in-One CPU Module

Default Capacity

CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU Module

72,000 bytes (9,000 steps)

Plus CPU Module

800,000 bytes (100,000 steps)

When Securing a Larger User Program Capacity
384,000 bytes (48,000 steps)
640,000 bytes (80,000 steps)

Programming WindLDR

You can set the user program capacity of the All-in-One CPU module and CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module.
The Plus CPU module is fixed to 800,000 bytes.
1. On the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Device Settings.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. For Program Capacity Selection, select 72,000 bytes, 384,000 bytes (All-in-One CPU module), or 640,000 bytes (CAN

J1939 All-in-One CPU module).

3. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-71

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Online Edit
This section describes the Online Edit function that allows rewriting user programs and checking operation after rewriting without
stopping FC6A operation.

Run-time download function
This section describes the run-time download function that rewrites the user program without stopping FC6A operation.

Warning Rewriting the program during operation is extremely dangerous. Carefully read and understand the function description

and precautions before using the function.
 If a user program syntax error or a user program download error occurs, the FC6A will stop operation (STOP) and all

outputs will be cleared. Depending on the subject being controlled, this may be extremely dangerous.
 When run-time download is executed, the FC6A immediately switches to the new program when the program has

finished being transferred, but it may take a maximum of 30 seconds to save the program to ROM. During this period, thescan time for each scan increases in length about 10 to 400 ms.
 When using Online Edit, under no circumstances should you turn off the FC6A power or unplug the communication cable.

The result may be a serious error such as a user program download error, and depending on the subject being controlled,
this may be extremely dangerous.
 Device Q values are kept before and after run-time download. Therefore, when OUT/OUTN instructions are deleted ordevice numbers are changed, device Q before the change keep their status before run-time download. Depending on thesubject being controlled, this may be extremely dangerous.

Function Description

A program can be downloaded and changed at the next ladder scan during FC6A operation.
During run-time download, devices Q, M, R, T (current value), C (current value), and D keep their status before run-time
download. TP (preset value) and CP (preset value) are overwritten with the preset values of the newly written user program.
Notes:
 Before executing run-time download, always check the changed content and the program operation after it is written. There are no
restrictions on the scope of editing with run-time download, but if many changes are made at one time, the possibility of triggering
unexpected actions will increase. Keep program changes with run-time download to a minimum.
 If PID, PIDA, AVRG, DGRD, DISP, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ARAMP, JOG, or ZRN instructions are created or edited, the instructions are notinitialized unless the input to the instruction is turned off for one or more scans. When copied instructions are pasted in the program, andwhen instructions that have been commented out are enabled, these are regarded as new instructions.
 SOTU/SOTD instructions are initialized at the first scan after the run-time download has completed.
 For user communication instructions (TXD, RXD, ETXD, ERXD), if instruction information remains in the instruction setup area,
communication is performed according to the information before run-time download until all of the instructions in the setup area have sentor received their data, even when the instruction information is overwritten by run-time download . All RXD instructions in the setup area canbe deleted by turning on the receive cancel flag assigned to each communication port.
 Run-time download can only be executed when the FC6A is operating (RUN).

Run-time download can only be executed when WindLDR is in Online Edit mode. To start Online Edit mode, the user program
opened in WindLDR and the user program running on the FC6A must be the same.
During Online Edit, Function Area Settings and expansion data register settings cannot be changed. Only the ladder program
can be edited.
Notes:
 If run-time download is performed when FC6A timer and counter preset values have been changed by the online monitor or HMI module, thechanged values are overwritten by the values of the program that is newly written. To keep the FC6A timer preset values and counter preset
values before and after run-time download, confirm the timer and counter preset value changes, upload the program, and then start Online
Edit. To confirm timer and counter preset value changes, on the Online tab, in the PLC group, click Status, and then click Confirm under
TIM/CNT preset value.
 During Online Edit, function area settings and expansion data register settings cannot be changed. To change these, download the entire
user program with a normal download.
 If communication was lost during run-time download, the program being executed in RAM and the program saved to ROM may not be thesame. In this situation, exit Online Edit and download the program.
 After downloading or uploading the user program, start Online Edit when the WindLDR user program and the program running on the FC6A
are the same. Online Edit cannot start if the programs are different.

Initialize pulse after run-time download (M8126)
M8126 is a special internal relay that turns on for only one scan after run-time download has completed.
5-72

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
This is effective when you want to reliably initialize instructions after run-time download.
Example: A user program that initializes the AVRG instruction during run-time download

Even if the status of M0 is on during run-time download, the input to the AVRG instruction turns off for only one scan timeby normally-closed M8126, and the instruction is initialized.

AVRG(W) S1
M0000 M8126

S2

S3

D1

D2

D0000 M0000 D0100 D0200 M0100

Example: A user program that cancels RXD instructions in standby during run-time download

The user communication receive instruction cancel flag (port 1) turns on for only one scan during run-time download and all
RXD instructions in standby are canceled.

M8126

M8022

WindLDR Online Edit and run-time download operations
Program to create
Add rung 4 with the following specification to the program created in Chapter 4.
When input I0 and input I1 are both off, output Q3 turns on.
Rung Number
4


I0
OFF

I1
OFF

Operation
Output Q3 is ON

Operation procedure

1. Start Online Edit.

After downloading or uploading the user program, when the FC6A and WindLDR programs are the same, on the Online tab, in
the Monitor group, click Online Edit under Monitor.
Online Edit mode starts and a program can be edited with FC6A's operation being monitored.

2. Create a program.

Add rung 4 and insert the instructions according to the specification.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-73

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
3. Execute run-time download.

On the Online tab, in the Transfer group, click Run-Time Program Download.
The Download dialog box is displayed.
The user program is written to the FC6A when you click OK.

4. Check the operation of the program.

Rung 4:

When both input I0 and I1 are off, output Q3 turns on.

5. Exit Online Edit.

On the Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Online Edit under Monitor.
This exits Online Edit.

5-74

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Test Programming Function
This section describes the test programming function that rewrites the user program without stopping FC6A operation and allows
you confirm or cancel those changes after checking the operation of the program.

Warning Rewriting the program during operation is extremely dangerous. Carefully read and understand the function description

and precautions before using the function.
 Before executing test programming, confirming test programming, or canceling test programming, always check anddouble check the changed content and the operation of the program. There are no restrictions on the scope of editing
with test programming, but if many changes are made at one time, the possibility of triggering unexpected actions will
increase. Keep program changes with test programming to a minimum.
 If a user program syntax error or a user program download error occurs, the FC6A will stop operation (STOP) and all

outputs will be cleared. Depending on the subject being controlled, this may be extremely dangerous.
 Test programming can be repeatedly executed, but when the test programming is canceled, all test programming iscanceled at once, and the FC6A is restored to the program before test programming. When the test programming iscanceled after repeated test programming, the changed content will be difficult to understand when the FC6A is restored
to the original program and the possibility of trigger unexpected actions will increase. Keep the number of times test
programming is performed to a minimum.
 When exiting Online Edit after test programming, always confirm or cancel the test programming, or perform run-time

download. When the test programming is not confirmed or canceled and run-time download is not performed after test
programming, the program stored in ROM and the program being executed in RAM will not be the same. The program in
RAM will be cleared when the CPU module power is turned off, and then it will be overwritten by the program saved in
ROM when the power is turned on. Unexpected actions may be triggered in this situation, and depending on the subject
being controlled, this may be extremely dangerous.
 When using Online Edit, under no circumstances should you turn off the FC6A power or unplug the communication cable.

The result may be a serious error such as a user program download error, and depending on the subject being controlled,
this may be extremely dangerous.
 Device Q values are kept before and after test programming and cancel test programming. Therefore, when OUT/OUTN

instructions are deleted or device numbers are changed, device Q before the change keeps the status. Depending on thesubject being controlled, this may be extremely dangerous.

Function Description

With test programming, a program can be downloaded and changed at the next ladder scan during FC6A operation. Next, after
checking the operation of the changed program, you can select to confirm or cancel the test programming. If the test
programming is confirmed, the program that was overwritten by the test programming is written to ROM and it becomespermanent. If the test programming is canceled, the program that was overwritten by the test programming is restored to theprogram saved in ROM.
During test programming and cancel test programming, devices Q, M, R, T (current value), C (current value), and D keep theirprevious status. TP (preset value) and CP (preset value) are overwritten with the preset values of the user program after it ischanged.
Notes:
 When the test programming is canceled, only the user program is restored. The contents of the devices are not restored.
 When test programming is executed, the FC6A immediately switches to the new program when the program has finished being transferred.
 It takes a maximum of 30 seconds to save the program being executed in RAM to ROM by confirming the test programming. During thisperiod, the scan time for each scan increases in length about 10 to 130 ms.
 When the test programming is canceled, the program is restored to the program before test programming, but the device values are kept andnot restored.
 After test programming and cancel test programming are completed, M8126 turns on for only one scan.
 If test programming is performed and the test programming is confirmed when FC6A timer or counter preset values have been changed by








communication or advanced instructions, the preset values of the program being executed in RAM are overwritten. When test programmingis canceled, the preset values are restored to the values before test programming.
If PID, PIDA, PIDD, AVRG, DGRD, DISP, PULS, PWM, RAMP, RAMPL, ARAMP, JOG, or ZRN instructions are created or edited, the instructions
are not initialized unless the input to the instruction is turned off for one or more scans. When instructions are pasted in the program, andwhen instructions that have been commented out are enabled, these are regarded as new instructions.
SOTU/SOTD instructions are initialized at the first scan after test programming and cancel test programming have completed.
For user communication instructions (TXD, RXD, ETXD, ERXD), if instruction information remains in the instruction setup area,
communication is performed according to the information before the program was overwritten until all of the instructions in the setup area
have sent or received their data, even when the instruction information is overwritten by test programming and cancel test programming. All
RXD instructions in the setup area can be deleted by turning on the receive cancel flag assigned to each communication port.
Test programming, test programming confirmation, and test programming cancellation can only be executed when the FC6A is operating (RUN).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-75

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
Test programming, test programming confirmation, and test programming cancellation can only be executed during Online Editmode. These are all executed during FC6A operation (RUN).
Notes:
 During Online Edit, function area settings and expansion data register settings cannot be changed. To change these, download the entire

user program with a normal download.
 If communication was lost during test programming, test programming confirmation, or test programming cancellation, the program being

executed in RAM and the program saved to ROM may not be the same. In this situation, exit Online Edit and download the program.
 After downloading or uploading the user program, start Online Edit when the WindLDR user program and the program running on the FC6A

are the same. Online Edit cannot start if the programs are different.

5-76

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
WindLDR Online Edit and test programming operations
Program to create
Add rung 4 with the following specification to the program created in Chapter 4, and after testing operation with the test program,confirm or cancel the test programming.
When input I0 and input I1 are both off, output Q3 turns on.
Rung Number
4


I0
OFF

I1
OFF

Operation
Output Q3 is ON

Operation procedure

1. Start Online Edit.

After downloading or uploading the user program, when the FC6A and WindLDR programs are the same, on the Online tab, in
the Monitor group, click Online Edit under Monitor.
Online Edit mode starts and the operation of the FC6A is monitored and the program can be edited.

2. Create a program.

Add rung 4 and insert the instructions according to the specification.

3. Execute the test programing.

On the Online tab, in the Transfer group, click Test.
The Download dialog box is displayed.
The user program is written to the FC6A when you click OK.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

5-77

5: F UN CTI ON S AN D S ETTI N GS
4. Check the operation of the program.

Rung 4:

When both input I0 and I1 are off, output Q3 turns on.

5. To confirm the test programming, on the Online tab, in the Transfer group, click Confirm.

A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to save the program overwritten by the test programming to ROM and to makeit permanent.

6. To cancel the test programming, on the Online tab, in the Transfer group, click Cancel.

A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to restore the program that was overwritten by the test programming to theprogram saved in ROM.

Note: Devices overwritten by checking operation after test programming are also kept after test programming is canceled. For the above example,
if the test programming is canceled when Q3 is on, it keeps the on status. Depending on the subject being controlled, this may be extremely
dangerous.

7. Exit Online Edit.

On the Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Online Edit under Monitor.
This exits Online Edit.

Note: You cannot exit Online Edit if the test programming has not been confirmed or canceled after test programming, or if run-time download has
not been executed.

5-78

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CESThis chapter provides detailed descriptions of the allocations of devices such as inputs, outputs, internal relays, registers, timers,
and counters that are used in the basic and advanced instructions, as well as details about the allocations of special internal relays
and special data registers.
Please use this chapter as a reference for the devices.
Note: The programing and operation of FC6A user programs requires specialist knowledge.
Take the time to develop a thorough understanding of the contents and programs in this manual before using the FC6A.

Device Addresses
All-in-One CPU Module/J1939 All-in-One CPU Module
Device*1InputsSymbolI

Unit

Range (Points)
16-I/O Type

24-I/O Type

40-I/O TypeBit

I0 - I10(9 points)

I0 - I15(14 points)

I0 - I27(24 points)

I30 - I307
(224 points)
I310 - I627*3(256 points)
I630 - I633*4(4 points)

I30 - I307
(224 points)
I310 - I627*3(256 points)
I630 - I637*4(8 points)

Expansion Inputs*1

IBit

I30 - I187
(128 points)
I190 - I507*2(256 points)
I630 - I633*4(4 points)

Output*1Q

Bit

Q0 - Q6(7 points)

Q0 - Q11(10 points)

Q0 - Q17(16 points)

Bit

Q30 - Q187
(128 points)
Q190 - Q507*2(256 points)
Q630 - Q633*4(4 points)

Q30 - Q307
(224 points)
Q310 - Q627*3(256 points)
Q630 - Q633*4(4 points)

Q30 - Q307
(224 points)
Q310 - Q627*3(256 points)
Q630 - Q637*4(8 points)

Expansion Outputs*1

Q

Internal Relay

M

Bit

M0 - M7997(6,400 points)
M10000 - M17497(6,000 points)

Special Internal Relay*1

M

Bit

M8000 - M8317(256 points)

Shift Register

R

Bit

R0 - R255(256 points)

Timer

T

Bit/Word

T0 - T1023(1,024 points)

CounterC

Bit/Word

C0 - C511(512 points)*1

Data Register

D

Bit/Word

D0000 - D7999(8,000 points)
D10000 to D55999(46,000 points)

Special Data Register

D

Bit/Word

D8000 - D8499(500 points)

Index Register*5P

2 words

P0 - P15(16 points)*1 The least significant digit of the device address is an octal number (0 to 7).
*2 I190 to I507 and Q190 to Q507 are devices that can only be used when expansion modules are connected at the expansion interface side using
the expansion interface module (expander).
*3 I310 to I627 and Q310 to Q627 are devices that can only be used when expansion modules are connected at the expansion interface side using
the expansion interface module (expander).
*4 I630 to I637 and Q630 to Q637 are devices that can be used only when I/O cartridges are connected.
*5 The data type that can be used is L (Long) only.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-1

6: D EVI CESPlus CPU module
DeviceInputs*1

SymbolI

Unit
Bit

Expansion Inputs*1

I

Bit

Output*1

Q

Bit

Expansion Outputs*1

Q

Range (Points)
Plus 16-I/O Type

Plus 32-I/O TypeI0 - I7(8 points)

I0 - I17(16 points)
I30 - I307
(224 points)
I310 - I627*2(256 points)
I630 - I643*3(12 points)
I1000 - I10597*4(2,016 points)

Q0 - Q7(8 points)

Q0 - Q17(16 points)

Bit

Q30 - Q307
(224 points)
Q310 - Q627*2(256 points)
Q630 - Q643*3(12 points)
Q1000 - Q10597*4(2,016 points)

Internal Relay*1

MBit

M0 - M7997(6,400 points)
M10000 - M21247(9,000 points)

Special Internal Relay*1

M

Bit

M8000 - M9997(1,600 points)

Shift Register

R

Bit

R0 - R255(256 points)

Timer

T

Bit/Word

T0 - T1999(2,000 points)

CounterC

Bit/Word

C0 - C511(512 points)

D

Bit/Word

D0000 - D7999(8,000 points)
D10000 - D61999(52,000 points)

D

Bit*7/Word

D70000 - D269999*5(200,000 points)

Special Data Register

D

Bit/Word

D8000 - D8899(900 points)

Index Register*6P

2 words

P0 - P15(16 points)

Data Register
Non-retentive Data
Register*1 The least significant digit of the device address is an octal number (0 to 7).
*2 I1310 to I627 and Q310 to Q627 are devices that can only be used when expansion modules are connected at the expansion interface sideusing the expansion interface module (expander). (Node 0)*3 I630 to I643 and Q630 to Q643 are devices that can be used only when I/O cartridges are connected.
*4 I1000 to I10597 and Q1000 to Q10597 are devices that can be used only when expansion modules are connected using the expansion interface
modules (remote master and slaves) and the expansion interface modules (expander). (Node 1 to 10)*5 D70000 to D269999 cannot be designated as "Keep." Data register values are kept when you switch the PLC from Stop to Run, but those values
are cleared at power up.
*6 The data type that can be used is L (Long) only.
*7 Usable only in scripts executed by the SCRPT instruction and as argument devices used in UMACRO instructions.

6-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ Inputs (I), Expansion Inputs (I)Devices that input on/off information from external devices to the FC6A.
■ Outputs (Q), Expansion Outputs (Q)Devices that output on/off information from the FC6A to external devices.
■ Internal Relays (M)Bit devices used internally on the FC6A.
■ Special Internal Relays (M)Bit devices used internally on the FC6A. Special functions are assigned to each bit.
■ Shift Registers (R)Bit devices that are used with the SFR instruction and the SFRN instruction. The bit sequence of the data is shifted according topulse input.
■ Timer (T)Timers used internally in the FC6A. There are three devices: Timer bits (symbol: T, unit: bit), timer preset values (symbol: TP,
unit: word), and timer current values (symbol: TC, unit: word).
These can be used as an on-delay timer or an off-delay timer. For details on timers (T), see "Using Timer or Counter as Source
Device" on page 8-6.
■ Counters (C)Counters used internally in the FC6A. There are three devices: Counter bits (symbol: C, unit: bit), counter preset values (symbol:
CP, unit: word), and counter current values (symbol: CC, unit: word). These can be used as an adding counter or a reversible
counter. For details on counters (C), see "Using Timer or Counter as Source Device" on page 8-6.
■ Data Registers (D)Word devices that are used for writing numerical data internally in the FC6A. These can also be used as bit devices.
■ Special Data Registers (D)Word devices that are used for writing numerical data internally in the FC6A. Special functions are assigned to each dataregister. These can also be used as bit devices.
Notes:
 Although the device symbol for internal relays (M0000 to M7997, M10000 to M21247) and special internal relays (M8000 to M9997) is thesame ("M"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each bit of the special internal relays.
 Although the device symbol for the data registers (D0000 to D7999, D10000 to D61999, D70000 to D269999) and special data registers(D8000 to D8899) is the same ("D"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each special data register.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-3

6: D EVI CESSpecial Internal Relay
Special Internal Relay Device Addresses

Warning

Do not write to data in the area marked as reserved in the special internal relays list. Otherwise the system may not operatecorrectly.

Note: R/W is an abbreviation for read/write.
The notation for the R/W field is as follows.
R/W: The device can be both read from and written to
R: Read-only
W: Write-only
DeviceAddress

Description

Power
OFF

R/W

M8000

Start Control

Maintained

Maintained

R/W

M8001

1-s Clock Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8002

All Outputs OFF

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8003

Carry (Cy) or Borrow (Bw)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8004

User Program Execution Error

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8005

Communication Error

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8006

Communication Prohibited Flag (When Data Link Master)

Maintained

Maintained

R/W

M8007

Initialization Flag (When Data Link Master)/Stop Communication Flag (When
Data Link Slave)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8010

Status LED Operation

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8011
M8012

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8013

Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8014

Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8015

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8016

Calendar Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8017

Clock Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8020

Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8021

Clock Data Adjust Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8022

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 1)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8023

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8024

BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag

Maintained

Maintained

R/W

M8025

Maintain Outputs While Stopped

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8026

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3)

ClearedCleared

R/W

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

ClearedCleared

R/W

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

—

—

—

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8027

Count Direction Flag

M8030

Comparison Output Reset

M8031

High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)

M8032
M8033

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 4)

M8034
M8035

Comparison Output Reset
High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3)

M8036
M8037

— Reserved —

M8040
M8041

Comparison Output Reset
Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8042

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8043

Count Direction Flag

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8044

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

—

—

—

M8045

High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4)

High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)

M8046
M8047
M8050

6-4

When
Stopped— Reserved —FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

When
Stopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8051

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8052

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8054

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

ClearedR

M8055

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8053

M8056

High-speed Counter (Group 2/I1)— Reserved —M8057

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8060

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8062

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

ClearedR

M8063

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8061

M8064 to
M8067

High-speed Counter (Group 6/I7)— Reserved —M8070

SD Memory Card Mount Status

Maintained

ClearedR

M8071

Accessing SD Memory Card

Maintained

ClearedR

M8072

Unmount SD Memory Card

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8073

Function Switch Status

Operating

ClearedR

M8074

Battery Voltage Measurement Flag

Operating

ClearedR/W

M8075 toM8077

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8080

Data Link Slave 1 Communication Completed Relay (When Data Link Master)

Operating

ClearedR

M8081

Data Link Slave 2 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8082

Data Link Slave 3 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8083

Data Link Slave 4 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8084

Data Link Slave 5 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8085

Data Link Slave 6 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8086

Data Link Slave 7 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8087

Data Link Slave 8 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8090

Data Link Slave 9 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8091

Data Link Slave 10 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8092

Data Link Slave 11 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8093

Data Link Slave 12 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8094

Data Link Slave 13 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8095

Data Link Slave 14 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8096

Data Link Slave 15 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8097

Data Link Slave 16 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8100

Data Link Slave 17 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8101

Data Link Slave 18 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8102

Data Link Slave 19 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8103

Data Link Slave 20 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8104

Data Link Slave 21 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8105

Data Link Slave 22 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8106

Data Link Slave 23 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8107

Data Link Slave 24 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8110

Data Link Slave 25 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8111

Data Link Slave 26 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8112

Data Link Slave 27 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8113

Data Link Slave 28 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8114

Data Link Slave 29 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8115

Data Link Slave 30 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8116

Data Link Slave 31 Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8117

Data Link All Slaves Communication Completed Relay

Operating

ClearedR

M8120

Initialize Pulse

ClearedClearedR

M8121

1-s ClockOperating

ClearedR

M8122

100-ms ClockOperating

ClearedR

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-5

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

Power
OFF

R/W

M8123

10-ms ClockOperating

ClearedR

M8124

Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed

Maintained

ClearedR

M8125

In-operation Output

ClearedClearedR

M8126

1 Scan ON After Run-Time Download Completes

ClearedClearedR

M8127— Reserved —

—

—

—

Reset Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8130
M8131

High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)

M8132— Reserved —M8133

High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3)

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

ClearedR

M8134

High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4)Comparison ON Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Reset Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Comparison ON Status

Maintained

ClearedR

ClearedClearedR

ClearedClearedR

ClearedCleared

R

M8135
M8136

High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)

M8137

Interrupt Input I0 Status (Group 1/I0)

M8140

Interrupt Input I1 Status (Group 2/I1)

M8141

Interrupt Input I3 Status (Group 3/I3)

M8142

Interrupt Input I4 Status (Group 4/I4)ClearedClearedR

M8143

Interrupt Input I6 Status (Group 5/I6)

ClearedClearedR

M8144

Timer Interrupt Status

ClearedClearedR

M8145

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 5)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8146

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 6)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8147

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 7)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8150

Comparison Result 1

Maintained

ClearedR

M8151

Comparison Result 2

Maintained

ClearedR

M8152

Comparison Result 3(ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited)

Maintained

ClearedR

M8153

Group 1/I0

Maintained

ClearedR

M8154

Group 2/I1

Maintained

ClearedR

M8155

Group 3/I3

Maintained

ClearedR

Group 4/I4

Maintained

ClearedR

M8157

Group 5/I6

Maintained

ClearedR

M8160

Group 6/I7

Maintained

ClearedR

M8161

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

Underflow

Maintained

ClearedR

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

Underflow

Maintained

Cleared

R

M8156

M8162
M8163
M8164

Catch Input ON/OFF Status

High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)
High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)

M8165

High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3)

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

M8166

High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4)

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

M8167

Interrupt Input I7 Status (Group 6/I7)(ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited)

Maintained

ClereadR

M8170

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 8)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8171

— Reserved —

M8172
M8173
M8174

Transistor Source Output Overcurrent
Detection

M8175

6-6

When
Stopped———Group 1

Operating

ClearedR

Group 2

Operating

ClearedR

Group 3Operating

ClearedR

Group 4

Operating

ClearedR

ClearedCleared

R/W

—

—

—

M8176

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 9)

M8177 toM8183

— Reserved —M8184

Change HMI Module Network Settings Trigger

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8185

In Daylight Saving Time Period

Operating

ClearedR

M8186

Ethernet Port 1 Executing Auto Ping

Operating

ClearedR

M8187

Ethernet Port 1 Auto Ping Stop Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8190

Change CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Network Settings Trigger

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8191

SNTP Acquisition Flag

Operating

ClearedR/W

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

When
Stopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8192

Interrupt Input I0 Edge

ClearedClearedR

M8193

Interrupt Input I3 Edge

ClearedClearedR

M8194

Interrupt Input I4 Edge

ClearedClearedR

M8195

Interrupt Input I6 Edge

ClearedClearedR

M8196

Interrupt Input I7 Edge

ClearedClearedR

M8197

Interrupt Input I1 Edge

ClearedClearedR

On: Rising Edge
Off: Falling Edge

M8200

Connection 1

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8201

Connection 2

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8202

Connection 3

ClearedCleared

R/W

Connection 4

ClearedCleared

R/W

Connection 5

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8205

Connection 6

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8206

Connection 7

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8207

Connection 8

ClearedCleared

R/W

—

—

—

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8203
M8204

User Communication Receive
Instruction Cancel Flag

M8210

— Reserved —M8211

HMI Module Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization

M8212

Connection 1

Operating

ClearedR

M8213

Connection 2

Operating

ClearedR

M8214

Connection 3

Operating

ClearedR

Connection 4

Operating

ClearedR

Connection 5

Operating

ClearedR

M8217

Connection 6

Operating

ClearedR

M8220

Connection 7

Operating

ClearedR

M8221

Connection 8

Operating

ClearedR

M8222

Connection 1

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8223

Connection 2

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8224

Connection 3

Operating

Cleared

R/W

Connection 4

Operating

Cleared

R/W

Connection 5

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8227

Connection 6

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8230

Connection 7

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8231

Connection 8

Operating

Cleared

R/W

Operating

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8215
M8216

M8225
M8226

Connection Status(ON: Connected, OFF: Not Connected)

Disconnect User Communication
Connection

M8232

HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Status

M8233 toM8247

— Reserved —M8250

Download from SD Memory Card Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8251

Upload to SD Memory Card Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8252

Executing SD Memory Card Download

Operating

ClearedR

M8253

Executing SD Memory Card Upload

Operating

ClearedR

M8254

SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Completion Output

Operating

ClearedR

M8255

SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Output

Operating

Cleared

R

M8256
M8257

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8260

Write Recipe Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8261

Read Recipe Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8262

Executing Write Recipe

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8263

Executing Read Recipe

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8264

Recipe Channel Execution Completed Output

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8265

Recipe Execution Error Output

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8266

Recipe Block Execution Completed Output

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8267

Read Restriction for Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range)

Operating

ClearedR

M8270— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8271

Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8272

Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Completed
OutputOperating

ClearedR

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-7

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

When
Stopped

Power
OFF

R/W

Operating

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8273

Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Error Output

M8274 toM8297

— Reserved —M8300

J1939 Communication Permitted Flag

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8301

J1939 Online Status

ClearedClearedR

M8302

J1939 Local Station Address Confirmation Status

ClearedClearedR

M8303

J1939 Communication Error Output

ClearedClearedR

M8304

J1939 Communication Bus Off Occurrence Output

ClearedClearedR

M8305 to
M8310

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8311

ESC+Key Input (Up)

ESC+Key Input ()

ClearedClearedR

M8312

ESC+Key Input (Down)

ESC+Key Input ()

ClearedClearedR

M8313

ESC+Key Input (Left)

ESC+Key Input ()

ClearedClearedR

M8314

ESC+Key Input (Right)

ESC+Key Input ()

ClearedClearedR

M8315 toM8319

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8320

Initialize Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8321 toM8330

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8331

Ethernet Port 2 Executing Auto Ping

Operating

ClearedR

M8332

Ethernet Port 2 Auto Ping Stop Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8333

Change CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Network Settings Trigger

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8334

Connection 9

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8335

Connection 10

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8336

Connection 11

ClearedCleared

R/W

Connection 12

ClearedCleared

R/W

Connection 13

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8341

Connection 14

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8342

Connection 15

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8343

Connection 16

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8344

Ethernet Port 1 Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8345

Connection 9

Operating

ClearedR

M8346

Connection 10

Operating

ClearedR

M8347

Connection 11

Operating

ClearedR

Connection 12

Operating

ClearedR

Connection 13

Operating

ClearedR

M8352

Connection 14

Operating

ClearedR

M8353

Connection 15

Operating

ClearedR

M8354

Connection 16

Operating

ClearedR

M8355

Connection 9

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8356

Connection 10

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8357

Connection 11

Operating

Cleared

R/W

Connection 12

Operating

Cleared

R/W

Connection 13

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8362

Connection 14

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8363

Connection 15

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8364

Connection 16

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8337
M8340

M8350
M8351

M8360
M8361

6-8

Description

User Communication Receive
Instruction Cancel Flag

Connection Status(ON: Connected, OFF: Not Connected)

Disconnect User Communication
Connection

M8365

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 10)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8366

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 11)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8367

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 12)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8370

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 13)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8371

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 14)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8372

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 15)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8373

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 16)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8374

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 17)

ClearedClearedR/W

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

When
Stopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8375

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 18)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8376

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 19)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8377

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 20)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8380

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 21)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8381

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 22)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8382

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 23)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8383

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 24)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8384

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 25)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8385

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 26)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8386

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 27)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8387

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 28)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8390

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 29)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8391

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 30)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8392

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 31)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8393

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 32)

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8394

User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 33)

ClearedClearedR/W

M8395 toM8400

— Reserved —

—

—

—

M8401

Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Flag

Operating

Cleared

R/W

M8402

Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution
Completed Output

Operating

ClearedR

M8403

Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Error Output

Operating

ClearedR

M8404

Plus CPU Module Web Server Operation Status

Operating

ClearedR

M8405 toM8447

— Reserved —

—

—

—

Operating

Cleared

R/W

—

—

—

ClearedCleared

R/W

—

—

—

Reset Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Underflow

Maintained

ClearedR

Count Direction Flag

Maintained

Cleared

R

—

—

—

M8450

BACnet Communication Bit

M8451 toM8457

— Reserved —M8460

EtherNet/IP Communication Bit

M8461 toM8597

— Reserved —

M8600
M8601

High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3)

M8602
M8603 toM8997

— Reserved —Supplementary Descriptions of the Special Internal Relays■ M8000: Start Control
M8000 controls the run/stop status of the FC6A. The CPU is set to run when M8000 is turned on, and the CPU is set to off when
M8000 is turned off. See "Start/Stop Operation" on page 4-19. However, the function switch, stop input, and reset input haveprecedence over start control. M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down. When data to be maintained during
a power failure disappears after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration, the CPU restarts
operation as selected in Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error. For details, see "Run/Stop
Selection at Keep Data Error" on page 5-8.
■ M8001: 1-s Clock Reset
While M8001 is on, M8121 (1-s clock) is always off.
■ M8002: All Outputs OFF
While M8002 is on, all outputs are off. The self-holding circuit created in the ladder program is also off.
■ M8003: Carry/Borrow
When a carry (Cy) or borrow (Bw) results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction, M8003 is turned on. For details,
see "Carry and Borrow" on page 8-10".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-9

6: D EVI CES■ M8004: User Program Execution Error
When an error occurs while executing a user program, M8004 is turned on. For details on user program execution errors, see
the appendix "User Program Execution Error and Ladder Program Execution Error" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
■ M8005: Communication Error
When an error occurs during data link communication, M8005 is turned on. The state is retained even when the error is cleared.
■ M8006: Communication Prohibited Flag (When Data Link Master)
During data link communication, communication is stopped while M8006 is on.
■ M8007: Initialization Flag (When Data Link Master)/Stop Communication Flag (When Data Link Slave)
When data link master: When this flag is turned on in the run status, the data link is initialized just once to check the connection
status. Use this when the slave configured in the data link is powered at a timing slower than themaster.
When data link slave : This flag is turned on when communication from the master is interrupted for 10 s or longer. This flag isturned off when communication can be normally received.
■ M8010: Status LED Operation
While M8010 is on, the status LED [STAT] is turned on. While off, the status LED [STAT] is turned off.
■ M8013: Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag
When the clock writing or clock adjustment processing could not be executed normally, M8013 is turned on. It is turned off
when the processing completes normally.
■ M8014: Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8021),
M8014 is turned on. It is turned off when reading completes normally.
■ M8016: Calendar Data Write Flag
When M8016 is turned on after writing data to the calendar data (write-only) special data registers (D8015 to D8018), thecalendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) is written to the internal clock.
■ M8017: Clock Data Write Flag
When M8017 is turned on after writing data to the clock data (write-only) special data registers (D8019 to D8021), the clock
data (hours, minutes, seconds) is written to the internal clock.
■ M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag
When M8020 is turned on after writing data to the calendar/clock data (write-only) special data registers (D8015 to D8021), thecalendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hours, minutes, seconds) is written to the internal clock.
■ M8021: Clock Data Adjust Flag
When M8021 is turned on, the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds.
 When M8021 is turned on, if the seconds are between 0 and 29, the seconds will be set to 0 and the minutes remain the same.
 When M8021 is turned on, if the seconds are between 30 and 59, the seconds will be set to 0 and 1 will be added to the minutes.
■ M8022: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 1)
While M8022 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 1 is canceled.
■ M8023: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2)
While M8023 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 2 is canceled.
■ M8024: BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag
While the WSFT (word shift) instruction or the BMOV (block move) instruction is executing, M8024 is turned on. Whencompleted, M8024 is turned off.
■ M8025: Maintain Outputs While Stopped
When the FC6A is stopped while running with M8025 turned on, the outputs maintain their runtime status. When set to run
again, M8025 is automatically turned off.
■ M8026: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3)
While M8026 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 3 is canceled.
■ M8033, M8145 to M8147, M8170, M8176, M8365 to M8394: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel
Flag (Port 4 to 33)
While these flags are on, user communication (receive instruction) being executed on the corresponding port is canceled.
6-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
M8033 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 4)
M8145 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 5)
M8146 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 6)
M8147 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 7)
M8170 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 8)
M8176 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 9)
M8365 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 10)
M8366 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 11)
M8367 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 12)
M8370 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 13)
M8371 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 14)
M8372 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 15)
M8373 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 16)
M8374 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 17)
M8375 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 18)
M8376 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 19)
M8377 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 20)
M8380 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 21)
M8381 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 22)
M8382 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 23)
M8383 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 24)
M8384 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 25)
M8385 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 26)
M8386 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 27)
M8387 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 28)
M8390 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 29)
M8391 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 30)
M8392 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 31)
M8393 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 32)
M8394 = User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 33)■ M8027 to M8032, M8034 to M8036, M8040 to M8046, M8051 to M8055, M8057 to M8063, M8130, M8131,
M8133 to M8136, M8161 to M8167, M8600 to M8602: Special Internal Relays for High-speed Counter
Special internal relays used for the high-speed counter. For details, see "High-Speed Counter" on page 5-14.
M8027 to M8032, M8130, M8131, M8161, M8162 = High-speed counter (group 1/I0)
M8034 to M8036, M8133, M8165, M8600 to M8602 = High-speed counter (group 3/I3)
M8040 to M8042, M8134, M8166 = High-speed counter (group 4/I4)
M8043 to M8046, M8135, M8136, M8163, M8164 = High-speed counter (group 5/I6)
M8051 to M8055 = High-speed counter (group 2/I1)
M8057 to M8063 = High-speed counter (group 6/I7)■ M8070: SD Memory Card Mount Status
When an SD memory card is inserted in the FC6A and it has been recognized and can be used, M8070 is turned on. M8070 isturned off if no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.
■ M8071: Accessing SD Memory Card
M8071 is turned on while the SD memory card is being accessed. It is turned off when access has finished.
■ M8072: Unmount SD Memory Card
When M8072 is turned on, access to the SD memory card is stopped. To make an SD memory card accessible that has hadaccess to it stopped, insert the card once again.
■ M8073: Function Switch Status
This relay indicates the status of the function switch on the front of the CPU module.
M8073 is on when the function switch is 1. M8073 is off when the function switch is 0.
■ M8074: Battery Voltage Measurement Flag
This relay indicates the battery voltage measurement status of the backup battery.
When M8074 is turned on, the battery voltage starts being measured, and it is turned off when the measurement has finished.
■ M8080 to M8117: Data Link Communication Completed Relay
Special internal relays used for data link communication. For details, see Chapter 7 "Data Link Communication" in the "FC6A
Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-11

6: D EVI CES■ M8120: Initialize Pulse
When operation (RUN) starts, M8120 is turned on for a period of one scan.

1 scan time
M8120
Start

■ M8121: 1-s Clock
While M8001 is off, M8121 generates clock pulses in a 1 s cycle, with a duty
ratio of 1:1 (500 ms on and 500 ms off).

500 ms

500 ms

M8121
1s■ M8122: 100-ms Clock
M8122 generates clock pulses in a 100 ms cycle, with a duty ratio of 1:1(50 ms on and 50 ms off).

50 ms

50 ms

M8122

100 ms■ M8123: 10-ms Clock
M8123 generates clock pulses in a 10 ms cycle, with a duty ratio of 1:1(5 ms on and 5 ms off).

5 ms

5 ms

M8123
10 ms

■ M8124: Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed
When timer or counter preset values are changed, M8124 is turned on. When a user program is transferred or when thechanged data is cleared, M8124 is turned off.
■ M8125: In-operation Output
M8125 is on during the run status.
■ M8126: Scan ON After Run-Time Download Completes
When the user program is changed during the run status (run-time download), after the download completes, M8126 is turned
on for one scan only when the user program starts operation.
■ M8137 to M8143, M8167: Interrupt Input Status
These relays are turned on when the corresponding user interrupt is allowed. These relays are turned off when the userinterrupt is prohibited.
M8137 = Interrupt input I0 status
M8140 = Interrupt input I1 status
M8141 = Interrupt input I3 status
M8142 = Interrupt input I4 status
M8143 = Interrupt input I6 status
M8167 = Interrupt input I7 status■ M8144: Timer Interrupt Status
When the timer interrupt is allowed, M8144 is turned on. When the timer interrupt is prohibited, M8144 is turned off.
■ M8150 to M8152: Comparison Result
M8150 to M8152 turn on according to the comparison results of the CMP= (Compare(=)) instruction and the ICMP>= (Interval
Compare) instruction.
For details, see Chapter 6 "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152 in ICMP>=" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
■ M8153 to M8160: Catch Input ON/OFF Status
When the rising or falling input edge of the input contact specified as the catch input is detected during a scan, the input contact
status is captured. The detectable edges are once per scan.
M8153 = Group 1/I0 status
M8154 = Group 2/I1 status
M8155 = Group 3/I3 status
M8156 = Group 4/I4 status
M8157 = Group 5/I6 status
M8160 = Group 6/I7 status

6-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ M8172 to M8175: Transistor Source Output Overcurrent Detection
When overcurrent output occurs in a transistor protection source output on the CPU module, a special internal relay (M8172 to
M8175) is turned on. The following special internal relays have been allocated with four outputs set as one group. If overcurrent
output occurs in any of the special internal relays, it is turned on.
Even if the overcurrent output has been cleared, these special internal relays are not reset to off. To reset a special internal relay
to off, create programming to do so in the ladder program.
M8172 = Group 1 (Q0 to Q3) status
M8173 = Group 2 (Q4 to Q7) status
M8174 = Group 3 (Q10 to Q13) status
M8175 = Group 4 (Q14 to Q17) status■ M8184: Change HMI Module Network Settings Trigger
When M8184 is turned on, the values stored in D8437 to D8456 are set as the HMI module IP address.
The IP address is not set just by changing the values of D8437 to D8456. For details on changing the HMI module network
settings, see Chapter 3 "Network settings by HMI module special data registers" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart
Communication Manual".
■ M8185: In Daylight Saving Time Period
When the daylight saving time function is enabled, M8185 is on during the daylight saving time period. When outside of the
daylight saving time period, M8185 is off.
When the daylight saving time function is disabled, M8185 is off.
■ M8186: Ethernet Port 1 Executing Auto Ping
M8186 is on when the auto ping on Ethernet port 1 is operating. M8186 is off when auto ping is stopped. For details on auto
ping, see Chapter 3 "Auto Ping Function" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ M8187: Ethernet Port 1 Auto Ping Stop Flag
While M8187 is on, the auto ping on Ethernet port 1 is stopped. While M8187 is off, auto ping is executed. At that time, autoping is executed from the smallest remote host number specified in the remote host list, regardless of the previous end status.
■ M8190: Change CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Network Settings Trigger
When M8190 is turned on, the values stored in D8303 to D8323 are set as the IP Settings/DNS Settings of Ethernet port 1 on
the CPU module.
The IP address is not set just by changing the values of D8303 to D8323. For details on changing the IP Settings/DNS Settingsof Ethernet port 1 on the CPU module, see Chapter 3 "Network settings by special data registers" in the "FC6A Series
MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ M8191: SNTP Acquisition Flag
When M8191 is turned on, the time information is acquired from the SNTP server.
■ M8192 to M8197: Interrupt Input Edge
These relays turn on when an interrupt occurs with the rising edge of an interrupt input. They turn off when an interrupt occurs
with the falling edge of an interrupt input.
M8192 = Interrupt input I0 edge
M8193 = Interrupt input I3 edge
M8194 = Interrupt input I4 edge
M8195 = Interrupt input I6 edge
M8196 = Interrupt input I7 edge
M8197 = Interrupt input I1 edge
■ M8200 to M8207, M8334 to M8343: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag
When M8200 to M8207 or M8334 to M8343 are turned on, the user communication receive instruction being executed is
stopped.
M8200 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 1
M8201 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 2
M8202 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 3
M8203 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 4
M8204 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 5
M8205 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 6
M8206 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 7
M8207 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 8
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-13

6: D EVI CES
M8334 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 9
M8335 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 10
M8336 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 11
M8337 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 12
M8340 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 13
M8341 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 14
M8342 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 15
M8343 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 16■ M8211: HMI Module Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization
When M8211 is turned on, the settings for the send E-mail server on the HMI-Ethernet port are initialized.
■ M8212 to M8221, M8345 to M8354: Connection Status
While connected to a network device via the maintenance communication server, user communication server/client, or Modbus TCP
server/client, the connection status is turned on. While not connected to a network device, the connection status is turned off.
M8212 = Connection 1
M8213 = Connection 2
M8214 = Connection 3
M8215 = Connection 4
M8216 = Connection 5
M8217 = Connection 6
M8220 = Connection 7
M8221 = Connection 8
M8345 = Connection 9
M8346 = Connection 10
M8347 = Connection 11
M8350 = Connection 12
M8351 = Connection 13
M8352 = Connection 14
M8353 = Connection 15
M8354 = Connection 16■ M8222 to M8231, M8355 to M8364: Disconnect User Communication Connection
When connected to a remote host via user communication, the corresponding connection is disconnected when M8222 toM8231 is turned on.
M8222 = Connection 1
M8223 = Connection 2
M8224 = Connection 3
M8225 = Connection 4
M8226 = Connection 5
M8227 = Connection 6
M8230 = Connection 7
M8231 = Connection 8
M8355 = Connection 9
M8356 = Connection 10
M8357 = Connection 11
M8360 = Connection 12
M8361 = Connection 13
M8362 = Connection 14
M8363 = Connection 15
M8364 = Connection 16
These relays are enabled only when a user communication client is used.
■ M8232: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Status
M8232 is turned on when there is a connection with the connection number specified by D8429. M8232 is turned off when there
is no connection.
■ M8250: Download from SD Memory Card Execution Flag
When M8250 is turned on, a ZLD file is downloaded from the SD memory card. The file that will be downloaded is the ZLD filespecified in the autoexec.ini file.
6-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ M8251: Upload to SD Memory Card Execution Flag
When M8251 is turned on, a ZLD file is uploaded to the SD memory card.
A ZLD file is created with the file name specified in the autoexec.ini file.
■ M8252: Executing SD Memory Card Download
M8252 is turned on when starting execution of the download from the SD memory card, and when the download has completed,
it is turned off.
■ M8253: Executing SD Memory Card Upload
M8253 is turned on when starting execution of the upload to the SD memory card, and when the upload has completed, it isturned off.
■ M8254: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Completed Output
M8254 is turned off when starting execution of the download from the SD memory card or the upload to the SD memory card,
and when the download or upload has completed, it is turned on.
■ M8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Output
M8255 is updated when execution of the download from the SD memory card or the upload to the SD memory card hascompleted. M8255 is turned on when D8255 (Download/Upload Execution Status) is a value other than 0.
■ M8260: Write Recipe Execution Flag
When M8260 is turned on from off, write recipe is executed for all channels of the block number specified by D8260 (Recipe
Block Number).
■ M8261: Read Recipe Execution Flag
When M8261 is turned on from off, read recipe is executed for all channels of the block number specified by D8260 (Recipe
Block Number).
■ M8262: Executing Write Recipe
M8262 is turned on when the write recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when the processing has completed. M8262 also
is turned off when read recipe processing starts.
■ M8263: Executing Read Recipe
M8263 is turned on when the read recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when the processing has completed. M8263 also
is turned off when write recipe processing starts.
■ M8264: Recipe Channel Execution Completed Output
M8264 is turned off when starting to read or write a recipe channel, and it is turned on when reading or writing a recipe channel
has completed.
■ M8265: Recipe Execution Error Output
M8265 is turned on when recipe execution has completed and D8264 (Recipe Execution Status) is a value other than 0. For
details on recipes, see "Recipe Function" on page 11-8.
■ M8266: Recipe Block Execution Completed Output
M8266 is turned off when starting to read or write a recipe block, and it is turned on when reading or writing a recipe block hascompleted.
■ M8267: Read Restriction for Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range)
M8267 is turned on when reading or writing to a recipe block in internal memory (ROM-Range) has completed. When M8267 ison, recipes cannot be read to internal memory (ROM-Range 1) and internal memory (ROM-Range 2). When reading recipes,
turn off M8267.
■ M8271: Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Flag
When M8271 is turned on, the files for MQTT Basic Settings are downloaded. For details, see Chapter 3 "Download the MQTT
Basic Settings" in the "Network User’s Manual".
■ M8272: Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Completed Output
M8272 is turned off when downloading the files for MQTT Basic Settings is started, and it is turned on once the download isfinished.
■ M8273: Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Error Output
M8273 is turned off when downloading the files for MQTT Basic Settings is started, and it is turned on if an error occurs during
the process.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-15

6: D EVI CES■ M8300 to M8304: J1939 Communication
Special internal relays used in J1939 communication. For details, see Chapter 8 "J1939 Communication" in the "FC6A Series
MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ M8311 to M8314: Key Input Status
While the ESC button and direction buttons on the HMI module are simultaneously pressed, the corresponding special internal
relays are turned on. When the keys are not pressed, the relays are turned off.
M8311 = ESC key + Up ( ) key
M8312 = ESC key + Down ( ) key
M8313 = ESC key + Left ( ) key
M8314 = ESC key + Right ( ) key■ M8320: Initialize Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave
When M8320 is turned on, expansion interface remote master and slave modules along with the expansion modules that areconnected to the expansion interface remote slave modules are initialized. One the initialization is finished, M8320 isautomatically turned off and the I/O refresh at the expansion interface remote slave modules will resume.
■ M8331: Ethernet Port 2 Executing Auto Ping
M8331 is on when the auto ping on Ethernet port 2 is operating. M8331 is off when auto ping is stopped. For details on auto
ping, see Chapter 3 "Auto Ping Function" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ M8332: Ethernet Port 2 Auto Ping Stop Flag
While M8332 is on, the auto ping on Ethernet port 2 is stopped. While M8332 is off, auto ping is executed. At that time, autoping is executed from the smallest remote host number specified in the remote host list, regardless of the previous end status.
■ M8333: Change CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Network Settings Trigger
When M8333 is turned on, the values stored in D8630 to D8650 are set as the IP Settings/DNS Settings of Ethernet port 2 on the CPU module.
The IP address is not set just by changing the values of D8630 to D8650. For details on changing the IP Settings/DNS Settings of Ethernet port
2 on the CPU module, see Chapter 3 "Network settings by special data registers" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ M8344: Ethernet Port 1 Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization
When M8344 is turned on, the settings for the send E-mail server on the Ethernet port 1 are initialized.
■ M8401: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Flag
When M8401 is turned on, the files for Server Functions are downloaded. For details on the files for Server Functions, see "SD
Memory Card Folder Structure and Files" on page 11-4.
■ M8402: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Completed Output
M8402 is turned off when downloading the files for Server Functions is started, and it is turned on once the download is finished.
■ M8403: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Error Output
M8403 is turned off when downloading the files for Server Functions is started, and it is turned on if an error occurs during theprocess.
■ M8404: Plus CPU Module Web Server Operation Status
M8404 turns on when the Plus CPU module web server starts, and it is turned off in the following cases.
• When the Plus CPU module power is turned on• At the start of downloading the user program• At the start of downloading system software• At the start of downloading the files for the Server Functions
Note: Even if D8303 (CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Settings / DNS Settings Switching) is changed, M8404 is not turned off.

■ M8450: BACnet Communication Bit
While M8450 is on, BACnet communication is performed.
■ M8460: EtherNet/IP Communication Bit
This special internal relay enables or disables EtherNet/IP communication.
OFF: Disable EtherNet/IP communication
ON: Enable EtherNet/IP communication

6-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CESSpecial Data Register
Special Data Register Device Addresses

Warning

Do not write to data in the area marked as reserved in the special data registers list. Otherwise the system may not operatecorrectly.

Note: R/W is an abbreviation for read/write.
The notation for the R/W field is as follows.
R/W: The device can be both read from and written to
R: Read-only
W: Write-only
DeviceAddress

Description

Update Timing

R/W

D8000

Quantity of Inputs

When I/O initialized

R

D8001

Quantity of Outputs

When I/O initialized

R

D8002

CPU Module Type Information

Power-up

R

D8003
D8004

— Reserved —

―

-

D8005

General Error Code

When error occurred

R/W

D8006

User Program Execution Error Code

When error occurred

R

D8007

— Reserved —

―

-

D8008

Year

Every 500 ms

R

D8009

Month

Every 500 ms

R

D8010

Day

Every 500 ms

R

Day of the Week

Every 500 ms

R

Hour

Every 500 ms

R

D8013

MinuteEvery 500 ms

R

D8014

SecondEvery 500 ms

R

D8015

Year

―

W

D8011
D8012

Calendar/Clock Current Data
(Read only)

D8016

Month

―

W

D8017

Day

―

W

D8018

Calendar/Clock New Data
(Write only)

Day of the Week

―

W

Hour

―

W

D8020

Minute

―

W

D8021

Second

―

W

D8019

D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset Value (1 to 1,000 ms)

―

W

D8023

Scan Time Current Value (ms)Every scan

R

Scan Time Maximum Value (ms)At occurrenceR

Scan Time Minimum Value (ms)At occurrenceR

Every scan

R

―

-

D8024

Scan Time Data

D8025
D8026

Communication Mode Information (Port 1 to Port 3)

D8027
D8028

— Reserved —D8029

System Software Version

Power-up

R

D8030

Communication Cartridge Information

Power-upR

D8031

Optional Device Connection Information

Power-up

R

D8032

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I1)

―

R/W

D8033

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I3)

―

R/W

D8034

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I4)

―

R/W

D8035

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I6)

―

R/W

D8036

Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.

―

R/W

D8037

Number of Connected I/O Modules

When I/O initialized

R

D8038
D8039

— Reserved —

―

―

D8040

Slave Number (Port 4)

―

R/W

D8041

Slave Number (Port 5)

―

R/W

D8042

Slave Number (Port 6)

―

R/W

D8043

Slave Number (Port 7)―

R/W

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-17

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

Update Timing

R/W

D8044

Slave Number (Port 8)

―

R/W

D8045

Slave Number (Port 9)―

R/W

D8046 toD8051

— Reserved —――Every scan

R/W

―

―

D8052

J1939 Communication Error CodeD8053 toD8055

— Reserved —D8056

Battery Voltage

D8057

Analog Volume (AI0)―R

Every scan

R

D8058

Built-in Analog Input (AI1)

Every scan

R

D8059

Analog Input Status AI0

Every scanR

Every scan

R

D8060

Analog Input Status AI1

D8061 to
D8066

— Reserved —

―

―

D8067

Backlight ON Time

―

R/W

D8068

— Reserved —

―

―

D8069

Slave 1 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)
Slave Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Slave Mode)

When error occurred

R

6-18

D8070

Slave 2 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8071

Slave 3 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8072

Slave 4 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8073

Slave 5 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8074

Slave 6 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8075

Slave 7 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8076

Slave 8 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8077

Slave 9 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8078

Slave 10 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8079

Slave 11 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8080

Slave 12 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8081

Slave 13 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8082

Slave 14 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8083

Slave 15 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8084

Slave 16 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8085

Slave 17 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8086

Slave 18 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8087

Slave 19 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8088

Slave 20 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8089

Slave 21 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8090

Slave 22 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8091

Slave 23 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8092

Slave 24 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8093

Slave 25 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8094

Slave 26 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8095

Slave 27 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8096

Slave 28 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8097

Slave 29 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8098

Slave 30 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8099

Slave 31 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)

When error occurred

R

D8100

Slave Number (Port 1)

―

R/W

D8101

— Reserved —

―

―

D8102

Slave Number (Port 2)

―

R/W

D8103

Slave Number (Port 3)

―

R/W

D8104

Control Signal Status (Port 1 to 5)

Every scan

R

D8105

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 5)

Every scan

R/W

D8106

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 5)

Every scan

R/W

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress
D8107 to
D8119
D8120
D8121
D8122
D8123
D8124
D8125
D8126
D8127
D8128 to
D8169

Description

Update Timing

R/W

―

―

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version

―

R

―

―

— Reserved —HMI Module Information
Cartridge Slot 1 Information
Cartridge Slot 2 Information
Cartridge Slot 3 Information— Reserved —D8170

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI2/AQ2Every scan

R

D8171

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI3/AQ3Every scan

R

D8172

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI2/AQ2Every scan

R

D8173

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI3/AQ3Every scan

R

D8174

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI4/AQ4Every scan

R

D8175

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI5/AQ5Every scan

R

D8176

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI4/AQ4Every scan

R

D8177

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI5/AQ5Every scan

R

D8178

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI6/AQ6Every scan

R

D8179

Analog I/O Cartridge I/O AI7/AQ7Every scan

R

D8180

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI6/AQ6Every scan

R

D8181

Analog I/O Cartridge Status AI7/AQ7Every scan

R

D8182 to
D8191

— Reserved —――Every scan

R

D8192

High Word

D8193

Low Word

D8194
D8195
D8196

High-speed
Counter(Group 2/I1)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

D8197

Low Word

D8198

High Word

D8199

Low Word

D8200
D8201
D8202

High-speed
Counter(Group 6/I7)

D8203

High Word
Low WordHigh Word
Low Word

Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I1) Current
Value
Preset Value
Reset Value
Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I7) Current
Value
Preset Value
Reset Value

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

D8204

Control Signal Status (Port 6 to 9)

Every scan

R

D8205

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 6 to 9)

Every scan

R/W

D8206

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 6 to 9)

Every scan

R/W

D8207 toD8209

— Reserved —――Every scan

R

D8210
D8211
D8212
D8213

High-speed
Counter(Group 1/I0)

High Word
Low WordHigh Word

Preset Value

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

D8214

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I7)

―

R/W

D8215

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I0)

―

R/W

D8216

High-speed
Counter(Group 1/I0)

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scan

R

D8217
D8218
D8219
D8220
D8221

High-speed
Counter(Group 3/I3)

Low Word

Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I0) Current
ValueHigh Word
Low WordHigh Word
Low WordHigh Word
Low Word

Reset Value
Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I3) Current
Value
Preset Value

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

6-19

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress
D8222
D8223
D8224
D8225
D8226
D8227
D8228
D8229
D8230
D8231
D8232

Description
High-speed
Counter(Group 4/I4)
High-speed
Counter(Group 5/I6)

High Word

Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I4) Current
Value

Low WordHigh Word

Preset Value

Low WordHigh Word

Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I6) Current
Value

Low WordHigh Word

Preset Value

Low Word— Reserved —Update Timing

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

―

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

―

High-speed Counter(Group 5/I6)

High Word

High-speed Counter(Group 3/I3)

High WordHigh Word

D8237

High-speed Counter(Group 4/I4)

D8238— Reserved —D8239

Absolute Position Control Status

Every scan

R

D8240

Absolute Position
Counter 1

High Word

Every scanR

Every scanR

Absolute Position
Counter 2

High Word

Every scanR

Every scanR

Absolute Position
Counter 3

High Word

Every scanR

Every scanR

Absolute Position
Counter 4High Word

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

―

D8233
D8234
D8235
D8236

D8241
D8242
D8243
D8244
D8245
D8246
D8247
D8248
D8249

Reset Value

Low Word

Reset Value

Low Word

Reset Value

Low Word

Absolute Position

Low Word

Absolute Position

Low Word

Absolute Position

Low Word

Absolute Position

Low Word— Reserved —D8250

Read SD Memory Card Capacity

Every scan

R

D8251

Read SD Memory Card Free Capacity

Every scan

R

D8252
D8253

— Reserved —

―

―

D8254

SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Information

When processing has
completed

R

D8255

SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Status

When processing has
completed

R

D8256

Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Information

When processing has
completed

R

D8257

Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information

When processing has
completed

R

D8258 toD8259

— Reserved —

―

―

D8260

Recipe Block Number

6-20

―

R/W
R

D8261

Recipe Execution Block Number

When recipe execution
has completed

D8262

Recipe Execution Channel No.

When recipe execution
has completed

R

D8263

Recipe Execution Operation

When recipe execution
has completed

R

D8264

Recipe Execution Status

When recipe execution
has completed

R

D8265

Recipe Execution Error Information

When recipe execution
has completed

R

D8266

Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range 1) Read Count

When recipe execution
has completed

R

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

D8267

Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range 2) Read Count

D8268
D8269

Update Timing

R/W

When recipe execution
has completedR

Remote Host Number of Connection 1 (1 to 255)―

R/W

Remote Host Number of Connection 2 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8270

Remote Host Number of Connection 3 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8271

Remote Host Number of Connection 4 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8272

Remote Host Number of Connection 5 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8273

Remote Host Number of Connection 6 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8274

Remote Host Number of Connection 7 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8275

Remote Host Number of Connection 8 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8276
D8277

— Reserved —――Connection 1 to 4―

R

Connection 5 to 8

―

R

―

―

HMI Connection 1 to 4―

R

HMI Connection 5 to 8

―

R

D8278
D8279
D8280 to
D8283
D8284
D8285

Communication Mode Information— Reserved —Communication Mode Information(HMI Connection)

D8286 toD8302

— Reserved —

―

―

D8303

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Settings/DNS Settings Switching

―

R/W

D8304

―

W

D8305

―

W

―

W

D8306

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Address (Write-only)

D8307

―

W

D8308

―

W

D8309
D8310

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Subnet Mask (Write-only)

―

W

―

W

D8311

―

W

D8312

―

W

D8313
D8314

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Default Gateway (Write-only)

―

W

―

W

D8315

―

W

D8316

―

W

D8317
D8318

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)

―

W

―

W
W

D8319

―

D8320

―

W

D8321

―

W

D8322

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)

―

W

D8323

―

W

D8324

Every 1 s

R

D8325

Every 1 s

R

D8326

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8328

Every 1 s

R

D8329

Every 1 s

R

D8330

Every 1 s

R

D8331

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8333

Every 1 s

R

D8334

Every 1 s

R

D8335

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8327

D8332

D8336

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Address (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)

D8337

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-21

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Update Timing

R/W

D8338

Every 1 s

R

D8339

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8341

Every 1 s

R

D8342

Every 1 s

R

D8343

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8345

Every 1 s

R

D8346

Every 1 s

R

D8347

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8349

Every 1 s

R

D8350

Every 1 s

R

D8351

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8353

Every 1 s

R

D8354

Every 1 s

R

D8355

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8357

Every 1 s

R

D8358

Every 1 s

R

D8359

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8361

Every 1 s

R

D8362

Every 1 s

R

D8363

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8365

Every 1 s

R

D8366

Every 1 s

R

D8367

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8369

Every 1 s

R

D8370

Every 1 s

R

D8371

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8373

Every 1 s

R

D8374

Every 1 s

R

D8375

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8377

Every 1 s

R

D8378

Every 1 s

R

D8379

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8381

Every 1 s

R

D8382

Every 1 s

R

D8383

Every 1 s

R

D8384

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8386

Every 1 s

R

D8387

Every 1 s

R

D8388

Every 1 s

R

D8389

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8340

D8344

D8348

D8352

D8356

D8360

D8364

D8368

D8372

D8376

D8380

D8385

D8390

Description

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

Connection 1 Connected IP Address

Connection 2 Connected IP Address

Connection 3 Connected IP Address

Connection 4 Connected IP Address

Connection 5 Connected IP Address

Connection 6 Connected IP Address

Connection 7 Connected IP Address

Connection 8 Connected IP Address

HMI Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)

HMI Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)

D8391

6-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Update Timing

R/W

D8392

Every 1 s

R

D8393

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8395

Every 1 s

R

D8396

Every 1 s

R

D8397

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8399

Every 1 s

R

D8400

Every 1 s

R

D8401

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8403

Every 1 s

R

D8404

Every 1 s

R

D8405

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8394

D8398

D8402

D8406

Description

HMI Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)

HMI Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)

HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

D8407
D8408 toD8412

— Reserved —

―

―

D8413

Time Zone Offset

―

R/W

D8414

SNTP Operation Status

―

R

D8415

SNTP Access Elapsed Time―R

D8416 toD8428

— Reserved —

―

―

D8429

Connection No.

―

R/W

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

―

―

D8437

―

W

D8438

―

W

―

W

D8430
D8431
D8432

HMI Module Connection
Information Reference

Connected IP Address

D8433
D8434
D8435
D8436

D8439

Connected Port No.
— Reserved —HMI Module IP Address (Write-only)

D8440

―

W

D8441

―

W

D8442
D8443

HMI Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)

―

W

―

W

D8444

―

W

D8445

―

W

D8446
D8447

HMI Module Default Gateway (Write-only)

―

W

―

W

D8448

―

W

D8449

―

W

D8450
D8451

HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)

―

W

―

W
W

D8452

―

D8453

―

W

D8454

―

W

D8455

HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)

D8456

―

W

―

W

D8457

EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information (HMI-Ethernet Port)―R

D8458 toD8469

— Reserved —――FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-23

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress
D8470
D8471
D8472
D8473
D8474
D8475
D8476
D8477
D8478
D8479
D8480
D8481
D8482
D8483
D8484
D8485
D8486
D8487
D8488
D8489
D8490
D8491
D8492
D8493
D8494
D8495
D8496
D8497
D8498
D8499
D8500
D8501
D8502
D8503
D8504
D8505
D8506
D8507
D8508
D8509
D8510
D8511
D8512
D8513
D8514
D8515
D8516
D8517
D8518
D8519
D8520
D8521
D8522
D8523

6-24

Description

Update Timing

R/W

Expansion Module Slot 1
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 2
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 3
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 4
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 5
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 6
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 7
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 8
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 9
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 10
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 11
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 12
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 13
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 14
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 15
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 16
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 17
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 18
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 19
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 20
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 21
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 22
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 23
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 24
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 25
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 26
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 27
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―R

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress
D8524
D8525
D8526
D8527
D8528
D8529
D8530
D8531
D8532
D8533
D8534
D8535
D8536
D8537
D8538
D8539
D8530
D8541
D8542
D8543
D8544
D8545
D8546
D8547
D8548
D8549
D8550
D8551
D8552
D8553
D8554
D8555
D8556
D8557
D8558
D8559
D8560
D8561
D8562
D8563
D8564
D8565
D8566
D8567
D8568
D8569
D8570
D8571
D8572
D8573
D8574
D8575
D8576
D8577

Description

Update Timing

R/W

Expansion Module Slot 28
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 29
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 30
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 31
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 32
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 33
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 34
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 35
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 36
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 37
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 38
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 39
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 40
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 41
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 42
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 43
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

Expansion Module Slot 44
Information

Type ID/Status――

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 45
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 46
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 47
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 48
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 49
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

Type ID/Status
System Software Version/Position Information――

R

Expansion Module Slot 50
Information
Expansion Module Slot 51
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 52
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 53
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 54
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

System Software Version/Position Information

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

R
R

R
R

6-25

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress
D8578
D8579
D8580
D8581
D8582
D8583
D8584
D8585
D8586
D8587
D8588
D8589
D8590
D8591
D8592
D8593
D8594
D8595

Description

Update Timing

R/W

Expansion Module Slot 55
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 56
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 57
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 58
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 59
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 60
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 61
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 62
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Expansion Module Slot 63
Information

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/Position Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Number of Connected Expansion Interface Remote
Slave Modules―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information―

R

Type ID/Status―

R

System Software Version/
Expansion Module Connection Information

―

R

D8596
D8597
D8598
D8599
D8600
D8601
D8602
D8603
D8604
D8605
D8606
D8607
D8608
D8609
D8610
D8611
D8612
D8613
D8614
D8615
D8616
D8617

Expansion Interface Remote
Master Module Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 1) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 2) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 3) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 4) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 5) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 6) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 7) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 8) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 9) Slot Information
Expansion Interface Remote Slave
Module (Node 10) Slot Information

D8618

Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules Current Value

Every scan

R

D8619

Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules Maximum Value

Every scan

R

D8620 toD8629

— Reserved —

―

―

D8630

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Settings/DNS Settings Switching

―

R/W

6-26

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Update Timing

R/W

D8631

―

W

D8632

―

W

D8633

Description

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Address (Write-only)

D8634

―

W

―

W

D8635

―

W

D8636

―

W

D8637

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Subnet Mask (Write-only)

D8638

―

W

―

W

D8639

―

W

D8640

―

W

D8641

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Default Gateway (Write-only)

D8642

―

W

―

W

D8643

―

W

D8644

―

W

D8645

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)

D8646

―

W

―

W

D8647

―

W

D8648

―

W

D8649

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)

―

W

D8650

―

W

D8651

Every 1 s

R

D8652

Every 1 s

R

D8653

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8655

Every 1 s

R

D8656

Every 1 s

R

D8657

Every 1 s

R

D8658

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8660

Every 1 s

R

D8661

Every 1 s

R

D8662

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8664

Every 1 s

R

D8665

Every 1 s

R

D8666

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8668

Every 1 s

R

D8669

Every 1 s

R

D8670

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8672

Every 1 s

R

D8673

Every 1 s

R

D8674

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8676

Every 1 s

R

D8677

Every 1 s

R

D8678

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8680

Every 1 s

R

D8681

Every 1 s

R

D8682

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8654

D8659

D8663

D8667

D8671

D8675

D8679

D8683

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Address (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)

Connection 9 Connected IP Address

Connection 10 Connected IP Address

D8684

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-27

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Update Timing

R/W

D8685

Every 1 s

R

D8686

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8688

Every 1 s

R

D8689

Every 1 s

R

D8690

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8692

Every 1 s

R

D8693

Every 1 s

R

D8694

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8696

Every 1 s

R

D8697

Every 1 s

R

D8698

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8700

Every 1 s

R

D8701

Every 1 s

R

D8702

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

D8704

Every 1 s

R

D8705

Every 1 s

R

D8706

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

Every 1 s

R

―

―

D8687

D8691

D8695

D8699

D8703

D8707

Description

Connection 11 Connected IP Address

Connection 12 Connected IP Address

Connection 13 Connected IP Address

Connection 14 Connected IP Address

Connection 15 Connected IP Address

Connection 16 Connected IP Address

D8708
D8709 to
D8716

6-28

— Reserved —D8717

Control Signal Status (Port 10 to 13)

Every scan

R

D8718

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 10 to 13)

Every scan

R/W

D8719

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 10 to 13)

Every scan

R/W

D8720

Control Signal Status (Port 14 to 17)

Every scan

R

D8721

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 14 to 17)

Every scan

R/W

D8722

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 14 to 17)

Every scan

R/W

D8723

Control Signal Status (Port 18 to 21)

Every scan

R

D8724

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 18 to 21)

Every scan

R/W

D8725

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 18 to 21)

Every scan

R/W

D8726

Control Signal Status (Port 22 to 25)

Every scan

R

D8727

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 22 to 25)

Every scan

R/W

D8728

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 22 to 25)

Every scan

R/W

D8729

Control Signal Status (Port 26 to 29)

Every scan

R

D8730

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 26 to 29)

Every scan

R/W

D8731

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 26 to 29)

Every scan

R/W

D8732

Control Signal Status (Port 30 to 33)

Every scan

R

D8733

RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 30 to 33)

Every scan

R/W

D8734

RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 30 to 33)
Slave Number (Port 10)

Every scan
―

R/W

D8735
D8736

Slave Number (Port 11)

―

R/W

D8737

Slave Number (Port 12)

―

R/W

D8738

Slave Number (Port 13)

―

R/W

D8739

Slave Number (Port 14)

―

R/W

D8740

Slave Number (Port 15)

―

R/W

D8741

Slave Number (Port 16)

―

R/W

D8742

Slave Number (Port 17)

―

R/W

D8743

Slave Number (Port 18)

―

R/W

D8744

Slave Number (Port 19)

―

R/W

D8745

Slave Number (Port 20)―

R/W

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

R/W

6: D EVI CES
DeviceAddress

Description

Update Timing

R/W

D8746

Slave Number (Port 21)

―

R/W

D8747

Slave Number (Port 22)

―

R/W

D8748

Slave Number (Port 23)

―

R/W

D8749

Slave Number (Port 24)

―

R/W

D8750

Slave Number (Port 25)

―

R/W

D8751

Slave Number (Port 26)

―

R/W

D8752

Slave Number (Port 27)

―

R/W

D8753

Slave Number (Port 28)

―

R/W

D8754

Slave Number (Port 29)

―

R/W

D8755

Slave Number (Port 30)

―

R/W

D8756

Slave Number (Port 31)

―

R/W

D8757

Slave Number (Port 32)

―

R/W

D8758

Slave Number (Port 33)

―

R/W

D8759

EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information (Ethernet Port 1)―

R

Connection 9 to 12―

R

Connection 13 to 16

―

R

D8760
D8761

Communication Mode Information

D8762 toD8773

— Reserved —

―

―

D8774

Remote Host Number of Connection 9 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8775

Remote Host Number of Connection 10 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8776

Remote Host Number of Connection 11 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8777

Remote Host Number of Connection 12 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8778

Remote Host Number of Connection 13 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8779

Remote Host Number of Connection 14 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8780

Remote Host Number of Connection 15 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8781

Remote Host Number of Connection 16 (1 to 255)

―

R/W

D8782

BACnet Operation Status

―

R

D8783

BACnet Error Information―

R

D8784 toD8789

— Reserved —

―

―

D8790

EtherNet/IP Operation Status

―

R

D8791

EtherNet/IP Error Information―

R

D8792 toD8819

— Reserved —

―

―

D8820

Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Information

When processing has
completed

R

D8821

Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information

When processing has
completed

R

D8822

Web Server Current Number of Connections (Plus CPU Module)

Every 1 s

R

D8823 toD8899

— Reserved —――Supplementary Descriptions of the Special Data Registers■ D8000: Quantity of Inputs
The number of FC6A inputs is written to this register.
The total number of inputs for the CPU module and the expansion modules is written to this register.
■ D8001: Quantity of Outputs
The number of FC6A outputs is written to this register.
The total number of outputs for the CPU module and the expansion modules is written to this register.
■ D8002: CPU Module Type Information
CPU module type information is written this register.
0 (00h): 16-I/O type
1 (01h): 24-I/O type
2 (02h): 40-I/O type (All-in-One CPU module)
18 (12h): 40-I/O type (CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module)
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-29

6: D EVI CES
32 (20h): Plus 16-I/O type
33 (21h): Plus 32-I/O type
■ D8005: General Error Code
FC6A general error information is written to this register. When a general error occurs, the bit corresponding to the error
occurred turns on. The general error and user program execution error can be cleared by writing "1" to the most significant bitof D8005. For details on general error codes, see "General Error Codes" on page 13-3.
■ D8006: User Program Execution Error Code
FC6Auser program execution error information is written to this register. When a user program execution error occurs, the error
code corresponding to the error that occurred is written to this register. For details on user program execution errors, see theappendix "User Program Execution Error and Ladder Program Execution Error" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
■ D8008 to D8021: Calendar/Clock Data
D8008 through D8021 are used for reading calendar/clock data from the internal clock and for writing calendar/clock data to theinternal clock. For details on the calendar/clock data, see "Clock Function" on page 5-64.
■ D8022 to D8025: Scan Time Data
D8022 through D8025 are special data registers for checking the scan time and configuring the constant scan time. For details
on the scan time, see "Constant Scan Time" on page 5-61.
■ D8026: Communication Mode Information (Port 1 to 3)
This register indicates communication mode information for Port 1 to Port 3.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

11

8

7

4

3

0

Port 1
Port 2
Port 30 (0000): Maintenance communication
1 (0001): User communication
2 (0010): Modbus RTU master3 (0011): Modbus RTU slave
4 (0100): Data link communication■ D8029: System Software Version
The CPU module system software version number is written to this register.
■ D8030: Communication Cartridge Information
This register indicates information about the communication cartridges in Port 2 and Port 3.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

5

4

3

2

1

0

Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2
Cartridge Slot 3

0 (00): No communication cartridges
1 (01): RS-232C communication cartridge
2 (10): RS-485 communication cartridge
3 (11): Bluetooth communication cartridge■ D8031: Optional Device Connection Information
Optional device connection information is written to this register.
The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0: No optional device
1: Optional device is connected

6-30

Bit

3

2

1

0

Reserved=0
SD Memory Card
Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2
Cartridge Slot 3

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8032 to D8035, D8214, D8215: Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are written to these registers. When using interrupt inputs, write the label
number that corresponds to the special data register that has been allocated to the interrupt input. For details on interrupt
inputs, see "Interrupt Input" on page 5-36.
D8032 = I1
D8033 = I3
D8034 = I4
D8035 = I6
D8214 = I7
D8215 = I0
■ D8036: Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is written to this register. When using the timer interrupt,
store the corresponding label number.
For details on the timer interrupt, see "Timer Interrupt" on page 5-47.
■ D8037: Number of Connected Expansion Modules
The number of expansion modules connected to the CPU module (I/O modules, PID modules, and communication modules) is
written to this register.
■ D8052: J1939 Communication Error Code
When an error occurs in J1939 communication, the error code is written to this register. For details on J1939 communication
error codes, see Chapter 8 "J1939 Communication Error Code (D8052)" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".
■ D8056: Battery Voltage
The measurement result of the backup battery voltage is written to this register in 1 mV units.
0: Measurement error■ D8057: Analog Volume (AI0)The analog volume value is converted to a digital value and written to this register. For details, see "Analog Potentiometer" on
page 5-45.
■ D8058: Built-in Analog Input (AI1)
The analog input's analog value (0 to 10V DC) is converted to a digital value and written to this register. For details, see "Analog
Voltage Input" on page 5-43.
■ D8059: Analog Input Status AI0
The analog volume's analog input status is written to this register. For details, see "Analog Potentiometer" on page 5-45.
■ D8060: Analog Input Status AI1
The analog input's analog input status is written to this register. For details, see "Analog Voltage Input" on page 5-43.
■ D8067: Backlight ON TimeThe backlight on time for the HMI module is written to this register. The backlight on time can be set by modifying the value of
D8067 in a range between 1 and 65,535 s. When D8067 is 0 s, the backlight is always on. The backlight on time can also bechanged with the HMI environment settings. For details, see "Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time" on page 7-13.
■ D8069 to D8099: Slave (1 to 31) Communication Status/Error
Special data registers used in data link communication. For details, see Chapter 7 "Master Station" in the "FC6A Series
MICROSmart Communication Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-31

6: D EVI CES■ D8040 to D8045, D8100, D8102, D8103, D8735 to D8758: Slave Number (Port 1 to 33)
The slave number is written to these registers when the Port 1 to 33 communication mode is maintenance communication,
Modbus RTU slave, or data link communication. The slave number can be changed by changing the value of the corresponding
device in Function Area Settings.
D8742 = Port 17 Slave No.
D8743 = Port 18 Slave No.
D8744 = Port 19 Slave No.
D8745 = Port 20 Slave No.
D8746 = Port 21 Slave No.
D8747 = Port 22 Slave No.
D8748 = Port 23 Slave No.
D8749 = Port 24 Slave No.
D8750 = Port 25 Slave No.
D8751 = Port 26 Slave No.
D8752 = Port 27 Slave No.
D8753 = Port 28 Slave No.
D8754 = Port 29 Slave No.
D8755 = Port 30 Slave No.
D8756 = Port 31 Slave No.
D8757 = Port 32 Slave No.
D8758 = Port 33 Slave No.

D8100 = Port 1 Slave No.
D8102 = Port 2 Slave No.
D8103 = Port 3 Slave No.
D8040 = Port 4 Slave No.
D8041 = Port 5 Slave No.
D8042 = Port 6 Slave No.
D8043 = Port 7 Slave No.
D8044 = Port 8 Slave No.
D8045 = Port 9 Slave No.
D8735 = Port 10 Slave No.
D8736 = Port 11 Slave No.
D8737 = Port 12 Slave No.
D8738 = Port 13 Slave No.
D8739 = Port 14 Slave No.
D8740 = Port 15 Slave No.
D8741 = Port 16 Slave No.

For details on communication modes, see the following in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
Maintenance communication: Chapter 4 "Maintenance Communication"
 Modbus RTU slave: Chapter 6 "Modbus Communication"
 Data link communication: Chapter 7 "Data Link Communication"■ D8104, D8204, D8717, D8720, D8723, D8726, D8729, D8732: Control Signal Status (Port 1 to 33)
The signal statuses of the DSR and DTR controls lines are written to this register. This register is updated in END processing
when stopped and while running. The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8104
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8204
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8Port 9
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8717
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13

6-32

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8720
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
Port 17
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8723
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8726
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
Port 25
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8729
Port 26
Port 27
Port 28
Port 29
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8732
Port 30
Port 31
Port 32
Port 33

0 (00): DTR and DSR are both off.
1 (01): DTR is off and DSR is on.
2 (10): DTR is on and DSR is off.
3 (11): DTR and DSR are both on.

■ D8105, D8205, D8718, D8721, D8724, D8727, D8730, D8733: RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 1
to 33)The signal statuses of the DSR and DTR controls lines are written to this register. This register is updated in END processing
when stopped and while running. The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8105

Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-33

6: D EVI CES
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8205

Port 6
Port 7
Port 8Port 9
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8718

Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8721

Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
Port 17
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8724

Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8727

Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
Port 25
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8730

Port 26
Port 27
Port 28
Port 29
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

9

8

Bit

Bit

7

6

5

4

3

Bit

2

1

0

D8733

Port 30
Port 31
Port 32
Port 33

6-34

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
0 (000):1 (001):

The DSR signal status is not used for FC6A transmission control.
Use this status when DSR signal control is not required.
When the DSR signal is on, the FC6A can transmit and receive.
ON

DSR signal
OFFTransmit/receive

2 (010):Not possible

Possible

Not possible

When the DSR signal is off, the FC6A can transmit and receive.
ON

DSR signal
OFFTransmit/receive

3 (011):

Not possible

Possible

Not possible

When the DSR signal is on, transmission is possible (reception is always possible).
ON

DSR signal
OFFTransmit

Not possible

Possible

Not possible

This is normally called "busy control" and is used for transmission control for devices with a slow
processing speed such as printers.
4 (100):(As viewed from the connected device, there is a limit on the data that can be input.)
When the DSR signal is off, transmission is possible.
ON

DSR signal
OFFTransmit

Not possible

Possible

Not possible

5 or higher: The operation is the same as the setting "000".
■ D8106, D8206, D8719, D8722, D8725, D8728, D8731, D8734: RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 1
to 33)
This register is used when indicating the FC6A control status and the transmit/receive status to the connected device. This
control line is an output signal from the FC6A to the connected device. This register is only valid during user communication.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8106
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8206
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8Port 9
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8719
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-35

6: D EVI CES
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8722
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
Port 17
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8725
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8728
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
Port 25
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8731
Port 26
Port 27
Port 28
Port 29
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8734
Port 30
Port 31
Port 32
Port 33\

0 (00):The signal is on when the FC6A is set to run and off when stopped.
While running, the signal is always on regardless of transmitting or receiving data. Set this value when it isnecessary to indicate the run status.
Running

StoppedRunningON

DTR signal
OFF

1 (01):
2 (10):

Always off.
Set this value when performing flow control for received data. The signal is on when data from theconnected device can be received.
The signal is off when data cannot be received.
Receive

Not possible

Possible

Not possible

ON

DTR signal
OFF

3 (11):

6-36

The operation is the same as the setting "0".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8120, D8121: HMI Module Information
HMI module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

D8120

StatusType ID

D8121

Reserved

System Software Version

0

The system software version displays the version of the software written to the device.
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Status" on page 6-49.
■ D8122 to D8127: Cartridge Slot Information
Cartridge Slot 1 to 3 information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

D8122, D8124, D8126

StatusType ID

D8123, D8125, D8127

Reserved

System Software Version

1

0

D8122, D8123 = Cartridge Slot 1 Information
D8124, D8125 = Cartridge Slot 2 Information
D8126, D8127 = Cartridge Slot 3 Information
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Status" on page 6-49.
■ D8170, D8171, D8174, D8175, D8178, D8179: Analog I/O Cartridge I/O
Analog I/O values for the analog I/O cartridges are written to these registers.
: The analog values input to the analog I/O cartridge are converted to digital values and written to
the registers.
For the analog output type : The digital values stored as digital values are converted to analog values and output from theanalog I/O cartridges.

For the analog input typeFor details, see "Analog I/O Cartridge" on page 10-7.
D8170 = AI2/AQ2
D8171 = AI3/AQ3
D8174 = AI4/AQ4
D8175 = AI5/AQ5
D8178 = AI6/AQ6
D8179 = AI7/AQ7■ D8172, D8173, D8176, D8177, D8180, D8181: Analog I/O Cartridge Status
The analog status of analog I/O cartridges is written to these registers.
For details, see "Analog I/O Cartridge" on page 10-7.
D8172 = AI2/AQ2
D8173 = AI3/AQ3
D8176 = AI4/AQ4
D8177 = AI5/AQ5
D8180 = AI6/AQ6
D8181 = AI7/AQ7■ D8192 to D8203, D8210 to D8213, D8216 to D8229, D8232 to D8237: High-speed Counter
These special data registers are used with the high-speed counter function and the frequency measurement function.
For details on high-speed counters, see "High-Speed Counter" on page 5-14.
D8210 to D8213, D8216, D8217 = High-speed counter (group 1/I0)
D8218 to D8221, D8234, D8235 = High-speed counter (group 3/I3)
D8222 to D8225, D8236, D8237 = High-speed counter (group 4/I4)
D8226 to D8229, D8232, D8233 = High-speed counter (group 5/I6)
D8192 to D8197 = High-speed counter (group 2/I1)
D8198 to D8203 = High-speed counter (group 6/I7)
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-37

6: D EVI CES■ D8239: Absolute Position Control Status
This register indicates the status of absolute position control.
The allocation of the absolute position counter initialized flags in the device (bit assignment) is as follows. For details on theabsolute position control status, see Chapter 18 "ABS (Set Absolute Position)" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

Bit

3

2

0: Not initialized
1: Initialized

10Absolute Position Counter 1 Initialized Flag
Absolute Position Counter 2 Initialized Flag
Absolute Position Counter 3 Initialized Flag
Absolute Position Counter 4 Initialized Flag

■ D8240 to D8247: Absolute Position Counter 1 to 4
The absolute position is written to these registers according to pulse output. The absolute position can be initialized with the
ABS instruction.
When reversible control is set in the pulse output instructions (RAMP/ARAMP/ZRN/JOG), the absolute position is incremented or
decremented according to the output result. For details on absolute position counters, see Chapter 18 "ABS (Set Absolute
Position)" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
D8240, D8241 = Absolute position counter 1
D8242, D8243 = Absolute position counter 2
D8244, D8245 = Absolute position counter 3
D8246, D8247 = Absolute position counter 4■ D8250: Read SD Memory Card Capacity
This register indicates the capacity of the recognized SD or SDHC (maximum size 32 GB) memory card in megabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.
■ D8251: Read SD Memory Card Free Capacity
This register indicates the free capacity of the SD memory card in megabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.
■ D8254: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Information
Information about the SD memory card download/upload that was executed.
For details, see "SD Memory Card" on page 11-1.
■ D8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Status
The status of the SD memory card download/upload that was executed.
For details, see "SD Memory Card" on page 11-1.
■ D8256: Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Information
Information in executing the download of the files for MQTT Basic Settings. The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment)
is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8256

Reserved
0 (fixed)

Reserved
0 (fixed)
Reserved
1 (fixed)

Execution Trigger
1: Power-up
2: Special Device■ D8257: Download MQTT Basic Settings from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information
Error information in executing the download of the files for MQTT Basic Settings. For details, see Chapter 3 "Special Devices" inthe "Network User’s Manual".
■ D8260: Recipe Block Number
The recipe block number to read or write using special internal relays.
All channels for the specified block number are applicable.
■ D8261: Recipe Execution Block Number
The recipe block number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the recipe block starts, and the status is retained when completed.
6-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8262: Recipe Execution Channel No.
The channel number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the channel processing starts, and the status is retained when completed.
■ D8263: Recipe Execution Operation
Information about the operation of the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see "Recipe Function" on page 11-8.
■ D8264: Recipe Execution Status
The status of the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see "Recipe Function" on page 11-8.
■ D8265: Recipe Execution Error Information
Error information about the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see "Recipe Function" on page 11-8.
■ D8266: Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range 1) Read CountThe number of times device values are read to internal memory (ROM-Range 1) as recipe data is stored in this register in unitsof 100.
■ D8267: Recipe Internal Memory (ROM-Range 2) Read CountThe number of times device values are read to internal memory (ROM-Range 2) as recipe data is stored in this register in unitsof 100.
■ D8268 to D8275, D8774 to D8781: Remote Host Number 1 to 255 (connection 1 to 16)
Special data registers that change the communications device when user communications client is set. For details, see Chapter 5"Switching Remote Host Numbers" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ D8278, D8279, D8760, D8761: Communication Mode Information (Connection 1 to 16)
D8278 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 1 through 4.
D8279 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 5 through 8.
D8760 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 9 through 12.
D8761 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 13 through 16.
The allocation of connections in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Connections are allocated in 4-bit units from the lowest digit in ascending order of connection number.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8278

Connection 1
Connection 2
Connection 3
Connection 4
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8279

Connection 5
Connection 6
Connection 7
Connection 8
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8760

Connection 9
Connection 10
Connection 11
Connection 12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-39

6: D EVI CES
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8761

Connection 13
Connection 14
Connection 15
Connection 16

Client connection (most significant bit = 0)0000: Unused
0001: User Communication
0010: Modbus TCP client
0011:MC Protocol client
0100: User communication UDP
 Server connection (most significant bit = 1)
1000: Maintenance Communication
1001: User Communication
1010: Modbus TCP server■ D8284, D8285: Communication Mode Information (HMI Connection) (HMI Connection 1 to 8)
D8284: Indicates the communication mode of HMI connections 1 through 4.
D8285: Indicates the communication mode of HMI connections 5 through 8.
The allocation of connections in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8284

HMI Connection 1
HMI Connection 2
HMI Connection 3
HMI Connection 4
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8285

HMI Connection 5
HMI Connection 6
HMI Connection 7
HMI Connection 8

Client connection (most significant bit = 0)0000: Unused
 Server connection (most significant bit = 1)
1000: Maintenance Communication
■ D8303: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Settings/DNS Settings Switching
The IP settings/DNS settings for Ethernet Port 1 can be changed by writing one of the setting values in the table on the next
page to D8303 and then turning on M8190.
To use this function, enable the following items in Function Area Settings of WindLDR.
 All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
Enable D8303 (IP Settings / DNS Settings switching) on Network Settings in Function Area Settings Plus CPU module
Enable D8303 (IP Settings / DNS Settings switching) on Ethernet Port 1 in Function Area Settings
The meanings of the setting values are as follows.
Setting Value

6-40

IP Settings/DNS Settings

0

Conform to function area settings.

1

Enable DHCP.

2

Conform to special data register (D8304 to D8323) settings.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8304 to D8307: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Address (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the CPU module's IP address.
IP address: To set as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8304=aaa, D8305=bbb, D8306=ccc, D8307=ddd■ D8308 to D8311: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Subnet Mask (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the CPU module's subnet mask.
Subnet mask: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8308=aaa, D8309=bbb, D8310=ccc, D8311=ddd■ D8312 to D8315: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Default Gateway (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the CPU module's default gateway.
Default gateway: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8312=aaa, D8313=bbb, D8314=ccc, D8315=ddd■ D8316 to D8319: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the CPU module's preferred DNS server.
Preferred DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8316=aaa, D8317=bbb, D8318=ccc, D8319=ddd■ D8320 to D8323: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the CPU module's alternate DNS server.
Alternate DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8320=aaa, D8321=bbb, D8322=ccc, D8323=ddd■ D8324 to D8329: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's MAC address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8324=AA, D8325=BB, D8326=CC, D8327=DD, D8328=EE, D8329=FF■ D8330 to D8333: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 IP Address (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's IP address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: The CPU module's own IP address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8330=aaa, D8331=bbb, D8332=ccc, D8333=ddd■ D8334 to D8337: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's subnet mask value is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8334=aaa, D8335=bbb, D8336=ccc, D8337=ddd■ D8338 to D8341: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's default gateway address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8338=aaa, D8339=bbb, D8340=ccc, D8341=ddd■ D8342 to D8345: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's preferred DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Preferred DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8342=aaa, D8343=bbb, D8344=ccc, D8345=ddd■ D8346 to D8349: CPU Module Ethernet Port 1 Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's alternate DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Alternate DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8346=aaa, D8347=bbb, D8348=ccc, D8349=ddd■ D8350 to D8381, D8677 to D8708: Connection Connected IP Address
The IP address of the connected device that is being accessed through a connection is written as follows.
Connection 1 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8350=aaa, D8351=bbb, D8352=ccc, D8353=ddd
Connection 2 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8354=aaa, D8355=bbb, D8356=ccc, D8357=ddd
Connection 3 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8358=aaa, D8359=bbb, D8360=ccc, D8361=ddd
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-41

6: D EVI CESConnection 4 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8362=aaa, D8363=bbb, D8364=ccc, D8365=ddd
Connection 5 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8366=aaa, D8367=bbb, D8368=ccc, D8369=ddd
Connection 6 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8370=aaa, D8371=bbb, D8372=ccc, D8373=ddd
Connection 7 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8374=aaa, D8375=bbb, D8376=ccc, D8377=ddd
Connection 8 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8378=aaa, D8379=bbb, D8380=ccc, D8381=ddd
Connection 9 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8677=aaa, D8678=bbb, D8679=ccc, D8680=ddd
Connection 10 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8681=aaa, D8682=bbb, D8683=ccc, D8684=ddd
Connection 11 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8685=aaa, D8686=bbb, D8687=ccc, D8688=ddd
Connection 12 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8689=aaa, D8690=bbb, D8691=ccc, D8692=ddd
Connection 13 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8693=aaa, D8694=bbb, D8695=ccc, D8696=ddd
Connection 14 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8697=aaa, D8698=bbb, D8699=ccc, D8700=ddd
Connection 15 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8701=aaa, D8702=bbb, D8703=ccc, D8704=ddd
Connection 16 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8705=aaa, D8706=bbb, D8707=ccc, D8708=ddd■ D8382 to D8387: HMI Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)
The MAC address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8382=AA, D8383=BB, D8384=CC, D8385=DD, D8386=EE, D8387=FF■ D8388 to D8391: HMI Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's IP address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module IP address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8388=aaa, D8389=bbb, D8390=ccc, D8391=ddd■ D8392 to D8395: HMI Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's subnet mask value is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8392=aaa, D8393=bbb, D8394=ccc, D8395=ddd■ D8396 to D8399: HMI Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's default gateway address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8396=aaa, D8397=bbb, D8398=ccc, D8399=ddd■ D8400 to D8403: HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's preferred DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module preferred DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8400=aaa, D8401=bbb, D8402=ccc, D8403=ddd■ D8404 to D8407: HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's alternate DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module alternate DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8404=aaa, D8405=bbb, D8406=ccc, D8407=ddd■ D8413: Time Zone Offset
The time zone configured in the function area settings can be finely adjusted in 15-minute increments.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
6-42

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8414: SNTP Operation Status
The operation status is written to this register when the time information is acquired through operation of M8191 (SNTP Time
Acquisition Flag) or when time information acquisition was executed by automatic acquisition.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ D8415: SNTP Access Elapsed TimeThe elapsed time in minutes from when the time information was last acquired from the SNTP server.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".
■ D8429: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Number
The connection information for the specified connection number is reflected in D8430 to D8434. When 0 is written, 0 is written
to D8430 to D8434. If a connection number that does not exist is specified, 0 is written to D8430 to D8434.
■ D8430 to D8433: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connected IP Address
The IP address of the terminal being accessed through the connection is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: IP address to read: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8430=aaa, D8431=bbb, D8432=ccc, D8433=ddd■ D8434: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connected Port No.
The port number of the terminal being accessed through the connection is written to this register.
■ D8437 to D8440: HMI Module IP Address (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the HMI module's IP address.
HMI module IP address: To set as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8437=aaa, D8438=bbb, D8439=ccc, D8440=ddd■ D8441 to D8444: HMI Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the HMI module's subnet mask.
HMI module subnet mask: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8441=aaa, D8442=bbb, D8443=ccc, D8444=ddd■ D8445 to D8448: HMI Module Default Gateway (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the HMI module's default gateway.
HMI module default gateway: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8445=aaa, D8446=bbb, D8447=ccc, D8448=ddd■ D8449 to D8452: HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the HMI module's preferred DNS server.
HMI module preferred DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8449=aaa, D8450=bbb, D8451=ccc, D8452=ddd■ D8453 to D8456: HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the HMI module's alternate DNS server.
HMI module alternate DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8453=aaa, D8454=bbb, D8455=ccc, D8456=ddd■ D8457: EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information (HMI-Ethernet Port)
Detailed error information for the EMAIL instruction is written to this register.
For details, see Chapter 12 "Confirm the error detail of EMAIL instruction" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".
■ D8470 to D8595: Expansion Module Slot Information
Expansion module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

Upper

StatusType ID

Lower

Position Information

System Software Version

Node Number(0 to 10)1

0Slot Number(1 to 15)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-43

6: D EVI CES
Upper

Lower

D8470, D8471 = Expansion Module Slot 1 Information
D8472, D8473 = Expansion Module Slot 2 Information
D8474, D8475 = Expansion Module Slot 3 Information
D8476, D8477 = Expansion Module Slot 4 Information
D8478, D8479 = Expansion Module Slot 5 Information
D8480, D8481 = Expansion Module Slot 6 Information
D8482, D8483 = Expansion Module Slot 7 Information
D8484, D8485 = Expansion Module Slot 8 Information
D8486, D8487 = Expansion Module Slot 9 Information
D8488, D8489 = Expansion Module Slot 10 Information
D8490, D8491 = Expansion Module Slot 11 Information
D8492, D8493 = Expansion Module Slot 12 Information
D8494, D8495 = Expansion Module Slot 13 Information
D8496, D8497 = Expansion Module Slot 14 Information
D8498, D8499 = Expansion Module Slot 15 Information
D8500, D8501 = Expansion Module Slot 16 Information
D8502, D8503 = Expansion Module Slot 17 Information
D8504, D8505 = Expansion Module Slot 18 Information
D8506, D8507 = Expansion Module Slot 19 Information
D8508, D8509 = Expansion Module Slot 20 Information
D8510, D8511 = Expansion Module Slot 21 Information
D8512, D8513 = Expansion Module Slot 22 Information
D8514, D8515 = Expansion Module Slot 23 Information
D8516, D8517 = Expansion Module Slot 24 Information
D8518, D8519 = Expansion Module Slot 25 Information
D8520, D8521 = Expansion Module Slot 26 Information
D8522, D8523 = Expansion Module Slot 27 Information
D8524, D8525 = Expansion Module Slot 28 Information
D8526, D8527 = Expansion Module Slot 29 Information
D8528, D8529 = Expansion Module Slot 30 Information
D8530, D8531 = Expansion Module Slot 31 Information
D8532, D8533 = Expansion Module Slot 32 Information
D8534, D8535 = Expansion Module Slot 33 Information
D8536, D8537 = Expansion Module Slot 34 Information
D8538, D8539 = Expansion Module Slot 35 Information
D8540, D8541 = Expansion Module Slot 36 Information
D8542, D8543 = Expansion Module Slot 37 Information
D8544, D8545 = Expansion Module Slot 38 Information
D8546, D8547 = Expansion Module Slot 39 Information
D8548, D8549 = Expansion Module Slot 40 Information
D8550, D8551 = Expansion Module Slot 41 Information
D8552, D8553 = Expansion Module Slot 42 Information
D8554, D8555 = Expansion Module Slot 43 Information
D8556, D8557 = Expansion Module Slot 44 Information
D8558, D8559 = Expansion Module Slot 45 Information
D8560, D8561 = Expansion Module Slot 46 Information
6-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
Upper

Lower

D8562, D8563 = Expansion Module Slot 47 Information
D8564, D8565 = Expansion Module Slot 48 Information
D8566, D8567 = Expansion Module Slot 49 Information
D8568, D8569 = Expansion Module Slot 50 Information
D8570, D8571 = Expansion Module Slot 51 Information
D8572, D8573 = Expansion Module Slot 52 Information
D8574, D8575 = Expansion Module Slot 53 Information
D8576, D8577 = Expansion Module Slot 54 Information
D8578, D8579 = Expansion Module Slot 55 Information
D8580, D8581 = Expansion Module Slot 56 Information
D8582, D8583 = Expansion Module Slot 57 Information
D8584, D8585 = Expansion Module Slot 58 Information
D8586, D8587 = Expansion Module Slot 59 Information
D8588, D8589 = Expansion Module Slot 60 Information
D8590, D8591 = Expansion Module Slot 61 Information
D8592, D8593 = Expansion Module Slot 62 Information
D8594, D8595 = Expansion Module Slot 63 Information
The system software version displays the version of the software written to the device.
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Status" on page 6-49.
■ D8596, D8597: Expansion Interface Remote Master Module Slot Information
Expansion interface remote master module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

Upper

StatusType ID

Lower

Number of Connected Expansion Interface
Remote Slave Modules

System Software Version

1

0

The system software version displays the version of the software written to the device.
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Status" on page 6-49.
■ D8598 to D8617: Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module Slot Information
Expansion interface remote slave module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

Upper

12

11

10

9

Bit

Bit

8

7

StatusLower Expansion Module Connection Information

Reserved

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Type ID

System Software Version

Number of Connected
Expansion Modules(0 to 15)

Upper Lower
D8598, D8599 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 1) Slot Information
D8600, D8601 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 2) Slot Information
D8602, D8603 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 3) Slot Information
D8604, D8605 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 4) Slot Information
D8606, D8607 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 5) Slot Information
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-45

6: D EVI CESUpper Lower
D8608, D8609 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 6) Slot Information
D8610, D8611 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 7) Slot Information
D8612, D8613 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 8) Slot Information
D8614, D8615 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 9) Slot Information
D8616, D8617 = Expansion Interface Remote Slave Module (Unit 10) Slot Information
The system software version displays the version of the software written to the device.
For details on the type ID and status, see "List of Type IDs and Status" on page 6-49.
■ D8618: Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules Current Value
The current value of the I/O refresh time of the expansion modules connected with the expansion interface remote master/slave
modules is stored in increments of 1 ms.
■ D8619: Refresh Time of Expansion Interface Remote Master/Slave Modules Maximum Value
The maximum value of the I/O refresh time of the expansion modules connected with the expansion interface remote master/slave modules is stored in increments of 1 ms.
■ D8630: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Settings/DNS Settings Switching
The IP settings/DNS settings for Ethernet Port 2 can be changed by writing one of the setting values in the following table toD8630 and then turning on M8333.
To use this function, enable Enable D8630 (IP Settings / DNS Settings switching) on Ethernet Port 2 in Function
Area Settings of WindLDR.
The meanings of the setting values are as follows.
Setting Value

IP Settings/DNS Settings

0

Conform to function area settings.

1

Enable DHCP.

2

Conform to special data register (D8631 to D8650) settings.

■ D8631 to D8634: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Address (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the IP address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module.
IP address: To set as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8631 = aaa, D8632 = bbb, D8633 = ccc, D8634 = ddd■ D8635 to D8638: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Subnet Mask (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the subnet mask of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module.
Subnet mask: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8635 = aaa, D8636 = bbb, D8637 = ccc, D8638 = ddd■ D8639 to D8642: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Default Gateway (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the default gateway of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module.
Default gateway: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8639 = aaa, D8640 = bbb, D8641 = ccc, D8642 = ddd■ D8643 to D8646: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the preferred DNS server of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module.
Preferred DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8643 = aaa, D8644 = bbb, D8645 = ccc, D8646 = ddd■ D8647 to D8650: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)
These registers are used to write the alternate DNS server of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module.
Alternate DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8647 = aaa, D8648 = bbb, D8649 = ccc, D8650 = ddd■ D8651 to D8656: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)
The MAC address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8651 = AA, D8652 = BB, D8653 = CC, D8654 = DD, D8655 = EE, D8656 = FF
6-46

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES■ D8657 to D8660: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 IP Address (Current Value Read-only)
The IP address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: The CPU module's own IP address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8657 = aaa, D8658 = bbb, D8659 = ccc, D8660 = ddd■ D8661 to D8664: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)
The subnet mask value of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8661 = aaa, D8662 = bbb, D8663 = ccc, D8664 = ddd■ D8665 to D8668: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)
The default gateway address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8665 = aaa, D8666 = bbb, D8667 = ccc, D8668 = ddd■ D8669 to D8672: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The preferred DNS server address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Preferred DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8669 = aaa, D8670 = bbb, D8671 = ccc, D8672 = ddd■ D8673 to D8676: CPU Module Ethernet Port 2 Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The alternate DNS server address of Ethernet port 2 on the Plus CPU module is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Alternate DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8673 = aaa, D8674 = bbb, D8675 = ccc, D8676 = ddd■ D8759: EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information (Ethernet Port 1)
Detailed error information for the EMAIL instruction (Ethernet port 1) is written to this register.
For details, see Chapter 12 "Confirm the error detail of EMAIL instruction" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".
■ D8782: BACnet Operation Status
The operating status of BACnet/IP communication is written to this special data register.
For details, see Chapter 1 "Special Devices" in the "Network User’s Manual".
■ D8783: BACnet Error Information
Information for the error that last occurred in BACnet/IP communication is written to this special data register.
For details, see Chapter 1 "Special Devices" in the "Network User’s Manual".
■ D8790: EtherNet/IP Operation Status
The operating status of EtherNet/IP communication is written to this special data register.
For details, see Chapter 2 "Special Devices" in the "Network User’s Manual".
■ D8791: EtherNet/IP Error Information
Information for the error that last occurred in EtherNet/IP communication is written to this special data register.
For details, see Chapter 2 "Special Devices" in the "Network User’s Manual".
■ D8820: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Information
Information in executing the download of the files for Server Functions. The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment) is asfollows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8820

Reserved
0 (fixed)

Reserved
0 (fixed)
Download/upload Direction
1: Download

Execution Trigger
1: Power-up
2: Special Device

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-47

6: D EVI CES■ D8821: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information
Error information in executing the download of the files for Server Functions. For details, see "D8821: Download Files for Server
Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information" on page 11-48.
■ D8822: Web Server Current Number of Connections (Plus CPU Module)
The current number of connections for the web server function. D8822 is only supported on Plus CPU module. On the Plus CPU
module web server, the current number of connections is written at regular intervals. If the Allow only secure connection(SSL/TLS) to connect check box is cleared, the approximate number of connections is written.

6-48

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6: D EVI CES
List of Type IDs and Status■ Type ID
Expansion module and HMI module
Type ID
Hexadecimal

Type No.

Binary0x00

0000 0000

FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B4, FC6A-N16B3

0x01

0000 0001

FC6A-R161, FC6A-R164, FC6A-T16K1, FC6A-T16K4, F6A-T16P1, FC6A-T16P4, F6A-T16K3, FCA-T16P3

0x02

0000 0010

FC6A-N32B3

0x03

0000 0011

FC6A-T32K3, FC6A-T32P3

0x04

0000 0100

FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08B4, FC6A-N08A11, FC6A-N08A14

0x05

0000 0101

FC6A-R081, FC6A-R084, FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T08K4, FC6A-T08P1, FC6A-T08P4

0x06

0000 0110

FC6A-M08BR1, FC6A-M08BR4

0x070000 0111

FC6A-M24BR1, FC6A-M24BR4

0x180001 1000

FC6A-PH1

0x190001 1001

FC6A-EXM2, FC6A-EXM24

0x1A0001 1010

FC6A-EXM1S, FC6A-EXM1S4

0x20

0010 0000

FC6A-J2C1, FC6A-J2C40x210010 0001

FC6A-J4A1, FC6A-J4A40x220010 0010

FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-J8A40x230010 0011

FC6A-K2A1, FC6A-K2A4

0x240010 0100

FC6A-K4A1, FC6A-K4A4

0x250010 0101

FC6A-L06A1, FC6A-L06A4

0x26

0010 0110

FC6A-L03CN1, FC6A-L03CN4

0x27

0010 0111

FC6A-J4CN1, FC6A-J4CN4

0x280010 1000

FC6A-J8CU1, FC6A-J8CU4

0x290010 1001

FC6A-F2M1, FC6A-F2M4

0x2A

0010 1010

FC6A-F2MR1, FC6A-F2MR4

0x2B

0010 1011

FC6A-J4CH1Y, FC6A-J4CH4Y

0x2C

0010 1100

FC6A-EXM1M

0x2E

0010 1110

FC6A-SIF52, FC6A-SIF524

0xFF

1111 1111

Not connected

Cartridge
Type ID
Hexadecimal

Type No.

Binary0x00

0000 0000

FC6A-PJ2A

0x01

0000 0001

FC6A-PK2AV

0x020000 0010

FC6A-PK2AW

0x03

0000 0011

FC6A-PJ2CP

0x06

0000 0110

FC6A-PC1

0x07

0000 0111

FC6A-PC3

0x090000 1001

FC6A-PTS4, FC6A-PTK4

0x0A

0000 1010

FC6A-PN4

0x0C

0000 1100

FC6A-PC40xFF

1111 1111

Not connected■ Status
StatusDescription

Hexadecimal

Binary0x00

0000 0000

Normal0x811000 0001

Communication error (An error has occurred in the communication between the CPU module and an
expansion module, HMI module, or cartridge.)

0x821000 0010

Unknown device detected (A device other than the FC6A is connected.)

0x831000 0011

Device setting error (No device is connected or the connected device is different from that set in theuser program.)

0x84

1000 0100

Device writing error (The attempt to set the operation of the device failed.)

0x851000 0101

System update error (The system update failed.)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

6-49

6: D EVI CESStatus6-50

Hexadecimal

Binary0x861000 0110

Description
Expansion interface remote master module communication error (An error is occurring in thecommunication between the expansion interface remote master and slave modules.)FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the functions that can be used with the HMI module connected to the CPU module and their operatingprocedures.

HMI Function Overview
This section describes an overview of the HMI module and functions that can be used.

The HMI Module
With the HMI module, you can run and stop the user program, monitor and modify device values, and configure the environment
settings on the FC6A without using WindLDR by using the HMI module LCD and operation buttons on the module. With Ethernet
communication, the web server function and the send e-mail function can be used. The HMI module can also relay CPU module
Ethernet communication using a maximum of eight connections.

HMI Module
LCD

CPU Module

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

Operation Buttons

HMI Functions List
■ System menu functions
The following functions can be used with the HMI module's LCD display function and button operations.
TypeFunction

Description

Reference

Run/stop Operation

Switching run/stop

Switches the program run status (RUN/STOP).

7-9

Edit Program

Confirming/Clearing changed timer/counter preset values

Change timer/counter preset values or writes them to the user
program in the ROM.

7-10

Some of the function area settings (slave number, network settings,
message scroll speed, scroll unit, blinking speed, and LCD backlight
ON time) can be modified.
The system menu language can also be changed.

7-12

Configurations

Environment
Settings

Slave Number/
Network Settings/
Message Scroll/Blink
Menu Language/
LCD Backlight ON Time

Calendar/Clock

Configures the calendar/time for the internal clock.

7-31

Device Monitor

Displays/modifies the specified device values.

7-32

Monitors

Status Monitor

Displays the system software version, operating status, scan time,
protection status, and network settings.

7-35

Error Monitor

Allows you to check errors that have occurred.

7-38

Message Display

Message Display

Displays the screen configured by the MSG instruction on the LCD.

7-40

SD Memory Card

Stop Access

Stops access to the SD memory card in order to remove it.

7-41

FormatFormats the SD memory card.

7-42

Recipe Operations

Recipe files can be read from and written to the SD memory card.

7-43

Downloading/Uploading User Programs

The user program can be downloaded and uploaded.

7-45

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-1

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Communication Functions
Type

Function

Details

Reference

CPU module communication can be relayed using a maximumof eight connections.

7-48

Send E-mailE-mails can be sent with the EMAIL instruction.

7-48

Web Server

The HMI module status can be checked and the content ofdevices can be changed using a web browser.

7-48

Details

Reference

Connection Settings
EthernetCommunication■ Cartridges
Function

7-2

Digital I/O Cartridge

One digital I/O cartridge can be installed in the HMI module.

10-1

Analog I/O Cartridge

One analog I/O cartridge can be installed in the HMI module.

10-7

Communication Cartridge

One communication cartridge can be installed in the HMI
module. Plus CPU module only.

2-173

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
LCD Settings
You can change the HMI module LCD settings in the module configuration editor.
For details on the module configuration editor, see "Module Configuration Editor Overview" on page 12-1.

Backlight Settings

If you select Always On in the Backlight Settings, the LCD backlight will remain on at all times. If you select Turn off in, theLCD backlight turns on when an HMI module operation button is pressed and automatically turns off if no operation buttons arepressed for a certain amount of time. Set the time until the backlight automatically turns off to a value in the range of 1 to 65,535
seconds.
The backlight on time can also be changed with the system menu environment settings. If you set the time to 0, the backlight willremain on at all times in the same manner as when Always On is selected. For details, see "Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time"on page 7-13.

Message Settings

These are settings related to the messages displayed on the LCD.
When you execute the MSG instruction, the set message is displayed on the LCD. Set the character set, scroll unit, scroll speed,
and blink speed of the displayed message.
For details on MSG Instruction, see Chapter 12 "MSG Instruction Common Settings" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
■ Character Set
This is the character set used in the messages displayed with the MSG instruction. Select from the following.
Selection
European

Character Set
ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1)

Languages Usable in the MSG Instruction
Italian, English, Dutch, Spanish, German, French

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese (level 1)

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI1251

Russian■ Scroll Unit
This is the unit with which the messages displayed with the MSG instruction are scrolled. Select from the following.
Selection

Description

1 character

Scrolls the text in 1 character units.

1 dot

Scrolls the text in 1 dot units.

■ Scroll Speed
This is the speed with which the messages displayed with the MSG instruction are scrolled. Select from the following.
"500 ms", "600 ms", "700 ms", "800 ms", "900 ms", "1000 ms"■ Blink Speed
This is the speed with which the messages displayed with the MSG instruction blink or inverted. Select from the following.
"500 ms", "600 ms", "700 ms", "800 ms", "900 ms", "1000 ms"

Options

These are settings related to the overall display of the HMI module.
■ Menu Language
This is the language of the menus displayed on the LCD. Select from the following.
"Japanese", "English", "Chinese"

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-3

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Programming WindLDRThis section describes how to use the WindLDR module configuration editor to set the LCD.
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Configuration > Expansion Modules.
2. Click the inserted HMI module in the module configuration area and click Configure.

The HMI Module Configuration dialog box is displayed.

3. Click LCD Settings.

4. Configure the settings in Backlight Settings, Message Settings, and Options.
5. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

7-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
About the Menu Screen
This section describes the menu screen displayed on the HMI module LCD.
When switching from the standard screen to the system menu screen, the menu items are displayed on the LCD.

Standard Screen

The standard screen is the screen that is displayed after the FC6A is turned on. It displays the operation status (run/stopped) andthe current date and time.
In the initial state, the English screen in the following diagram is displayed when the power is first turned on. To switch to theJapanese menu, see "Changing the Menu Language" on page 7-12.
English screen

StoppedRun

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

Japanese screen

೵Ṇ୰

㐠㌿୰

 ⅆ ⅆ

System Menu

On the standard screen, press the(ESC) button while pressing the(OK) button to display the system menu.
You can execute operations, such as running and stopping the user program, monitoring devices, and modifying the settings, on thesystem menu. The menu items displayed on the LCD differ according to the operating status (running/stopped) of the user program.
StoppedRunning

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor■ System Menu when FC6A is stopped
The menu items displayed while the user program is stopped are as follows.
 Run
 Edit Program External Memory
 Configurations
 Device Monitor
 Status Monitor
 Error Status

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
The symbol is displayed
Status Monitor
when menu items continue below.
Error Status■ System Menu while FC6A is running
The menu items displayed while the user program is running are as follows.
 Stop External Memory
 Device Monitor
 Status Monitor
 Error Status

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

Message Screen

The FC6A can display messages on the HMI module LCD using the MSG (message) instruction. While the user program is running,the message is displayed when the input conditions of MSG (message) instructions are ON. Multiple message screens withdifferent priorities can be switched and displayed with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Message screen

Priority: 0

㸨Insufficient parts㸨
Manu. Line Process 1
2015/DEC/01

Priority: 1

Supply parts
Production countType A: 100 pcs.
Type B: 300 pcs.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-5

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Basic Operations
This section describes basic operation methods for the HMI module buttons.
The HMI module has the(up),(down),
to operate the screens displayed on the LCD.

(left),(right),(ESC), and(OK) buttons, and these buttons are usedPushing the Switches
The operation of the buttons differs by how they are pressed. There are two ways to push the buttons, which are detailed below.
Press/Hold
Press
Press and hold■Operation
The switch is pressed for 0.1 seconds or more and less than three seconds and then released.
The switch is pressed for three seconds or more and then released.

(up),(down) buttons
Moves the cursor up and down to select menu items. These buttons are also used to change numeric values.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status■(left),(right) buttons
Moves the cursor left and right. These buttons are also used to move the digit.

Backlight ON Time
00010 sec■

(ESC),(OK) buttons
Confirm menu items with the(OK) button. Return to the previous screen with the

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Return to theprevious screen.

Confirm menu items.

Do you want tostop PLC?
No
Yes

7-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(ESC) button.

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
List of Button Operations on the System Menu Screen

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
SwitchPress/Hold

Basic Operation

Press

Moves the cursor up one line. If the cursor is at the start of the item list, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor down one item. If the cursor is at the end of the item list, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press
Press and hold
Press

Nothing happens.

Press and holdPress

Executes the function selected with the cursor (depending on the function, displays additional menus).

Press and hold

Nothing happens.

Press

Returns to the previous screen (the calling screen).

Press and hold

While pressing the(ESC) button, press the(OK) button to return to the top screen of the system menu.

List of Button Operations after Executing a System Menu Item
System menu

Menu language selection(Backlight ON Time)

Backlight ON Time
00010 sec

SwitchMenu Languages:
Japanese

Press/Hold

Basic Operation

Press

Adds 1 to the number selected with the cursor.
Shows the item above the item selected with the cursor. If the top of the item list is displayed, nothing happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Subtracts 1 from the number selected with the cursor.
Shows the item below the item selected with the cursor. If the bottom of the item list is displayed, nothing
happens.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the left.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Moves the cursor once to the right.

Press and holdRepeats the press operation.

Press

Confirms the modification.

Press and hold

Nothing happens.

Press

Discards the modification.

Press and hold

While pressing the(ESC) button, press thescreen of the system menu.

(OK) button to discard the modification and return to the top

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-7

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Switching to the System Menu
This section describes how to switch to the system menu from the standard screen.
1. On the standard screen, while pressing the

In further descriptions, this is explained as "push the switches.

(ESC) button, press the(OK) button.
(ESC) +(OK) buttons". (1) and (2) in the diagram indicate the order to

HMI Module

StoppedStopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40(1)(2)

The system menu is displayed.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
While the user program is running, the top screen for the running system menu is displayed.
On the system menu screen, press the

7-8(ESC) +(OK) buttons to return to the standard screen.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Switching Run/Stop
This section describes how to run and stop the user program using the HMI module buttons.

Running the User ProgramThis section describes the steps to run the user program.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Run and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations↓
The user program is set to run.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
CautionWhen setting the user program to run by using the buttons on the HMI module, fully ensure the safety
before doing so.

Stopping the User ProgramThis section describes the steps to stop the user program.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Stop and press the(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
3. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want tostop PLC?
No
Yes↓
The user program is set to stop.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-9

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Editing Programs
This section describes how to reflect TP (timer preset values) and CP (counter preset values) in the user program and how to clear them.

Reflecting TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) in the User Program
Note: Even if you modify TP (timer preset values) and CP (counter preset values) using the function in "Monitoring Device Values" on page 7-32,
those changes are not reflected in the user program at that time. To reflect the changed preset values in the user program, you must stop the user
program and confirm the changes.

When you change TP (timer preset values) and CP (counter preset values) with the function in "Monitoring Device Values" on page7-32 and attempt to leave device monitor mode, the following message is displayed.

Timer/counter preset
values are changed.
1. Press the(ESC) button or the

When the user program is running(OK) button to display the standard screen.

When the user program is stopped

Running
T/C is changed
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

StoppedT/C is changed
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

When TP (timer preset values) and CP (counter preset values) differ from the device values in the ROM, T/C is changed isdisplayed on the standard screen.
To reflect or clear preset value changes, stop the user program. For the steps to stop the user program, see "Switching Run/Stop"on page 7-9.

StoppedT/C is changed
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
2. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons to display the system menu.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Edit Program with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
4. Select T/C Preset Values and press the(OK) button.

T/C Preset Values

5. Select Confirm with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Confirm
The changed preset values are written to the user program in the ROM.

7-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Clearing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values)
1. In step 5 of "Reflecting TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) in the User Program" on page 7-10, selectClear with the(up) and(down) buttons, and press the(OK) button.

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Confirm
The changes made to the timer and counter preset values are deleted. The preset values of the user program in the ROM remain
as they are before those values are modified. The device values return to the values before they are modified.
Note: The preset values can also be reflected to the user program in ROM using WindLDR. Select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor. SelectOnline > PLC > Status to display the PLC Status dialog box, and click the Confirm button under TIM/CNT Change Status. Once preset values
are confirmed, they cannot be restored to their previous values, even if they are cleared.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-11

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
FC6A Environment Settings
This section describes the operating procedures for environment settings such as the menu language, internal clock, slave number,and the scroll unit, speed, and blinking speed of messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. These cannot be configured while the user program isrunning.

Changing the Menu Language
The menu language (English, Japanese, Chinese) can be changed. These settings can be configured when the user program is
stopped. This cannot be changed while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

English6WRSSHG'(&78(

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations (When Japanese, 設定 ) with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

EnglishRun
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Menu Languages (When Japanese, メニュー言語 ) with the

button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK)

EnglishFunction
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Japanese (To switch from Japanese to English, 英語 ) with theto confirm.

(down) button, and then press the(OK) button

EnglishMenu Languages:
EnglishJapanese
Chinese Selectable menu languages

The menu languages that can be selected are as follows.
English/Japanese/Chinese
Notes:
 The initial setting of the menu language is English.
 The initial setting of the menu language can be changed in the expansion modules configuration. For details, see "LCD Settings" on page 7-3.

7-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time
When the HMI module operation buttons are pressed, the backlight turns on. After an operation button is pressed and thebacklight turns on, the backlight automatically turns off if the operation buttons are not pressed for a certain amount of time.
On the system menu, you can set the time from when the backlight turns on until it turns off. These cannot be configured while
the user program is running.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Backlight with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Move the cursor (digit) with the(left) and(right) buttons.

Backlight ON time:00010 s

5. Select the value with the(up) and(down) buttons, and then press the(OK) button to set the backlight ON time.

Backlight ON time:
00020 s Backlight ON time configuration range

The backlight ON time configuration range is as follows.
0 to 65,535 seconds
Notes:
 The default backlight ON time is 10 seconds. The default value can be changed in the expansion modules configuration. For details, see "LCD
Settings" on page 7-3.
 The backlight ON time can be changed by modifying the value of D8067.
 When the backlight ON time is set from the system menu, the value of D8067 is modified.
 The value of D8067 returns to the default value when the battery backup dies.
 If the backlight ON time is 0, the backlight is always on.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-13

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Configuring the Slave Number
The slave number used in maintenance communication, Modbus RTU communication, and data link slave can be configured.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. This cannot be configured while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Communications with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings
5. Select Slave Number with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
HMI Network Settings
The port selection screen is displayed.
6. Select Port 2 with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
For example, change the slave number of the port 2 to 1.

(OK) button.

Port 2:0
7. Specify 1 with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Port 2:
1

to confirm

Port 2:
1
You can set the slave number of port 2 to 1.
 Selectable slave numbers

The slave numbers that can be selected are as follows. (Depending on the communication mode) Maintenance communication: 0 to 31
 Modbus RTU slave: 1 to 247
 Data link slave: 1 to 31

7-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Notes:
 When the slave number is modified from the system menu, the value in the slave number type (constant/special data register) configured

with WindLDR is modified. The slave number type cannot be changed from the system menu.

 If the slave number type configured with WindLDR is Constant, when the slave number is modified from the system menu and the

button is pressed, the modified slave number is reflected in the function area settings for the user program. If Special Data Register, thevalues of D8100, D8102 and D8103 are modified. (The modification is not reflected in the function area settings for the user program.) The values of D8100, D8102 and D8103 return to the default values when the battery backup dies.
 The slave number range differs according to the communication mode (maintenance communication/Modbus RTU slave/data link slave).
If a value outside the configuration range is set, the following message is displayed. Press the(ESC) button or the
button to return tothe configuration screen, and then set the correct slave number again.

Port 2:Out of valid range
ࠉ 0
 For maintenance communication, see Chapter 4 "Maintenance Communication via Port 1" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication

Manual". For Modbus RTU slave/Modbus TCP slave, see Chapter 6 "Modbus RTU Communication via RS232C/RS485" in the "FC6A Series
MICROSmart Communication Manual".

Configuring the Network Settings
The CPU module and HMI module network settings can be configured. These settings are configured when the user program is stopped.
These cannot be configured while the user program is running.

Changing the CPU module network settings■ Changing the setting
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Communications with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5. Select CPU Network Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
HMI Network Settings
The CPU network settings screen is displayed.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-15

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Note: When the Plus CPU module is used, CPU Network 2 Settings is displayed.
Select CPU Network 2 Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings
The following operations are the same with CPU Network Settings.
6. Select Setting with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 5
7. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select ON or OFF.

Setting:
Fixed
Data Register:
DHCP
Notes:
 If you specify Data Register, the network settings cannot be configured because they are acquired from the data registers.
 The current network settings can be checked from the status monitor.

8. Press the(OK) button to change the CPU module's DHCP setting and to display the CPU Network Settings 1 screen.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 5
Next, to change the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-17, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-21, from step 2(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram. Select Yes with the(OK) button.

9. Press the

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

7-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(down) button and press the7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the IP address
1. Display the CPU Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-15.
2. Select IP Address with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 5
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the IP address to 192.168.1.6.
3. Move the cursor with the

IP Address:
192.168. 1.

4. Press thescreen.

(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

6(OK) button to change the CPU module's IP address to 192.168.1.6 and to display the CPU Network Settings

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
Next, to change the setting, subnet mask, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-15, from step 6
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-19, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-21, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-17

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the subnet mask
1. Display the CPU Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-15.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
2. Select Subnet Mask with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the subnet mask to 255.255.254.0.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Subnet Mask
255.255.254. 0

4. Press the(OK) button to change the CPU module's subnet mask to 255.255.254.0 and to display the following screen.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.254. 0
Default Gateway
0. 0. 0. 0
Next, to change the setting, IP address, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-15, from step 6
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-21, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

7-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the gateway
1. Display the CPU Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-15.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
2. Select Default Gateway with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Subnet Mask
255.255.254.0
Default Gateway㸸
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the default gateway to 192.168.1.3.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Default Gateway
192.168. 1. 3

4. Press the(OK) button to change the CPU module's default gateway to 192.168.1.3 and to display the following screen.

Subnet Mask
255.255.254.0
Default Gateway㸸
192.168. 1. 3
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-15, from step 6
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-21, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-19

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the preferred DNS server
1. Display the CPU Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-15.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
2. Select Preferred DNS Server with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the preferred DNS server to 192.168.1.200.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200

4. Press thescreen.

(OK) button to change the CPU module's preferred DNS server to 192.168.1.200 and to display the following

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-15, from step 6
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-21, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

7-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the alternate DNS server
1. Display the CPU Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-15.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
2. Select Alternate DNS Server with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the alternate DNS server to 192.168.1.201.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 1.201

4. Press thescreen.

(OK) button to change the CPU module's alternate DNS server to 192.168.1.201 and to display the following

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200
Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 1.201
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and preferred DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-15, from step 6
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-17, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-18, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-19, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-20, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-21

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Changing the HMI module network settings■ Changing the setting
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Communications with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5. Select HMI Network Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
HMI Network Settings
6. Select Setting with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 0. 10
7. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select ON or OFF.

Setting:
Fixed
Data Register:
DHCP
Notes:
 If you specify Data Register, the network settings cannot be configured because they are acquired from the data registers.
 The current network settings can be checked from the status monitor.

7-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
8. Press the(OK) button to change the HMI module's Setting and to display the HMI Network Settings 1 screen.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 10
Next, to change the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2

 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-24, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2

 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-27, from step 2(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram. Select Yes with the(OK) button.

9. Press the(down) button and press the

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes■ Changing the IP address
1. Display the HMI Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-22.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 10
2. Select IP Address on HMI Network Settings with the the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 10
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the IP address to 192.168.11.6.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

IP Address
192.168. 11. 6

4. Press the(OK) button to change the HMI module's IP address to 192.168.11.6 and to display the following screen.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
Next, to change the setting, subnet mask, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-22, from step 5

 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-24, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2

 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-27, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-23

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the subnet mask
1. Display the HMI Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-

22.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
2. Select Subnet Mask with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the subnet mask to 255.255.254.0.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Subnet Mask㸸
255.255.254. 0

4. Press the(OK) button to change the HMI module's subnet mask to 255.255.254.0 and to display the following screen.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.254. 0
Default Gateway
0. 0. 0. 0
Next, to change the setting, IP address, gateway, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-22, from step 5
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-27, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

7-24

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the gateway
1. Display the HMI Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-22.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
2. Select Default Gateway with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.254. 0
Default Gateway
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the gateway to 192.168.11.3.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Default Gateway
192.168. 11. 3

4. Press the(OK) button to change the HMI module's gateway to 192.168.11.3 and to display the following screen.

Subnet Mask:
255.255.254. 0
Default Gateway:
192.168. 11. 3
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, preferred DNS server, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-22
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-24
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-27, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-25

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the preferred DNS server
1. Display the HMI Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-22.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
2. Select Preferred DNS Server with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the preferred DNS server to 192.168.11.200.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200

4. Press thescreen.

(OK) button to change the HMI module's preferred DNS server to 192.168.11.200 and to display the following

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and alternate DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-22, from step 6
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-24, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2
 "Changing the alternate DNS server" on page 7-27, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

7-26

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON■ Changing the alternate DNS server
1. Display the HMI Network Settings screen with the same procedure as steps 1 through 5 in "Changing the setting" on page 7-22.

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
2. Select Alternate DNS Server with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
The range is 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
For example, change the alternate DNS server to 192.168.11.201.
3. Move the cursor with the(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons.

Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 11.201

4. Press thescreen.

(OK) button to change the HMI module's alternate DNS server to 192.168.11.201 and to display the following

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200
Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 11.201
Next, to change the setting, IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and preferred DNS server, see the following pages.
 "Changing the setting" on page 7-22, from step 6
 "Changing the IP address" on page 7-23, from step 2
 "Changing the subnet mask" on page 7-24, from step 2
 "Changing the gateway" on page 7-25, from step 2
 "Changing the preferred DNS server" on page 7-26, from step 2

5. Press the(ESC) button to display the screen in the following diagram.
Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toconfigure network?
No
Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-27

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Changing the Message Display Settings
Modifying the Scroll Speed

The scroll speed for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction can be configured.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. This cannot be configured while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Message Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5.

Select Scroll Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

6. Select Scroll Speed with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character
7. Modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

For example, change the value to 700 ms.

Scroll Speed:
700 msScroll Unit:
1-character Selectable scroll speeds

The scroll speeds that can be selected are as follows.
500/600/700/800/900/1000 ms

7-28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Configuring the Scroll Unit

The scroll unit for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction can be configured.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. This cannot be configured while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Message Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings

5.

Select Scroll Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

6. Select Scroll Unit with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character
7. Modify the scroll unit with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Unit:
1-dot Selectable scroll units

The scroll units that can be selected are as follows.
1 character/1-dot

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-29

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Configuring the Blinking Speed

The blinking speed for messages displayed with the message (MSG) instruction can be configured.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. This cannot be configured while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Function with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Select Message Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Communications
Message Settings
5. Select Blink Settings with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

6. Select Blinking Speed with the

Blinking Speed:
500 ms7. Modify the value with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button. For example, change the value to 1,000 ms.

Blinking Speed:1000 ms

 Selectable blinking speeds

The blinking speeds that can be selected are as follows.
500/600/700/800/900/1000 ms

7-30

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Setting the Calender/ClockThis section describes how to adjust the internal clock in the CPU module.
These settings can be configured when the user program is stopped. This cannot be adjusted while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Configurations with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select Clock with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
4. Move the cursor (yearmonthdayhourminutesecond) with thewith the(up) and(down) buttons.
For example, modify Day. Move the cursor to Day with the(left) and(left) and(right) buttons and modify the value(right) buttons.

2015/12/01
13: 30: 40
5. Modify Day with the(up) and(down) buttons.

2015/12/04
13: 30: 40
6. From Day position, press the(right) button to next move to the (hour:minute:second) row.
For example, modify Minute. Move the cursor to Minute with the(left) and(right) buttons.

2015/12/04
13: 30: 40
7. Modify Minute with the(up) and(down) buttons.

2015/12/04
13: 35: 40
8. Press the(OK) button to confirm the modifications to the calendar/clock.

 Calendar/clock configuration range

The calendar/clock configuration range is as follows.
Year

Month

Day

Hour

MinuteSecond2000 to 2099

01 to 1201 to 3100 to 2300 to 59

00 to 59

Notes:
 When the date is modified, the day of the week automatically changes. The day of the week is not displayed on the configuration screen.
 If an invalid date is set, an error message is displayed. When the error message is displayed, press the

button to return to the configuration screen, and then set a valid date.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(ESC) button or the

(OK)

7-31

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Monitoring the FC6A
Monitoring Device Values
You can check device values on the FC6A. The HMI module features two types of device monitors.
Going to device monitor mode from the standard screen
Device values can be checked but not modified.
Running Device Monitor on the system menu
Device values can be checked and modified.
Device values can be monitored regardless of the user program operating status (run/stop). This section describes the device
monitor mode when the user program is running.
1. If you press the(left) and(right) buttons on the standard screen, the FC6A switches to the device monitor mode andthe device values can be monitored (Device values cannot be modified). Continue to press the(left) and(right) buttons
to change the device type.

R 0000, 0123456789
R 0010, 0123456789
R 0020, 0123456789
R 0030, 0123456789

I 0000,I 0010,I 0020,I 0030,Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The device type changes in the order below.
I

Q

T

TC

TP

C

CC

CP

D

M

Data Register

Internal Relay

R

I, Q, T, C, M, and R are bit devices.
TC, TP, CC, CP, and D are word devices.
Note: I1000 or greater, Q1000 or greater, and non-retentive data registers are not displayed in the Device Monitor.

2. Press the(up) and, 
,  
,  
,  
,
,
,
,

7-32

(down) buttons to change the device number.
Shows the on/off state of the inputs (I).
Inverted inputs are on state.

 
 
 
 

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Modifying Device Values
This section describes how to specify a device and modify that device value.

Modifying a Bit Device Value

This section describes an example of switching on M0012 while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Device Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
The FC6A switches to the Device Monitor mode.

(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
3. Select device type: M (internal relay) with the

0 flashes to indicate the focus is on M0000.

M 00000,
M 00010,
M 00020,
M 00030,(left) and(right) buttons and press and hold the(OK) button.

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345

4. With the(up) and(down) buttons, select M0010.
0 flashes to indicate the focus is on M0010.

M 00000,
M 00010,
M 00020,
M 00030,

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345

5. Move the cursor to 2 with theM00000,
M00010,
M00020,
M00030,

M0012 turns on.

(right) button and press the(OK) button.

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-33

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Modifying a Word Device Value

This section describes an example of changing D0002 to 500 while the user program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Device Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
The FC6A switches to the Device Monitor mode.

(OK) button.

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
3. Select device type: D (Data Register) with the

D 00000:
D 00001:
D 00002:
D 00003:(left) and(right) buttons and press and hold the

0
0
0
0

4. Select D0002 with the

D 00000:
D 00001:
D 00002:
D 00003:(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

0
0
0
0

5. Move the digit with the(right) button and modify the value with the(up) and

Change Device Val.:
D 00002:00500
DEC (W)
6. Press the' 00000:' 00001:' 00002:' 00003:

7-34(OK) button to confirm.

0
0
500
0

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(down) buttons.

(OK) button.

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Monitoring the FC6A Status
You can check the FC6A system software version, scan time, protection status, CPU network settings, and HMI network settings.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

When the user program is running

When the user program is stopped

Running

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select Status Monitor with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the

When the user program is running

When the user program is stopped

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

3. The system version is displayed. Press the(down) button.

When the user program is running

When the user program is stopped

System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Running

System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Stopped4. The scan time is displayed. Press the

Scan Time:
Current㸸ࠉMaximum㸸ࠉ
Minimum㸸ࠉ(OK) button.

(down) button.

2 ms
4 ms
2 ms

5. The upload protection status is displayed. Press the(down) button.

Protection Status:
Read Program:None
6. The download protection status is displayed. Press the(down) button.

Write Program:
None
7. CPU Network Settings 1 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 1. 6
8. CPU Network Settings 2 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 2
Subnet Mask㸸
255.255.254. 0

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-35

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
9. CPU Network Settings 3 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 3
Default Gateway㸸192.168. 1. 3
10. CPU Network Settings 4 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 4
Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200
11. CPU Network Settings 5 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 5
Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 1.201
12. CPU Network Settings 6 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 6
MAC Address㸸
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
When the connected PLC is All-in-One CPU module or CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, the screen goes to the step 19.
13. CPU Network Settings 7 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 7
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 2. 6
14. CPU Network Settings 8 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 8
Subnet Mask㸸
255.255.254. 0
15. CPU Network Settings 9 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 9
Default Gateway㸸192.168. 2. 3
16. CPU Network Settings 10 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 10
Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 2.200
17. CPU Network Settings 11 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 11
Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 2.201

7-36

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
18. CPU Network Settings 12 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

CPU Network Settings 12
MAC Address㸸
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
19. HMI Network Settings 1 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 1
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6
20. HMI Network Settings 2 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 2
Subnet Mask:
255.255.254. 0
21. HMI Network Settings 3 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 3
Default Gateway
192.168. 11. 3
22. HMI Network Settings 4 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 4
Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200
23. HMI Network Settings 5 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 5
Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 11.201
24. HMI Network Settings 6 is displayed. Press the(down) button.

HMI Network Settings 6
MAC Address㸸
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-37

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Checking/Clearing Error Information
This section describes how to check error details and how to clear the error when an error occurs while the user program isrunning and an error message is displayed on the LCD.

Checking the Error Details and Clearing the Error
1. When an error occurs, the following message is displayed.

When an error occurs while user program isrunning and the user program stops

Error!
PLC is stopped.
Press OK button for
more details.
2. Press and hold theWhen an error occurs while user program is runningand the user program continues running

Error!
PLC is running.
Press OK button for
more details.

(OK) button. The error code is displayed.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
Error details can also be checked from Error Status on the system menu.
3. Select the error type with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the
Only errors that have occurred are displayed.

General Error㸸 3Power failure
Watchdog Timer
4. Press the(ESC) button.

5. Select Clear Error with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
6. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toclear error code?
No
Yes
General errors and user program execution error are cleared.
Note: For details on error information, see "General Error Codes" on page 13-3.

7-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL(OK) button.

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Checking Error Information from the System Menu
You can check error information from the system menu.
1. On the standard screen, press the

The system menu is displayed.

2. Select Error Status with the(ESC) +(up) and(OK) buttons.
(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the
Only errors that have occurred are displayed.

(OK) button.

External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
3. The error code is displayed.

General Error㸸 3
Execution Error㸸0
Clear Error
4. Select the error type with the

General Error㸸
Power failure
Program Execution

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-39

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Displaying Arbitrary Messages
This section describes how to switch the message displayed on the LCD by executing the message (MSG) instruction.

Switching between Multiple Message Screens
When the display conditions for multiple MSG instructions are satisfied, the messages are displayed according to the priorities set
for the MSG instructions.
The message with the highest priority is displayed, out of all the MSG instructions with the inputs on, by pressing the(up)button on the standard screen.
By further pressing the(up) button, the message with the next highest priority is displayed.
1. On the standard screen, press the(up) button.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
The message with the highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG instructions with the inputs on.

Today's production countType A: 10000 pcs.
Type B: 30000 pcs.
2. Press the(up) button.
The message with the next highest priority is displayed.

*Insufficient parts*
Manu. Line Process 1
2015/06/01
3. Press the(down) button.

Today's production countType A: 10000 pcs.
Type B: 30000 pcs.
4. Press the(ESC) button to return to the standard screen.

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
For details on the MSG instruction, see Chapter 12 "Display Instructions" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".

7-40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
SD Memory Card MaintenanceThis section describes how to stop access to the SD memory card inserted into the CPU module and how to format the SD memory
card.

Stopping Access to the SD Memory Card
Access to the SD memory card inserted into the CPU module is stopped using the HMI module buttons.
Access to the SD memory card can be stopped regardless of whether the user programming is running or stopped.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

When the user program is running

When the user program is stopped

Running

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the

When the user program is running

When the user program is stopped

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Stop Access with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want to stop
SD card access?
NoYes
6. While the access to the SD memory card is being stopped, the screen below is displayed. When stopping the access is finished,
the screen in step 4 is displayed.

Notes:
 Set the write-protect switch on the SD memory card to insert into the CPU module to the off position.
 Insert and remove the SD memory card in the direction indicated on the CPU module.
 Do not remove the SD memory card while the access to it is being stopped. There is a risk of damage to the SD memory card and the datastored on it. Check that the SD memory card status indicator LED [SD] is off and then remove the SD memory card from the CPU module.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-41

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Format SD memory card with the FC6AThe SD memory card inserted into the CPU module is formatted using the HMI module buttons. In order to save the log data,
format the SD memory card with the CPU module.
The SD memory card can be formatted when the user program is stopped. The SD memory card cannot be formatted when theuser program is running.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Format with the

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Yes with the(down) button and press the(OK) button.

Do you want toformat SD card?
NoYes
6. While the SD memory card is being formatted, the screen below is displayed. When the format is finished, the screen in step 4

is displayed.

7-42

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Reading and Writing Recipe Files
This section describes how to write recipe files to the SD memory card and how to read recipe files from the SD memory card.

Writing Recipe Files (SD memory card –> CPU module)
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Recipe with the

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Write Recipe with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Write Recipe
Read Recipe

6. Select Block Number with theWrite Recipe(SD->PLC)
Block Number: 1
7. While the recipe is being written, the screen below is displayed. When finished, the screen in step 5 is displayed.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-43

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Reading Recipe Files (CPU module –> SD memory card)
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40
The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Recipe with the

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Read Recipe with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Write Recipe
Read Recipe

6. Select Block Number with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Read Recipe(PLC->SD)
Block Number: 1
7. While the recipe is being read, the screen below is displayed. When finished, the screen in step 5 is displayed.

7-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Uploading/Downloading the User ProgramThis section describes how to download the user program on the SD memory card to the CPU module and how to upload the user
program on the CPU module to the SD memory card when the user program is stopped.

Downloading the User Program (SD memory card –> CPU module)
Download the user program on the SD memory card to the CPU module.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Program with the

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Download with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Download
Upload

6. Select the zld file to download with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.*1

File Name(.zld)㸸
abcdefgh*1 Files that can be selected to download are zld files stored in the PROGRAM folder on the SD memory card.

7. The following screen is displayed when the user program is being downloaded*2. When finished, the screen in step 4 isdisplayed.

*2 When downloading the system software, the system is reset during the download and the screen is reset to the standard screen.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7-45

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Uploading the User Program (CPU module –> SD memory card)
Upload the user program on the CPU module to the SD memory card.
1. On the standard screen, press the(ESC) +(OK) buttons.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

The system menu is displayed.
2. Select External Memory with the(OK) button.

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
3. Select SD Card with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

SD Card

4. Select Program with the

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram
5. Select Upload with the(up) and(down) buttons and press the(OK) button.

Download
Upload6. Enter the file name to create by the upload with the(OK) button.*1(up),(down),(left), and(right) buttons and press theFile Name:
upload .zld
*1 The file name that can be entered is between one and eight characters in length. The file name is the entered value from the beginning to thespace. The uploaded file is stored in the PROGRAM folder on the SD memory card.

7. The screen below is displayed while the user program is uploaded. When the upload is finished, the screen in step 4 isdisplayed.

7-46

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
System Menu Hierarchy Diagram
The HMI module system menu hierarchy is as follows.

is displayed only when the Plus CPU module is connected.

Standard screen
System menu
STOP
RUN
Edit Program

T/C Preset Values

External Memory

SD Card

Stop Access
FormatWrite Recipe

RecipeRead Recipe

Program

Download

Port 1

Port 9Port 10
UploadConfigurations

Function

Communications

Clock

Slave Number

Port 33

CPU Network Settings

CPU Network Settings

IP Address

Menu Languages
CPU Network Settings

Backlight
Device Monitor

Specify Device

Status Monitor

System Version

Setting

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

HMI Network Settings

CPU Network Settings

Preferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server

CPU Network 2 Settings

Run/Stop Status

Setting
IP Address

CPU Network 2 Settings

Scan Time

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

CPU Network 2 Settings

Preferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server

HMI Network Settings

Setting
IP Address

HMI Network Settings

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

HMI Network Settings

Scroll Speed

Protection Status

Message Settings

Scroll Settings

Scroll Unit

UploadBlink Settings

Blinking Speed

Download
Network Settings
Error Status

General Error
Execution Error
Clear Error

Preferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server

Setting

CPU Network Settings 1

IP Address

CPU Network Settings 2

Subnet Mask

CPU Network Settings 3

Default Gateway

CPU Network Settings 4

Preferred DNS Server

CPU Network Settings 5

Alternate DNS Server

CPU Network Settings 6

MAC Address
Setting

CPU Network Settings 7

IP Address

CPU Network Settings 8

Subnet Mask

HMI Network Settings 1

IP Address

CPU Network Settings 9

Default Gateway

HMI Network Settings 2

Subnet Mask

CPU Network Settings 10

Preferred DNS Server

HMI Network Settings 3

Default Gateway

CPU Network Settings 11

Alternate DNS Server

HMI Network Settings 4

Preferred DNS Server

CPU Network Settings 12

MAC Address

HMI Network Settings 5

Alternate DNS Server

HMI Network Settings 6

MAC Address

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Setting7-47

7: HM I F UN CTI ON
Communication Functions
This section describes the communication functions that can be used with the HMI module connected to the CPU module.

Connection Settings
The HMI module can relay (pass through) CPU module Ethernet communication using a maximum of eight connections.
The usable communication mode is maintenance communication server.
Maintenance Communication Server

Pass-through

HMI Module

Connection 1

CPU Module

Connection 3
Ethernet

Connection 2
WindLDRWindLDR

ComputerComputer

Operator Interface

Notes:
 For details on the HMI module's network settings and connection settings, see Chapter 3 "Network Settings" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart
Communication Manual".
 For details on the maintenance communication server function, see Chapter 4 "Maintenance Communication via Ethernet Port 1" in the "FC6A

Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

Send e-mail function
Up to 255 types of e-mails can be sent by using the HMI module and executing the EMAIL instruction in the user program.
The character sets that can be used are ASCII, Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Chinese (GB2312), Western European languages (ISO8859-1), and Unicode (UFT-8).
For Japanese, the title can be set to 100 double-byte characters and the body can be set to around 1,600 characters. The valuesof data registers can also be embedded in the body of an e-mail.
Note: For details on the send e-mail function, see Chapter 12 "Send E-mail Function" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

Web server function
Using the HMI module, the status of the CPU module can be checked and device values can be checked and modified with a web
browser on a computer.
Web page data created by the user can also be downloaded to the HMI module. The HMI module can store a maximum of 5 MB ofdata.
Access controls can also be applied by using password authentication.
Note: For details on the web server function, see Chapter 13 "Web Server" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

7-48

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
I ntroduction
This chapter provides a list of FC6A instructions and describes their functions.
The instructions are divided into basic instructions, which perform sequencing, and advanced instructions, which perform moves,comparisons, Boolean computations, binary arithmetic operations, bit shifts, and other operations.

Basic Instruction List
SymbolName

Function

AND

And

Series connection of NO contact

AND LOD

And Load

Series connection of circuit blocks

ANDN

And Not

Series connection of NC contact

BPP

Bit PopRestores the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily

BPS

Bit Push

Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily

BRD

Bit ReadReads the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily

CC=Counter Comparison (=)

Equal to comparison of counter current value

CC>=

Counter Comparison (>=)

Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value

CDP

Dual Pulse Reversible Counter

Dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 65,535)

CDPD

Double-Word Dual Pulse
Reversible Counter

Double-word dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 4,294,967,295)

CNT

Adding Counter

Adding counter (0 to 65,535)

CNTD

Double-Word Adding Counter

Double-word adding counter (0 to 4,294,967,295)

CUD

Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter

Up/down selection reversible counter (0 to 65,535)

CUDD

Double-Word Up/Down
Selection Reversible Counter

Double-word up/down selection reversible counter(0 to 4,294,967,295)

DC=

Data Register Comparison (=)

Equal to comparison of data register value

DC>=

Data Register Comparison (>=)

Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value

END

End

Ends a program

JEND

Jump End

Ends a jump instruction

JMP

Jump

Jumps a designated program area

LOD

Load

Stores intermediate results and reads contact status

LODN

Load Not

Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status

MCR

Master Control ResetEnds a master control

MCS

Master Control Set

Starts a master control

OR

Or

Parallel connection of NO contact

OR LOD

Or LoadParallel connection of circuit blocks

ORN

Or NotParallel connection of NC contact

OUT

OutputOutputs the result of bit logical operation

OUTN

Output Not

Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation

RST

Reset

Resets output, internal relay, or shift register bit

SET

Set

Sets output, internal relay, or shift register bit

SFR

Shift Register

Forward shift register

SFRN

Shift Register Not

Reverse shift register

SOTD

Single Output Down

Falling-edge differentiation output

SOTU

Single Output Up

Rising-edge differentiation output

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

See Page(Ladder
Programming
Manual)4: Basic
Instructions

8-1

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE

Symbol8-2

Name

Function

TIM

100-ms Timer

Subtracting 100-ms timer (0 to 6,553.5 s)

TIMO

100-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 100-ms off-delay timer (0 to 6,553.5 s)

TMH

10-ms Timer

Subtracting 10-ms timer (0 to 655.35 s)

TMHO

10-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 10-ms off-delay timer (0 to 655.35 s)

TML

1-s Timer

Subtracting 1-s timer (0 to 65,535 s)

TMLO

1-s Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 1-s off-delay timer (0 to 65,535 s)

TMS

1-ms Timer

Subtracting 1-ms timer (0 to 65.535 s)

TMSO

1-ms Off-delay Timer

Subtracting 1-ms off-delay timer (0 to 65.535 s)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

See Page(Ladder
Programming
Manual)4: Basic
Instructions

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Advanced Instruction List
Valid Data Type
Group

NOP

Move

Data Comparison

Binary Arithmetic

SymbolShift and Rotate

W

I

D

L

F

No Operation

MOV

Move

X

X

X

X

MOVN

Move Not

X

X

X

X

IMOV

Indirect Move

X

X

IMOVN

Indirect Move Not

X

X

MOVC

Move Characters

BMOV

Block Move

X

IBMV

Indirect Bit Move

X

IBMVN

Indirect Bit Move Not

X

NSET

N Data Set

X

X

X

X

X

NRS

N Data Repeat Set

X

X

X

X

X

XCHG

ExchangeX

TCCST

Timer/Counter Current Value Store

X

CMP=

Compare Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<>

Compare Unequal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<

Compare Less Than

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>

Compare Greater Than

X

X

X

X

X

CMP<=

Compare Less Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

CMP>=

Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

ICMP>=

Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC=

Load Compare Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC<>

Load Compare Unequal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC<

Load Compare Less Than

X

X

X

X

X

LC>

Load Compare Greater Than

X

X

X

X

X

LC<=

Load Compare Less Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

LC>=

Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To

X

X

X

X

X

ADD

Addition

X

X

X

X

X

SUB

Subtraction

X

X

X

X

X

MUL

Multiplication

X

X

X

X

X

DIV

Division

X

X

X

X

X

INC

Increment

X

X

X

X

DEC

Decrement

X

X

X

X

ROOT

Root

X

Sum (ADD)X

Sum (XOR)

X

X
X

5: Move
Instructions

X
X

X
X

X

RNDM

RandomX

ANDW

AND Word

X

X

ORW

OR Word

X

X

XORW

Exclusive OR Word

X

X

SFTL

Shift Left

SFTR

Shift Right

BCDLS

BCD Left Shift

WSFT

Word Shift

X

ROTL

Rotate Left

X

X

ROTR

Rotate RightX

X

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

See Page(Ladder
Programming
Manual)3: Instructions
Reference

NOP

SUM

Boolean Computation

Name

X

X
X

6: Data
Comparison
Instructions

7: BinaryArithmetic
Instructions

X

8: Boolean
Computation
Instructions

9: Shift / Rotate
Instructions

8-3

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Valid Data TypeGroup

Data Conversion

Week Programmer

Interface

Program Branching

Coordinate Conversion

Pulse

8-4

Symbol

Name

W

I

D

HTOB

Hex to BCD

X

X

BTOH

BCD to Hex

X

X

HTOA

Hex to ASCII

X

ATOH

ASCII to Hex

X

BTOA

BCD to ASCII

X

X

ATOB

ASCII to BCD

X

X

ENCO

EncodeDECO

DecodeBCNT

Bit Count

ALT

Alternate Output

CVDT

Convert Data Type

X

DTDV

Data Divide

X

DTCB

Data Combine

X

SWAP

Data Swap

X

WKTIM

Week Timer

WKTBL

Week Table

WEEK

Weekly Timer

YEAR

Yearly Timer

MSG

Message

DISP

Display

DGRD

Digital Read

LABEL

Label

LJMP

Label Jump

LCAL

Label CallLRETLabel Return

DJNZ

Decrement Jump Non-zeroDI

Disable Interrupt

EI

Enable Interrupt

IOREF

I/O Refresh

HSCRF

High-speed Counter Refresh

FRQRF

Frequency Measurement Refresh

COMRF

Communication Refresh

XYFS

XY Format Set

X

X

CVXTY

Convert X to Y

X

X

CVYTX

Convert Y to X

X

X

AVRG

Average

X

X

PULS1

Pulse Output 1

PULS2

Pulse Output 2

PULS3

Pulse Output 3

PULS4

Pulse Output 4

PWM1

Pulse Width Modulation 1

PWM2

Pulse Width Modulation 2

PWM3

Pulse Width Modulation 3

PWM4

Pulse Width Modulation 4

RAMP1

Ramp Pulse Output 1

RAMP2

Ramp Pulse Output 2

RAMPL

Linear Interpolation Control

ZRN1

Zero Return 1

ZRN2

Zero Return 2

ARAMP1

Advanced Ramp 1

ARAMP2

Advanced Ramp 2

ABS

Set Absolute PositionJOG

JOG Operation

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

X

X

L

F

See Page(Ladder
Programming
Manual)10: Data
Conversion
Instructions

X

X

X
11: Week
Programmer
Instructions
12: Display
Instructions

13: Program
Branching
Instructions
15: Interrupt
Control Instructions
14: Refresh
Instructions
16: Coordinate
Conversion
Instructions
X

X

X

17: Average
Instructions

18: Pulse Output
Instructions

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Valid Data TypeGroup

PID Control

Dual / Teaching Timer

Trigonometric Function

Logarithm / Power

File Data Processing

Clock

Data Logging
ScriptFlow Volume Calculation
User-defined Macro

User Communication

PING

E-mailSymbol

Name

W

I

D

L

F

PID

PID Control (FC5A compatible)

PIDA

PID Control

PIDD

PID with Derivative Decay

DTML

1-s Dual Timer

DTIM

100-ms Dual Timer

DTMH

10-ms Dual Timer

DTMS

1-ms Dual Timer

TTIM

Teaching TimerRAD

Degree to RadianX

DEG

Radian to Degree

X

SIN

Sine

X

COS

CosineX

TAN

Tangent

X

ASIN

Arc SineX

ACOS

Arc Cosine

X

ATAN

Arc Tangent

X

LOGE

Natural Logarithm

X

LOG10

Common Logarithm

X

EXP

Exponent

X

POW

Power

FIFOF

FIFO Format

X

FIEX

First-In Execute

X

FOEX

First-Out Execute

X

NDSRC

N Data Search

X

TADD

Time Addition

TSUB

Time Subtraction

HTOS

HMS to S

STOH

S to HMS

HOUR

Hour Meter

DLOG

Data Logging

TRACE

Data Trace

SCRPT

Script

X

X

SCALE

Convert Analog Input

X

X

FLWA

Analog Flow Totalizer

FLWP

Pulse Flow Totalizer

UMACRO

User-defined Macro

TXD

Transmit

ETXD

Transmit over Ethernet

RXD

Receive

ERXD

Receive over Ethernet

PING

EMAIL

See Page(Ladder
Programming
Manual)19: PID Control
Instructions

20: Dual /Teaching Timer
Instructions

X

X

X

X

X

21: Trigonometric
Function
Instructions

22: Logarithm /Power
Instructions
23: File Data
Processing
Instructions

24: Clock
Instructions

25: Data Log
Instructions

X

X

X

X

X

26: Script
27: Flow
Calculation
Instructions
28: User-defined
Macro Instruction
Communication
Manual
5: User
Communication
Instructions

Ping

Communication
Manual
11: Send PING
Function

Send E-mailCommunication
Manual
12: Send E-mail
Function

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-5

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Structure of an Advanced Instruction
Source Device

Destination Device

OpcodeMOV(W)
I0

Repeat Cycles
S1 R
*****

D1 R
*****

REP
**

Data Type

RepeatDesignation

Repeat Designation
Specifies whether repeat is used for the device or not.
Repeat Cycles
Specifies the quantity of repeat cycles: 1 through 99.

OpcodeThe opcode is a symbol used to identify the advanced instruction.
Data TypeSpecifies word (W), integer (I), double word (D), long (L), or float(F) data.
Source Device
The source device specifies the 16- or 32-bit data to be processedby the advanced instruction. Some advanced instructions require
two source devices.
Destination Device
The destination device specifies the 16- or 32-bit data to store theresult of the advanced instruction. Some advanced instructions
require two destination devices.

Input Condition for Advanced Instructions
Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact, except NOP (no operation), LABEL (label), and LRET (label
return) instructions. The input condition can be programmed using a bit device such as input, output, internal relay, or shift
register. Timer and counter can also be used as an input condition to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the countercounts out.
While the input condition is on, the advanced instruction is
executed in each scan. To execute the advanced instruction
only at the rising or falling edge of the input, use the SOTU or
SOTD instruction.

I0

SOTU

MOV(W)

S1 –
D10

D1 –
D20

REP

While the input condition is off, the advanced instruction is not executed and device statuses are held.

Source and Destination Devices
The source and destination devices specify 16- or 32-bit data, depending on the selected data type. When a bit device such as
input, output, internal relay, or shift register is designated as a source or destination device, 16 or 32 points starting with thedesignated number are processed as source or destination data. When a word device such as timer or counter is designated as asource device, the current value is read as source data. When a timer or counter is designated as a destination device, the resultof the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter. When a data register is designated as a source ordestination device, the data is read from or written to the designated data register.

Using Timer or Counter as Source Device
Since all timer instructions—TML (1-s timer), TIM (100-ms timer), TMH (10-ms timer), and TMS (1-ms timer)—subtract from thepreset value, the current value is decremented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time. As described above, whena timer is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction, the current value, or the remaining time, of the timer is readas source data. Adding counters CNT start counting at 0, and the current value is incremented up to the preset value. Reversible
counters CDP and CUD start counting at the preset value and the current value is incremented or decremented from the preset
value. When any counter is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction, the current value is read as source data.

Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device
As described above, when a timer or counter is designated as a destination device of an advanced instruction, the result of theadvanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter. Timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 65,535.
When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register, the timer or counter cannot be designated as adestination of an advanced instruction. When executing such an advanced instruction, a user program execution error will
result. For details of user program execution error, see Appendix "User Program Execution Error and Ladder Program Execution
Error" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
Note: When a user program execution error occurs, the result is not set to the destination.

8-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Data Types for Advanced Instructions
When using move, data comparison, binary arithmetic, Boolean computation, bit shift/rotate, data conversion, and coordinate
conversion instructions, data types can be selected from word (W), integer (I), double word (D), long (L), or float (F). For otheradvanced instructions, the data is processed in units of 16-bit word.
Range of Decimal Values

SymbolBits

Quantity of Data
Registers Used

DecimalHexdecimal

Word (Unsigned 16 bits)W

16 bits

1

0 to 65,535$0000 to $FFFF

Integer (Signed 16 bits)I

16 bits

1–32,768 to 32,767$8000 to $7FFF

Double Word (Unsigned 32 bits)

D

32 bits

2

0 to 4,294,967,295$00000000 to$FFFFFFFF

Long (Signed 32 bits)L

32 bits

2–2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647$80000000 to$7FFFFFFF

Float (Floating point)F

32 bits2–3.4028231038 to
3.4028231038—

Data Type• When a constant is set in WindLDR, it can be set as decimal or hexadecimal number. Prefix the number with "$" to set it as a hexadecimal
number.

Decimal Values and Hexadecimal Storage (Word, Integer, Double, and Long Data)
The following table shows hexadecimal equivalents which are stored in the CPU, as a result of addition and subtraction of thedecimal values shown:
Data Type

Result of Addition

Hexadecimal Storage

Result of Subtraction

Hexadecimal StorageWord

065,535131,0710000
FFFF(CY) FFFF

65,5350–1–65,535–65,536

FFFF
0000(BW) FFFF(BW) 0001(BW) 0000

Integer

65,53432,76832,7670–1–32,767–32,768–32,769–65,535(CY) 7FFE(CY) 0000
7FFF
0000
FFFF
8001
8000
(CY) FFFF(CY) 8001

65,53432,76832,7670–1–32,767–32,768–32,769–65,535(BW) 7FFE(BW) 0000
7FFF
0000
FFFF
8001
8000
(BW) FFFF(BW) 8001

Double Word

04,294,967,295
8,589,934,591

00000000FFFFFFFF(CY) FFFFFFFF

4,294,967,295
0–1–4,294,967,295–4,294,967,296

FFFFFFFF
00000000(BW) FFFFFFFF(BW) 00000001(BW) 00000000

Long

4,294,967,294
2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
0–1–2,147,483,647–2,147,483,648–2,147,483,649–4,294,967,295(CY) 7FFFFFFE(CY) 00000000
7FFFFFFF
00000000FFFFFFFF
80000001
80000000(CY) FFFFFFFF(CY) 80000001

4,294,967,294
2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647
0–1–2,147,483,647–2,147,483,648–2,147,483,649–4,294,967,295(BW) 7FFFFFFE(BW) 00000000
7FFFFFFF
00000000FFFFFFFF
80000001
80000000(BW) FFFFFFFF(BW) 80000001

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-7

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Floating-Point Data Format
The FC6A can specify floating-point data (F) for advanced instructions. Like double word (D) and long integer (L) data, floatingpoint data also uses two consecutive data registers to execute advanced instructions. The FC6A supports the floating-point data
based on the single storage format of the IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) Standard 754.

Single Storage Format

The IEEE single storage format consists of three fields: a 23-bit fraction, f; an 8-bit biased exponent, e; and 1-bit sign, s. These
fields are stored contiguously in one 32-bit word, as shown in the figure below. Bits 0:22 contain the 23-bit fraction, f, with bit 0
being the least significant bit of the fraction and bit 22 being the most significant; bits 23:30 contain the 8-bit biased exponent, e,with bit 23 being the least significant bit of the biased exponent and bit 30 being the most significant; and the highest-order bit 31
contains the sign bit, s.
31 30

23 22

s

0

e[30:23]f[22:0]8-bit biased exponent

23-bit fraction

Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)

The table below shows the correspondence between the values of the three constituent fields s, e, and f and the value represented
by the single storage format bit pattern. When any value out of the bit pattern is entered to the advanced instruction or when
execution of advanced instructions, such as division by zero, has produced any value out of the bit pattern, a user program
execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A.
Value

Exponent Field e

Fraction Field f

Representation in WindLDR

±0

e=0

f=0

Denormal numbers

e=0

f≠0

-1.175494E-38 to 1.175494E-38

Arbitrary-3.402823E+38 to -1.175494E-38
1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38

f=0

INF

f≠0

NAN

Normal numbers

0<e<255±∞ (± infinities)

e=255

NaNs (Not a number values)

0.0

Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data Processing

When advanced instructions involving floating-point data are executed, special internal relay M8003 (carry and borrow) is updated.
M8003

Execution Result

Value

1

0

Overflow (exceeds the range between –3.4028231038 and 3.4028231038)

10

Not zero (within the range between –1.17549510–38 and 1.17549510–38)

0

0

Zero
Not Zero
Overflow

Overflow
M8003
Execution Result

8-8

1

0

–3.4028231038

1 0 1–1.17549510–38

001.17549510–38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

1
3.4028231038

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
32-bit Data Storage
The 32-bit data for D (double word) and L (long word) is stored in devices according to the method selected in WindLDR underDevice Settings in Function Area Settings.
For applicable devices and instructions, see "32-bit Data Storage Setting" on page 5-55.
Word devices*1:

The data storage when From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings
When D0 is specified as the source or destination device, the upper word is stored in D0 and the lower
word is stored in D1.
Double word data (constant)Upper word

Lower word

1 2 3 45 6 7 8D0:

1 2 3 4Upper wordD1:

5 6 7 8Lower word

(Hexadecimal)

The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings
When D0 is specified as the source or destination device, the lower word is stored in D0 and the upper
word is stored in D1.
Double word data (constant)Upper word

Lower word

1 2 3 45 6 7 8D0:

5 6 7 8Lower word

D1:

1 2 3 4Upper word

(Hexadecimal)

Bit devices*1:

The data storage when From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings
When R0 is specified as the source or destination device, the upper word is stored in R0 to R15 and thelower word is stored in R16 to R31.
Double word data (constant)Upper word

Lower word

1 2 3 45 6 7 8R0

R15

R0 to R15:

(Hexadecimal)

1 2 3 4R16

R31

R16 to R31:

Upper word

5 6 7 8Lower word

The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings
When R0 is specified as the source or destination device, the lower word is stored in R0-R15 and theupper word is stored in R16-R31.
Double word data (constant)Upper word

Lower word

1 2 3 45 6 7 8R0

R15

R0 to R15:

(Hexadecimal)

5 6 7 8R16R31

R16 to R31:

Lower word

1 2 3 4Upper word

*1 For bit devices and word devices, see "Devices" on page 6-1.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-9

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
User Program Execution Errors
When an advanced instruction is executed, a user program execution error occurs when any of the following conditions are met.
• the result of the adavnced instruction is invalid• source or destination device that is indirectly specified in the advanced instruction exceeds the valid device range• the advanced instruction does not operate correctly

For example, the data in the source device does not comply with the normal floating-point format when the data type is Float (F).
For details about device ranges, see "Devices" on page 6-1.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 turns on and the corresponding error code is stored in
special data register D8006. For details about the error codes, see Appendix "User Program Execution Error and Ladder Program
Execution Error" in the "Ladder Programming Manual".
When a user program execution error occurs, instructions operate as follows:• When the source data is invalid, the execution of the advanced instruction is canceled and the data in the destination device is not changed.
• When the execution result is invalid, a value is stored in the destination device.
For details on stored values, see the descriptions of relevant instructions.
• If a user program execution error occurred during a repeat operation, the operation is canceled and the next repeat operation is executed.
M8004 is retained even when no further user program execution errors occur during subsequent repeat operations.

Example: User program execution error during a repeat operation

When the source data does not comply with the normal floating-point format.
When the second repeat operation is executed, special internal relay M8004 turns on because the source data is not a normal
number in floating-point format.
The second repeat operation is canceled and the third repeat operation is executed.
MOV(F)

S1(R)

D1(R)

REP

D0

D100

3

(D100, D101)(D0, D1)

3.14(D2, D3)

Not a normal
number(D4, D5)

1.414

Not executed
M8004=ON

3.14
Previous value isretained(D102, D103)(D104, D105)

1.414

Carry and Borrow
When the result of an operation exceeds the valid device range, a carry (CY) or borrow (BW) occurs.
Carrying and borrowing occur in the following conditions according to the data type:
Data Type

StatusWord

Exceeds range between 0 and 65,535

Integer

Exceeds range between -32,768 and 32,767

Double Word

Exceeds range between 0 and 4,294,967,295

Long

Exceeds range between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647

Float

If an overflow or underflow occurs
For details on overflow and underflow, see "Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data Processing" onpage 8-8.

When a carry or borrow occurs, special internal relay M8003 (carry and borrow) turns on.
For example, when D0 has a value of FFFF (hex) and +1 is added using an INC instruction, the result is 10000 (hex), but when thedata type is Word (W), 0000 (hex) is stored in D0 and 1 is stored in M8003.

8-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Discontinuity of Device Areas
Each device area is discrete and does not continue, for example, from input to output or from output to internal relay. In addition,
special internal relays M8000 through M8997 are in a separate area from internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 throughM21247. Data registers D0 through D7999, D10000 through D61999, and D70000 through D269999, and special data registers
D8000 through D8899 are in separate areas and do not continue with each other.
MOV(W)

S1 –
M7990

D1 –
D0

REP

MUL(W)

S1 –
D100

S2 –
D200

D1 –
D61999

M8125

I0

The internal relay ends at M7997. Since the MOV (move) instruction reads 16 internal
relays, the last internal relay exceeds the valid range, resulting in a user program
syntax error.

REP

This program results in a user program syntax error. The destination of the
MUL (multiplication) instruction requires two data registers D61999 andD62000. Since D62000 exceeds the valid range, a user program syntax error
occurs.

Advanced instructions execute operation only on the available devices in the valid area. If a user program syntax error is foundduring programming, WindLDR rejects the program instruction and shows an error message.
MOV(W)
M8125

S1 –
D0

D1 R
M7980

REP
2

The MOV (move) instruction sets data of data register D0 to 16 internal relays M7980
through M7997 in the first repeat cycle. The destination of the second cycle is the next
16 internal relays M8000 through M8017, which are invalid, resulting in a user program
syntax error.
For details about repeat operations of each advanced instruction, see "Advanced
Instruction List" on page 8-3.

NOP (No Operation)
No operation is executed by the NOP instruction.
NOPThe NOP instruction may serve as a place holder. It can also be used to add a delay to the CPU scan time, in order tosimulate communication with a machine or application, for debugging purposes.
The NOP instruction does not require an input and device.

Details of the other advanced instructions are described in the following chapters.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-11

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Device Addressing for Instruction Execution
This section provides an explanation about how source and destination devices used by instructions for the execution can be
specified. There are two ways to specify the device to use: Direct Addressing and Indirect Addressing.

Direct Addressing
In direct addressing, source and destination devices are specified with the devices to use.
■ Direct Addressing Operation
Example: When the source device (D0010) of the MOV(W) is directly specified.
The data in D0010 is transferred to D0002.

MOV(W)

S1 -

D1 -

REP

D0000

D0010 D0002

D0001
D0002

Transfer
D0010

Data

■ Devices that can be directly addressed
I

Q

M

R

T

C

D

P

Constant

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

■ Instructions supporting the direct addressing
All basic and advanced instructions support the direct addressing.

Indirect Addressing
Indirect Addressing Format

The index register Pn indicates the offset from the base device. Indirect addressing is possible by specifying source devices anddestination devices with the base device and the index register. The format of the indirect addressing is as follows:"Base Device" + ":" + "Pn (Address n of the index register)"
Example: When the base device is D0010 and the index register P3 is used.
After D0010, add ":" and "P3".
D0010:P3

Indirect Addressing Operation
Example: When the source device (D0010) of the MOV(W) instruction is indirectly specified with P3.
The data in P3 is added to the address of D0010, so D(10 + (P3)) = D (10 + (100)) = D0110, and the data in
D0110 is transferred to D0002.

MOV(W)

S1 -

D1 -

REP

D0010:P3 D0002

D0000
D0001
D0002

Index register
P0

1

P1

10

P2

50

P3

100

D0010

D0110

8-12

Transfer+100

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

Data

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Index Registers

16 index registers (P0 to P15) can be used, and the data type of the index register is L (long).
Example: LOD M10:P0• P0=-3This indirect addressing indicates M0005, which is 3 bits
behind of M0010.

• P0=5This indirect addressing indicates M0015, which is five bits
ahead of M0010.

LOD Instruction

LOD Instruction

M0010:P0

M0010:P0

Index register
P0

3
-3

-3

2
1

M0005
M0006
M0007
M0010

1
Index register
P0

5

2
+5

3
4
5

M0010
M0011
M0012
M0013
M0014
M0015

• P0=10
This indirect addressing indicates M0022, which is 10 bits
ahead of M0010.
LOD Instruction

M0010:P0

1
Index register
P0

10

2
+10

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

M0010
M0011
M0012
M0013
M0014
M0015
M0016
M0017
M0020
M0021
M0022

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-13

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Example: MOV(D) 1234 D10:P0• P0=-3This indirect addressing indicates D0007, which is 3 words
behind of D0010.

MOV(D)

S1 -

D1 -

1234

P0

-3

-3

MOV(D)

REP

D0010:P0

1234
Transfer

D0007

3

Index register• P0=5This indirect addressing indicates D0015, which is 5 words
ahead of D0010.

D0008

2

D1 -

1234

D0010:P0

1
Index register

D0009

1

S1 -

P0

5

2
+5

D0010

3
4
5

REP

D0010
D0011
D0012
D0013
D0014
D0015

1234
Transfer

Values stored in the index registers is 32-bit and its data type is L (long). Index registers can directly specified as source anddestination devices in MOV(L), ADD(L), SUB(L), and MUL(L) instructions and values in index registers can be moved ormanipulated.
Example: MOV(L) -123456 P0• -123456 is transferred to P0.

MOV(L)S1 -

D1 --123456

P0

REP

Notes:• Index registers cannot be used in scripts.
• Indirect addressing to a different device type is not possible.
• If indirectly specified devices are beyond the device range, a user program execution error (1: Source/destination device exceeds range) will
occur.
• When the indirect addressing is used, the base device and index register cannot be specified with the tag names.
• Indirect addressing for data register bits is not supported.
• The four instructions that can be used to modify the values of the index registers are MOV(L), ADD(L), SUB(L), and MUL(L). Specify P (index
register) directly in those instructions.

Devices that can be indirectly addressed
I

Q

M

R

T

C

D

P

Constant

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

—

—

Instructions supporting the indirect addressing■ Basic Instructions
CommandIndirect
Addressing

Comments

LOD, LODN

X

Not possible when specifying a bit in a data register.

OUT, OUTN

X

Not possible when specifying a bit in a data register.

SET, RSTX

Not possible when specifying a bit in a data register.

AND, ANDNX

Not possible when specifying a bit in a data register.

OR, ORNX

Not possible when specifying a bit in a data register.

AND LOD—OR LOD—

BPS, BRD, BPP

—

8-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
CommandIndirect
Addressing

TML, TIM, TMH, TIMS,TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TIMSO—

Indirect addressing is not supported because unique numbers are allocated.

CNT, CDP, CUD,
CNTD, CDPD, CUDD—

Indirect addressing is not supported because unique numbers are allocated.

CC=, CC>=, DC=, DC>=—

SFR, SFRN—SOTU, SOTD—

MCS, MCR—

JMP, JEND

—

END

—

Comments■ Advanced Instructions
Instruction
NOP

Indirect
Addressing

Comments—

MOV, MOVNX

IMOV, IMOVN

—

MOVC

X

BMOV

X

IBMV, IBMVN

—

NSET

X

NRS

X

XCHG

X

TCCST

X

CMP=, CMP<>, CMP<,
CMP>, CMP<=, CMP>=X

ICMP>=

X

LC=, LC<>, LC<,
LC>, LC<=, LC>=

X

ADD

X

SUB

X

MUL

X

DIV

X

INC

X

DEC

X

ROOT

X

SUM

X

RNDM

X

ANDW

X

ORW

X

XORW

X

SFTL, SFTR

X

BCDLS

X

WSFT

X

ROTL, ROTR

X

HTOB

X

BTOH

X

HTOA

X

ATOH

X

BTOA

X

ATOB

X

ENCO

—

DECO

—

BCNT

X

ALT

X

CVDT

X

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-15

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Instruction

Indirect
Addressing

DTDV

X

DTCB

X

SWAP

X

WKTIM

—

WKTBL

—

WEEK

—

YEAR

—

MSG

—

DISP

—

DGRD

—

LABEL

—

LJMP

—

LCAL

—

LRET

—

DJNZ

—

IOREF

—

HSCRF

—

FRQRF

—

COMRF

—

DI

—

EI

—

XYFS

—

CVXTY

—

CVYTX

—

AVRG

—

PULS

—

PWM

—

RAMP

—

RAMPL

—

ZRN

—

ARAMP

—

ABS

—

JOG

—

PID

—

PIDA

—

PIDD

—

DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS

—

TTIM

—

RAD

X

DEG

X

SIN

X

COS

X

TAN

X

ASIN

X

ACOS

X

ATAN

X

LOGE

X

LOG10

X

EXP

X

POW

X

FIFOF

—

FIEX

—

FOEX

—

NDSRC

—

TADD

—

8-16

Comments

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE
Instruction

Indirect
Addressing

TSUB

—

HOUR

—

HTOS

—

STOH

—

DLOG

—

TRACE

—

SCRPT

—

SCALE

—

FLWA

—

FLWP

—

UMACRO—

TXD, RXD, ETXD, ERXD

—

PING

—

EMAIL

—

Comments

Index registers cannot be used in scripts.

Indirect addressing is possible in the instructions programmed in user-defined macros.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

8-17

8: I N STR UCTI ON S R EFER EN CE

8-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUA

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
This chapter describes the configuration of the analog I/O modules, as well as their parameters, device allocations, and WindLDR
configuration methods.

Analog I/O Module Overview
This section provides an overview of the analog I/O modules and describes their types and the maximum number of modules thatcan be connected to the CPU module.
Analog I/O modules are available that allow the FC6A to directly handle analog data such as voltage, current, and temperature.
There are ten types of analog I/O modules that differ by the number of analog inputs and outputs and the operation mode. These
analog I/O modules can be used by connecting them to the right side of the CPU module. Analog I/O module inputs support
voltage, current, thermocouples, resistance thermometers, and thermistors. Analog I/O module outputs support voltage andcurrent.
To use an analog I/O module, it must be configured in the Module Configuration Editor. For detailed configuration methods, see"Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1. For details on the analog I/O module parameter settings, see "Analog I/O Module
Parameter Settings" on page 9-4.

Analog I/O Module List
This section shows a list of the analog I/O modules.
ModuleType

Analog input
moduleType No.

Points

Input Type

Inputs Outputs

Voltage

Current

Output Type

ResistanceResistance
Thermocouple
Thermistor
Thermometermeasurement

Voltage

Current

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

2―

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA

―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

4―

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA

―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

8―

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA

―

―

―

―

―

―

Pt100/
0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/ K/ J/ R/ S/ B/ Pt1000/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA E/ T/ N/ C
Ni100/
Ni1000/

―

―

―

―

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

4―

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

4

―

―

―

K/ J/ R/ S/ B/
E/ T/ N/ C

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

8

―

―

―

K/ J/ R/ S/ B/
E/ T/ N/ C―

NTC/PTC

100 to10,000 Ω

―

―

―

2

―

―

―

―

―

―

0 to 10V/
0 to 20mA/-10 to +10V 4 to 20mA

―

4

―

―

―

―

―

―

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA

4

―

―

―

―

―

―

2

―

―

―

―

Pt100/
0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/ K/ J/ R/ S/ B/ Pt1000/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA E/ T/ N/ C
Ni100/
Ni1000/

―

―

―

―

FC6A-K2A1
Analog output FC6A-K2A4
moduleFC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4
FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4
Mixed analog
I/O module
FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

2

―

―

1

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA
―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL――

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA――

0 to 10 V/
0 to 20 mA/-10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA

9-1

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Quantity of Applicable Analog I/O Modules
The maximum number of analog I/O modules that can be connected to the CPU module depends on the CPU module.
Type No.

CPU Module

Quantity of Applicable
Analog I/O Modules

FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16R4CE
FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C16P4CE

4 modules + 8 modules*1

FC6A-C16R1DE, FC6A-C16R4DE
FC6A-C16K1DE, FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C16P1DE, FC6A-C16P4DE
FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R4AE
All-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24R4CE
FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24K4CE
FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C24P4CE
FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40R4CE

All-in-One CPU module

FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40P4CE
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40K4DE

7 modules + 8 modules*1

FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40P4DE
FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R4AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40R4CEJCAN J1939 All-in-One CPU
moduleFC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40K4CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40R4DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ, FC6A-C40P4DEJ
FC6A-D16R1CEE
FC6A-D16R4CEE
FC6A-D16K1CEE
FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE

Plus CPU module

FC6A-D16P4CEE

63 modules*2

FC6A-D32K3CEE
FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE
FC6A-D32P4CEE*1 When the expansion interface module (expander) is used, eight analog I/O modules can be connected to the right side of the expansion
interface module (expander). The number of modules that can be connected does not include the expansion interface module (expander).
*2 A maximum of 63 analog I/O modules can be connected using expansion interface modules (expander and remote master/slave). The numberof modules that can be connected does not include the expansion interface module.

Checking the Hardware Version Number

The analog I/O module hardware version number is printed on the side of the analog I/O module. The performance andfunctionality of the analog I/O module will differ by its version, so check the version number before use.
S/N:XXXXX-XXXXX

V100

Version Number

9-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Precautions When Using the Product

Do not use an analog I/O module with hardware version number V200 in combination with the system software for analog I/O
modules version 1.01 or lower. The operation mode of the analog I/O module will be indefinite and analog input values cannot be
acquired correctly.
System software version 1.02 is written to V200 analog I/O modules when they are shipped from the factory. Do not download
system software version 1.00 or 1.01 to these analog I/O modules.
If system software version 1.01 or lower is written to a V200 analog I/O module, download the system software for analog I/O
modules version 1.02 included with WindLDR Ver. 8.6.1 or higher to the analog I/O module again.
System Software Version
Hardware Version Number

Version 1.01 or Lower

Version 1.02 or Higher

Lower than V200

Yes

Yes

V200 or Higher

No

Yes

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-3

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Analog I/O Module Parameter Settings
This section describes the analog I/O module parameter settings.
The parameter settings are configured for each channel. The parameters to configure differ according to the analog I/O module
type and I/O type. In Expansion Modules Configuration, configure the parameter settings according the application.
For detailed configuration methods, see "Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1.

Analog Input TypeThe following parameters are for configuring the analog inputs on the analog input modules and the mixed analog I/O modules.
Yes: Parameters, ―: No parameters
No.

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4(1) Signal Type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(2) Data Type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Minimum and(3) maximum values(Data type)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(4) Filter

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(5) Sample Time

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(6) Thermistor Settings

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

(7) Data

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(8) Status

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(4)

9-4

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4Parameter

(5)

(1)

(2)

(6)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

(3)

(7)

(8)

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(1) Signal TypeThe signal type that can be set differs according to the analog I/O module model. Select the analog I/O module that
corresponds to the user application and set the signal type. The signal type is the type of analog input to measure. There are 24
signal types for the analog inputs, which are detailed as follows.
Yes: Supported, ―: Not supported
Signal Type

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y

FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

Unused*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0 to 10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

Yes

Yes

-10 to +10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

Yes

Yes

0 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

Yes

Yes

4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

―

Yes

Yes

Type K thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type J thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type R thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type S thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type B thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type E thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type T thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type N thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Type C thermocouple

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Pt100

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

Yes

Pt1000

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

Yes

Ni100

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

Yes
Yes

Ni1000

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

NTC thermistor

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

PTC thermistor

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

PTC thermistor(threshold)*2

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

Resistance measurement

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

Expansion 0 to 20 mA

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

―

―

Expansion 4 to 20 mA

―

―

Yes

―

―

―

―

―

*1 Channels that are set to unused are not scanned.
The circuit is setup the same as when signal type: 0 to 10 V is selected.
0 is always stored in the analog data storage data registers for channels that are set to unused.
*2 For details on PTC thermistor (threshold), see "PTC Thermistor (Threshold)" on page 9-11.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-5

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(2) Data TypeThe analog input value can be handled as the set data type. There are seven data types for the analog inputs.
Yes: Supported, ―: Not supported
Data Type

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

Binary data*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Optional range*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Celsius*2

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Fahrenheit*2

―

―

―

Yes

Yes

Yes

―

Yes

Resistance*3

―

―

―

―

―

Yes

―

―

*4

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Binary data
(16 bits)

―

―

Yes

Optional range(16 bits)

―

―

Yes*4

*1
*2
*3
*4

FC6A-J4CN1 FC6A-J4CH1Y FC6A-J8CU1 FC6A-L06A1 FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-J4CN4 FC6A-J4CH4Y FC6A-J8CU4 FC6A-L06A4 FC6A-L03CN4

For only the FC6A-J8A1 and FC6A-J8A4, binary data (12 bits) and optional range (12 bits) are displayed.
Can only be set when the signal type is thermocouple, resistance thermometer or NTC thermistor.
Resistance when using the FC6A-J8CU1/FC6A-J8CU4 and the signal type is set to PTC thermistor or Resistance measurement.
Binary data (16 bits) and optional range (16 bits) can be used with the following versions.
FC6A-J8A1, FC6A-J8A4: Version 200 or later
WindLDR: Version 8.6.0 or later
If an FC6A-J8A1 or FC6A-J8A4 that does not correspond to the above version numbers is set to binary data (16 bits) or optional range (16bits), an error will occur and the module will operate as binary data (12 bits).

(3) Minimum and maximum values
Set the minimum and maximum values for linear conversion of the input analog value.The minimum and maximum values are
determined by the set signal type (1) and data type (2).
The minimum and maximum values that correspond to the signal type and data types are as follows.
Data Type
Signal Type

Binary Data
(12 Bits)*1

Optional
Range(12 Bits)*1*2

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Resistance

Binary Data
(16 Bits)

Optional
Range(16 Bits)

0 to 10 V

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

0 to 65,535-10 to +10 V-32,768 to 32,767 -32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

-32,768 to 32,767 -32,768 to 32,767

0 to 20 mA

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

4 to 20 mA

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

Type K thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 13,000 -3,280 to 23,720

―

―

―

Type J thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 10,000 -3,280 to 18,320

―

―

―

Type R thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 0 to 17,600

320 to 32,000

―

―

―

Type S thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 0 to 17,600

320 to 32,000

―

―

―

Type B thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 0 to 18,200

320 to 33,080

―

―

―

Type E thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 8,000-3,280 to 14,720

―

―

―

Type T thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 4,000-3,280 to 7,520

―

―

―

Type N thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 13,000 -3,280 to 23,720

―

―

―

Type C thermocouple

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 0 to 23,150

320 to 41,990

―

―

―

Pt100

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 8,500-3,280 to 15,620

―

―

―

Pt10000 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -2,000 to 6,000-3,280 to 11,120

―

―

―

Ni100

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -600 to 1,800-760 to 3,560

―

―

―

Ni10000 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -600 to 1,800-760 to 3,560

―

―

―

NTC thermistor

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767 -900 to 1,500-1,300 to 3,020

―

―

―

PTC thermistor

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767――

100 to 10,000――

PTC thermistor (threshold)*3

100 to 10,000

100 to 10,000

―

―

―

―

―

Resistance measurement

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767――

100 to 32,000―

Expansion 0 to 20 mA

0 to 4,095-32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767

Expansion 4 to 20 mA

0 to 4,095-32,768 to 32,767

―

―

―

0 to 65,535-32,768 to 32,767-32,768 to 32,767―*1 For only the FC6A-J8A1 and FC6A-J8A4, binary data (12 bits) and optional range (12 bits).
*2 The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range. Set the minimum and maximum values
between -32,768 and 32,767. However, when the signal type is set to PTC thermistor (threshold), set the minimum and maximum values
between 100 and 10,000. For the arbitrary setting, see *4 in "Analog Input Module" on page 2-108.
*3 For details on PTC thermistor (threshold), see "PTC Thermistor (Threshold)" on page 9-11.

9-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(4) Filter
The analog input is filtered so it reaches approximately 99% of the analog input in the set time. Rapid fluctuations in the analog
input can be reduced by setting the filter, but increasing the filter slows down the tracking of fluctuations in the analog input.
The filter must be set for each channel.
Input filter example

Filter: 100 ms
100
Reaches approximately 99% of the analog
input in the set filter (100 ms).

Analog input data after filtering (%)

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

Elapsed time (ms)Filter (ms)Description0

The value is not filtered.

50 to 50,000

The analog input filter can be set in 50 ms increments.
The analog input is filtered so that approximately 99% of the analog input is reached in the specified filter.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-7

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(5) Sampling Time
Analog values are converted to digital values at the interval of the sampling time. Depending on the analog I/O module, you may
be able to change the sampling time setting.
Type
FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

FC6A-J4CN1
FC6A-J4CN4

FC6A-J4CH1Y
FC6A-J4CH4Y
FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J8CU4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

Signal Type

Sample Time

0 to 10 V

1 ms-10 to +10 V

1 ms

0 to 20 mA

1 ms

4 to 20 mA

1 ms

0 to 10 V

1 ms/10 ms-10 to +10 V

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

4 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 10 V

1 ms/10 ms-10 to +10 V

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

4 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

Expansion 0 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

Expansion 4 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 10 V

100 ms/10 ms-10 to +10 V

100 ms/10 ms

0 to 20 mA

100 ms/10 ms

4 to 20 mA

100 ms/10 ms

Thermocouple

104 msResistance thermometer

104 msThermocouple

120 ms/30 ms*1

Thermocouple

104 ms

NTC/PTC thermistor

104 ms

PTC thermistor (threshold)104 msResistance measurement

104 ms0 to 10 V

1 ms/10 ms-10 to +10 V

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

4 to 20 mA

1 ms/10 ms

0 to 10 V

100 ms/10 ms-10 to +10 V

100 ms/10 ms

0 to 20 mA

100 ms/10 ms

4 to 20 mA

100 ms/10 ms

Thermocouple

104 msResistance thermometer

104 ms*1 When the sampling time is set to 30 ms, the modules may be more easily affected by commercial power supply noise (50/60 Hz noise)and fluctuations in input values may become larger. If there are large fluctuations in input values, change the sampling time to 120 ms.

(6) Thermistor settings
When NTC thermistor is selected for the FC6A-J8CU1/FC6A-J8CU4 signal type, the following parameters must be set.
Parameter

Description

Range

R0

The thermistor resistance in "T0"°C (Ω)*1

0 to 65,535

T0

Temperature (°C)*1-32,768 to 32,767

B

Thermistor B constant*1-32,768 to 32,767*1 Information are described in the instruction sheet for the thermistor to use.

The characteristic of NTC thermistor is that the resistance decreases as the temperature rises. The analog modules measure theresistance of the thermistor and calculate the temperature based on above three parameters.
The measurable range of the resistance of NTC thermistor is 100 Ω to 200,000 Ω. The range of temperature that can be calculated
is -90°C to 150°C. Select NTC thermistor that functions within those ranges.
9-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(7) Data
Data is the value (digital value) obtained by linearly converting the input analog value with the minimum value and maximum
value (3) at each sampling time (5).
The data is written to data registers in the END processing of each scan. The analog input data is updated regardless of whether
the FC6A is stopped or running. The data is not guaranteed when the status (8) is a value other than "0".
For details on when PTC thermistor (threshold) is selected for the signal type, see "PTC Thermistor (Threshold)" on page 911.When Celsius or Fahrenheit is set in the data type (2), the analog input value is linearly converted within the range shown in
the table below.
Signal TypeType K thermocouple

Celsius
Temperature (0.1°C)-200.0 to 1,300.0

Analog Input Value-2,000 to 13,000

Fahrenheit
Temperature (0.1°F)-328.0 to 2,3720.0

Analog input value-3,280 to 23,720

Type J thermocouple-200.0 to 1,000.0-2,000 to 10,000-328.0 to 1,832.0-3,280 to 18,320

Type R thermocouple

0.0 to 1,760.0

0 to 17,600

32.0 to 3,200.0

320 to 32,000Type S thermocouple

0.0 to 1,760.0

0 to 17,600

32.0 to 3,200.0

320 to 32,000Type B thermocouple

0.0 to 1,820.0

0 to 18,200

32.0 to 3,308.0

320 to 33,080

Type E thermocouple-200.0 to 800.0-2,000 to 8,000-328.0 to 1,472.0-3,280 to 14,720

Type T thermocouple-200.0 to 400.0-2,000 to 4,000-328.0 to 752.0-3,280 to 7,520

Type N thermocouple-200.0 to 1,300.0-2,000 to 13,000-328.0 to 2,372.0-3,280 to 23,720

Type C thermocouple

0.0 to 2,315.0

0 to 23,150

32.0 to 4,199.0

320 to 41,990

Pt100-200.0 to 850.0-2,000 to 8,500-328.0 to 1,562.0-3,280 to 15,620

Pt1000-200.0 to 600.0-2,000 to 6,000-328.0 to 1,112.0-3,280 to 11,120

Ni100-60.0 to 180.0-600 to 1,800-76.0 to 356.0-760 to 3,560

Ni1000-60.0 to 180.0-600 to 1,800-76.0 to 356.0-760 to 3,560

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-9

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(8) Status
The status of the analog input data (7) is stored in data registers.
StatusDescription

0

Operating normally

1

Converting data

2

Initializing

3

Parameter setting error

4

Hardware fault (external power supply error)

5

Wiring fault (out of maximum range)*1

6

Wiring fault (out of minimum range)*1

7

Reserved

8

When the analog input value is greater than 20 mA and less than the upper limit value*2

9

When the analog input value is greater than the lower limit value and less than 4 mA*3

10 to 65,535

Reserved*1 When the analog input value is the upper limit value in the below table or higher, the out of maximum range error occurs. When the analog
input value is the lower limit value in the below table or lower, the out of minimum range error occurs.
Signal Type
0 to 10 V

*2
*3
*4
*5

9-10

Lower Limit Value-0.2 V

Upper Limit Value
10.2 V-10 to +10 V-10.4 V

10.4 V

0 to 20 mA-0.4 mA

20.4 mA

4 to 20 mA

3.68 mA

20.32 mA

Type K thermocouple-200.0°C

1,300.0°C

Type J thermocouple-200.0°C

1,000.0°C

Type R thermocouple

0.0°C

1,760.0°C

Type S thermocouple

0.0°C

1,760.0°C

Type B thermocouple

0.0°C

1,820.0°C

Type E thermocouple-200.0°C

800.0°C

Type T thermocouple-200.0°C

400.0°C

Type N thermocouple-200.0°C

1,300.0°C

Type C thermocouple

0.0°C

2,315.0°C

Pt100-200.0°C

850.0°C

Pt1000-200.0°C

600.0°C

Ni100-60.0°C

180.0°C

Ni1000-60.0°C

180.0°C

NTC thermistor-90.0°C or 200 kΩ*4150.0°C or 100 Ω*5

PTC thermistor

100 Ω

10 kΩ

PTC thermistor (threshold)

100 Ω

10 kΩ

Resistance measurement

100 Ω

32 kΩ

Expansion 0 to 20 mA-0.4 mA

23.54 mA

Expansion 4 to 20 mA

1.20 mA

23.17 mA

Expansion 0 to 20 mA or expansion 4 to 20 mA only
Expansion 4 to 20 mA only
Out of minimum range error occurs when a resistance of 200 kΩ or higher is connected.
Out of maximum range error occurs when a resistance of 100 Ω or lower is connected.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULESPTC Thermistor (Threshold)This section describes details on PTC thermistor (threshold).
The value is stored in the data (7) according to the resistance of the PTC thermistor and the minimum and maximum values (3).
The relationship between the resistance of the PTC thermistor, the minimum and maximum values (3), and the data (7) is as follows.
PTC thermistor resistance (Ω)
10,0004
Maximum value (3)Value stored in the data (7)2Minimum value (3)

1
Time

100

Value stored in the data (7): 1
Value stored in the data (7): 2
Value stored in the data (7): 4

Minimum value (3) > PTC thermistor resistance
Minimum value (3) ≤ PTC thermistor resistance ≤ Maximum value (3)Maximum value (3) < PTC thermistor resistanceFor the operation when the resistance of the PTC thermistor matches the minimum or maximum value, see "Hysteresis" below.

Hysteresis

The system has a hysteresis of ±20 Ω for the minimum and maximum values that are set (3). For example, if the minimum value
is set to 1,500 and the maximum value is set to 7,000, the operation is shown as follows.
Value stored in the data (7)
1,480

1,520

6,980
C

4

2

7,020

D
B

1
A
1,500

A:
B:
C:
D:

7,000

PTC thermistor resistance (Ω)

The value of the data (7) changes from 1 to 2 when the resistance of the PTC thermistor is greater than or equal to 1,520 Ω
The value of the data (7) changes from 2 to 4 when the resistance of the PTC thermistor exceeds 7,020 Ω
The value of the data (7) changes from 4 to 2 when the resistance of the PTC thermistor is less than or equal to 6,980 Ω
The value of the data (7) changes from 2 to 1 when the resistance of the PTC thermistor is less than 1,480 Ω

Note: When setting the minimum and maximum values (3), ensure that the difference between the two values is 41 or greater. If the difference
between the minimum and maximum values (3) is less than or equal to 40, status 3 (parameter setting error) is stored in the status (8).

Behavior of the Status

If the resistance of the PTC thermistor is out of range, the following values are stored in status (8).
If the resistance of the PTC thermistor is less than 100 Ω, status 6 (wiring fault (out of minimum range)) is stored in status (8).
If the resistance of the PTC thermistor is greater than 10,000 Ω, status 5 (wiring fault (out of maximum range)) is stored in status (8).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-11

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Analog Output TypeThe following parameters are for configuring the analog outputs on the analog output modules and the mixed analog I/O modules.
Yes: Parameters, ―: No parameters
No.

Parameter

FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4(1)

Signal Type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(2)

Data Type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(3)

Minimum and maximum values(Data type)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(4)

Data

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(5)

Status

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Signal TypeThe signal type that can be set differs according to the analog I/O module model. Select the analog I/O module that
corresponds to the user application and set the signal type. There are five types of signal types for the analog outputs, which aredetailed as follows.
Yes: Supported, -: Not supported
Signal Type

FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

Unused*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0 to 10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-10 to +10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1 Channels that are set to unused are not scanned.
The circuit is setup the same as when signal type: 0 to 10 V is selected.
A channel set to unused always outputs 0 V.

Caution

9-12

The device connected to the analog I/O module may be damaged if the analog output signal type is mistakenly set andused. Please use caution when setting the analog output signal type.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES(2) Data TypeThe analog output value can be handled as the set data type. There are two data types for the analog outputs.
Yes: Supported, ―: Not supported
FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

Data Type

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4

Binary data

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Optional range

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(3) Minimum and maximum values
The value written to the data register is output from the analog output. The minimum and maximum values that can be written
are determined by the set signal type and data type. A parameter setting error occurs when a value is set that exceeds theminimum or maximum value.
The minimum and maximum values that correspond to the signal types and data types are as follows.
Data Type

Signal Type

Optional Range*1

Binary Data

0 to 10 V

0 to 4,095-32,768 to 32,767-10 to +10 V-2,048 to 2,047-32,768 to 32,767

0 to 20 mA

0 to 4,095-32,768 to 32,767

4 to 20 mA

0 to 4,095-32,768 to 32,767*1 The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range. Set the minimum and maximum values
between -32,768 and 32,767.

(4) Data
The analog output data for the analog output set with signal type (1) to minimum and maximum values (3) is stored in the dataregisters in the END progressing of each scan. The actual analog output data is not guaranteed when the analog output status(5) is a value other than "0". When M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Stopped) is on while stopped, the analog output value
immediately before stopping is output. When M8025 is off, the minimum value of the analog output is output. However, 0 V isoutput when the signal type is -10 V to +10 V.
(5) Status
The status of the analog output data (4) is stored in data registers.
StatusDescription

0

Operating normally

1

Reserved

2

Initializing

3

Parameter setting error

4

Hardware fault (external power supply error)

5 to 65,535

Reserved

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-13

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Control Registers
Data registers are set as the devices to store the parameters for the analog I/O module.

Multiple words are used starting from the set data register. The number of words of data registers that are used differs according
to the analog I/O module model and the "Use data register for setting parameters" setting.
Used Data Registers (words)"Use Data Register
for Setting
FC6A-J2C1 FC6A-J4A1 FC6A-J8A1 FC6A-J4CN1 FC6A-J4CH1Y FC6A-J8CU1 FC6A-K2A1 FC6A-K4A1 FC6A-L06A1 FC6A-L03CN1
Parameters"
FC6A-J2C4 FC6A-J4A4 FC6A-J8A4 FC6A-J4CN4 FC6A-J4CH4Y FC6A-J8CU4 FC6A-K2A4 FC6A-K4A4 FC6A-L06A4 FC6A-L03CN4
Disabled

4

8

16

8

8

16

4

8

12

6

Enabled

14

28

56

28

28

80

12

24

40

20

When "Use data register for setting parameters" is disabled
Only the data and status are stored in control registers.
Note: At the first scan when stop changes to run, the analog I/O module is set with the parameters (initial values) configured in WindLDR. While
the parameters are being set, the analog I/O module status is initializing. After the parameters are finished being set, the analog I/O module
operates normally.

When "Use data register for setting parameters" is enabled
In addition to the data and status, the operation mode, data type, minimum value, and maximum value are stored in control
registers. For analog inputs, the filter value and thermistor settings are also stored.
Notes:
 When the CPU module is switched from stop to run, the analog I/O module is set with the values of the operation setting data registers.
 The parameters (initial values) configured in WindLDR are transferred to the operation setting data registers when the user program is

updated or when a keep data sum check error occurs.
 When the "Write operation setting parameters" input changes from off to on, the analog I/O module is set with the content of the operation

setting data registers in the END processing of the same scan.
 While the parameters are being set, the analog I/O module status is initializing. After the parameters are finished being set, the analog I/O

module operates normally.

9-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Control Relays
When "Use data register for setting parameters" is enabled, internal relays can be set as control relays.

3 bits are used starting from the internal relay that was set, and each bit has the following function.
Position fromStarting Bit

Description

R/W

+0

Read parameters (analog I/O module  operation setting data registers)

R/W

+1

Read initial parameter values (WindLDR settings  operation setting data registers)

R/W

+2

Write operation setting parameters (operation setting data registers  analog I/O module)

R/W

Notes:
 Starting internal relay address +0: Read parameters
When changed from off to on, the analog I/O module setting values are read into the operation setting data registers.
 Starting internal relay address +1: Read initial parameter values

When changed from off to on, the initial values (the parameters that were saved when the user program download was executed) areread into the operation setting data registers.
 Starting internal relay address +2: Write operation setting parameters

When changed from off to on, the data stored in the data registers is written to the analog I/O module as the parameters.
 After a control relay is changed from off to on, it automatically turns off.
 If all of the control relays are changed from off to on in the same scan, they are executed in +0, +1, +2 order, and the analog I/O module is

set with the initial values.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-15

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Device Allocation
This section describes the allocation of analog I/O module devices.

Analog Input Module
The detailed device allocation for analog input modules is as follows.
For the parameter setting values, see "Analog Input Parameter Setting Values" on page 9-18.
Channel
I/O

No.
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7

R/W

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

Analog input data

R

+0

+0

+0

+0

+0

+0

Analog input status

R

+1

+1

+1

+1

+1

+1

Analog input data

R

+2

+2

+2

+2

+2

+2

Analog input status

R

+3

+3

+3

+3

+3

+3

Analog input data

R

―

+4

+4

+4

+4

+4

Analog input status

R

―

+5

+5

+5

+5

+5

Analog input data

R

―

+6

+6

+6

+6

+6

Analog input status

R

―

+7

+7

+7

+7

+7

Analog input data

R

―

―

+8

―

―

+8

Analog input status

R

―

―

+9

―

―

+9

Analog input data

R

―

―

+10

―

―

+10

Analog input status

R

―

―

+11

―

―

+11

Analog input data

R

―

―

+12

―

―

+12

Analog input status

R

―

―

+13

―

―

+13

Analog input data

R

―

―

+14

―

―

+14

Analog input status

R

―

―

+15

―

―

+15

Parameter

FC6A-J4CN1 FC6A-J4CH1Y FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J4CN4 FC6A-J4CH4Y FC6A-J8CU4When use data register for setting parameters, the following data registers are used.

Input

CH0

CH1

CH2

9-16

Signal type

R/W

+4

+8

+16

+8

+8

+16

Data type

R/W

+5

+9

+17

+9

+9

+17

Minimum value

R/W

+6

+10

+18

+10

+10

+18

Maximum value

R/W

+7

+11

+19

+11

+11

+19

Filter value

R/W

+8

+12

+20

+12

+12

+20

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+21

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+22

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+23

Signal type

R/W

+9

+13

+21

+13

+13

+24

Data type

R/W

+10

+14

+22

+14

+14

+25

Minimum value

R/W

+11

+15

+23

+15

+15

+26

Maximum value

R/W

+12

+16

+24

+16

+16

+27

Filter value

R/W

+13

+17

+25

+17

+17

+28

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+29

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+30

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+31

Signal type

R/W

―

+18

+26

+18

+18

+32

Data type

R/W

―

+19

+27

+19

+19

+33

Minimum value

R/W

―

+20

+28

+20

+20

+34

Maximum value

R/W

―

+21

+29

+21

+21

+35

Filter value

R/W

―

+22

+30

+22

+22

+36

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+37

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+38

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+39

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Channel
I/O

No.

CH3

CH4

Input

CH5

CH6

CH7

R/W

FC6A-J2C1
FC6A-J2C4

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4

FC6A-J8A1
FC6A-J8A4

Signal type

R/W

―

+23

+31

+23

+23

+40

Data type

R/W

―

+24

+32

+24

+24

+41

Minimum value

R/W

―

+25

+33

+25

+25

+42

Maximum value

R/W

―

+26

+34

+26

+26

+43

Filter value

R/W

―

+27

+35

+27

+27

+44

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+45

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+46

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+47

Signal type

R/W

―

―

+36

―

―

+48

Data type

R/W

―

―

+37

―

―

+49

Minimum value

R/W

―

―

+38

―

―

+50

Maximum value

R/W

―

―

+39

―

―

+51

Filter Value

R/W

―

―

+40

―

―

+52

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+53

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+54

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+55

Signal type

R/W

―

―

+41

―

―

+56

Data type

R/W

―

―

+42

―

―

+57

Minimum value

R/W

―

―

+43

―

―

+58

Maximum value

R/W

―

―

+44

―

―

+59

Filter value

R/W

―

―

+45

―

―

+60

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+61

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+62

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+63

Signal type

R/W

―

―

+46

―

―

+64

Data type

R/W

―

―

+47

―

―

+65

Minimum value

R/W

―

―

+48

―

―

+66

Maximum value

R/W

―

―

+49

―

―

+67

Filter Value

R/W

―

―

+50

―

―

+68

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+69

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+70

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+71

Signal type

R/W

―

―

+51

―

―

+72

Data type

R/W

―

―

+52

―

―

+73

Minimum value

R/W

―

―

+53

―

―

+74

Maximum value

R/W

―

―

+54

―

―

+75

Filter value

R/W

―

―

+55

―

―

+76

Thermistor constant (R0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+77

Thermistor constant (T0)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+78

Thermistor constant (B)

R/W

―

―

―

―

―

+79

Parameter

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A-J4CN1 FC6A-J4CH1Y FC6A-J8CU1
FC6A-J4CN4 FC6A-J4CH4Y FC6A-J8CU4

9-17

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Analog Input Parameter Setting Values
The parameter setting values are as follows.
Signal type
Setting Value

Signal Type0

Unused1

0 to 10 V

2-10 to +10 V

3

0 to 20 mA

4

4 to 20 mA

5Type K thermocouple

6Type J thermocouple

7Type R thermocouple

8Type S thermocouple

9Type B thermocouple

10Type E thermocouple

11Type T thermocouple

12Type N thermocouple

13Type C thermocouple

14

Pt100

15

Pt1000

16

Ni100

17

Ni100018

NTC thermistor

19

PTC thermistor

20

PTC thermistor (threshold)

21

Resistance measurement

22

Expansion 0 to 20 mA

23

Expansion 4 to 20 mA

If the setting value is outside the range, a parameter setting error will occur.
Data type
Setting Value

Data type0

Binary data/Binary data (12 bits)

1

Optional range/Optional range (12 bits)2

Celsius/resistance/Binary data (16 bits)

3

Fahrenheit/Optional range (16 bits)

If the setting value is 4 to 65,535, a parameter setting error will occur.
Minimum and maximum values
The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range. Set the minimum and maximum
values between -32,768 and 32,767. However, when the signal type is set to PTC thermistor (threshold), set the minimum andmaximum values between 100 and 10,000.

9-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
FilterSetting Value

Filter

0

0 ms

50

50 ms

100

100 ms150

150 ms…

…

50,00050,000 ms

The setting value is rounded by 50.
When 50,001 to 65,535 is stored for the setting value, the filter operates as the maximum value of 50,000 ms.
Thermistor constant
Range

Thermistor Constant

0 to 65,535

R0-32,768 to 32,767

T0-32,768 to 32,767

B

Analog Output Module
The detailed device allocation for analog output modules is as follows.
For the parameter setting values, see "Analog Output Parameter Setting Values" on page 9-20.
Channel
I/O

No.
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3

Parameter

R/W

FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4

FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4

Analog output data

R

+0

+0

Analog output status

R

+1

+1

Analog output data

R

+2

+2

Analog output status

R

+3

+3

Analog output data

R

―

+4

Analog output status

R

―

+5

Analog output data

R

―

+6

Analog output status

R

―

+7

+8

When use the operation setting data registers,
the following data registers are used.

CH0
Output

CH1

CH2

CH3

Signal type

R/W

+4

Data type

R/W

+5

+9

Minimum value

R/W

+6

+10

Maximum value

R/W

+7

+11

Signal type

R/W

+8

+12

Data type

R/W

+9

+13

Minimum value

R/W

+10

+14

Maximum value

R/W

+11

+15

Signal type

R/W

―

+16

Data type

R/W

―

+17

Minimum value

R/W

―

+18

Maximum value

R/W

―

+19

Signal type

R/W

―

+20

Data type

R/W

―

+21

Minimum value

R/W

―

+22

Maximum value

R/W

―

+23

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-19

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Analog Output Parameter Setting Values
The parameter setting values are as follows.
Signal type
Setting Value

Signal Type0

Unused1

0 to 10 V

2-10 to +10 V

3

0 to 20 mA

4

4 to 20 mA

If the setting value is outside the range, a parameter setting error will occur.
Data type
Setting Value

Data type0

Binary data

1

Optional range

If the setting value is 2 to 65,535, a parameter setting error will occur.
Minimum and maximum values
The minimum and maximum values can be set only when the data type is set to optional range. Set the minimum and maximum
values between -32,768 and 32,767.

9-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
Mixed Analog I/O Module
The detailed device allocation for mixed analog I/O modules is as follows. For the parameter setting values for analog inputs, see"Analog Input Parameter Setting Values" on page 9-18. For analog outputs, see "Analog Output Parameter Setting Values" on page
9-20.
Channel
No.
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5

Parameter

R/W

FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4
I/O

FC6A-L03CN1
FC6A-L03CN4
I/O

Analog data

R

+0

+0

Analog status

R

+1

+1

Analog dataR

+2

Analog status

R+3

Analog dataR

Analog status

R

Input

+4
+5

Input

+2
+3

Output+4+5

Analog data

R

+6

―

―

Analog status

R

+7

―

―

Analog data

R

+8

―

―

Analog status

R

+9

―

―

Analog dataR

Analog status

R

Output

+10

―

―

+11

―

―

When use the operation setting data registers, the following data registers are used.

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

Signal type

R/W

+12

+6

Data type

R/W

+13

+7

Minimum value

R/W

+14

+8

Maximum value

R/W

+15

+9

Filter value

R/W

+16

+10

Signal type

R/W

+17

Data type

R/W

+18

+12

Minimum value

R/W

+19

+13

Maximum value

R/W

+20

+14

Filter value

R/W

+21

+15

Signal type

R/W

+22

+16

Data type

R/W

+23

Minimum value

R/W

+24

Maximum value

R/W

+25

Filter value

R/W

+26

Signal type

R/W

+27

―

―

Data type

R/W

+28

―

―

Input

Input

+11

+17
Output+18+19―

Minimum value

R/W

+29

―

―

Maximum value

R/W

+30

―

―

Filter value

R/W

+31

―

―

Signal type

R/W

+32

―

―

Data type

R/W

+33

―

―

Minimum value

R/W

+34

―

―

Maximum value

R/W

+35

―

―

Filter value

R/W

―

―

―

Signal type

R/W

+36

―

―

Data type

R/W

+37

―

―

OutputMinimum value

R/W

+38

―

―

Maximum value

R/W

+39

―

―

Filter value

R/W

―

―

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

9-21

9: A N ALOG I / O M ODULES
FC4A compatibility mode

If FC4A Compatible Mode is enabled, device allocations, such as those for data and statuses, can be set to be compatible with thespecified FC4A analog module.

FC4A Compatible Mode is automatically enabled if the model setting is changed to FC6A in a ladder program that uses an FC4A
analog module.

9-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGESThis chapter provides an overview of the cartridge slot, as well as an overview of I/O cartridges and their specifications,parameters, and configuration methods.

Digital I/O Cartridge
Digital I/O Cartridge Overview
This section provides an overview of digital I/O cartridges and describes the compatible cartridge slots.
Digital I/O cartridges are used to expand the digital inputs or digital outputs. Digital I/O cartridges are available in two types ofcartridges: digital input cartridges equipped with input terminals and digital output cartridges equipped with output terminals.
To use a digital I/O cartridge, it must be configured in the Module Configuration Editor. For detailed configuration methods, see"Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1. For details on digital I/O cartridge parameters, see "Digital I/O Cartridge Parameters"
on page 10-4.

Cartridge Slots
All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
The All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module are equipped with a maximum of two cartridge slots for connecting
cartridges. These can be used to connect up to two cartridges. Furthermore, the FC6A can be expanded with a maximum of eight
digital inputs or digital outputs by connecting the HMI module to the left side of the All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module and connecting one digital I/O cartridge.

Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

HMI Module

CPU Module

All-in-One CPU module

Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

16-I/O type

Yes

―

Yes*1

24-I/O type

Yes

―

Yes*1

40-I/O type

Yes

Yes

Yes*1

Yes

Yes

Yes*1

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module*1 For the All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module, the maximum I/O refresh time of the digital I/O cartridge connected to
cartridge slot 3 is calculated with the following calculation.
Maximum I/O refresh time = 90 ms + (number of connections being used × 30 ms) + input filter settings + scan time of one scan
For details on the number of connections being used, see "Connection Settings" on page 7-48.
For details on the input filter settings, see "Digital I/O Cartridge Parameters" on page 10-4. The input filter settings item is used only for a digital
input cartridge.

Select the digital I/O cartridges for the connected devices and configure the signal types.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-1

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Notes:
 Always install and remove the digital I/O cartridges in the FC6A when the power is turned off. If a digital I/O cartridge is installed in or
removed from the FC6A when the power is on, the product may be damaged. There is also a risk that the digital I/O cartridge may not
operate correctly.
 The digital I/O cartridge may be damaged when dropped, so take great care not to drop it when removing it.
 Correctly connect the digital I/O cartridges to the cartridge slots.
 For details on how to install and remove the digital I/O cartridges, see "Assembling the CPU Module and a Cartridge" on page 3-6.

Plus CPU module
To use digital I/O cartridges with the Plus CPU module, connect a cartridge base module or the HMI module to the Plus CPU
module. These can be used to connect up to three digital I/O cartridges.
Digital inputs or digital outputs can be increased to a maximum of 12 points by installing digital I/O cartridges in the cartridge
slots.

Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

CPU Module
Plus CPU module

Cartridge Base Module

HMI Module

Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Select the digital I/O cartridges for the connected devices and configure the signal type.
Notes:
 Always install and remove the digital I/O cartridges in the FC6A when the power is turned off. If a digital I/O cartridge is installed in or
removed from the FC6A when the power is on, the product may be damaged. There is also a risk that the digital I/O cartridge may not
operate correctly.
 The digital I/O cartridge may be damaged when dropped, so take great care not to drop it when removing it.
 Correctly connect the digital I/O cartridges to the cartridge slots.
 For details on how to install and remove the digital I/O cartridges, see "Assembling the Cartridge Base Module and a Cartridge" on page 3-8.

10-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Digital Input and Output Assignments
The digital inputs or digital outputs are assigned as follows.
Digital I/O Cartridge
Cartridge Slot 1
Input Device Range

I630 to I633

Output Device Range

Q630 to Q633

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

I634 to I637

I624 to I627*1 (All-in-One CPU
module/CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module)
I640 to I643 (Plus CPU module)

Q634 to Q637

Q624 to Q627*1 (All-in-One CPU
module/CAN J1939 All-in-One
CPU module)
Q640 to Q643 (Plus CPU module)*1 As given below, certain digital I/O cartridges cannot be used in cartridge slot 3 depending on the configuration of expansion modules.
Limitations on Using Digital I/O Cartridges
Configuration of Expansion Modules

Digital I/O Cartridges That Cannot Be Used in Cartridge Slot 3

FC6A-N32B3×15

FC6A-PN4

FC6A-T32K3 and FC6A-T32P3×15

FC6A-PTK4, FC6A-PTS4

Assignment Example

When a digital input cartridge is installed in Cartridge Slot 1 and a digital output cartridge is installed in Cartridge Slot 2 of a 40I/O type CPU module
Digital I/O Cartridge

CPU Modules
40-I/O Type

Cartridge Slot 1

Input Device Range

I0 to I27

I630 to I633—

Output Device Range

Q0 to Q27—

Q634 to Q637

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Cartridge Slot 2

10-3

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Digital I/O Cartridge Parameters
Input filter settings are the only parameters available.
Parameters can be configured for only digital input cartridges.
Input filter settings can be configured for each digital input.

Input Filter

The input filter is used to adjust the filter width according to the width of the input signal in order to decrease the effects of input
contact bounce and noise.
The filter width can be adjusted to a value of 0 ms (no input filter) and 3 to 15 ms (1-ms increments) for each digital input.
For details on the input filter, see "Input Filter" on page 5-41.

Setting Details

Filter Time (ms)Description0

No input filtering

3 to 15

Set the digital input filter time in 1-ms increments.

Setting Procedure

To use digital I/O cartridges, you must configure the digital I/O cartridges that will be used with the Module Configuration Editor in
WindLDR and download the user program to the FC6A.
For basic Module Configuration Editor operations, see "Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1.
This section describes how to insert digital I/O cartridges into the module configuration area and how to configure the input filter.
1. Select the digital I/O cartridge in the expansion modules and cartridges list and drag and drop it to the module configuration area.

10-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
The applicable cartridge is inserted into the module configuration area.

2. Click the inserted digital I/O cartridge in the module configuration area and click Configure.

The configuration dialog box that corresponds to the digital I/O cartridge is displayed.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-5

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
3. Enter the filter settings.

4. Click OK to close the Digital I/O Cartridge Configuration dialog box.

5. Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings in the application.
Download the user program to the FC6A to enable the settings.

10-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Analog I/O Cartridge
Analog I/O Cartridge Overview
This section provides an overview of the analog I/O cartridges and describes the compatible cartridge slots.
Analog I/O cartridges are used to expand the analog inputs or analog outputs. They are available in the analog input type and theanalog output type. The analog input type is called the analog input cartridge, and the analog output type is called the analog
output cartridge. The analog data and analog status of the analog I/O cartridge is stored in special data registers. For details, see"(6) Data" on page 10-13.
To use an analog I/O cartridge, it must be configured in the Module Configuration Editor. For detailed configuration methods, see"Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1. For details on the analog parameter settings, see "Analog Parameter Settings" onpage 10-11.

Cartridge Slots
All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
The All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module are equipped with a maximum of two cartridge slots that are used
to install the analog I/O cartridges. The FC6A can be expanded with a maximum of four analog inputs or analog outputs byinstalling a maximum of two analog I/O cartridges.
Furthermore, the FC6A can be expanded with a maximum of two analog inputs or analog outputs by connecting the HMI module
to the left side of the All-in-One CPU module/CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module and installing an analog I/O cartridge.
For example, when the HMI module is connected to the 40-I/O type, the FC6A can be expanded with a maximum of six analog
inputs or analog outputs by installing a maximum of three analog I/O cartridges.

Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

CPU Module

HMI Module
Cartridge Slot 1

All-in-One CPU
moduleCartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

16-I/O type

Yes

―

Yes

24-I/O type

Yes

―

Yes

40-I/O type

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module

Select the analog I/O cartridges for the connected devices and configure the signal type.

Caution Always install or remove the analog I/O cartridges in the FC6A when the power is turned off. If an analog I/O cartridge

is installed or removed in the FC6A when the power is on, the product may be damaged. There is also a risk that theanalog I/O cartridge may not operate correctly.
 The analog I/O cartridge may be damaged when dropped, so take great care not to drop it when removing it.
 Correctly install the analog I/O cartridges in the analog I/O cartridge slots.
 For details on how to install and remove the analog I/O cartridge, see "Assembling the CPU Module and a Cartridge"

on page 3-6 and "Assembling the HMI Module and a Cartridge" on page 3-7.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-7

10: I / O C AR TR I DGESPlus CPU module
To use analog I/O cartridges with the Plus CPU module, connect a cartridge base module equipped with two cartridge slots to theleft side of the Plus CPU module. The Plus CPU module can be expanded with a maximum of four analog inputs or analog outputs
by connecting a maximum of two analog I/O cartridges.
Furthermore, the Plus CPU module can be expanded with a maximum of two analog inputs or analog outputs by connecting the
HMI module to the left side of the cartridge base module and connecting one analog I/O cartridge.
For example, when the cartridge base module is connected to the Plus CPU module and the HMI module is connected to thecartridge base module, the Plus CPU module can be expanded with a maximum of six analog inputs or analog outputs byconnecting a maximum of three analog I/O cartridges.

Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

CPU Module
Plus CPU module

Cartridge Base Module

HMI Module

Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Select the analog I/O cartridges for the connected devices and configure the signal type.

Caution Always install or remove the analog I/O cartridges in the FC6A when the power is turned off. If an analog I/O cartridge

is installed or removed in the FC6A when the power is on, the product may be damaged. There is also a risk that theanalog I/O cartridge may not operate correctly.
 The analog I/O cartridge may be damaged when dropped, so take great care not to drop it when removing it.
 Correctly install the analog I/O cartridges in the analog I/O cartridge slots.
 For details on how to install and remove the analog I/O cartridge, see "Assembling the HMI Module and a Cartridge"

on page 3-7 and "Assembling the Cartridge Base Module and a Cartridge" on page 3-8.

10-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Analog I/O Cartridge Specifications
This section describes analog I/O cartridge types, how to check the version number, and the analog input and output assignments.

Type Number Configuration

The I/O type, the number of analog inputs or outputs, and the signal types according to the analog I/O cartridge type number are
as follows.
Type No.

I/O Type

Number of Analog Points

Signal Type
0 to 10 V

FC6A-PJ2A

Analog input

2 points

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Type K thermocouple
Type J thermocouple
Type R thermocouple
Type S thermocouple
Type B thermocouple
Type E thermocouple

FC6A-PJ2CP

Analog input

2 points

Type T thermocouple
Type N thermocouple
Type C thermocouple
Pt100
Pt1000Ni100
Ni1000

FC6A-PK2AV

Analog output

2 points

0 to 10 V

FC6A-PK2AW

Analog output

2 points

4 to 20 mA

Checking the Version Number

The analog I/O cartridge version number is printed on the side of the analog I/O cartridge in the location in the following diagram.
The performance and functionality of the analog I/O cartridge will differ by its version, so check the version number before use.
For details, see "(7) Status" on page 10-14.

LOTNo
MAD .14XS
12E
V100 IN JAPA 525
N

LOT No.xxxxxxxxx
MADE IN JAPAN
V100

Version Number

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-9

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Analog I/O Assignments
The analog inputs or analog outputs are assigned as follows.
All-in-One
CPU Module/
Plus CPU Module

CAN J1939
All-in-One
CPU Module

Channel――IN0/OUT0

IN1/OUT1

IN0/OUT0

IN1/OUT1

IN0/OUT0

IN1/OUT1

Analog No.
(AI/AQ)

AI1―

AI2/AQ2

AI3/AQ3

AI4/AQ4

AI5/AQ5

AI6/AQ6

AI7/AQ7

Analog I/O Cartridge
Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

Notes:
 AI1 is an analog input of All-in-One CPU module and Plus CPU module. For details, see "Analog Voltage Input" on page 5-43.
 AI0 is an analog potentiometer of All-in-One CPU module and Plus CPU module. For details, see "Analog Potentiometer" on page 5-45.

Assignment Example
Example 1)

The assignments for the 40-I/O type when an analog input cartridge is installed in cartridge slot 1, an analog
output cartridge is installed in cartridge slot 2, and an analog output cartridge is installed in cartridge slot 3 on
the HMI module
All-in-One
CPU
Module40-I/O Type

Example 2)

Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

Channel

―

IN0

IN1

OUT0

OUT1

OUT0

Analog input

AI1

AI2

AI3

―

―

―

―

Analog output

―

―

―

AQ4

AQ5

AQ6

AQ7

OUT1

The assignments for the CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module when an analog input cartridge is installed in
cartridge slot 1
CAN J1939
All-in-One
CPU
Module10-10Analog I/O Cartridge

Analog I/O Cartridge
Cartridge Slot 1

Cartridge Slot 2

Cartridge Slot 3

Channel

―

IN0

IN1

―

―

―

―

Analog input

―

AI2

AI3

―

―

―

―

Analog output

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
Analog Parameter Settings
This section describes the analog parameter settings required to use the analog I/O cartridges.
The analog parameter settings are performed for each channel. In Expansion Modules Configuration, configure the parametersettings according the application.
For detailed configuration methods, see "Module Configuration Editor" on page 12-1.

Setting Details

The analog parameter settings include the filter, signal type, data type, minimum value, maximum value, data, and status.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Filter
The analog I/O cartridge's analog input is filtered so it reaches approximately 99% of the analog input in the specified filter.
Even when the analog input varies rapidly, the filtered analog input value can be made to vary smoothly by setting the filter.
When the filter is set to a large value, the tracking of the filtered analog input value becomes slower in regard to the fluctuationsin analog input.
Input filter example

Filter: 100 ms
100

Reaches approximately 99% of the analog
input in the set filter (100 ms).

Analog input data after filtering (%)

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

Elapsed time (ms)Filter (ms)Description0

The value is not filtered.

50 to 50,000

The analog input filter can be set in 50 ms increments.
The analog input is filtered so it reaches 99% of the analog input in the specified filter time.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-11

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
(2) Signal TypeThe signal type that can be set differs according to the analog I/O cartridge model. Select the analog I/O cartridge that
corresponds to the user application and set the signal type.
For details on signal type, see "Analog I/O Cartridge Specifications" on page 10-9.
(3) Data TypeThe analog value can be handled in the range of the specified data type (minimum value to maximum value). The data types are
as follows.
Data Type

Description

Binary data

The analog value can be stored in the range of 0 to 4,095.

Optional range

The analog value can be stored in the range of minimum value to maximum value. The minimum and maximum
values can be set in the range of -32,768 to 32,767. For the minimum and maximum values, see "(4) Minimum,
maximum values of analog value linear conversion" on page 10-12.

Celsius
Fahrenheit

The analog value can be stored in the linear conversion range of the temperature sensor set as the data type.
For details, see the analog input value linear conversion range when set to Celsius or Fahrenheit.

(4) Minimum, maximum values of analog value linear conversion
When Data Type is set to "Optional range", these values set the minimum and maximum when performing a linear conversionof the analog value. The minimum and maximum values can be set to any value in the range of -32,768 to 32,767. However, theminimum value must be set to a value smaller than the maximum value.
(5) Linear conversion range of analog input value when set to Celsius or Fahrenheit
When the data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit, the analog input value is linearly converted in the range of the following
table.
Signal TypeType K thermocouple

10-12

Celsius
Temperature (0.1°C)-200.0 to 1,300.0

Analog Input Value-2,000 to 13,000

Fahrenheit
Temperature (0.1°F)-328.0 to 2,3720.0

Analog input value-3,280 to 23,720

Type J thermocouple-200.0 to 1,000.0-2,000 to 10,000-328.0 to 1,832.0-3,280 to 18,320

Type R thermocouple

0.0 to 1,760.0

0 to 17,600

32.0 to 3,200.0

320 to 32,000Type S thermocouple

0.0 to 1,760.0

0 to 17,600

32.0 to 3,200.0

320 to 32,000Type B thermocouple

0.0 to 1,820.0

0 to 18,200

32.0 to 3,308.0

320 to 33,080

Type E thermocouple-200.0 to 800.0-2,000 to 8,000-328.0 to 1,472.0-3,280 to 14,720

Type T thermocouple-200.0 to 400.0-2,000 to 4,000-328.0 to 752.0-3,280 to 7,520

Type N thermocouple-200.0 to 1,300.0-2,000 to 13,000-328.0 to 2,372.0-3,280 to 23,720

Type C thermocouple

0.0 to 2,315.0

0 to 23,150

32.0 to 4,199.0

320 to 41,990

Pt100-200.0 to 850.0-2,000 to 8,500-328.0 to 1,562.0-3,280 to 15,620

Pt1000-200.0 to 600.0-2,000 to 6,000-328.0 to 1,112.0-3,280 to 11,120

Ni100-60.0 to 180.0-600 to 1,800-76.0 to 356.0-760 to 3,560

Ni1000-60.0 to 180.0-600 to 1,800-76.0 to 356.0-760 to 3,560

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
(6) Data
The special data registers that store the analog value and analog status for the analog inputs or analog outputs expanded using
analog I/O cartridges are assigned as follows. These values are updated with each scan.
Special Data Register

Description

D8170

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI2/AQ2)

D8171

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI3/AQ3)

D8172

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI2/AQ2)

D8173

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI3/AQ3)

D8174

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI4/AQ4)

D8175

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI5/AQ5)

D8176

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI4/AQ4)

D8177

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI5/AQ5)

D8178

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI6/AQ6)

D8179

Analog I/O cartridge data (AI7/AQ7)

D8180

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI6/AQ6)

D8181

Analog I/O cartridge status (AI7/AQ7)

Notes:
 The values of special data registers for channels that are not used are undefined.
 If the filter is enabled on an analog input, the filtered value is stored in the special data register.
 The analog value and analog status are updated in the scan end processing. The special data register values are updated regardless ofwhether the FC6A is stopped or running.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

10-13

10: I / O C AR TR I DGES
(7) Status
The analog status shows the status of the analog input or analog output for each channel. If the status is 0, this means thevalue is normal as an analog value.
Analog input
StatusDescription

Analog Input Value0

Operating normally

Current analog input value

1

Converting data (occurs for approximately 500 ms after the power is turned on and after the
program is downloaded)

Undefined

2

Initializing0

3 to 4

Reserved―

Wiring fault (out of maximum range)
Voltage5

Signal type

0 to 10 V

For V100*1: 10.0 V or higher
For V201*1 and later: 10.2 V or higher

4 to 20 mA

For V100*1: 20.0 mA or higher
For V201*1 and later: 20.32 mA or higher Upper limit value

0 to 20 mA

For V100*1: 20.0 mA or higher
For V201*1 and later: 20.4 mA or higher

Current

Thermocouple/
Upper limit value or higher
resistance thermometer
Wiring fault (out of minimum range, open current loop)
Voltage6

Signal type

Current

0 to 10 V

For V100*1: 0 V or lower
For V201*1 and later: -0.2 V or lower

4 to 20 mA

For V100*1: 4.0 mA or lower
For V201*1 and later: 3.68 mA or lower

Lower limit value

For V100*1: 0 mA or lower
0 to 20 mA
For V201*1 and later: -0 mA or lower

Thermocouple/
Lower limit value or higher
resistance thermometer
7

Reserved (analog I/O cartridge correction value error)

8

There is a difference in the configured content for the installed analog I/O cartridge and the user
program―
Undefined

9

The analog I/O cartridge has not been installed

Undefined

10

The analog I/O cartridge has been installed, but the type has been set to unused

Undefined

11 to 65,535 Reserved―*1 The analog I/O cartridge version number is printed on the side of the analog I/O cartridge. For details, see "Checking the Version Number"on page 10-9.

Analog output
Status0

Description
Operating normally

Analog Output Signal
Current analog output value

1

Reserved

2

Initializing

0 V / 4 mA

3Parameter setting error

Analog output value immediately before the error occurred

4 to 7―

Reserved―

8

There is a difference in the configured content for the installed
analog I/O cartridge and the user program

9

The analog I/O cartridge has not been installed

10

The analog I/O cartridge has been installed, but the type has
been set to unused

0 V / 4 mA―
0 V / 4 mA

11 to 65,535 Reserved

10-14

―

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
This chapter provides an overview of the SD memory card, describes its specifications, and describes the functions that can use
the SD memory card.

SD Memory Card Overview
The CPU module is equipped with one SD memory card slot which can use a FAT16 formatted SD memory card and a FAT32
formatted SDHC memory card.
Notes:
 This manual does not distinguish between SD memory cards and SDHC memory cards, both are referred to as "SD memory card".
 For accessing the SD memory card cover and for how to install or eject the SD memory card, see "Using an SD Memory Card" on page 3-30.

SD Memory Card Functions List
The functions that can use SD memory cards are as follows.
Function

Overview

Reference

Save Log Data

Specified device values can be saved to the SD memory card as CSV files using the DLOG
and TRACE instructions.
When using Plus CPU module, the SD memory card can be replaced while the DLOG and
TRACE instructions are being executed.

11-7

Recipe Function

Values that have been prepared in advanced can be batch written to specified devices
and specified device values can be batch read according to the state of a device.

11-8

Download from SD Memory Card

The user programs, program comments, and CPU module system software can be
downloaded to the CPU module using the SD memory card. The basic settings for MQTT
communication and the certificate and private key for web server function can also be
downloaded to the CPU module.

11-27

Upload to SD Memory Card

The user programs, program comments, and CPU module system software written to the
CPU module can be uploaded to the SD memory card.

11-43

SD Memory Card Maintenance with
Data File Manager

The data on the SD memory card inserted in the SD memory card slot can be managed
and checked using Data File Manager. Data on the SD memory card can also be saved toa PC or deleted.

11-49

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-1

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
SD Memory Card Specifications
Specifications
Item

Specifications

Compatible SD Memory Card

SD memory cards (max 2 GB), SDHC memory cards (max 32 GB)

File System

FAT16/FAT32
Note, SD memory cards are supported only when formatted as FAT16. SDHC memory cards aresupported only when formatted as FAT32. Malfunctions may occur if a different format type is used.

File Specifications

Format

CSV file, ZLD file

File size

5 MB maximum (Plus CPU module 256 MB maximum)

Supported
Characters

Single-byte alphanumeric characters
The following characters cannot be used in drive names:\"&()*+,./:;<>[]=|^
The following characters cannot be used in file or folder names:\ /:*?"<>
Dependant on file system: FAT16

Maximum Number of Files

Subdirectory and below: Maximum 65,534
 FAT32

Subdirectory and below: Maximum 65,534

Recommended SD Memory Card
Recommended SD Memory Card

SDHC memory card (32 GB maximum)

Note: We recommend using SD memory cards that have been formatted on the FC6A.
Note: We recommend that important data is regularly backed up on separate media such as CDs or DVDs.

SD Memory Card Status
The status of the SD memory card can be checked with the SD memory card status LED [SD] and the special internal relays.

CautionThe SD memory card data may be corrupted by doing the following during access to the SD memory card.
 Turning the FC6A power OFF.
 Ejecting the SD memory card.
When ejecting the SD memory card, do so when the FC6A power has been turned off, or when the SD memory card has
been unmounted by turning on M8072.

SD Memory Card Status LED [SD] and SD Memory Card Status

The SD memory card status LED [SD] turns on or flashes when the SD memory card has been recognized, while it is being
formatted, and while it is being read from or written to.
SD Memory Card Status LED[SD] DisplayOn

SD Memory Card Status

Operation

 Standby status where the SD memory card can be read from or written to

The SD memory card canbe ejected.

 While the FC6A is recognizing the SD memory card

Slow flashing (1 s cycle)

 The FC6A is unmounting the SD memory card because unmount SD

memory card (M8072) was turned on
Quick flashing (100 ms cycle)

Do not eject the SD
memory card.

 Reading or writing the SD memory card The SD memory card is not inserted
 An unsupported or unformatted SD memory card was insertedOff Unmount SD memory card (M8072) is on, so the SD memory card has

been unmounted
 The FC6A power is off

11-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

If the SD memory card isinserted, it can beejected.

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Special Internal Relays for the SD Memory Card

The special internal relays (M8070, M8071) are turned on and off according to the SD memory card insertion status and accessstatus. When special internal relay M8072 is turned on, access to the SD memory card is stopped.
DeviceAddress

Description

R/W

SD Memory Card Mount
StatusWhen an SD memory card is inserted in the FC6A and it has beenrecognized and can be used, M8070 is turned on. M8070 is turned off if no
SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

R

M8071

Accessing SD Memory Card

M8071 is turned on while the SD memory card is being accessed. It isturned off when access has finished.

M8072

Unmount SD Memory Card

When M8072 is turned on, access to the SD memory card is stopped. To
make an SD memory card accessible that has had access to it stopped,
insert the card once again.

M8070

Function

R/W

Note: R/W stands for read/write and allows reading and writing. R is read-only. W is write-only.

Timing Chart

The special internal relays are turned on and off in the following manner according to the SD memory card insertion status andaccess status.
Not
Inserted Inserted

SD Memory Card Insertion
StatusStandby Status
SD Memory Card Access
StatusReading
Writing

Stopping
AccessON

Unmount
SD Memory Card

M8072

SD Memory Card
Mount Status

M8070

AccessingSD Memory Card

M8071

SD Memory Card
Status LED [SD]

Card Being
Recognized

Access Stopped

Standby Status

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Slow FlashingON

Quick FlashingON

Slow FlashingSpecial Data Registers for the SD Memory Card

The capacity and free space of the SD memory card inserted in the FC6A can be checked with special data registers.
DeviceAddress

Function

Description

D8250

Read SD Memory Card
CapacityThis register indicates the capacity of the recognized SD or SDHC (maximum
size 32 GB) memory card in megabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

D8251

Read SD Memory Card Free
CapacityThis register indicates the free capacity of the SD memory card inmegabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

R/W

R

Note: R/W stands for read/write and allows reading and writing. R is read-only. W is write-only.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-3

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
SD Memory Card Folder Structure and Files
Folder Structure

When downloading or uploading data using the FC6A or WindLDR, the following files and folders are accessible.
SD Memory Card

Arbitrary: File names and folder names that can be specified by the function area settings andinstruction parameters.
Fixed: File names and folder names that are fixed by the system.
FCDATA01(Fixed)The configuration file that defines upload and download actions when the FC6A power isturned on and when special internal relays are used. This file is created by using WindLDR, but
it can also be created and edited using a text editor.

autoexec.ini(Fixed)The configuration file that defines basic settings for performing MQTT
communication. This file is created using WindLDR, but it can also be editedusing a text editor such as Notepad.

mqtt_basic_settings.ini(Fixed)The configuration file that defines the operation after downloading the certificate and private
key used for the web server function from the SD memory card.This file is created using
WindLDR, but it can also be edited using a text editor such as Notepad.

server_tls.ini(Fixed)DATALOG(Fixed)The folder used by the DLOG instruction.

RESULT(Arbitrary)

Log files are saved here.
The folder name is specified by S1 in the DLOG instruction. The desired folder name up to 8
single-byte alphanumeric characters can be set.

Log file(CSV format)

MQTT

The folder used in MQTT communication.

(Fixed)REPUB

The folder saves republish data of MQTT communication.

(Fixed)PROGRAM(Fixed)The folder used for downloading and uploading the user program.
ZLD files are saved here.

fc6a01.zld(Arbitrary)
RECIPE(Fixed)One file that contains the user program, program comments, and the system software
data for the CPU module.
This file is created with WindLDR and by uploading data to the SD memory card.

The folder used by the recipe function.
Recipe files are saved here.

RCP0001.csv(Arbitrary)

11-4

The CSV log file that is created when the DLOG instruction is executed.
For the Plus CPU module, a folder is created and given the date
(YYYYMMDD) as its name and then files are saved in that folder.
For details, see Chapter 25 "DLOG (Data Log)" in the "Ladder
Programming Manual".

The file where recipe values have been saved. The desired file name up to 7 singlebyte alphanumeric characters can be set. The default with the automatic setting is a
CSV file with the name RCP**** (where **** is 0001 to 9999).
(Example: RCP0001.csv)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
TLS

The folder used in TLS communication.

(Fixed)mqtt_root_certificate.der*1 The root certificate of the server certificate in the der format used when
performing TLS communication with the destination broker in MQTT
communication.

(Fixed)mqtt_root_certificate_2.der*1 The second root certificate of the server certificate in the der format used
when performing TLS communication with the destination broker in MQTT
(Fixed)communication.

mqtt_client_certificate.der*1(Fixed)mqtt_private_key.der*1(Fixed)server_certificate.der(Fixed)server_private_key.der(Fixed)TRACE

The client private key in the der format used when performing TLS
communication with the destination broker in MQTT communication.
The certificate in the der format used for TLS communication with the
web server function.
The private key in the der format used for TLS communication with the
web server function.

The folder used by the TRACE instruction.

(Fixed)RESULT(Arbitrary)

Log files are saved here.
The folder name is specified by S1 in the TRACE instruction. The desired file name up to 8
single-byte alphanumeric characters can be set.

Log file(CSV format)

WEBPAGE(Fixed)The client certificate in the der format used when performing TLS
communication with the destination broker in MQTT communication.

The CSV log file that is created when the TRACE instruction is executed.
For the Plus CPU module, a folder is created and given the date
(YYYYMMDD) as its name and then files are saved in that folder.
For details, see Chapter 25 "TRACE (Data Trace)" in the "Ladder
Programming Manual".

The folder used by the web server function (Plus CPU module only). For details, see Chapter 13"Save Locations of Web Pages" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

*1 For details, see Chapter 3 "Files for MQTT Basic Settings" in the "Network User’s Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-5

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR DZLD Files

Downloads and uploads with the SD memory card use ZLD files that contain the user program, program comments, and system
software data in a single file.
ZLD files are created with WindLDR or by uploading to the SD memory card. Data can be reused and edited by opening the ZLD
file in WindLDR.
When creating a ZLD file with WindLDR, the data other than the user program can be optionally set. The version of the CPU
module system software can also be specified and set.
When downloading from the SD memory card, the data in the ZLD file cannot be partially selected and downloaded. To change thedata that will be download according to the application, create it as a separate ZLD file.
The data that is written to the ZLD file is as follows.
ZLD File Data

When the CPU Module Creates ZLD Files by
Uploading Data to the SD Memory Card

When Creating ZLD Files in WindLDRUser program

Set from a created user program.

The user program running on the CPU module is written.

Program comments

Set the user program comments.
(Optional)*1

The program comments running on the CPU module are
written.

CPU module system
softwareSpecify and set the CPU module system software
version. (Optional)*1

The system software running on the CPU module iswritten.

*1 If the applicable data is not set in the ZLD file, the corresponding data will not be downloaded.

The created ZLD file is saved to the \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder on the SD memory card. ZLD files can be saved to folders otherthan the \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder, but these will not be downloaded from the SD memory card. Alpha-numeric characters, "-"(hyphens), "_" (underscores), and spaces can be used for the file name.

autoexec.ini File

Using the autoexec.ini file, the file name and action can be changed when downloading or uploading a ZLD file when the FC6A
power is turned on and by special internal relay operations. The autoexec.ini file is created by using WindLDR or a text editor. Only
the autoexec.ini file saved to \FCDATA01\ on the SD memory card is valid.
For the autoexec.ini file format, see "autoexec.ini File Format" on page 11-36.

mqtt_basic_settings.ini File

The basic settings for performing MQTT communication, root certificate of the server certificate, client certificate, and client private
key can be downloaded to the CPU module by using an mqtt_basic_settings.ini file when the FC6A power is turned on and by
special internal relay operations. The mqtt_basic_settings.ini file is created by using WindLDR or a text editor. Only themqtt_basic_settings.ini file saved to \FCDATA01\ on the SD memory card is valid.
For the mqtt_basic_settings.ini file format, see "mqtt_basic_settings. ini File Format" in the "Network User’s Manual".

server_tls.ini File

Using the server_tls.ini file, you can define the operation after downloading the certificate and private key used for the web server
function to the Plus CPU module.The server_tls.ini file is created by using WindLDR or a text editor. Only the server_tls.ini filesaved to \FCDATA01\ on the SD memory card is valid.
For the server_tls.ini file format, see "server_tls. ini File Format" on page 11-42.

Formatting the SD Memory Card
The SD memory card inserted in the CPU module can be formatted by operations with Data File Manager and by menu operations
on the HMI module.
For details, see "Formatting the SD Memory Card" on page 11-57 and "Format SD memory card with the FC6A" on page 7-42.
Notes:
 When an SD memory card is formatted with the CPU module, the FCDATA01 folder and folders directly under it are automatically created.
 When the SD memory card is formatted without using the CPU module, it may take some time before the CPU module is activated dependingon the operation after formatting. After formatting, first create the FCDATA01 folder.

11-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Save Log Data
Using the DLOG (data log) instruction and the TRACE (data trace) instruction, specified device values will be saved to the SD
memory card as log data (CSV files). The DLOG instruction outputs the date and time and specified device information to the CSV
file in the specified folder. The TRACE instruction outputs the date and time and the values for the previous number of scans forthe specified devices to the CSV file in the specified folder. For details on the DLOG and TRACE instructions, refer to Chapter 25"Data Log Instructions" in Ladder Programming Manual.
Note: The following operations are possible with the Plus CPU module.
 When using FC6A Plus CPU module, log data is acquired while the DLOG instruction and the TRACE instructions are executed without an
inserted SD memory card. When the SD memory card is inserted, the acquired log data is saved to file and operation of the instruction
continues as is.
 If FC6A operation is stopped or if the power is cycled without inserting an SD memory card, the acquired log data is entirely cleared.
Note: The FC6A cannot write data to the SD memory card when its write-protect switch is on. Always set the SD memory card's write-protect switch
to off before inserting it in the FC6A.

Output sample
CSV file output sample with the DLOG instruction
Time

D0010

D0011

2011/09/07 15:40:00

12345

1

2011/09/07 15:41:00

1212

3

2011/09/07 15:42:00

345

4

CSV file output sample with the TRACE instruction
Triggered at:

2011/09/07 15:40

Scan

D0010

D0011

D0012

Old

1

9

17

2

10

18

3

11

19

New

Replacing the SD Memory Card While Saving Log Data

When using the Plus CPU module, the SD memory card can be replaced while the DLOG (Data Log) and TRACE (Data Trace)
instructions are being executed because the Plus CPU module is equipped with 1 MB of internal memory to temporarily save thelog data.
SD Memory Card Replacement Procedure
Change M8072 (Unmount SD Memory Card) from off to on.
Confirm that M8070 (SD Memory Card Mount Status) is off.
Eject the SD memory card from the SD memory card slot.
Insert the replacement SD memory card into the SD memory card slot.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Notes:
 Format the replacement SD memory card in advance.
 If the power supply for the Plus CPU module is turned OFF while the SD memory card is being replaced, the log data saved to the internal
memory will be erased.
 If the log data saved to the internal memory exceeds 1 MB while the SD memory card is being replaced, the execution status of the DLOG
(Data Log) instruction or the TRACE (Data Trace) instruction will be "11: RAM overflow", and then subsequent log data are not saved until
the SD memory card is inserted.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-7

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Recipe Function
This section provides an overview of the recipe function and describes the WindLDR settings.

Recipe Function Overview
The recipe function (or recipes) batch writes values prepared in advanced to specified devices and batch reads the values of
specified devices according to the state of a device. Use this function for situations such as configuring the initial values of an
external device when starting operation.

Recipe Settings Configuration

The settings that are used with the recipe function are called recipe settings. The recipe settings configuration is as follows.
First Device

Number of Data

D0000

1111

100

101

D0001

2222

200

102

D0002

3333

300

103

D0003

4444

400

104

D0004

5555

500

105

D0005

6666

600

106

D0006

7777

700

107

D0007

8888

800

108

D0008

9999

900

109

D0009

11111

1000

110

Channel 0

Channel 1

Channel 15

Block 1
Terminology

Description

Block

The operation that uses recipe data is configured in blocks. A maximum of 64 blocks (1 to 64) can be configured, and eachblock is made up of 16 channels (0 to 15). (There are locations where these blocks are referred to as recipe blocks in order
to avoid confusion with other expressions.)

ChannelThe devices and data that are the write destination or read source are set in channels. One first device can be set perchannel.

First device

The device that is the start of the read source or write destination devices for recipe values.

Number of Data

The amount of data configured for one channel. Data can be set for device addresses a maximum of 8,192 continuous
words from the first device that was set.

Note: If number of data is set to the maximum value (8,192 words), a user program capacity of approximately 16,000 bytes per channel is used.
For the capacity of user programs that can be used, see Chapter 5 "User Program Capacity" on page 5-71.

11-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Reading and Writing Data

The data used by the recipe function is called recipe data for data saved in FC6A internal memory and recipe files for data saved to
the SD memory card, and recipe values for the values written to FC6A devices that were saved in recipe data and recipe files.
■ Write Recipe
Recipe values can be written to FC6A devices according to recipe data or recipe files. Writing starts when the bit of the set device
is turned on. The device that serves as the condition to start this writing is called the write trigger device.
To write the recipe values in recipe data saved in FC6A internal memory (ROM-user program) to devices
FC6A Series MICROSmart

Write Trigger Device
ON
OFFInternal Memory(ROM-User Program)Start writing

Recipe Data
100
150
200

Writes recipe values
in recipe data

D0000=

0100

D0001=

0150

D0002=

0200

To write the recipe values in recipe data saved in FC6A internal memory (ROM-Range) to devices
FC6A Series MICROSmart

Write Trigger Device
ON
OFFInternal Memory(ROM-Range)

Start writing

Recipe Data
100
150
200

Writes recipe values
in recipe data

D0000=

0100

D0001=

0150

D0002=

0200

To write the recipe values in a recipe file saved on the SD memory card to devices
SD Memory Card

FC6A Series MICROSmart

Write Trigger Device
ON
OFF

Start writing
Recipe File
100,
150,
200,

Writes recipe values
in recipe file

D0000=

0100

D0001=

0150

D0002=

0200

If there are fewer recipe values described in a recipe file than the number of data set for that channel, nothing is written to devices
that do not have recipe values to be written.
Example: When the first device is D0000, the number of data to write is 3, and the recipe file describes 2 devices of recipe values
The recipe values are written to D0000 and D0001, but nothing is written to D0002.
First Device
Number of
Data: 3

Recipe Values
100
2 devices
150

D0000
D0001
D0002

Not written.

If there are more recipe values described in a recipe file than the number of data set for that channel, nothing is written to devices
in the area that exceeds number of data.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-9

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Example: When the first device is D0000, the number of data to write is 3, and the recipe file describes 4 devices of recipe values
The recipe values are written to from D0000 to D0002, but nothing is written to D0003.
First Device
Number of
Data: 3

Recipe Values
100

D0000
D0001

150

D0002

200

D0003

Not written.

4 devices250■ Read Recipe
FC6A device values can be read and saved to the internal memory (ROM-Range) as recipe data or saved to the SD memory card as
a recipe file according to the FC6A recipe settings. Reading starts when the bit of the set device is turned on. The device thatserves as the condition to start this reading is called the read trigger device.
The file is overwritten when there is already a recipe file with the same name.
To read the device values to FC6A internal memory as recipe data
FC6A Series MICROSmart

Read Trigger Device
ON
OFFInternal Memory(ROM-Range)

Recipe Data
100
150
200

Saves read device values tointernal memory(ROM-Range) as recipe data

Start reading
D0000=

100

D0001=

150

D0002=

200

Reads out device values to the SD memory card as a recipe file
SD Memory Card

FC6A Series MICROSmart

Read Trigger Device
ON
OFF

Start reading
Recipe File
100,
150,
200,

Saves read device values
to the SD memory card
as a recipe file

D0000=

100

D0001=

150

D0002=

200

Note: When read recipe is executed, a recipe file with the same name on the SD memory card is overwritten. Use caution not to execute a readusing the recipe file for writing the initial values.
 Do not turn off the power to the FC6A when reading and writing recipes.

If the power to the FC6A is turned off when reading and writing recipes, the recipe data or recipe file may be corrupted. Use Recipe Block
Execution Completed Output (M8266) to check completion of the execution of recipe block reads and writes.
Use Recipe Channel Execution Completed Output (M8264) to check completion of the execution of channel reads and writes.
 When the number of times recipe data is read to internal memory (ROM-Range) exceeds 50,000 times, the recipe data save time may

increase or the recipe data may not be saved. Consider reading the data to the SD memory card.

11-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
■ Auto Write
This function writes recipe values for the specified block numbers at specific times. The write timing can be set as a combination of
the following four times.
 When the FC6A power is turned on When a user program is downloaded to the FC6A
 When FC6A operation starts
 When the keep data error occurs

A range of block numbers can be specified and all of the channels in the specified block numbers are applicable.

Reading and Writing to Internal Memory (ROM-Range)
If the backup battery dies, the device values are cleared to 0.
The device values can be restored to when the recipe was last read (PLC to recipe) by periodically reading recipes (PLC to recipe)
to internal memory (ROM-Range) and then writing recipes (recipe to PLC) after recovering from a power loss.
Internal memory (ROM-Range) is split into two areas. Use these areas according to the intended usage.
■ Configure the same recipe settings in the two internal memory (ROM-Range) areas and use for backups
If the CPU module power is turned off while reading the recipe (PLC to recipe), the recipe cannot be read correctly. If the same
recipe settings are configured in internal memory (ROM-Range 1) and internal memory (ROM-Range 2), even if reading the recipe(PLC to recipe) fails for one recipe, the other area stores the device values when the recipe was last read (PLC to recipe).
In this case, the two internal memory (ROM-Range) areas are configured with the same recipe settings, and this allows amaximum of 7,000 words of data to be stored.
Device Address
D10000 to D16999

Access Target
Internal Memory(ROM-Range 1)
Internal Memory(ROM-Range 2)■ Configure each internal memory (ROM-Range) with different recipe settings to save more device values
Configure internal memory (ROM-Range 1) and internal memory (ROM-Range 2) each with different recipe settings.
This allows a maximum of 14,000 words of data to be stored. (Each of the two internal memory (ROM-Range) areas can store amaximum of 7,000 words of data.)
Device Address

Access Target

D10000 to D16999

Internal Memory(ROM-Range 1)

D20000 to D26999

Internal Memory(ROM-Range 2)

Note:
 The limit on the number of times to read a recipe (PLC to recipe) to internal memory (ROM-Range) is 50,000 times.
 Internal memory (ROM-Range) can be written and read in blocks. It cannot be written and read in channels.
 The amount of data that can be set for 1 block of internal memory (ROM-Range) is a maximum of 7,000 words.

 When reading and writing to internal memory (ROM-Range), Data Type on the Data Editor dialog box is fixed to Word (W).
 When reading and writing to internal memory (ROM-Range), Data on the Data Editor dialog box cannot be entered.

 To execute reading recipes (PLC to recipe) to internal memory (ROM-Range), first turn off Read Restriction for Recipe Internal Memory(ROM- Range) (M8267). If recipes are read while M8267 remains on, an error will not occur.
 Internal memory (ROM-Range 1) and internal memory (ROM-Range 2) cannot be set to multiple blocks. Each area can be set to only 1 block

each.

Recipe Execution and FC6A Status

 Read and write recipe can be executed when the FC6A is running or stopped.
 If the FC6A is stopped while reading or writing the recipe, reading or writing the recipe continues after stopping.
 If the FC6A is set to run while reading or writing the recipe, the FC6A automatically runs after reading or writing the recipe has finished.
 Read and write recipe operate in user program END processing regardless of whether the FC6A is running or stopped.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-11

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Recipe Execution Example

The following shows the processing flow and execution example for when the write trigger device or the read trigger device is on
in user program END processing.
■ Processing flow
Start

Has the trigger device been turned on?

NO

YES
Using the information for trigger device
that was turned on in the same scan, add
the recipe execution channel information
to the queue.
Information is stored in the queue inascending block number order andascending channel number order.

Is the execution channel
information in the recipe
execution queue?

NO

YES
Take out the channel at the headof the queue and execute the recipe.

Update the execution status.

End
Notes:
 When the auto write function is executed, the first scan starts after recipe block writing has finished.
 If an error occurs during recipe block processing, the recipe function is not executed for subsequent channels.
 If reading and writing are simultaneously executed for the same channel, reading has priority.

■ Execution example
When the trigger devices are simultaneously turned on for multiple channels in the same recipe block
Processing is executed in order from the lowest channel number.
Scan

Block
NumberTrigger Device
Channel 1

Channel 8

Recipe Execution Status

Channel 15

1st scan

OFF

OFF

OFF

2nd scanOFF -> ON

OFF -> ON

OFF -> ON

Execute channel 1

ON

ON

ON

Execute channel 8

3rd scan1

No operation

4th scan

ON

ON

ON

Execute channel 15

5th scan

ON

ON

ON

No operation

11-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
When the trigger devices are simultaneously turned on for multiple recipe blocks
Processing is executed in order from the lowest recipe block number. However, if a new trigger device is turned on for the recipe block
being executed, it will be executed as the new recipe block after reading or writing of the recipe block being executed has finished.
Scan
1st scan2nd scan3rd scan4th scan5th scan

Trigger Device

Block
NumberChannel 1

Channel 8

Channel 15

1

OFF

OFF

OFF

30

OFF

OFF

OFF

1

OFF -> ON

OFF

OFF -> ON

30

OFF -> ON

OFF

OFF

1

ON

OFF -> ON

ON

30

ON

OFF

OFF

1

ON

ON

ON

30

ON

OFF

OFF

1

ON

ON

ON

30

ON

OFF

OFF

Recipe Execution Status
No operation
Execute channel 1 in block 1
Execute channel 15 in block 1
Execute channel 1 in block 30
Execute channel 8 in block 1

Used Special Devices
The special internal relays and the special data registers used by the recipe function are as follows.

Special Internal Relays
Device Address

Function

Description

M8260

Write Recipe Execution Flag

When M8260 is turned on from off, write recipe is executed for all channels of the block number
specified by D8260 (Recipe Block Number).

M8261

Read Recipe Execution Flag

When M8261 is turned on from off, read recipe is executed for all channels of the block number
specified by D8260 (Recipe Block Number).

M8262

Executing Write Recipe

M8262 is turned on when the write recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when theprocessing has completed. M8262 also is turned off when read recipe processing starts.

M8263

Executing Read Recipe

M8263 is turned on when the read recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when theprocessing has completed. M8263 also is turned off when write recipe processing starts.

M8264

Recipe Channel Execution
Completed Output

M8264 is turned off when starting to read or write a recipe channel, and it is turned on whenreading or writing a recipe channel has completed.

M8265

Recipe Execution Error
OutputM8265 is turned on when recipe execution has completed and D8264 (Recipe Execution Status)
is a value other than 0.

M8266

Recipe Block Execution
Completed Output

M8266 is turned off when starting to read or write a recipe block, and it is turned on whenreading or writing a recipe block has completed.

M8267

Read Restriction for
Recipe Internal Memory(ROM-Range)

M8267 is turned on when reading or writing to a recipe block in internal memory (ROM-Range)
has completed. When M8267 is on, recipes cannot be read to internal memory (ROM-Range).
When M8267 is off, recipes can be read to internal memory (ROM-Range).

Special Data Registers
Device Address

Function

Description

D8260

Recipe Block Number

The recipe block number to read or write using special internal relays.
All channels for the specified block number are applicable.

D8261

Recipe Execution Block
Number

The recipe block number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the recipe block starts, and the status is retained when completed.

D8262

Recipe Execution Channel
No.

The channel number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the channel processing starts, and the status is retained when completed.

D8263

Recipe Execution
Operation

Information about the operation of the recipe that was executed. For details, see "Recipe
Execution Operation (D8263)" on page 11-14.

D8264

Recipe Execution Status

The status of the recipe that was executed. This is 0 when normally terminated. For details, see "Recipe
Execution Status (D8264) and Recipe Execution Error Information (D8265)" on page 11-15.
M8264 turns on when this device is updated. M8265 also turns on if this device is a value other than 0.

D8265

Recipe Execution Error
Information

Error information about the recipe that was executed. This device is updated at the same time as
D8264. For details, see "Recipe Execution Status (D8264) and Recipe Execution Error Information(D8265)" on page 11-15.

D8266

Recipe Internal Memory(ROM-Range 1) ReadCount

The number of times device values are read to internal memory (ROM-Range 1) as recipe data isstored in this register in units of 100. An error occurs when the actual read count exceeds 50,000
times (value of D8266 > 500).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-13

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Device Address
D8267

Function

Description

Recipe Internal Memory(ROM-Range 2) ReadCount

The number of times device values are read to internal memory (ROM-Range 2) as recipe data isstored in this register in units of 100. An error occurs when the actual read count exceeds 50,000
times (value of D8267 > 500).

Recipe Execution Operation (D8263)
Details about information on the write recipe or read recipe operation that was executed is written to special data register D8263(Recipe Execution Operation) are as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

12

11

8

7

4

3

0

Access to
1: SD Memory Card
2: Internal Memory(ROM-User Program)
3: Internal Memory(ROM-Range 1)
4: Internal Memory(ROM-Range 2)

11-14

Write Method
1: Read Recipe
2: Write Recipe

Reserved
0 (fixed)

Execution Trigger
1: Trigger Device
2: Special Device
3: Auto Execution
4: HMI Operation

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Recipe Execution Status (D8264) and Recipe Execution Error Information (D8265)
Details about the status code that is written to special data register D8264 (Recipe Execution Status) when write recipe or readrecipe is executed and details about the error information that is written to special data register D8265 (Recipe Execution Error
Information) are as follows.
D8264(Status Code)Write Recipe (Recipe to PLC)

Read Recipe (PLC to Recipe)

D8265(Error Information)0

Normal termination

Normal termination

0 (fixed)

1

No SD memory card is inserted.

No SD memory card is inserted.

0 (fixed)

The SD memory card is write
protected.

0 (fixed)

Invalid SD memory card format.

0 (fixed)
The channel number where filecreation failed is written to the device.

2
3―
Invalid SD memory card format.

4―

The SD memory card is full and no
folders or files can be created.

5

The specified recipe block number isinvalid.*1

The specified recipe block number isinvalid.

The invalid recipe block number thatwas specified is written.

6

Failed to read the recipe file on the
SD memory card.*2

Failed to read the recipe file on the
SD memory card.*2

The channel number where therecipe file read failed is written to thedevice.

7

There is no recipe file on the SD
memory card.

―

The channel number where there is
no recipe file is written to the device.

10

There is no recipe data in internal
memory (ROM-Range).

―

The channel number where there is norecipe data is written to the device.

A read to internal memory (ROMRange) was executed while reading
to internal memory (ROM-Range)
was restricted (when M8267 is on).

The block number set with internal
memory (ROM-Range 1) or internal
memory (ROM-Range 2) for theaccess target is written to the device.

11―

 The write limit to internal memory(ROM-Range) was exceeded.
 The number of times device

values were read to internal
memory (ROM-Range 1) as recipe
data exceeded 50,000 times. Or
the number of times device values
were read to internal memory(ROM-Range 2) exceeded 50,000
times.

12―

13

Writing recipe data to internal memory(ROM-Range) failed. *3―0 (fixed)

0 (fixed)*1 This occurs when a block number was accessed that has no settings in the special data registers and special internal relays.
*2 This occurs when file data cannot be normally written or read due to the data in the file becoming corrupted or a failure of a specific area of the
SD memory card.
*3 This occurs when recipe data cannot be normally written due to the data in the recipe data in internal memory (ROM-Range) becoming
corrupted or a failure of a specific area of internal memory (ROM-Range).

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-15

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Recipe File Format
The recipe file saved to the SD memory card is a CSV file.
The set data is written on one row.
If the data type is float, the decimal symbol follows CSV File Format in Function Area Settings > External Memory tab. For
details, see "External Memory Devices" on page 5-53.
The following shows recipe file examples.
Example 1: Recipe data with data type integer (I), number of data 4
234
-123
0
5665
Example 2: Recipe data with data type word (W) hexadecimal, number of data 4
0123
55AA
A6CF
0000
Example 3: Recipe data with data type float (F), number of data 7, decimal symbol setting Period-544.202
77.0
1.2E+11
8.77E-05
0.0
84.32-0.001File Format Details

 Write only one item of data (device value) on each row.
 A maximum of 40 characters can be converted from the start of the row.

Example: 0.00000000000000000000000000000000000001
0.000000000000000000000000000000000000001

Correctly converted because 40 characters.
Conversion fails because 41 characters.

 If the recipe data conversion fails when writing the recipe, the corresponding device value is 0.
 "0x" or "0X" does not need to be added to hexadecimal values. For example, "1234" and "0x1234" will be the same value "1234h (decimal4660)".
 When writing float values in exponent notation, do so in a format such as "-12.3E+01". Write "+" or "-" immediately after "E". Write thenumber of digits for the exponent as 2-digit decimal value. Operation outside of these rules is undefined.

11-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Programming WindLDR
The recipe settings are configured with the following operation procedure.
1. On the View tab, in the Work Space group, click Project Window.

The Project Window is displayed in the left portion of the screen.

2. Double-click Recipe.

Recipe Editor starts.

 If no blocks are registered, block number 1 recipe settings are created and can be edited.
 If blocks have already been registered, recipe settings for the lowest block number that has not been registered are created and can beedited.
 Double-click a registered block number and the recipe settings for that block number can be edited.

Note: To delete recipe settings that have been created, right-click on the block number and click Delete on the menu.

3. Configure the recipe setting parameters.

The recipe settings are saved when the project data is saved.

This concludes configuring the recipe settings.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-17

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Recipe Function Parameters
This section describes the dialog box parameter settings required to use the recipe function.

Recipe Editor

Use Recipe Editor to collectively manage the save destination for recipe data, the devices for writing recipe values and reading
device values, and those execution conditions.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)
(7)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(10)

(1) Recipe Editor tab
Displayed as "Block Number Block Name".
Multiple tabs can be opened and switched between to edit settings.
(2) Block Number
Displays the block number of the block being edited.
The block number of the block being edited can be changed by selecting and changing the number in the list. A confirmation
message is displayed when the number is changed. Click OK. Already registered block numbers are not displayed in the list.
(3) Block NameEnter the block name. The name entered here is displayed under Recipe on the Project Window.
(4) Access to
Select the save destination for recipe data that is used when the block is executed from the following four options. Internal
memory (ROM-Range 1) and internal memory (ROM-Range 2) can be set to only 1 block number each.
 SD Memory Card Internal Memory (ROM-User Program) Internal Memory (ROM-Range 1)
 Internal Memory (ROM-Range 2)(5) Action Setting
Select the action that uses the recipe data as the following.
Read/Write
Read
Write
11-18

: Saves batch read device values to the SD memory card as a recipe file and writes recipe values to devices. This
option can only be configured when SD Memory Card, Internal Memory (ROM-Range 1), or Internal
Memory (ROM-Range 2) is selected under Access to.
: Saves batch read device values to the SD memory card as a recipe file. This option can only be configured when
SD memory card is selected under Access to.
: Writes recipe values to devices.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
(6) Read Trigger (PLC to Recipe)
Sets the device that triggers batch reading device values and saving them to the SD memory card as a recipe file. Thisparameter can be configured when SD Memory Card is selected under Access to and Read/Write or Read Only is
selected under Action.
(7) Write Trigger (Recipe to PLC)
Sets the device that triggers batch writing recipe values to devices by block.
This parameter can be configured when SD Memory Card or Internal Memory (ROM-User Program) is selected under
Access to and Read/Write or Write Only is selected under Action.
(8) Channel Settings
Configures the channels.
Channel: Displays the channel numbers.

Tag Name: Sets the tag name for the recipe value write destination device and the device value read source device andthe first device.
The set devices are continuously set starting from number 1 in the Data Settings Table in the Data Editor
dialog box.

Device Address : Displays the tag name set under Tag Name or the device address of the first device.
Data button: Click this button to display the Data Editor dialog box. The recipe data for the selected channel isconfigured on this dialog box. For details, see "Data Editor dialog box" on page 11-20.

Channel Name

: Enter the channel name.

File Name: Sets the CSV file names when batch saving device values to the SD memory card with read recipe.
When the File Name check box is cleared, the file names are the default RCPn (n: 5-digit sequential
number). When selected, the name can be entered.

Read Trigger: Displays the read trigger device for each channel. The triggers are automatically allocated starting from thedevice set for Read Trigger (PLC to Recipe) (6).

Write Trigger: Displays the write trigger device for each channel. The triggers are automatically allocated starting from thedevice set for Write Trigger (Recipe to PLC) (7).

(9) Auto Write Recipe Setting button
Click this button to display the Auto Write Settings dialog box. The execution timing and the range of blocks for the auto
write function are configured on this dialog box. For details, see "Auto Write Settings Dialog Box" on page 11-21.
(10) Duplicate Block button
Click this button to display the Duplicate Block dialog box. The settings of registered blocks can be copied to other blocks
or used to overwrite other blocks. For details, see "Duplicate Block dialog box" on page 11-22.
(11) Export Recipe File button
Saves all Recipe Editor settings in every channel to the SD memory card as a recipe file.
Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box. Specify the SD memory card drive, then click OK.
Only channels with Access to set to SD memory card are saved.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-19

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Data Editor dialog box

The recipe data for the channel selected in the Recipe Editor channel settings is configured on this dialog box.

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1) Number of Data
Sets the number of write destination or read source devices starting with the device address of the channel selected in the
Recipe Editor channel settings.
The continuous devices from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in the Data Settings
Table (6).
(2) Data Type
Selects the type of data for recipe values to write and device values that are read. This option can be configured only when
SD Memory Card or Internal Memory (ROM-User Program) is selected under Access to in Recipe Editor.
(3) Display Format
Selects the display format for Data in the Data Settings Table as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Values when saving data to a recipe file are Decimal.
(4)(import) button
Click this button to display the Open dialog box.
Select a recipe file and click Open to overwrite the data in the Data Settings Table with the selected recipe file.

(5)(export) button
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the recipe file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the recipe file for the channel
selected in the Recipe Editor channel settings.
The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, and spreadsheet software.

(6) Data Settings Table
Enter the recipe values to write to the device address for each number of the channel selected in the Recipe Editor channel
settings.
: Displays the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data.
: Displays the device address tag names set under Tag Name for the channel selected in the Recipe Editor
channel settings. If no tag name is set, the device address is displayed.
Device Address : Continuously set starting from the device address set under Device Address for the channel selected in
the Recipe Editor channel settings.
No.
Tag Name

11-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Data

: Double-click a cell to enter a recipe value. The value that can be configured varies based on the configured
Data Type and Display Format.
The recipe value cannot be entered when Read Only is selected under Action Setting in Recipe Editor.
The recipe value also cannot be entered when Internal Memory (ROM-Range 1) or Internal Memory(ROM-Range 2) is selected under Access to in Recipe Editor.

(7) OK button
Saves the Data Editor content and returns to Recipe Editor.
(8) Cancel button
Discards the Data Editor content and returns to Recipe Editor.

Auto Write Settings Dialog Box

The execution timing and the range of blocks for the auto write function are configured on this dialog box.

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

The timing to write the recipe values for the block numbers specified for the auto write function can be set by selecting the checkboxes.
A range for the block numbers can be specified with Start Number and End Number. All channels for the specified blocknumbers are applicable.
(1) When PLC is powered on
The auto write function is executed when the FC6A is turned on.
(2) When user program download is completed
The auto write function is executed when the user program has finished downloading to the FC6A.
(3) When PLC starts running
The auto write function is executed when the FC6A is set to run.
(4) When keep data error occurs
The auto write function is executed when the keep data error occurs.
(5) OK button
Saves the Auto Write Settings dialog box content and returns to Recipe Editor.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-21

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
(6) Cancel button
Discards the Auto Write Settings dialog box content and returns to Recipe Editor.

Duplicate Block dialog box

The settings of registered blocks can be copied to other blocks or used to overwrite other blocks.

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)

(1) From
Select the block number to copy. Only the block names of block numbers that have finished being configured will be
displayed.
(2) ToSelect the block numbers where the data in the block number selected under From will be copied to.
Multiple block numbers can be selected.
(3) OK button
Click this button to copy the data in the block number selected under From to the data in the block numbers selected underTo, and then to return to Recipe Editor.
The copied blocks are displayed under Recipe on the Project Window.
Block numbers that already exist are also overwritten. However, the block number displayed in Recipe Editor will not be
overwritten.
(4) Cancel button
Cancels copying the block and returns to Recipe Editor.

11-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
SD Memory Card Configuration Dialog Box
Use the SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box to configure the parameters required to create the autoexec.ini file, ZLD
file, files for MQTT Basic Settings, and files for Server Functions.

(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

buttonClick this button and select the file to import.
Import autoexec.ini: Restores the contents of the selected autoexec.ini file.

Import mqtt_basic_settings.ini: Restores the contents of the selected mqtt_basic_settings.ini file.

Note: Import mqtt_basic_settings.ini is valid only if the Specify with SD memory card check box is selected on the MQTT Settings dialog
box.

General Tab
On the General tab, configure the settings to create the necessary folder and files for Action.
(2) Action
DownloadThis parameter can be set from the following three targets.
TargetDescription

ZLD Project

Downloads a ZLD file to the CPU module.
For this setting, specify "download" in "loading_direction" key under the [COMMON_SETTING] section in theautoexec.ini file.

MQTT Basic Settings

Downloads files for MQTT Basic Settings to the CPU module.

Files for Server function Downloads files for Server Functions to the CPU module.
All

Downloads a ZLD file, files for MQTT Basic Settings and files for Server Functions to the CPU module.

UploadUploads the ZLD file from the CPU module.
For this setting, specify "upload" in "loading_direction" key under the [COMMON_SETTING] section in the autoexec.ini file.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-23

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
● Download a ZLD File
When Download is selected for Action, (3) and (4) are displayed.

(3) ZLD Project
File Name: Specify the file name of the ZLD file that will be downloaded.
Specify the file name in "src_file" key in the[PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD] section of the autoexec.ini file.

Create from current project: Creates a ZLD file from the currently opened project. Click
Configure to display the ZLD Project Configuration dialog
box. Configure the details of the ZLD file to download and click
OK. For details on the parameters, see “ZLD Project Configuration
Dialog Box Parameters” on page 11-35.

Upload from PLC (1-time upload): Enables the 1-time upload to the SD memory card.
The project downloaded to the CPU module can be uploaded to
the SD memory card and then downloaded to other CPU modules.
Specify the setting in "onetime_upload" key in the autoexec.ini
file. For details, see “ZLD Project Configuration Dialog Box
Parameters” on page 11-35.

(4) Download Options
Keep output during download: Select this check box to keep output while the ZLD file isdownloaded.
Specify the setting in "keep_output" key in the autoexec.ini file.

Automatic start after download: Select this check box to automatically set the run status after the
ZLD file is downloaded.
Specify the setting in "auto_start" key in the autoexec.ini file.

Clear device values after download: Select this check box to clear the data after the ZLD file isdownloaded.
Specify the setting in "clear_data" key in the autoexec.ini file.

Clear error after download: Select this check box to clear the error information after the ZLD
file is downloaded.
Specify the setting in "clear_error" key in the autoexec.ini file.

(5) User web page and custom web page
Save user web pages and custom web pages to SD
memory card

11-24

: Select this check box to save the user web pages and custom web
pages to the SD memory card. The user web pages and custom
web pages saved in the SD memory card can be used with the
web server. For details on the web server function, see Chapter 13"Web Server" in the FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual.
The setting is not written in the autoexec.ini file.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
● Upload a ZLD File
When Upload is selected for Action, (6) is displayed.

(6)(6) ZLD ProjectSpecify File Name

: Specify the file name of the ZLD file that will be uploaded.
Specify the file name in "dst_file" key in the [PROGRAM_UPLOAD]
section of the autoexec.ini file.

Use serial number as filename: The serial number of the CPU module is used as the file name of
the uploaded ZLD file. If the serial number is "12A3456","12A3456.zld" is created.
Specify the setting in "filename_option" key in the[PROGRAM_UPLOAD] section of the autoexec.ini file.

Note: The file name can be set only if the Specify File Name radio button is selected.

MQTT TabOn the MQTT tab, configure the settings to create the files for MQTT Basic Settings.
Note: Before creating the files for MQTT Basic Settings on the MQTT tab, check the Enable MQTT check box in the MQTT Settings dialog box toset the connection target and MQTT connection method. For details, see Chapter 3 "MQTT Settings Dialog Box" in the "Network User’s Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-25

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Server function Tab
On the Server function tab, configure the settings to create the files for Server Functions.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(1) Open batch setting wizard
Batch setting of certificate and private key wizard can be opened and a certificate and private key can be set in a
wizard format.Follow the displayed procedure to set.
Note: In this wizard, set the root certificate of the certificate authority and import it into the Windows certificate store. In addition, set thecertificate and private key used for the web server function of the Plus CPU module, and import them into Function Area Settings. For details,
see Chapter 13 "Web Server" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

(2) Certificate
Click the Import button to import the certificate used for SSL/TLS communication. A pem or der file can be imported.
WindLDR converts the pem file to a der file and saves it to the \FCDATA01\TLS folder on the SD memory card. Der files
larger than 2K bytes cannot be imported. If the certificate is imported, a server_certificate.der file will be generated.
Click the Export button to export the imported certificate.
Click the Details button to display the Certificate Information dialog box, which displays the information of the imported
certificate.
(3) Private key
Click the Import button to import the private key (encryption method RSA, key length up to 2048 bit) used for SSL/TLS
communication.
WindLDR supports files in the following formats: PKCS#1 format pem or der file PKCS#8 format (no encryption) pem or der file

If the private key is imported, a server_private_key.der file will be generated.
Click the Export button to export the imported private key.
(4) Delete Certificate and Private key after download
Set whether to delete the certificate and private key after downloading. If this check box is selected, delete theserver_certificate.der file and server_private_key.der file after downloading. The default setting is unselected.
This setting is specified in the delete_files key in the DELETE_FILES section of the server_tls.ini file.

11-26

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Download from SD Memory Card
The user programs, program comments, and CPU module system software can be downloaded to the CPU module using the SD
memory card. The basic settings for MQTT communication can also be downloaded to the CPU module.

Download the Project Being Edited as a ZLD FileA ZLD file can be created from the project opened in WindLDR, and it can be downloaded to the CPU module.

Computer(WindLDR)

autoexec.ini
File

FC6A Series MICROSmart
SD Memory Card

Save

DownloadSave

ZLD FileZLD File

While the ZLD file saved to the SD memory card is being downloaded, CPU module operation stops. When the ZLD file is set todownload the CPU module system software, the software is reset in order to rewrite the system software.
The ZLD file saved to the SD memory card can be downloaded by performing the following operations.
Operation
The CPU module power is turned on when an
SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes a download has been inserted
in the SD memory card slot.
Special internal relay M8250 is turned onwhen an SD memory card with anautoexec.ini file that executes a download
has been inserted in the SD memory cardslot.
An SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes a download is inserted in the
SD memory card slot.

A download is executed with the systemmenu on the HMI module.
For details, see "Downloading the User
Program (SD memory card –> CPU module)"on page 7-45.

ActionThe ZLD file specified by the autoexec.ini fileis downloaded to the CPU module.
The ZLD files saved to the\FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder are eligible tobe downloaded.

The download is not performed.
The ZLD file specified with the system menu
on the HMI module is downloaded to the CPU
module.
The ZLD files saved to the\FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder are eligible tobe downloaded.*1
 The download is executed even if there is

no autoexec.ini file on the SD memorycard.
 Even if there is an autoexec.ini file on the
SD memory card, the parameters are notread from it. For details, see "Creating theautoexec.ini File" on page 11-31.

When the CPU Module is Write Protected
The download is performed if the password
matches the write protection password set for
the ZLD file to be downloaded specified by theautoexec.ini file.
The download is not performed if thepasswords do not match.

The download is not performed.

The download is performed if the password
matches the password entered with the HMI
module.
The download is not performed if thepasswords do not match.

*1 The ZLD files that can be selected with the system menu on the HMI module are only those in the PROGRAM folder, and the maximum is 20
files. If there are 21 or more files in the PROGRAM folder, no ZLD file can be selected.

Data that is not saved to a ZLD file will not be downloaded. If the same data as the ZLD file is already in the CPU module, that data
will not be downloaded.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-27

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Example 1: When all of the data in the CPU module matches the ZLD file
The download is not executed.
CPU Module Data

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory Card

CPU Module Data
after Download

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.23

Ver1.23

Ver1.23

User program

Project1

Project1

Project1

Program comments

Comment1

Comment1

Comment1

CPU Module Data

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory Card

CPU Module Data
after Download

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.23

Ver1.30

Ver1.30

User program

Project1

Project1

Project1

Program comments

Comment1

Comment1

Comment1

CPU Module Data

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory Card

CPU Module Data
after Download

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.30

Ver1.30

Ver1.30

User program

Project1

Project2

Project2

Program comments

Comment1

Comment2

Comment2

Download

Example 2: When the system software versions are different
Only the system software will be downloaded.
Download

Example 3: When the user program and program comments are different
The user program and program comments will be downloaded.
Download

11-28

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Download a ZLD File Uploaded from the PLC (1-Time Upload)
When there is no ZLD file to download on an SD memory card with an autoexec.ini file that executes a download, an upload canbe executed instead of a download.
By using the auto upload function, the data uploaded from the CPU module can be copied to other CPU modules without having toedit the SD memory card or autoexec.ini file during the process.
Computer(WindLDR)FC6A Series MICROSmart
SD Memory Card
Save

Uploadautoexec.ini
File

ZLD File

FC6A Series MICROSmart
SD Memory Card
Download

ZLD File

Note: To perform the 1-time upload, it must be enabled in the autoexec.ini file that executes a download. For details, see "autoexec.ini File Format"
on page 11-36.

The 1-time upload function can be executed by using the following operations.
Operation
The CPU module power is turned on when an
SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes an auto upload has been
inserted in the SD memory card slot.
Special internal relay M8251 is turned onwhen an SD memory card with anautoexec.ini file that executes an auto upload
has been inserted in the SD memory card
slot.

ActionThe data is uploaded from the CPU modulewith the ZLD file name specified by theautoexec.ini file.
A ZLD file is saved to the\FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.

When the CPU Module is Read Protected

The upload is not performed.

An SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes an auto upload is inserted in
the SD memory card slot.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-29

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Download the MQTT Basic Settings
The MQTT basic settings can be downloaded to the Plus CPU module.
For details, see Chapter 3 "Download Files for MQTT Basic Settings" in the "Network User’s Manual".

Download Files for Server Functions
Files for Server Functions can be downloaded to the Plus CPU module.
Files for Server Functions can be downloaded by performing the following operations.
Operation

ActionThe Plus CPU module power is turned on when an SD memory card
to which a sever_tls.ini file was saved in the \FCDATA01\ folder isinserted in the SD memory card slot.
While the Plus CPU module is running, special internal relay M8401 isturned on when an SD memory card to which a sever_tls.ini file wassaved in the \FCDATA01\ folder is inserted in the SD memory cardslot.
An SD memory card to which a sever_tls.ini file was saved in the\FCDATA01\ folder is inserted in the SD memory card slot.

The server_certificate.der file and server_private_key.der file stored
in the \FCDATA01\TLS\ folder are downloaded to the Plus CPU
module.

The download is not performed.

Notes:
 Files for Server Functions can be downloaded even if the Plus CPU Module is write protected.
 If you select Use data that are downloaded from SD memory card check box in Web Server Settings of Ethernet port 1 tab on the
Function Area Settings dialog box, and download that user program, make sure to download the files for Server Functions from the SD
memory card.
 If you clear Use data that are downloaded from SD memory card check box in Web Server Settings of Ethernet port 1 tab on the
Function Area Settings dialog box, and download that user program, the files for Server Functions set in the user program are used, evenif files for Server Functions are downloaded from an SD memory card.
 The certificate and private key downloaded from the SD memory card cannot be uploaded.
 The web sever communication does not work if you saved the pem-formatted certificate or private key in the SD memory card anddownloaded to the CPU module. Convert the files to the der format and save them to the \FCDATA01\TLS\ folder on the SD memory card.
(Save the private key in PKCS#1 format.) You can use the SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box in WindLDR and the Data FileManager to convert pem files to der files. For details on the Data File Manager, see Chapter 4 "Command Line" in the Data File Manager
User's Manual.
 For details on web server function, see Chapter 13 "Web Sever" in the FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual.

11-30

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Creating the autoexec.ini FileTo download a ZLD file to the CPU module using an SD memory card, save an autoexec.ini file to the SD memory card.
Note: The autoexec.ini file is created according to the file format described in this section. By using WindLDR, the autoexec.ini file can be createdby configuring a dialog box and without needing to be aware of the file format. To create the autoexec.ini file using Notepad or another text
editor, type in the sections, keys, and parameters according to the file format and save the file as "autoexec.ini".

Creating the autoexec.ini File Using WindLDRThis section describes the operation procedure to create an autoexec.ini file using WindLDR.
● Operation procedure
1. On the Configuration tab, in the SD Card group, select Configuration.

The SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the General tab.

Configure the contents and operation of the autoexec.ini file on this tab.

3. Under Action, select Download and select ZLD Project.
4. Under ZLD Project, set the file name and creation method of the ZLD file to download.

For the parameter settings, see “General Tab” on page 11-23 for the SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box.
5. Set the download options.

For the parameter settings, see “General Tab” on page 11-23 for the SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box.
6. Set whether to save user web pages to SD memory card.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-31

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
7. Click OK.

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

8. Select the drive where the SD memory card is inserted and then click OK.

The \FCDATA01\ folder is created on the SD memory card. The autoexec.ini file is saved directly under the \FCDATA01\ folder.
If a ZLD file is created from the current project, the ZLD file is saved to the \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.
This concludes creating an autoexec.ini file.
Note: A standalone ZLD file can be created and edited using WindLDR. For details, see “Creating a ZLD File Using WindLDR” on page 11-33

11-32

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Creating a ZLD File Using WindLDRZLD files are created with the following procedure.
1. Click(application) > Save As > ZLD Project.

The ZLD Project Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2. Configure the ZLD file details.

3. Click OK.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-33

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
4. Enter the file name in File name, specify the folder to save to, and click Save.

This concludes creating a ZLD file.

11-34

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR DZLD Project Configuration Dialog Box Parameters

This section describes the dialog box parameter settings required to create a ZLD file.
■ ZLD File tab

(1)
(2)
(3)

(1) Comment data
Select this check box to include program comments in the ZLD file.
Click Setting to display the Comment Download Settings dialog box. Select the comments to download and click OK. For
details on the Comment Download Settings dialog box, see "Comment Download Settings dialog box" on page 11-35.
(2) System software (CPU module)
To include the system software in the ZLD file, select this check box and select the version of the system software.
(3) ZLD Project information
This area displays the current user program size, maximum user program size, current comment size, and maximum
comment size.
■ Comment Download Settings dialog box

(1)

(2)

(1) Comments to download
Select the check boxes for comments to download.
(2) Program Information
This area displays the size of the current user program and comments.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-35

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
autoexec.ini File Format

The autoexec file is made up of the following three sections.
SectionDescription[COMMON_SETTING]

The section that describes the autoexec.ini file action.

[PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD]

The section that describes the operation when downloading data from the SD memory card.

[PROGRAM_UPLOAD]

The section that describes the operation when uploading data to the SD memory card.

The keys and parameters are described for each section.
If there is no key or if the specified parameter is not applicable, the default value is used for operation.
■ [COMMON_SETTING] section keys and parametersKeyloading_direction

Description

Parameternone

No download or upload is performed.

download

A download is performed from the SD
memory card according to the[PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD] section.

uploadAn upload is performed to the SD memory
card according to the [PROGRAM_UPLOAD]
section.

Specifies the autoexec file action.

Default Valuenone■ [PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD] section keys and parameters
Key

Description

Parameter

Default Value

src_file

Specifies the file name of the ZLD filethat will be downloaded from the SD
memory card.

Specify the name of a ZLD file in the \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\
folder.
 The file name is enclosed in quotation marks (" ").
 The file name is a maximum of 128 characters.
However, when downloading the CPU module system
software, output is turned off regardless of this option's
setting.

"download.zld"

auto_startSpecifies the operation status after the
download is executed.

clear_data

Specifies whether or not to clear all
device data including keep data after
the user program download is
executed.
The data that will be cleared is inputs,
outputs, internal relays, shift registers,
data registers, timer current values,and counter current values.
Timer present values, counter preset
values, special internal relays, andspecial data registers will not becleared.

clear_error

auto_upload

keep_output

11-36

Specifies whether or not to clear error
information after the download is
executed.

Specifies whether or not to use theauto upload function when there is no
ZLD file.
Specifies whether or not to keep
output while the user program isdownloading.

true

Set to run after the download is executed.

false

Set to stop after the download is executed.

true

Clears all device data including keep data
after the download is executed.

false

Does not clear all device data including keep
data after the download is executed.

true

Clears error information after the download is
executed.

false

Does not clear error information after the
download is executed.

true

If the ZLD file specified by src_file does notexist, an upload is executed instead of adownload. The file name of the ZLD file to
upload is specified by src_file.

false

If the ZLD file specified by src_file does notexist, a download is not executed.

true

Keeps output while executing the download.

false

Does not keep output while executing thedownload.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

false

false

false

false

false

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
■ [PROGRAM_UPLOAD] section keys and parametersKey

dst_file

filename_option

Description

Parameter

Default Value

Specifies the name of the ZLD file thatwill be uploaded to the SD memory
card.

Specify the name of a ZLD file in the \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\
folder.
 The file name is enclosed in quotation marks (" ").
 The file name is a maximum of 128 characters.
However, when downloading the CPU module system
software, output is turned off regardless of this option's
setting.

"upload.zld"

Specify to dynamically generate the file
name.

sn

none

The file will be created using the serial
number of the CPU module instead of the
dst_file file name.
If the serial number is "12A3456","12A3456.zld" is created.*1

none

Creates the file using the name specified by
dst_file.

*1 If the CPU module serial number cannot be correctly read, filename_option operates as if none was specified.

Restrictions

 The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single-byte characters including line feed codes. All the text on the line will be ignored if

there are more than 512 single-byte characters on the line.
 Each item must be described as a single line. If a line feed occurs before the end of the line, all characters after the line feed are ignored.
 Only line feed codes of the format generally supported by Windows (CR+LF) are supported. If any other line feed format is used, theautoexec.ini file will fail to run properly.
 Data from a semicolon (;) to the line feed code is ignored. The space after the semicolon can be freely used for comments. However, if theautoexec.ini file is opened in WindLDR and then saved again, comments written after the semicolon will be deleted and the file will only
contain standard comments.
 Only strings with single-byte characters can be used.
 If the same key appears multiple times, only the bottom key is valid.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-37

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
■ autoexec.ini file example[COMMON_SETTING];; loading_direction;; "download" : download to PLC, with [PRGRAM_DOWNLOAD] section's settings.
;; "upload" : upload to SD card, with [PRGRAM_UPLOAD] section's settings.
;; "none" : no operation, ignore both [PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD] and [PROGRAM_UPLOAD] sections' settings.
loading_direction=download[PROGRAM_DOWNLOAD];; src_file;; zld file's name for download in \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.
src_file="download.zld";; auto_start;; "true" : start PLC after downloading user program.
;; "false" : keep stop PLC after downloading user program.
auto_start=false;; clear_data;; "true" : clear all devices' data includes keep data after downloading user program.
;; "false" : not clear all devices' data includes keep data after downloading user program.
clear_data=false;; clear_error;; "true" : clear error status after downloading user program.
;; "false" : not clear error status after downloading user program.
clear_error=false;; auto_upload;; "true" : upload alternatively, if not exist ZLD file pointed by 'src_file' when downloading.
;; "false" : do nothing, if not exist ZLD file pointed by 'src_file' when downloading.
auto_upload=false;; keep_output;; "true" : keep output while downloading the user program.
;; "false" : not keep output while downloading the user program.
keep_output=false[PROGRAM_UPLOAD];; dst_file;; zld file's name for upload into \FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.
dst_file="upload.zld";; filename_option;; name zld file automatically;; "sn" : use serial number of CPU module as zld filename for uploading;; "none" : use 'dst_file' as zld filename for uploding
filename_option=none
11-38

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Creating the mqtt_basic_settings.ini FileTo download the files for MQTT Basic Settings to the Plus CPU module using an SD memory card, save the mqtt_basic_settings.ini
and certificates (der format) to the SD memory card.
Note: The mqtt_basic_settings.ini file is created according to the file format described in this section. By using WindLDR, themqtt_basic_settings.ini file can be created by configuring a dialog box and without needing to be aware of the file format. To create themqtt_basic_settings.ini file using Notepad or another text editor, type in the sections, keys, and parameters according to the file format andsave the file as "mqtt_basic_settings.ini".

Creating the mqtt_basic_settings.ini File Using WindLDRThis section describes the procedure to create an mqtt_basic_settings.ini file using WindLDR.
● Operation procedure
1. Select the Enable MQTT in the MQTT Settings dialog box.
2. Configure the Connect to and MQTT Connection Method.
3. Configure the other necessary settings, and then click OK.

The MQTT Settings dialog box is closed.
4. On the Configuration tab, in the SD Card group, select Configuration.

The SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5. Under Action, select Download and select MQTT Basic Settings.
6. Click the MQTT tab.

Set the contents of the mqtt_basic_settings.ini file on this tab.
For the parameter settings, see Chapter 3 "MQTT Settings" in the "Network User’s Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-39

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
7. Click OK.

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

8. Select the drive where the SD memory card is inserted and then click OK.

The \FCDATA01\ folder is created on the SD memory card. The mqtt_basic_settings.ini file is saved directly under the\FCDATA01\ folder. The root certificate, client certificate, and client private key are saved in the \FCDATA01\TLS\ folder.
This concludes creating the mqtt_basic_settings.ini file.

11-40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Creating the server_tls.ini FileTo download the files for Server Functions to the Plus CPU module using an SD memory card, save the server_tls.ini, certificate(der format) and private key (der format) to the SD memory card.
Note: The server_tls.ini file is created according to the file format described in this section. By using WindLDR, the server_tls.ini file can becreated by configuring a dialog box and without needing to be aware of the file format. To create the server_tls.ini file using Notepad oranother text editor, type in the sections, keys, and parameters according to the file format and save the file as "server_tls.ini".

Creating the server_tls.ini File Using WindLDRThis section describes the procedure to create an server_tls.ini file using WindLDR.
● Operation procedure
1. Select Use data that are downloaded from SD memory card check box in Web Server Settings of Ethernet port 1

tab on the Function Area Settings dialog box.

2. Configure the other necessary settings, and then click OK.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is closed.
3. On the Configuration tab, in the SD Card group, select Configuration.

The SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box is displayed.

4. Click the Server function tab.

Set the contents of the server_tls.ini file on this tab.
For the parameter settings, see “Server function Tab” on page 11-26 for the SD Memory Card Configuration dialog box.

5. Click OK.

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

6. Select the drive where the SD memory card is inserted and then click OK.

The \FCDATA01\ folder is created on the SD memory card. The server_tls.ini file is saved directly under the \FCDATA01\ folder.
The certificate and private key are saved in the \FCDATA01\TLS\ folder.
This concludes creating the server_tls.ini file.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-41

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
server_tls. ini File Format

The server_tls.ini file is made up of the following 1 section.
Section[DELETE_FILES]

Description
The section that describes whether to delete the server_certificate.der file and server_private_key.der fileafter the download.

■ [DELETE_FILES] section keys and parametersKey

delete_files

Description

Parameter

Specifies whether to delete theserver_certificate.der file andserver_private_key.der file after the
download.

true

Deletes server_certificate.der file andserver_private_key.der file.

false

Does not delete server_certificate.der fileand server_private_key.der file.

Default Value

false

Restrictions

 The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single-byte characters including line feed codes. All the text on the line will be ignored if

there are more than 512 single-byte characters on the line.
 Each item must be described as a single line. If a line feed occurs before the end of the line, all characters after the line feed are ignored.
 Only line feed codes of the format generally supported by Windows (CR+LF) are supported. If any other line feed format is used, themqtt_basic_settings.ini file will fail to run properly.
 Data from a semicolon (;) to the line feed code is ignored. The space after the semicolon can be freely used for comments.
 Only strings with single-byte characters can be used.
 If the same key appears multiple times, only the bottom key is valid.

11-42

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Upload to SD Memory Card
The user program and system software written to the CPU module can be uploaded to the SD memory card.

Upload a ZLD File
The user programs and system software written to the CPU module can be uploaded to the SD memory card.
Computer(WindLDR)FC6A Series MICROSmart
SD Memory Card
Save

Uploadautoexec.ini
File

ZLD File

Data can be uploaded while the CPU module is running.
By performing the following operations, the CPU module's user program and system software can be uploaded to the SD memory
card as a ZLD file.
Operation
The CPU module power is turned on when an
SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes an upload has been inserted in
the SD memory card slot.
Special internal relay M8251 is turned onwhen an SD memory card with anautoexec.ini file that executes an upload has
been inserted in the SD memory card slot.

ActionThe data is uploaded from the CPU modulewith the ZLD file name specified by theautoexec.ini file.
The ZLD file is uploaded to the\FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.

When the CPU Module is Read Protected

The upload is not performed.

An SD memory card with an autoexec.ini filethat executes an upload is inserted in the SD
memory card slot.

An upload is executed with the system menu
on the HMI module.
For details, see "Uploading the User Program(CPU module –> SD memory card)" on page
7-46.

The data is uploaded with the file namespecified by the system menu on the HMI
module.
The ZLD file is uploaded to the\FCDATA01\PROGRAM\ folder.
 The upload is executed even if there is no
autoexec.ini file on the SD memory card.
 Even if there is an autoexec.ini file on the
SD memory card, it will not be read. For
details, see "Creating the autoexec.ini
File" on page 11-31.

The upload is performed if the password
matches the password entered with the HMI
module.
The upload is not performed if the passwords
do not match.

An upload is not performed for data that has not been written to the CPU module. If a ZLD file that contains the same data as the
CPU module data already exists on the SD memory card, it will not be overwritten by the upload. If any of the data is different, allof the data will be uploaded and the file will be overwritten with a new ZLD file.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-43

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Example 1: When there is no ZLD file on the SD memory card
All data will be uploaded and a ZLD file will be created.
UploadCPU Module Data

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.30

User program

Project1

Program comments

Comment1

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory CardZLD File Data on the SD
Memory Card after Upload

None(No ZLD file on the SD memory
card)Ver1.30
Project1
Comment1

Example 2: When the system software versions are different
The ZLD file will be overwritten with a new ZLD file.
CPU Module Data

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory CardZLD File Data on the SD
Memory Card after Upload

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.30

Ver1.23

Ver1.30

User program

Project1

Project1

Project1

Program comments

Comment1

Comment1

Comment1

CPU Module Data

Data Stored in the ZLD File on
the SD Memory CardZLD File Data on the SD
Memory Card after Upload

CPU Module
System Software

Ver1.30

Ver1.30

Ver1.30

User program

Project2

Project1

Project2

Program comments

Comment2

Comment1

Comment2

UploadExample 3: When the user program and program comments are different
The ZLD file will be overwritten with a new ZLD file.
Upload

11-44

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Used Special Devices
Download and Upload a ZLD File

The special internal relays and the special data registers used by uploads and downloads that use the SD memory card are as
follows.
Note: R/W stands for read/write and allows reading and writing. R is read-only. W is write-only.

Special Internal Relays
DeviceAddress

Function

Description

R/W

M8250

Download from SD Memory Card
Execution Flag

When M8250 is turned on, a ZLD file is downloaded from the SD
memory card. The file that will be downloaded is the ZLD filespecified in the autoexec.ini file.

R/W

M8251

Upload to SD Memory Card
Execution Flag

When M8251 is turned on, a ZLD file is uploaded to the SD
memory card.
A ZLD file is created with the file name specified in theautoexec.ini file.

R/W

M8252

Executing SD Memory Card
Download

M8252 is turned on when starting execution of the download fromthe SD memory card, and when the download has completed, it isturned off.

R

M8253

Executing SD Memory Card Upload

M8253 is turned on when starting execution of the upload to the
SD memory card, and when the upload has completed, it isturned off.

R

M8254

SD Memory Card Download/Upload
Execution Completed Output

M8254 is turned off when starting execution of the download fromthe SD memory card or the upload to the SD memory card, andwhen the download or upload has completed, it is turned on.

R

SD Memory Card Download/Upload
Execution Error Output

M8255 is updated when execution of the download from the SD
memory card or the upload to the SD memory card hascompleted.
M8255 is turned off when the SD memory card download or
upload has normally ended or when the user program was not
uploaded or downloaded.
M8255 is turned on when an error occurs during the SD memory
card download or upload.
For details, see "D8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload
Execution Error Information" on page 11-46.

R

M8255

Special Data Registers
DeviceAddress

Function

Description

R/W

D8254

SD Memory Card Download/Upload
Execution Information

Information about the SD memory card download/upload thatwas executed. For details, see "D8254: SD Memory Card
Download/Upload Execution Status" on page 11-45.

R

D8255

SD Memory Card Download/Upload
Execution Status

The status of the SD memory card download/upload that was
executed. For details, see "D8255: SD Memory Card Download/
Upload Execution Error Information" on page 11-46.

R■ D8254: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Status
The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

12

11

8

7

4

3

Reserved=0

Reserved=0
Download/upload Direction
1: Download from SD Memory Card
2: Upload to SD Memory Card

Bit

2

1

0

Execution Trigger
1: When Power Turned On
2: Special Device
3: When SD Memory Card Inserted
4: HMI Operation

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-45

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
■ D8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Information
StatusDownload0

Normal termination

1

No SD memory card is inserted.

2
3―
Invalid SD memory card format.

4
5

Upload―The ZLD file name specified by src_file is invalid.*1

6

Failed to read the ZLD file saved to the SD memory card.

7

No ZLD file on the SD memory card.

8
9
10

*2

―

M8255

Normal terminationOFF

No SD memory card is inserted.

ON

The SD memory card is write protected.

ON

Invalid SD memory card format.

ON

The SD memory card is full and no folders or files can becreated.

ON

The ZLD file name specified by dst_file is invalid.*1

OFF

Failed to write the ZLD file to the SD memory card.*2

OFF

―

ON

A program syntax error occurred and the ZLD file could
not be created.

ON No autoexec.ini file.

 No autoexec.ini file.

 The autoexec.ini could not be read.

 The autoexec.ini could not be read.

The program download is password protected*3.

The program upload is password protected*3.

ON
ON

11

―

―

12

The ZLD file saved on the SD memory card has an invalid
file size.

―

―

ON

13

The target model of the ZLD file saved on the SD memory
card is different.

―

ON

14

Other download processing is being executed.

―

ON

15

The download was not executed because the user
program written to the FC6A was the same as the data in
the ZLD file saved to the SD memory card.

―

OFF

16

The download was not executed because the system
software and user program written to the FC6A was thesame as the data in the ZLD file saved to the SD memory
card.

The download was not executed because the system
software and user program written to the FC6A was thesame as the data in the ZLD file saved to the SD memory
card.

OFF

*1 Double-byte characters and the single-byte characters \ / : , ; * ? " < > | cannot be used in the file name.
*2 When file data cannot be normally written or read due to the data in the file becoming corrupted or a failure of a specific area of the SD memory
card.
*3 Except when the password has been canceled using the HMI module.

Download files for MQTT Basic Settings
For details of the special internal relays and the special data registers used to download the files for MQTT Basic Settings, see
Chapter 3 "Download Files for MQTT Basic Settings" in the "Network User’s Manual".

11-46

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Download files for Server Function
The special internal relays and the special data registers used to download Files for Server Functions are as follows.
Note: R/W stands for read/write and allows reading and writing. R is read-only. W is write-only.

Special Internal Relay
Address

Description

R/W

M8401

Download Files for Server Functions
from SD Memory Card Execution
Flag

When M8401 is turned on, Files for Server Functions are downloaded.

R/W

M8402

Download Files for Server Functions
from SD Memory Card Execution
Completed Output

M8402 is turned off when downloading Files for Server Functions is started, and
it is turned on once the download is finished.

R

M8403

Download Files for Server Functions
from SD Memory Card Error Output

M8403 is turned off when downloading Files for Server Functions is started, and
it is turned on if an error occurs during the process.

R

Special Data Registers
Address

Description

R/W

D8820

Download Files for Server
Functions from SD Memory Card
Execution Information

Information in executing the download of Files for Server Functions. For details,
see “D8820: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card
Execution Information” on page 11-47.

R

D8821

Download Files for Server
Functions from SD Memory Card
Execution Error Information

Error information in executing the download of Files for Server Functions. For
details, see “D8821: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card
Execution Error Information” on page 11-48.

R■ D8820: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Information
The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

15

8

7

0

D8820

Reserved
0 (fixed)

Reserved
0 (fixed)
Download/upload Direction
1: Download

Execution Trigger
1: Power-up
2: Special Device

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-47

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
■ D8821: Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Error Information
D8821(Error Code)Description

M8403

ROM Status0

Normal termination

OFF

Refreshed1

M8401 (Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Flag) was
turned on when an SD memory card was not inserted.

ON

Not refreshed

2

The SD memory card is write protected.

ON

Not refreshed3

Invalid SD memory card format.

ON

Not refreshed4

M8401 (Download Files for Server Functions from SD Memory Card Execution Flag) was
turned on when there is no server_tls.ini file on the SD memory card.

ON

Not refreshed

5

There is no server_certificate.der file on the SD memory card or reading the file failed.*1

ON

Not refreshed

6

There is no server_private.der file on the SD memory card or reading the file failed.*1

ON

Not refreshed

7

-

-

-

8

Attempted to save server_certificate.der file to the SD memory card, but the file size isinvalid.

ON

Not refreshed

9

Attempted to save server_private_key.der file to the SD memory card, but the file size isinvalid.

ON

Not refreshed

10

-

-

-

11

Writing Files for Server Functions failed.

ON

Undefined

12

Reading the server_tls.ini file failed.*1

ON

Not refreshed*1 Status when the data in Files for Server Functions cannot be read properly from the SD memory card for a reason such as an error in the data
in Files for Server Functions or a specific area on the SD memory card has malfunctioned.

11-48

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
SD Memory Card Maintenance with Data File Manager
The following operations can be performed on the SD memory card inserted in the FC6A by using Data File Manager.
 Display file list
 Download files and folders
 Upload files and folders
 Delete files and folders
 Format SD memory card

These operations are called SD memory card maintenance. To use SD memory card maintenance, connect the FC6A to a PC witheither of the following methods.
 Connect the FC6A and a PC using a USB cable.

Example of using the USB port

FC6A Series MICROSmart
Windows
Computer

SD Memory Card

USB Maintenance Cable (HG9Z-XCM42)

USB Port

Type A PlugMini-B PlugUSB Port(USB 2.0 Mini-B Connector)

 Connect the FC6A and a PC over Ethernet.

Example of using Ethernet Port 1

Windows Computer

Ethernet Hub

FC6A Series MICROSmart
SD Memory Card

Ethernet Port 1
Notes:
 Data File Manager uses the maintenance communication protocol, so it will not operate if the environment cannot perform maintenancecommunication (for example, with Ethernet communication, communication is not possible if the port numbers are different).
 The operating speed varies according the communication status with the FC6A and the capacity of the SD memory card.
 The basic SD memory card and file system restrictions are the same as the restrictions for the DLOG instruction and the TRACE instruction.
 Device Manager functions other than SD memory card maintenance can be used with serial communication over Serial Port 1 or acommunication cartridge. For details, see "Other Data File Manager Functions" on page 11-58.
 SD memory card maintenance using the Data File Manager can also be done with the command line. You can download the files for MQTT

Basic Settings and the files for Server Functions with the command line. For details, refer to "Chapter 4 Command Line" of Data File Manager
User's Manual.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-49

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Starting and Exiting Data File Manager■ Starting Data File Manager
When a CPU module with an inserted SD memory card is connected to a PC, Data File Manager can be started for editing.
1. On the Online tab, in the PLC group, click Maintenance and then Data File Manager.

Notes:
 A connection cannot be made using the pass-through function. Clear the Use HGxG Pass-Through check box.
 A connection cannot be made using the maintenance function over Modbus TCP. When the communication method is Serial, clear the Use
maintenance communication over Modbus TCP check box.
 The standalone Data File Manager application can be downloaded from the IDEC homepage (at the following URL) free of charge.
http://jp.idec.com/ja/download/search.aspx?category=&tab=software

Data File Manager starts.

11-50

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Exiting Data File Manager
1. Click X at the upper-right corner of Data File Manager.

Data File Manager exits.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-51

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
SD Memory Card MaintenanceDisplay file list

Data File Manager acquires the list of files and folders from the SD memory card inserted in the FC6A and displays them in a tree
view (1) and a folder details view (2).

(3)

(4)

(2)

(1)
File Name Last modified
date and time

File Size

Extension type(5)(1) Tree view
Displays the folder structure as a tree. Double-click a folder to move to the level in that folder (up or down).
1st level (root): Displays the connected FC6A as an icon and a string.

2nd level: Displays the connected FC6A SD memory card as an icon and a string.

3rd level and lower: Displays the SD memory card folders as a tree.
(2) Folder details view
Displays a list of the files and folders in the folder selected on the tree view.
Displayed files and folder can be renamed and new folders can be created.
To rename files and folders
Select a file or folder and select Rename on the right-click menu or press the F2 key. It will then be possible to edit thename, so rename the file or folder.
To create a folder
Click Create Folder on the right-click menu or click Create Folder. The Create Folder dialog box is displayed. Enter thename and click OK.

(3) Address field
Displays the path of the folder selected in the tree view from the 3rd level and lower.
However, when the CPU module and PC are connected over Ethernet, the IP address and port number are displayed at the
beginning of the path.
When connected to the PC over USB/SD memory card name/folder path
Example: /SD/FCDATA01/
When connected to the PC over Ethernet
IP address:port number/SD memory card name/folder path
Example: 192.168.1.100:80/SD/FCDATA01/

11-52

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
(4) Toolbar
ButtonCommand

Description
The Connection Settings dialog box is displayed.

Connect
Start

Changes the FC6A status from stop to run.

Stop

Changes the FC6A status from run to stop.
ZLD project file (.zld) saved in the computer can be downloaded to the CPU module.

Download

UploadDownload ZLD project file (.zld)

The same behavior with when Download icon is clicked.

Download system software

The system software of FC6A can be updated.

Download file

Files stored in the computer can be downloaded to the SD memory card inserted in
FC6A.

Download folder

Folder stored in the computer can be downloaded to the SD memory card inserted
in FC6A.
The user program stored in the CPU module can be saved in the computer as a ZLD
project file (.zld).

Upload ZLD project file (.zld)

The same behavior with when Upload icon is clicked.

Upload file/folder

Files and folders shown in the folder details view can be saved in the computer.

RefreshThe latest status is acquired from the CPU module and the view is updated.

Download device address data (.csv)

Device address data (.csv) that is stored in the computer can be written to thedevice addresses of the connected target.

Upload device address data (.csv)

The values of the device addresses of FC6A can be read and saved in the computer
as a csv file.

Clear

Device values stored in the internal memory of FC6A can be cleared. Types of thedevices that are cleared are as follows: inputs, outputs, internal relays, shift registers,
data registers, timer current values, and counter current values.

Clear values in all device
addresses
Clear Error

Error information stored in the internal memory of FC6A can be cleared.

Format SD memory card

SD memory card inserted in FC6A can be formatted.

OptionOptional functions of Data File Manager can be configured.
Help for Data File Manager is displayed.

Help

Help

The same behavior with when Help icon is clicked.

About Data File Manager

About Data File Manager dialog box is displayed.

(5) Execution log view
The operation log is displayed by executing the following operations.
Operation

Description

Log format

DeleteDisplays the number of files that were successfully deleted and the numberof files that failed to be deleted.

DeleteSuccess: {0} file(s), Failed: {1} file(s)UploadDisplays the number of files that were successfully uploaded and thenumber of files that failed to be uploaded.

UploadSuccess: {0} file(s), Failed: {1} file(s)Download

Displays the number of files that were successfully downloaded and thenumber of files that failed to be downloaded.

Download
Success: {0} file(s), Failed: {1} file(s)Run/stop operations using Data File Manager

The FC6A can be set to run or stop using Data File Manager operations.
Run procedure

1. Click the toolbar

button.
A confirmation message is displayed.

2. Click Yes.

This concludes the run operation using Data File Manager.


Stop procedure
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-53

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
1. Click the toolbar

button.
A confirmation message is displayed.

2. Click Yes.

This concludes the stop operation using Data File Manager.

Download files and folders

Files and folders saved on the PC will be written to the SD memory card inserted in the FC6A.


Operation procedure to download a file

1. Select the target folder for the download in the Tree View.

2. Click on the down-pointing triangle button on the right of the

The Open dialog box is displayed.

(Download) button and click Download File.

3. Select the files to download and click Open.

The download starts.

This concludes downloading files.
Note: The selected files can be downloaded by selecting files in Explorer of the PC and dragging and dropping them into the folder detailed view.


Operation procedures to download a folder

11-54

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
1. Select the target folder for the download in the Tree View.

2. Click on the down-pointing triangle button on the right of the

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

(Download) button and click Download Folder.

3. Select the folder to download and click Open.

The download starts.

This concludes downloading folders.
Note: The selected folder can be downloaded by selecting folder in Explorer of the PC and dragging and dropping it into the folder detailed view.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-55

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Upload files and folders

Files and folders displayed in the folder details view will be saved to the PC.
1. Select the files and folders to upload in the folder details view.

2. Click on the down-pointing triangle button on the right of the

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

(Upload) button and click Upload File/Folder.

3. Select the destination and then click OK.

The upload starts.

This concludes uploading files and folders.
Note: The selected files/folders can be uploaded by selecting folder in the folder detailed view and dragging and dropping them into the Explorer of
the PC.

11-56

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Delete files and folders

Files and folders displayed in the folder details view will be deleted.
Operation Procedures
1. Select a file or folder in the folder details view and select Delete on the right-click menu or press the Delete key.

A delete confirmation message is displayed.

2. Click Yes.

This concludes deleting files and folders.

Formatting the SD Memory Card

The SD memory card inserted in the FC6A will be formatted.
1. Click(Format SD Memory Card) on the toolbar.
A format confirmation message is displayed.

2. Click Yes.

The format is executed.

This concludes formatting the SD memory card.
Note: Formatting the SD memory card on the FC6A is comparable to formatting it with the quick format option in Windows.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-57

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Other Data File Manager Functions
In addition to SD memory card maintenance, the follow operations can be performed with Device Manager. These operations canbe used with serial communication over Serial Port 1 or a communication cartridge.
 Display status Downloading and uploading user programs Update system software

Display status

Click the 1st level (root) in the tree view to display the FC6A status.

When displaying the status, the address field is displayed as follows.

When connected to the PC over USB

Slash (/)
Example: /When connected to the PC over Ethernet

IP address: Port number
Example: 192.168.1.100:80/

11-58

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Downloading user program

A user program (ZLD file) saved on the PC will be written to the CPU module.
1. Clickon the toolbar.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the ZLD file to download and click Open.

The download starts.

Note: If the user program is protected, the Password Error dialog box is displayed. Enter the correct password and click OK. For details, see"User Program Protection" on page 5-57.

This concludes downloading the user program.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-59

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Uploading user program

The user program on the CPU module will be saved to the PC.
1. Clickon the toolbar.
The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the destination and the file name and then click OK.

The upload starts.

Note: If the user program is protected, the Password Error dialog box is displayed. Enter the correct password and click OK. For details, see"User Program Protection" on page 5-57.

This concludes uploading the user program.

Update system software

The CPU module system software will be updated.
(Download) button and click Download System Software.
The Download system software dialog box is displayed.
The rest of the operation procedure is the same as downloading system software in WindLDR. For details, see the procedurefrom step 3 in "Upgrade FC6A System Software" on page A-10.

1. Click on the down-pointing triangle button on the right of theThis concludes updating the system software.

11-60

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Downloading and Uploading Device Address Data
Device Address Data
Device Address Data Format
The device address data consists of group of values. The number of values is specified with Number of Data in Device Address
Data Setting dialog box.
"(Value of device address)","(Value of device address number + 1)","(Value of device address number + 2)",.
.
.
"(Value of device address number + (n-1))",

Number of data (n)Creating Device Address Data with Text Editor
The device address data can be created with software tool such as Notepad, text editor from the third party, or spread sheet
software.
1. Describe "Device Address Value", comma (,), and line feed as many as the number of data.

Example: When the number of data is 5 and values are 1111, 2222, 3333, 4444, 5555 in this order
1111,
2222,
3333,
4444,
5555,
2. Save the file with the extension (.csv).

Supported Device Address
The range of device addresses that can be read or written and the maximum number of data are as follows.
Device Name

FC6A-C16/-C24/-C40/-C40XEJ

FC6A-D16/-D32

Device Address

Max Number of Data

Device Address

Max Number of Data

M0 to M7997

6,400

M0 to M7997

6,400

M10000 to M17497

6,000

M10000 to M21247

9,000

M8000 to M8317

256

M8000 to M9997

1,600

R0 to R255

256

R0 to R255

256

Timer preset value

TP0 to TP1023

1,024

TP0 to TP1999

2,000

Counter preset value

CP0 to CP511

512

CP0 to CP511

512

D0 to D7999

8,000

D0 to D7999

8,000Internal relay
Special internal relay
Shift register

Data register

D10000 to D55999

46,000

D10000 to D61999

52,000Special data register

D8000 to D8499

500

D8000 to D8899

900

Non-retentive dataregister--

D70000 to D269999

200,000

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-61

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Downloading Device Address Data

The device address data (.csv) that is stored in the computer can be written to the device addresses of the FC6A.
Operation Procedure
1. Click on the(Download Device Address Data (.csv)) on the toolbar.
The Device Address Data Setting dialog box is displayed.

2. Configure the device address to which data is written and click Download button.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

 Device TypeSpecify the device type of the device address to which the data is written.
 Address Number

Specify the device address number of the device address to which the data is written.
 Number of Data

Number of data to write to the target device addresses.
Note: For details on available device addresses of FC6A, see "Supported Device Address" on page 11-61.

3. Select a device address data (.csv) and click Open button.

Downloading the device address data starts.

This concludes downloading the device address data.
Notes:
 Do not turn off the FC6A while downloading the device address data.
 Cycle the power to the FC6A and download ZLD project file again in the following cases: Downloading device address data fails and the communication with FC6A becomes not possible.
 Communication troubles such as cable disconnection or power fail occur and FC6A does not respond.

11-62

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Uploading Device Address Data

The device address data (.csv) can be read from FC6A and saved as a CSV file in the computer.
Operation Procedure
1. Click on the(Upload Device Address Data (.csv)) on the toolbar.
The Device Address Data Setting dialog box is displayed.

2. Configure the device address from which data is read and click Upload button.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

 Device TypeSpecify the device type of the device address from which the data is read.
 Address Number

Specify the device address number of the device address from which the data is read.
 Number of Data

Number of data to read from the target device addresses.

3. Enter the filename and click Save button.

Uploading the device address data starts.

This concludes uploading the device address data.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

11-63

11: SD M EM OR Y C AR D
Clearing Data of FC6A

Data stored in the internal memory of FC6A can be cleared.
Operation Procedure
1. Click on the down-pointing triangle button on the right of the

A confirmation message is displayed.

(Clear) button and click the menu for the data to clear.

 Clear values in all device addresses

Device values stored in the internal memory of FC6A can be cleared. Types of the devices that are cleared are as follows: inputs, outputs,
internal relays, shift registers, data registers, timer current values, and counter current values.
 Clear Error

Error information stored in the internal memory of FC6A can be cleared.

2. Click Yes button.

This concludes clearing data.

11-64

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TORThis chapter provides a description of the Module Configuration Editor that can be used to configure expansion modules andcartridges.

Module Configuration Editor Overview
The FC6A is capable of using the expansion modules and cartridges described in "Product Specifications" on page 2-1. To use
expansion modules and cartridges, they must be configured to connect to the FC6A using the WindLDR Module Configuration
Editor.

Module Configuration Editor Structure
The Module Configuration Editor is composed of the following three areas.
Module configuration area

: Displays the configuration of connected expansion modules and cartridges.

Expansion modules and cartridges list

: Displays a list of expansion modules and cartridges that can be connected to the FC6A.

Parameter reference area

: Displays the parameters that are configured for the expansion modules and cartridges.

The module configuration that will be used is created by selecting the expansion modules and cartridges to use in the expansion
modules and cartridges list and dragging and dropping them to the module configuration area.

Module Configuration Area

Parameter Reference Area

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Expansion Modules and Cartridges List

12-1

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TORModule Configuration Editor Functions
The Module Configuration Editor functions are as follows. For the operating procedures of the functions, see "Basic Module
Configuration Editor Operations" on page 12-3.
Function

Details

Insert expansion modules and cartridges

Expansion modules and cartridges can be inserted into the module configuration area by
dragging and dropping them from the expansion modules and cartridges list.
By inserting expansion interface remote master and remote slave modules, the nodes can be
configured.

Delete expansion modules and cartridges

Inserted expansion modules and cartridges can be deleted.
When an expansion module is deleted, all of the modules placed on the right side of the deleted
module are shifted to the left.

Swap expansion modules and cartridges

Inserted expansion modules and cartridges can be moved to a different position.

System software version upgrade

The system software on the CPU module, analog I/O module, PID module, expansion interface
remote master module, expansion interface remote slave module, HMI module, and Bluetoothcommunication cartridge can be upgraded.

Read module configuration

Information about the expansion modules and cartridges connected to the CPU module is stored
in special data registers. The configuration of expansion modules and cartridges connected to the
CPU module is automatically displayed by acquiring this information.

12-2

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TORBasic Module Configuration Editor Operations
This section describes the operating procedures for functions in the Module Configuration Editor.

Starting the Module Configuration Editor
This section describes how to start the Module Configuration Editor.
1. On the Configuration tab, in the PLCs group, select Expansion Modules.

The Module Configuration Editor is displayed.

Inserting Expansion Modules and Cartridges
This section describes how to insert expansion modules and cartridges into the module configuration area.
1. Select the expansion module or cartridge to insert in the expansion modules and cartridges list and drag and drop it to themodule configuration area.

The expansion module or cartridge is inserted into the module configuration area.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12-3

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TOR
2. Click the inserted expansion module or cartridge in the module configuration area and click Configure.

The configuration dialog box that corresponds to the expansion module or cartridge is displayed.

3. In the configuration dialog box, configure the parameters for the expansion module or cartridge.

12-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TOR
Removing Expansion Modules and Cartridges
This section describes how to remove expansion modules and cartridges that have been inserted into the module configurationarea.
1. Click the expansion module or cartridge to remove in the module configuration area.

2. Right-click the expansion module or cartridge to delete and click Remove.

The selected expansion module or cartridge is removed.
All of the modules placed on the right side of the removed module are automatically shifted to the left.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12-5

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TORSwapping Expansion Modules and Cartridges
This section describes how to change the position of expansion modules and cartridges that have been inserted into the module
configuration area.
1. Select the expansion module or cartridge to move and drag and drop it onto the destination expansion module or cartridge.

Notes:
 When the position of an I/O module is changed, the device addresses are automatically changed. For example, when the position of digital
input module (1) and (2) are changed as shown below, the device addresses I0030 to I0037 for digital input module (1) are changed toI0050 to I0057. However, please note that the device addresses in the program are not replaced.

CPU Module

Input Module (1)Quantity of Inputs: 8(I0030 to I0037)

Input Module (2)Quantity of Inputs: 16(I0040 to I0057)

Input Module (2)Input Module (1)Quantity of Inputs: 16 Quantity of Inputs: 8(I0030 to I0047)(I0050 to I0057)
 When the positions of an analog I/O module or analog I/O cartridge are changed, the configured parameters are also moved. However, thedevice addresses in the program are not replaced.

12-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TOR
Upgrading the System Software Version
This section describes how to upgrade the system software on the CPU module, analog I/O module, PID module, expansion
interface remote master module, expansion interface remote slave module, HMI module, and Bluetooth communication cartridge.
1. Right-click the CPU module or expansion module that you will perform the system software upgrade on and click Update
System Software.
The System Software Download dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the system software version number and click Start System Software Download.

The system software download begins.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

12-7

12: M ODULE C ON FI GUR ATI ON E DI TOR
Reading the Module Configuration
This section describes how to acquire the information about expansion modules and cartridges connected to the CPU module andautomatically display the configuration.
1. Connect a PC to the USB port, Ethernet Port 1, Ethernet Port 2, HMI-Ethernet Port, or Serial Port 1 on the FC6A.

For details, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

2. Click Read Module Configuration in the module configuration area.

The configuration of expansion modules and cartridges connected to the CPU module is displayed in the module configuration area.

Notes:
 Read module configuration only reads the connection status of expansion modules and cartridges. It does not read the configured
parameters. Therefore, the expansion module and cartridge parameters are the default values. Configure the parameters as necessary.
 If digital I/O modules are connected, the actual model number such as FC6A-N08B1 cannot be distinguished by reading the module

configuration. The model number will be a general term for number of I/O points such as 16 inputs or 16 outputs. Change the model number
to the actual model number after reading the module configuration.
 On the Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Monitor and Start Monitor. The status and current values of expansion modules and cartridges

can be checked in the Parameter Reference area.
 If an expansion module or cartridge has an error status, the corresponding module is shown in a red box in the Module Configuration area.

12-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
I ntroduction
This chapter describes the procedures to determine the cause of problem and actions to be taken when any problem occurs while
operating the FC6A.
The FC6A has self-diagnostic functions to prevent the spread of problems if any should occur. In case of any problem, follow thetroubleshooting procedures to determine the cause and to correct the error.
Errors are checked in various stages. While editing a user program on WindLDR, incorrect devices and other data are rejected.
User program syntax errors are found during compilation on WindLDR. When an incorrect program is downloaded to the FC6A,
user program syntax errors are still checked. Errors are also checked at starting and during operation of the FC6A. When an error
occurs, the error is reported by turning on the ERR LED on the FC6A and an error message can be viewed on WindLDR. For theprocedure to check the error status and clear the error by operating the HMI module connected to the CPU module, see"Checking/Clearing Error Information" on page 7-38.

Reading Error Data
When any error occurs during the FC6A operation, "Error" is indicated and error details can be read using WindLDR.

Monitoring WindLDR
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor. The monitor mode is enabled.
2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Status. The PLC Status dialog box appears.

When any error exists, "Error" is displayed in the error status box.

3. On the right of the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box, click the Details button.

The PLC Error Status screen appears.

System Software Version
D8029

Details Button

Error Status Box
D8005 (general error code)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-1

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
4. Check the errors that are currently occurring.

5. After you have checked the errors, click OK.

Clearing Error Codes from WindLDR

After removing the cause of the error, clear the error code using the following procedure:
6. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor. The monitor mode is enabled.
7. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Status. The PLC Status dialog box appears.
8. On the right of the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box, click the Clear button.

This procedure clears the error code from special data register D8005 (general error code), and the error is cleared from the PLC
Status dialog box.

Clear Button

Error Cleared

9.

13-2

Click OK.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N GSpecial Data Registers for Error Information
Two data registers are assigned to store information on errors.
D8005

General Error Code

D8006

User Program Execution Error Code

Example: This ladder program clears the error information using the error clear bit of special data register D8005.
Turn on M0 and turn on the upper bit of D8005.
The error information is cleared during the scan end processing of the ladder program.

General Error Codes
The general error status is written to special data register D8005. If "1" is stored in each bit of D8005, the corresponding error is
occurring.
The general error (D8005) and user program execution error (D8006) can be cleared by writing "1" to the most significant bit of
special data register D8005 in a user program. The most significant bit of D8005 then changes to 0 automatically. Errors are notcleared if the most significant bit of D8005 is turned on by WindLDR over communications or by the operator interface.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8005
Power failure detection
Watchdog timer error
Data link connection error
User program ROM CRC error
Timer/counter preset value change error
Reserved
Keep data sum check error
User program syntax error
User program download error
System error
Clock error
Expansion bus initialization error
SD memory card transfer error
User program execution error
SD memory card access error
Error information bits

Error clear bit

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-3

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
FC6A Operating Status, Output, and ERR LED during Errors
Error Items

Operating Status

OutputError LED
[ERR]

Checked at

Power failure detection

Stop

OFF

―

Any time

Watchdog timer error

Stop

OFF

ON

Any time

Data link connection error

Stop

OFF

ON

When initializing the data link

User program ROM CRC error

Stop

OFF

ON

Starting operation

Maintained

MaintainedON

When checking a change intimer/counter settings

TIM/CNT preset value change error

Maintained/Stop *1

OFF―

Turning power onUser program syntax error

Stop

OFF

ON

Downloading user program

User program download error

Stop

OFF

ON

Downloading user program

System error

Stop

OFF

ON

Turning power on

Clock error

Maintained

MaintainedON

Turning power on

Expansion bus initialization error

Maintained

MaintainedON

Turning power on/
downloading user program

SD memory card transfer error

Download: Stop
Upload: Maintained

Download: OFF
Upload: MaintainedON

When executing an SD memory
card download/upload

User program execution error

Maintained

Maintained

ON

Executing user program

SD memory card access error

Maintained

MaintainedON

When an SD memory card isinserted

Keep data error*1 Operation starts to run and outputs are turned on or off according to the user program as default, but it is also possible to stop operation andturn off outputs using the Function Area Settings on WindLDR. See "Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error" on page 5-8.

Error Causes and Actions
0001h: Power Failure Detection

This error indicates when the power supply is lower than the specified voltage. This error is also recorded when the power isturned off. Clear the error code using WindLDR.
If this error occurs frequently even though the power supply voltage is within the specified voltage range, the power supply or
FC6A has to be replaced.

0002h: Watchdog Timer Error

The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle (scan time). When the time exceeds the allowed time, thewatchdog timer indicates an error. Clear the error code using WindLDR. If this error occurs frequently, the FC6A has to be
replaced.

0004h: Data Link Connection Error

A data link function area settings are incorrect or the cable is not connected correctly. Correct the data link function area settingsor connect the cable correctly, and then turn the power off and on or initialize the data link.

0008h: User Program ROM CRC Error

The user program stored in the FC6A ROM is corrupted. Download a correct user program to the FC6A, and clear the error codeusing WindLDR. If an SD memory card is inserted, the user program in the SD memory card is checked.

0010h: Timer/Counter Preset Value Change Error

The execution data of timer/counter preset values is corrupted. The timer/counter preset values are initialized to the values of theuser program automatically. Note that changed preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored. Clear the error
code using WindLDR.

0040h: Keep Data Sum Check Error

This error indicates that the data designated to be maintained during power failure is corrupted because of memory backup failure.
Note that the "keep" data of internal relays and shift registers are cleared. Data of counters and data registers are also cleared.
Clear the error code using WindLDR. Replace the backup battery.
For details on replacing the backup battery, see "Replacing the Backup Battery" on page 3-34.

0080h: User Program Syntax Error

This error indicates that the user program has a syntax error. Correct the user program, and download the corrected user program
to the FC6A. The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred.

13-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
0100h: User Program Download Error

This error indicates a failure of writing into the FC6A ROM when downloading a user program. The error code is cleared when writing into
the ROM is completed successfully. If this error occurs frequently, the FC6A has to be replaced.
When a memory cartridge is installed on the FC6A, writing into the memory cartridge is checked.

0200h: System Error

This error is issued when ROM is not found. When this error occurred, turn power off and on. Clear the error code using WindLDR.
If this error occurs frequently, the FC6A has to be replaced.

0400h: Clock Error

This error indicates that the clock data has disappeared. Replace the backup battery. For details on replacing the backup battery,see "Replacing the Backup Battery" on page 3-34.

0800h: Expansion Bus Initialization Error

This error occurs when communication could not be performed between the CPU module and the cartridges, expansion modules,
and/or HMI module when the power is turned on or during a download.
Cycle the power or update the system software. If this error frequently occurs or it cannot be recovered from, replace thecartridges, expansion modules, and/or HMI module.

1000h: SD Memory Card Transfer Error

This error indicates that the user program cannot be downloaded to/uploaded from FC6A using the SD memory card. Check theerror details in D8255.
For details, see "D8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Information" on page 11-46.

2000h: User Program Execution Error

This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program. When this error occurs, special internal relay
M8004 (user program execution error) is turned on.
Referring to the next page to fix and clear the error code.

4000h: SD Memory Card Access Error

This error indicates that the the SD memory card could not be written to.
If the status of M8070 was checked and the SD memory card was not recognized, reinsert a formatted SD memory card into the
FC6A.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-5

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagrams
When one of the following problems is encountered, see the following trouble shooting diagrams:
ProblemTroubleshooting
Diagram

The power is not on.

Diagram 1

Operation has not started.

Diagram 2

An error has occurred.

Diagram 3

Input does not operate normally.

Diagram 4

Output does not operate normally.

Diagram 5

Cannot stop or reset operation.

Diagram 6

Watchdog timer error occurs and the CPU does not run.

Diagram 7

The interrupt/catch input cannot receive short pulses.

Diagram 8

Frequency measurement does not work.

Diagram 9

Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode.

Diagram 10

Data is not transmitted correctly in the user communication mode.

Diagram 11

Data is not received at all in the user communication mode.

Diagram 12

Data is not received correctly in the user communication mode.

Diagram 13

Modbus master communication does not work.

Diagram 14Long communication cycle for Modbus RTU master communication or Modbus TCP client communication.

Diagram 15

WindLDR and the FC6A cannot communicate.

Diagram 16

WindLDR does not communicate with PLC via USB.

Diagram 17

Modbus master communication request is slow.

Diagram 18

13-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 1


The Power LED [PWR] is not On
When the USB bus is operating, the power LED [PWR] does not turn on.

The power LED [PWR] is not on

Is power supplied?

NO

Supply power.

YESNO

Is the power voltage correct?

Is the power LED [PWR] on?

YES

Supply the rated voltage.
AC power type:100-240V AC
DC power type:
24V DC

NO

YES

NO

Is the power LED [PWR] on?

Call IDEC for assistance.

YES

END

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-7

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 2


The Run LED [RUN] is not On
The run LED [RUN] turns on when the PLC is running.
The run LED [RUN] is not on.

YES

Is the error LED [ERR] on?

See Troubleshooting Diagram 3,"The Error LED [ERR] is On"

NO
Click the Start button in WindLDR on acomputer connected to the FC6A.

Note: The Start button is found in the WindLDR menu bar.

YES

Is the run LED [RUN] on?

NO
Note: To monitor M8000, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online >Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor. Enter
M8000 in the Device box in the Custom Monitor dialog box.

Monitor M8000 (start control special
internal relay) using WindLDR.

YES

Note: To turn on M8000, enter 1 in the Current Value box in the
Custom Monitor dialog box.

Is M8000 on?

NO
Turn on M8000 using WindLDR.

NOIs the run LED [RUN] on?

YES

Is the stop/reset input
switch or the function switch
used to run/stop the PLC?

YESNO

Turn off the stop/reset input and set thefunction switch to "1."Is the run LED [RUN] on?

YES

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

13-8

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

END

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 3


The Error LED [ERR] is On

The error LED [ERR] is on.

Clear error codes using WindLDR.
See Note below.

Did the error LED [ERR] turn off?

YES

NO
END

See "General Error Codes" on page 13-3.
Identify the error code and correct the error.

Did the error LED [ERR] turn off?

YES

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

END

Note: Temporary errors can be cleared to restore normal operation by clearing error codes from WindLDR. See "Clearing Error Codes fromWindLDR" on page 13-2.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-9

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 4

Input does not operate normally.

Is the input device on?

NO

YES
Note: Check the on state for the input with the
WindLDR monitor or the device monitor on the
HMI module.
Are input device
addresses correct?

Is the input
wiring correct?

NO

NO

YES

Correct the program.

Correct the input wiring.

YES

Is the input terminal
powered correctly?

NO

Supply the rated voltage to the input
terminal.

Are wiring andoperation of external
devices correct?

NO

Correct the external
device wiring.

YES
END

Call IDEC for assistance.

13-10

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

YES

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 5

Output does not operate normally.

Note: The Start button is found in the
WindLDR menu bar.
Are the power LED [PWR] andthe run LED [RUN] on?

NO

Click the Start button in WindLDR on acomputer connected to the FC6A.

YES

Check the output with WindLDR.

NOAre output device
addresses correct?

Correct the program.

YES

NO

Does the monitored output
turn on and off?

The output circuit in the FC6A isdamaged.
Replace the FC6A.

YES

NO

Is the output
connection correct?

Correctly connect the output.

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

END

13-11

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 6

Cannot stop or reset operation.

Is stop or
reset input designated in
the WindLDR Function Area
Settings?

Note: To monitor M8000, from the WindLDR menu bar, selectOnline > Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New
Custom Monitor. Enter M8000 in the Device box in the Custom
Monitor dialog box.

NO

Monitor the start control special internal
relay M8000 using WindLDR on acomputer.

YES

Is the designated stop or
reset input on?

NO

Turn on the designated input.

YES

Monitor the designated stop or reset
input using WindLDR on a computer.

Does the monitored input
turn on and off?

NO

The input circuit in the FC6A isdamaged.
Replace the FC6A.

YES
YES

Is M8000 off?

NO

Turn off the start control special internal
relay M8000 using WindLDR on acomputer.

Call IDEC for assistance.

Note: To turn off M8000, enter 0 in the Current Value box in the Custom Monitor dialog box.
For details on special internal relay M8000, see "M8000: Start Control" on page 6-9.

13-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 7

Watchdog timer error occurs andthe user program does not run.

Did you create a program
where the scan time exceeds the time
configured for the watchdog
timer? *1

YES

NOP instruction can reset the watchdog timer.
Insert a NOP instruction into the ladder diagram
so the time configured for the watchdog timer is
not exceeded.

NO

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "Watchdog Timer Setting" on page 5-60.

Troubleshooting Diagram 8

The interrupt/catch input
cannot receive short pulses.

Are the input ON/OFF
voltage levels correct?

NO

Make sure of correct input voltage.
ON voltage:

15V DC minimum

OFF voltage:

5V DC maximum

YES

END

Call IDEC for assistance.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-13

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 9

Frequency measurement does notwork.

Are signals being input to theapplicable input port?

NO

Make sure that input signals are connected tocorrect terminals.

NO

Select Single-phase High-speed Counter in theGroups 1 through 4.

YES

Are the Function Area
Settings completed? *1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See "Frequency Measurement" on page 5-39.

13-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 10

Data is not transmitted at allin the user communication mode.

Is thecommunication cableconnected correctly?

NO

Make sure of correct wiring.

YES

NO

Is the input to the
TXD instruction on?

Turn on the input to the TXD instruction.

YES

Are the power LED [PWR] and therun LED [RUN] on?

NOWhen the power LED [PWR] and the run LED [RUN]
do not turn on*1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "The Power LED [PWR] is not On" on page 13-7 or "The Run LED [RUN] is not On" on page 13-8.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-15

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 11

Data is not transmitted correctlyin the user communication mode.

Are communication
parameters set correctly
using WindLDR?

NO

Set the communication parameters to match those of
the remote terminal using WindLDR*1.

YES

Correct the program to replace the duplicate dataregister with a different data register.

YES

Correct the program to make sure that inputs tomore than 5 TXD instructions do not go on
simultaneously.

NO

Make sure that the busy signal at the remoteterminal does not exceed 5 s.

NO

Make sure that the transmit data designated assource 1 device is correct.

YES

Is the data register
designated as transmit
status used repeatedly?

NO

Are inputs tomore than 5 TXD instructions on
simultaneously?

NO

Is duration of the busy
signal at the remote terminal
less than 5 s?

YES

Did you makesure of source 1 device of the TXD
instruction?

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See Chapter 5 "User Communication via Serial Communication" - "Programming WindLDR" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".

If the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure, also perform theprocedure of Diagram 10, described on the preceding page.

13-16

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 12

Data is not received at allin the user communication mode.

Is thecommunication cableconnected correctly?

NO

Make sure of correct wiring.

YES

NO

Is the input to the
RXD instruction on?

Turn on the input to the RXD instruction.

YES

Are the power LED [PWR] and therun LED [RUN] on?

NOWhen the power LED [PWR] and the run LED [RUN]
do not turn on *1

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.

*1 See "The Power LED [PWR] is not On" on page 13-7 or "The Run LED [RUN] is not On" on page 13-8.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-17

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 13
Data is not received correctlyin the user communication mode.

Are communication
parameters set correctly using
WindLDR?

NO

Set the communication parameters tomatch those of the remote terminal using
WindLDR. FC6A can use constants only
for start and stop delimiters. *1

YES
Is the data register
designated as receive status used
repeatedly?

YES

Correct the program to replace theduplicate data register with a different
data register.

NO
Is a start delimiter
specified in the RXD
instruction?

NO
Is one input
used to start multiple RXD
instructions?

YES
Correct the program to make surethat inputs to more than 5 RXD
instructions do not go on
simultaneously.

YES

YES

Are inputs tomore than 5 RXD instructions on
simultaneously?

Use one input to start one RXD
instruction without a start delimiter.

NO

Did you checkthe start delimiter of incoming data?

NONO

Make sure that the start delimiter in the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the receive format of the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the end delimiter in the
RXD instruction matches that of theincoming data.

NO

Make sure that the receive timeout value
is larger than character intervals of theincoming data.

YES
Did you checkthe format of incoming
data?

YES
NO

Is an end delimiter
specified in the RXD
instruction?

YES
Did you checkthe end delimiter ofincoming data?

YES
Is the receive
timeout value set correctly
using WindLDR?

YES
Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See Chapter 5 "User Communication via Serial Communication" - "Programming WindLDR" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication
Manual".

If the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure, also perform theprocedure of Diagram 12 described on the preceding page.
13-18

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 14
Modbus RTU mastercommunication does not work.

Are communication
parameters equal at master andslave?

NO

Confirm communication settings using
WindLDR.

YES
When the communication
error status is configured, is the error
information stored? *1

NO
YES

YES
Confirm the slave number (high-orderbyte) and error code (low-order byte) *1.

Set to use a request
execution device and the device
is not turned on.

NO
Make sure that slave address settings arecorrect.

Is it clear which
request has an error?

YES

NO

See the request table to find which request
has an error and what error occurred.
Turn on the request execution device.

01h (function error)?

YES

Make sure that the slave is compatible
with the function code.

YES

Make sure of the valid slave address
range and master settings.

NO

02h (access destination error)?

NO
03h (device
quantity error, 1-bit write
data error)?

YES

NO

16h (timeout error)?

YES

Data size and actual data may not
match. Make sure that slave settingsand hardware are correct (without noise
and failure).

Make sure that the slave number andcommunication settings are correct.

NO
Confirm slave settings again.
*1 See Chapter 6 "Modbus RTU Master Communication" - "Communication Completion and Communication Error" in the "FC6A Series MICROSmart
Communication Manual".

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-19

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 15
Long communication cycle for Modbus RTU mastercommunication or Modbus TCP client communication.

Configure a request execution device and assign
a data register or internal relay.

Turn off the request execution devices for communication
requests that do not require constant execution and turn on
the devices only when they are used.

END

Troubleshooting Diagram 16
WindLDR and the FC6A cannot
communicate.

NO

Is the USB cable connected?

Connect the USB cable.

YES

Are the power LED [PWR] and therun LED [RUN] on?

NOWhen the power LED [PWR] and the run
LED [RUN] do not turn on *1

YES

Are the WindLDR
communication
settings correct?

NO

Set the correct communication settings.

YES

Call IDEC for assistance.
*1 See "The Power LED [PWR] is not On" on page 13-7 or "The Run LED [RUN] is not On" on page 13-8.

13-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 17
WindLDR does not communicate
with PLC via USB.

Is a communication
error displayed when monitoring isstarted on WindLDR?

Carry out steps 1 and 2 below and try again.

YES

Step 2: Check communication settings
Open the Communication Settings dialog box in
WindLDR. Click the USB tab, and then clear the Use
HGxGUSB Pass-Through check box.

NO

Is "IDEC PLC USB
Port (COMx)" listed in Device
Manager on the PC?*

Step 1: Check the cabling
Disconnect and reconnect the USB cable connecting
the computer and the FC6A.
If the computer and the FC6A are connected via a
USB hub, connect the computer and the FC6A
directly using a single USB cable.

NO

The USB port of the connected FC6A is notrecognized.
Install or update the driver, and then try
again.

YES
Is error message"Unable to open the COM"
displayed when WindLDR starts
monitoring?

YES

NO

*You can check this in Device Manager.
For details, see "Checking the USB Driver"on page 13-23.

Restart the computer and try again.

Is the problem solved?

Terminate the Pass-Through Tool, WindO/INV2, and other applications that may use
COM port, and then try again.

YES

NO
Replace the USB cable and try again.

Is the problem solved?

YES

NO
Call IDEC for assistance.

END

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-21

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Troubleshooting Diagram 18

Modbus master communication
request is slow.

Select to use request execution internal
relay and designate an internal relay
number.

Keep unnecessary internal relays turned off
and turn on internal relays only whensending requests.

END

13-22

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G
Checking the USB Driver

You can use the following procedure to check whether the USB driver has been installed correctly and whether the FC6A has beenrecognized correctly.
1. Display Device Manager.
 Windows 11/10

Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.
Under Devices and Printers, click Device Manager.
 Windows 8

On the Start screen, right-click the background, and then click All apps > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.
In the Hardware and Sound dialog box, click Device Manager.
 Windows 7

Click the Start button > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager.
2. Click Ports (COM & LPT).

If the following device name is displayed, the USB driver has been installed correctly and the FC6A has been recognizedcorrectly.
"IDEC PLC USB Port (COMx)"
Notes:
 The device name will disappear if you disconnect the USB cable or turn off the FC6A.
 If "Unknown device" is displayed for the device name or if a question mark is displayed when the FC6A is on and the USB cable is connected,

the USB driver may not have been recognized correctly. Remove the USB cable, turn the FC6A off, turn the FC6A on again and connect it, andthen check if the USB driver is recognized. If the USB driver still is not recognized, use Device Manager to delete the USB driver, and thenreinstall it.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

13-23

13: TR OUBLESHOOTI N G

13-24

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
This appendix describes information such as a list of FC6A types, how to update the software, and how to install the USB driver.

Type List
This section describes the types of FC6A modules, maintenance parts, manuals, asnd optional cables (sold separately).

CPU Modules
All-in-One CPU Modules
Power
Voltage

Input Type

Output TypeI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)
16 (9/7)

100-240VAC

24 (14/10)

24V DC input
shared sink/source

40 (24/16)
Relay output, 2 A/point
16 (9/7)

24V DC24 (14/10)
40 (24/16)
16 (9/7)
Transistor sink output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

24V DC24 (14/10)
40 (24/16)

24V DC input
shared sink/source

16 (9/7)
Transistor protection source output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

24 (14/10)
40 (24/16)
16 (9/7)

Relay output, 2 A/point40 (24/16)

12V DC

12V DC input
shared sink/source

Transistor sink output
12V DC, 0.5 A/point

Transistor protection source output
12V DC, 0.5A/point

16 (9/7)
40 (24/16)
16 (9/7)
40 (24/16)

Type No.

Terminal
Specification

FC6A-C16R1AE*1

FC6A-C16R4AE*2

FC6A-C24R1AE*1

FC6A-C24R4AE*2

FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R4AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16R4CE*1

Removable terminalblock(5.08 mm pitch)

*2
*1
*2

FC6A-C24R1CE*1

FC6A-C24R4CE*2

FC6A-C40R1CE*1

FC6A-C40R4CE*2

FC6A-C16K1CE*1

FC6A-C16K4CE*2

FC6A-C24K1CE*1

FC6A-C24K4CE*2

FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40K4CE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16P4CE*1

Removable terminalblock(5.08 mm pitch)

*2
*1
*2

FC6A-C24P1CE*1

FC6A-C24P4CE*2

FC6A-C40P1CE*1

FC6A-C40P4CE*2

FC6A-C16R1DE*1

FC6A-C16R4DE*2

FC6A-C40R1DE*1

FC6A-C40R4DE*2

FC6A-C16K1DE
FC6A-C16K4DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40K4DE*1

Removable terminalblock(5.08 mm pitch)

*2
*1
*2

FC6A-C16P1DE*1

FC6A-C16P4DE*2

FC6A-C40P1DE*1

FC6A-C40P4DE*2*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in type

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-1

A P P EN DI XCAN J1939 All-in-One CPU Modules
Power
Voltage

Input TypeI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Terminal
Specification*1

24V DC input
shared sink/source

Transistor sink output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

FC6A-C40R1CEJ
40 (24/16)

Transistor sink output
12V DC, 0.5 A/point

FC6A-C40R4CEJ
FC6A-C40K1CEJ
FC6A-C40K4CEJ

Removable
terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)

FC6A-C40K1DEJ
FC6A-C40K4DEJ
FC6A-C40P1DEJ

Transistor protection source output
12V DC, 0.5 A/point

*1
*2

*1

FC6A-C40R1DEJ

40 (24/16)*2*2

FC6A-C40P4CEJ
FC6A-C40R4DEJ*1*1

FC6A-C40P1CEJ

Relay output, 2 A/point
12V DC input
shared sink/source*2

FC6A-C40R4AEJ

Relay output, 2 A/point

Transistor protection source output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

12V DCType No.
FC6A-C40R1AEJ

100-240VAC

24V DC

Output Type

Removable
terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)

*2
*1
*2
*1
*2

FC6A-C40P4DEJ*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in type

Plus CPU Modules
Power
Voltage

Input Type

Output TypeI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

24V DC

24V DC input
shared sink/source

Transistor protection source output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point
*1
*2
*3
*4

A-2

FC6A-D16R4CEE
16 (8/8)

FC6A-D16K1CEE
FC6A-D16K4CEE
FC6A-D16P1CEE

Transistor protection source output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point
Transistor sink output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

Terminal
Specification*1

FC6A-D16R1CEE

Relay output, 2 A/point
Transistor sink output
24V DC, 0.5 A/point

Type No.

*2

Removable
terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)

32 (16/16)

Screw fastened typePush-in type
Screw fastened type (Power supply terminals)
Push-in type (Power supply terminals)

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

FC6A-D32K4CEE
FC6A-D32P3CEE
FC6A-D32P4CEE

*2
*1
*2

FC6A-D16P4CEE
FC6A-D32K3CEE*120-pin MIL
connector (Input
terminals,
outputterminals)

*3
*4
*3
*4

A P P EN DI X
Expansion Modules
Digital I/O Modules
Input Type

Output TypeI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)
8 (8/0)*1

12/24V DC input
shared sink/source

100-120V AC input——

16 (16/0)

24V DC input
shared sink/source

FC6A-N16B4
FC6A-N32B3

8 (8/0)8 (0/8)Transistor protection source output
8 (0/8)24V DC, 0.5 A/point
16 (0/16)

Transistor protection source output
16 (0/16)
24V DC, 0.5 A/point
Transistor sink output
12/24V DC, 0.1 A/point*1

FC6A-N16B1
FC6A-N16B3

16 (0/16)—

FC6A-N08B4

32 (32/0)

Relay output, 2 A/point

Transistor sink output
12/24V DC, 0.5 A/point*1

FC6A-N08B1

16 (16/0)

8 (0/8)Transistor sink output
12/24V DC, 0.5 A/point*1

Type No.

FC6A-N08A11
FC6A-N08A14
FC6A-R081
FC6A-R084
FC6A-R161
FC6A-R164
FC6A-T08K4
FC6A-T08P1

*3
*2
*3

20-pin MIL connector
Removable terminal block (5.08 mm pitch)
Removable terminal block (5.08 mm pitch)
Removable terminal block (3.81 mm pitch)

*2
*3
*2
*3
*2
*3
*2

Removable terminal block (5.08 mm pitch)

*3
*2
*3

FC6A-T16K1*2

FC6A-T16K4
FC6A-T16P1

Removable terminal block (3.81 mm pitch)

FC6A-T16P3

Transistor sink output
12/24V DC, 0.1 A/point*1

32 (0/32)

FC6A-T32K3

Transistor protection source output
32 (0/32)
24V DC, 0.1 A/point

FC6A-T32P3

*3
*2
*3

FC6A-T16P4

Transistor protection source output
16 (0/16)
24V DC, 0.1 A/point

24 (16/8)

Removable terminal block (3.81 mm pitch)*2

FC6A-T08P4

FC6A-T16K3

Relay output, 2 A/point

Removable terminal block (5.08 mm pitch)

FC6A-T08K1

16 (0/16)

8 (4/4)

Terminal Specification

20-pin MIL connector

FC6A-M08BR1
FC6A-M08BR4
FC6A-M24BR1
FC6A-M24BR4

Removable terminal block (5.08 mm pitch)
Removable terminal block (3.81 mm pitch)

*2
*3
*2
*3

*1 24V DC input for products with a version number lower than V400. For details on the version number of modules, see "Checking the Version
Number" on page 2-1.
*2 Screw fastened type
*3 Push-in type

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-3

A P P EN DI X
Analog I/O Modules
Power
Voltage

Input TypeI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Output Type

FC6A-J2C1

2 (2/0)12/24VDC

24V DC

Analog input(voltage/current)

FC6A-J4A1
FC6A-J4A4
FC6A-J8A1

8 (8/0)—

Analog output(voltage/current)

2 (0/2)—

Analog output(voltage/current)

4 (0/4)

Analog output(voltage/current)

6 (4/2)

Analog input(voltage/current)
Analog input(voltage/current/
thermocouple/resistancethermometer)

12/24VDC

FC6A-J2C4

4 (4/0)—

FC6A-J8A4
FC6A-K2A1
FC6A-K2A4
FC6A-K4A1
FC6A-K4A4
FC6A-L06A1
FC6A-L06A4

Terminal Specification
Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)*1

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*1

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*1

Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)*1

Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)*1

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*1

Analog output(voltage/current)

3 (2/1)

FC6A-L03CN4

Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)—

FC6A-J4CN4
FC6A-J4CH1Y

4 (4/0)

Analog input(thermocouple/
thermistor/resistance)

FC6A-J4CH4Y
FC6A-J8CU1

8 (8/0)

FC6A-J8CU4

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

*1

FC6A-J4CN1
4 (4/0)*2*1

FC6A-L03CN1

Analog input(voltage/current/
thermocouple/resistancethermometer)
Analog input(thermocouple)

Type No.

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)
Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)
Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)

*2

*1
*2
*1
*2

*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in type

PID Modules
Power
Voltage

24V DCI/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Input Type

Output Type

Analog input(voltage/current/
thermocouple/resistancethermometer)

Relay output
240V AC, 2 A/30V DC, 2 A

Analog input(voltage/current/
thermocouple/resistancethermometer)

Transistor source output
12V DC/analog output(current)

Type No.

Terminal Specification*1

FC6A-F2MR1
4 (2/2)

FC6A-F2MR4

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*1

FC6A-F2M1
4 (2/2)

FC6A-F2M4*2

Removable terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*2*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in typeCommunication Module
Name

Function/purpose

Communication
module

RS232C/RS485 communication

I/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)—

Type No.
FC6A-SIF52
FC6A-SIF524*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in type

A-4

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Terminal Specification
Direct-mounting terminal block(3.81 mm pitch)*1*2

A P P EN DI X
Expansion Interface Modules
Power
Voltage

Name
Expander24V DC

Remote master
Remote slave

Function/purpose

I/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)—

Increases the numberof expansion modules
that can be connected——

Type No.
FC6A-EXM2
FC6A-EXM24

Terminal Specification
Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)

FC6A-EXM1M
FC6A-EXM1S
FC6A-EXM1S4

*1
*2

—
Removable terminal block(5.08 mm pitch)*1*2*1 Screw fastened type*2 Push-in type

HMI Module
Function/purpose

I/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

HMI module with web server function—

Name
HMI module

Type No.
FC6A-PH1

Terminal Specification—

Cartridge Base Module
Name
Cartridge basemoduleFunction/purpose

I/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Expands cartridge slots for the Plus
CPU module—

Type No.
FC6A-HPH1

Terminal Specification—

Cartridges
Name

Digital I/O cartridge

Analog I/O cartridge

Communication
cartridge

Function/purpose

I/O Points(Input Points/
Output Points)

Type No.

Terminal Specification

12/24V DC input shared sink/source

4 (4/0)

FC6A-PN4

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Transistor sink output
12/24V DC, 0.1 A/point

4 (0/4)

FC6A-PTK4

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Transistor protection source output
12/24V DC, 0.1 A/point

4 (0/4)

FC6A-PTS4

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Analog input (voltage/current)

2 (2/0)

FC6A-PJ2A

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Analog input (thermocouple/resistancethermometer)

2 (2/0)

FC6A-PJ2CP

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Analog output (voltage)

2 (0/2)

FC6A-PK2AV

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Analog output (current)

2 (0/2)

FC6A-PK2AW

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

RS232C communication—

FC6A-PC1

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

RS485 communication—

FC6A-PC3

Direct-mounting terminal block (3.81 mm
pitch)

Bluetooth communication—

FC6A-PC4—

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-5

A P P EN DI X
Maintenance Parts
Type

Type No.

Specifications

FC6A Series CPU moduleconnector with analog input cable

FC4A-PMAC2PN02

Cable length: 1 m (3.28 feet) (2 items)
Compatible with the FC4A Slim Type, the FC5A Slim Type,and the FC6A

FC6A Series CPU module mounting hook
FC6A Series HMI module mounting hook

FC6A-PSP1PN05

Direct/DIN-rail mounting hook (5 items)

FC6A Series expansion module mounting hook
FC6A Series expansion interface module mounting hook

FC6A-PSP2PN05

Direct/DIN-rail mounting hook (5 items)

FC6A Series CPU module power supply terminal blockconnector

FC6A-PMTD03PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 3-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series expansion interface module power supply terminal
block connector

FC6A-PMTB03PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 3-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series CPU module, CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module
CAN communication terminal block connector

FC6A-PMTE05PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 5-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTA08PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 8-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTA09PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 9-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTA10PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 10-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTA12PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 12-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series CPU module removable terminal block

FC6A-PMTA13PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 13-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMSCN10PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 10-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMTCN10PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 10-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series Plus CPU module relay outputs removable terminalblock

FC6A-PMSCR11PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 11-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMTCR11PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 11-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series Plus CPU module sink outputs removable terminalblock

FC6A-PMSCK11PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 11-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMTCK11PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 11-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series Plus CPU module protection source outputs
removable terminal block

FC6A-PMSCP11PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 11-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMTCP11PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 11-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMSDC03PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 3-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMSB11PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 11-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMSC10PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 10-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMSC11PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 11-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMSC17PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 17-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A-PMTB11PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 11-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTC10PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 10-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTC11PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 11-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A-PMTC17PN02

3.81 mm pitch, 17-pin, screw fastened type (2 items)*1

FC6A Series expansion interface module power supply
removable terminal block

FC6A-PMSB03PN02

5.08 mm pitch, 3-pin, push-in type (2 items)

FC6A Series CPU module battery holder

FC6A-BH1PN02

Battery holder (2 items)

FC6A Series Plus CPU module inputs removable terminal block

FC6A Series Plus CPU module power supply removable terminal
block

FC6A Series expansion module removable terminal block

FC6A Series expansion interface module removable terminalblock*1 Appropriate screw fastened type removable termal blocks are contained in the purchased modules.

A-6

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
Manuals
Type

Specifications

FC6A Series MICROSmart User’s Manual

Japanese, English, Chinese

Ladder Programming Manual

Japanese, English, Chinese

FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual

Japanese, English, Chinese

FC6A Series MICROSmart PID Module User’s Manual

Japanese, English, Chinese

Application Software
Product Name

Type No.

Automation Organizer

Specifications
Package software containing the programming software"WindLDR"

SW1A-W1C

Option Cables (Sold Separately)
Product Name

Type No.

Shielded flat I/O cable (0.5 m [1.64 feet])

FC9Z-H050A20

Shielded flat I/O cable (1 m [3.28 feet])

FC9Z-H100A20

Shielded flat I/O cable (2 m [6.56 feet])

FC9Z-H200A20

Shielded flat I/O cable (3 m [9.84 feet])

FC9Z-H300A20

Non-shielded flat I/O cable (0.5 m [1.64 feet])

FC9Z-H050B20

Non-shielded flat I/O cable (1 m [3.28 feet])

FC9Z-H100B20

Non-shielded flat I/O cable (2 m [6.56 feet])

FC9Z-H200B20

Non-shielded flat I/O cable (3 m [9.84 feet])

FC9Z-H300B20

External device/O/I communication cable

FC6A-KC1C

O/I communication cable

FC6A-KC2C□

Function
Shielded, 20-pin straight cable for use with I/O modules
This can be used with IDEC I/O terminals.
The type numbers of the supported I/O terminals are shown below.
BX1D- 20A,*1 BX1F- 20A,*1 BX7D-BT16A1T(16-point relay output)□□

Non-shielded, 20-pin straight cable for use with I/O modules
This can be used with IDEC I/O terminals.
The type numbers of the supported I/O terminals are shown below.
BX1D- 20A*1, BX1F- 20A*1, BX7D-BT16A1T(16-point relay output)□□

Cable for connecting external devices, IDEC displays (HG4G/3G/2G),
and general-purpose display devices (cable length: 5 m [16.4 feet])
RJ45 connector/loose wires (1 item)

Cable dedicated for connecting IDEC displays (HG4G/3G/2G*2) (cable
length: 5 m [16.4 feet])
RJ45 connector/D-sub 9-pin connector (1 item)*1 The " " in the I/O terminal type numbers indicates the terminal shape.
T: Touch-down terminal block, S: Captive screw terminal block*2 Use the FC6A-KC1C for products other than the HG2G-5FT22TF Series.

Options (Sold Separately)
Product Name
35 mm wide DIN rail (length: 1,000 mm)

Function

Type No.

Comments

Aluminum, used when mounting on DIN rail

BAA1000PN10

10 items

35 mm wide DIN rail (length: 1,000 mm)

Steel, used when mounting on DIN rail

BAP1000PN10

10 items

BracketUsed to fix CPU modules, expansion modules, and HMI
modules on a rail

BNL6PN10

10 items

20-pin connector

20-pin MIL connector for an expansion module

FC4A-PMC20PNO2 2 items

USB maintenance cable
Cable length: 2 m (6.7 feet)

USB cable used to connect the PC and the PLC<Connector> A: mini B

HG9Z-XCM42

1 item

USB-mini B port extension cable(cable length: 1 m [3.28 feet])

USB cable used to extend the USB-mini B port to the panel
surface

HG9Z-XCE21

1 itemUSB cable retention pin

Used to keep the USB cable constantly connected

HG9Z-XU1PN05

5 items

Replacement battery for CPU module

CR2032W backup battery(1 battery is included with the PLC unit.)

HG9Z-XR2

1 item*1*1 Sold in Japan only.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-7

A P P EN DI X
Recommended Products (Sold Separately)
Product Name

A-8

Function

Panasonic: BR2032/CR2032A/CR2032B,
Murata: CR2032X/CR2032W

Backup battery

Ferrule manufactured by Phoenix Contact or Weidmüller (1 cable)

Ferrule used to wire the terminal block

Ferrule manufactured by Phoenix Contact or Weidmüller (2 cables)

Ferrule used to wire the terminal block

Ferrule tool manufactured by Phoenix Contact or Weidmüller

Ferrule crimping tool

Screwdriver

Screwdriver used to wire the terminal block

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

Reference—

3-46

A P P EN DI X
System SoftwareThis section explains how to update the FC6A to the latest system software.

Getting the Latest Version of the System Software
When you install or upgrade to the latest version of Automation Organizer, the latest system software is also available along withthe software.

Checking the Version
You can check the FC6A system software version with the following steps.
1. Connect the computer to the FC6A USB port with the USB maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42).

For details, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor.

WindLDR enters monitor mode.

3. Select Online > PLC > Status.

The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

You can check the FC6A system software version with System Software Version.
Note: FC6A system software downloads can be executed from WindLDR.
For how to download the system software, see "Upgrade FC6A System Software" on page A-10.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-9

A P P EN DI X
Upgrade FC6A System Software
The system software of FC6A can be upgraded using WindLDR. If the system software of your FC6A is old, upgrade the system
software with the following procedure:
1. Connect the computer to the system software downloadable interface of the FC6A.

For details, see the "FC6A Series MICROSmart Communication Manual".

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download > System Software Download.

The System Software Download dialog box appears.
3. Select the PLC type of the CPU module that will perform the download, the target module, and the system software version to

download, and then click Start System Software Download.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

No.
(1)

A-10

Item Name

Description

PLC Type

Select the PLC type of the CPU module.

(2)

Target Module

Select the module for downloading the system software from those shown below.
All modules, CPU module, Digital I/O module*1, Analog I/O module, PID module, HMI module,
Communication module, Expansion interface remote master module, Expansion interface remoteslave module, Bluetooth communication cartridge.
All modules is selected by default.

(3)

VersionSelect the system software version.
If you have selected All modules for Target Module, select from Update all and Custom.
If you have selected a value other than All modules for Target Module, select the version to download to theselected module.

(4)

Revision history

The revision history related to the system software of the CPU module selected in the System Software Version
Selection dialog box is displayed here.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
No.

Item Name

Description
If you select Custom for Version, click this button to display the System Software Version Selection dialog
box, which you can use to specify the module to download the system software to and the system software version.
Select all the check boxes for the modules to download the system software to. Select the system software version
for each module, and then click OK.

(5)

Configure button(6)

Status display

The success or failure of the system software download for each target module is displayed here.
The slot position and the PLC type are both displayed for analog I/O modules and PID modules.

*1 In the following cases, the system software cannot be downloaded to the digital I/O module.
 If the hardware version of the digital I/O module is V110 or earlier
For details on the hardware version, see "Checking the Hardware Version Number" on page 9-2.
 If the digital I/O module is connected after the FC6A-EXM1S or FC6A-EXM1S4
 If the system software version of the FC6A All-in-One CPU module or CAN J1939 All-in-One CPU module is 1.90 or earlier, or if the system
software version of the FC6A Plus CPU module is 1.31 or earlier
Notes:
 If the FC6A is running, it is stopped automatically before the system software download starts.
 Older system software can also be downloaded to the FC6A if required.
 The system software download takes about one minute.

4. A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to start downloading the system software.
5. System software download status is shown by a progress bar. A completion message appears when the system software has

been downloaded successfully. Click OK to close the System Software Download dialog box.

Notes:
 For the FC6A, its backlight will flash while the system software is downloading.
 After the system software has downloaded, the FC6A will be in the STOP state. Use WindLDR operations, FC6A function switch operations, or
HMI module LCD operations to run the FC6A.
 The user program stored in the FC6A before downloading the system software remains and is executed when the FC6A is restarted. A user program
execution error may occur if an older system software is downloaded to the FC6A.
 If the system software download fails, download it again.

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-11

A P P EN DI X
Fonts
This section describes the fonts that can be displayed on the HMI module LCD.

Supported Languages
The HMI module is equipped with fonts for multiple languages as standard. Messages in the language selected with the MSG
instruction can be displayed on the LCD.
The menu can be displayed in English, Chinese, or Japanese, and messages can be displayed in a desired language out of thefollowing languages: German, English, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, French, Cyrillic, Chinese, and Japanese.

Installed Fonts List
Setting nameCharacter code system

Supported languages

Western European

ISO8859-1 (Latin-1)

English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch (Note), French (Note)

Japanese

Shift-JIS

Japanese (level 1)

Chinese

GB2312Chinese (simplified)Cyrillic

ANSI1251

RussianNote: Some of the characters cannot be input.

Character Code Table
Using the Character Code Table

Example: Finding the character code for the character “a” in the table.
Upper 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

Lower 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

The upper 4 bits of the code are hexadecimal 6.
The lower 4 bits of the code are hexadecimal 1.
Therefore, the character code for "a" is as follows.

"a": 6 1
Lower 4 bits
Upper 4 bits
Note: For other fonts and two-byte characters, refer to the table of the relevant code system.

A-12

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI XASCII Character Code Table

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-13

A P P EN DI X
CablesThis section describes the wiring of external device/O/I communication cables and of O/I communication cables.
When using external device/O/I communication cables and O/I communication cables to connect the FC6A to external devices andoperator interfaces, refer to the following wiring diagrams.

External Device/O/I Communication Cable (Type No.: FC6A-KC1C, Cable Length: 5 m [16.4 Feet])
External Device,
IDEC Display (HG4G/3G/2G),
General-purpose Display

FC6A Series MICROSmart(RS232C/RS485)

RJ45 (UL-certified Product with Boots)
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shell

Description
White/Orange
RD
OrangeSD
White/Green
ER
Blue
A
White/Blue
B
Green
DR
White/Brown
NC
Brown
SG
ShieldShielded Cable(8-core, UL-certified Product, CAT 5 or higher)

O/I Communication Cable (Type No.: FC6A-KC2C, Cable Length: 5 m [16.4 Feet])*1

IDEC Display (HG4G/3G/2G )FC6A Series MICROSmart(RS232C)#4-4OUNC (Inch Screw)
D-sub 9-pin Connector
Description
SDRD
CS
4W-RDA/2W-A
4W-RDB/2W-B
RS
4W-SDA
SG
4W-SDB

RJ4 (Connector)
Pin
Description
White/Orange
1RD
Orange2
SD
White/Green
3
ER
Blue
4
A
White/Blue
5
B
Green
6
DR
White/Brown
7
NC
Brown
8
SG
Shell
Shield

Pin
3
2
8
1
6
7
4
5
9
Shielded Cable(8-core, UL-certified Product, CAT 5 or higher)*1 Use the FC6A-KC1C for products other than the HG2G-5FT22TF Series.

A-14

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
Wiring Example

When Connecting the CPU Module via RS485
FC6A-PC3
RS485

External Device/O/I Communication Cables(FC6A-KC1C)

Two-pair Two-core Shielded
Twisted-pair CableA B SG

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shell

A B SG

Terminating
ResistanceTerminating
ResistanceDescription
White/Orange
RD
OrangeSD
White/Green
ER
Blue
A
White/Blue
B
Green
DR
White/Brown
NC
Brown
SG
ShieldCPU Module
Shielded Cable
Serial Port 1(8-core, UL-certified Product, CAT 5 or higher) (RJ45 connector)

FE

FE

Wiring example when connecting CPU modules via RS485
External Device/O/I Communication Cables(FC6A-KC1C)

Shielded Cable(8-core, UL-certified Product,
CAT 5 or higher)

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shell

Description
White/Orange
RD
OrangeSD
White/Green
ER
Blue
A
White/Blue
B
Green
DR
White/Brown
NC
Brown
SG
ShieldCPU Module*1
Serial Port 1(RJ45 connector)

FE

CPU Module*1
Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminating ResistanceTerminating ResistanceTwo-pair Two-core Shielded
Twisted-pair Cable

CPU Module*1*1 The wiring for Serial Port 1 (RJ45
connector) on the CPU module isentirely the same.

Two-pair Two-core Shielded
Twisted-pair Cable

White/Orange
OrangeWhite/GreenBlue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown

FE

Pin
RD
SD
ER
A
B
DR
NC
SG
ShieldDescription
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shell

Two-pair Two-core Shielded
Twisted-pair Cable

External Device/O/I Communication Cables(FC6A-KC1C)

CPU Module*1
Shielded Cable
Serial Port 1(RJ45 connector) (8-core, UL-certified Product, CAT 5 or higher)

We do not recommend connecting the SG line using a shielded cable.
Since the shield of the "FC6A-KC1C external device/O/I connection cable" will be connected to FE (or PE) of the CPU module, one
end of the shield will be grounded when connected to FE (or PE) of the CPU module.
When communication quality is unstable, add terminating resistance matched to the characteristic impedance to both ends of thecable. Use resistance with a rating of 1/2 W or higher.
FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-15

A P P EN DI X
HMI Screen Transition Diagram
This section describes the transitions between the screens displayed on the HMI module LCD.

System menu overall transition diagram
Message withthe highest
priority

Stopped+2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

I 0000 ,I 0010 ,I 0020 ,I 0030 ,External Memory

Configurations

Device Monitor

Status Monitor

Error Status

01234567
01234567
01234567
012345Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight
I 0000 , 01234567
I 0010 , 01234567
I 0020 , 01234567
I 0030 , 012345
System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
StoppedGeneral Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error

Running
2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

Stopping the user program

A-16

…

SD Card

Running the user program

Do you want tostop PLC?
No
Yes

…

T/C Preset Values

Switching run/stop

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status

2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

Edit Program

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations+

Running

Stopped2015/DEC/01/TUE
13:30:40

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

R
R
R
R

000 , 01234567
010 , 01234567
020 , 01234567
030 , 01234567

A P P EN DI X
Writing/Clearing TP (Timer Preset Values) and CP (Counter Preset Values) in the User Program
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

T/C Preset Values

T/C Change Status:
T/C is changed
Clear
Comfirm

Stopping Access to the SD Memory Card/Formatting the SD Memory Card
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

SD Card

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram

Do you want to stop
SD card access?
No
Yes

Stop Access
FormatRecipeProgram

Do you want toformat SD card?
No
Yes

Communications
Message Settings

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings

Configuring the Slave Number
is displayed only when the Plus CPU module is connected.
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Port 1:0Port 2:
0

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-17

A P P EN DI X
Configuring the Network Settings
is displayed only when the Plus CPU module is connected.
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Communications
Message Settings

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

CPU Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

CPU Network 2 Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

CPU Network 2 Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 5

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 10

HMI Network Settings
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 10

Subnet Mask:
255.255.255. 0
Default Gateway:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Preferred DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0
Alternate DNS Server:
0. 0. 0. 0

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings

Slave Number
CPU Network Settings
CPU Network 2 Settings
HMI Network Settings

Modifying the Scroll Speed/Configuring the Scroll Unit
Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

A-18

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Communications
Message Settings

Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character

Scroll Speed:
500 msScroll Unit:
1-character

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A P P EN DI X
Configuring the Blinking Speed
Scroll Settings
Blink Settings

Communications
Message Settings

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Blink Speed:
500 msSetting the Calender/ClockRun
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

2015/12/01
13: 30: 40

Changing the Menu Language
Function
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Menu Languages:
Japanese

Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time
Backlight ON time:00010 sFunction
Clock
Menu Languages
Backlight

Run
Edit Program
External Memory
Configurations

Monitoring Device Values
Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

I
I
I
I

010 ,
020 ,
030 ,
040 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

Q
Q
Q
Q

000 ,
010 ,
020 ,
030 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

T 0000 ,T 0010 ,T 0020 ,T 0030 ,

CC
CC
CC
CC

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

C
C
C
C

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

TP
TP
TP
TP

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

TC
TC
TC
TC

CP
CP
CP
CP

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

0
0
0
0

D
D
D
D

00000:
00001:
00002:
00003:

0
0
0
0

D
D
D
D

08000:
08001:
08002:
08003:00
0
0

D 10000: 01234567
D 10001: 01234567
D 10002: 01234567
D 10003: 01234567

R 0000 ,R 0010 ,R 0020 ,R 0030 ,01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

M 10000 ,M 10010 ,M 10020 ,M 10030 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

M 08000 ,M 08010 ,M 08020 ,M 08030 ,

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

0000:
0001:
0002:
0003:

01234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

M 00000 ,M 00010 ,M 00020 ,M 00030 ,000001234567
01234567
01234567
01234567

A-19

A P P EN DI X
Monitoring the FC6A Status
is displayed only when the Plus CPU module is connected.
System Version:
1.00
Run/Stop Status:
Running

Stop
External Memory
Device Monitor
Status Monitor

Scan Time:
Current:
2 ms
Maximum:
4 ms
Minimum:
2 ms

Protection Status:
Read Program:
Prohibited

When the FC6A Series MICROSmart is stopped: Stopped
CPU Network Settings 3

CPU Network Settings 2

Default Gateway:
192.168. 1. 3

Subnet Mask:
255.255.254.

0CPU Network Settings 1
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 1. 6

Protection Status:
Write Program:
Password Protected

CPU Network Settings 4

CPU Network Settings 5

CPU Network Settings 6

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 1.200

Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 1.201

MAC Address:
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

CPU Network Settings 7
Setting: Fixed
IP Address:
192.168. 2. 6

CPU Network Settings 11

CPU Network Settings 10

CPU Network Settings 9

CPU Network Settings 8

Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 2.201

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 2.200

Default Gateway:
192.168. 2. 3

Subnet Mask
255.255.254.

CPU Network Settings 12

HMI Network Settings 1
Setting: Fixed
IP Address
192.168. 11. 6

HMI Network Settings 2

HMI Network Settings 3

Subnet Mask
255.255.254.

0Default Gateway:
192.168. 11. 3

HMI Network Settings 6

HMI Network Settings 5

HMI Network Settings 4

MAC Address:
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Alternate DNS Server:
192.168. 1.201

Preferred DNS Server:
192.168. 11.200

MAC Address:
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

Checking/clearing error information
Device Monitor
Program Monitor
Status Monitor
Error Status
Error!
PLC is stopped.
Press OK button for
more details.

General Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error(Press and hold)General Error: 3
Execution Error: 0
Clear Error

General Error: 3Power failure
Watchdog Timer

Error!
PLC is running.
Press OK button for
more details.

A-20

FC6A S ER I ES M I CROS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

0

A P P EN DI X

FC6A S ER I ES M I CR OS M AR T U SER ’ S M ANUAL

A-21

ABOUT THE WARRANTY OF THE PRODUCTS
1. Warranty Period
The Products are warranted for 3 years from the date of purchase, or from the date of delivery completion.
* Consumable/maintenance parts such as batteries and relays if the operation exceeds 100,000 times are excluded fromthe 3-year warranty.
2. Extent of Warranty
IDEC CORPORATION is responsible for failures or defects of the Products during the above warranty period, either areplacement part will be provided or the defective parts of the Products will be repaired free of charge. If such failure or
defects should occur, please offer them to the distributor, dealer or IDEC CORPORATION with the materials in which the dateof purchase is specified.
* The expenses for installation and construction at the time of repair will not be borne.
3. Indemnification
IDEC CORPORATION will not be liable under this Warranty and be indemnified and held harmless from any and all demands,
suits, expenses, claims, damages and liabilities in the following event that:
1) The Products are used or operated beyond the conditions or environment range as described in catalog, specifications
or instruction; or2) The failure or defects of the Products arise from the cause other than the Products; or3) The Products are improved, modified or altered by the party other than IDEC; or
4) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the usage of the Product in the way that is notintended; or5) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the cause beyond IDEC’s control including, but notlimited to, fire, earthquake, flood, lightning, other natural disasters, and acts of God; or6) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from the relocation, transportation or drop after you
purchase the Products; or7) The failure or defects and damages of the Products arise from improper installation; or
8) Maintenance and inspection are not carried out in accordance with instruction.
* Customers assume their own risk in programming products, Company will not be held liable for damages as a result of
improper programming.
IDEC CORPORATION DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARUSE OR PURPOSE, AS WELL AS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGESRELATING TO THE PRODUCTS
4. Extent of Service
The price of the Products will not include the fee for any service such as sending technicians and engineers, IDECCORPORATION will charge you the fee for the following:1) Instruction for installment and visiting for test operation, including, but not limited to creating application softwareand operation tests; and
2) Maintenance and inspection, arrangement and repair; and
3) Technical assistance and technical education; and
4) Product test and inspection based on you request.

Specifications and other descriptions in this manual are subject to change without notice.
Information in this manual is current as of July, 2024.
2021 IDEC Corporation, All Rights Reserved.
‴‟‣ ․․‚․․‛